💾 Archived View for hashnix.club › users › troler › DeCaelo.gmi captured on 2024-08-25 at 00:19:52. Gemini links have been rewritten to link to archived content
⬅️ Previous capture (2023-09-08)
-=-=-=-=-=-=-
In libros Aristotelis De caelo et mundo expositio | THE HEAVENS
translated by Fabian R.Larcher and Pierre H. Conway
Introduction by Thomas Aquinas
The things it pertains to natural science to consider
The perfection of the universe both as body and as containing all
Preliminary notions for showing the parts perfecting the universe
Five reasons why, besides the elements, there must be another simple body
Difference of the body moved circularly as to light and heavy
The fifth body not subject to other motions
The heavenly body is not subject to growth and decrease, or to alteration
Only five simple bodies required. No motion contrary to circular
The need for treating of the infinity of the universe
The second and third reasons proving the circularly moved body not infinite
Three additional reasons why the body moving circularly cannot be infinite.
Various reasons why a body moving in a straight line is not infinite
A natural and demonstrative argument showing no natural body can be infinite
No sensible body is infinite—from action and passion, which follow upon motion
Logical reasons why no body is infinite
Two arguments for one universe, taken from lower bodies
A third argument from lower bodies. Natural bodies have determinate places
Exclusion of the opinion that natural bodies are not moved naturally to determined places. Unity of the world from higher bodies
Solution of the argument seeming to justify several worlds
The universe shown to consist of every natural and sensible body as its matter
Outside the heaven there is no place, time etc., consequent upon sensible bodies
Whether the universe is infinite by eternal duration
A Platonic evasion rejected. Two remaining opinions disproved
Various meanings of "generable" and "ungenerable," "corruptible" and "incorruptible"
How something is said to be "possible" and "impossible"
Everything eternal is indestructible and ungenerated
Nothing eternal generated and corrupted, and conversely
Generated and corruptible, ungenerated and incorruptible, follow on each other
Refutation of corruptible ungenerated and incorruptible generated. Argument from natural science
The heaven is eternal and its motion endless and without labor. Contrary opinions excluded
Diversity of parts of the heaven as to position. Opinion of Pythagoras
How the differences of position befit the parts of the heaven according to the Philosopher's opinion
The reason why there are in the heaven several spheres moved with a circular motion
The spherical shape of the heaven shown from the fact that it is the first of figures
The heaven must be spherical, because this shape is most fitting
Why the circular motion of the heaven is in one direction rather than another
The regularity, or uniform velocity, of the heaven's motion shown by two arguments
Two other arguments proving no irregularity in the motion of the heaven
On the nature of the stars
Proof that the stars move, not of themselves, but as carried by the motion of the spheres, from a comparison with their circles
That the stars do not move themselves concluded from the motions proper to the spherical shape
From their shape the stars shown not to move themselves. No sense power in the heavenly bodies
Indirect and direct proof that heavenly bodies do not produce sounds
Swiftness and slowness in the motion of the planets is proportionate to their distance from the first sphere and the earth
By reason, and by what sensibly appears, the stars are proved to be spherical in shape
Two difficulties proposed in connection with what has been determined about the stars
The first difficulty, concerning the number of motions of the stars, is solved. The number shown to agree with modern astronomers
The second difficulty of Lecture 17 is resolved
Opinions of the philosophers as to the site of the earth. Pythagorean theory of fire in the center is rejected
Different opinions of the motion, rest, and shape of the earth
The problem about the earth's rest
The cause of the earth's rest is not supporting air
Earth's rest not from gyration of the heaven
Earth's rest not explained by supposing that all directions being alike to earth, nothing induces it to be moved in one direction rather than another
Proof of the earth's rest in the middle
Proof of the earth's spherical shape, from motion
Proofs of the earth's sphericity from the angle of motion of its parts, and from astronomy
What has gone before and what remains to be treated
Opinions of the ancients on the generation of things
Bodies not generated from surfaces, proved mathematically and naturally
Other natural arguments against Plato's opinion. Pythagorean opinion refuted
Natural motion in natural bodies. Leucippus & Democritus
Refutation of Plato's opinion of disordered motion before the world
Every body moving naturally in a straight line has gravity or lightness. Natural and violent motions
Everything not generated. Elements and their existence
Prooemium
Subject matter of this book
and its relation to the subject matter of natural science in general
Sicut philosophus dicit in I Physic., tunc opinamur cognoscere unumquodque, cum causas cognoscimus primas, et principia prima, et usque ad elementa. Ex quo manifeste philosophus ostendit in scientiis esse processum ordinatum, prout proceditur a primis causis et principiis usque ad proximas causas, quae sunt elementa constituentia essentiam rei. Et hoc est rationabile: nam processus scientiarum est opus rationis, cuius proprium est ordinare; unde in omni opere rationis ordo aliquis invenitur, secundum quem proceditur ab uno in aliud. Et hoc patet tam in ratione practica, cuius consideratio est circa ea quae nos facimus, quam in ratione speculativa, cuius consideratio est circa ea quae sunt aliunde facta.
Physics I, "We judge that we know a thing when we know the first causes and the first. principles down to the elements." Plainly from this the Philosopher shows that in sciences there is an orderly process, a procedure from first causes and principles to the proximate causes, which are the elements constituting the essence of a thing. And this is reasonable: For the method pursued in sciences is a work of reason, whose prerogative it is to establish order; wherefore, in every work of reason is found some order according to which one goes from one thing to another. And this shows up not only in the practical reason, which considers things that we make, but in the speculative reason as well, which considers things made by some other source.
2. The process from prior to subsequent is found in the act of the practical reason with respect to a fourfold order: first, according to the order of apprehension, inasmuch as an artisan first apprehends the form of a house absolutely and then realizes it in matter; secondly, according to the order of intention, inasmuch as an artisan intends to complete the house and for that purpose does whatever he does to the parts of the house; thirdly, according to the order of combining, inasmuch as he first trims the stones and then joins them into one wall; fourthly, according to the order of supporting the edifice, inasmuch as the artisan first lays the foundation, upon which the other parts of the house are supported.
In like manner, a fourfold order is found in the consideration of speculative reason. First, because there is a process from the general to the less general.. And this order corresponds to the first order which we have called "the order of apprehension," for universals are considered according to an absolute form, but particulars by applying form to matter, as the Philosopher in says, that the word "heaven" signifies a form, and "this heaven" signifies a form in matter.
The second order is that according to which one goes from the whole to the parts. And this corresponds to "the order of intention," inasmuch as, namely, the whole is considered prior to the parts, not just any parts but parts which are according to matter and which are of the individual — as in the case of a semi-circle, in the definition of which "circle" is used (for it is "half a circle") and of an acute angle, in the definition of which "right angle" is used (for an acute angle is an angle "less than a right angle"). To be divided in that manner is incidental to a circle and to a right angle; hence, neither is a part of the species of a circle or right angle. For parts of this sort [i.e. parts of the species] are prior in consideration to the whole and are used in the definition of the whole, as are flesh and bones in the definition of man, as is said in VII.
The third order is that according to which one goes from the simple to the combined, inasmuch as composites are known in terms of the simple, as through their principles. And this order is compared to the third order, which is the "order of combining." But the fourth order is the one that calls for the principal parts to be considered first, as are the heart and liver before the arteries and blood. And this corresponds in the practical order to that order according to which the foundation is laid first.
This fourfold order is also considered in the procedure of natural science. For, first of all, things common to nature are determined in the book of the , in which mobile being is treated insofar as it is mobile. Hence what remains in the other books of natural science is to apply these common things to their proper subjects. The subject of motion, however, is a magnitude and body, because nothing is moved except what is quantified.
Now it is in bodies that the three other orders are considered: in one way, insofar as the entire corporeal universe is prior in consideration to its parts; in another way, insofar as simple bodies are considered before the mixed; thirdly, insofar as, among the simple bodies, the first must be considered first, i.e., the heavenly body, through which all the others are sustained. And these three are treated in this book, which the Greeks entitle . For in this book are treated certain things that pertain to the entire universe, as is plain in Book I; and things that pertain to the heavenly body, as is plain in Book II; and things that pertain to the simple bodies, as is plain in Books III-IV. Consequently, it is with good reason that this book is first in order after the book of the . For this reason the first topic of discussion in the very beginning of this book is body, to which must be applied all that was set forth about motion in the .
Because diverse things are treated in this book, there was among the early expositors of Aristotle a question about the subject of this book. For Alexander believed that the subject principally treated herein is the universe. Hence, since "the heavens" is subject to a threefold meaning — for sometimes it refers to the outermost sphere, sometimes to the whole body moved circularly, and sometimes to the entire universe — he asserts that this book is entitled as though meaning or . In asserting this he assumes that the Philosopher is here determining certain matters pertaining to the entire universe, for example, that it is finite, that it is unique, and things of this sort.
On the other hand, it seems to some that the main subject handled in this book is the heavenly body which is moved circularly, for which reason it is entitled . Other bodies, however, are discussed therein consequentially, insofar as they are contained by the heavens and influenced by them, as Iamblichus said; or only incidentally, insofar as a knowledge of other bodies is assumed in order to explain what is being said of the heavens, as Syrianus says. But this does not seem probable, for after the Philosopher has finished his discussion of the heavens in Book II, he treats in Books III and IV of the other simple bodies as though they were his main subject. Now the Philosopher is not wont to assign a principal part in some science to things that are brought up only incidentally.
Therefore it seemed to others, as Simplicius said, that the intention of Aristotle in this book is to determine about simple bodies inasmuch as they share in the common notion of simple body; and because among simple bodies. The chief is the heavens, on which the others depend, the entire book gets its name from the heavens. And, so he says, it makes no difference that in this book things pertaining to the whole universe are considered, for the conditions in question belong to the universe insofar as they belong to the heavenly body, i.e., to be finite and eternal, and so on. But if the principal intention of the Philosopher were to determine about the universe or the world, then he would have had to extend his consideration to all the parts of the world, even down to plants and animals, as Plato does in the Timaeus.
But the same argument could be used against Simplicius, because if Aristotle in this book intended to treat principally of the simple bodies, then in this book he would have had to mention everything that pertains to the simple bodies, whereas he discusses only what pertains to their lightness and heaviness, while he treats the other aspects in the book, .
5. Accordingly, the opinion of Alexander appears more reasonable, i.e., that the subject of this book is the universe itself, which is called "the heavens" or "the world," and that determination is made concerning simple bodies in this book accordingly as they are parts of the universe. Now, the corporeal universe is composed of its parts according to an order of position [situs]; consequently this book determines only concerning those parts of the universe that primarily and per se have position in the universe, namely, the simple bodies. That is why the four elements are not dealt with in this book from the aspect of their being hot or cold or something of that sort, but only with respect to their heaviness and lightness, from which their position in the universe is determined. Other parts of the universe, such as stones, plants and animals, have a determined place [situs] in the universe not according to what they are in themselves but according to the simple bodies; consequently, they are not treated in this book. And this agrees with what is usually said among the Latins, that this book discusses body that is mobile with respect to position or place, such motion being common to all the parts of the universe.
The things it pertains to natural science to consider.
(268a.) Ἡ περὶ φύσεως ἐπιστήμη σχεδὸν ἡ πλείστη φαίνεται περί τε σώματα καὶ μεγέθη καὶ τὰ τούτων οὖσα πάθη καὶ τὰς κινήσεις, ἔτι δὲ περὶ τὰς ἀρχάς, ὅσαι τῆς τοιαύτης οὐσίας εἰσίν τῶν γὰρ φύσει συνεστώτων τὰ μέν ἐστι σώματα καὶ μεγέθη, τὰ δ' ἔχει σῶμα καὶ μέγεθος, τὰ δ' ἀρχαὶ τῶν ἐχόντων εἰσίν.
6. In this first book Aristotle begins for the first time to apply to bodies the things that were said about motion in a general way in the book of the . For that reason he first shows by way of introduction that it pertains to natural science to determine about bodies and magnitudes; Secondly, he begins to carry out his proposal (Lecture 2).
With respect to the first he presents this argument: Natural things are bodies and magnitudes and whatever pertains to these. But natural science is about natural things. Therefore, natural science consists in treating of bodies and magnitudes.
7. First [1] therefore, he posits the conclusion, saying that the science which treats of nature seems to be "for the most part" concerned with bodies, and "magnitudes," i.e., lines and surfaces. However, the natural philosopher considers these in a different way from the geometer. For the former treats of bodies insofar as they are mobile, and of surfaces and lines insofar as they are the boundaries of mobile bodies; the geometer, on the other hand, considers them insofar as they are measurable quantities. And because a science should consider not only subjects but also their passions, as is said in I, he therefore adds that natural science is concerned with the passions and motions of the aforesaid — by "passions" meaning alterations and other consequent motions, with respect to which something is altered in the substance of a thing; and he adds, "and motions," as though going from the particular to the general. Or perhaps by "motions" he specifically understands local motions, which are the more perfect in the genera of motions. Or by "passions" is meant the properties, and by "motions" the operations of natural things, which do not occur without motion. And because, in every science, principles must be considered, he adds that natural science is concerned with any and all the principles of the afore-mentioned substance, namely, mobile corporeal substance. By this we are given to understand that it pertains to natural science primarily to consider body insofar as it is in the genus of substance, for it is in this respect that it is the subject of motion; whereas it pertains to the geometer to consider it insofar as it is in the genus of quantity, for thus it is measured.
Since the minor premise is plain, namely, that natural science is concerned with natural things, he adds the major, saying that the reason why natural science is concerned with the aforementioned is that among things which are according to nature, some are bodies and magnitudes, e.g. stones and other inanimate things; and some have body and magnitude, as do plants and animals, whose principal part is the soul (hence they are what they are more with respect to soul than with respect to body); finally, some things are principles of things having body and magnitude — for example, the soul, and universally form, and matter.
From this is clear why he said that the science of nature is "for the most part" concerned with bodies and magnitudes: for one part of this science is concerned with things having body and magnitude; it is also concerned with the principles of these; it is further concerned with some things which do not exist in nature but which some have attributed to bodies and magnitudes, namely, the void and the infinite.
1-2
The perfection of the universe both as body and as containing all.
Συνεχὲς μὲν οὖν ἐστι τὸ διαιρετὸν εἰς ἀεὶ διαιρετά,
σῶμα δὲ τὸ πάντῃ διαιρετόν.
Μεγέθους δὲ τὸ μὲν ἐφ' ἓν γραμμή, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ δύο ἐπίπεδον, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ τρία σῶμα
καὶ παρὰ ταῦτα οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλο μέγεθος διὰ τὸ τὰ τρία πάντα εἶναι καὶ τὸ τρὶς πάντῃ.
Καθάπερ γάρ φασι καὶ οἱ Πυθαγόρειοι, τὸ πᾶν καὶ τὰ πάντα τοῖς τρισὶν ὥρισται τελευτὴ γὰρ καὶ μέσον καὶ ἀρχὴ τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἔχει τὸν τοῦ παντός, ταῦτα δὲ τὸν τῆς τριάδος.
Διὸ παρὰ τῆς φύσεως εἰληφότες ὥσπερ νόμους ἐκείνης, καὶ πρὸς τὰς ἁγιστείας χρώμεθα τῶν θεῶν τῷ ἀριθμῷ τούτῳ.
Ἀποδίδομεν δὲ καὶ τὰς προσηγορίας τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον τὰ γὰρ δύο ἄμφω μὲν λέγομεν καὶ τοὺς δύο ἀμφοτέρους, πάντας δ' οὐ λέγομεν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τῶν τριῶν ταύτην τὴν κατηγορίαν κατάφαμεν πρῶτον. Ταῦτα δ', ὥσπερ εἴρηται, διὰ τὸ τὴν φύσιν αὐτὴν οὕτως ἐπάγειν ἀκολουθοῦμεν.
Ὥστ' ἐπεὶ τὰ πάντα καὶ τὸ πᾶνκαὶ τὸ τέλειον οὐ κατὰ τὴν ἰδέαν διαφέρουσιν ἀλλήλων, ἀλλ' εἴπερ, ἐν τῇ ὕλῃ καὶ ἐφ' ὧν λέγονται, τὸ σῶμα μόνον ἂν εἴη τῶν μεγεθῶν τέλειον μόνον γὰρ ὥρισται τοῖς τρισίν, τοῦτο δ' ἐστὶ πᾶν. Τριχῇ δὲ ὂν διαιρετὸν πάντῃ διαιρετόν ἐστιν τῶν δ' ἄλλων τὸ μὲν ἐφ' ἓν τὸ δ' ἐπὶ δύο ὡς γὰρ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τετυχήκασιν, οὕτω καὶ τῆς διαιρέσεωςκαὶ τοῦ συνεχοῦς τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἐφ' ἓν συνεχές, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ δύο, τὸ δὲ πάντῃ τοιοῦτον.
Ὅσα μὲν οὖν διαιρετὰ τῶν μεγεθῶν, καὶ συνεχῆ ταῦτα εἰ δὲ καὶ τὰ συνεχῆ πάντα διαιρετά, οὔπω δῆλον ἐκ τῶν νῦν. Ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο μὲν δῆλον, ὡς οὐκ (268b.) ἔστιν εἰς ἄλλο γένος μετάβασις, ὥσπερ ἐκ μήκους εἰς ἐπιφάνειαν, εἰς δὲ σῶμα ἐξ ἐπιφανείας οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἔτι τὸ τοιοῦτον τέλειον εἴη μέγεθος ἀνάγκη γὰρ γίγνεσθαι τὴν ἔκβασιν κατὰ τὴν ἔλλειψιν, οὐχ οἷόν τε δὲ τὸ τέλειον ἐλλείπειν πάντῃ γάρ ἐστιν.
Τῶν μὲν οὖν ἐν μορίου εἴδει σωμάτων κατὰ τὸν λόγον ἕκαστον τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν πάσας γὰρ ἔχει τὰς διαστάσεις ἀλλ' ὥρισται πρὸς τὸ πλησίον ἁφῇ διὸ τρόπον τινὰ πολλὰ τῶν σωμάτων ἕκαστόν ἐστιν.
Τὸ δὲ πᾶν οὗ ταῦτα μόρια, τέλειον ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι καὶ καθάπερ τοὔνομα ημαίνει πάντῃ, καὶ μὴ τῇ μὲν τῇ δὲ μή.
After showing by way of introduction that bodies and magnitudes are to be studied in natural science, the Philosopher here begins to carry out his main resolve. And because, as was said above, Aristotle in this book is mainly concerned with determining about the corporeal universe and its principal parts which are the simple bodies, among which the most important is the heavenly body, the book therefore is divided into three parts:
in prima determinat de universo corporeo;
in secunda determinat de corpore caelesti, et hoc in secundo libro, ibi: quod quidem igitur neque factum est etc.;
in tertia parte determinat de aliis simplicibus corporibus, scilicet de gravi et levi, in tertio libro, ibi: de primo quidem igitur caelo et cetera.
In the first he determines concerning the corporeal universe;
In the second concerning the heavenly body, in Book II;
In the third about other simple bodies, i.e., heavy and light, in Book III.
With respect to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit perfectionem universi;
secundo determinat quasdam conditiones seu proprietates ipsius, ibi: sed quoniam manifestum de his et cetera.
First he shows the perfection of the universe;
Secondly, he determines certain of its conditions or properties (L. 13. 9).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit perfectionem universi;
secundo ostendit ex quibus partibus eius perfectio integretur, ibi: de totius quidem igitur natura et cetera.
First he shows the perfection of the universe;
Secondly, he explains of what parts it is composed (L. 13).
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit perfectionem universi quam habet secundum communem rationem sui generis, inquantum scilicet est corpus;
secundo probat perfectionem propriam ipsius, ibi: partialium quidem igitur corporum et cetera.
First he shows the perfection which the universe has in virtue of the common notion of its genus, i.e., inasmuch as it is a body, at 9.
Secondly, he proves the perfection proper to it, at 18.
About the first he does three things:
primo manifestat definitionem corporis, qua utitur ad propositum ostendendum;
secundo probat propositum, ibi: itaque quoniam omne et totum etc.;
tertio ostendit quid ex praemissis possit esse manifestum, ibi: quaecumque quidem igitur et cetera.
First he explains the definition of body, to be used in proving his proposition, at 10.
Secondly, he proves the proposition, at 15;
Thirdly, he shows what could be clear from the foregoing, at 16.
As to the first he does two things:
primo definit continuum, quod est genus corporis;
secundo manifestat corporis definitionem, ibi: corpus autem et cetera.
First he defines "continuum," which is the genus of body;
Secondly, he clarifies the definition of body, at 10.
With regard to the first [2], we must consider that the continuum is found defined in two ways by the Philosopher. In one way with a formal definition, where it is said in the Predicaments (c.4) that the continuum is "that whose parts are joined at one common term"; for the unity of a continuum is, as it were, its form. In another way, with a material definition taken from the parts, which have the aspect of matter, as is said in II — and it is thus that the continuum is defined here, namely, as "what is divisible into parts always divisible." For no part of a continuum can be indivisible, because no continuum is composed of indivisibles, as is proved in VI. And it is fitting that this latter definition be used here, and the other one in the Predicaments, because the consideration of natural science is concerned with matter, while that of logic is concerned with notions and species.
10. Then at [3] he defines "body."
Et primo proponit definitionem, dicens quod corpus est continuum quod est divisibile omniquaque, idest ad omnem partem, vel secundum omnem dimensionem.
Secundo ibi: magnitudinis autem etc., probat propositam definitionem tali ratione.
First he proposes the definition, saying that body is "a continuum which is divisible in every way," i.e., at every part or according to every dimension.
Secondly, at [4] he proves the proposed definition with this argument:
Body is divided according to three dimensions. But what is divided according to three dimensions is divided according to all. Therefore, body is divisible according to all the dimensions.
First, therefore, he explains the minor proposition as though by division. For among magnitudes there is one which is divided with respect to one dimension, and this is called "line"; another is divided with respect to two dimensions, and this is called "plane," i.e., a surface; still another is divided according to three dimensions, and since such a magnitude is neither line nor surface, it follows that it is body.
The major proposition he gives at [5]. First he mentions it and says that, besides these magnitudes or dimensions, there is no other magnitude or dimension, on the ground that "three" has the property of being all, because it implies a certain totality, and because whatever is thrice seems to be "in all ways" and "entirely," i.e., according to every mode.
11. Secondly, at [6] he proves what he had said in three ways.
First, according to the teaching of Pythagoras who said that what is called "whole" and "all" is determined by the number 3. For the beginning and the middle and the "consummation," i.e., the end, have a number which befits what is "whole" and "all" — for in things divisible, the first part is not enough to complete the whole, which is completed by the ultimate that is reached by passing from the beginning through the middle. But these three, namely, beginning, middle and end, have 3 as their number. Consequently, it is clear that the number 3 belongs to the "all" and "whole."
12. Secondly, at [7] he proves the same by means of what is observed in divine worship. For we use this number 3 "in the worship of the gods" (whom, namely, the gentiles worshipped), i.e., in sacrifices and praises for them, as though we should receive from nature its laws and rules: just as nature completes all things with the number 3, so those who established the divine worship have, in their desire to attribute to God everything perfect, attributed to Him the number 3.
13. Thirdly, he proves at [8] the same by appealing to the general way we speak. And he says that we even assign names to things according to the aforementioned method, in which perfection agrees with the number 3. For when there are two things, we say "both," — thus we speak of two men as "both" — but we do not say "all," which we use for the first time in the case of three. And we all in general use this way of speaking, because nature so inclines us. For whatever is peculiar to individuals in their way of speaking seems to arise from the particular conceptions of each, but what is generally observed among all would seem to arise from natural inclination.
14. Now, it should be noted that nowhere else does Aristotle either use the arguments of Pythagoras to explain a proposition, or from the properties of numbers conclude anything about things. And perhaps he does so here on account of the affinity of numbers to magnitudes, which he is now considering.
Be that as it may, the proof here given does not seem valid, for it does not seem, if 3 is the number corresponding to "whole" and "all" that it follows there are three dimensions. Otherwise, it would follow according to the same reasoning that there would be only three elements or only three fingers on the hand.
But it should be known that, as Simplicius says in his Commentary 13, Aristotle is not here proceeding demonstratively but according to probability, and this is sufficient after previous demonstrations or ones supposed from another science. Now, it is plain that the task of deciding about the dimensions of bodies as such pertains to mathematics; and whatever the natural philosopher considers with dimensions, he takes from mathematics. Therefore, to prove demonstratively that there are just three dimensions pertains to mathematics — thus Ptolemy proves it by showing that it is impossible for more than three perpendicular lines to meet at the same point, while each dimension is measured according to a perpendicular line. Supposing such a demonstration from mathematics, Aristotle here uses testimony and signs, just as he customarily does after his own demonstrations.
15. Then at [9] he goes on to manifest the main proposition from what has been shown. And he says that these three, namely, "all," "whole," and "perfect," do not differ from one another according to species, i.e., according to their formal notion, because all imply a certain completeness; but if they do differ in any way, it is in matter and subject, insofar as they are said of diverse things. For we use "all" in discrete things, as we say "all men"; we use it also with respect to continua which are easily divided, as we say "all water" and "all air." "Whole," however, is used both with these and with all continua, as we say "the whole people" and "the whole world." But "perfect" is used with respect to these and forms: for we say "perfect whiteness" and "perfect virtue." Therefore, because "all" and "perfect" are the same, the consequence is that among magnitudes the perfect one is body, because only a body is determined by three dimensions, and this carries with it the notion of "all," as has been shown above, for since it is divisible in three ways, it follows that it is divisible in every way, i.e., according to every dimension. But among other magnitudes, there is one divisible according to two dimensions, namely, a surface; and another according to one, namely, a line. "Now according to the number that it has," i.e., the number of dimensions that a magnitude has, so is it divisible and continuous. Thus one magnitude is continuous in one way, namely, a line; another in two ways, namely, a surface; but a body is continuous in every way. Hence it is plain that body is a perfect magnitude, as possessing all ways of being continuous.
16. Then at [10] he shows what is or is not plain from the foregoing. And he mentions three things. The first of these is plain in itself, namely, that any magnitude that is divisible is continuous; for if it were not continuous, it would not be a magnitude but a number. The second is the converse of this, namely, that every continuum is divisible, as was indicated in the definition. And this is plain from what was proved in VI, as was said above. But it is not plain from what was just said, however, because here he supposes, but does not prove, that a continuum is divisible. The third thing is plain from the foregoing, namely, that unlike the passing from length to surface and from surface to body, there is no passing from body to another kind of magnitude. And he uses a way of speaking employed by geometers imagining that a point in motion makes a line, and a line in motion a surface, and a surface a body. But from body there is no transition to another magnitude, because such a passing, i.e., to another kind of magnitude is due to a defect in that from which the process beings — that is why natural motion is the act of an imperfect thing. But it is not possible that body, which is perfect magnitude, should be defective in this way, because it is continuous in every way. Consequently, no transition from body to another kind of magnitude is possible.
17. Then at [113 he manifests the proper perfection of the universe based on its difference from particular bodies. First he mentions how particular bodies are related to perfection. And he says that each particular body, according to the common notion of body, is such, i.e., perfect, inasmuch as it has three dimensions; nevertheless, it is terminated at an adjacent body, inasmuch as it touches it. And thus every such body is in a certain way "many," i.e., perfect, in having three dimensions, but imperfect in having another body outside it at which it is terminated. Or it is "many" according to contact with diverse bodies; or it is "many" because there are more than one in one species due to imperfection, whereas such is not the case with the universe.
18. Secondly at [12] he shows how the universe is related to perfection. And he says that "the whole," i.e., the universe, which has particular bodies as its parts, must be perfect in all ways, for the word "universe" signifies perfect "in all ways," and not in one way to the exclusion of some other way, and it both has all the dimensions, and includes in itself all bodies.
Preliminary notions for showing the parts perfecting the universe.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῆς τοῦ παντὸς φύσεως, εἴτ' ἄπειρός ἐστι κατὰ τὸ μέγεθος εἴτε πεπέρανται τὸν σύνολον ὄγκον, ὕστερον ἐπισκεπτέον περὶ δὲ τῶν κατ' εἶδος αὐτοῦ μορίων νῦν λέγωμεν ἀρχὴν ποιησάμενοι τήνδε.
Πάντα γὰρ τὰ φυσικὰ σώματα καὶ μεγέθη καθ' αὑτὰ κινητὰ λέγομεν εἶναι κατὰ τόπον τὴν γὰρ φύσιν κινήσεως ἀρχὴν εἶναί φαμεν αὐτοῖς.
Πᾶσα δὲ κίνησις ὅση κατὰ τόπον, ἣν καλοῦμεν φοράν, ἢ εὐθεῖα ἢ κύκλῳ ἢ ἐκ τούτων μικτή
ἁπλαῖ γὰρ αὗται δύο μόναι. Αἴτιον δ' ὅτι καὶ τὰ μεγέθη ταῦτα ἁπλᾶ μόνον, ἥ τ' εὐθεῖα καὶ ἡ περιφερής.
Κύκλῳ μὲν οὖν ἐστιν ἡ περὶ τὸ μέσον,
εὐθεῖα δ' ἡ ἄνω καὶ κάτω. Λέγω δ' ἄνω μὲν τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου, κάτω δὲ τὴν ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον.
Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη πᾶσαν εἶναι τὴν ἁπλῆν φορὰν τὴν μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου, τὴν δ' ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον, τὴν δὲ περὶ τὸ μέσον.
Καὶ ἔοικεν ἠκολουθηκέναι κατὰ λόγον τοῦτο τοῖς ἐξ ἀρχῆς τό τε γὰρ σῶμα ἀπετελέσθη ἐν τρισὶ καὶ ἡ κίνησις αὐτοῦ.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τῶν σωμάτων τὰ μέν ἐστιν ἁπλᾶ τὰ δὲ σύνθετα ἐκ τούτων (λέγω δ' ἁπλᾶ μὲν ὅσα κινήσεως ἀρχὴν ἔχει κατὰ φύσιν, οἷον πῦρ καὶ γῆν καὶ τὰ τούτων εἴδη καὶ τὰ συγγενῆ τούτοις), ἀνάγκη καὶ τὰς κινήσεις εἶναι τὰς μὲν ἁπλᾶς τὰς δὲ μικτάς πως, (269a.) καὶ τῶν μὲν ἁπλῶν ἁπλᾶς, μικτὰς δὲ τῶν συνθέτων, κινεῖσθαι δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἐπικρατοῦν.
After showing that the universe is perfect by reason both of its corporeity and its universalness, the Philosopher here shows from which parts its perfection is made up.
Et primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo ostendit propositum, ibi: omnia enim physica corpora et cetera.
First he expresses his intention;
Secondly, he proves his proposition, at 20.
With respect to the first [13] it should be considered that, as is said in III, the ancients described the infinite as "that outside of which there is nothing." Now, since he has proved that the universe is perfect on the ground that nothing is outside it, but that it embraces all things, one might think it to be infinite. Accordingly, meeting this opinion, he concludes by adding that later on, in discussing the nature of the whole universe, there will be treated the question of whether it is infinite in magnitude, or finite with respect to its total mass. But meanwhile, before treating of this, something must be said about those parts of it that are "according to the species," namely, those parts in which the integrity of its species consists, and which are the simple bodies. For animals and plants and other such are its secondary parts, and pertain more to the well-being of the universe than to its basic integrity. And we shall begin this consideration from a principle given below.
20. Then at [14] he starts to manifest the proposition stating of which principal parts the perfect species of the universe is made.
Et primo ostendit quod praeter quatuor elementa, necesse est esse aliud corpus simplex;
secundo ostendit quod praeter quinque corpora simplicia non est aliud corpus, ibi: manifestum autem ex dictis et cetera.
First he shows that in addition to the four elements, another simple body must exist;
Secondly, that there is no simple body other than these five (L. 8).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit esse quintum corpus praeter quatuor elementa;
secundo ostendit differentiam eius ad quatuor elementa, ibi: quoniam autem haec quidem supponuntur et cetera.
First he shows that there is a fifth body besides the four elements;
Secondly, how it differs from the four elements (L. 5).
With respect to the first he does two things:
primo praemittit quaedam quae sunt necessaria ad propositum ostendendum;
secundo argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: si quidem igitur est simplex motus et cetera.
First he mentions some preliminary facts needed in proving his proposition;
Secondly, he argues to the proposition (L. 4).
About the first he does two things:
primo praemittit quaedam quae pertinent ad motus;
secundo ponit quaedam quae pertinent ad corpora mobilia, ibi: quoniam autem corporum haec quidem et cetera.
First he premises facts regarding motion;
Secondly, facts pertaining to mobile bodies, at 32.
About the first he does two things:
primo praemittit continuitatem motus localis ad corpora naturalia;
secundo ponit distinctionem motuum localium, ibi: omnis autem et cetera.
First he mentions the connection between local motion and mobile bodies;
Secondly, he distinguishes the kinds of local motion, at 23.
21. He says therefore first [14] that all physical, i.e., natural, bodies are said to be mobile with respect to place according to themselves, i.e., according to their very natures, and the same is true for other natural magnitudes, e.g. planes and lines, insofar as they are the boundaries of natural bodies. And this is true in the sense that bodies are moved per se, but the other magnitudes per accidens, when the bodies are moved. In proof of this he adduces the definition of nature, which is "the principle of motion in those things in which it exists," as is said in II. From this he argues thus: Natural bodies are ones that have a nature, but nature is a principle of motion in things in which it is; therefore, natural bodies have a principle of motion in them. But whatever is moved with any sort of motion is moved locally, but not conversely, as is plain in VII, because local motion is the first of motions. Therefore all natural bodies are naturally moved with a local motion, but not all of them with all of the other motions.
This, however, seems to be false: for the heavens are a natural body, but their motion seems to be due, not to nature but to intellect, as is plain from what has been determined in VIII and XII.
But it must be said that there are two kinds of principles of motion: one is active, i.e., the mover, as the soul is the active principle of the motion of animals; the other is a passive principle of motion, i.e., a principle according to which a body has an aptitude to be thus moved, and such a principle of motion exists in the heavy and the light. For these are not composed of a mover and a moved, because, as the Philosopher says in VIII, "it is plain that none of these — i.e., the heavy and the light — moves itself, but each has, with respect to its motion, a principle not of causing motion or of acting, but of being acted upon." Consequently, it must be said that the active principle of the motion of heavenly bodies is an intellectual stance, but the passive principle is that body's nature according to which it is apt to be moved with such a motion. And the same situation would prevail in us, if the soul did not move our body in any way other than according to its natural inclination, namely, down.
23. Then at [15] he distinguishes local motions.
Et primo distinguit communiter motus locales tam compositos quam simplices;
secundo distinguit motus simplices, ibi: circulatio quidem igitur et cetera.
First he distinguishes in a general way both composite and simple local motions;
Secondly, he distinguishes simple motions, at 27.
With respect to the first he does two things:
First at [15] he proposes what he intends, namely, that every local motion — which is called — is either circular, or straight, or composed of these, as is the oblique motion of things that are borne this way and that.
Secondly, at [16] he proves what he had said, on the ground that there are just two simple motions, the straight and the circular. And the reason for this, he says, is that there exist just two simple magnitudes, namely, the straight and the circular: but local motion is specified according to places, just as every other motion is specified according to its termini.
24. But it seems that Aristotle's proof is not suitable, because, as is said in Post. Anal. I, one does not demonstrate who crosses into another genus. Consequently, it seems unfitting to use the division of magnitudes, which pertain to mathematics, in order to reach a conclusion about motion, which pertains to natural science.
But it must be said that a science which is by addition to some other science uses the latter's principles in demonstrating, as geometry uses the principles of arithmetic — for magnitude adds position to number, and thus a point is said to be "a positioned unit." In like manner, natural body adds sensible matter to mathematical magnitude. Consequently, it is not unfitting for the natural philosopher in his demonstrations to use the principles of mathematics — for the latter is not of a completely different genus but is in a certain way contained under the former.
Likewise, it seems to be false that only two magnitudes are simple, namely, the straight and the circular. For a helix [spiral] seems to be one simple line, because every one of its parts is uniform, and yet a helical line [such as a screw thread] is neither straight nor circular.
But it must be said that a helix, if one considers its origin, is not a simple line, but a combination of straight and circular. For a helix is produced by two imaginary motions, one of which is the motion of a line moving round a cylinder, and the other of a point moving through the line: if two such motions take place in a regular manner at the same time, a helix will be formed by the motion of the point in the moving line.
Likewise, it seems that circular motion is not simple. For the parts of a sphere that is in circular motion are not in uniform motion but the parts near the poles or near the center are moved more slowly, because they traverse a smaller circle in a given time; consequently, the motion of a sphere seems to be composed of fast and slow motions.
But it must be said that a continuum does not have parts in act but only in potency. Now, what is not in act is not in actual motion. Hence the parts of a sphere, since they are a continuous body, are not actually being moved. Hence it does not follow that, in a spherical or circular motion, there is actual diversity, but this is only potentially. This does not conflict with the simplicity about which we are now speaking, for every magnitude possesses potential plurality.
27. Then at [17] he distinguishes simple motions.
Et primo ponit unum, scilicet circularem;
secundo ponit duos rectos, ibi: rectus autem etc.;
tertio concludit numerum ternarium simplicium motuum, ibi: itaque necesse et cetera.
First he mentions one, namely, the circular;
Secondly, he mentions two that are straight, at 29;
Thirdly, he concludes that the number of simple motions is three, at 30.
He says therefore first [17] that circulation, i.e., circular motion is around the middle. And this is to be understood as around the middle of the world: for a wheel which is in motion around its own middle is not in circular motion in the proper sense of the word, but its motion is composed of ups and downs.
But it seems according to this that not all heavenly bodies are in circular motion: for according to Ptolemy, the motion of the planets is in eccentrics and epicycles, which are motions, not around the middle of the world, which is the earth's center, but around certain other centers.
But it must be said that Aristotle was not of this opinion, but thought that all motions of the heavenly bodies are about the center of the earth, as did all the astronomers of his time. But later, Hipparchus and Ptolemy hit upon eccentric and epicyclic motions to save what appears to the senses in heavenly bodies. Hence this is not a demonstration, but a certain assumption. Yet if it be true, all the heavenly bodies are still in motion about the center of the world with respect to the diurnal motion, which is the motion of the supreme sphere that revolves the entire heaven.
29. Then at [18] he distinguishes straight motion into two: namely, one which is up, and one that is down, and describes each in relation to the middle of the world, as he had described circular motion, in order to keep the description uniform. And he says that an upward motion is one from the middle of the world, but a downward motion is one to the middle of the world. The first of these is the motion of light things, the second of heavy things.
30. Then at [19] he concludes to the number of simple motions. First he expresses the conclusion he intended, and says that as to simple latio, i.e., simple local motion, one must be from the middle, and this is the upward motion of light bodies; another must be to the middle, and this is the downward motion of heavy bodies; still another must be about the middle, and such is the circular motion of heavenly bodies.
31. Secondly, at [20] he shows that this conclusion agrees with what has been said above. And he says that what has just been said about the number of simple motions seems to be a consequence of what was said above about the perfection of body, for just as the perfection of body consists in three dimensions, so the simple motions of body are distinguished into three kinds. But he says that this is "according to reason," i.e., according to a certain probability: for three motions are not properly equated to three dimensions.
32. Then at [21] he gives some reflections about mobile bodies. In regard to this it must be known that, as was stated in III, motion is an act of a mobile. Now an act is proportionate to the thing to be perfected. Hence motions ought to be proportionate to mobile bodies. But some bodies are simple, some composite. A simple body is one that has a principle of some natural motion in it, as is plain in the case of fire, which is light simply, and in that of earth, which is heavy simply, and in their species — as a flame is said to be a species of fire, and bitumen a species of earth. He adds the phrase, "and those related to them," on account of the intermediate elements, of which air has a greater affinity to fire, and water to earth. As a consequence, a mixed body must be one that, according to its proper nature, does not have in itself the principle of some simple motion.
And from this he concludes that some motions must be simple and some mixed: whether the mixed motion is not one but has diverse parts, as one composed of elevation and depression, or of a push and a pull, or whether the mixed motion is one, as is plain in oblique motion and motion upon a helical line. Accordingly, the motions of simple bodies must be simple and those of mixed bodies mixed, as seen in the motion of rain, or any body of this kind in which neither heaviness nor lightness totally predominates. And if it sometimes happens that a mixed body is moved with a simple motion, that will be due to the element predominant in it, as iron is moved downwards according to the motion of earth which is predominant in its composition.
Five reasons why, besides the elements, there must be another simple body
Εἴπερ οὖν ἐστιν ἁπλῆ κίνησις, ἁπλῆ δ' ἡ κύκλῳ κίνησις, καὶ τοῦ τε ἁπλοῦ σώματος ἁπλῆ ἡ κίνησις καὶ ἡ ἁπλῆ κίνησις ἁπλοῦ σώματος (καὶ γὰρ ἂν συνθέτου ᾖ, κατὰ τὸ ἐπικρατοῦν ἔσται), ἀναγκαῖον εἶναί τι σῶμα ἁπλοῦν ὃ πέφυκε φέρεσθαι τὴν κύκλῳ κίνησιν κατὰ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν βίᾳ μὲν γὰρ ἐνδέχεται τὴν ἄλλου καὶ ἑτέρου, κατὰ φύσιν δὲ ἀδύνατον, εἴπερ μία ἑκάστου κίνησις ἡ κατὰ φύσιν τῶν ἁπλῶν.
Ἔτι εἰ ἡ παρὰ φύσιν ἐναντία τῇ κατὰ φύσιν καὶ ἓν ἑνὶ ἐναντίον, ἀνάγκη, ἐπεὶ ἁπλῆ ἡ κύκλῳ, εἰ μὴ ἔσται κατὰ φύσιν τοῦ φερομένου σώματος, παρὰ φύσιν αὐτοῦ εἶναι. Εἰ οὖν πῦρ ἢ ἄλλο τι τῶν τοιούτων ἐστὶ τὸ κύκλῳ φερόμενον, ἐναντία ἡ κατὰ φύσιν αὐτοῦ φορὰ ἔσται τῇ κύκλῳ. Ἀλλ' ἓν ἑνὶ ἐναντίον ἡ δ' ἄνω καὶ κάτω ἀλλήλαις ἐναντίαι. Εἰ δ' ἕτερόν τί ἐστι σῶμα τὸ φερόμενον κύκλῳ παρὰ φύσιν, ἔσται τις αὐτοῦ ἄλλη κίνησις κατὰ φύσιν. Ἀλλὰ τοῦτ' ἀδύνατον εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἡ ἄνω, πῦρ ἔσται ἢ ἀήρ, εἰ δ' ἡ κάτω, ὕδωρ ἢ γῆ.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ πρώτην γε ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τὴν τοιαύτην φοράν. Τὸ γὰρ τέλειον πρότερον τῇ φύσει τοῦ ἀτελοῦς, ὁ δὲ κύκλος τῶν τελείων, εὐθεῖα δὲ γραμμὴ οὐδεμία οὔτε γὰρ ἡ ἄπειρος (ἔχοι γὰρ ἂν πέρας καὶ τέλος) οὔτε τῶν πεπερασμένων οὐδεμία (πασῶν γάρ ἐστί τι ἐκτός αὐξῆσαι γὰρ ἐνδέχεται ὁποιανοῦν). Ὥστ' εἴπερ ἡ μὲν προτέρα κίνησις προτέρου τῇ φύσει σώματος, ἡ δὲ κύκλῳ προτέρα τῆς εὐθείας, ἡ δ' ἐπ' εὐθείας τῶν ἁπλῶν σωμάτων ἐστί (τό τε γὰρ πῦρ ἐπ' εὐθείας ἄνω φέρεται καὶ τὰ γεηρὰ κάτω πρὸς τὸ μέσον), ἀνάγκη καὶ τὴν κύκλῳ κίνησιν τῶν ἁπλῶν τινος εἶναι σωμάτων τῶν γὰρ μικτῶν τὴν φορὰν ἔφαμεν εἶναι κατὰ τὸ ἐπικρατοῦν ἐν τῇ μίξει τῶν ἁπλῶν.
Ἔκ τε δὴ τούτων φανερὸν ὅτι πέφυκέ τις οὐσία σώματος ἄλλη παρὰ τὰς ἐνταῦθα συστάσεις, θειοτέρα καὶ προτέρα τούτων ἁπάντων, κἂν εἴ τις ἔτι λάβοι πᾶσαν εἶναι κίνησιν ἢ κατὰ φύσιν ἢ παρὰ φύσιν, καὶ τὴν ἄλλῳ παρὰ φύσιν ἑτέρῳ κατὰ φύσιν, οἷον ἡ ἄνω καὶ ἡ κάτω πέπονθεν ἡ μὲν γὰρ τῷ πυρί, ἡ δὲ τῇ γῇ παρὰ φύσιν καὶ κατὰ φύσιν (269b.) ὥστ' ἀναγκαῖον καὶ τὴν κύκλῳ κίνησιν, ἐπειδὴ τούτοις παρὰ φύσιν, ἑτέρου τινὸς εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις εἰ μέν ἐστιν ἡ κύκλῳ τινὶ φορὰ κατὰ φύσιν, δῆλον ὡς εἴη ἄν τι σῶμα τῶν ἁπλῶν καὶ πρώτων, ὃ πέφυκεν, ὥσπερ τὸ πῦρ ἄνω καὶ ἡ γῆ κάτω, ἐκεῖνο κύκλῳ φέρεσθαι κατὰ φύσιν. Εἰ δὲ παρὰ φύσιν φέρεται τὰ φερόμενα κύκλῳ τὴν πέριξ φοράν, θαυμαστὸν καὶ παντελῶς ἄλογον τὸ μόνην εἶναι συνεχῆ ταύτην τὴν κίνησιν καὶ ἀΐδιον, οὖσαν παρὰ φύσιν φαίνεται γὰρ ἔν γε τοῖς ἄλλοις τάχιστα φθειρόμενα τὰ παρὰ φύσιν. Ὥστ' εἴπερ ἐστὶ πῦρ τὸ φερόμενον, καθάπερ φασί τινες, οὐδὲν ἧττον αὐτῷ παρὰ φύσιν ἡ κίνησίς ἐστιν αὕτη ἢ ἡ κάτω πυρὸς γὰρ κίνησιν ὁρῶμεν τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου κατ' εὐθεῖαν. Διόπερ ἐξ ἁπάντων ἄν τις τούτων συλλογιζόμενος πιστεύσειεν ὡς ἔστι τι παρὰ τὰ σώματα τὰ δεῦρο καὶ περὶ ἡμᾶς ἕτερον κεχωρισμένον, τοσούτῳ τιμιωτέραν ἔχον τὴν φύσιν ὅσῳπερ ἀφέστηκε τῶν ἐνταῦθα πλεῖον.
33. After stating in advance certain things necessary for showing the proposition, the Philosopher here begins to reason toward the proposition, and this with five arguments. The first [22] is this: Circular motion is a simple motion. But a simple motion belongs primarily and per se to a simple body — because even though a simple motion might occur in a composite body, this will be with respect to the simple body that is predominant in it; for example, in a stone, earth predominates, according to whose nature it is moved down. Therefore, there must be a simple body which is naturally moved according to a circular motion.
Now, someone could object to this argument and say that, although a simple motion belongs to a simple body, yet that simple body which is circularly moved would not necessarily be different from the simple body that is moved with a simple straight motion. Accordingly, he rejects this by adding that nothing prevents diverse bodies from being moved unnaturally with some one motion, as when one body might be moved violently with the motion of another; but that one body be moved according to nature with the natural motion of some other body is impossible. For one simple natural motion must belong to one simple body, and diverse to diverse. Hence, if circular motion is simple and distinct from straight motions, then it must belong to a natural simple body that is different from the simple bodies that are moved with a straight motion.
34. But this seems to be false, namely, that one simple motion belongs to just one simple body, for downward motion is natural to both water and earth, and upward motion to fire and air.
But it must be said that local motion is attributed to the elements, not according to hot and cold, moist and dry, with respect to which the four elements are distinguished — as is plain in II — for these four properties are principles of alterations. But local motion is attributed to the elements with respect to heaviness and lightness. Hence the two heavy bodies are compared to local motion as one body; and the same for the two light bodies. For moist and dry, according to which earth and water, or fire and air, differ, have an incidental relationship to local motion. Yet in the realm of heavy and light there is a difference, for fire is light simply and absolutely, and earth heavy; while air is light compared to two elements and likewise water is heavy. Hence the motions of water and earth, or fire and air, are not completely the same according to species, because the termini according to which their motions are specified are not the same: for air is apt to be moved to a place below fire, and water to a place above earth.
35. Likewise it seems not necessary, if of one simple body there is one simple motion, that on this account any simple motion should belong to some [different?] simple body, any more than it is necessary that there be as many composite bodies as there are composite motions, which are infinitely diverse.
But it must be said that just as simple local motion does not correspond to a simple body with respect to hot and cold, and moist and dry, so neither does composite motion correspond to mixed body according to the degrees of mixture of those qualities, but rather according to a composition of heavy and light, according to the diversity of which is diversified the obliquity of a mixed body from the simple motion of the heavy or light. Neither of these diversities tends to infinity with respect to species, but only with respect to number.
36. Likewise it seems that according to this there are many simple bodies. For just as motions upward and downward seem to be simple motions, so too motions to the right and to the left, and those ahead and to the rear.
It must be stated therefore that, since simple bodies are the essential and first parts of the universe, the simple motions which are natural to simple bodies must be considered in relation to the condition of the universe. Since this latter is spherical, as will be proved later, its motion must be considered in relation to the middle, which is immobile, because every motion is founded upon something immobile, as is stated in the book, On the Cause of the Motion of Animals. Consequently, there must be but three simple motions, according to their diverse relations to the middle [center]: i.e., one which is from the center, one which is to the center, and one which is around the center. To the right and left, ahead and to the rear, are considered in animals but not in the whole universe, except in the sense that" they are placed in the heavens, as will be said in Book II. And according to this the circular motion of the heavens is with respect to right and left, ahead and to the rear.
37. In like manner it seems that straight motion and circular are not of the same kind. For a straight motion belongs to a body not yet having its completeness of species, as will be said in Book IV, and existing outside its proper place, while a circular motion belongs to a body that has completeness of species and is existing in its proper place. Hence simple bodily motions do not seem to belong to simple bodies according to a same notion, but some motions seem to belong to bodies inasmuch as they are coming into being, while circular motion insofar as they have complete existence.
But it must be said that, since a motion is proportionate to the mobile as being its act, it is fitting that a body which is separated from generation and corruption and cannot be expelled from its proper place by violence should have a circular motion, which is proper to a body existing in its own place; but to other bodies that can be generated and corrupted there belongs a motion outside their proper place and which is incomplete in species. But this is not in the sense that a body which is naturally moved with a straight motion lacks the first complement of its species, namely, form, for it is the form that such a motion is consequent upon; but in the sense that it does not have its final complement which consists in attaining the end, which is a place that agrees with it and conserves it.
38. The second argument he gives at [23] and in it he presupposes two principles: one of which is that a motion which is outside nature, i.e., violent, is contrary to a natural motion, as earth is according to nature moved downward but upward against its nature. The second principle is that one thing is contrary to one thing, as is proved in X. A third also must be presupposed from sense experience, namely, that there exists a body which is moved circularly. Now, if that motion is natural to that body, we have the proposition, in keeping with the previously given reason, namely, that that body which is moved in a circle naturally is distinct from the four simple elements. But if such a motion is not natural to it, it must be against its nature.
Let us therefore first assume that that body in circular motion is fire, as some claim, or any of the other four elements. Then the natural motion of fire, which is to be moved upward, will have to be contrary to the circular motion. But this cannot be, for to one thing, one thing is contrary, and the motion contrary to an upward motion is a downward one; consequently, circular motion cannot be contrary to it. And the same holds for the other three elements. Likewise, if it be assumed that the body which is being moved circularly against its nature is a body other than the four elements, it would have to have some other natural motion. But this is impossible, because if its natural motion is up, it will be fire or air; if its motion is down, it will be water or earth. But we supposed that it is not one of the four elements. Accordingly it must be that the body moved in circular motion is being moved naturally with this motion.
Now according to what he says here Aristotle seems to be contrary to Plato who assumed that the body which is circularly moved is fire. But with respect to the truth, the opinion of both philosophers is the same on this point. For Plato calls the body which is being circularly moved "fire" on account of light, which is posited as a form of fire, but not as being of the nature of elemental fire. Hence he posited five bodies in the universe, and to these he adapted five bodily figures which geometers teach, calling the fifth body "aether."
39. But further, what is said here, namely, that for fire to be moved circularly is outside nature seems to be contrary to what is said in I, where Aristotle himself sets forth that hypeccauma, i.e., fire, and the upper portion of the air, are carried along circularly by the motion of the firmament, as is plain in the motion of a comet.
But it must be said that that circulation of fire or air is not natural to them, because it is not caused from an intrinsic principle. Neither is it through violence or against nature, because such a motion is in them from the influence of a higher body, whose motion fire and air follow according to a complete circulation because these bodies are closer to the heavens, but water according to an incomplete circulation, i.e., according to the ebb and flow of the sea. Earth, however, as being most remote from the heavens, suffers no such change except with respect to the sole alteration of its parts. Now whatever is present in lower bodies from the impression of the higher is not violent for them or against nature, for they are naturally apt to be moved by the higher body.
40. Likewise it seems to be false, as here stated, that to one thing one thing is contrary, for to one vice both a virtue and the opposite vice are contrary, as to illiberality both prodigality and liberality are opposed.
But it must be said that there is only one contrary to one thing according to the same aspect, although from different aspects nothing forbids one thing from having several contraries: thus, if the same subject is sweet and white, black and bitter will be contrary to it. Accordingly, the virtue of liberality is contrary to illiberality as what is well ordered to what is disordered, but prodigality is contrary to it as superabundance is to defect. Now, it cannot be said that both motions, namely, the one that is upward and the one that is downward, are contrary to circular motion according to the common aspect of straightness. For straight and circular are not contrary, for they pertain to figure, to which nothing is contrary.
41. He gives the third argument at [24]. With regard to this he first shows that circular motion is the first of local motions. For circular motion is related to straight motion, such as up or down, as circle is compared to straight line. A circle, i.e., a circular line, is proved to be prior to a straight line because the perfect is naturally prior to the imperfect. But a circle, or circular line, is perfect, because whatever is taken in it is a beginning and middle and end. Hence it does not suffer the addition of anything from without. But no straight line is perfect, whether it be an infinite line, which is imperfect because it lacks an end, from which things are called perfect in Greek, or a finite line, because every finite line can be increased, i.e., receive more quantity and so there is something outside it. Consequently a circular line is naturally prior to the straight. Therefore circular motion, too, is naturally prior to straight motion.
But a prior motion naturally belongs to a prior body. Now straight motion naturally belongs to some one or other of the simple bodies, as fire is moved upward and earth downward and toward the middle. And if it happens that a straight motion is found in mixed bodies, that will be due to the nature of the simple body predominant in it. Since, therefore, a simple body is naturally prior to the mixed, the consequence is that circular motion is proper and natural to some simple body which is prior to the elementary bodies that exist here among us. Thus it is clear from these facts that besides the bodily substances that exist here among us, there must be some bodily substance which is nobler and prior to all the bodies that exist among us.
42. But the assertion that no straight line is perfect seems to be false. For if the perfect is what has a beginning, middle and end, as we held above, it seems that a straight finite line, which has beginning, middle and end, is perfect.
But it should be stated that in order for something to be partially perfect it must have the beginning, middle and end in itself; but to be completely perfect it is required that there be nothing outside it. And this mode of perfection belongs to the first and supreme body which contains all bodies; and with respect to this mode a straight line is said to be imperfect and a circular line perfect.
Yet it seems that even according to this mode some straight lines are perfect, because the diameter of a circle cannot suffer addition.
But it must be said that this happens to it insofar as it is in such and such a matter, and not insofar as it is a straight line, from which aspect there is nothing to prevent additions being made. But a circle, precisely as circle, cannot suffer such addition.
43. But it seems that, if this is so, one cannot conclude that circular motion is perfect, because it does receive addition, since it is continuous and eternal, according to Aristotle.
To this it should be said that one revolution is complete in species when it returns to the beginning from which it started. Hence no addition is being made to the same revolution, but whatever follows pertains to another revolution.
Yet if only a thing to which no addition can be made is to be called perfect, it follows that neither man nor any finite thing in bodies is perfect, since additions can be made to them.
And it should be answered that things of this kind are said to be perfect with respect to their species, inasmuch as they can suffer no addition of anything pertaining to the notion of their species; but to a straight line can be added something that pertains to its species, and to that extent it is said to be imperfect insofar as it is a line.
But still it seems that a circle is not perfect. For a perfect thing among magnitudes is something having three dimensions; which our circular line certainly lacks.
To this it should be responded that a circular line is not an absolutely perfect magnitude, because it does not have everything that pertains to the notion of a magnitude, Yet it is perfect in the realm of lines, because linearly something cannot be added to it.
44. It also seems false that the perfect is prior to the imperfect. For the simple is prior to the composite and yet the latter is to the former as perfect to imperfect. To this it must be said that perfect is to imperfect as act to potency, and simply speaking, act is prior to potency in things that are diverse, although in one and the same thing that is moved from potency to act, potency is prior to act in time, but act is prior to potency according to nature, for this is what nature intends first and principally. Now the Philosopher does not mean here that the perfect is prior to the imperfect in one and the same thing, but in diverse things, nor does he intend to say that it is prior in time but in nature, as he expressly states.
45. Moreover it seems that the Philosopher is arguing in an unsuitable manner. For he proceeds from the perfection of a circular line to prove the perfection of a circular motion, and from the latter perfection he goes on to prove the perfection of a circular body. And so his proof seems to be circular, because a circular line does not seem to be anything other than that of the very body that is being moved circularly. And it should be said that a circular motion is proved to be perfect on account of the perfection of the circular line absolutely; then from the perfection of circular motion in common one proves that this body which is moved circularly is perfect. Thus one does not go from the same to the same, but from common to proper.
46. The fourth argument is given at [25], and it proceeds from two assumptions. The first is that every simple motion is either according to nature or outside nature. The second is that a motion which is outside nature for one body is according to nature for another, as is clear in the upward motion which, for fire, is according to nature, and for earth is outside nature; and in the downward motion which is natural to earth, but outside nature for fire. Now it is manifest that a circular motion is present in some body, which the senses observe is moved circularly. And if such a motion is natural to it, we will have the conclusion, namely, that, besides the four elements, there is an additional body which is moved circularly. But if the circular motion is outside the nature of the body that is moved circularly, it follows from the foregoing assumption that for some other body it is according to nature, which body, consequently, will be of a different nature from the four elements.
47. Aristotle here seems to be at odds with himself, for above he proved that circular motion is not outside the nature of the body in circular motion, but here he supposes the contrary.
Accordingly some say that above the Philosopher was taking "outside nature" in the sense of "against nature" — for then a motion against the nature of some body would also be contrary to its natural motion, as he proceeded above. But here he takes "outside nature" in the more general sense of "not according to nature." Thus it includes both what is against nature and what is above nature, and it is in this sense that he assumes here that a body can be moved circularly outside its nature, just as it was said above that fire in its sphere is moved circularly outside its nature under the influence of the motion of the heavens.
But this seems to be against the intention of Aristotle. For he seems to take "outside nature" in the same sense in both cases, because both here and above he uses the example of motion which is upward and downward, which is against nature for one body, and according to nature for another. Therefore it is better to say that Aristotle in the first argument proved that some body is being moved circularly according to nature. And because someone could say that that body which is seen to be moved circularly is being moved against nature by this movement, he argues against this in two ways: in one way, by showing that that motion is not against nature, as is clear in the second argument and also in the third; in another way, by showing that, even if it is being moved against nature, it still follows that there is some other body which is moved circularly according to nature. Consequently what he denied above when speaking according to the truth of his own opinion, he here denies by using, so to speak, the assumptions of his adversaries.
48. Likewise it does not seem to follow that, if some motion is outside nature for one body, it is natural to some other body. For fire or any other body can be moved in a number of ways — yet this does not prove that such motions are natural to certain bodies.
But it should be noted that the Philosopher is here speaking of simple motion, to which the nature of a simple body is inclined as to one definite thing, whereas motions diversely various seem to be rather brought about by art, which can be a principle of diverse things. It should also be considered that, although a motion which for one body is beside nature is according to nature for another, yet it is not necessary that every body for which some motion is natural should have a motion that is beside nature: for every body which can suffer an impression from without has something proper and connatural to it, yet not every body can receive an impression from without so as to be able to have a natural motion.
49. The fifth argument is at [26], and it is this. The conclusion of the foregoing argument was that if a body observed to be in circular motion is being moved outside its nature, then such a motion must be according to nature for some other body. And if this is granted, namely, that circular motion is according to nature for some body, then it is clear that there will be some first and simple body which is being moved circularly, on account of the simplicity and priority of circular motion, as is plain from the foregoing arguments, just as fire is moved upward and earth downward. But if the procedure of the foregoing argument is not admitted, and it is stated rather that all things in circular motion with respect to a periphery, i.e., a circumference, are being moved outside their nature, in such a way that this motion is not natural to any body, then such a thing seems to be marvelous and, indeed, wholly unreasonable. For it was proved in VIII that only circular motion can be continuous and eternal. Now it is unreasonable that what is eternal should be outside nature, and that a non-eternal motion should be according to nature. For we see that things which are outside nature quickly pass and cease to be, as in the case of the heat of water and the projecting of a stone into the air, while things that are according to nature are seen to last a longer time. Thus it is wholly necessary that circular motion be natural to some body.
If therefore the body which is observed to be carried along circularly is of the nature of fire, as some say, that motion will be beside its nature, just as a downward motion is. For we see that the natural motion of fire is upward according to a straight line. Accordingly, just as a downward motion is natural for another body, namely, earth, so a circular motion will be natural to some other body.
50. Finally, in summary, he concludes that if someone should reason from all the foregoing in the aforesaid manner, he will believe, i.e., firmly assent, that there is a body over and above the bodies which exist among us (i.e., the four elements and composites of them), a body that is separated from them and of a nature that is more noble than they to the extent that it is farther separated from them in space. For in the universe the bodies that contain are to contained bodies as form to matter, and act to potency, as was said in IV.
Difference of the body moved circularly as to light and heavy
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ μὲν ὑπόκειται τὰ δ' ἀποδέδεικται τῶν εἰρημένων, φανερὸν ὅτι οὔτε κουφότητα οὔτε βάρος ἔχει σῶμα ἅπαν,
δεῖ δὲ ὑποθέσθαι τί λέγομεν τὸ βαρὺ καὶ τὸ κοῦφον, νῦν μὲν ἱκανῶς ὡς πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν χρείαν, ἀκριβέστερον δὲ πάλιν, ὅταν ἐπισκοπῶμεν περὶ τῆς οὐσίας αὐτῶν. Βαρὺ μὲν οὖν ἔστω τὸ φέρεσθαι πεφυκὸς ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον, κοῦφον δὲ τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου,
βαρύτατον δὲ τὸ πᾶσιν ὑφιστάμενον τοῖς κάτω φερομένοις, κουφότατον δὲ τὸ πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζον τοῖς ἄνω φερομένοις.
Ἀνάγκη δὴ πᾶν τὸ φερόμενον ἢ κάτω ἢ ἄνω ἢ κουφότητ' ἔχειν ἢ βάρος ἢ ἄμφω, μὴ πρὸς τὸ αὐτὸ δέ πρὸς ἄλληλα γάρ ἐστι βαρέα καὶ κοῦφα, οἷον ἀὴρ πρὸς ὕδωρ, καὶ πρὸς γῆν ὕδωρ. Τὸ δὲ κύκλῳ σῶμα φερόμενον ἀδύνατον ἔχειν βάρος ἢ κουφότητα οὔτε γὰρ κατὰ φύσιν οὔτε παρὰ φύσιν ἐνδέχεται αὐτῷ κινηθῆναι ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου. Κατὰ φύσιν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτῷ ἡ ἐπ' εὐθείας φορά μία γὰρ ἦν ἑκάστου τῶν ἁπλῶν, ὥστ' ἔσται τὸ αὐτὸ τῶν οὕτω τινὶ φερομένων. Παρὰ φύσιν δ' ἐνεχθέντος, εἰ μὲν ἡ κάτω (270a.) παρὰ φύσιν, ἡ ἄνω ἔσται κατὰ φύσιν, εἰ δ' ἡ ἄνω παρὰ φύσιν, ἡ κάτω κατὰ φύσιν ἔθεμεν γὰρ τῶν ἐναντίων ᾧ ἡ ἑτέρα παρὰ φύσιν, τὴν ἑτέραν εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν.
Ἐπεὶ δ' εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ φέρεται τὸ ὅλον καὶ τὸ μόριον κατὰ φύσιν, οἷον πᾶσα γῆ καὶ μικρὰ βῶλος, συμβαίνει πρῶτον μὲν μήτε κουφότητ' ἔχειν αὐτὸ μηδεμίαν μήτε βάρος (ἢ γὰρ ἂν πρὸς τὸ μέσον ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου ἠδύνατο φέρεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν), ἔπειθ' ὅτι ἀδύνατον κινηθῆναι τὴν κατὰ τόπον κίνησιν ἢ ἄνω ἢ κάτω κατασπώμενον οὔτε γὰρ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνδέχεται κινηθῆναι κίνησιν αὐτῷ ἄλλην οὔτε παρὰ φύσιν, οὔτ' αὐτῷ οὔτε τῶν μορίων οὐδενί ὁ γὰρ αὐτὸς λόγος περὶ ὅλου καὶ μέρους.
51. After showing that there is a body distinct from those that are here, namely, from the four elements, and from things composed of them, the Philosopher here shows the difference of this body from those which exist here.
First by comparing them with respect to local motion; Secondly, with respect to other motions (L. 6);
About the first he does three things:
primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo ostendit propositum, ibi: oportet autem supponere etc.;
tertio excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: quoniam autem in idem feruntur et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves the proposition, at 52;
Thirdly, he dismisses an objection, at 56.
He says therefore first [28] that, since some of the foregoing statements were supposed (namely, that one thing has one contrary, and that there are but two simple magnitudes, the straight line and the circle, and any other such suppositions) and others were demonstrated from certain premises (for example, that there are three simple motions, and that circular motion is natural to some body which is different in nature from the bodies that exist here), it can be plain from the foregoing that that entire body which is being moved circularly has neither heaviness nor lightness, which are principles of certain local motions.
52. Then at [29] he manifests his proposition. And because the principle of demonstration is "that which something is," as is said in II,
primo supponit definitiones gravis et levis;
secundo ex his argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: necesse autem et cetera.
he first supposes the definitions of heavy and light, at 52;
Secondly, from these he argues to his proposition, at 54.
He says therefore first [29] that in order to prove the proposition we ought to suppose what it is that we call "heavy" and what "light." And he says "suppose" because he is not perfectly investigating their definitions here, but he uses them as suppositions to the extent that the present demonstration requires. But they will be considered more carefully in Book IV, where their "substance," or nature, will be explained. Accordingly, he defines heavy as "That which is apt to be moved to the middle," and the light as "that which is apt to be moved from the middle."
53. He uses this mode of defining in order to keep himself from the contrary position of Plato, who said that in the world according to itself there is no "up" and "down," on account of the rotundity of the world: for a rotund body is everywhere uniform. He said that there is "up" and "down" in the world only with respect to us, who call "up" that which is above our head, and "down" that which is below our feet, so that if we were contrarily situated, we would call "up" and "down" in a contrary manner. Consequently, Plato does not admit an "up" and "down" in the very nature of things but only with respect to us.
Aristotle, however, uses these names according to the common way of speaking, in keeping with his statement in II, that names are to be used as they are used for the most part; hence he calls "up" and "down" in the world what are generally called "up" and "down" by men. Yet they are distinct not only with respect to us, but also according to nature. For just as we distinguish "right" and "left" in ourselves according to the diverse relationship to animal motion which is with respect to place, so too "up" and "down" in the world are distinguished with relation to the motions of the simple bodies which are the principal parts of the world. On this account he says that "up" is the place where light things are carried, and "down" the place where heavy things are carried. And this is reasonable: for just as in us the nobler part is that which is above, so in the world, light bodies are more noble, as if more formal. But here in order to proceed without calumny to the proof of the proposition, he defines "heavy" and "light" by their relation to the middle.
54. Then at [30] he defines "heaviest" and "lightest." And he says that the heaviest is "that which stands under all things that are carried downward," while the lightest is "that which is at the top of all things that are carried up." And this must be understood as concerning those things that are carried upward and downward — for the heaven is not the lightest, even though it is above all, because it is not carried upward. Now it should be recognized that here he is already using "up" and "down" as though "up" and "down" arise as being where a motion from the middle, or to the middle, is terminated.
55. Then at [31] he proves his proposition from the foregoing, and says that every body carried up or down must have heaviness absolutely, as does the heaviest, namely, earth, which stands under all, or must have lightness absolutely, as does fire, which is above all, or must have both, not in respect to the same, but in respect to diverse things. For the intermediate elements, namely, air and water, are mutually heavy and light, as air is light with respect to water, because it is carried above it, and the same is true of water with respect to earth; meanwhile, air with respect to fire is heavy, because it exists under it, and similarly water with respect to air. But the body that is moved circularly can have neither heaviness nor lightness. For it cannot be moved to the middle or from the middle, either according to nature, or outside nature.
And, that it cannot be so moved according to nature, is clear from the fact that a straight motion, which is to the middle, or from the middle, is natural to the four elements. But it was said above that one motion is natural to one of the simple bodies. Therefore it would follow that the body which is moved circularly would be of the same nature as one of the bodies that is moved in a straight line, the contrary of which was proved above. Similarly it cannot be said that a straight motion outside nature belongs to the body that is moved circularly. For if one of a pair of contrary motions is present in a body outside its nature, the other will be for it according to nature, as is plain from what has been said above. Therefore, if downward motion is outside nature for the fifth body, upward motion will be for it according to nature, and conversely. But both are false, as is plain from the preceding argument. It follows therefore that the fifth body, which is carried circularly, is not carried from the middle or to the middle, either according to nature or outside its nature. But every body having lightness or heaviness is moved according to nature by one of these motions, and outside its nature by the other. Therefore, the fifth body has neither heaviness nor lightness.
56. Then at [32] he excludes a certain objection. For some said that the parts of the elements are perishable, so that when existing outside their proper place they are naturally moved with a straight motion, while the elements themselves according to their totality are imperishable and cannot ever be outside their proper place — whence they are being moved circularly in their places. Consequently a body that is being moved circularly in its place according to its totality need not lack heaviness and lightness.
To exclude this the Philosopher proposes that part and whole are naturally carried to the same place, as, for example, in the case of the whole earth and one clod. And this is clear from the state of rest: for each thing is naturally moved to the place in which it is naturally at rest, and it is in the same place that the whole earth and part of it naturally rest. Hence it is clear that the whole earth has a natural inclination to be moved to the center, should it be outside its own place.
Therefore from the foregoing two things follow: The first of these is that the whole fifth body has no lightness or heaviness — for, as is clear from the aforesaid reason, it would be moved naturally to or from the middle. Secondly, it follows from the supposition now introduced that, if any part were detached from a heavenly body it would be moved neither up nor down, for, since the whole and part are of the same nature, it does not befit either the entire fifth body, or any part of it, to be moved either according to its nature or outside it with any motion other than the circular.
1-6
The fifth body not subject to other motions
Ὁμοίως δ' εὔλογον ὑπολαβεῖν περὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ ὅτι ἀγένητον καὶ ἄφθαρτον καὶ ἀναυξὲς καὶ ἀναλλοίωτον,
διὰ τὸ γίγνεσθαι μὲν ἅπαν τὸ γιγνόμενον ἐξ ἐναντίου τε καὶ ὑποκειμένου τινός, καὶ φθείρεσθαι ὡσαύτως ὑποκειμένου τέ τινος καὶ ὑπ' ἐναντίου καὶ εἰς ἐναντίον, καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις εἴρηται λόγοις τῶν δ' ἐναντίων καὶ αἱ φοραὶ ἐναντίαι. Εἰ δὴ τούτῳ μηδὲν ἐναντίον ἐνδέχεται εἶναι διὰ τὸ καὶ τῇ φορᾷ τῇ κύκλῳ μὴ εἶναι ἄν τιν' ἐναντίαν κίνησιν, ὀρθῶς ἔοικεν ἡ φύσις τὸ μέλλον ἔσεσθαι ἀγένητον καὶ ἄφθαρτον ἐξελέσθαι ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐν τοῖς ἐναντίοις γὰρ ἡ γένεσις καὶ ἡ φθορά.
58. After having shown the difference between the fifth body and the other bodies that exist here from the standpoint of lightness and heaviness, according to which bodies have an inclination to local motion, the Philosopher here shows how the fifth body differs from bodies that exist here from the standpoint of other motions, and shows that the former is not subject to the other motions to which these bodies are subject.
Et primo ostendit hoc per rationem;
secundo per signa, ibi: videtur autem et ratio et cetera.
First he shows this by an argument;
Secondly, by signs (L. 7);
With respect to the first he does two things:
Secundo ibi: propter fieri quidem etc., probat propositum:
Secondly [34], he proves the proposition:
et primo ostendit corpus caeleste esse ingenerabile et incorruptibile;
secundo quod est inaugmentabile, ibi: at vero et augmentabile etc.;
tertio quod non est alterabile, ibi: si autem est et inaugmentabile et cetera.
First he shows that the heavenly body is incapable of being generated or corrupted;
Secondly, that it cannot be increased (L. 7);
Thirdly, that it cannot be altered (also in L. 7).
59. With regard to the first he presents the following argument: Whatever can be generated comes to be from a contrary and a certain subject or matter — for something comes to be from a contrary as from something non-permanent, but from a subject as from something permanent, as is plain in I. Likewise, every body that is perishable ceases to be while some subject [continues to] exist Also every case of ceasing-to-be is from a contrary active principle, for every ceasing-to-be is terminated at a contrary, as was said in the first discussions, i.e., in I. But nothing is contrary to the fifth body. Therefore, it can be neither generated nor destroyed. He proves the middle [minor] proposition through the fact that the motions of contraries are contrary, as the light is moved upward and the heavy downward; but the fifth body's natural motion, which is circular motion, has no contrary motion, as will be proved later. Therefore nothing is contrary to this body. Thus nature seems to have acted rightly, exempting this body from contrariety as destined to be, i.e., having to be, unproduced and imperishable.
60. But two thoughts come to mind regarding what Aristotle says here: one is about his assumption that the body of the heaven is incapable of being generated and destroyed; the other is about the reason for it.
Now it should be known, with regard to the first, that some supposed the body of the heaven to be generable and perishable according to its very nature, as did John the Grammarian, called Philoponus. And in support of his contention he uses first the authority of Plato who supposed that the heavens and the entire world were generated. Secondly, he presents this argument: Every power of a finite body is finite, as was proved in VIII; but a finite power cannot extend itself unto infinite duration (that is why something cannot be moved for an infinite time through a finite power, as was proved in the same book); therefore, a heavenly body does not have the power to be infinite in time. Thirdly, he forms the following objection: In every natural body there is matter and privation, as is plain from I; but wherever there is matter with privation, there is potency to cease to be; therefore, the heavenly body is perishable. And if anyone says that the matter of heavenly bodies is not the same as that of inferior bodies, he objects to the contrary — for, according to this, matter would have to be composite, made out of what is common to both matters, and out of what produces diversity between matters.
61. But these statements lack necessity. For the fact that Plato posited the heavens as generated was not drawn from an understanding that they were subject to generation, which Aristotle intends here to deny, but because it was necessary for them to have their existence from a higher cause, as composed of parts multiple and extended — which meant that their existence was caused by some one first thing, from which all multiplicity must be caused.
62. The objection that the power of a heavenly body is finite Averroes solved by saying that in a heavenly body there is a power for local motion, but no power, either finite or infinite, respecting existence.
But in this he is clearly going against Aristotle who later on in the same book supposes in sempiternal things a power to exist forever. But Averroes was deceived by supposing that the power respecting existence pertains solely to the passive power, which is the potency of matter; but the truth is that it pertains more to the power of the form, because everything exists through its form. Hence a thing has as much and as long an existence as the power of its form. Thus there is a power to exist forever, not only in heavenly bodies, but also in separated substances.
Therefore it should be said that whatever requires infinite power must be infinite. But the infinite, according to the Philosopher in I, pertains to quantity, so that what lacks quantity is neither finite nor infinite. Now motion does have a quantity that is measured by time and magnitude, as is plain in VI, and therefore the power which is capable of eternal motion is capable of an infinite effect — and consequently such a power must be infinite. But a thing's existence considered in itself is not a quantity, for it has no parts, but is entire and all at once. Rather it is accidental to it that it is quantified in one sense according to duration, insofar as it is subject to motion, and consequently to time, just as is the existence of changeable things. That is why the power of any bodily thing whose existence is subject to change cannot go beyond a finite duration. In another way the existence of a thing can be called quantified per accidens on the part of the subject, which has a definite quantity. Therefore it must be said that the existence of the heavens is not subject either to variation or time; hence it is not quantified by a quantity of duration, and consequently is neither finite nor infinite in this respect. But it is quantified according to the quantity of an extended body, and in this respect it is finite. Consequently. it must be said that the power of existing of a heavenly body is finite, but that does not mean that it is limited to existing in a finite time, because temporal finiteness or infinity are accidental to a thing's existence, which is not subject to the variation of time. Nevertheless a power of this kind could not cause existence in an infinite magnitude nor even in a magnitude greater than the magnitude of the heavenly body.
Similarly Averroes solves the third objection by destroying it. For he denies that a heavenly body has matter, but says that a heavenly body is a subject that is actual being, to which its soul is compared as form to matter. Now if in stating that a heavenly body does not have matter he should mean matter in relation to motion or change, then it is true — for thus does Aristotle also say in VIII and XII, namely, that a heavenly body has matter not with respect to existence but to "where," for the simple reason that this matter is not subject to a change according to being but to one according to "where." But if he means that a heavenly body has matter in no way at all or no subject at all, then plainly he is wrong. For it is clear that that body is a being in act; otherwise it would not act on the lower bodies. But whatever is a being in act is either act itself, or has act. Now it cannot be said that a heavenly body is act, for then it would be a subsistent form, and something understood in act but not apprehended by sense. Therefore in a heavenly body there must be something which is the subject of its actuality.
However this subject or matter does not need to have privation, for privation is nothing but the absence of a form which is apt to exist in the matter; but in this matter or subject there is no other form apt to be — rather its form fills out the entire potentiality of the matter, since it is a certain total and universal perfection. And this is clear from the fact that its active power is universal, and not particular like the power of the lower bodies, whose forms as being particular cannot exhaust the entire potentiality of the matter; hence, together with one form there remains in matter the privation of another form which is apt to be in it. Similarly, we see that the lower bodies are subject to diverse shapes, but the heavenly body not. Accordingly, in a heavenly body there is not privation of any form but only privation of some "where." Consequently, it is not changeable with respect to form through generation and ceasing to be, but only with respect to "where." From this it is plain that the matter of the heavenly body is distinct and of a different nature from the matter of lower bodies, not on account of some composition, as Philoponus supposed, but on account of their relationship to diverse forms, of which one is total and the other partial — for thus potencies are diversified, namely, according to the diversity of acts to which they are in potency.
64. Therefore it is manifest from the foregoing that the body of the heavens according to its nature is not subject to generation and ceasing-to-be, as being first in the genus of mobiles, and the closest to immobile things. That is why it has a minimum of motion. For it is moved only with local motion, which varies nothing intrinsic to a thing. And among local motions it has a circular motion, which also has a minimum of variation, because in spherical motion the whole does not vary its "where" as to subject, but only in conception, as was proved in VI; but the parts change their "where" even as to subject.
However, we do not say according to the Catholic faith that the heavens always existed, although we say that they will endure forever. Nor is this against Aristotle's demonstration here, for we do not say that they began to be through generation, but through an efflux from the first principle, by whom is perfect the entire existence of all things, as even the philosophers posited. From whom, however, we differ in this, that they suppose God to have produced the heavens co-eternal to Himself, but we posit that the heavens were produced by God according to their whole substance at some definite beginning of time.
65. Against this, however, Simplicius, a commentator on Aristotle, at this passage, objects on three counts. First, since God produced the heavens, therefore, through His essence and not through something added, since His essence is eternal and unchanging, the heavens have always proceeded from Him. Again, if the goodness of God is the cause of things, the goodness of God would have been idle and disengaged before the world existed, if the latter began to exist from some definite beginning of time. Again, whatever begins to exist in some determined part of time after previously not existing, this happens to it from the ordination of some higher motion from which it happens that this being begins now and not before, as a man begins to be now and not previously, according to the order of the revolution of the heavenly body. But there is no higher revolution or motion beyond the heavenly body. Therefore it cannot be said that the body of the heavens began to be now, so as not to have been before.
But these lack necessity. For the first statement that God acts through His essence and not through something superadded is true, but His essence is not distinct from His understanding, as in us, nor from His willing. Hence He produces according to His understanding and His willing. Now in things produced by an agent acting in virtue of his understanding and will, that which is produced must be as it was understood by the producer, and not as the producer is in his being. Hence, just as what is produced by God acting through His essence does not have to be, in other respects, in the same way as the divine essence, but such as it is determined by His understanding, so too it is not necessary that what is produced by God be as long-lasting as God, but only to the degree determined by His understanding.
And this applies also to the dimensive quantity of the heavens. For the fact that the heavens have such-and-such a quantity, and no greater, is a result of a determination of the divine intellect determining such a quantity for them, and adapting to them a nature proportionate to such quantity, just as He frees them from contraries so that they may be ungenerated and incorruptible, as stated in the text. The phrase in the text that "nature acted rightly" implies the action of an intellect acting for an end, for it is no nature other than the divine that has freed them from contraries.
Similarly, the statement that the divine goodness would have been idle and disengaged before the production of the world does not have any weight. For a thing is called "idle" that does not attain the end for which it is. But the goodness of God is not for the sake of creatures. Hence creatures would be idle if they did not attain to the divine goodness, but the divine goodness would not be idle even if It never produced a creature.
Again, the third objection applies to a particular agent, which supposes time and works in time. In this way what comes to be must be proportioned by the agent both to some part of time, and to the whole of time, or even to the cause of the whole of time. But we are dealing now with a universal agent who produces the whole time together with the things in time. So there is no place here for the question of why now and not before, as though there were presupposed some other preceding part of time, or some more general cause producing all of time. But the pertinent question here is why the universal agent, namely, God, willed time and the things in time not always to exist. And this depends on a determination of His intellect, just as in a house the artisan determines the size of one part of the house in relation to another part or to the whole house, but the size of the entire house he himself determines according to his understanding and will.
67. Another point remains to be considered about Aristotle's demonstration against which John the Grammarian objects: if nothing but what has a contrary can be generated and cease to be, then since there is no contrary of a substance, as is plain in animals and plants (similarly, nothing is contrary to a figure or a relation), none of these will be generated and cease to be.
To this Simplicius responds that this is to be understood about a contrary in the general sense as including even contrariety of privation and species, for that is Aristotle's meaning when he speaks of contraries in I. And that is the way in which contrariety is found in all the foregoing, as the unformed is contrary to the formed, and the unfigured to the figured; but privation has no place in heavenly bodies, as has been said.
But this response, although true, is not , For Aristotle says that contrariety of local motions corresponds to contrariety of bodies; and it is certain that no local motion corresponds to a privation. Consequently, it must be said that, as he himself will say later, nothing is contrary to substance with respect to its being a composite, or according to matter or substantial form; but there is something contrary to it according to its proper disposition to such a form, as fire is said to be contrary to water by reason of the contrariety of hot and cold. And such contrariety is required in all things that are generated and cease to be. But it is upon such contrariety that contrariety of motions according to heavy and light follow: through the absence of which, a heavenly body is understood to be free of all the contraries that accompany the heavy and the light.
68. Likewise, since he says that contrariety of motions corresponds to contrariety of bodies, it seems that fire is contrary more to earth than to water, because fire agrees with the former in respect of one quality, namely, dryness.
And it must be said that in this book the Philosopher is discussing simple bodies with respect to their position; for it is under this aspect that they are parts making up the universe. And according to this, the contrariety of fire to earth is greater than its contrariety to water. Yet it is true that fire has a greater contrariety to water from the viewpoint of active and passive qualities, which consideration belongs to the book .
69. Again, it does not seem to follow of necessity that nothing is contrary to a heavenly body just because nothing is contrary to the circular motion with which it is moved, because fire also in its own sphere, and the upper region of air, are moved circularly, as is said in I, and yet there is a contrary to fire and air.
But it should be said that fire and air are not moved circularly as though by their own motion; rather they are carried along by the motion of the heavens. The heavenly bodies, however, are moved circularly by their own motion; consequently, the case is not the same.
70. Again, it seems that contrariety of motions does not attest to contrariety of mobiles. For the same numerical substance, which is not contrary to itself, is subject to contraries, as is said in the Predicaments; thus it is moved by contrary motions which are terminated at contraries: for example, a substance is moved by whitening and blackening and similar motions. Moreover, air existing in the place of water is moved upward, but in the place of fire downwards. Therefore the same thing is moved by contrary motions, and, consequently, contrariety of motions does not follow upon contrariety of mobiles. Furthermore, we see that the same soul is moved by the motions of vice and virtue, which are contrary motions.
With regard to this it must be considered that the Philosopher uses this proposition, namely, that if motions are not contrary, the mobiles also are not contrary. But he does not state the converse, that if the mobiles are not contrary the motions are not contrary (because someone could say that the motions of all bodies having contrariety are contrary, but not that all contrary motions involve contrary things): against which the foregoing objection is directed. Yet in truth contrariety of natural motions follows upon what is proper to the active or formal principles (which the motion follows upon), and not upon the contrariety of the passive or material principles, because the same matter is subject to contraries. And therefore nothing prevents the same subject from being affected by alterations caused by extrinsic principles, even though such alterations be contrary. But if an alteration arises from an intrinsic principle, as when health is restored by the nature, then the contrariety of such alterations follows upon the contrariety of the mobiles. And the same holds for local motions, which we are now discussing: for such motions follow upon intrinsic formal principles
Now, regarding the objection about air, it must be said that the contradiction which is included in all opposites requires in its very notion that it be with respect to the same thing and according to the same aspect. But the natural motion of air is not up and down with respect to the same thing; rather it is upward with respect to water and earth, and downward with respect to fire. Consequently such motions are not contrary, for they are not tending to contrary places but to the same place, i.e., the place which is above water and below fire.
What is said about the motion of the soul according to virtue and vice is not — for such motions are not natural but voluntary.
:<br">The heavenly body is not subject to growth and decrease, or to alteration.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τὸ αὐξανόμενον ἅπαν αὐξάνεται [καὶ τὸ φθῖνον φθίνει] ὑπὸ συγγενοῦς προσιόντος καὶ ἀναλυομένου εἰς τὴν ὕλην τούτῳ δ' οὐκ ἔστιν ἐξ οὗ γέγονεν.
Εἰ δ' ἐστὶ καὶ ἀναύξητον καὶ ἄφθαρτον, τῆς αὐτῆς διανοίας ἐστὶν ὑπολαβεῖν καὶ ἀναλλοίωτον εἶναι. Ἔστι μὲν γὰρ ἡ ἀλλοίωσις κίνησις κατὰ τὸ ποιόν, τοῦ δὲ ποιοῦ αἱ μὲν ἕξεις καὶ διαθέσεις οὐκ ἄνευ τῶν κατὰ τὰ πάθη γίγνονται μεταβολῶν, οἷον ὑγίεια καὶ νόσος. Κατὰ δὲ πάθος ὅσα μεταβάλλει τῶν φυσικῶν σωμάτων, ἔχονθ' ὁρῶμεν πάντα καὶ αὔξησιν καὶ φθίσιν, οἷον τά τε τῶν ζῴων σώματα καὶ τὰ μόρια αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ τῶν φυτῶν, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὰ τῶν στοιχείων ὥστ' εἴπερ τὸ κύκλῳ σῶμα μήτ' αὔξησιν ἔχειν ἐνδέχεται μήτε φθίσιν, εὔλογον καὶ ἀναλλοίωτον εἶναι. (270b.) Διότι μὲν οὖν ἀΐδιον καὶ οὔτ' αὔξησιν ἔχον οὔτε φθίσιν, ἀλλ' ἀγήρατον καὶ ἀναλλοίωτον καὶ ἀπαθές ἐστι τὸ πρῶτον τῶν σωμάτων, εἴ τις τοῖς ὑποκειμένοις πιστεύει, φανερὸν ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων ἐστίν.
Ἔοικε δ' ὅ τε λόγος τοῖς φαινομένοις μαρτυρεῖν καὶ τὰ φαινόμενα τῷ λόγῳ πάντες γὰρ ἄνθρωποι περὶ θεῶν ἔχουσιν ὑπόληψιν, καὶ πάντες τὸν ἀνωτάτω τῷ θείῳ τόπον ἀποδιδόασι, καὶ βάρβαροι καὶ Ἕλληνες, ὅσοι περ εἶναι νομίζουσι θεούς, δῆλον ὅτι ὡς τῷ ἀθανάτῳ τὸ ἀθάνατον συνηρτημένον ἀδύνατον γὰρ ἄλλως. Εἴπερ οὖν ἔστι τι θεῖον, ὥσπερ ἔστι, καὶ τὰ νῦν εἰρημένα περὶ τῆς πρώτης οὐσίας τῶν σωμάτων εἴρηται καλῶς.
Συμβαίνει δὲ τοῦτο καὶ διὰ τῆς αἰσθήσεως ἱκανῶς, ὥς γε πρὸς ἀνθρωπίνην εἰπεῖν πίστιν ἐν ἅπαντι γὰρ τῷ παρεληλυθότι χρόνῳ κατὰ τὴν παραδεδομένην ἀλλήλοις μνήμην οὐθὲν φαίνεται μεταβεβληκὸς οὔτε καθ' ὅλον τὸν ἔσχατον οὐρανὸν οὔτε κατὰ μόριον αὐτοῦ τῶν οἰκείων οὐθέν.
Ἔοικε δὲ καὶ τοὔνομα παρὰ τῶν ἀρχαίων παραδεδόσθαι μέχρι καὶ τοῦ νῦν χρόνου, τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ὑπολαμβανόντων ὅνπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς λέγομεν οὐ γὰρ ἅπαξ οὐδὲ δὶς ἀλλ' ἀπειράκις δεῖ νομίζειν τὰς αὐτὰς ἀφικνεῖσθαι δόξας εἰς ἡμᾶς. Διόπερ ὡς ἑτέρου τινὸς ὄντος τοῦ πρώτου σώματος παρὰ γῆν καὶ πῦρ καὶ ἀέρα καὶ ὕδωρ, αἰθέρα προσωνόμασαν τὸν ἀνωτάτω τόπον, ἀπὸ τοῦ θεῖν ἀεὶ τὸν ἀΐδιον χρόνον θέμενοι τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν αὐτῷ. Ἀναξαγόρας δὲ καταχρῆται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ οὐ καλῶς ὀνομάζει γὰρ αἰθέρα ἀντὶ πυρός.
After showing that the fifth body is not subject to generation and corruption, the Philosopher here shows that it is not subject to increase and diminution [35] and uses this argument: Every augmentable body is, with respect to something, subject to generation and corruption. To explain this, he proposes that every augmentable body is increased by the addition of something connatural that comes to it. This, indeed, while being first unlike, has become like by being resolved into its proper matter which, doffing its previous form, has assumed the form of the body to be increased — as bread, after being resolved into matter, receives the form of flesh, and thus, through being added to pre-existing flesh, produces increase. Hence wherever there is growth there must be generation and corruption into something. But there is nothing from which a heavenly body can be generated, as has been shown. Therefore it cannot be augmentable or decreasable.
72. Then at [36] he shows that it is not subject to alteration. Now it might seem to someone that an easy way to remove alteration from the heavenly body would be by removing contrariety, for just as generation occurs from contraries, so too, does alteration. But it should be observed that Aristotle removed contrariety from the fifth body by removing from it contrariety of motion. Alteration, however, seems to occur not only according to the contrariety to which contrary local motions correspond, namely, heavy and light and whatever results from them, but also according to other contraries which do not pertain to this, for example, according to black and white. Accordingly, he uses another way, based on increase.
And he says that it is for the same reason that we estimate a heavenly body not to be alterable and not to be augmentable or perishable. For alteration is a motion affecting quality, as has been said in V. But alteration, as was shown in VII, properly takes place according to the third species of quality, which is "passion and passible quality": for although "habit and disposition" pertain to [the first species of] the genus of quality, they are not produced without a change made according to the passions, just as health and languor result from a change of cold and hot, moist and dry. Now all natural bodies that are changed with respect to passion or passible quality seem as a consequence to have growth and decrease, as is clear from the bodies of animals and their parts and even of plants, in which growth properly exists. The same applies also to the elements, which rarefy and condense with respect to a change in hot and cold, from which results a change into larger or smaller quantity which is in a sense the same as being increased and decreased. Thus it is plain that if a body which is moved circularly is not subject to increase or decrease it is not subject to alteration.
Finally, in summary he concludes that it is plain from the foregoing — if anyone wants to assent to the previous demonstrations without wantonly contradicting — that the first body, which, namely, is moved with the first and perfect motion, i.e., circular motion, is sempiternal (as not being subject to generation and corruption), that it undergoes neither increase nor decrease, and that it is not subject to aging or alteration or passion.
73. Nevertheless objections can be leveled against this argument of Aristotle on two counts. First of all against the conclusion. For it seems to be false that a heavenly body is not altered, for it is plainly evident that the moon is illumined by the sun and obscured by the shadow of the earth.
But it must be said that alteration is of two kinds. One is passive and according to it things are so added that something else is cast off, as, when something is altered from hot to cold, it loses heat and receives coldness. It is that kind of alteration, which takes place according to passions, that the Philosopher is here excluding from heavenly body. But there is another kind of alteration which is perfecting, which occurs insofar as something is perfected by something else without loss to the former — this is the kind of alteration that the Philosopher in II posits even in a sense power. Such an alteration nothing prevents from being in heavenly bodies, some of which receive virtues from others according to conjunctions and various aspects, but without any of them losing their own virtue.
74. The second objection is directed against the procedure of his argument: for it does not seem to be true that whatever is altered receives increase and decrease. For these result from the addition of something that is converted into the substance of what is increased, as is said in the book and in II, and as was said above. Now the motion of increase does not exist except in animals and plants, for things that rarefy and condense are not increased by the addition of anything, as was proved in V. Consequently, it seems unsuitable for Aristotle here to attribute the motion of increase not only to animals and plants and their parts, but to the elements as well.
But it should be said that Aristotle is here speaking of increase in the sense of any motion by which something proceeds to greater quantity. For he has not yet perfectly explained the nature of the motion of increase and it is his custom, before he has shown the true view, to use common opinions. But the force of his proof is not impeded by his having excluded increase from a heavenly body by excluding addition of a body changed into what is increased: for just as anything increased by addition is not utterly free of generation and corruption, so, too, what is increased by rarefaction.
However it is to be noted that in this proof he makes mention of l bodies advisedly, because in mathematical bodies increase can occur without alteration — for example, a square grows by adding to it a gnomon, but it is not altered, as is said in the Predicaments; conversely, a thing can be altered without being increased, as when a triangle is made equal to a square.
75. Then at [37] he manifests the proposition through signs. And he says that both reason and things that appear to be probable seem to support one another on this point. And he gives three signs. The first of which is taken from the general opinion of men, who posit many gods or one God, whom the other separated substances serve. All who believe thus, whether Greeks or barbarians, assign the highest place, namely, the heavenly, to God, namely, all those who believe there are divine beings. But they assign the heavens to the divine substances as though adapting an immortal place to immortal and divine beings. In this way God's habitation in the heavens is understood as appropriate according to likeness, that is, that among all other bodies this body more closely approaches to a likeness to spiritual and divine substances. For it is impossible for the habitation of the heavens to be assigned to God for any other reason, as though He should need a bodily place by which He is comprehended. If therefore divine beings are to be posited, and since, indeed, they certainly must, the consequence is that the statements made about the first bodily substance, namely, the heavenly body, were well made, namely, that the heavenly body is ungenerated and unalterable.
Although men suppose that temples are the place of God, they do not suppose this from God's viewpoint but from that of the worshippers, who must worship Him in some place. That is why perishable temples are proportioned to perishable men, but the heavens to the divine imperishability.
76. The second sign he gives at [38] and it is taken from long experience. And he says that what has been proved by reason and common opinion occurs, i.e., follows, sufficiently — i.e., not absolutely but to the extent of human faith, i.e., so far as men can testify to what they have seen for a short time and from afar. For according to the tradition which astronomers have passed on concerning their observations of the dispositions and motions of heavenly bodies, in the whole time past there does not seem to have been any change affecting either the entire heavens or any of its own parts. Now this would not be, if the heaven were generable or perishable — for things subject to generation and corruption arrive at their perfect state little by little and step by step, and then gradually depart from that state, and this could not have been concealed in the heavens for such a long time, if they were naturally subject to generation and corruption.
However, this is not necessary but probable. For the more lasting something. is, the greater the time required for its change to be noted, just as change in a man is not noticed in two or three years, as it is in a dog or other animals having a shorter life-span. Consequently someone could say that, even though the heavens are naturally corruptible, nevertheless they are so lasting that the whole extent of human memory is not sufficient to observe their change.
77. The third sign is given at [39] and is based on a name given by the ancients, which endures to the present, and which gives us to understand that they thought the heaven to be imperishable just as we do. And lest anyone object that some before their time thought the heavens were subject to generation and corruption, he adds that true opinions are revived according to diverse times not once or twice but infinitely, supposing that time is infinite. For the studies of truth are destroyed by various changes occurring in these lower things, but because the minds of men are naturally inclined to truth, then when obstacles are removed, studies are renewed and men at last arrive at the true opinions which previously flourished, but false opinions need not be revived.
Consequently the ancients, supposing that the first body, namely, the heaven, to be of a nature different from the four elements, named the highest place of the world the "aether," thus applying to it a name based on the fact that it always runs for an eternity of time — for in Greek is the same as "to run." But Anaxagoras misinterpreted this name, attributing it to fire, as though the heavenly body were fiery — for aether in in Greek is the same as "to burn," which is proper to fire. But that a heavenly body is not of fire is plain from what has been said above [in L. 4].
:<br">Only five simple bodies required. No motion contrary to circular.
Φανερὸν δ' ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων καὶ διότι τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἀδύνατον εἶναι πλείω τὸν τῶν λεγομένων σωμάτων ἁπλῶν τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ἁπλοῦ σώματος ἀνάγκη τὴν κίνησιν ἁπλῆν εἶναι, μόνας δὲ ταύτας εἶναί φαμεν ἁπλᾶς, τήν τε κύκλῳ καὶ τὴν ἐπ' εὐθείας, καὶ ταύτης τὰ δύο μόρια, τὴν μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου, τὴν δ' ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον.
Ὅτι δ' οὐκ ἔστι τῇ κύκλῳ φορᾷ ἐναντία ἄλλη φορά, πλεοναχόθεν ἄν τις λάβοι τὴν πίστιν πρῶτον μὲν ὅτι τῇ περιφερεῖ τὴν εὐθεῖαν ἀντικεῖσθαι μάλιστα τίθεμεν τὸ γὰρ κοῖλον καὶ τὸ κυρτὸν οὐ μόνον ἀλλήλοις ἀντικεῖσθαι δοκεῖ (271a.) ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ εὐθεῖ, συνδυαζόμενα καὶ λαβόντα σύνθεσιν ὥστ' εἴπερ ἐναντία τίς ἐστι, τὴν ἐπὶ τῆς εὐθείας μάλιστα ἀναγκαῖον ἐναντίαν εἶναι πρὸς τὴν κύκλῳ κίνησιν. Αἱ δ' ἐπὶ τῆς εὐθείας ἀλλήλαις ἀντίκεινται διὰ τοὺς τόπους τὸ γὰρ ἄνω κάτω τόπου τέ ἐστι διαφορὰ καὶ ἐναντίωσις.
Ἔπειτ' εἴ τις ὑπολαμβάνει τὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι λόγον ὅνπερ ἐπὶ τῆς εὐθείας καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς περιφεροῦς (τὴν γὰρ ἀπὸ τοῦ Α πρὸς τὸ Β φορὰν ἐναντίαν εἶναι τῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ Β πρὸς τὸ Α), τὴν ἐπὶ τῆς εὐθείας λέγει αὕτη γὰρ πεπέρανται, περιφερεῖς δ' ἄπειροι ἂν εἶεν περὶ τὰ αὐτὰ σημεῖα.
Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡμικυκλίου τοῦ ἑνός, οἷον ἀπὸ τοῦ Γ ἐπὶ τὸ Δ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Δ ἐπὶ τὸ Γ ἡ γὰρ αὐτὴ τῇ ἐπὶ τῆς διαμέτρου ἐστίν ἀεὶ γὰρ ἕκαστον ἀπέχειν τὴν εὐθεῖαν τίθεμεν.
Ὁμοίως δὲ κἂν εἴ τις κύκλον ποιήσας τὴν ἐπὶ θατέρου ἡμικυκλίου φορὰν ἐναντίαν θείη τῇ ἐπὶ θατέρου, οἷον ἐν τῷ ὅλῳ κύκλῳ τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ Ε πρὸς τὸ Ζ τοῦ Η ἡμικυκλίου τῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ Ζ πρὸς τὸ Ε ἐν τῷ Θ ἡμικυκλίῳ.
Εἰ δὲ καὶ αὗται ἐναντίαι, ἀλλ' οὔτι γε αἱ ἐπὶ τοῦ ὅλου κύκλου φοραὶ ἀλλήλαις διὰ τοῦτο ἐναντίαι. *—*
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἡ ἀπὸ τοῦ Α ἐπὶ τὸ Β κύκλῳ φορὰ ἐναντία τῇ ἀπὸ τοῦ Α ἐπὶ τὸ Γ ἐκ ταὐτοῦ γὰρ εἰς ταὐτὸ ἡ κίνησις, ἡ δ' ἐναντία διωρίσθη φορὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον.
Εἰ δὲ καὶ ἦν ἡ κύκλῳ τῇ κύκλῳ ἐναντία, μάτην ἂν ἦν ἡ ἑτέρα *ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ γάρ, ὅτι ἀνάγκη τὸ κύκλῳ φερόμενον ὁποθενοῦν ἀρξάμενον εἰς πάντας ὁμοίως ἀφικνεῖσθαι τοὺς ἐναντίους τόπους (εἰσὶ δὲ τόπου ἐναντιότητες τὸ ἄνω καὶ κάτω καὶ τὸ πρόσθιον καὶ ὀπίσθιον καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ ἀριστερόν), αἱ δὲ τῆς φορᾶς ἐναντιώσεις κατὰ τὰς τῶν τόπων εἰσὶν ἐναντιώσεις* εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἴσαι ἦσαν, οὐκ ἂν ἦν κίνησις αὐτῶν, εἰ δ' ἡ ἑτέρα κίνησις ἐκράτει, ἡ ἑτέρα οὐκ ἂν ἦν. Ὥστ' εἰ ἀμφότερα ἦν, μάτην ἂν θάτερον ἦν σῶμα μὴ κινούμενον τὴν αὑτοῦ κίνησιν μάτην γὰρ ὑπόδημα τοῦτο λέγομεν, οὗ μή ἐστιν ὑπόδεσις. Ὁ δὲ θεὸς καὶ ἡ φύσις οὐδὲν μάτην ποιοῦσιν.
78. After showing the necessity of some body besides the four elements, the Philosopher here shows that the integrity of the universe requires no other body besides these five.
Et primo ostendit propositum;
secundo probat quoddam quod supposuerat, ibi: quod autem non est circulationi et cetera.
First he shows his proposition;
Secondly, he proves something he had assumed, at 79.
He says therefore first [40] that from what was said in proving that there exists a fifth body in addition to heavy and light bodies, it can be shown that it is impossible for a greater number of simple bodies to exist. For as was said above, for each simple body there must be some simple motion.
But there is no simple motion other than the ones previously mentioned: one of which is circular and the other straight, the latter being divided into two kinds, one of which is from the middle and is called "upward motion" and the other toward the middle and is called "downward motion." Of the latter two, the one which is toward the middle belongs to a heavy body, namely, to earth and water, while the one from the middle belongs to a light body, namely, to fire and air. Finally, the circular motion is assigned to the first and supreme body. Hence what remains is that there is no other simple body besides the ones mentioned. Consequently, the wholeness of the universe consists of these five bodies.
79. Then at [41] he proves something he had assumed, namely, that there is not a motion contrary to circular motion. This he had assumed in the discussion in which he proved that the body of the heavens is not subject to generation and corruption. But the reason why he did not prove it right away, but waited until now, is that it is also useful in proving that there is not a greater number of simple bodies. For if there were a motion contrary to circular motion, it could be held that just as there are two bodies moved with straight motion on account of the contrariety of this motion, so there are also two bodies moved with circular motion. But this will not occur if it is plain that there is no motion contrary to circular motion. Therefore, on this point,
First he proposes what he intends, and says that there are many reasons to induce one to believe that there is not a circular motion contrary to circular motion.
80. Secondly, he establishes the proposition. In regard to this it must be noted that if there exists contrariety in circular motion, it must be in one of three ways: one is that a straight motion be contrary to circular motion; the second is that there be some sort of contrariety in the parts themselves of circular motion; the third is that one circular motion have some other circular motion contrary to it.
Primo ergo ostendit quod motui circulari non contrariatur motus rectus;
secundo ostendit quod non sit contrarietas in partibus motus circularis, ibi: deinde si quis existimat etc.;
tertio quod non sit contrarietas in toto motu circulari, unius scilicet motus circularis ad alium, ibi: at vero neque quae ab a et cetera.
First therefore he shows that a straight motion is not contrary to circular motion;
Secondly, he shows that there is no contrariety in the parts of circular motion, at 10.83;
Thirdly, that there is no contrariety between complete circular motions, i.e., of one to another, at 89.
81. He says therefore first [42] that what seems most opposite to something circular is something straight. For a straight line has no break, while an angular line does have a break, not through the whole, but in the angles; meanwhile a circular figure seems to have breaks throughout, as if the whole were an angle. According to this the straight and the circular seem to be contraries, as though at the farthest extremes.
And because someone could say that it is not the straight that is opposed to the circular, but rather the convex or "gibbous" which is opposed to the concave, to reject this objection, he adds that concave and "gibbous," i.e., convex, are seen to be opposed not only to one another, but to the straight as well. They seem to be mutually opposed after the manner of the combined and the juxtaposed, i.e., in terms of relation: for "concave" is said in relation to things that are inside [a circle or sphere], but "gibbous" with respect to things outside. Consequently, from every aspect, the straight is contrary to the circular, whether taken as concave or as convex.
And because the contrariety of motions is seen to follow the contrariety of the things in which the motion is, the consequence seems to be that if there is a motion contrary to circular motion, it should be most of all straight motion which, namely, is over a straight line. But straight motions are contrary to one another because of contrary places — for upward motion is contrary to downward because "up" and "down" imply a difference and contrariety of place. Consequently, one straight motion will have as its contrary some other straight motion, and a circular one. This, however, is impossible, for to one thing there is one contrary. Therefore, it is impossible for any motion to be contrary to circular.
82. But someone could object to the statement that the straight is most contrary to the circular. For it is stated in the Predicaments that nothing is contrary to figure, whereas "straight" and "circular" are differences in figure.
But it can be said that the Philosopher is here speaking hypothetically and not categorically. For if anything were contrary to the circular, it would be the straight most of all, for the reason given above.
It can also be said that in every genus there is found a contrariety of differences, as is plain from X, although there is not a contrariety of species in every genus: for although "rational" and "irrational" are contrary differences, "man" and "ass" are not contrary species. Consequently, there is a contrariety between straight and circular not as between species, but as between differences of the same genus. Such contrariety, which can be discerned in motions on the basis of the difference between straight and circular, is not a corruptive contrariety, of the sort, namely, which the Philosopher here intends to exclude from the heavenly body, such as is the contrariety of hot to cold. But nothing forbids contrariety according to the differences of certain genera from being in a heavenly body, for example, that of equal and unequal, or something of that kind.
John the Grammarian, however, objects against the Philosopher's seeming to state that concave and gibbous are opposed according to a relation: because relative things seem to be co-existent, but concave and gibbous are not necessarily together, for a spherical body can be exteriorly convex without being interiorly concave. But in this he has been deceived, for the Philosopher is here speaking of concave and convex as found in a circular line, and not as found in a spherical body, in which latter one can indeed exist without the other, but not in a line.
83. Then at [43] he shows that there is no contrariety in the parts of circular motion.
Et primo excludit contrarietatem a partibus huius motus;
secundo ostendit quod contrarietas partium non sufficeret ad contrarietatem totius, ibi: si autem et istae contrariae et cetera.
First he excludes contrariety from the parts of this motion;
Secondly, he shows that contrariety of parts would not be enough for contrariety of the whole, at 88.
Regarding the first he does three things:
primo ostendit quod non est contrarietas in partibus motus circularis quae accipiuntur secundum diversas portiones circuli, quae designantur inter duo puncta;
secundo ostendit quod non est contrarietas in partibus motus circularis quae accipiuntur secundum eundem semicirculum, ibi: similiter autem et quae in semicirculo etc.;
tertio ostendit quod non est contrarietas in partibus motus circularis quae accipiuntur secundum duos semicirculos, ibi: similiter autem et utique et cetera.
First he shows that there is not contrariety in the parts of circular motion if the parts are taken according to diverse portions of the circle which are designated between two points;
Secondly, he shows that there is not contrariety in the parts of circular motion, if the parts are taken according to the same semicircle, at 85;
Thirdly, if the parts are taken according to two semicircles, at 87.
He says therefore first [43] that someone could think that the aspect of contrariety in motion upon a circular line, and that in motion upon a straight line, are the same. For if one straight line between two points, A and B, be designated, it is evident that the local motion occurring on the straight line from A to B will be contrary to the local motion from B to A. But the notion is not the same if a circular line be described through the two points, A and B, because between two points there can be but one straight line, but an infinity of curved lines, which are diverse portions of circles. Therefore it would follow that, if the motion from A to B over a circular line were contrary to the one which is from B to A over a circular line, an infinitude of motions would be contrary to one.
But it should be observed that, in place of what he ought to have said, namely, that the straight line between two points is one, he said that straight lines are "finite" — because if we take two points in diverse places, there will be between them finite straight lines [i.e., in finite number], but between any two points there could be described an infinitude of curved lines.
84. Against this argument John the Grammarian objects, since it does not seem to follow that to one motion there is an infinitude of contrary motions, but that to an infinite number there is. For with respect to each portion of the circle described between two points there will be two motions contrary one to the other. Likewise, the same difficulty seems to follow from the contrariety of straight motions. For it is manifest that just as an infinitude of curved lines can be described between two points, so from the center of the world to the circumference there can be described an infinitude of straight lines.
But in regard to the first it must be said that if the contrariety of motions that occur through curved lines is to be according to the contrariety of the termini as happens in straight motions, then, from this supposition it follows that every motion from B to A through any of the curved lines is contrary to a motion from A to B. Thus it will follow not only that there is an infinitude of motions contrary to one motion, but also that to each of the infinite motions starting from one end there will be contrary the infinitude of motions beginning from the contrary end.
In regard to the second it must be said that all the infinitude of straight lines from the center to the circumference are equal, and therefore designate the same distance between contrary termini — therefore in all of them is present the same aspect of contrariety, which implies maximum distance. But all the infinitude of curved lines described between the same points are unequal; hence the same aspect of contrariety is not present in them, for the distance taken with regard to the quantity of the curved line is not the same in every case.
85. Then at [44] he shows that there is not contrariety in circular motion according to one and the same semicircle. For someone could say that the motion upon one curved line from A to B has as its contrary not a motion from R to A through just any curved line but through one and the same — for example, through one semicircle. Let GD be that semicircle, such that the motion through it from G to D is contrary to the one through it from D to G.
But Aristotle proceeds against this on the ground that the semicircular distance from G to D is computed in terms of the diametric distance, not in the sense that the semicircle is equal to the diameter, but because we measure every distance by a straight line. The reason for this is that every measure ought to be certain and determinate and the smallest. Now between two points the length of a straight line is certain and determinate, because it can be but one, and it is the smallest of all the lines between the two points. But an infinitude of curved lines can be drawn between two points, and all are greater than the straight line drawn between the two given points. Hence the distance between two points is measured by a straight line, and not by the curved line of a semicircle or any other portion of the circle, either of a larger or a smaller circle. Therefore, since it belongs to the very notion of contrariety that it have maximum distance, as is said in X, then, since the distance between two points is not measured according to a curved line but according to a straight, the consequence is that a contrariety of termini does not bring about a contrariety in motions upon a semi-circle, but only in motions upon the diameter.
86. But John the Grammarian objects against this, because not only do geometers and astronomers reckon the quantity of a curved line by a straight line, but they also do the converse: for they prove the quantity of a chord by means of the arc and that of the arc by the chord.
But in this he departs from the intent of Aristotle. For Aristotle does not intend to maintain that a curved line is measured by a straight, but the distance between any two given points is measured by a straight line, for the reason just given.
He [John] objects too that in the heavens there is a greatest distance between two opposite points: for example, between the beginning of Aries and the beginning of Libra; consequently, if contrariety is the greatest distance, then according to this distance, contrariety can be found in circular motion.
But to this it should be said that that greatest distance is reckoned according to the quantity of the diameter and not according to the quantity of the semicircle — otherwise the beginning of Aries would be farther from the beginning of Sagittarius, to which it has a trinary aspect, than from the beginning of Libra to which it has the aspect of right opposition.
87. Then at [45] he shows that there is not contrariety in circular motion according to two semicircles. And he says that the reasoning is similar to describing a whole circle and positing that the motion in one semicircle is contrary to a motion in the other. For let a circle have a diameter EZ dividing it into two semicircles called I and T respectively. Now someone could say that a motion from E to Z through semicircle I is contrary to the motion from Z to E through semicircle T. But this is disproved by the same argument as the first case: namely, because the distance between E and Z is not measured by a semicircle but by the diameter. But there is still another reason: namely, the motion which begins at E and proceeds to Z through I, and then returns from Z to E through semicircle T, is one continuous motion; but two motions that are contrary cannot be continuous with one another, as is plain in VIII.
88. Then at [46] he shows that even if those parts of circular motions were contrary, that would be no reason for concluding that there would be contrariety in circular motions as a whole; for contrariety of parts is no proof for the contrariety of the whole. Consequently, it is plain that what the Philosopher has just showed about contrariety of the parts of circular motion has been done for added measure in order to exclude contrariety entirely from circular motion.
89. Then at [46 bis] he shows that to one complete circular motion there is not another circular motion contrary: and this for two reasons. The first of these is based on considering circular motion in general. Therefore, take a circle upon which A, B and G are described at three points. Suppose two circular motions occur upon this circle, one beginning at A through B to G and back to A; conversely, let the other start at A through G to B and back to A. He says then that these two motions are not contrary. For each begins at the same term A and terminates at the same term, namely, A; consequently, they neither begin at terms that are contrary nor end at terms that are contrary. But a contrary local motion is one that goes from contrary to contrary. Therefore, the two circular motions in question are not contrary.
90. The objector against this is once more John the Grammarian. First on the ground that the notion of contrariety in diverse things is seen to be diverse. For to be moved from contrary to contrary determines contrariety in straight motions; hence it is not necessary, if such contrariety is not present in circular motions, that on this account no contrariety may exist therein. Likewise, just as it is of the very nature of contrary motion in straight motions to be from contrary to contrary, so it is of the very nature of motion to be from one thing to another. Now, by the very fact that circular motion is from the same to the same, not only is it not from contrary to contrary, but it is not from one thing to another. Therefore there is excluded from circular motions not only that they be contrary, but that they be motions at all.
To the first objection it should be replied that to be from contrary to contrary is not a special property of the contrariety found in local motions in a straight line, but it is a common property of contrariety in all motions, as is plain in V. And the reason for this is that contrariety is a difference according to form, as is shown in X. Now a motion possesses form or species from its terminus. Therefore, there can be contrariety in no motion, unless there is contrariety of termini.
To the second it must be said that circular motion, because it is the first of motions, has a minimum of diversity and a maximum of uniformity. And this even appears proportionally in the mobile and in the motion. In the mobile, indeed, because it does not change its "where" with respect to the whole subject, but only in conception, whereas each part changes its "where" even as to subject, as was shown in VI. And similarly a part of a circular motion is from one to another with a difference as to subject; but the whole circular motion is indeed from the same to the same according to subject, but from one thing to another that differs only in conception. For if we take one circular motion from A to A, the A which is the and the is the same as to subject, but differs in conception, insofar as it is taken now as beginning and now as end. And therefore, because circular motion has the most unity, its nature is very far from contrariety, which is a maximum distance. That is why such motion belongs to the first bodies which are the nearest to the simple substances which completely lack contrariety.
91. The second argument is at [47], and this argument is based on applying circular motion to natural bodies. And this is the argument: If one circular motion were contrary to another, then one of them would have to be in vain. But nothing in nature is in vain. Therefore, there are not two contrary circular motions.
The truth of the conditional proposition he proves in the following manner: If there were two contrary circular motions, then the bodies subject to them ought to pass through the same signs marked on a circle. The reason for this is that contrariety of local motion demands contrariety of the places, which affect both mobiles. Consequently, if there were contrary circular motions, then contrary places should be able to be designated on the circle. Now on a straight line only two contrary places are designated, namely, those the greatest distance apart, while other places designated on that line, since they are within the extreme places, are not contrary to one another. But on a circle any point at random can be at a greatest distance from some other point on the circle: because from any point on the circle a diameter can be drawn, which is the greatest of the straight lines falling in the circle. And it has been said that every distance is measured according to a straight line. Therefore, because things in contrary motions must reach contrary places, then if circular motions are contrary, it is necessary that each body in circular motion, no matter from which point of the circle its motion begins, reach all the places of the circle, all of which are contrary. (Nor is it unfitting that in a circle places be marked as in every way contrary — for contrariety of place is taken not only with respect to up and down, but according to ahead and to the rear, and left and right.) But it has been said that the contraries of local motion are based on contrariety of places. And thus, if circular motions are contrary, the contrarieties in the circle must be taken according to the forementioned.
Now from all this it follows that one of the motions or of the bodies would be in vain. For if the magnitudes moved were equal, i.e., of equal power, neither would be moved, because one would totally obstruct the other, since both would have to traverse the same places. But if one motion dominated on account of a greater power in one of the mobiles or movers, then the other motion could not exist, because it would be totally obstructed by the stronger motion. Therefore, if both were bodies apt to be moved with contrary circular motions, one of them would exist in vain, for it could not be moved with that motion which was obstructed by the stronger. For we say that a thing is "in vain" when it does not realize its usefulness, as we say that a shoe is in vain if no one can wear it. In like manner, a body would be in vain, if it could not be moved with its proper motion; and likewise a motion would be in vain if nothing could be moved with it.
Consequently, it is plain that if there are two contrary circular motions, there would have to be something in vain in nature. But that this is impossible he now proves: Whatever exists in nature is either from God, as are the first natural things, or from nature as from a second cause, as, for example, lower effects. But God makes nothing in vain, because, since He is a being that acts through understanding, He acts for a purpose. Likewise nature makes nothing in vain, because it acts as moved by God as by a first mover, just as an arrow is not moved in vain, inasmuch as it is shot by the bowman at some definite thing. What remains, therefore, is that nothing in nature is in vain.
It should be noted that Aristotle here posits God to be the maker of the celestial bodies, and not just a cause after the manner of an end, as some have said.
92. John the Grammarian objects against this argument that, for the same reason, someone could conclude that there is no contrariety in straight motions, because contrary mobiles obstruct one another.
But it should be said that the case with straight motions is different from that of circular, for two reasons. First, because two bodies are moved with contrary straight motions without mutually obstructing one another, for in straight motions contrariety is not reckoned except with respect to the extremes of straight lines, for example, with respect to the center of the world and its circumference. Now from the center to the circumference an infinitude of lines can be drawn so that what is moved upward through one of them does not obstruct what is being moved downward through another. But in circular motion the same aspect of contrariety is present in all parts of the circle. Therefore it will be necessary that both move through the same places of the circle. And so of necessity contrary circular motions would have to obstruct one another.
Secondly, in the two cases the aspect is different — for in the case of a body that is being naturally moved with a straight motion, just as it is naturally apt to be corrupted, so it is naturally apt to be obstructed. Hence, if it is obstructed, this is no more in vain than if it be corrupted. But a body circularly moved is naturally incorruptible: hence it is not apt to be obstructed. Hence if there were in nature something to impede it, that impediment would be useless.
93. Likewise, it can be objected about the motion of the planets which are moved with their own motions from west to east, which seems to be contrary to the motion of the firmament which in its diurnal motion is from east to west.
But it must be said that such motions have indeed a certain mutual diversity which somehow designates the diverse natures of the mobiles. But, for three reasons, there is no contrariety:
First, this is so, because diversity of this kind is not based on contrary termini but on contrary ways of reaching the same terminus: for example, because the firmament is moved from the eastern point to the western point through the upper hemisphere, and returns to the eastern point through the lower hemisphere, while a planet is moved from a western point to the east through another hemisphere.
But to be moved to the same end by diverse routes does not make for contrariety of actions or passions, but pertains to the diverse order of the motions and mobiles — for what reaches its terminus by a nobler route is nobler, just as a better doctor is one who induces health by a more efficacious way. Hence the first motion of the firmament is nobler than the second motion, i.e., that of the planets, just as the supreme orb is nobler. Wherefore, the orbs of the planets are moved with the motion of the first orb without their being impeded from their own proper motions.
The second reason is that, although each motion is over the same center, nevertheless they are over other and other poles; hence they are not contrary.
The third reason is that they are not in the same circle, but the motions of the planets are in the lower circles.
But contrariety must be reckoned with respect to the same distance, as is plain in straight motions, the contrariety of which consists in the distance from the center to the circumference.
The need for treating of the infinity of the universe.
(271b.) Ἀλλ' ἐπεὶ δῆλον περὶ τούτων, περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν σκεπτέον, καὶ πρῶτον πότερον ἔστι τι σῶμα ἄπειρον, ὥσπερ οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν ἀρχαίων φιλοσόφων ᾠήθησαν, ἢ τοῦτ' ἔστιν ἕν τι τῶν ἀδυνάτων
τὸ γὰρ οὕτως ἢ ἐκείνως ἔχειν οὔ τι μικρὸν ἀλλ' ὅλον διαφέρει καὶ πᾶν πρὸς τὴν περὶ τῆς ἀληθείας θεωρίαν σχεδὸν γὰρ αὕτη πασῶν ἀρχὴ τῶν ἐναντιώσεων τοῖς ἀποφηναμένοις τι περὶ τῆς ὅλης φύσεως καὶ γέγονε καὶ γένοιτ' ἄν,
εἴπερ καὶ τὸ μικρὸν παραβῆναι τῆς ἀληθείας ἀφισταμένοις γίνεται πόρρω μυριοπλάσιον. Οἷον εἴ τις ἐλάχιστον εἶναί τι φαίη μέγεθος οὗτος γὰρ τοὐλάχιστον εἰσαγαγὼν τὰ μέγιστ' ἂν κινήσειε τῶν μαθηματικῶν. Τούτου δ' αἴτιον ὅτι ἡ ἀρχὴ δυνάμει μείζων ἢ μεγέθει, διόπερ τὸ ἐν ἀρχῇ μικρὸν ἐν τῇ τελευτῇ γίνεται παμμέγεθες. Τὸ δ' ἄπειρον καὶ ἀρχῆς ἔχει δύναμιν καὶ τοῦ ποσοῦ τὴν μεγίστην, ὥστ' οὐδὲν ἄτοπον οὐδ' ἄλογον τὸ θαυμαστὴν εἶναι τὴν διαφορὰν ἐκ τοῦ λαβεῖν ὡς ἔστι τι σῶμα ἄπειρον. Διὸ περὶ αὐτοῦ λεκτέον ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἀναλαβοῦσιν.
Ἀνάγκη δὴ πᾶν σῶμα ἤτοι τῶν ἁπλῶν εἶναι ἢ τῶν συνθέτων, ὥστε καὶ τὸ ἄπειρον ἢ ἁπλοῦν ἔσται ἢ σύνθετον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ ὅτι γε πεπερασμένων τῶν ἁπλῶν ἀνάγκη πεπερασμένον εἶναι τὸ σύνθετον, δῆλον τὸ γὰρ ἐκ πεπερασμένων καὶ πλήθει καὶ μεγέθει συγκείμενον πεπέρανται καὶ πλήθει καὶ μεγέθει τοσοῦτον γάρ ἐστιν ἐξ ὅσων ἐστὶ συγκείμενον. Λοιπὸν τοίνυν ἰδεῖν πότερον ἐνδέχεταί τι τῶν ἁπλῶν ἄπειρον εἶναι τὸ μέγεθος, ἢ τοῦτ' ἀδύνατον. Προχειρισάμενοι δὴ περὶ τοῦ πρώτου τῶν σωμάτων, οὕτω σκοπῶμεν καὶ περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν.
Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν ἀνάγκη τὸ σῶμα τὸ κύκλῳ φερόμενον πεπεράνθαι πᾶν, ἐκ τῶνδε δῆλον.
Εἰ γὰρ ἄπειρον τὸ κύκλῳ φερόμενον σῶμα, ἄπειροι ἔσονται αἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου ἐκβαλλόμεναι. Τῶν δ' ἀπείρων τὸ διάστημα ἄπειρον διάστημα δὲ λέγω τῶν γραμμῶν, οὗ μηδὲν ἔστιν ἔξω λαβεῖν μέγεθος ἁπτόμενον τῶν γραμμῶν. Τοῦτ' οὖν ἀνάγκη ἄπειρον εἶναι τῶν γὰρ πεπερασμένων ἀεὶ ἔσται πεπερασμένον. Ἔτι δ' ἀεὶ ἔστι τοῦ (272a.) δοθέντος μεῖζον λαβεῖν, ὥστε καθάπερ ἀριθμὸν λέγομεν ἄπειρον, ὅτι μέγιστος οὐκ ἔστιν, ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ περὶ τοῦ διαστήματος εἰ οὖν τὸ μὲν ἄπειρον μὴ ἔστι διελθεῖν, ἀπείρου δ' ὄντος ἀνάγκη τὸ διάστημα ἄπειρον εἶναι, οὐκ ἂν ἐνδέχοιτο κινηθῆναι κύκλῳ
τὸν δ' οὐρανὸν ὁρῶμεν κύκλῳ στρεφόμενον, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ δὲ διωρίσαμεν ὅτι ἐστί τινος ἡ κύκλῳ κίνησις.
94. After explaining the perfection of the universe and pointing out the parts that make it complete, the Philosopher here begins to inquire into its infinity, because, as is said in III, some have attributed the notion of "perfect" to the infinite.
Now something can be said to be infinite in three ways: in one way with respect to magnitude; in another with respect to number, and in a third way with respect to duration.
Primo igitur inquirit utrum universum sit infinitum secundum magnitudinem;
secundo utrum sit infinitum secundum multitudinem, utrum scilicet sit unus mundus tantum, vel infiniti seu plures, ibi: quia autem neque plures etc.;
tertio utrum sit infinitum duratione, quasi semper existens, ibi: his autem determinatis et cetera.
First, then, he asks whether the universe is infinite according to magnitude;
Secondly, whether according to multitude, i.e., whether there is just one world, or an infinitude, or many (L. 16);
Thirdly, whether it is infinite in duration, as though ever existing (L.22).
About the first he does two things:
primo dicit prooemialiter de quo est intentio;
secundo exequitur propositum, ibi: quod quidem igitur necesse et cetera.
First he speaks in a prefatory manner about his intention;
Secondly, he carries out his proposal, at 99.
About the first he does three things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo assignat rationem suae intentionis, ibi: sic enim aut illo modo etc.;
tertio determinat modum agendi, ibi: necesse itaque et cetera.
First he states his intention;
Secondly, he assigns the reason for his intention, at 96;
Thirdly, he decides upon a method of treatment, at 98.
95. He says therefore first [48] that because it is now clear with respect to the foregoing, namely, that there is no motion contrary to circular motion, and as to the other things mentioned, we must now direct our attention to what remains. And first we must inquire whether there exists any body infinite in act with respect to magnitude, as very many of the early philosophers thought (i.e., all those who posited one material principle, such as fire, or air, or water, or something intermediate); or whether it is impossible that there be a body infinite in act, as was proved in III, supposing, however, that there is no body other than the four elements, according to the opinion of others. Since, however, he has just now proved that there is another body besides the four elements, he therefore repeats this consideration in order that the search for the truth may be more universal.
Then at [49] he gives a reason for his intention, from the diversity that happens on account of the aforesaid position. And first he mentions this con sequent diversity, and says that it makes no slight difference to the speculation of truth in natural philosophy whether things are this way or that, i.e., whether or not there exists a body that is infinite according to magnitude. Rather, it does make a difference with respect to the whole universe and every natural consideration. For what has just been said, was in the past, and will be in the future, the source of almost all the contradictions between those who have put forth anything about the whole nature of things. For those who posited one infinite principle assumed that all things come to be by a kind of separation from that principle: thus, on account of the infinitude of that principle, they said that the generation of things does not fail. It is as though someone said that from an infinite mass of dough, loaves of bread could be made ad infinitum. But those who posited finite principles said that things come to be ad infinitum through a reciprocal commingling and separating of the elements.
97. Then at [50] he assigns the cause why such diversity follows from this: it is because one who makes a slight departure from the truth in his principles gets 10,000 times farther from the truth as he goes on. This is so because all things that follow depend on their principles. This is especially clear in an error at the crossroads: for one who at the beginning is only a slight distance from the right road gets very far away from it later on. And he gives, as an example of what he is talking about, the case of those who posited a smallest magnitude, as Democritus posited indivisible bodies. By thus introducing a least quantity, he overthrew the most important propositions of mathematics — for example, that any given line can be cut into two halves. The reason for this effect is that a principle, though small in stature, is nevertheless great in power, just as from a small seed a mammoth tree is produced. Hence it is that what is small in the beginning becomes multiplied in the end, because it reaches unto all that to which the power of the principle extends, whether this be true or false. Now the infinite has the nature of a principle (for all who have spoken about the infinite considered it a principle, as was said in III); besides, the infinite has the greatest force with respect to quantity, because it exceeds every given quantity. If, therefore, a principle which is the least in quantity makes a great difference in what follows from it, then much more is this so of the infinite, which is outstanding not only in virtue of being a principle but also in quantity. Consequently, it is neither inappropriate nor unreasonable that a remarkable difference should follow in natural science from the assumption that some body is infinite. And therefore it must be discussed by resuming our consideration from the principle which we accepted above about the difference between simple and composite bodies.
Then he points out what order must be followed, and says that of necessity every body is either a member of the simple group or of the composite group. Consequently an infinite body must be one or the other. Again, it is plain that if simple bodies are finite in multitude and magnitude, so too must composite body be — for a composite body has as much quantity as the quantity of the simple bodies of which it is composed. However, it has been shown above that simple bodies are finite in multitude, because there is no body other than the ones mentioned. It remains, therefore, to see whether any of the simple bodies is infinite in magnitude, or whether this is impossible. And this we shall show by first arguing from the first body, i.e., the one that is moved circularly; then we shall consider the remaining bodies, namely, those moved with a straight motion.
99. Then at [52] he shows that there is not an infinite body:
et primo propriis rationibus de singulis corporibus;
secundo tribus communibus rationibus de omnibus, ibi: quod quidem igitur non est infinitum corpus et cetera.
First with reasons proper to the individual bodies;
Secondly, with three general reasons applying to all, (L. 13).
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum in corpore quod circulariter movetur;
secundo in corporibus quae moventur motu recto, ibi: sed adhuc neque quod ad medium et cetera.
First he proves the proposition as to the body moved circularly;
Secondly, as to the bodies moved with a straight motion, (L. 12).
About the first he does two things:
Primo proponit quod intendit: et dicit quod manifestum est ex his quae dicentur, quod necesse est omne corpus quod circulariter fertur, esse finitum (hoc enim est primum corporum).
Deinde cum dicit: si enim infinitum etc., probat propositum sex rationibus: quarum prima talis est. Si aliquod corpus est infinitum, non potest moveri circulariter; sed corpus primum movetur circulariter; ergo non est infinitum.
First he proposes his intention and says that it is plain from what will be said that every circularly moved body must be finite (for this is the first of bodies).
Then at [53] he proves his proposition with six arguments, the first of which is this: If any body is infinite, it cannot be moved circularly; but the first body is moved circularly. Therefore, it is not infinite.
First, then, he proves the conditional proposition as follows: If a circularly moved body is infinite, then the straight lines proceeding from its center are infinite, for they are extended as far as the quantity of the body. But the distance between the infinite lines is infinite.
Now someone might say that even if there are infinite lines from the center, yet the distance between them is finite, because every distance is measured according to a straight line, and a finite line can be drawn between two such radii, for example, very close to the center. But it is clear that beyond that line a greater straight line can be drawn between the lines we first mentioned. And therefore he says that he is not speaking of the distance that such lines measure, but that that distance is infinite which is measured by a line beyond which no greater line can be taken, and which touches each of the first lines.
That this distance is infinite he proves in two ways. First, because every such distance between any finite lines proceeding from the center is finite; for the ends of the lines proceeding from the center and of the finite line measuring the greatest distance between them must coincide.
Secondly, he proves the same point because it is possible, if the distance between two measured lines proceeding from the center is given, to take another distance which is greater, just as it is possible to take a number greater than a given number. Hence, just as the infinite is in numbers, so is it in this distance under discussion.
From this he argues as follows: The infinite cannot be traversed, as was proved in VI. But if a body be infinite, the distance between the lines proceeding from the center must be infinite, as was proved. But in order that circular motion occur, one line proceeding from the center must reach the position of another. Consequently, it could never happen that anything be moved circularly.
101. Secondly, at [54] he proves in two ways the destruction of the consequent. First, because it is evident to sense that the heavens are moved circularly; secondly, because it was proved above by reason that circular motion belongs to some body. What remains, therefore, is that it is impossible for the circularly moved body to be infinite.
The second and third reasons proving the circularly moved body not infinite
Ἔτι ἀπὸ πεπερασμένου χρόνου ἐὰν ἀφέλῃς πεπερασμένον, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸν λοιπὸν εἶναι πεπερασμένον καὶ ἔχειν ἀρχήν. Εἰ δ' ὁ χρόνος ὁ τῆς βαδίσεως ἔχει ἀρχήν, ἔστιν ἀρχὴ καὶ τῆς κινήσεως, ὥστε καὶ τοῦ μεγέθους ὃ βεβάδικεν. Ὁμοίως δὲ τοῦτο καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων. Ἔστω δὴ γραμμὴ ἄπειρος, ἐφ' ᾗ ΑΓΕ, ἐπὶ θάτερα, ᾗ τὸ Ε ἡ δ' ἐφ' ᾗ τὰ ΒΒ, ἐπ' ἀμφότερα ἄπειρος. Εἰ δὴ γράψει κύκλον ἡ τὸ ΑΓΕ ἀπὸ τοῦ Γ κέντρου, τέμνουσά ποτε οἰσθήσεται κύκλῳ τὴν τὰ ΒΒ ἡ τὸ ΑΓΕ πεπερασμένον χρόνον ὁ γὰρ πᾶς χρόνος, ἐν ὅσῳ κύκλῳ ἠνέχθη ὁ οὐρανός, πεπερασμένος. Καὶ ὁ ἀφῃρημένος ἄρα, ὃν ἡ τέμνουσα ἐφέρετο. Ἔσται ἄρα τις ἀρχὴ ᾗ πρῶτον ἡ τὸ ΑΓΕ τὴν τὰ ΒΒ ἔτεμεν. Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον. Οὐκ ἄρα ἔστι κύκλῳ στραφῆναι τὸ ἄπειρον. Ὥστ' οὐδὲ τὸν κόσμον, εἰ ἦν ἄπειρος.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῶνδε φανερόν, ὅτι τὸ ἄπειρον ἀδύνατον κινηθῆναι. Ἔστω γὰρ ἡ τὸ Α φερομένη παρὰ τὴν Β, πεπερασμένη παρὰ πεπερασμένην. Ἀνάγκη δὴ ἅμα τήν τε Α τῆς Β ἀπολελύσθαι καὶ τὴν Β τῆς Α ὅσον γὰρ ἡ ἑτέρα ἐπιβάλλει τῆς ἑτέρας, καὶ ἡ ἑτέρα ἐκείνης τοσοῦτον. Εἰ μὲν οὖν ἄμφω κινοῖντο εἰς τοὐναντίον, θᾶττον ἂν ἀπολύοιντο, εἰ δὲ παρὰ μένουσαν φέροιτο, βραδύτερον, τῷ αὐτῷ τάχει κινουμένου τοῦ παραφερομένου. Ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνό γε φανερόν, ὅτι ἀδύνατον τὴν ἄπειρον διελθεῖν ἐν πεπερασμένῳ χρόνῳ. Ἐν ἀπείρῳ ἄρα δέδεικται γὰρ τοῦτο πρότερον ἐν τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως. Διαφέρει δέ γε οὐθὲν ἢ τὴν πεπερασμένην φέρεσθαι παρὰ τὴν ἄπειρον ἢ τὴν ἄπειρον παρ' ἐκείνην ὅταν γὰρ (272b.) ἐκείνη παρ' ἐκείνην, κἀκείνη παραλλάττει ἐκείνην, ὁμοίως κινουμένη καὶ ἀκίνητος πλὴν θᾶττον, ἐὰν κινῶνται ἀμφότεραι, ἀπολυθήσονται. Καίτοι γ' ἐνίοτ' οὐθὲν κωλύει τὴν κινουμένην παρ' ἠρεμοῦσαν θᾶττον παρελθεῖν ἢ τὴν ἀντικινουμένην, ἐάν τις ποιήσῃ τὰς μὲν ἀντικινουμένας ἀμφοτέρας φερομένας βραδέως, τὴν δὲ παρὰ τὴν ἠρεμοῦσαν πολλῷ ἐκείνων θᾶττον φερομένην. Οὐδὲν οὖν πρὸς τὸν λόγον ἐμπόδιον ὅτι παρ' ἠρεμοῦσαν, ἐπείπερ κινουμένην ἐνδέχεται τὴν Α παρὰ κινουμένην τὴν Β βραδύτερον παρελθεῖν. Εἰ οὖν ἄπειρος ὁ χρόνος ὃν ἡ πεπερασμένη ἀπολύεται κινουμένη, καὶ ἐν ᾧ ἡ ἄπειρος τὴν πεπερασμένην ἐκινήθη ἀνάγκη ἄπειρον εἶναι. Ἀδύνατον ἄρα τὸ ἄπειρον κινεῖσθαι ὅλον ἐὰν γὰρ καὶ τοὐλάχιστον κινηθῇ, ἀνάγκη ἄπειρον γίγνεσθαι χρόνον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅ γ' οὐρανὸς περιέρχεται καὶ στρέφεται ὅλος κύκλῳ ἐν πεπερασμένῳ χρόνῳ, ὥστε περίεισιν ἅπασαν τὴν ἐντός, οἷον τὴν ΑΒ πεπερασμένην. Ἀδύνατον ἄρα ἄπειρον εἶναι τὸ κύκλῳ.
102. After setting forth the first argument showing that the circularly moved body is not infinite, on the ground that the distance between two lines proceeding from the center will be infinite and untraversable, the Philosopher now presents the second argument, based on the fact that imaginary lines described in an infinite body, or in its place, cannot intersect.
And in this argument he sets forth the principle that if a finite time is subtracted from a finite time, the remainder will be finite, because part of a finite cannot be infinite; otherwise the whole would be less than the part. And if that remainder of time is finite, it has a beginning, for we say a time is said to be finite, if it has a beginning and end. But it has been demonstrated in VI that time and motion and mobile follow one another in respect to being finite or infinite. Hence if the time which measures a starting out or motion is finite and has a beginning, then the motion must be finite and have a beginning, and so also must be the magnitude moved. And just as this applies to celestial motion, so too to other motions and mobiles.
Having set these things down as principles, he proceeds to demonstrate the proposition. Suppose that, from the center of an infinite body A, there is drawn the line AGE, which is infinite in one direction, namely, toward E; and let that line be revolving with the motion of the whole body, and that, with respect to the point G its motion describes a circle. Let us imagine also, in that imaginary space in which the infinite body is revolved, a certain immobile fixed line BB which does not cross the center but is nevertheless infinite. If then, as has been said, the line AGE by its motion describes a circle from G, i.e., whose radius is AG, it will turn out that the line AGE in making a revolution will cross the entire line BB in finite time. For it is manifest that the radius of a circle cannot be revolved in its circuit without covering or cutting successively the whole fixed immobile line imagined to be in the circle and not passing through the center. And that it is in a finite time that the line drawn from the center cuts the infinite line not passing through the center is manifest from the fact that the whole time in which the heaven is moved is finite, as is evident to our senses. Consequently, a part of that time which is subtracted from the whole time is finite, namely, the time in which AGE falls on line BB. Or rather it follows that that time is finite in which that cutting line is moved to the line which is cut; and this is the time that must be subtracted from all of finite time, so that the remaining time has a beginning, in keeping with the principle enunciated above. It follows, therefore, that the time in which AGE begins to cut BB has a beginning. However, this is impossible, because since it cuts one part before another, then if there is a beginning of the time in which it begins to cut, there would be a beginning in the infinite line, and that is contrary to the notion of infinite.
In this way, then, it is plain that an infinite body cannot be revolved circularly. Hence if the world is infinite, it follows that it is not moved circularly. However, we do observe that the firmament is moved circularly. Hence it is not infinite.
104. The third argument is given at [56] and is based on the infinity of the whole body which is posited as moving circularly. He says, therefore, that also from what follows it is manifestly impossible for an infinite body to be moved circularly. As a premise he says that if A and B are two finite lines so that A is in motion beside B which is stationary, it follows of necessity that as A moves along it departs from the stationary line B, and conversely that the stationary line B is separated from the moved line A. The reason for this is that each of them overlaps the other to the same extent. But now if both are moved in contrary directions, the lines will separate more quickly. If, however, one is in motion beside the other which is stationary, they will separate more slowly — provided, of course, that they have the same speeds when both are in a separating motion and when one alone is in motion. The reason for presenting this as a premise is that the time in which one line traverses the other is the same as that in which the other traverses it.
After manifesting this point with respect to finite lines, he applies it to the infinite lines he is discussing. And he says that it is manifestly impossible for an infinite line to be traversed by a finite line in finite time. Hence it remains that a finite line traverses an infinite line in infinite time, and this was shown previously in the treatise on motion, i.e., in VI. But as appears from what has been said about finite lines, it makes no difference whether it is a finite line being moved through an infinite or an infinite line being moved over a finite, for when an infinite line is being moved through a finite line, the same reasoning holds, whether the finite line is being moved or not. However, it is manifest that if the finite line is being moved as well as the infinite, each traverses the other.
Hence it is manifest that even if the finite line is not being moved, being traversed by the infinite line will be similar to traversing it.
But because he had said that the situation is similar whether the other is moved or not, he now shows wherein there could be a difference: if each of the lines is being moved in a contrary direction, they will separate more swiftly. But this must be understood if the speed is the same, as was said above. For sometimes nothing prevents the line which is being moved next to a stationary one from traversing it more quickly than if it were moved next to a line in contrary motion; for example, when the two lines in contrary motion would have a slow motion, while the one in motion next to the stationary one would have a swift motion. Accordingly, it is no obstacle, so far as the argument is concerned, that the infinite line be moved next to a stationary finite line — since it happens that the moving line A more slowly traverses the moving line B than if the latter were not in motion, provided, of course, that in this second case, while B is stationary, line A is being moved more swiftly.
105. Thus, having shown that it makes no difference whether the infinite line is moved next to a stationary finite line, or whether the finite line is moved against the infinite, he argues from this that if the time in which the finite line traverses the infinite line is infinite, the consequence is that the time in which an infinite line is moved through a finite line is also infinite. Accordingly, it is plainly impossible for an entire infinite body to be moved through an entire infinite space — in which we imagine its motion to occur — in finite time: because if the infinite were moved even through the slightest finite space, it would follow that the time would be infinite, for it has been proved that the infinite is moved through the finite in infinite time, just as the finite through the infinite. But we observe that the heaven circles all its space in finite time. Hence it is manifest that it traverses some finite line in finite time, for example, the line containing within itself the whole circle described about its center, namely, the line AB. Now this would not happen if it were infinite. It is impossible, therefore, that the circularly moved body be infinite.
Three additional reasons why the body moving circularly cannot be infinite.
Ἔτι ὥσπερ γραμμὴν ᾗ πέρας ἐστὶν ἀδύνατον εἶναι ἄπειρον, ἀλλ' εἴπερ, ἐπὶ μῆκος, καὶ ἐπίπεδον ὡσαύτως ᾗ πέρας οὐκ ἐνδέχεται ὅταν δ' ὁρισθῇ, οὐθαμῇ, οἷον τετράγωνον ἄπειρον ἢ κύκλον ἢ σφαῖραν, ὥσπερ οὐδὲ ποδιαίαν ἄπειρον. Εἰ οὖν μήτε σφαῖρα [μήτε τετράγωνον] μήτε κύκλος ἐστὶν ἄπειρος, μὴ ὄντος δὲ κύκλου οὐδ' ἂν ἡ κύκλῳ εἴη φορά, ὁμοίως δὲ μηδ' ἀπείρου ὄντος οὐκ ἂν εἴη ἄπειρος, εἰ μηδ' ὁ κύκλος ἄπειρός ἐστιν, οὐκ ἂν κινοῖτο κυκλικῶς ἄπειρον σῶμα.
Ἔτι εἰ τὸ Γ κέντρον, ἡ δὲ τὸ ΑΒ ἄπειρος καὶ ἡ τὸ Ε πρὸς ὀρθὴν ἄπειρος καὶ ἡ τὸ ΓΔ κινουμένη, οὐδέποτ' ἀπολυθήσεται τῆς Ε, ἀλλ' ἀεὶ ἕξει ὥσπερ ἡ ΓΕ τέμνει γὰρ ᾗ τὸ Ζ. Οὐκ ἄρα περίεισι κύκλῳ ἡ ἄπειρος.
Ἔτι εἴπερ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, κινεῖται δὲ κύκλῳ, ἐν πεπερασμένῳ χρόνῳ ἄπειρον ἔσται διεληλυθώς. Ἔστω γὰρ ὁ μὲν μένων οὐρανὸς ἄπειρος,ὁ δ' ἐν τούτῳ κινούμενος ἴσος. Ὥστ' εἴπερ περιελήλυθε κύκλῳ ἄπειρος ὤν, ἄπειρον τὸν ἴσον αὑτῷ διελήλυθεν ἐν πεπερασμέ— (273a.) νῳ χρόνῳ. Ἀλλὰ τοῦτ' ἦν ἀδύνατον.
Ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἀντεστραμμένως εἰπεῖν, ὅτι εἰ πεπερασμένος ὁ χρόνος ἐν ᾧ περιεστράφη, καὶ τὸ μέγεθος ὃ διελήλυθεν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι πεπερασμένον ἴσον δ' αὑτῷ διελήλυθεν πεπέρανται ἄρα καὶ αὐτός. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν τὸ κύκλῳ κινούμενον οὐκ ἔστιν ἀτελεύτητον οὐδ' ἄπειρον, ἀλλ' ἔχει τέλος, φανερόν.
106. Having given three arguments to prove that the body in circular motion cannot be infinite, he now gives a fourth [47] which is this. It is impossible for a line having an end to be infinite, unless it have an end at one extremity and be infinite at the other. The same is true of a surface: if it has an end at one part, it is not infinite at that part. But when it is limited from every part, it is in no sense infinite. Thus, it is clear that no tetragon, i.e., square, is infinite, nor is a circle which is a plane figure, nor a sphere which is a solid — for these are names of figures, and a figure is something bounded by a terminus or by termini. Thus it is clear that no figured plane is infinite. If, therefore, neither a sphere nor a square nor a circle is infinite, it is clear that there cannot be circular motion that is infinite. For just as there can be no circular motion unless there is a circle, so, if there is no infinite circle, there cannot be an infinite circular motion. But if an infinite body were moved circularly, there would have to be a circular motion that is infinite. Therefore, it is not possible for an infinite body to be moved circularly.
107. The fifth argument is presented at [58] and it is this. Let G be the center of the infinite body in circular motion. Then through this center let a line AB be drawn which is infinite in both directions; then draw another infinite line not passing through the center but perpendicular to BA at E. Imagine these two lines as stationary in the space in which the infinite body is moved circularly. Draw a third line DG from the center and let it be infinite in the direction of D — for in the direction G it has to be finite. Finally suppose that this third line is in motion by the motion of the body. Because the line E is infinite, it will never be separated from it, because it cannot traverse it, since it is infinite; rather it will always maintain itself as GE, i.e., it will always touch or cut line E just as it cut it in the beginning when it began to be moved — for example, when the line GD was superimposed on the line BA and cut the line E perpendicularly at point E. For leaving this position it will cut the line E at the point Z, and so it will cut point after point in it; yet it will never be able to be entirely separated from it. It is impossible, however, for the circular motion to be completed, unless the line GD departs from the line E: because before the circular motion can be completed, the line GD will have to traverse that part of the whole that is opposite to the line E. And so it is plain that an infinite line can in no way traverse the circle in such a way that the entire circular motion be completed. Consequently, an infinite body cannot be moved circularly.
The sixth argument is presented at [59] and he forms his argument in two ways. The first is by leading to an impossibility as follows: Suppose, as you say, that the heaven is infinite. Now it is manifest to us that it moves around in finite time — for we see that its revolution is completed in 24 hours. Therefore it will follow that the infinite is traversed in a finite time. This is so because it is necessary to imagine a space equal to the heaven in which the heaven is moved. But we imagine this space as stationary: thus there will have to be an infinite space in which the heaven is moved and a heavenly body equal to the space in which it is moved, because the body must be equal to the space in which it is. If, then, the infinite heaven has been circularly moved in finite time, the consequence is that it traversed the infinite in finite time. But this is impossible, i.e., to traverse the infinite in finite time, as was proved in VI. It is, therefore, impossible for an infinite body to be moved circularly.
109. Then at [60] he forms his argument conversely in order to make it an ostensive proof. And he says that we can say conversely that, from the fact that the time in which the heaven is revolved is finite (as is plain to the senses), it follows that the magnitude traversed is finite. Now it is plain that the space traversed is equal to the body traversing it. Therefore, the body which is moved circularly is finite.
Therefore he concludes in summary that it is plain that the body which is being moved circularly is not unterminated, i.e., it does not lack a terminus as though it were devoid of shape. Consequently, it is not infinite, but has an ending.
Various reasons why a body moving in a straight line is not infinite.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τὸ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον οὐδὲ τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου φερόμενον ἄπειρον ἔσται
ἐναντίαι γὰρ αἱ φοραὶ ἡ ἄνω καὶ ἡ κάτω, αἱ δ' ἐναντίαι εἰς ἐναντίους τόπους. Τῶν δ' ἐναντίων εἰ θάτερον ὥρισται, καὶ θάτερον ὡρισμένον ἔσται. Τὸ δὲ μέσον ὥρισται εἰ γὰρ ὁποθενοῦν φέροιτο κάτω τὸ ὑφιστάμενον, οὐκ ἐνδέχεται πορρωτέρω διελθεῖν τοῦ μέσου. Ὡρισμένου οὖν τοῦ μέσου, καὶ τὸν ἄνω τόπον ἀνάγκη ὡρίσθαι. Εἰ δ' οἱ τόποι ὡρισμένοι καὶ πεπερασμένοι, καὶ τὰ σώματα ἔσται πεπερασμένα.
Ἔτι εἰ τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω ὥρισται, καὶ τὸ μεταξὺ ἀνάγκη ὡρίσθαι. Εἰ γὰρ μὴ ὥρισται, ἄπειρος ἂν εἴη ἡ κίνησις τοῦτο δ' ὅτι ἀδύνατον, δέδεικται πρότερον. Ὥρισται ἄρα τὸ μέσον, ὥστε καὶ τὸ ἐν τούτῳ σῶμα ἢ ὂν ἢ γενέσθαι δυνατόν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν τὸ ἄνω καὶ κάτω φερόμενον σῶμα δύναται ἐν τούτῳ γενέσθαι πέφυκε γὰρ τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου κινεῖσθαι, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον. Ἔκ τε δὴ τούτων φανερὸν ὅτι οὐκ ἐνδέχεται σῶμα εἶναι ἄπειρον,
καὶ πρὸς τούτοις εἰ βάρος μή ἐστιν ἄπειρον, οὐδ' ἂν τούτων τῶν σωμάτων οὐθὲν εἴη ἄπειρον ἀνάγκη γὰρ τοῦ ἀπείρου σώματος ἄπειρον εἶναι καὶ τὸ βάρος. (Ὁ δ' αὐτὸς λόγος ἔσται καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ κούφου εἰ γάρ ἐστιν ἄπειρος βαρύτης, ἔστι καὶ κουφότης, ἐὰν ἄπειρον ᾖ τὸ ἐπιπολάζον).
Δῆλον δ' ἐκ τῶνδε. Ἔστω γὰρ πεπερασμένον, καὶ εἰλήφθω τὸ μὲν ἄπειρον σῶμα ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ ΑΒ, τὸ δὲ βάρος αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Γ. Ἀφῃρήσθω οὖν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀπείρου πεπερασμένον μέγεθος ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ ΒΔ καὶ τὸ βάρος αὐτοῦ ἔστω ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Ε. Τὸ δὴ Ε τοῦ Γ ἔλαττον ἔσται τὸ γὰρ τοῦ ἐλάττονος βάρος ἔλαττον. Καταμετρείτω δὴ τὸ ἔλαττον ὁποσακισοῦν, (273b.) καὶ ὡς τὸ βάρος τοὔλαττον πρὸς τὸ μεῖζον, τὸ ΒΔ πρὸς τὸ ΒΖ γεγενήσθω ἐνδέχεται γὰρ ἀφελεῖν τοῦ ἀπείρου ὁποσονοῦν. Εἰ τοίνυν ἀνάλογον τὰ μεγέθη τοῖς βάρεσι, τὸ δ' ἔλαττον βάρος τοῦ ἐλάττονός ἐστι μεγέθους, καὶ τὸ μεῖζον ἂν εἴη τοῦ μείζονος. Ἴσον ἄρα ἔσται τὸ τοῦ πεπερασμένου καὶ τὸ τοῦ ἀπείρου βάρος.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ τοῦ μείζονος σώματος μεῖζον τὸ βάρος, τὸ τοῦ ΗΒ μεῖζον ἔσται βάρος ἢ τὸ τοῦ ΖΒ, ὥστε τὸ τοῦ πεπερασμένου ἢ τὸ τοῦ ἀπείρου [μεῖζον ἔσται βάρος].
Καὶ τὸ τῶν ἀνίσων δὲ μεγεθῶν ταὐτὸν ἔσται βάρος ἄνισον γὰρ τῷ πεπερασμένῳ τὸ ἄπειρον.
Οὐθὲν δὲ διαφέρει τὰ βάρη σύμμετρα εἶναι ἢ ἀσύμμετρα καὶ γὰρ ἀσυμμέτρων ὄντων ὁ αὐτὸς ἔσται λόγος οἷον εἰ [τὸ Ε] τρίτον ὑπερβάλλει μετροῦν τὸ βάρος τῶν γὰρ ΒΔ μεγεθῶν τριῶν ὅλων ληφθέντων μεῖζον ἔσται τὸ βάρος ἢ τὸ ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Γ. Ὥστε τὸ αὐτὸ ἔσται ἀδύνατον.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐγχωρεῖ σύμμετρα λαβεῖν οὐδὲν γὰρ διαφέρει ἄρχεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ βάρους ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ μεγέθους οἷον ἐὰν ληφθῇ σύμμετρον βάρος τῷ Γ τὸ ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Ε, καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀπείρου ἀφαιρεθῇ τὸ ἔχον τὸ ἐφ' ᾧ Ε βάρος, οἷον τὸ ΒΔ, εἶτα ὡς τὸ βάρος πρὸς τὸ βάρος, τὸ ΒΔ πρὸς ἄλλο γένηται μέγεθος, οἷον πρὸς τὸ ΒΖ ἐνδέχεται γὰρ ἀπείρου ὄντος τοῦ μεγέθους ὁποσονοῦν ἀφαιρεθῆναι τούτων γὰρ ληφθέντων σύμμετρα ἔσται καὶ τὰ μεγέθη καὶ τὰ βάρη ἀλλήλοις.
Οὐδὲ δὴ τὸ μέγεθος ὁμοιοβαρὲς εἶναι ἢ ἀνομοιοβαρὲς οὐδὲν διοίσει πρὸς τὴν ἀπόδειξιν ἀεὶ γὰρ ἔσται λαβεῖν ἰσοβαρῆ σώματα τῷ ΒΔ, ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀπείρου ὁποσαοῦν ἢ ἀφαιροῦντας ἢ προστιθέντας. Ὥστε δῆλον ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων ὅτι οὐκ ἔσται τοῦ ἀπείρου σώματος πεπερασμένον τὸ βάρος. Ἄπειρον ἄρα. Εἰ τοίνυν τοῦτ' ἀδύνατον, καὶ τὸ ἄπειρόν τι εἶναι σῶμα ἀδύνατον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι ἄπειρόν τι εἶναι βάρος ἀδύνατον, ἐκ τῶνδε φανερόν.
Εἰ γὰρ τοσόνδε βάρος τὴν τοσήνδε ἐν τῷδε τῷ χρόνῳ κινεῖται, τὸ τοσοῦτον καὶ ἔτι ἐν ἐλάττονι,
καὶ τὴν ἀναλογίαν ἣν τὰ βάρη ἔχει, οἱ χρόνοι ἀνάπαλιν (274a.) ἕξουσιν, οἷον εἰ τὸ ἥμισυ βάρος ἐν τῷδε, τὸ διπλάσιον ἐν ἡμίσει τούτου.
Ἔτι τὸ πεπερασμένον βάρος ἅπασαν πεπερασμένην δίεισιν ἔν τινι χρόνῳ πεπερασμένῳ.
Ἀνάγκη ἄρα ἐκ τούτων, εἴ τι ἔστιν ἄπειρον βάρος, κινεῖσθαι μὲν ᾗ τοσόνδε ὅσον τὸ πεπερασμένον καὶ ἔτι, μὴ κινεῖσθαι δέ, ᾗ ἀνάλογον μὲν δεῖ κατὰ τὰς ὑπεροχὰς κινεῖσθαι, ἐναντίως δὲ τὸ μεῖζον ἐν τῷ ἐλάττονι. Λόγος δ' οὐθείς ἐστι τοῦ ἀπείρου πρὸς τὸ πεπερασμένον, τοῦ δ' ἐλάττονος χρόνου πρὸς τὸν μείζω πεπερασμένον ἀλλ' ἀεὶ ἐν ἐλάττονι. Ἐλάχιστος δ' οὐκ ἔστιν.
Οὐδ' εἰ ἦν, ὄφελός τι ἂν ἦν ἄλλο γὰρ ἄν τι πεπερασμένον ἐλήφθη ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ, ἐν ᾧ τὸ ἄπειρον πρὸς ἕτερον, μεῖζον, ὥστ' ἐν ἴσῳ χρόνῳ τὴν ἴσην ἂν ἐκινεῖτο τὸ ἄπειρον τῷ πεπερασμένῳ.
Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν ἀνάγκη γε, εἴπερ ἐν ὁπηλικῳοῦν χρόνῳ πεπερασμένῳ δὲ κινεῖται τὸ ἄπειρον, καὶ ἄλλο ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ τούτῳ πεπερασμένον βάρος κινεῖσθαί τινα πεπερασμένην.
110. After showing that the circularly moved body is not infinite, the Philosopher here shows the same for the body moved with a straight motion, whether from the middle [center] or to the middle [center].
Et primo proponit quod intendit: dicens quod sicut corpus quod circulariter fertur non potest esse infinitum, ita corpus quod fertur motu recto, vel a medio vel ad medium, non potest esse infinitum.
Secundo ibi: contrariae enim lationes etc., ostendit propositum:
First he proposes what he intends and says that just as the circularly moved body cannot be infinite, so, too, the body which is moved with a straight motion, whether from the middle or to the middle, cannot be infinite;
Secondly, he shows the proposition, at 111, and this:
et primo ex parte locorum quae sunt huiusmodi corporibus propria;
secundo ex parte gravitatis et levitatis, per quae huiusmodi corpora in propria loca moventur, ibi: et adhuc si gravitas et cetera.
First on the part of the places which are proper to such bodies;
Secondly, on the part of heaviness and lightness, through which such bodies are moved to their proper places, at 114.
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum quantum ad corpora extrema, quorum unum est simpliciter grave, scilicet terra, et aliud simpliciter leve, scilicet ignis;
secundo quantum ad corpora media, quae sunt aer et aqua, ibi: adhuc si sursum et cetera.
First he shows the proposition as to the extreme bodies, of which one is absolutely heavy, namely, earth, and the other absolutely light, namely, fire, at 111;
Secondly, as to the intermediate bodies, which are air and water, 112.
111. He proposes therefore first [62] that motions of the kind that are up and down, or from the middle and to the middle, are contrary motions. For contrary local motions are ones to contrary places, as has been said, and as was shown in V. It remains, therefore, that the proper places to which such bodies are carried are contrary.
Now, we could have at once concluded from this that such places are determinate: for contraries are things which are most distant; but places that are the greatest distance apart are determinate, for the greatest distance is such that none is greater, whereas in infinites a greater and greater distance is always possible. Hence if the places were infinite, contrariety of places would cease. However, Aristotle passes over this argument as manifest and proceeds by another tack. For it is true that if one contrary is determinate, so too the other, because contraries are members of one genus. But the middle of the world which is the midway terminus of a downward motion is determinate — for from whatever part of the heavens something is moved downward (which exists under the upper part facing the heavens) it can travel no farther in its journey from the heavens than the middle: for if it should go beyond the middle, it would now get closer to the heavens and thus would be moved upward. Accordingly, it is clear that the middle place is determinate. It is likewise clear from the aforesaid that the middle having been determined, i.e., the downward place, then the upward place is also necessarily determinate, because they are contraries. And if both are determinate, then the bodies which are apt to be in these places must be finite. Hence it is clear that the extreme bodies subject to straight motion are finite.
112. Then at 13 [63] he shows the same thing for the intermediate bodies.
First he proposes a conditional, namely, that if up and down are determinate, the intermediate place must be determinate. And he proves this with two arguments, the first of which is this: If, when the extremes were determinate, the intermediate should not be determinate, it would follow that a motion from one extreme to the other would be infinite, on account of the infinite intermediate. But that this is impossible has been shown previously in the discussion about circular motion where it was pointed out that motion through the infinite cannot be completed. Consequently, the intermediate place is determinate. Thus, since the thing in place is commensurate with the place, it follows that the body actually existing in this place or that can exist there, is finite.
113. He gives the second argument at [64] and it is this: A body that is moved up or down can reach the state of existing in such a place. This is clear from the fact that such a body is apt to be moved from the middle or to the middle, i.e., it has a natural inclination to this or that place. Now a natural inclination cannot be in vain, because God and nature do nothing in vain, as was had above. Consequently whatever is naturally moved upward or downward can have its own motion terminated so as to be up or down. But this could not be, if the intermediate place were infinite. Consequently, the intermediate place is finite; so, too, is the body existing in it.
Therefore in summary he concludes from the foregoing that it is clear that no body can be infinite.
Then at [65] he shows that there is no infinite heavy or light body by an argument based on heaviness or lightness. It is this: If a heavy or a light body be infinite, then heaviness or lightness must be infinite. But this is impossible. Therefore, the first supposition [of non-infinity] must be true.
With respect to this, then, he does two things:
primo probat conditionalem;
secundo probat destructionem consequentis, ibi: sed adhuc quoniam infinitam et cetera.
First he proves the conditional proposition, at 114;
Secondly, he proves the destruction of the consequent, at 119.
As to the first he does two things:
First he proposes what he intends and says[65]: If there is no infinite heaviness, none of these, i.e., no heavy body, will be infinite, for the heaviness of an infinite body must be infinite. And the same goes for a light body — for if the heaviness of a heavy body is infinite, the lightness, too, must be infinite, if one supposes some light body carried upward to be infinite.
Secondly, at [66] he proves what he had supposed.
et primo ponit probationem;
secundo excludit obviationes quasdam, ibi: nihil autem differt gravitates et cetera.
First he presents the proof, at 115;
Secondly, he dismisses some objections, at 116.
First, then, he presents an argument leading to an impossibility [66] and it is this: If what was said above is not true, then suppose that the heaviness of an infinite body is finite, and let AB be the infinite body and G its finite heaviness. From this infinite body take away a finite part which is the magnitude BD, which is necessarily much less than the whole infinite body. Now the heaviness of this smaller body is less; consequently, the heaviness of BD is less than the heaviness G which is the heaviness of the whole infinite body body. Let this lesser heaviness be E. Now let E be a measure of the greater but finite heaviness G —for example, E is a third part of the whole G. Now take from the infinite body a part to be added to the finite body BD, according to the proportion by which G exceeds E, and let this exceeding body be BZ, in such a way that the ratio between the lesser heaviness E to the greater G is the same as that between the body BD and body BZ. That this can be done is proved by the fact that from an infinite body can be taken away as much as is needed, since, as is said in Physics II, the infinite is that whose quantity is such that, as much as is taken away, there always remains something beyond to be taken.
Therefore, with these presuppositions, he now argues to three incompatible consequences. First he reasons in this manner. The ratio of heavy magnitudes is the same as the ratio of their heaviness — for we see that a larger body has more heaviness and a smaller body less. But the ratio of E to G, i.e., of the lesser to the more heavy is the same as that of BD to BZ, i.e., of the smaller body to the larger, was was supposed. Therefore, since E is the heaviness of BD, it will follow that G is the heaviness of the body BZ. But G was assumed to be the heaviness of the whole infinite body. Therefore the numerical value of the heaviness of the finite and of the infinite body will be the same. But this is unacceptable, because it will follow that the whole remainder of the infinity body will have no heaviness. Therefore, the first is impossible, namely, that the heaviness of an infinite body be finite.
Secondly, at [67] he leads to another unacceptable consequence. For since it is possible to take from an infinite body as much as one wishes, as has been said, let yet another part be taken from the infinite body and added to the body BZ. And let G be one finite body greater than the finite body BZ. Now the heaviness of larger body is greater, as was said above. Therefore, the heaviness of BI is greater than the heaviness G which was proved to be the heaviness of the body BZ. But it was assumed in the beginning that G was the heaviness of the whole infinite body. Therefore, the heaviness of a finite body will be greater than that of an infinite body. This is impossible. Therefore, the first is impossible, namely, that the heaviness of an infinite body be finite.
Thirdly, at [68] he leads to the third incompatibility, namely, that the heaviness of unequal magnitudes would be the same. This clearly follows from the foregoing, because the infinite is not equal to the finite, because it is greater than it. Hence, since these conclusions are impossible, it is impossible for the heaviness of an infinite body to be finite.
116. Then at 14 [69] he dismisses two objections against the foregoing argument:
primo primam;
secundo secundam, ibi: nec utique magnitudinem et cetera.
First, the first;
Secondly, the second, at 118.
The first objection is that he had supposed in the preceding argument that the lesser heaviness E is a numerical measure of the greater heaviness G. Now this can be denied, for not every greater is measured by a smaller, because a line of 3 hands' length is not a measure of a line of hands' length.
But the Philosopher excludes this objection in two ways. First, because it makes no difference, so far as the conclusion is concerned, whether the two heavinesses, namely, the greater and the less, in question are commensurate, so that the less measures the greater, or not, for the same reasoning holds in either case. For it is necessary that the lesser, taken a certain number of times, either measure or exceed the greater: for example, the product of 2 taken 3 times measures 6 [for 3 times 2 equals 6], while it does not measure 5, but exceeds it. Accordingly, if the heaviness E does not measure the heaviness G, let E be such that 3 times E measures a heaviness greater than the heaviness G. And so in this case the same impossibility as before results, because, if we had taken from the infinite body three magnitudes of quantity BD, the heaviness of such a magnitude will be 3 times that of heaviness E, which is assumed to be the heaviness of the body BD. But a heaviness that is 3 times E is greater (according to our assumptions) than the heaviness G which is the heaviness of the infinite body. Wherefore, the same impossibility as before follows, namely, that the heaviness of a finite body exceed that of an infinite body.
117. Secondly, at [70] he excludes the same objection in another way. And he says that we can assume in the demonstration under discussion that the two heavinesses are commensurate, in such a way that E is commensurate to G. For above we first took from the magnitude a part BD whose heaviness we called E, and this was grounds for saying that E does not measure G. But it makes no difference, so far as the proposition is concerned, whether we begin with the heaviness (by taking any part we want) or with the magnitude so taken. For example, we might begin with the heaviness and take a part of it, namely, E, which measures the whole, namely, G, and then we can take from the infinite body a part BD whose heaviness is E and proceed as above, so that as the heaviness E is to heaviness G, so the magnitude BD is to a greater magnitude BZ. This we can do, because, since the magnitude of the whole body is infinite, as much can be taken from it as we please. By taking the parts of the heaviness and of the magnitude in this way, it will follow that the magnitudes and the heavinesses will be mutually commensurate, i.e., the lesser heaviness will measure the greater, and the smaller magnitude the larger.
118. Then at [71] he excludes a second objection. For he had supposed that the magnitudes are proportional to the heavinesses. Now this is true in bodies having similar parts, for where there is like heaviness throughout the whole, there must be more heaviness in the larger part. But in a body of unlike parts this is not necessarily so, because the heaviness of a smaller part could be greater than that of a larger part, just as a smaller part of earth is heavier than a larger part of water.
This objection he therefore excludes by saying that it makes no difference to the aforesaid demonstration whether the infinite magnitude in question is homogeneous, i.e., of similar parts, or heterogeneous, i.e., of dissimilar parts. For from an infinite body we can take as much as we wish, either adding or subtracting; hence we can assume certain parts to have a heaviness equal to the part taken first, namely BD, whether the parts taken later are larger or smaller in magnitude. For if we should first take BD as having 3 Cubits and having heaviness E, and then take many other parts, for example, of 10 cubits, to make an equal heaviness, it will be the same as if we had taken another equal part having the same heaviness. Consequently, the same impossibility follows.
Therefore, having presented his demonstration and excluded the objections thereto, he concludes from the foregoing that the heaviness of an infinite body cannot be finite. Therefore, it must be infinite. If then, as he will immediately prove, infinite heaviness is impossible, the consequence is that it is impossible for there to be an infinite body.
119. Then at [72] he proves what he had supposed, namely, that there cannot be infinite heaviness. And in this he destroys the consequent of the previously posited conditional. Concerning this he does two things:
Primo proponit quod intendit: et dicit quod adhuc oportet manifestare ex his quae subsequuntur, quod impossibile sit gravitatem infinitam esse.
Secundo ibi: si enim tanta etc., probat propositum.
First he proposes what he intends, and says that we must still show from what will follow that infinite heaviness is impossible.
Secondly, at [73] he proves the proposition.
Et primo praemittit quasdam suppositiones;
secundo ex his argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: necesse igitur ex his etc.;
tertio excludit quandam obiectionem, ibi: neque si esset et cetera.
First he lays down certain presuppositions;
Secondly, he uses them in his argument, at 121;
Thirdly, he excludes an objection, at 122.
First, then, he presents three suppositions. The first of these [73] is that, if such a heaviness, i.e., of some certain amount, moves so much, i.e., throughout a definite magnitude of space, in this time, i.e., a determined time, then necessarily as much and more, i.e., a greater heaviness that has as much and something more than a lesser, will move through as great a magnitude in less time — for by as much as a moving power is stronger, by that much is its motion swifter. Consequently, it will traverse an equal distance in less time, as is proved in VI.
The second supposition is at [74] and follows from the first. For if a greater heaviness moves in less time, then the analogy, i.e., proportion between heavinesses and times is the same, but inversely so, i.e., if half the heaviness moves something in a certain amount of time, then double that amount moves in its half, i.e., in half the time.
The third supposition, at [75], states that a finite heaviness moves through a finite magnitude of space in a certain finite time.
121. Then at [76] he argues from these premises. If an infinite heaviness should exist, two contradictories will follow: namely, that something would be moved according to it, and not moved. That it would be moved follows, indeed, from the first supposition — for if a certain heaviness moves in a certain amount of time, a greater will move more swiftly, i.e., in less time. Since, therefore, an infinite weight is greater than a finite, then, if a finite moves through a definite distance in a definite time, as the third supposition says, the consequence is that an infinite heaviness will move as much and more, i.e., either through a greater distance in the same time, or through an equal distance in less time, which is to be moved more swiftly.
But that something is not moved according to infinite heaviness follows from the second supposition. For a thing must be moved in proportion to the greatness of the weight in inverse proportion, i.e., the greater weight will move in less time. But there can be no proportion between an infinite and a finite weight, although there is a proportion between less time and more time, provided the time is finite. Consequently, there can be no time given in which an infinite weight can move, but something will always be able to be taken as moved in less time than the time in which an infinite weight moves, for there can be taken no least time in which an infinite weight can move in the sense that it would be impossible for something to be moved in a lesser time. Now the reason why no such least time can be assumed is that since all time is divisible, as is any continuum, it is always possible to take a time smaller than any given time, i.e., a part of the divided time. Consequently, an infinite heaviness cannot exist.
122. Then at [77] he excludes an objection. For someone could say that there is a least time, namely, an indivisible time, in which the infinite heaviness moves, just as some have posited certain minimum and indivisible magnitudes. But he excludes this objection:
et primo ostendit quod inconveniens sequatur si ponatur minimum tempus, et quod in hoc infinita gravitas movet;
secundo ostendit idem inconveniens sequi si in quocumque tempore, etiam non minimo, infinita gravitas moveat, ibi: sed adhuc necesse et cetera.
First he shows that an impossibility follows upon assuming a minimum time and that an infinite heaviness moves in that time;
Secondly, he shows that the same impossibility follows if an infinite heaviness should move in any amount of time, even not the minimum, at 123.
He says therefore first [77] that even if there were a minimum time, it would not help in escaping the impossibility that follows from the assumption of infinite heaviness. For although we posit a minimum time, we do not exclude a ratio of this time to a greater time, for this minimum time will be a part of a greater time, just as one is part of number, which allows it to have a ratio to every number. But an indivisible which is not part of a divisible has no proportion to it, just as a point is not a part of a line and therefore there is no proportion of a point to a line. So let us take another heaviness which is finite and as much heavier proportionally than the finite heaviness that moved something in more time than the infinite heaviness, as the minimum time of the infinite heaviness is less than the greater time of the other finite heaviness. For example, let E be the infinite heaviness, and B the minimum time in which it moves, and let G be the finite heaviness that moves something in more time D than time B. Then let F be the other heaviness which is greater than G in the proportion that D exceeds B. Then, since the lessening of time corresponds to the increasing of heaviness, it will follow that the heaviness F, which is finite, will move something in the same time as the infinite heaviness. But this is impossible.
It should be noted that, just as there is no proportion between a point and a line, so there is none between an instant and time, because an instant is not a part of time. Consequently, the only way Aristotle's argument could be destroyed, would be by positing that an infinite heaviness should move in an instant. But that is impossible, as was proved in VI, namely, that any motion should occur in an instant.
Then at [78] he shows that the same impossibility follows in whatever time we assume an infinite heaviness to move. And this is what he says, namely, that if an infinite heaviness should move in any finite time whatever, even though it be not the minimum, it is still necessary that in that time a finite heaviness could move through a finite distance — for one will be able to take an excess of weight corresponding to a lessening of the time, as was said above. Consequently, it is clearly impossible for an infinite heaviness to exist; and the same argument holds for lightness.
A natural and demonstrative argument showing no natural body can be infinite
Ἀδύνατον ἄρα ἄπειρον εἶναι βάρος, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ κουφότητα. Καὶ σώματα ἄρ' ἄπειρον βάρος ἔχοντα καὶ κουφότητα ἀδύνατον. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἔστιν ἄπειρον σῶμα, δῆλον διά τε τῶν κατὰ μέρος θεωροῦσι τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, καὶ καθόλου σκοπουμένοις μὴ μόνον κατὰ τοὺς λόγους τοὺς ἐν τοῖς περὶ τὰς ἀρχὰς εἰρημένους ἡμῖν (διωρίσθη γὰρ κἀκεῖ καθόλου πρότερον περὶ ἀπείρου πῶς ἔστι καὶ πῶς οὐκ ἔστιν) ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν ἄλλον τρόπον.
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτ' ἐπισκεπτέον κἂν εἰ μὴ ἄπειρον μὲν τὸ σῶμα τὸ πᾶν, οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ τοσοῦτόν γε ὥστ' εἶναι πλείους οὐρανούς τάχα γὰρ ἄν τις τοῦτ' ἀπορήσειεν, ὅτι καθάπερ ὁ περὶ ἡμᾶς κόσμος συνέστηκεν, οὐδὲν κωλύει καὶ ἑτέρους εἶναι πλείους μὲν ἑνός, μὴ μέντοι γε ἀπείρους. Πρῶτον δ' εἴπωμεν καθόλου περὶ τοῦ ἀπείρου.
Ἀνάγκη δὴ σῶμα πᾶν ἤτοι ἄπειρον εἶναι ἢ πεπερασμένον, καὶ εἰ ἄπειρον, ἤτοι ἀνομοιομερὲς ἅπαν ἢ ὁμοιομερές, κἂν εἰ ἀνομοιομερές, ἤτοι ἐκ πεπερασμένων εἰδῶν ἢ ἐξ ἀπείρων. Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν οὐχ οἷόν τε ἐξ ἀπείρων, φανερόν, εἴ τις ἡμῖν ἐάσει μένειν τὰς πρώτας ὑποθέσεις πεπερασ(274b.) μένων γὰρ τῶν πρώτων κινήσεων οὐσῶν, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὰς ἰδέας τῶν ἁπλῶν σωμάτων εἶναι πεπερασμένας. Ἁπλῆ μὲν γὰρ ἡ τοῦ ἁπλοῦ σώματος κίνησις, αἱ δ' ἁπλαῖ πεπερασμέναι κινήσεις εἰσίν ἀνάγκη δὲ κίνησιν ἔχειν σῶμα πᾶν φυσικόν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴ γε ἐκ πεπερασμένων ἔσται τὸ ἄπειρον, ἀνάγκη καὶ τῶν μορίων ἕκαστον εἶναι ἄπειρον, λέγω δ' οἷον τὸ ὕδωρ ἢ τὸ πῦρ. Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον δέδεικται γὰρ ὅτι οὔτε βάρος οὔτε κουφότης ἐστὶν ἄπειρος.
Ἔτι ἀναγκαῖον ἀπείρους τῷ μεγέθει εἶναι καὶ τοὺς τόπους αὐτῶν, ὥστε καὶ τὰς κινήσεις ἀπείρους εἶναι πάντων. Τοῦτο δ' ἀδύνατον, εἰ θήσομεν ἀληθεῖς εἶναι τὰς πρώτας ὑποθέσεις, καὶ μήτε τὸ κάτω φερόμενον εἰς ἄπειρον ἐνδέχεσθαι φέρεσθαι μήτε τὸ ἄνω κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον. Ἀδύνατον γὰρ γίνεσθαι ὃ μὴ ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι, ὁμοίως ἐπὶ τοῦ τοιόνδε καὶ τοσόνδε καὶ τοῦ ποῦ. Λέγω δ', εἰ ἀδύνατον γενέσθαι λευκὸν ἢ πηχυαῖον ἢ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ γίνεσθαί τι τούτων ἀδύνατον. Ἀδύνατον ἄρα καὶ φέρεσθαι ἐκεῖ οὗ μηθὲν δυνατὸν ἀφικέσθαι φερόμενον.
Ἔτι εἰ καὶ διεσπασμένα ἐστίν, οὐδὲν ἧττον ἐνδέχοιτ' ἂν τὸ ἐξ ἁπάντων [πῦρ] ἄπειρον εἶναι. Ἀλλὰ σῶμα ἦν τὸ πάντῃ διάστασιν ἔχον ὥστε πῶς οἷόν τε πλείω μὲν ἀνόμοια, ἕκαστον δ' αὐτῶν ἄπειρον εἶναι; πάντῃ γὰρ ἕκαστον δεῖ ἄπειρον εἶναι.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ πᾶν ὁμοιομερὲς ἐνδέχεται τὸ ἄπειρον εἶναι. Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλη παρὰ ταύτας κίνησις. Ἕξει οὖν μίαν τούτων. Εἰ δὲ τοῦτο, συμβήσεται ἢ βάρος ἄπειρον ἢ κουφότητα εἶναι ἄπειρον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' οἷόν τε τὸ κύκλῳ σῶμα φερόμενον [εἶναι ἄπειρον]. Ἀδύνατον γὰρ τὸ ἄπειρον φέρεσθαι κύκλῳ οὐθὲν γὰρ διαφέρει τοῦτο λέγειν ἢ τὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν φάναι ἄπειρον εἶναι, τοῦτο δὲ δέδεικται ὅτι ἀδύνατον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ὅλως γε τὸ ἄπειρον ἐνδέχεται κινεῖσθαι. Ἢ γὰρ κατὰ φύσιν κινηθήσεται ἢ βίᾳ καὶ εἰ βίᾳ, ἔστιν αὐτῷ καὶ ἡ κατὰ φύσιν, ὥστε καὶ τόπος ἄλλος ἴσος εἰς ὃν οἰσθήσεται. Τοῦτο δ' ἀδύνατον.
124. After showing that no single natural body is infinite, the Philosopher here shows by a general argument that no natural body is infinite — for a proof through a common medium causes more perfect science.
About this, therefore, he does two things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo ostendit propositum, ibi: necesse itaque corpus omne et cetera.
First he mentions his intention;
Secondly, he proves his proposition, at 128.
125. As to the first he does three things:
First he shows (as if summarizing) what has been previously said. And he states that for those who think according to the lines already laid down, it is clear that there is no infinite body, "by a detailed consideration of the various cases," i.e., on account of the reasons applied to the individual parts of the universe, namely, to the body that is moved circularly and to the bodies that are move upward or downward.
126. Secondly, at [801 he shows what immediately remains to be said. And he says that the same thing can be clear if someone looks at it universally, i.e., by a common medium. And this is in addition to those general arguments given in the book of the where the common principles of all natural bodies were discussed — for in III is a universal treatment of the infinite, as to how it exists and how not, it being shown there that the infinite exists in potency but not in act. Now, however, the infinite has to be treated in another way, by showing universally that no sensible body can be infinite in act.
127. Thirdly, at [81] he shows what must be determined immediately after these questions. And he says that after proving what has been proposed, our aim will be to inquire (on the supposition that the whole body of the universe is not infinite) whether the whole body is of such size that there can be made from it several heavens, i.e., many worlds. For perhaps someone could wonder whether it is possible that, just as our world is established about us, there might be other worlds, i.e., more than one though not an infinitude. But before dealing with that question, we shall speak universally of the infinite and show that from common reasons no body is infinite.
128. Then at [82] he proves the proposition:
et primo per rationes naturales demonstrativas;
secundo per rationes logicas, ibi: rationabilius autem et cetera.
First by natural demonstrative arguments;
Secondly, by logical arguments (L. 15).
Now I call "demonstrative" and "natural" those arguments that are taken from the proper principles of natural science, whose consideration concerns motion, and action and passion which reside in motion, as is said in III.
Primo ergo ostendit nullum corpus esse infinitum, ex parte motus localis, qui est primus et communissimus motuum;
secundo universaliter ex parte actionis et passionis, ibi: quod autem omnino impossibile et cetera.
First, therefore, at [82] he shows that no body is infinite from the side of local motion, which is the first and most common of motions;
Secondly, universally on the part of action and passion (L. 14).
As to the first he does two things:
primo praemittit quasdam divisiones;
secundo prosequitur singula membra, ibi: quod quidem igitur et cetera.
First he presents certain divisions, at 129;
Secondly, he examines the members individually, at 130.
129. Therefore he first [82] presents three divisions: The first of these is that every body must be either finite or infinite. If it is finite, we have our proposition; but if it is infinite, a second division remains, namely, that it be a heterogeneous whole, i.e., having dissimilar parts, as an animal body which is composed of flesh, bones and sinews; or it is a homogeneous whole, i.e., having like parts, such as water, each part of which is water. But if it is a whole of dissimilar parts, a third division remains, namely, whether the species of the parts of such a body are finite or infinite in number. If it is proved that they are not infinite, nor again finite, and further that no body of parts that are alike is infinite, it will have been proved universally that no body is infinite.
130. Then at [83] he pursues each member. He does three things about this:
primo ostendit quod non est possibile corporis dissimilium partium esse infinitas species partium eius;
secundo ostendit quod non est possibile esse corpus infinitum dissimilium partium, ita quod species partium sint finitae, ibi: sed tamen si quidem etc.;
tertio ostendit quod non est possibile esse aliquod corpus infinitum similium partium, ibi: sed adhuc neque totum et cetera.
First he shows that it is not possible in a body of unlike parts for the species of its parts to be infinite;
Secondly, that it is not possible for an infinite body of unlike parts to be such that the species of its parts be finite, at 131;
Thirdly, he shows that there can be no infinite body having parts that are alike, at 135.
He says therefore first [83] that it is plainly not possible for an infinite body to be constituted from an infinite species of parts, so long as one is loyal to the "first hypotheses," i.e., the previously made suppositions that there are only three species of simple motion. For if the first motions, i.e. the simple motions, are finite, then the species of simple bodies must be finite, for the motion of a simple body is itself simple, as was had above. But it was also held above that simple motions are finite: for there are three, namely, motion to the middle, motion from the middle, and motion around the middle. Now the reason why simple bodies are finite, if simple motions are finite, is that every natural body must have its own proper motion — but if there were an infinite species of bodies, while the number of motions was finite, there would have to be some species of bodies without motions, which is impossible.
Consequently, from the fact that simple motions are finite, it is sufficiently proved that the species of simple bodies are finite. Now it is from simple bodies that mixed bodies are composed. Hence, if there were a whole having unlike parts and composed of an infinite species of mixed bodies, the species of the first components would still have to be finite — though it does not even seem possible that mixtures from finite elements should be infinitely diversified. Neither can any compound body be called a mixture of all like parts, because, even if its quantitative parts be specifically alike, as each part of a stone is stone, yet its essential parts are specifically diverse, for the substance of a mixed body is composed of simple bodies.
131. Then at [84] he shows that it is impossible to have an infinite body of unlike parts, the species of which parts are finite. And he arrives at this with four arguments. The first is that, if a body of unlike parts is infinite and composed of parts that are finite with respect to species, each of the parts would have to be infinite in magnitude. For example, if a mixed body were infinite and composed of elements that were finite, air would have to be infinite, and so would the water and the fire. But this is impossible, because, since each of these is either heavy or light, it would follow according to what was previously said that its heaviness or lightness would be infinite. But it has been proved that no heaviness or lightness can be infinite. Therefore, it is not possible for an infinite body of unlike parts to be composed of a finite species of parts.
However, someone could object that it does not follow from this argument that each of the parts is infinite: for it could be possible for the whole to be infinite if one part were infinite in magnitude and the others finite. But this was rejected in III — for if one part were infinite it would consume the other finite parts on account of its excessive power. Likewise it can be said that even in that case the same impossibility will follow, namely, that there would be an infinite heaviness or lightness. And therefore Aristotle was not concerned with it.
132. The second argument is presented at [85]. For if the parts of an infinite whole were infinite in magnitude, their places would have to be infinite in magnitude, because places are necessarily equal to the things in them. But motion is measured according to the magnitude of the place into which it passes, as is proved in VI. Therefore it follows that the motions of all these parts would be infinite. But this is impossible, if what we supposed above is true, namely, that nothing can be moved downward infinitely, nor upward either — because "down" is determinate, since it is the middle, and for the same reason "up" is determinate (for if one contrary is determinate, so is the other).
And he also proves this by what is common to all motions. For in the transmutation according to substance, we see that it is impossible for a thing to become what it cannot be, as, for example, there cannot be made a rational ass, since it is impossible for an ass to be such. And the same goes for a motion in "such," i.e., with respect to quality and for a motion in "so much," i.e., with respect to quantity, and for a motion in "where," i.e., with respect to place. For if it is impossible for something black ever to have been made white, as a raven, it is impossible for it ever to become white. And if it is impossible for anything to be a foot long, as an ant, it is impossible for it to be moving toward that; and if it is impossible for something to be in Egypt, as the Danube, it is impossible for it to be moving thither. The reason for this is that nature does nothing in vain. But it would be in vain for a thing to be tending to what is impossible for it to reach. Consequently, it is impossible for a thing to be locally moved to a place where it cannot arrive. But it is impossible to traverse an infinite place. If, therefore, places were infinite, there would be no motion. But since that is impossible, it cannot be that the parts of an infinite body of unlike parts be infinite in magnitude.
133. He presents the third argument at [86]. For someone could say that there is no infinite continuous unit, but that there are yet certain parts, disconnected and not continued, which are infinite, as Democritus posited infinite indivisible bodies, and as Anaxagoras posited infinite parts all similar to each other.
But Aristotle says that this position leads no less to an impossibility: for if infinite parts of fire are not joined, there is nothing to prevent all of them from joining and thus making one infinite fire from all of them.
134. The fourth argument he presents at [87]. For when something is said to be infinite, the term should be taken according to its proper meaning. For example, if we say that a line is infinite, we understand it to be infinite in length; while, if we say that a surface is infinite, we understand that it is infinite in length and width. But a body stretches in every direction, because it has three dimensions, as was said above. Consequently, if a body is said to be infinite, it will have to be infinite in every direction, and so in no direction will there be anything outside it. It is therefore not possible that there be in an infinite body many things that are unlike, each of which is infinite, for according to the foregoing it is not possible for there to be a number of infinites.
135. Then at [88] he shows that there cannot be an infinite body having like parts — and this with two arguments. The first of these is that every natural body must have some local motion; but there is no other except those mentioned above, one of which is around the middle, another from the middle, and a third to the middle. It follows, therefore, that it has one of these. But this is impossible — for if it moves upward or downward, it will be heavy or light, and, consequently, its heaviness or lightness will be infinite, which is impossible according to what has gone before. Likewise it cannot be moved circularly, because it is impossible for the infinite to turn in a circle. For there is no difference between saying this and saying that the heaven is infinite — which is impossible, as was proved above. Therefore a whole infinite body cannot be homogeneous.
136. The second argument is set down at [89] and it follows from the common notion of local motion. For if there should be an infinite body of parts that are alike, it follows that it cannot be moved at all. If it is moved, it will be moved either according to nature, or by compulsion. But if it has a compulsory motion, then must be a motion natural to it, because a compulsory motion is contrary to a natural motion, as was had above. But if there is a motion natural to it, it follows that there is a place equal to it, into which it is naturally moved, for natural motion belongs to what is moved to its own place. This, however, is impossible, because it would follow that there would be two infinite corporeal places, which is as impossible as that there should be two infinite bodies, for, just as an infinite body is infinite in every direction, so too is an infinite place. Therefore it is not possible for an infinite body to be moved. But if every natural body is moved, it therefore follows that no natural body is infinite.
It should be noted that this argument applies only to straight motion, for what is moved circularly does not change its place as to subject, but only in conception, as is proved in VI. But that an infinite body cannot be moved circularly has already been proved above in many ways.
1-14
No sensible body is infinite — from action and passion, which follow upon motion.
Ὅτι δ' ὅλως ἀδύνατον ἄπειρον ὑπὸ πεπερασμένου παθεῖν τι ἢ ποιῆσαι τὸ πεπερασμένον, ἐκ τῶνδε φανερόν. Ἔστω (275a.) γὰρ ἄπειρον ἐφ' οὗ Α, πεπερασμένον ἐφ' οὗ Β, χρόνος ἐν ᾧ ἐκίνησέ τι ἢ ἐκινήθη Γ.
Εἰ δὴ ὑπὸ τοῦ Β τὸ Α ἐθερμάνθη ἢ ὤσθη ἢ ἄλλο τι ἔπαθεν ἢ καὶ ὁτιοῦν ἐκινήθη ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ ἐφ' οὗ Γ, ἔστω τὸ Δ τοῦ Β ἔλαττον, καὶ τὸ ἔλαττον ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ ἔλαττον κινείτω ἔστω δὲ τὸ ἐφ' ᾧ Ε ὑπὸ τοῦ Δ ἠλλοιωμένον. Ὃ δή ἐστι τὸ Δ πρὸς τὸ Β, τὸ Ε ἔσται πρὸς πεπερασμένον τι. Ἔστω δὴ τὸ μὲν ἴσον ἐν ἴσῳ χρόνῳ ἴσον ἀλλοιοῦν, τὸ δ' ἔλαττον ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ ἔλαττον, τὸ δὲ μεῖζον μεῖζον, τοσοῦτον δὲ ὅσον ἀνάλογον ἔσται ὅπερ τὸ μεῖζον πρὸς τὸ ἔλαττον. Οὐκ ἄρα τὸ ἄπειρον ὑπ' οὐδενὸς πεπερασμένου κινηθήσεται ἐν οὐθενὶ χρόνῳ ἔλαττον γὰρ ἄλλο ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ ὑπὸ ἐλάττονος κινηθήσεται, πρὸς ὃ τὸ ἀνάλογον πεπερασμένον ἔσται τὸ γὰρ ἄπειρον πρὸς τὸ πεπερασμένον ἐν οὐθενὶ λόγῳ ἐστίν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τὸ ἄπειρον ἐν οὐθενὶ χρόνῳ κινήσει τὸ πεπερασμένον. Ἔστω γὰρ ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Α ἄπειρον, τὸ δὲ Β πεπερασμένον, χρόνος ἐν ᾧ τὸ Γ. Οὐκοῦν τὸ Δ ἐν τῷ Γ ἔλαττον τοῦ Β κινήσει ἔστω τὸ Ζ. Ὃ δή ἐστι τὸ ΒΖ ὅλον πρὸς τὸ Ζ, τὸ Ε ἔχον τὸν λόγον τοῦτον ἔστω πρὸς τὸ Δ. Κινήσει ἄρα τὸ Ε τὸ ΒΖ ἐν τῷ Γ. Τὸ πεπερασμένον τοίνυν καὶ τὸ ἄπειρον ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ ἀλλοιώσει. Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον ἐν ἐλάττονι γὰρ τὸ μεῖζον ὑπέκειτο. Ἀλλ' ἀεὶ ὁ ληφθεὶς χρόνος ταὐτὸ ποιήσει, ὥστ' οὐκ ἔσται χρόνος οὐθεὶς ἐν ᾧ κινήσει.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ἐν ἀπείρῳ γε οὐκ ἔστι κινῆσαι οὐδὲ κινηθῆναι πέρας γὰρ οὐκ ἔχει, ἡ δὲ ποίησις καὶ τὸ πάθος ἔχει.
Οὐδ' ἄπειρον δὴ ὑπ' ἀπείρου ἐνδέχεται οὐθὲν παθεῖν. Ἔστω γὰρ τὸ Α ἄπειρον καὶ τὸ Β, χρόνος δ' ἐν ᾧ ἔπαθε τὸ Β ὑπὸ τοῦ Α, ἐφ' ᾧ ΓΔ. Τὸ δὴ ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Ε τοῦ ἀπείρου μέρος, ἐπεὶ ὅλον πέπονθε τὸ Β, οὐκ ἐν ἴσῳ χρόνῳ τὸ αὐτό ὑποκείσθω γὰρ ἐν ἐλάττονι κινεῖσθαι τὸ ἔλαττον χρόνῳ. Ἔστω τὸ Ε κεκινημένον ὑπὸ τοῦ Α ἐν τῷ Δ. Ὃ δὴ τὸ Δ πρὸς τὸ ΓΔ, τὸ Ε ἐστὶ πρός τι τοῦ Β πεπερασμένον. Τοῦτο τοίνυν ἀνάγκη ὑπὸ τοῦ Α κινηθῆναι ἐν τῷ ΓΔ χρόνῳ ὑπὸ γὰρ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ὑποκείσθω ἐν τῷ πλείονι καὶ ἐλάττονι (275b.) χρόνῳ τὸ μεῖζον καὶ τὸ ἔλαττον πάσχειν, ὅσα ἀνάλογον τῷ χρόνῳ διῄρηται. Ἐν οὐδενὶ ἄρα χρόνῳ δυνατὸν πεπερασμένῳ ἄπειρον ὑπ' ἀπείρου κινηθῆναι ἐν ἀπείρῳ ἄρα. Ἀλλ' ὁ μὲν ἄπειρος χρόνος οὐκ ἔχει τέλος, τὸ δὲ κεκινημένον ἔχει.
Εἰ τοίνυν πᾶν σῶμα αἰσθητὸν ἔχει δύναμιν ποιητικὴν ἢ παθητικὴν ἢ ἄμφω, ἀδύνατον σῶμα ἄπειρον αἰσθητὸν εἶναι.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ ὅσα γε σώματα ἐν τόπῳ, πάντα αἰσθητά. Οὐκ ἔστιν ἄρα σῶμα ἄπειρον ἔξω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οὐθέν. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ μέχρι τινός. Οὐθὲν ἄρα ὅλως σῶμα ἔξω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Εἰ μὲν γὰρ νοητόν, ἔσται ἐν τόπῳ τὸ γὰρ ἔξω καὶ ἔσω τόπον σημαίνει. Ὥστ' ἔσται αἰσθητόν. Αἰσθητὸν δ' οὐθὲν μὴ ἐν τόπῳ.
137. After showing that a sensible body is not infinite with a reason based on local motion, the Philosopher here shows the same thing with a reason based on action and passion, which follow upon every motion. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum;
secundo excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: sed tamen et quaecumque et cetera.
First he demonstrates the proposition;
Secondly, he excludes an objection, at 144.
138. With regard to the first, he gives the following argument: No infinite body has active or passive power or both; but every sensible body has active or passive power or both. Therefore, no sensible body is infinite. Then with regard to this he does two things:
primo probat maiorem;
secundo ponit minorem et conclusionem, ibi: si igitur omne corpus et cetera.
First he proves the major premise;
Secondly, he presents the minor and conclusion, at 143.
About the first he does two things:
First he proposes what he intends and says that it is clear from what will be said that not only is it impossible for something infinite to be moved locally but that universally it is impossible for something infinite to be acted upon or to act upon a finite body.
Secondly, at [91] he proves his proposition.
secundo ostendit quod finitum non patitur ab infinito, ibi: sed adhuc neque infinitum etc.;
tertio ostendit quod infinitum non patitur ab infinito, ibi: neque infinitum utique et cetera.
First he shows that the infinite is not acted upon by the finite, 139;
Secondly, that the finite is not acted upon by the infinite, at 140;
Thirdly, that the infinite is not acted upon by the infinite, at 142.
139. He says therefore first [91] that if an infinite body is acted upon by a finite, let A be an infinite body and B a finite body and, since every motion occurs in time, let G be the time in which B moves or A has been moved. If, therefore, we posit that A, which is the infinite body, is altered by B, which is the finite body, say heated or carried, i.e., moved locally, or affected in any other way, e.g., cooled or moistened, or moved in any way, in time G, let us take one part of the mover B, i.e., a part D (and it makes no difference, so far as the proposition is concerned, if D be some other body less than B). Now it is clear that a smaller body moves a smaller mobile in an equal time (supposing, of course, that there is in the smaller body less power — which must be said, if it is a body of like parts — hence the lesser power moves a smaller body in an equal time). Therefore, let E be a body which is altered or any other way moved by D in the time G, taking E as a part of the infinite whole A. But since both D and B are finite, and since any two finite bodies are mutually proportionate, then, according to the ratio of D to B, let there be taken the proportion of E to any other larger finite body, for example, F.
Having posited these preliminaries, he makes some suppositions. The first of these is that an altering cause which is equal in magnitude and power will alter an equal body in equal time. A second is that a smaller altering body will alter a smaller in equal time, the result being that one moved body will be less than the other moved body according to a ratio of something greater to something less, i.e., in the same proportion that the larger moving body exceeds the smaller moving body.
From these preliminaries, therefore, he concludes that the infinite cannot be moved by any finite in any time. For something less than the infinite will in an equal time be moved by that body which is less than the body moving the infinite; in other words, E, which is less than A, will be moved by D, which is less than B, according to our suppositions. But what is "analogous" to E, i.e., in the same ratio to E, as B to D, is finite, for it cannot be said that A, which is infinite, is to E, as B is to D, because the infinite has no proportion to the finite. Now on the assumption that something finite is to E as B is to D, then commutatively B is to that finite, as D is to E. But D moves E in time G; therefore B moves the finite in time G. But G was the time in which it was supposed that B moved the infinite whole A. Therefore the finite will move a finite and an infinite in the same time.
140. Then at [92] he proves that an infinite body does not move a finite body in any time.
et primo ostendit quod non movet in tempore finito;
secundo quod non movet in tempore infinito, ibi: sed adhuc in infinito et cetera.
First he shows that it does not move it in finite time;
Secondly, not in infinite time, at 141.
He says therefore first [92] that neither will an infinite body move a finite body in any time, namely, determinate time. For if the contrary should be the case, let Abe the infinite body, and B or BZ the finite body moved by it, and G the time in which it is being moved. Let D be a finite part of the infinite body A. And because a lesser moves a smaller in equal time, then a finite body D in time G moves Z, a body smaller than B, but a part of B. Now because the whole BZ is proportionate to Z, let it be taken that the whole BZ is to Z, as E is to D, each of which is part of the infinite. Therefore, commutatively, E is to BZ in the same proportion as D is to Z. But D moves Z in time G; therefore E will move BZ in time G. But in time G, BZ was being moved by the infinite body A. It follows, therefore, than an infinite and a finite are altering or somehow moving one and the mane mobile in the same amount of time. But this is impossible — for it was supposed above that a greater mover moves an equal mobile in less time, because it moves more swiftly. Consequently, it is impossible for the finite to be moved by the infinite in time G; and the same follows no matter what finite time is taken. Hence there is no finite time possible in which the infinite moves the finite.
141. Then at 1[93] he shows that this cannot occur in infinite time. For it is not possible that in an infinite time something shall have moved or shall have been moved — because infinite time has no end, whereas every action or passion does have an end, for nothing acts or is acted upon except in order to reach some end. What remains, therefore, is that an infinite does not move a finite in infinite time.
142. Then at [94] he proves that the infinite does not move the infinite. And he says that an infinite cannot undergo anything from an infinite with respect to any species of motion at all. Otherwise let A be the infinite body which is acting, and B the infinite body acted upon, and DG the time in which B underwent something from A, and let E be a part of the infinite mobile B. Now, since the entire B has been modified by A in the entire time DG, it is clear that E, which is part of B, was not being moved in this whole time. For we must suppose that a smaller mobile is moved in less time by the same mover — for to the extent that a mobile is more overcome by a mover, the more swiftly is it moved by it. So let E, which is less than B, be moved by A in a time D which is part of the whole time GD. Now D is proportionate to GD, since both are finite. Let us assume, therefore, that E has the same ratio to some larger part of the infinite mobile as D has to GD. Then that finite mobile greater than E must be moved by A in time GD, for we must suppose that a larger and a smaller mobile are moved in more and less time when the same mover is acting, in such a way that the division of the mobiles corresponds to the ratio of the times. Since, therefore, the ratio of that finite to E equals the ratio of the entire time DG to D, then commutatively, we must say that the ratio of the entire time DG to that larger finite mobile is as the ratio of time D to mobile E. But E is moved by A in time D; therefore, that greater finite mobile will be moved by A in time DG. Hence the finite and the infinite will be moved in the same amount of time — which is impossible. And the same impossibility follows whatever be the finite time assumed. Consequently it is impossible for an infinite to be moved by an infinite in finite time.
It remains, therefore, that if it is moved, it is moved in infinite time. But that, too, is impossible, as was proved above, because infinite time has no end, but everything which is moved has an end to its motion — for although the whole motion of the heaven does not have an end, one revolution does. It is therefore plain that the infinite has neither active nor passive power.
143. Then at [95], assuming the minor premise, he draws the conclusion and says that every sensible body has active or passive power or both.. He says "sensible body" here to differentiate from "mathematical body," so that the former means every natural body which, as such, is apt to cause motion or be moved. Thus he concludes that it is impossible for a sensible body to be infinite.
144. Then at [96] he excludes a certain objection — for someone could say that there is outside the heavens an "intelligible body" which is infinite.
And he says that all bodies in place are sensible. For they are not mathematical bodies, because these do not have place except in a metaphorical sense, as is said in I. Now place is not needed except for motion, as is said in IV, and only sensible and natural bodies are subject to motion — for mathematical things are outside of motion. Consequently, it is plain that all bodies in place are sensible.
From this he concludes that there is not an infinite body outside the heaven; and indeed, more universally, that no body exists outside the heaven, either absolutely, i.e., namely, an infinite body, or in a certain respect (or up to a certain point), i.e., a finite body. Since bodies are either finite or infinite, it follows that no body at all exists outside the heaven. For if you should say that this body is intellectual, it will follow that it is in a place on account of your assuming that it is outside the heaven — because "outside" and "within" imply place. Consequently, it follows that if there is a body outside the heaven, then, whether it is finite or infinite, it is sensible, since there is no sensible body which does not exist in a place —for even the heaven is somehow in place, as is plain from IV.
So it is manifest according to these words that no intelligible body, finite or infinite, is outside the heaven, because "outside of" signifies place, and nothing is in place except a sensible body. It is also manifest that no infinite sensible body exists outside the heavens, for it was shown above that no sensible body is infinite. But the fact that no sensible finite body exists outside the heavens he does not prove here but supposes it, unless perhaps it is proved by the fact that every sensible body is in a place, and all places are contained within the heavens and determined by the three local motions mentioned above, namely, those around the middle, from the middle, and to the middle.
15
1-15
Logical reasons why no body is infinite.
Λογικώτερον δ' ἔστιν ἐπιχειρεῖν καὶ ὧδε. Οὔτε γὰρ κύκλῳ οἷόν τε κινεῖσθαι τὸ ἄπειρον ὁμοιομερὲς ὄν μέσον μὲν γὰρ τοῦ ἀπείρου οὐκ ἔστι, τὸ δὲ κύκλῳ περὶ τὸ μέσον κινεῖται. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἐπ' εὐθείας οἷόν τε φέρεσθαι τὸ ἄπειρον δεήσει γὰρ ἕτερον εἶναι τοσοῦτον τόπον ἄπειρον εἰς ὃν οἰσθήσεται κατὰ φύσιν, καὶ ἄλλον τοσοῦτον εἰς ὃν παρὰ φύσιν.
Ἔτι εἴτε φύσει ἔχει κίνησιν τοῦ εἰς εὐθὺ εἴτε βίᾳ κινεῖται, ἀμφοτέρως δεήσει ἄπειρον εἶναι τὴν κινοῦσαν ἰσχύν ἥ τε γὰρ ἄπειρος ἀπείρου καὶ τοῦ ἀπείρου ἄπειρος ἡ ἰσχύς ὥστ' ἔσται καὶ τὸ κινοῦν ἄπειρον (λόγος δ' ἐν τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως ὅτι οὐθὲν ἔχει ἄπειρον δύναμιν τῶν πεπερασμένων, οὐδὲ τῶν ἀπείρων πεπερασμένην). Εἰ οὖν τὸ κατὰ φύσιν καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνδέχεται κινηθῆναι, ἔσται δύο ἄπειρα, τό τε κινοῦν οὕτω καὶ τὸ κινούμενον.
Ἔτι τὸ κινοῦν τὸ ἄπειρον τί ἐστιν; εἰ μὲν γὰρ αὐτὸ ἑαυτό, ἔμψυχον ἔσται. Τοῦτο δὲ πῶς δυνατόν, ἄπειρον εἶναι ζῷον; εἰ δ' ἄλλο [τι] τὸ κινοῦν, δύο ἔσται ἄπειρα, τό τε κινοῦν καὶ τὸ κινούμενον, διαφέροντα τὴν μορφὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν.
Εἰ δὲ μὴ συνεχὲς τὸ πᾶν, ἀλλ' ὥσπερ λέγει Δημόκριτος καὶ Λεύκιππος, διωρισμένα τῷ κενῷ, μίαν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι πάντων τὴν κίνησιν. Διώρισται μὲν γὰρ τοῖς σχήμασιν τὴν δὲ φύσιν φασὶν αὐτῶν εἶναι μίαν, ὥσ(276a.) περ ἂν εἰ χρυσὸς ἕκαστον εἴη κεχωρισμένος. Τούτων δέ, καθάπερ λέγομεν, ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τὴν αὐτὴν κίνησιν ὅπου γὰρ μία βῶλος, καὶ ἡ σύμπασα γῆ φέρεται, καὶ τό τε πᾶν πῦρ καὶ σπινθὴρ εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν τόπον. Ὥστ' οὔτε κοῦφον ἁπλῶς οὐθὲν ἔσται τῶν σωμάτων, εἰ πάντ' ἔχει βάρος εἰ δὲ κουφότητα, βαρὺ οὐδέν.
Ἔτι εἰ βάρος ἔχει ἢ κουφότητα, ἔσται ἢ ἔσχατόν τι τοῦ παντὸς ἢ μέσον. Τοῦτο δ' ἀδύνατον ἀπείρου γ' ὄντος.
Ὅλως δ', οὗ μή ἐστι μέσον μηδ' ἔσχατον, μηδὲ τὸ μὲν ἄνω τὸ δὲ κάτω, τόπος οὐθεὶς ἔσται τοῖς σώμασι τῆς φορᾶς. Τούτου δὲ μὴ ὄντος κίνησις οὐκ ἔσται ἀνάγκη γὰρ κινεῖσθαι ἤτοι κατὰ φύσιν ἢ παρὰ φύσιν, ταῦτα δ' ὥρισται τοῖς τόποις τοῖς τ' οἰκείοις καὶ τοῖς ἀλλοτρίοις.
Ἔτι εἰ οὗ παρὰ φύσιν τι μένει ἢ φέρεται, ἀνάγκη ἄλλου τινὸς εἶναι τοῦτον τὸν τόπον κατὰ φύσιν (τοῦτο δὲ πιστὸν ἐκ τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς), ἀνάγκη δὴ μὴ πάντα ἢ βάρος ἔχειν ἢ κουφότητα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν τὰ δὲ μή.
Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν οὐκ ἔστι τὸ σῶμα τοῦ παντὸς ἄπειρον, ἐκ τούτων φανερόν.
145. After showing universally with l reasons, i.e., with arguments taken from facts proper to natural science, that there is no infinite body, the Philosopher here shows the same thing with logical reasons, i.e., arguments taken from certain common principles or from things that are probable but not necessary. And this is what he says [97]: "It is," i.e., it is possible, "to try," to prove the proposition "more from reason, i.e., more according to the logical mode, "thus," i.e., according to the following arguments. Hence another MS is more plain when it says: "One can argue more logically [i.e., dialectically] as follows."
Primo autem ostendit propositum de corpore infinito continuo;
secundo de infinito non continuo, ibi: si autem non continuum et cetera.
First he proves the proposition about an infinite continuous body;
Secondly, about one that is not continuous, at 150.
146. Concerning the first he does two things:
First he shows that an infinite body of like parts cannot be moved circularly. This he proves on the ground that there is neither a middle nor a boundary in an infinite body. But circular motion is around a middle, as was had above. Therefore....
147. Secondly, with three arguments he shows that it is not possible for such an infinite body to be moved with a straight motion. The first of these is this: Every body that is moved with a straight motion can be moved naturally and through force. Now what is moved by force has a place to which it is forcefully moved, and whatever is moved naturally has a place to which it is moved naturally. But every place is equal to the thing in place. Consequently, it will follow that there are two places as large as the infinite body, to one of which it is forcefully moved, and to the other of which naturally. But it is no more possible that there be two infinite places than that there be two infinite bodies, as was had prove. It remains, therefore, that no natural body is infinite.
Both of these reasons are called "logical," because they proceed from what occurs to an infinite body as infinite; whether it be mathematical or natural, namely, to have no middle and nothing equal to it outside of it. Above he posited similar statements, not, however, as principal premises but as assumptions used to manifest other things.
148. The second argument is given at [98], and is as follows: Whether it be said that an infinite body is moved naturally with straight motion or by force, in either case there must be posited a power moving the infinite body — for it was shown in VII and VIII that whatever is moved is moved by another, not only in things that are moved by force (where the principle is more evident), but also in things that are moved naturally, as heavy and light bodies are moved by the generator [or agent producing them], or by whatever removes an obstacle. But since the stronger is not moved by the weaker, it is impossible for an infinite, whose power is infinite, to be moved by the finite power of some mover. Hence it remains that the power of the mover must be infinite.
But it is manifest that if a power is infinite, it will belong to an infinite thing; conversely, if a body is infinite, its power must be infinite. Therefore, if an infinite body is being moved, then the body moving it must be infinite. For it was proved "in the discussion on motion," i.e., in VIII, that no finite thing has infinite virtue, and that no infinite has finite virtue. Consequently, it is plain that if an infinite body is being moved with straight motion, it must be being moved by an infinite body.
Now, if we assume that this infinite body can be moved both according to nature and beside its nature, it will likewise happen, with respect to each motion, that there are two infinites, namely, one that moves thus, i.e., causes natural or compulsory motion, and one that is moved. But this is impossible, namely, that there be two infinite bodies, as was proved above. Therefore, it is not possible for an infinite body to be moved with a straight motion.
This argument is called "logical" because it proceeds from a common property of an infinite body, namely, that it does not have outside it another body equal to it.
It can be concluded from this argument not only that there would be two infinites but more still. For if the infinite body is moved naturally, the body moving it naturally will be infinite; and because it can be moved by force, the body that moves it by force will be infinite. Thus there will be three infinites.
Again, since a motion which is compulsory for one thing, is natural to another, as was stated above, it will follow, too, that there is another infinite body that is moved naturally in the aforesaid way by an infinite power.
149. The third argument he gives at [99]. And this argument is adduced in order to exclude an objection to the preceding argument. For someone could say that an infinite body is naturally moved not by some other body but by itself, as animals are said to move themselves. Consequently, it will not follow that there are two infinite bodies, as the preceding argument concluded.
And therefore he proposes that it is necessary to say, that if there is an infinite body, whatever moves it is distinct from it. For if it moved itself, it would be animate—for it is proper to animals to move themselves. Consequently if the infinite body should move itself, it will be an infinite animal. But this does not seem possible, because every animal has a definite shape and a definite ratio between its parts and the whole, which factors do not belong to an infinite. Consequently, it cannot be said that the infinite moves itself. But if it be said that something else moves it, it will follow that there are two infinites, namely, the mover and the moved. And from this it follows that they differ in kind and in power: because the mover is related to the mobile as act to potency. But this is impossible, as was previously shown.
150. Then at [100] he shows that there is no infinite which is non-continuous but distinguished by the interposition of voids, as Democritus and Leucippus posited. This he proves with three arguments. With regard to the first he says that if an infinite is not one continuous whole but is, as Democritus and Leucippus maintain, distinguished by an intermediate void — for they posited that the indivisible bodies cannot be mutually joined without an intervening void — then according to their opinion it follows that for all of them there is one motion. For they said that those infinite indivisible bodies are determined, i.e., mutually distinguished, only by their shape, namely, insofar as one is pyramidal, another spherical, another cubic, and so on. Yet they say that all of them are one with respect to their nature, as if, for example, someone said that each of them in isolation had the nature of gold. But if the nature of all is one, then, necessarily, all have one and the same motion in spite of their being the minimal parts of bodies — because the motion of the whole and of the part is the same, as is the motion of the whole earth and one clod, and of all fire and one spark.
Therefore, if all are of the same nature and have the same motion, then all are either moved downward as though having gravity — and thus there will be no body that is absolutely light, since all bodies are said to be composed of these; or else all are moved upward, as though having lightness, and thus no body will be heavy — which is impossible.
151. The second argument, given at [101], is this: Every heavy body is moved to the middle and every light body to the boundary. If, therefore, some or each of the aforesaid indivisible bodies had heaviness or lightness, it would follow that there would be a boundary and a center of that whole space contained by the indivisible bodies and the intermediate voids. But that is impossible, since all that space is infinite. It remains, therefore, that this position is impossible.
152. And since this argument effectively destroys the infinite howsoever assumed, i.e., whether continuous or non-continuous, he therefore presents this same argument in a more universal way at [102]. And he says that we can say universally that where there is no middle and no extreme boundary, there is no "up," which is the boundary, and no "down," which is the middle. And if these are removed, there is no place where bodies can be moved with straight motion; for they are moved upward or downward. But if place is removed, there will be no motion — for whatever is moved, must be moved either according to its nature or outside its nature, and this is judged by places that are proper and alien — for natural motions are those in which bodies are moved to their proper places, while compulsory motions are those in which they are moved to alien places. But this is impossible, namely, that motion be taken away from bodies. Therefore, it is impossible to posit an infinite.
153. The third argument is given at [103]. And he says that the place to which something is moved outside its nature, or in which it rests outside its nature, must be according to nature for something else which is moved to it naturally and rests in it naturally. And this becomes credible by induction: for earth is moved upward outside its nature but fire according to nature; conversely, fire is moved downward outside its nature but earth according to nature. Now we observe certain things being moved downward and others upward. If the things being moved upward are moved outside their nature, we will be obliged to say that there are other things which are moved upward according to nature; likewise, if the things being moved downward are assumed to be moved outside their nature, it is necessary to posit other things that are moved downward according to nature. Hence not all things have heaviness and not all have lightness according to the foregoing position, but those naturally moved downward have heaviness, while those naturally moved upward do not have it.
Finally in summary he concludes [104] that it is manifest from the foregoing that there is no infinite body at all, i.e., no infinite that is continuous and none that is distinguished by intervals of void.
And these last arguments are called "logical," because they proceed. from probabilities not yet completely proved.
1-16
Two arguments for one universe, taken from lower bodies.
Διότι δ' οὐδὲ πλείους οἷόν τ' οὐρανοὺς εἶναι, λέγωμεν τοῦτο γὰρ ἔφαμεν ἐπισκεπτέον, εἴ τις μὴ νομίζει καθόλου δεδεῖχθαι περὶ τῶν σωμάτων ὅτι ἀδύνατον ἐκτὸς εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου τοῦδε ὁτιοῦν αὐτῶν, ἀλλὰ μόνον ἐπὶ τῶν ἀορίστως κειμένων εἰρῆσθαι τὸν λόγον.
Ἅπαντα γὰρ καὶ μένει καὶ κινεῖται καὶ κατὰ φύσιν καὶ βίᾳ, καὶ κατὰ φύσιν μέν, ἐν ᾧ μένει μὴ βίᾳ, καὶ φέρεται, καὶ εἰς ὃν φέρεται, καὶ μένει ἐν ᾧ δὲ βίᾳ, καὶ φέρεται βίᾳ, καὶ εἰς ὃν βίᾳ φέρεται, βίᾳ καὶ μένει. Ἔτι εἰ βίᾳ ἥδε ἡ φορά, ἡ ἐναντία κατὰ φύσιν.
Ἐπὶ δὴ τὸ μέσον τὸ ἐνταῦθα εἰ βίᾳ οἰσθήσεται ἡ γῆ ἐκεῖθεν, ἐντεῦθεν οἰσθήσεται ἐκεῖ κατὰ φύσιν
καὶ εἰ μένει ἐνταῦθα ἡ ἐκεῖθεν μὴ βίᾳ, καὶ οἰσθήσεται δεῦρο κατὰ φύσιν. Μία γὰρ ἡ κατὰ φύσιν.
Ἔτι ἀνάγκη πάντας τοὺς κόσμους ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν εἶναι σωμάτων, ὁμοίους γ' ὄντας τὴν φύσιν. Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τῶν σωμάτων ἕκαστον ἀναγκαῖον τὴν αὐτὴν (276b.) ἔχειν δύναμιν, οἷον λέγω πῦρ καὶ γῆν καὶ τὰ μεταξὺ τούτων εἰ γὰρ ὁμώνυμα ταῦτα καὶ μὴ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν ἰδέαν λέγονται τἀκεῖ τοῖς παρ' ἡμῖν, καὶ τὸ πᾶν ὁμωνύμως ἂν λέγοιτο κόσμος. Δῆλον τοίνυν ὅτι τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου φέρεσθαι πέφυκε, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον αὐτῶν, εἴπερ πᾶν ὁμοειδὲς τὸ πῦρ τῷ πυρὶ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἕκαστον, ὥσπερ καὶ τὰ ἐν τούτῳ μόρια τοῦ πυρός.
Ὅτι δ' ἀναγκαῖον οὕτως ἔχειν, ἐκ τῶν περὶ τὰς κινήσεις ὑποθέσεων φανερόν αἵ τε γὰρ κινήσεις πεπερασμέναι, ἕκαστόν τε τῶν στοιχείων λέγεται καθ' ἑκάστην τῶν κινήσεων. Ὥστ' εἴπερ καὶ αἱ κινήσεις αἱ αὐταί, καὶ τὰ στοιχεῖα ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι πανταχοῦ ταὐτά.
Πέφυκεν ἄρα φέρεσθαι καὶ ἐπὶ τόδε τὸ μέσον τὰ ἐν ἄλλῳ κόσμῳ τῆς γῆς μόρια, καὶ πρὸς τόδε τὸ ἔσχατον τὸ ἐκεῖ πῦρ. Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον τούτου γὰρ συμβαίνοντος ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι ἄνω μὲν τὴν γῆν ἐν τῷ οἰκείῳ κόσμῳ, τὸ δὲ πῦρ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὴν ἐντεῦθεν γῆν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου φέρεσθαι κατὰ φύσιν πρὸς τὸ ἐκεῖ φερομένην μέσον, διὰ τὸ τοὺς κόσμους οὕτω κεῖσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους. Ἢ γὰρ οὐ θετέον τὴν αὐτὴν εἶναι φύσιν τῶν ἁπλῶν σωμάτων ἐν τοῖς πλείοσιν οὐρανοῖς, ἢ λέγοντας οὕτως τὸ μέσον ἓν ποιεῖν ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον τούτου δ' ὄντος ἀδύνατον εἶναι κόσμους πλείους ἑνός.
Τὸ δ' ἀξιοῦν ἄλλην εἶναι φύσιν τῶν ἁπλῶν σωμάτων, ἂν ἀποσχῶσιν ἔλαττον ἢ πλεῖον τῶν οἰκείων τόπων, ἄλογον τί γὰρ διαφέρει τὸ τοσονδὶ φάναι μῆκος ἀπέχειν ἢ τοσονδί; Διοίσει γὰρ κατὰ λόγον, ὅσῳ πλεῖον μᾶλλον, τὸ δ' εἶδος τὸ αὐτό.
154. After showing that the universe is not infinite in magnitude, the Philosopher here shows that there are not numerically many worlds, much less an infinitude of them.
Et primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo exequitur propositum, ibi: omnia enim et manent et cetera.
First he mentions his intention;
Secondly, he pursues his proposition, at 155.
He says therefore first [105] that because it has been proved that the body of the whole universe is not infinite, there remains for us to say that it is not possible that there be many heavens, i.e., many worlds: for we had already mentioned above that this was to be discussed.
It should be noted that above the Philosopher mentioned that outside the heavens there is no body either finite or infinite; from which it follows that there is not another world besides it, for that would put a body outside the heavens. Consequently, if it were sufficiently proved above that outside the heavens there exists no body either finite or infinite, nothing would remain to be proved. But if someone does not consider that it was proved for bodies universally, namely, that it is impossible for any of them to be outside the world, but considers that the argument given above refers only to bodies assumed infinite, then, according to this, it still remains to be seen whether it is possible that there be many heavens, i.e., many worlds.
155. Then at [106] he proves his proposition:
et primo ostendit quod sit tantum unus mundus;
secundo inquirit an possibile sit esse plures mundos, ibi: quod autem non solum unus et cetera.
First he shows that there is but one world;
Secondly, he inquires whether it is possible that there be many worlds (L. 19).
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit esse tantummodo unum mundum, ratione sumpta ex inferioribus corporibus, ex quibus omnes ponebant mundum consistere;
secundo ostendit idem communiter ex utrisque corporibus, tam inferioribus quam caelestibus, ibi: adhuc autem et per eas et cetera.
First he shows that there is only one world and takes his argument from the lower bodies, of which everyone supposed the world to consist, at 156;
Secondly, he shows the same with a general argument based on both the lower and the celestial bodies (L. 18).
About the first he does two things:
primo inducit rationes ad propositum ostendendum;
secundo probat quoddam quod supposuerat, ibi: quod autem est aliquid et cetera.
First he adduces arguments to prove his proposition;
Secondly, he proves something he had presupposed (L. 17).
Circa primum ponit tres rationes:
secunda incipit ibi: adhuc necesse etc.;
tertia ibi: sed adhuc et cetera.
The second one begins at 159;
The third one in
156. Regarding the first he does two things:
First he presents three suppositions. The first is that all bodies rest and are moved both according to nature and according to compulsion. This of course is true in lower bodies which, since they can be generated and corrupted, can not only be transmuted from their species by the power of a stronger agent, but can be removed from their place by a violent motion or by violent rest. But in celestial bodies, since they are incorruptible, nothing can be violent and outside their nature.
The second supposition is that in whatever place certain bodies remain according to nature and not through compulsion, they are moved thither by nature, and into whatever place things are carried by nature they naturally rest there. And the same is to be said about violence: in whatever place things rest through violence, they are carried to that place by violence; conversely, if they are carried to a place through violence, they are at rest there through violence. The reason for this supposition is that since rest in a place is the end of local motion, the motion must be proportionate to the rest, just as the end is proportionate to the means.
The third supposition is that if any change of place is accomplished by violence to a body, the contrary change is according to nature for that body, as is plain from what was said above.
157. Secondly, at [107] from these suppositions he argues to his proposition. First on the part of motion. For if there are two worlds, there must be earth in both. Therefore the earth in that other world will be moved to the middle of this world either by nature or by compulsion. If by the latter, we shall have to say, according to the third supposition, that the contrary change of place, i.e., from this world to the middle of that world is natural to it. And this is plainly false, since earth is never naturally moved from the middle of this world. Therefore, the first is also false, namely, that there is more than one world.
158. Secondly, at [108] he argues to the same on the part of rest. For just as it is plain that the nature of earth does not allow being moved naturally from the middle of this world, so, too, the nature of earth has this quality, that it be naturally at rest in the middle of this world. If then earth brought here from that world remains here not by violence but by nature, it follows, according to the second supposition, that it will be brought from that middle to here according to nature. And this is so because there is but one motion, or one change of place, that is according to nature for earth; hence both motions cannot be natural to earth, namely, from that middle to this or from this to that.
159. Then at [109] he presents a second argument which excludes a certain defect which someone can claim in the first argument: for someone could answer to the first that the earth in that world is different in nature from that in this world.
Primo ergo Aristoteles hoc excludit;
secundo ex hoc argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: natae sunt igitur ferri etc.;
tertio excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: dignificare autem et cetera.
First, then, Aristotle dismisses this at 160;
Secondly, from this he argues to his proposition, at 162;
Thirdly, he excludes an objection, at 163.
He shows that the earth in the other world is of the same nature as that of this world:
primo quidem ratione accepta ex parte mundi;
secundo ratione accepta ex parte motus, ibi: quod autem necesse sit et cetera.
First with an argument taken on the part of the world, at
Secondly, with one based on motion, at 161.
160. He says therefore first [109] that if the several worlds posited are of a like nature, they must be composed of the same bodies; further, each of those bodies must have the same virtue as the body of this world. Consequently, fire and earth must have the same virtue in each of those worlds, and the same goes for the intermediate bodies, air and water. For if the bodies that are there in another world are spoken of equivocally in relation to the bodies that exist among us in this world and are not according to the same "idea," i.e., not of the same species, the consequence will be that the entire world consisting of such bodies will be only equivocally called a world. For wholes that are composed of parts diverse in species are themselves diverse. But this does not seem to be the intention of those who posit many worlds; rather they use the word "world" univocally. Hence it follows according to their intention that the bodies in these different worlds possess the same virtue. And thus it is manifest that even in those worlds, just as in this, some one of the bodies constituting the world is apt to be moved from the middle, which belongs to fire, and some other to the middle, which belongs to earth, if it is true that all fire is akin in species to all other fire in whatever world it exists, just as the various parts of fire in this world are of one species. And the same holds for the other bodies.
161. Then at [110] he shows the same thing with an argument taken from motion. And he says that it is manifestly necessary that things be as we have said concerning the uniformity of the bodies which are in the various worlds; and this from the suppositions which are assumed with respect to motions. And he calls "suppositions" the statements which he uses to show the proposition, because here they are being assumed as principles, although some of them have been previously proved. Now one of the suppositions is that motions are finite, i.e., determinate with respect to species; for there are not infinite species of simple notions, but three only, as was proved above. A second supposition is that each of the elements is described in terms of having a natural tendency toward some one of the motions; as earth is described as heavy on account of its tendency to downward motion, and fire light on account of its aptitude for upward motion.
Hence, since the species of motion are determinate, the same specific motions must exist in every world. And because each of the elements is described with respect to some motion, it is further necessary that the elements are specifically the same everywhere, i.e., in each world.
162. Then at [111] from these premises he argues to the proposition. For if the bodies in every world are of the same species, and we see that all the parts of earth in this world are carried to the middle of this world, and all parts of fire to its boundary, then the consequence will be that also all the parts of earth in any other world are moved to the middle of this world, and all the parts of fire in any other world to the boundary of this world. But this is impossible. For if this should happen, the earth in another world would have to be carried upward in its own world and fire in that world would have to be carried to its middle. Similarly, the earth in this world would be naturally carried from the center of this world to the center of that world.
And this must follow on account of the disposition of the worlds which have such a position that the middle of one world is at a distance from the middle of another; consequently, earth cannot be moved to the middle of another world without leaving the middle of its own world and moving to the boundary, which is to be moved upward. Likewise, because the boundaries of various worlds have different positions, then if fire is to be carried to the boundary of another world, it must leave the boundary of its own world, which is to be moved downward in its own world. But all these things are untenable — for either we must posit that the natures of the simple bodies are not the same in the several worlds (which was disproved above), or, if we say that they are of the same nature and wish to avoid the aforesaid inconsistencies which follow upon a diversity of middles and boundaries, we must admit but one middle to which all heavy bodies, wherever they are, are moved, and one boundary to which are moved all light things wherever they be. On this assumption, it is impossible that there be many worlds, because one middle and one boundary imply one circle or sphere.
163. Then at [112] he excludes an objection, since someone could say that the bodies in another world are not moved to the center and boundaries of this world on account of the distance.
But he rejects this and says that it is unreasonable to accept the postulate that the natures of simple bodies vary on the ground of their being more or less distant from their places, so as to be moved to their places when they are near but not when they are far away. For it does not seem to make any difference to the nature of the body whether it is this far or that far from its place, because mathematical differences do not vary the nature. For it is according to reason that the closer a body gets to its place the more swiftly is it moved, but yet the species of its motion and of the mobile are not varied. For a difference in velocity is according to quantity, not according to species, just as is a difference in length.
1-17
A third argument from lower bodies. Natural bodies have determinate places
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ἀνάγκη γ' εἶναί τινα κίνησιν αὐτῶν ὅτι μὲν γὰρ κινοῦνται, φανερόν. Πότερον οὖν βίᾳ πάσας ἐροῦμεν κινεῖσθαι καὶ τὰς ἐναντίας; ἀλλ' ὃ μὴ πέφυκεν ὅλως κινεῖσθαι, ἀδύνατον τοῦτο κινεῖσθαι βίᾳ. Εἰ τοίνυν ἐστί τις κίνησις αὐτῶν κατὰ φύσιν, ἀνάγκη τῶν ὁμοειδῶν καὶ τῶν καθ' ἕκαστον πρὸς ἕνα ἀριθμῷ τόπον ὑπάρχειν τὴν κίνησιν, οἷον πρὸς τόδε τι μέσον καὶ πρὸς τόδε τι ἔσχατον.
Εἰ δὲ πρὸς εἴδει ταὐτά, (277a.) πλείω δέ, διότι καὶ τὰ καθ' ἕκαστα πλείω μέν, εἴδει δ' ἕκαστον ἀδιάφορον, οὐ τῷ μὲν τῷ δ' οὐ τοιοῦτον ἔσται τῶν μορίων, ἀλλ' ὁμοίως πᾶσιν ὁμοίως γὰρ ἅπαντα κατ' εἶδος ἀδιάφορα ἀλλήλων, ἀριθμῷ δ' ἕτερον ὁτιοῦν ὁτουοῦν. Λέγω δὲ τοῦτο, ὅτι εἰ τὰ ἐνταῦθα μόρια πρὸς ἄλληλα καὶ τὰ ἐν ἑτέρῳ κόσμῳ ὁμοίως ἔχει, καὶ τὸ ληφθὲν ἐντεῦθεν οὐδὲν διαφερόντως πρὸς τῶν ἐν ἄλλῳ τινὶ κόσμῳ μορίων καὶ πρὸς τῶν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ, ἀλλ' ὡσαύτως διαφέρουσι γὰρ οὐθὲν εἴδει ἀλλήλων.
Ὥστ' ἀναγκαῖον ἢ κινεῖν ταύτας τὰς ὑποθέσεις, ἢ τὸ μέσον ἓν εἶναι καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον. Τούτου δ' ὄντος ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἕνα μόνον εἶναι καὶ μὴ πλείους, τοῖς αὐτοῖς τεκμηρίοις τούτοις καὶ ταῖς αὐταῖς ἀνάγκαις.
Ὅτι δ' ἔστι τι οὗ πέφυκεν ἡ γῆ φέρεσθαι καὶ τὸ πῦρ, δῆλον καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων.
Ὅλως γὰρ τὸ κινούμενον ἔκ τινος εἴς τι μεταβάλλει, καὶ ταῦτα ἐξ οὗ καὶ εἰς ὃ εἴδει διαφέρει πᾶσα δὲ πεπερασμένη μεταβολή οἷον τὸ ὑγιαζόμενον ἐκ νόσου εἰς ὑγίειαν καὶ τὸ αὐξανόμενον ἐκ μικρότητος εἰς μέγεθος. Καὶ τὸ φερόμενον ἄρα καὶ γὰρ τοῦτο γίνεταί ποθέν ποι. Δεῖ ἄρα εἴδει διαφέρειν ἐξ οὗ καὶ εἰς ὃ πέφυκε φέρεσθαι, ὥσπερ τὸ ὑγιαζόμενον οὐχ οὗ ἔτυχεν, οὐδ' οὗ βούλεται ὁ κινῶν. Καὶ τὸ πῦρ ἄρα καὶ ἡ γῆ οὐκ εἰς ἄπειρον φέρονται, ἀλλ' εἰς ἀντικείμενα ἀντίκειται δὲ κατὰ τόπον τὸ ἄνω τῷ κάτω, ὥστε ταῦτα ἔσται πέρατα τῆς φορᾶς.
Ἐπεὶ καὶ ἡ κύκλῳ ἔχει πως ἀντικείμενα τὰ κατὰ διάμετρον, τῇ δ' ὅλῃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐναντίον οὐδέν, ὥστε καὶ τούτοις τρόπον τινὰ ἡ κίνησις εἰς ἀντικείμενα καὶ πεπερασμένα. Ἀνάγκη ἄρα εἶναί τι τέλος καὶ μὴ εἰς ἄπειρον φέρεσθαι.
Τεκμήριον δὲ τοῦ μὴ εἰς ἄπειρον φέρεσθαι καὶ τὸ τὴν γῆν μέν, ὅσῳ ἂν ἐγγυτέρω ᾖ τοῦ μέσου, θᾶττον φέρεσθαι, τὸ δὲ πῦρ, ὅσῳ ἂν τοῦ ἄνω. Εἰ δ' ἄπειρον ἦν, ἄπειρος ἂν ἦν καὶ ἡ ταχυτής, εἰ δ' ἡ ταχυτής, καὶ τὸ βάρος καὶ ἡ κουφότης ὡς γὰρ <�εἰ> τῷ κατωτέρω ταχὺ ἦν τι, ἕτερον τῷ βάρει ἂν ἦν ταχύ, οὕτως εἰ ἄπειρος ἦν ἡ τούτου ἐπίδοσις, καὶ ἡ τῆς ταχυτῆτος ἐπίδοσις ἄπειρος ἂν ἦν.
164. Having given two arguments showing that the world is one, Aristotle here gives a third argument for the same. And this argument adds something which seemed to be lacking in the first argument. For someone could say that it is not inherent in bodies to be naturally moved to certain definite places, or, if they are moved to definite places, those that are one in species and diverse in number are moved to numerically diverse places, which agree in species. But they are not moved to the same numerical place as the first argument supposed. Therefore, in order to make these things sure, Aristotle adduces this third argument. With respect to this he does three things:
primo ponit rationem;
secundo excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: si autem ad specie eadem etc.;
tertio infert principalem conclusionem, ibi: itaque necessarium et cetera.
First he gives the argument, at 165;
Secondly, he excludes an objection, at 166;
Thirdly, he infers the main conclusion, at 169.
165. He says therefore first [113] that the above-mentioned bodies must have some motion. For it is manifest that they are moved — this, indeed, is evident to sense and to reason, because such are natural bodies, i.e., bodies which it befits to be moved. Therefore there can remain the doubt whether it is to be said that natural bodies are moved violently with all the motions with which they are moved, even if they are contrary motions — for example, that fire is moved both upward and downward by compulsion. But this is impossible, because what is not apt to be moved at all, i.e., what of its nature has no motion cannot be moved by compulsion. For we say that a thing suffers compulsion if it is removed from its proper inclination by the force of a stronger agent. If, therefore, there is not a natural inclination to certain motions in bodies, compulsion has no place in them — any more than blindness would be attributed to an animal if it had no capacity to see. Consequently, we must admit that those bodies which are parts of the world have a motion according to nature, and among the bodies having a nature, the motion is one. Now motion is called "one" inasmuch as it is to one terminus, as is plain in V. Therefore the motion of each thing belonging to the same species must be to one numerical place: namely, if they are heavy, it is to the middle, which is of this world; if they are light, it is to the boundary which is of this world. And upon this it follows that there is one world.
166. Then at [114] he excludes an objection. For someone could say that all bodies having the same natural motion are moved to places that are the same in species, but several numerically — since even the singulars, i.e., the individual parts of one natural body, e.g., earth or water, are numerically many but do not differ in species. But oneness of nature in the mobiles that are of the same species does not seem to require any more than that their motion be one in species; in keeping with this, it would seem to be enough if the places at which the motion is terminated were alike in species.
167. But in order to exclude this he says that such an accident, namely, being moved to the same specific places, does not seem to be congruent to one set of parts and not to another (i.e., such that some parts alike in species would be moved to the same numerical place and others to the same specific place); rather it should be congruent to all alike (i.e., either all the parts alike in species be moved to the same numerical place, or all such parts be moved to one place specifically similar but numerically different) — for all such parts are alike in not differing specifically, but each differs from the other numerically. The reason he says this is that the parts of any body, for example, earth, which are in this world are similarly related both to the parts of earth in this world and to the parts in another world, since earth here and earth there are specifically the same. If, then, a part, e.g., of earth, be taken hence, i.e., from this world, it makes no difference whether it is compared to parts in some other world or to parts in this world; rather the relationships are the same in both cases. For the parts of earth in this world and those in some other world do not differ in species. And the same holds for other bodies. But we see that all parts of earth in this world are moved to one numerical place; similarly for other bodies. Therefore all the parts of earth in whatever world they exist are naturally moved to this middle of this world.
168. Therefore the very natural inclination of all heavy bodies to one numerical middle, and of all light bodies to numerically one boundary, manifests the unity of the world. For it cannot be said that in the many worlds, bodies would be arranged according to diverse middles and boundaries, as happens in the case of men in whom the centers and boundaries are numerically diverse but specifically the same. For the nature of man's members or those of any other animal is not determined with respect to their relationship to some place but rather with respect to their relationship to some act; indeed, the position occupied by the parts of animals is in keeping with a suitable operation of the members. But the nature of heavy and of light things is determined to definite places, such that all having the same nature also have numerically one natural inclination to numerically one place.
169. Then at [115] he infers the principal conclusion. For when a conclusion according to due form is inferred from premises, either the conclusion must be concluded or the premises denied. He concludes, therefore, that either it is necessary to deny these suppositions, i.e., the principles from which he concluded the proposition, or to concede the conclusion, namely, that there is one middle to which all heavy things are moved, and one boundary to which all light things are carried. If this is true, then it is necessary as a consequence that there be one heaven, i.e., one world and not several, and this on account of the above-given "arguments," i.e., signs and "necessities," i.e., necessary arguments.
170. Then at [116] he proves something he had assumed, namely, that natural bodies have definite places to which they are naturally borne.
Et primo ostendit propositum;
secundo destruit opinionem contrariam, ibi: sed adhuc neque ab alio et cetera.
First he proves the proposition;
Secondly, he rejects a contrary opinion (L. 18).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum per rationem naturalem;
secundo per signum, ibi: argumentum autem et cetera.
First he shows the proposition by a natural argument;
Secondly, by a sign, at 173.
As to the first he does three things:
First he proposes what he intends, and says it is clear from other arguments than the foregoing — or even from other motions — that there is a definite place whither earth is naturally borne. And the same is to be said of water and of any of the other bodies.
171. Secondly, at [117] he gives his argument, saying that entirely, i.e., universally, this is true, that whatever is moved is changed from something determinate to something determinate: for it is said in I that something white comes to be, not from any non-white at random, but from black. Now these two factors, namely, that from which a motion proceeds, and that into which it is terminated, differ in species — for they are contrary, as is plain in V; but contrariety is a difference respecting form, as is said in X.
He proves what he has said by the fact that every change is finite, as was proved in VI, and also by the facts cited above, namely, that nothing is moved to what it cannot attain; but nothing can attain to the infinite; hence every change must be finite. But if there were not something definite toward which a motion tends and something specifically different from that, at which it begins, the motion would have to be infinite; for there would be no reason why the motion should end here rather than elsewhere, but, for the same reason that it began to be moved thence, it would also begin to be moved hence.
He also explains what was said, by an example. For what is healed is moved from sickness to health; what is increased is moved from small to large. Hence, too, what is carried, i.e., moved according to place, is moved from something definite to something definite, and these are the place at which a motion begins, and the place to which it tends. Consequently, there must be a specific difference between the place from which something is locally moved and the place into which it is naturally borne, just as what is healed does not tend to just anything at random, as though by chance, or solely according to the will of the mover, but to something definite, to which it is inclined by nature. In the same way, therefore, fire and earth and other natural bodies are not borne ad infinitum, i.e., to something indefinite, as Democritus held; rather they are borne to places opposite to those in which they previously found themselves. But "up" is contrary to "down" in the realm of place. It follows, therefore, that "up" and "down" are the termini of the natural motions of simple bodies.
172. Then at [118 he excludes an objection by which someone could object that circular motion does not seem to be from opposite to opposite, but more from the same to the same.
But he says that even circular motion somehow involves opposition of termini. He says "somehow" for two reasons. First, because opposition in circular motion is not found with respect to points designated on the circle insofar as they are points of the circle, but only insofar as they are the extremities of the diameter — on the basis of which a maximum distance is reckoned in a circle, as was said above. Hence he adds: "What are according to the diameter," i.e., the extremities of the diameter, "are opposite." Secondly, because just as the whole spherical body does not change place as to subject but only in conception, although the parts change their place even as to subject, so also, if the entire circular motion is taken, there is no opposition in termini, except conceptually, namely, in the sense that the same [point], from which and to which circular motion is, is taken now as the beginning and now as the end. But if we take the parts of circular motion, we find opposition with respect to a straight line, as has been said. And therefore he adds that there is nothing contrary to a whole revolution. Consequently, it is plain that even in things circularly moved, the change is in a certain way toward things opposite and determinate.
Thus he concludes universally to what he intended, namely, that there is necessarily an end involved in local motion and that a natural body is not moved in infinitum [i.e., to nothing definite], as Democritus posited about the motion of atoms.
173. Then at [119] he proves the same thing through a sign. This proof he calls an "argument" in the sense that it is, so to speak, conjectural. And he says that the argument for claiming that a natural body is not moved to infinity but to something certain is that earth, the closer it approaches the middle, the more swiftly it is moved (which can be perceived from its greater impetus, namely, as something is more strongly impelled by the heavy in its fall as it nears the terminus of its motion); and the same holds for fire whose motion is swifter, the closer it approaches an upward place. If, therefore, earth or fire were moved to infinity, their speed could increase indefinitely.
And from this he concludes that the heaviness or lightness of a natural body could be increased infinitely. For just as the speed of a heavy body is greater according as the heavy body descends farther (and a heavy body is swift on account of its heaviness), so, too, an indefinite addition could be made to the speed if an infinite addition were made to heaviness or lightness. But it was shown above that there cannot be an infinite heaviness or lightness, and that nothing can be moved toward what it cannot attain. Consequently, addition of heaviness ad infinitum cannot occur, and, as a result, neither can addition of speed. Hence neither can the motion of natural bodies be tending toward what is infinite.
174. It should be noted that the cause of this accident that earth is moved more swiftly the more it descends was explained by Hipparchus in terms of an agent causing motion by compulsion. The farther the motion is from such an agent the less remains of that agent's power, so that the motion becomes slower. Hence in the beginning, a compulsory motion is intense but in the end it is weakened, until finally the heavy body can no longer be borne upward, but begins to be moved downward due to the small amount of the agent's virtue that remains, which, the less it becomes, so much the swifter becomes the contrary motion.
But this explanation is applicable only to things that are moved naturally after a compulsory motion; it does not apply to things that are moved naturally on account of being generated outside their proper places.
Others explained this phenomenon in terms of the amount of the medium through which the motion takes place (for example, the amount of air): in such a motion, if it is natural, the farther a thing has been moved, the less is the amount remaining — and, therefore, the less is it able to impede a natural motion. But this explanation also, applies no less to compulsory motions than to natural motions, in which, nevertheless, the contrary happens, as will be said below.
Therefore, it must be said with Aristotle that the cause of this phenomenon is that, to the extent that a heavy body descends more, to that extent is its heaviness the more strengthened on account of its proximity to its proper place. And therefore he argues that if the speed increased infinitely, the heaviness, too, would increase indefinitely. And the same holds for lightness.
1-18
Exclusion of the opinion that natural bodies are not moved naturally to determined places. Unity of the world from higher bodies.
Ἀλλὰ (277b.) μὴν οὐδ' ὑπ' ἄλλου φέρεται αὐτῶν τὸ μὲν ἄνω τὸ δὲ κάτω οὐδὲ βίᾳ, ὥσπερ τινές φασι τῇ ἐκθλίψει.
Βραδύτερον γὰρ ἂν ἐκινεῖτο τὸ πλεῖον πῦρ ἄνω καὶ ἡ πλείων γῆ κάτω νῦν δὲ τοὐναντίον ἀεὶ τὸ πλεῖον πῦρ θᾶττον φέρεται καὶ ἡ πλείων γῆ εἰς τὸν αὑτῶν τόπον.
Οὐδὲ θᾶττον ἂν πρὸς τῷ τέλει ἐφέρετο, εἰ βίᾳ καὶ ἐκθλίψει πάντα γὰρ τοῦ βιασαμένου πορρωτέρω γιγνόμενα βραδύτερον φέρεται, καὶ ὅθεν βίᾳ,
ἐκεῖ φέρεται οὐ βίᾳ. Ὥστ' ἐκ τούτων θεωροῦσιν ἔστι λαβεῖν τὴν πίστιν περὶ τῶν λεγομένων ἱκανῶς.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ διὰ τῶν ἐκ τῆς πρώτης φιλοσοφίας λόγων δειχθείη ἄν, καὶ ἐκ τῆς κύκλῳ κινήσεως, ἣν ἀναγκαῖον ἀΐδιον ὁμοίως ἐνταῦθά τ' εἶναι καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις κόσμοις.
Δῆλον δὲ κἂν ὧδε γένοιτο σκοπουμένοις ὅτι ἀνάγκη ἕνα εἶναι τὸν οὐρανόν. Τριῶν γὰρ ὄντων τῶν σωματικῶν στοιχείων, τρεῖς ἔσονται καὶ οἱ τόποι τῶν στοιχείων, εἷς μὲν ὁ τοῦ ὑφισταμένου σώματος ὁ περὶ τὸ μέσον, ἄλλος δὲ ὁ τοῦ κύκλῳ φερομένου, ὅσπερ ἐστὶν ἔσχατος, τρίτος δ' ὁ μεταξὺ τούτων ὁ τοῦ μέσου σώματος. Ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἶναι τὸ ἐπιπολάζον. Εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἐν τούτῳ, ἔξω ἔσται ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον ἔξω. Τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἀβαρὲς τὸ δ' ἔχον βάρος, κατωτέρω δὲ ὁ τοῦ βάρος ἔχοντος σώματος τόπος, εἴπερ ὁ πρὸς τῷ μέσῳ τοῦ βαρέος. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ παρὰ φύσιν ἄλλῳ γὰρ ἔσται κατὰ φύσιν, ἄλλο δ' οὐκ ἦν. Ἀνάγκη ἄρα ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ εἶναι. Τούτου δ' αὐτοῦ τίνες εἰσὶ διαφοραί, ὕστερον ἐροῦμεν.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν σωματικῶν στοιχείων, ποῖά τ' ἐστὶ καὶ πόσα, καὶ τίς ἑκάστου τόπος, ἔτι δ' ὅλως πόσοι τὸ πλῆθος οἱ τόποι, δῆλον ἡμῖν ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων.
175. After showing that natural bodies are by nature moved to definite places, the Philosopher here excludes a contrary opinion.
Et primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo probat propositum, ibi: tardius enim et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves his proposition, at 176.
Now, since truth is established by excluding falsehood, the Philosopher here induces the exclusion of an error as a certain demonstration of the truth. He says, therefore, that what has been said is manifested by the fact that natural bodies are not borne upward and downward as though moved by some external agent.
By this is to be understood that he rejects an external mover which would move these bodies after they obtained their specific form. For light things are indeed moved upward, and heavy bodies downward, by the generator inasmuch as it gives them the form upon which such motion follows, but they are moved per accidens, and not per se, by whatever removes an obstacle to their motion. However, some have claimed that after bodies of this kind have received their form, they need to be moved per se by something extrinsic. It is this claim that the Philosopher rejects here.
Neither should it be said that these bodies are moved by compulsion, which is the opinion of those who said that they are moved by a certain "extrusion," in the sense that one body is displaced by another, stronger, one. For they assumed that there was one motion natural to all bodies, but since some are given momentum by others, it comes to pass that a certain number are moved upward and a certain number downward.
176. Then at [121] he proves his proposition with three arguments. The first of these is adduced mainly to show that bodies of this kind in their natural motions are not moved by external movers. For it is clear that a motion is slower to the extent that the mover overcomes the mobile less. But a given virtue of the mover overcomes a larger mobile less than a smaller.
If, then, these bodies were moved by an external mover, a greater amount of fire would be moved upward more slowly and a larger amount of earth downward more slowly. But just the opposite happens, for a greater quantity of fire and a greater quantity of earth are moved more swiftly to their places. This gives us to understand that these bodies have the principles of their motion within themselves, and their motive powers are greater according as the bodies are greater, and that is why they are moved more swiftly. Consequently, it is plain that such bodies in their natural motions are not moved by an exterior power but by an intrinsic one, which they have received from their generator.
177. At [122] he gives a second argument which is adduced mainly to show that motion of these bodies is not through compulsion. For we see that all things moved by compulsion are moved more slowly according as their distance from the mover increases, as is plain in projectiles, whose motion slackens near the end and finally fails. If, then, heavy and light bodies were moved by compulsion as though mutually pushing one another, it would follow that their motion toward their proper places would not be faster but slower in the end. But the contrary of this is plain to our senses.
178. He gives at [123] the third argument which can regard both. For we see that no body is moved by violence to a place whence it can be removed by violence. For it is because a body is apt to be in a certain place that it can be moved thence by violence; hence it was originally brought there naturally and not by violence. If, therefore, it is assumed that some motions of heavy and light bodies are violent by which they are moved from certain places, it cannot be said that the contrary motions which brought them there are violent. Thus it is not true that all the motions of these bodies are caused by another and by violence.
He concludes from the foregoing, in summary, that speculation on these points will testify to the truth of what has been said.
179. Then at [124] he shows through the higher bodies which are moved circularly that the world is one:
et primo specialiter per corpora superiora;
secundo communiter per superiora et inferiora, ibi: palam autem utique et cetera.
First in a special way by the higher bodies;
Secondly, in a general way by the higher and the lower, at 181.
He says therefore first [124] that there is still another way of proving that there is but one world, by arguments taken from first philosophy, i.e., by using what has been determined in the , and from what has been shown in VIII, namely, that circular motion is eternal, which, both in this and in other worlds, has a natural necessity. For the Philosopher concluded to the eternity of celestial motion in VIII by considering the order between mobiles and movers, which must be similar in any world, if "world" is taken univocally. Now if celestial motion is eternal, it must be moved by an infinite power, such as cannot exist in a magnitude, as was proved in VIII. Such a power is non-material and consequently numerically one, since it is a form and species only, whereas it is through matter that individuals are multiplied in the same species. Consequently, the power that moves the heavens must be numerically one. Hence the heavens too must be numerically one, and, consequently, the whole world.
180. But someone can say that this argument does not conclude with necessity. For the first mover moves the heaven as that which is desired, as is said in XII. But there is nothing to prevent the same thing from being accidentally many. So it seems that we cannot from the unity of the first mover conclude necessarily to the unity of the heavens.
But it must be said that many can desire one thing, but not indeed in an identical way, since an absolute multitude is not joined immediately to one thing that is first; but many things can desire one thing according to a certain order, some being closer and some more remote, the coordination of which to one ultimate objective makes the unity of the world.
181. Then at [125] he proves his proposition with an argument taken generally from higher and lower bodies. And he says that even the following consideration will show that it is necessary for the heaven, i.e., the world, to be one. To prove this he assumes that, just as there are three bodily elements, namely, heaven and earth and an intermediate, so there are three places corresponding to them: one is the place about the middle, that of the subsisting body, i.e., the place of the heaviest body which supports all, namely, earth; another is the place which is the highest in altitude, that of the circularly moved body; the third place is intermediate and corresponds to the intermediate body.
With regard to these words it should be noted that Aristotle here reckons the heaven among the elements, although an element is something out of which things are composed, as is said in V.
However the heaven, even though it does not enter into the composition of a mixed body enters into the composition of the whole universe, as being a part of it. Or he is using the word "element" in a wide sense to designate any of the simple bodies which he calls "bodily elements" to distinguish them from prime matter, which, though an element, is not a bodily element, for considered in itself it is without any form.
Secondly, we should consider his statement that there are three places. Now since place is the boundary of a containing body, as is said in IV, it can be clear what the place of the intermediate element is — for it is the surface of the supreme, body containing it. How the first body is in place has been explained in IV. But how the middle [i.e., the center], which seems to be not a container but a contained, is the place of the heavy body seems to offer difficulty.
But it should be said that, as has been said in IV, the surface of the containing body does not have the notion of place because it is the surface of such a body but with respect to the position it has in relation to the first container accordingly, namely, as it is nearer or farther from it. Now the heavy body in its nature is at a maximum distance from the celestial body on account of its materiality; therefore there is due it a place farthest from the first container and nearest to the middle. Consequently the surface containing the heavy body is called its place according to its nearness to the center. Hence he said advisedly that the place located around the middle is the place of the subsisting body.
182. From what has been set forth he goes on to prove his proposition from a light body, just as above he had proceeded from a heavy body. For it is necessary that a light body which is borne upwards be in this intermediate place: because, since every body is in some place, if the light body were not in this intermediate place, it would be outside it. But that is impossible, because outside this intermediate place there is, on the one side, celestial body which has no heaviness or lightness, and on the other side, terrestrial body which has heaviness. Now it cannot be said that there is a place more downward than the place of the body having heaviness, because the place about the middle is proper to it. But from this it is plainly impossible for another world to exist, because some light body would have to be there and thus, if that world were above this world, a light body would exist above the place of the heavens; if that world were below this world, a light body would be below the place of the heavy body — which is impossible.
183. But to this argument someone could object that the light body would be outside this intermediate place not according to nature but outside its nature. To exclude this he adds that not even outside its nature can a light body be outside this intermediate place. Because every place that is outside nature for some body is according to nature for some other body. For neither God nor nature has made any place in vain, i.e., a place in which no body is apt to be. Now, no other body is found in nature except the three mentioned and to which the aforesaid places are deputed, as is plain from what has been said. Hence neither according to nature nor beside nature can a light body exist outside this intermediate place. Consequently, it is impossible that there be many worlds.
Since he had spoken of an intermediate element as if it were one certain body, he adds that later, i.e., in the third and fourth books, he will speak about; the differences in that intermediate. For it is divided into fire, air and water, which is also light in relation to earth.
Finally in summary he concludes that from the foregoing it is manifest about the bodily elements, which and how many they are, and what is the place of each of them and, in general, how many bodily places exist.
1-19
Solution of the argument seeming to justify several worlds.
Ὅτι δ' οὐ μόνον εἷς ἐστίν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀδύνατον γενέσθαι πλείους, ἔτι δ' ὡς ἀΐδιος ἄφθαρτος ὢν καὶ ἀγένητος, λέγωμεν, πρῶτον διαπορήσαντες περὶ αὐτοῦ.
Δόξειε γὰρ ἂν ὡδὶ σκοπουμένοις ἀδύνατον ἕνα καὶ μόνον εἶναι αὐτόν ἐν ἅπασι γὰρ καὶ τοῖς φύσει καὶ τοῖς ἀπὸ τέχνης συνεστῶσι καὶ γεγενημένοις ἕτερόν ἐστιν αὐτή τε καθ' αὑτὴν ἡ μορφὴ καὶ μεμιγμένη μετὰ τῆς ὕλης οἷον τῆς σφαίρας ἕτερον τὸ εἶδος (278a.) καὶ ἡ χρυσῆ καὶ ἡ χαλκῆ σφαῖρα, καὶ πάλιν τοῦ κύκλου ἑτέρα ἡ μορφὴ καὶ ὁ χαλκοῦς καὶ ὁ ξύλινος κύκλος τὸ γὰρ τί ἦν εἶναι λέγοντες σφαίρᾳ ἢ κύκλῳ οὐκ ἐροῦμεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ χρυσὸν ἢ χαλκόν, ὡς οὐκ ὄντα ταῦτα τῆς οὐσίας ἂν δὲ τὴν χαλκῆν ἢ χρυσῆν, ἐροῦμεν, καὶ ἐὰν μὴ δυνώμεθα νοῆσαι μηδὲ λαβεῖν ἄλλο τι παρὰ τὸ καθ' ἕκαστον. Ἐνίοτε γὰρ οὐθὲν κωλύει τοῦτο συμβαίνειν, οἷον εἰ μόνος εἷς ληφθείη κύκλος οὐθὲν γὰρ ἧττον ἄλλο ἔσται τὸ κύκλῳ εἶναι καὶ τῷδε τῷ κύκλῳ, καὶ τὸ μὲν εἶδος, τὸ δ' εἶδος ἐν τῇ ὕλῃ καὶ τῶν καθ' ἕκαστον.
Ἐπεὶ οὖν ἐστὶν ὁ οὐρανὸς αἰσθητός, τῶν καθ' ἕκαστον ἂν εἴη τὸ γὰρ αἰσθητὸν ἅπαν ἐν τῇ ὕλῃ ὑπῆρχεν.
Εἰ δὲ τῶν καθ' ἕκαστον, ἕτερον ἂν εἴη τῷδε τῷ οὐρανῷ εἶναι καὶ οὐρανῷ ἁπλῶς. Ἕτερον ἄρα ὅδε ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ οὐρανὸς ἁπλῶς, καὶ τὸ μὲν ὡς εἶδος καὶ μορφή, τὸ δ' ὡς τῇ ὕλῃ μεμιγμένον.
Ὧν δ' ἐστὶ μορφή τις καὶ εἶδος, ἤτοι ἔστιν ἢ ἐνδέχεται πλείω γενέσθαι τὰ καθ' ἕκαστα.
Εἴτε γὰρ ἔστιν εἴδη, καθάπερ φασί τινες, ἀνάγκη τοῦτο συμβαίνειν, εἴτε καὶ χωριστὸν μηθὲν τῶν τοιούτων, οὐθὲν ἧττον ἐπὶ πάντων γὰρ οὕτως ὁρῶμεν, ὅσων ἡ οὐσία ἐν ὕλῃ ἐστίν, πλείω καὶ ἄπειρα ὄντα τὰ ὁμοειδῆ.
Ὥστε ἤτοι εἰσὶ πλείους οὐρανοὶ ἢ ἐνδέχεται πλείους εἶναι. Ἐκ μὲν δὴ τούτων ὑπολάβοι τις ἂν καὶ εἶναι καὶ ἐνδέχεσθαι πλείους εἶναι οὐρανούς
σκεπτέον δὲ πάλιν τί τούτων λέγεται καλῶς καὶ τί οὐ καλῶς. Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἕτερον εἶναι τὸν λόγον τὸν ἄνευ τῆς ὕλης καὶ τὸν ἐν τῇ ὕλῃ τῆς μορφῆς καλῶς τε λέγεται, καὶ ἔστω τοῦτ' ἀληθές. Ἀλλ' οὐδὲν ἧττον οὐδεμία ἀνάγκη διὰ τοῦτο πλείους εἶναι κόσμους, οὐδ' ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι πλείους, εἴπερ οὗτος ἐξ ἁπάσης ἐστὶ τῆς ὕλης, ὥσπερ ἔστιν.
Ὡδὶ δὲ μᾶλλον ἴσως τὸ λεγόμενον ἔσται δῆλον. Εἰ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ γρυπότης καμπυλότης ἐν ῥινὶ ἢ σαρκί, καὶ ἔστιν ὕλη τῇ γρυπότητι ἡ σάρξ, εἰ ἐξ ἁπασῶν τῶν σαρκῶν μία γένοιτο σὰρξ καὶ ὑπάρξειεν ταύτῃ τὸ γρυπόν, οὐθὲν ἂν ἄλλ' οὔτ' εἴη γρυπὸν οὔτ' ἐνδέχοιτο γενέσθαι. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ εἰ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐστὶν ὕλη σάρκες καὶ ὀστᾶ, εἰ ἐκ πάσης τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ πάντων τῶν ὀστῶν ἄνθρωπος γένοιτο ἀδυνάτων ὄντων διαλυθῆναι, οὐκ ἂν ἐνδέχοιτο εἶναι ἄλλον ἄνθρωπον. Ὡσαύ(278b.) τως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὅλως γὰρ ὅσων ἐστὶν ἡ οὐσία ἐν ὑποκειμένῃ τινὶ ὕλῃ, τούτων οὐδὲν ἐνδέχεται γίγνεσθαι μὴ ὑπαρχούσης τινὸς ὕλης.
Ὁ δ' οὐρανὸς ἔστι μὲν τῶν καθ' ἕκαστα καὶ τῶν ἐκ τῆς ὕλης ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ ἐκ μορίου αὐτῆς συνέστηκεν ἀλλ' ἐξ ἁπάσης, τὸ μὲν εἶναι αὐτῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ τῷδε τῷ οὐρανῷ ἕτερόν ἐστιν, οὐ μέντοι οὔτ' ἂν εἴη ἄλλος οὔτ' ἂν ἐνδέχοιτο γενέσθαι πλείους, διὰ τὸ πᾶσαν τὴν ὕλην περιειληφέναι τοῦτον.
184. After showing that there is but one world, the Philosopher here shows that it is impossible for there to be many. And it was necessary to prove this, because nothing prevents the possibility of something's being false [now] which can yet be true [later]. Concerning this he does three things:
primo ponit obiectionem, ex qua videtur ostendi quod possibile sit esse plures mundos;
secundo solvit eam, ibi: considerandum autem iterum etc.;
tertio probat quod in solutione supposuerat, ibi: hoc ipsum igitur restat ostendere et cetera.
First he presents an objection which seems to show that it is possible that many worlds exist;
Secondly, he answers it, at 194;
Thirdly, he proves something he had presupposed in his answer (L. 20).
About the first he does two things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio, et quo ordine sit agendum;
secundo incipit exequi propositum, ibi: videbitur enim utique et cetera.
First he states his intention and his plan of treatment;
Secondly, he begins to prove his proposition, at 186.
185. He says therefore first [127] that after the foregoing, we must still prove that not only is there one world but that it is impossible for there to be more, and further that the world is eternal, so as to be imperishable, i.e. never ceasing to be, and unborn, i.e., never beginning to be, according to his opinion. He states this because the first consideration seems somehow to depend on the second. For if the world were generable and perishable by union and separation, according to friendship and strife, as Empedocles said, many worlds would be possible in the sense that when one had perished another would be generated later, as Empedocles believed. And because the truth is truly known when the difficulties which seem to be contrary to it are solved, therefore the first thing to do is bring forth the difficulties concerning this, i.e., which seem to indicate that there are or can be many worlds — for the solution to this difficulty will confirm the truth.
186. Then at [128] he presents the argument that could lead one to question whether it is not possible for more than one world to exist. Hence he prefaces the remark that, for those who hold this point of view, i.e., the one coinciding with the argument to follow, it will appear impossible that it, namely, the world, be one and unique, i.e., that there be necessarily just one world. For the following argument does not prove that it is necessary that there be several worlds, which is equivalent to its being impossible that there be but one; rather it proves that it is possible that there be more than one world, which is equivalent to its not being necessary that there be but one. Now in order to show this he induces an argument containing two syllogisms:
quorum primum primo ponit;
secundo secundum, ibi: quorum autem est forma quaedam et cetera.
The first of these is at 187;
The second at 190.
The first syllogism is this: In all sensible things that come to be by art or by nature, the consideration of the form considered in itself is one thing and the consideration of the form insofar as it is in matter is another. But the heaven is a sensible thing having a form in matter. Therefore, the absolute consideration of its form, i.e., as considered universally, is one thing, and the consideration of its form in matter, i.e., as considered in particular is another.
Primo ergo ponit maiorem;
secundo minorem, ibi: quoniam igitur est caelum etc.;
tertio infert conclusionem, ibi: si autem singularium et cetera.
First, therefore, he presents the major, at 187;
Secondly, the minor, at 188;
Thirdly, he draws the conclusion, at 189.
187. He says therefore first [128] that in all things that exist and were generated, i.e., made, either by nature or by art, the form considered according to itself is one thing according to our consideration, and the form mixed with matter, i.e., the form taken as joined with matter, is another.
He first explains this by an example in mathematical objects in which it is more evident, because sensible matter does not enter therein. For the species of a sphere is according to our consideration other than the form of the sphere in sensible matter, which is denoted when a sphere is called "golden" or "bronze"; similarly, the form of a circle is one thing, and what is meant by a golden or bronze circle is another. And this is evident, because when we give the , i.e., the defining notion, of a circle or a sphere, we make no mention therein of gold or bronze. This implies that to be "golden" or "bronze" does not pertain to their substance [essence], which the definition signifies.
But there seems to be a difficulty in natural things, whose forms cannot exist or be understood without sensible matter, as "snub" cannot exist and be understood without "nose." Natural forms, however, although they cannot be understood without sensible matter in common, can be understood without signed sensible matter, which is the principle of individuation and of singularity. Thus, "foot" cannot be understood without flesh and bones, but it can be understood without this flesh and these bones. And therefore he adds that if we cannot understand and accept in our consideration anything outside the singular, i.e., outside the matter which is included in the notion of the individual, namely, as it is signate—because sometimes there is nothing to prevent this from happening (namely, that a form be able to be understood without sensible matter) in the same way that we understood a circle without sensible matter; nevertheless, in natural things, in which forms are not understood without matter, the notions of the thing taken in common and taken in the singular are not the same, any more than the notion of "man" and of "this man" are the same. Thus the essence of "circle" and "this circle," i.e., of the notions defining a circle, and this circle, are different. For the notion of a thing in common is the species, i.e., the notion of the species, but the notion of a particular thing signifies the notion of the species as found in determinate matter, and pertains to the singular.
188. Then at [129] he presents the minor of his syllogism. And he says that since the heaven, i.e., the world, is something sensible, it must be among the singulars, for every sensible thing exists in matter. For a form not in matter is not sensible but intelligible only — for sensible qualities are characteristics of matter.
189. Then at [130] he presents the conclusion and says that if the heaven, i.e., the world, belongs among the singulars, as has been shown, its notion as a singular will differ from its notion absolutely, i.e., taken universally the two notions will differ. Consequently, it follows that "this heaven" taken singularly will be different in consideration from "heaven" taken universally, i.e., this latter heaven taken universally will be as a species and form, while the other, namely, that taken singularly, will be as form joined to matter. However, this is not to be taken as implying that in the definition of a natural thing taken universally no matter is mentioned at all, but rather that individual matter is not mentioned.
190. Then at [131] he presents the second syllogism, as follows: Whatever things have their forms in matter, are, or are able to be, several individuals of one species. But "this heaven" signifies a form in matter, as was said. Therefore, there either are, or can be, many heavens.
Circa hoc autem primo ponit maiorem;
secundo manifestat eam, ibi: sive enim sint species etc.;
tertio infert conclusionem, ibi: itaque aut sunt et cetera. Minorem supponit ex praemisso syllogismo.
Now in regard to this he first presents the major;
Secondly, he explains it, at 191;
Thirdly, [having taken the minor from the previous syllogism], he draws the conclusion at 192.
He says therefore first [131] that all things of which there is a form and species, i.e., which are not themselves forms and species, but have forms and species, are either many individuals of one species or many can exist. But things that are themselves forms and subsistent species, as are separated substances, cannot have several members of one species.
191. Then at [132] he explains the foregoing both according to Plato's opinion and according to his own. And he says that whether there are "species," i.e., separated ideas, as the Platonists assume, then this must happen, i.e., there must be several individuals of one species — because the separated species is posited as the exemplar of a sensible thing and it is possible to make many copies according to one exemplar; or whether no such species exist separately, there can still be several individuals of one species. For we see this happen in all things whose substance (i.e., whose essence, which is signified by the definition) exists in signate matter, namely, that there are several individuals, or even an infinitude of individuals, of one species. The reason for this is that, since signate matter does not enter the notion of the species, the notion of the species can be indifferently verified in this individual matter and in that; consequently, there can be many individuals of one species.
192. Then at [133] he draws the intended conclusion, namely, that either there are many worlds or many worlds can be made.
Finally he says in summary that from the foregoing someone can conjecture that either there are, or can be, many worlds.
193. But there seems to be a conflict here between Aristotle and Plato. For Plato in the Timaeus proved the oneness of the world from the oneness of the exemplar; but here Aristotle from the oneness of the separated species concludes to the possibility of several worlds.
But two answers can be given to this. First on the part of the exemplar, which, if it is one in such a way that oneness is its essence, then the copy must imitate the exemplar in this oneness. But the first separated exemplar is such. Hence also the world, which is the first copy thereof, must be one. This was the way Plato proceeded in his proof. But if oneness is not of the essence of the exemplar but is outside its essence, then the copy could be like the exemplar in respect to what belongs to its species — for example, in the notion of man or horse — but not in respect to oneness. And it is in this way that Aristotle's reasoning proceeds.
Or it can be answered from the viewpoint of the copy, which is more perfect to the extent that it is more faithful to the exemplar. Therefore, some copies are like one exemplar in respect to oneness of species, but not in respect to numerical oneness. But the heaven, which is a perfect copy, is like its exemplar with respect to numerical oneness.
194. Then at [134] he solves this objection:
Et primo ponit solutionem;
secundo manifestat eam, ibi: sic autem forte et cetera.
First he gives the solution;
Secondly, he explains it, at 195.
He says therefore first that in order to settle the above doubt we must once more consider what was said well and what not well. For if all the premises are true, the conclusion is necessarily true. He says, therefore, that it was correct to say that the notion of form differs, namely, in the case of that which is without matter and in the case of that which is with matter.
This is to be granted as true. Consequently, the first conclusion which is the minor of the second syllogism is conceded. But from this it does not follow of necessity either that there are several worlds, or that there can be several, if it is true that this world consists of all its matter, as is true and as will be proved below. For the major proposition of the second syllogism, namely, that things which have a form in matter can be numerically many in one species, is not true except in things that do not consist of their entire matter.
195. Then at [135] he explains what he had said with an example.
Et primo ponit exempla;
secundo adaptat ad propositum, ibi: caelum autem est quidem singularium et cetera.
First he gives the examples;
Secondly, he adapts them to his proposition, at 196.
He says therefore first [135] that what has been said will become clearer from what will be said. For snub-nosedness is curvature in a nose or in flesh; thus flesh is the matter of snub-nosedness. If then from all flesh one flesh were to be made, namely, the flesh of one nose, and snub-nosedness existed in it, nothing else would be snub-nosed nor could be. And the same holds for man, since flesh and bones are the matter of man: if one man were formed from all the flesh and all the bones, so that he could now not be destroyed, there could be no more than one man — but if he could be destroyed, it would be possible, after his corruption, for another man to exist, just as when a box is destroyed, another can be made from the same wood. And the same is true for other things. And the reason for this he assigns, namely, that none of the things whose form is in matter can come into being if the proper matter is not at hand, any more than a house could be made if there were not stones and wood. Consequently, if there were no bones and flesh other than those of which the one man is composed, no other man could come into being but him.
196. Then at [136] he adapts this to his proposition. And he says it is true that the heaven is a singular thing and one constituted of matter. But it is not constituted out of part of its matter, but out of all of it. And therefore, although there is a difference between the notions of "heaven" and "this heaven," there neither is, nor can be, another heaven, due to the fact that all the matter of heaven is comprehended under this heaven.
197. However, it should be realized that some prove the possibility of many worlds in other ways. In one way, as follows: The world was made by God; but the power of God, since it is infinite, is not limited to this world alone. Therefore it is not reasonable to say that He cannot make yet other worlds.
To this it must be said that if God were to make other worlds, He would make them either like or unlike this world. If entirely alike, they would be in vain — and that conflicts with His wisdom. If unlike, none of them would comprehend in itself every nature of sensible body; consequently no one of them would be perfect, but one perfect world would result from all of them.
In another way, as follows: To the extent that something is more noble, to that extent is its species more powerful. But the world is nobler than any natural thing existing here. Therefore, since the species of a natural thing existing here, for example, of a horse or cow, could perfect many individuals, much more so can the species of the whole world perfect many individuals.
But to this it must be answered that it takes more power to make one perfect than to make several imperfect. Now the single individuals of natural things which exist here are imperfect, because no one of them comprehends within itself the total of what, pertains to its species. But it is in this way that the world is perfect; hence, from that very fact its species is shown to be more powerful.
Thirdly, one objects thus: It is better for the best to be multiplied than for things not so good. But the world is the best. Therefore, it is better to have many worlds than many animals or many plants.
To this it must be said that here it pertains to the goodness of the world to be one, because oneness possesses the aspect of goodness. For we see that through being divided some things lose their proper goodness.
1-20
The universe shown to consist of every natural and sensible body as its matter
Λείπεται ἄρα αὐτὸ τοῦτο δεῖξαι, ὅτι ἐξ ἅπαντος τοῦ φυσικοῦ καὶ τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ συνέστηκε σώματος. Εἴπωμεν δὲ πρῶτον τί λέγομεν εἶναι τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ποσαχῶς, ἵνα μᾶλλον ἡμῖν δῆλον γένηται τὸ ζητούμενον.
Ἕνα μὲν οὖν τρόπον οὐρανὸν λέγομεν τὴν οὐσίαν τὴν τῆς ἐσχάτης τοῦ παντὸς περιφορᾶς, ἢ σῶμα φυσικὸν τὸ ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ περιφορᾷ τοῦ παντός εἰώθαμεν γὰρ τὸ ἔσχατον καὶ τὸ ἄνω μάλιστα καλεῖν οὐρανόν, ἐν ᾧ καὶ τὸ θεῖον πᾶν ἱδρῦσθαί φαμεν. Ἄλλον δ' αὖ τρόπον τὸ συνεχὲς σῶμα τῇ ἐσχάτῃ περιφορᾷ τοῦ παντός, ἐν ᾧ σελήνη καὶ ἥλιος καὶ ἔνια τῶν ἄστρων καὶ γὰρ ταῦτα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ εἶναί φαμεν. Ἔτι δ' ἄλλως λέγομεν οὐρανὸν τὸ περιεχόμενον σῶμα ὑπὸ τῆς ἐσχάτης περιφορᾶς τὸ γὰρ ὅλον καὶ τὸ πᾶν εἰώθαμεν λέγειν οὐρανόν.
Τριχῶς δὴ λεγομένου τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸ ὅλον τὸ ὑπὸ τῆς ἐσχάτης περιεχόμενον περιφορᾶς ἐξ ἅπαντος ἀνάγκη συνεστάναι τοῦ φυσικοῦ καὶ τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ σώματος διὰ τὸ μήτ' εἶναι μηδὲν ἔξω σῶμα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ μήτ' ἐνδέχεσθαι γενέσθαι.
Εἰ γὰρ ἔστιν ἔξω τῆς ἐσχάτης περιφορᾶς σῶμα φυσικόν, ἀνάγκη αὐτὸ ἤτοι τῶν ἁπλῶν εἶναι σωμάτων ἢ τῶν συνθέτων, καὶ ἢ κατὰ φύσιν ἢ παρὰ φύσιν ἔχειν.
Τῶν μὲν οὖν ἁπλῶν οὐθὲν ἂν εἴη. Τὸ μὲν γὰρ κύκλῳ φερόμενον δέδεικται ὅτι οὐκ ἐνδέχεται μεταλλάξαι τὸν αὑτοῦ τόπον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου δυνατόν, οὐδὲ τὸ ὑφιστάμενον. Κατὰ φύσιν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἂν εἴησαν (ἄλλοι γὰρ αὐτῶν οἰκεῖοι τόποι),
παρὰ φύσιν δ' εἴπερ εἰσίν, ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἔσται κατὰ φύσιν ὁ ἔξω τόπος τὸν γὰρ τούτῳ παρὰ φύσιν ἀναγκαῖον ἄλλῳ εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν. Ἀλλ' οὐκ ἦν ἄλλο σῶμα παρὰ ταῦτα.
Οὐκ ἄρ' ἐστὶ δυνατὸν οὐθὲν τῶν ἁπλῶν ἔξω εἶναι τοῦ (279a.) οὐρανοῦ σῶμα. Εἰ δὲ μὴ τῶν ἁπλῶν, οὐδὲ τῶν μικτῶν ἀνάγκη γὰρ εἶναι καὶ τὰ ἁπλᾶ τοῦ μικτοῦ ὄντος.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ γενέσθαι δυνατόν ἤτοι γὰρ κατὰ φύσιν ἔσται ἢ παρὰ φύσιν, καὶ ἢ ἁπλοῦν ἢ μικτόν. Ὥστε πάλιν ὁ αὐτὸς ἥξει λόγος οὐδὲν γὰρ διαφέρει σκοπεῖν εἰ ἔστιν ἢ εἰ γενέσθαι δυνατόν.
Φανερὸν τοίνυν ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων ὅτι οὔτ' ἔστιν ἔξω οὔτ' ἐγχωρεῖ γενέσθαι σώματος ὄγκον οὐθενός ἐξ ἁπάσης ἄρ' ἐστὶ τῆς οἰκείας ὕλης ὁ πᾶς κόσμος ὕλη γὰρ ἦν αὐτῷ τὸ φυσικὸν σῶμα καὶ αἰσθητόν. Ὥστ' οὔτε νῦν εἰσὶ πλείους οὐρανοὶ οὔτ' ἐγένοντο, οὔτ' ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι πλείους ἀλλ' εἷς καὶ μόνος καὶ τέλειος οὗτος οὐρανός ἐστιν.
198. Having presented the solution brought forward, the Philosopher here proves what he had presupposed, namely, that the world consists of all its matter.
First he tells his intention and order of procedure [137] and says that in order to complete the preceding solution, we must show that the world consists of every natural and sensible body, which is its matter. But before showing this, it is necessary to explain what is meant by this word "heaven," and in how many senses it is used, so that our question can be answered more clearly.
199. Secondly he proves his proposition:
et primo ostendit quot modis dicatur caelum;
secundo ostendit principale propositum, ibi: tripliciter autem et cetera.
First he shows the various senses of the word "heaven";
Secondly, he proves the main proposition, at 200.
With regard to the first [138] he gives three senses of heaven. In one way the heaven is called "the substance of the extreme circulation of the whole," i.e., that which is at the boundary of the whole universe and is moved circularly. And because he had explained the meaning of the word in terms of "substance," whose notion transcends natural philosophy, since it pertains to , he adds another explanation having the same meaning, saying that the heaven is "the natural body whose place is at the extreme circumference of the world," which explanation is more befitting to natural science.
He proves this meaning from the way people speak — since words are to be used in the sense most people use them, as is said in II. For men are more likely to call "heaven" that which is the extreme of the entire world and which is most up, not, indeed, as "up" is taken in natural science, i.e., as being the terminus of the motion of light things (for in this sense nothing is farther "up" than the place to which fire is borne) but as taken according to common parlance, where "up" designates that which is farther from the middle. "Up" also refers to the place of all divine beings (where "divine" signifies not celestial bodies — not all of which are in the outermost sphere — but non-material and incorporeal substances), for it has been said above that all men attribute to God a place that is up.
In a second way "heaven" means not only the outermost sphere but "the whole body continuous with the extreme circumference of the whole universe," i.e., all the spheres of celestial bodies, in which exist the moon and sun and certain of the stars, namely, the other five planets (for the fixed stars are in the supreme sphere according to the opinion of Aristotle, who did not posit another sphere above that of the fixed stars).
And he proves this meaning also on the basis of common parlance: for we say that the sun and moon and other planets exist in the heaven. Now these bodies are said to be continuous with the extreme sphere, because they are alike in nature, i.e., they are imperishable and movable circularly, and not because one continuous body is formed from all of them — for then they could not have several and different motions, a continuum being something whose motion is one, as is said in V.
In a third way "heaven" means "the whole body contained within the extreme circumference," i.e., by the extreme sphere. This, too, he proves from the common use of the word — since we are wont to call the whole world and the totality, i.e., the universe, the "heaven."
It should be noted that "heaven" is here used in these three ways not equivocally but analogically, i.e., in relation to one first. For it is the supreme sphere that is first and principally called "heaven"; secondly, the other celestial spheres from the continuity they have with the supreme sphere; thirdly, the universe of bodies insofar as they are contained by the extreme sphere.
200. Then at [139] he proves the proposition.
Et primo ostendit quod non est aliquod corpus sensibile extra caelum tertio modo dictum, idest extra hunc mundum;
secundo ostendit quod non est extra ipsum aliquid eorum quae consequuntur ad corpora naturalia, ibi: simul autem manifestum et cetera.
First he shows that there is no sensible body outside the heaven taken in the third sense, i.e., outside this world;
Secondly, he shows that there is not outside it any of the things that are normally consequent upon natural bodies (L. 21).
As to the first he does three things:
primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo probat propositum, ibi: si enim est etc.;
tertio concludit principale intentum, ibi: manifestum igitur ex dictis et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves his proposition, at 201;
Thirdly, he concludes to his main proposition, at 206.
He says therefore first [139] that whereas "heaven" is said in three ways, we shall be discussing it now in its third sense, where heaven is taken as "the whole contained by the extreme circumference." Concerning this heaven it is necessary that it consist of every sensible and natural body — which is its matter, and thus it consists of all its matter — due to the fact that outside this heaven no body exists, nor can exist.
201. Then at [140] he proves the proposition.
Et primo ostendit quod nullum corpus est extra caelum;
secundo quod nullum potest ibi esse, ibi: sed et neque factum esse et cetera.
First he shows that there is no body outside the heaven;
Secondly, that none can be there, at 205.
About the first he does two things:
primo praemittit quandam divisionem, per quam manifestat propositum;
secundo excludit singula membra divisionis, ibi: simplicium quidem igitur et cetera.
First he presents a division through which he manifests the proposition;
Secondly, he excludes each member of the division, at 202.
He says therefore first [140] that if there is a l, i.e., natural, body outside the extreme periphery, i.e., circumference, it has to be either of the number of simple bodies, or of the number of composite bodies. Moreover, it must exist there according to nature, or outside its nature.
202. Then at [141] he eliminates each member of this division.
First he shows that outside the extreme sphere no simple body exists according to nature. For simple bodies are such that one is moved circularly, one from the middle, and one is moved to the middle and in the middle supports all the others, as was had above. But none of these bodies can exist outside the extreme circumference. For it has been shown above in VI that the circularly moved body does not as to its whole being change its place except in conception. Consequently, it is not possible for that body which is moved circularly to be transferred to a place outside of that in which it exists. But this would follow, if there were a circularly moved body existing outside the extreme circumference as in its natural place. Since the reason that it would be natural to that circularly moved body would also make it natural to the body circularly moved in this world, and every body is naturally borne to its natural place, it would follow, therefore, that that latter circularly moved body would be transferred outside its proper place to another place — which is impossible.
Similarly it is not possible for a light body which is moved from the center to be outside the extreme circumference or for a heavy body which supports the other bodies in the center. For if it is maintained that they exist naturally outside the extreme circumference, such a thing cannot be, since they have other natural places, namely, within the extreme circumference of the whole. For it was shown above that there is one numerical place for all heavy bodies and one for all light bodies. Hence it is not possible that those bodies be naturally outside the extreme circumference of the whole.
And it should be noted that this argument, both as to the body circularly moved, and as to the body moved with straight motion, possesses necessity on account of what was proved above, namely, that there is but one extreme and one middle.
203. Secondly, at [142] he shows that no simple body is outside the heaven outside its nature. For if it were there in that manner that place would be natural to some other body; for a place outside nature for one body must be according to nature for some other — if a proper body were lacking to a place, that place would exist in vain. But it cannot be said that that place is natural to any body: for it is not natural to a circularly moved body, nor to a light or heavy body. But it has been shown above that there are no other bodies besides these. Consequently, it is plain that no simple body exists outside the heaven, either according to nature or outside nature.
204. Thirdly, at [143] he proves that there is no mixed body there. For if none of the simple bodies exists there, it follows that no mixed body is. Wherever there is a mixed body, simple bodies must be there, due to the fact that simple bodies are present in the mixed; and a mixed body gets its natural place according to the simple body predominant in it.
205. Then at [144] he shows that outside the heaven there cannot be any body. Hence he says that it is not possible for a body to come to be outside the heaven. For it would be there either according to nature or outside nature; again, it would be either simple or mixed. But no matter which of these is given, the same situation as above would prevail. For according to the above-stated reasons, it makes no difference whether the question concerns the existence of a body outside the heaven, or the possibility of its coming to be there, since the foregoing arguments conclude both, and since in sempiternal things to be and to be able to be do not differ, as is said in III.
206. Then at [145] he draws the conclusion mainly intended. And he says it is manifest from what has been said that outside the heaven no mass of any sort of body exists, nor can exist, since the whole world consists of its entire proper matter and the matter of the world is the sensible natural body.
However, it should be not understood that he wishes to prove that no sensible body exists outside the heaven on the ground that it consists of the totality of its matter; but rather the converse. Nevertheless, he uses that manner of speaking because the two are mutually convertible.
He concludes, therefore, that there are not many worlds at present, nor were there many in the past, nor will there ever be able to be in the future. Rather the heaven is one and unique and perfect in the sense of consisting of all its parts or of its total matter.
1-21
Outside the heaven there is no place, time etc., consequent upon sensible bodies.
Ἅμα δὲ δῆλον ὅτι οὐδὲ τόπος οὐδὲ κενὸν οὐδὲ χρόνος ἐστὶν ἔξω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ.
Ἐν ἅπαντι γὰρ τόπῳ δυνατὸν ὑπάρξαι σῶμα
κενὸν δ' εἶναί φασιν ἐν ᾧ μὴ ἐνυπάρχει σῶμα, δυνατὸν δ' ἐστὶ γενέσθαι
χρόνος δὲ ἀριθμὸς κινήσεως κίνησις δ' ἄνευ φυσικοῦ σώματος οὐκ ἔστιν. Ἔξω δὲ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ δέδεικται ὅτι οὔτ' ἔστιν οὔτ' ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι σῶμα.
Φανερὸν ἄρα ὅτι οὔτε τόπος οὔτε κενὸν οὔτε χρόνος ἐστὶν ἔξω.
Διόπερ οὔτ' ἐν τόπῳ τἀκεῖ πέφυκεν, οὔτε χρόνος αὐτὰ ποιεῖ γηράσκειν, οὐδ' ἐστὶν οὐδενὸς οὐδεμία μεταβολὴ τῶν ὑπὲρ τὴν ἐξωτάτω τεταγμένων φοράν,
ἀλλ' ἀναλλοίωτα καὶ ἀπαθῆ τὴν ἀρίστην ἔχοντα ζωὴν καὶ τὴν αὐταρκεστάτην διατελεῖ τὸν ἅπαντα αἰῶνα.
(Καὶ γὰρ τοῦτο τοὔνομα θείως ἔφθεγκται παρὰ τῶν ἀρχαίων. Τὸ γὰρ τέλος τὸ περιέχον τὸν τῆς ἑκάστου ζωῆς χρόνον, οὗ μηθὲν ἔξω κατὰ φύσιν, αἰὼν ἑκάστου κέκληται. Κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ λόγον καὶ τὸ τοῦ παντὸς οὐρανοῦ τέλος καὶ τὸ τὸν πάντα χρόνον καὶ τὴν ἀπειρίαν περιέχον τέλος αἰών ἐστιν, ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰεὶ εἶναι τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν εἰληφώς, ἀθάνατος καὶ θεῖος).
Ὅθεν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐξήρτηται, τοῖς μὲν ἀκριβέστερον τοῖς δ' ἀμαυρῶς, τὸ εἶναί τε καὶ ζῆν.
Καὶ γάρ, καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς ἐγκυκλίοις φιλοσοφήμασι περὶ τὰ θεῖα, πολλάκις προφαίνεται τοῖς λόγοις ὅτι τὸ θεῖον ἀμετάβλητον ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι πᾶν τὸ πρῶτον καὶ ἀκρότατον ὃ οὕτως ἔχον μαρτυρεῖ τοῖς εἰρημένοις.
Οὔτε γὰρ ἄλλο κρεῖττόν ἐστιν ὅ τι κινήσει (ἐκεῖνο γὰρ ἂν εἴη θειότερον)
οὔτ' ἔχει φαῦλον οὐδέν, οὔτ' ἐνδεὲς τῶν αὑτοῦ καλῶν οὐδενός ἐστιν.
(279b.) Καὶ ἄπαυστον δὴ κίνησιν κινεῖται εὐλόγως πάντα γὰρ παύεται κινούμενα ὅταν ἔλθῃ εἰς τὸν οἰκεῖον τόπον, τοῦ δὲ κύκλῳ σώματος ὁ αὐτὸς τόπος ὅθεν ἤρξατο καὶ εἰς ὃν τελευτᾷ.
After showing that there neither is, nor can be, any sensible body outside the heaven, the Philosopher here shows that outside the heaven there is none of the things that follow upon sensible bodies.
Et primo ostendit propositum;
secundo ostendit qualia sint quae extra caelum nata sunt esse, ibi: propter quod quidem neque in loco et cetera.
First he proves the proposition;
Secondly, he describes the things that do exist outside the heaven, at 213.
About the first he does three things:
primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo probat propositum, ibi: in omni enim loco etc.;
tertio infert conclusionem intentam, ibi: manifestum igitur et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves the proposition, at 208;
Thirdly, he draws the intended conclusion, at 212.
He says therefore first [146] that with the proof that outside the heaven there is no sensible body, it is also manifest that outside the heaven there is neither place nor void nor time — for these three things were discussed as being concomitants of natural bodies in IV.
208. Then at [147] he proves the proposition.
First, as to place: In every place it is possible for a body to exist, otherwise it would be in vain. But outside the heaven it is not possible for any body to exist, as was proved. Therefore, outside the heaven there is no place.
Secondly, at [148] he proves that outside the heaven there is not a void: Those who posit a void define it to be a place in which a body is not existing but can exist. But outside the heaven it is not possible for a body to exist, as has been shown. Therefore, outside the heaven there is not a void.
209. But it should be noted that the Stoics posited an infinite void, in one part of which the world exists. Consequently, according to them, there is a void outside the heaven. They wanted to prove this with the following fantasy: If someone were on the extreme circumference of the heaven, he could either extend his hand beyond or not. If not, then it is being impeded by something existing beyond. The same question will return regarding that thing existing beyond, if anyone could, while on the extremity, reach out his hand beyond. Consequently we must go on infinitely, or come to an extreme body beyond which a man existing there could reach out his hand. In that case it follows that beyond that a body could exist and does not. Hence there will be a void beyond.
To this Alexander responds that the position is impossible. For since the body of the heaven cannot undergo anything, it cannot receive anything extraneous. Hence, if from this impossible assumption, something against the thesis follows, one should pay it no heed.
But this answer does not seem to be sufficient — since the impossibility of this position is not on the part of something outside the heaven but on the part of the heaven itself. But now we are dealing with what is outside the heaven. Hence it is the same argument if the whole universe were the earth, on whose boundary a man could exist. Consequently, we must state otherwise, just as he says, that a man situated on the extreme circumference could not extend his hand beyond, not because of something outside impeding it, but because it is of the very nature of all natural bodies that they be contained within the extreme circumference of the heaven — otherwise the heaven would not be the universe. Hence if there were a body not depending on the body of the heaven as on a container, there would be nothing to prevent it from existing outside the heaven, as in the case of the spiritual substances, as will be said below.
210. But that there is no void outside the heaven Alexander proves on the ground that such a void is either finite or infinite: If finite, then it is terminated somewhere and the same question will return: Could a person extend his hand beyond that? If it is infinite, it will be capable of receiving an infinite body: then either that power of the void will be in vain or it will be necessary to posit an infinite body capable of being received into the void of the infinite.
Likewise, if there is a void outside the world, the world will be related to each part of the void in exactly the same way, because in a void there are no differences. Consequently, this part of the void in which the world exists is not its proper place. Therefore there is no cause why it should remain in this part of the void. But if the world is in motion, it will not be moved to one part rather than to another, because in the void there are no differences. Therefore, it will be moved in every direction; and thus the world will be torn asunder.
211. Thirdly, at [149] he proves that outside the heaven there is no time. For time is the number of motion, as is plain in IV. But motion cannot exist without a natural body, and a natural body neither exists nor can exist outside the heaven, as has been proved. Therefore, outside the heaven there neither is, nor can be, time.
212. Then at [150] he draws the conclusion intended, and concludes that it is manifest from the foregoing that outside the whole heaven there is neither place nor void nor time.
213. Then at [151] he describes what type of things are outside the heaven. About this he does two things:
primo concludit ex praemissis eorum qualitatem;
secundo ostendit idem ex his quae communiter dicuntur, ibi: etenim quemadmodum in encycliis et cetera.
First he concludes their condition from the foregoing;
Secondly, he shows the same from common opinion, at 217.
About the first he does two things:
primo removet ab eis conditionem eorum quae sunt hic;
secundo ostendit propriam conditionem eorum, ibi: sed inalterabilia et cetera.
First he removes from them the condition of things that exist here;
Secondly, he describes their proper condition, at 214.
He says therefore first [151] that because there is no place outside the heaven, it follows that things by nature apt to be there do not exist in place. And Alexander says that this can be understood about the heaven itself, which is not in place as a whole but with respect to its parts, as is proved in IV.
Again, because time does not exist beyond the heaven, it follows that they do not exist in time; consequently, time does not make them grow old. And this, too, according to Alexander, can belong to the heaven, which, indeed, is not in time in the sense that to be in time consists in being measured by some part of time, as is said in IV. Not only do such beings not grow old in time, but no change affects those things which lie "beyond the outermost motion [lationem]," i.e., beyond the local motion of light bodies — for he is accustomed to call rectilinear motion .
But it does not seem to be true that no change affects heavenly bodies, since they are moved locally, unless perhaps we limit "change" to one affecting the substance. But this seems to be a forced explanation, since the Philosopher excludes all change universally. Likewise, it cannot be properly said that the heaven is there, i.e., outside the heaven. Consequently, it is better to understand his words as applying to God and separated substances which plainly are not contained by time, nor place, since they are separated from all magnitude and motion. Such substances are said to be "there," i.e., outside the heaven, not as in a place, but as not contained nor included under the containment of bodily things, and as exceeding all of corporeal nature. It is such beings that the expression befits, namely, that they undergo no change; because they lie beyond the extreme motion, namely, that of the farthest sphere, which is ordered as extrinsic to and containing all change.
214. Then at [152] he explains the qualities of these beings.
Et primo ostendit eorum conditionem;
secundo exponit quoddam nomen quo usus fuerat, ibi: etenim hoc nomen etc.;
tertio ostendit influentiam eorum in alia, ibi: unde et aliis et cetera.
First he describes their condition;
Secondly, he explains a word he used, at 215;
Thirdly, he shows the influence of these beings on others, at 216.
He says therefore first [152] that those beings which are outside the heaven are unalterable and wholly impassible. They lead the best of lives, inasmuch as their life is not mingled with matter as is the life of corporeal beings. They also have a life that is most self-sufficient, inasmuch as they do not need anything in order to conserve their life or to perform the works of life, They have a life, too, which is not temporal but in total eternity.
Now, among the qualities here listed some can be attributed to heavenly bodies — for example, that they are impassible and unalterable. But the other two cannot belong to them, even if they are alive. For they do not have the best life, since their life would be one resulting from the union of a soul to a celestial body; neither do they have a most self-sufficient life, since they attain their good through motion, as will be said in Book II.
215. Then at [153] he explains the word "eternal" which he had used. And he says that the ancients pronounced this word as divine, i.e., as befitting divine things. Now this word has two meanings.
In one way it is used in a qualified sense as meaning the eternity or age [saeculum] of a thing: for in Greek the same word signifies both. He says, therefore, that the eternity or age of a thing is called an end, i.e., a certain terminal measure which contains the time of any thing's life, in such a way that no time of the life belonging to the thing according to nature exists outside that end or measure. It is like saying that the span of 100 years is the "age" or "eternity" of a man.
In another way "eternity" is used in an absolute sense as comprehending and containing all duration. And this is what he says, namely, that according to the same notion, eternity is called the end of the entire heaven, i.e., it is the span containing the entire duration of the heaven, i.e., the span of all of time. In this sense, eternity refers to a certain perfection which contains all time and the entire infinitude of duration — not as though this eternity is stretched out according to the succession of past and future, as in the case of any span of time, because such succession follows upon motion, whereas the things he described as having life in eternity are completely immobile, but this eternity is a whole existing all at once and comprehending all time and all infinitude. (The Greek word [in English "aeon"] is derived from the words for "always existing".) Such an end, which is called "eternal" is immortal, because that life is not ended by death, and "divine," because it is beyond all matter, quantity, and motion.
216. Then at [154] he shows the influence of these things on others. Now it is manifest that from what is most perfect there is a flowing to others that are less perfect, just as heat flows from fire to other things that are less hot, as is said in II. Hence, since those beings possess the best and most self-sufficient life and eternal existence, it is from them that existence and life are communicated to other things. But not equally to all; rather, to some "more luminously," i.e., more evidently and more perfectly, namely, to those that have individual eternal existence and to those that have rational life; to others "more darkly," i.e., in a lesser and more imperfect way, namely, to those things that are eternal, not in the same individuals, but according to sameness of species, and which have sense or nutritive life.
217. Then at [155] he manifests what he had said about the condition of the aforesaid beings that exist outside the heaven.
Et primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo inducit rationes, ibi: neque enim aliud et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he presents reasons, at 218.
With respect to the first [155] it should be known that among the philosophers there were two kinds of teachings. For there were some which from the very beginning were proposed according to the order of doctrine to the multitude and these were called "encyclia"; others were more subtle, and were proposed to the more advanced hearers and were called "syntagmatica," i.e., co-ordinal, or "acromatica," i.e., hearable, teachings. The dogmas of the philosophers are called "philosophemata."
He says, therefore, that in the "encyclic" [or popular] philosophic discussions concerning divine things the philosophers very often in their arguments showed that everything divine must be "untransmutable," as not subject to motion, and "first," as not subject to time, and "highest," as not contained by place. And they called every separated substance "divine." And this confirms what has been said about such beings.
218. Then at [156] he gives reasons to manifest what he had said, namely, that the first and highest is untransmutable.
Et primo ostendit propositum;
secundo infert quandam conclusionem ex dictis, ibi: et incessabili itaque et cetera.
First he manifests the proposition;
Secondly, he draws a conclusion, at 220.
In regard to the first he gives two arguments, the first of which is as follows: What is always causing motion and acting is better than what is moved and acted upon. But there is nothing better than the first and highest divinity, so as to be able to move it, because such a mover would be more divine. Therefore, the first divine being is not moved, since whatever is moved must be moved by another, as is proved in VII and VIII.
219. The second argument is at [157]: Whatever is moved is moved either to avoid an evil or acquire a good. But what is first has no evil to avoid and lacks no good that it could acquire, because it is most perfect. Therefore, the first is not moved.
The argument could also be presented in the following way: Whatever is moved is moved either to better or to worse. But neither of these can belong to God according to what is said here. Therefore, God, is in no way moved. And one should note that this second argument may be introduced to show that He is not moved by Himself.
220. Then at [158] from the foregoing he draws a conclusion. And he says it "reasonably," i.e., probably, follows that that first mover of the first mobile acts with unceasable motion. For whatever things, after having been moved, rest, these do so when they reach their appropriate place, as is clear in heavy and light bodies. But this cannot be said of the first mobile which is moved circularly, because where its motion starts is the same as where it ends. Therefore, the first mobile is moved by the first mover with an unceasing motion.
And it should be noted that this argument does not conclude of necessity. For it can be said that the motion of the heaven does not cease, not on account of the nature of the place, but on account of the will of the mover. Therefore, he does not present this as a necessary, but as a probable, conclusion.
1-22
Whether the universe is infinite by eternal duration.
Τούτων δὲ διωρισμένων λέγωμεν μετὰ ταῦτα πότερον ἀγένητος ἢ γενητὸς καὶ ἄφθαρτος ἢ φθαρτός, διεξελθόντες πρότερον τὰς τῶν ἄλλων ὑπολήψεις
αἱ γὰρ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀποδείξεις ἀπορίαι περὶ τῶν ἐναντίων εἰσίν.
Ἅμα δὲ καὶ μᾶλλον ἂν εἴη πιστὰ τὰ μέλλοντα λεχθήσεσθαι προακηκοόσι τὰ τῶν ἀμφισβητούντων λόγων δικαιώματα.
Τὸ γὰρ ἐρήμην καταδικάζεσθαι δοκεῖν ἧττον ἂν ἡμῖν ὑπάρχοι καὶ γὰρ δεῖ διαιτητὰς ἀλλ' οὐκ ἀντιδίκους εἶναι τοὺς μέλλοντας τἀληθὲς κρίνειν ἱκανῶς.
Γενόμενον μὲν οὖν ἅπαντες εἶναί φασιν,
ἀλλὰ γενόμενον οἱ μὲν ἀΐδιον, οἱ δὲ φθαρτὸν ὥσπερ ὁτιοῦν ἄλλο τῶν συνισταμένων, οἱ δ' ἐναλλὰξ ὁτὲ μὲν οὕτως ὁτὲ δὲ ἄλλως ἔχειν [φθειρόμενον], καὶ τοῦτο αἰεὶ διατελεῖν οὕτως, ὥσπερ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ὁ Ἀκραγαντῖνος καὶ Ἡράκλειτος ὁ Ἐφέσιος.
Τὸ μὲν οὖν γενέσθαι μὲν ἀΐδιον δ' ὅμως εἶναι φάναι τῶν ἀδυνάτων. Μόνα γὰρ ταῦτα θετέον ὐλόγως ὅσα ἐπὶ πολλῶν ἢ πάντων ὁρῶμεν ὑπάρχοντα, περὶ δὲ τούτου συμβαίνει τοὐναντίον ἅπαντα γὰρ τὰ γινόμενα καὶ φθειρόμενα φαίνεται.
Ἔτι δὲ τὸ μὴ ἔχον ἀρχὴν τοῦ ὡδὶ ἔχειν, ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον ἄλλως ἔχειν πρότερον τὸν ἅπαντα αἰῶνα, ἀδύνατον καὶ μεταβάλλειν ἔσται γάρ τι αἴτιον, ὃ εἰ ὑπῆρχε πρότερον, δυνατὸν ἂν ἦν ἄλλως ἔχειν τὸ ἀδύνατον ἄλλως ἔχειν. Εἰ δὲ πρότερον ἐξ ἄλλως ἐχόντων συνέστη ὁ κόσμος, εἰ μὲν ἀεὶ οὕτως ἐχόντων καὶ ἀδυνάτων ἄλλως ἔχειν, οὐκ ἂν ἐγένετο εἰ δὲ γέγονεν, ἀνάγκη δηλονότι κἀκεῖνα δυνατὰ εἶναι ἄλλως ἔχειν καὶ μὴ ἀεὶ οὕτως ἔχειν, ὥστε καὶ συνεστῶτα διαλυθήσεται καὶ διαλελυμένα συνέστη ἔμπροσθεν, καὶ τοῦτ' ἀπειράκις ἢ οὕτως εἶχεν ἢ δυνατὸν ἦν. Εἰ δὲ τοῦτ', οὐκ ἂν εἴη ἄφθαρτος, οὔτ' εἰ ἄλλως εἶχέ ποτε οὔτ' εἰ δυνατὸν ἄλλως ἔχειν.
221. After the Philosopher showed that the body of the whole universe is not infinite, and that it is not multiple in number, here he inquires whether it is infinite by eternal duration.
Et primo ponit opiniones aliorum;
secundo determinat propositum secundum propriam opinionem, ibi: primum autem dividendum et cetera.
And first he gives the opinions of others.
Secondly, he settles the question according to his own opinion
Regarding the first, he does three things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo ponit opiniones, ibi: genitum quidem igitur etc.; tertio improbat eas, ibi: factum esse quidem et cetera.
First he declares his intention.
Secondly he gives the opinions, at [163].
Thirdly he refutes them.
222. Regarding the first, he does two things. First he states his intention and the order of procedure. And he says that after determining the previous matters, he must go on to say whether the universe is ungenerated or generated, that is whether it begin to exist at some beginning point of time or not, and whether it is incorruptible or corruptible, that is whether after some time it will cease to exist through corruption, or not. But before treating these matters according to our opinion, we must first briefly review the surmisals of others, that is the opinions of other philosophers on this matter. He calls them surmisals [ ], because they were moved to these opinions by frivolous reasons. For it is difficult to adduce efficacious reasons; thus Aristotle said in I that there are some problems about which we do not have reasons, such as whether the world is eternal or not.
223. Secondly, at "of contrary things", he assigns three reasons why here and elsewhere he reviews the opinions of others. The first reason is that "demonstrations", that is proofs, "of contrary things", that is, of contrary opinions, are critiques of "contraries", that is, contrary opinions. That is, they are objections against contrary opinions. Whoever wishes to know any truth, must know the critiques against that truth, because the solution of doubts is the finding of truth, as is said in III . And thus, to know the truth, it is very important to see the reasons for contrary opinions.
224. As for the second reason, he says that there is an additional reason. Because what must be said is made more credible to people who first hear the justification or defense of disputed opinions, that is solutions of the reasons which gave rise to the dispute. For as long as a man is in doubt, before his doubt is resolved, his mind is like someone bound, who cannot move.
225. The third reason is where he says "to condemn without reason" etc. And he says that when we cite the opinions of others and examine and solve their reasons, and give reasons for the contrary, we will not appear guilty of condemning the opinions of others gratuitously, that is, without proper reason, like those who condemn the opinions of others out of mere hatred. This is not becoming to philosophers, who profess to be searchers of the truth. For those who wish to be adequate judges of the truth must not show themselves enemies of those whose statements are to be judged, but as arbiters, and inquirers for both sides.
226. Then at [163] he gives the opinions of others. First he shows in what they all agree, and says that all who were before him stated that the world is generated, i.e., at a certain beginning of time it began to exist through generation.
227. Secondly, he shows in what they differ. And he touches on three opinions. First of all, some said that, although it began to be at a certain beginning of time, yet it will endure forever, as first was said by certain poets, such as Orpheus and Hesiod, who are called "theologians" because they presented divine things under the form of poetry and myths. Plato followed them in this position, holding the world to be generated but indestructible.
The second opinion was that of certain others, that the world is destructible in the same way as any other generated thing composed of many parts, and that after being destroyed, it will never be repaired, just as Socrates, once corrupted, is never restored by nature. And this was the opinion of Democritus, who declared the world to be generated by a fortuitous gathering together of atoms ever mobile, and likewise to be destined to be dissolved at some time by the separation of these atoms.
The third opinion is that of those who say the world is alternately generated and destroyed, and that this alternation has always endured and will always last. Such was the opinion of Empedocles of Agrigenta, for he posited that with friendship assembling the elements and strife separating them, the world was [continuously] generated and destroyed. This, too, was the opinion of Heraclitus of Ephesus, who posited that at some time the world would be consumed by fire and after a certain lapse of time would again be generated by fire, which he supposed was the principle of all things.
228. Now, some claim that these poets and philosophers, and especially Plato, did not understand these matters in the way their words sound on the surface, but wished to conceal their wisdom under certain fables and enigmatic statements. Moreover, they claim that Aristotle's custom in many cases was not to object against their understanding, which was sound, but against their words, lest anyone should fall into error on account of their way of speaking. So says Simplicius in his Commentary. But Alexander held that Plato and the other early philosophers understood the matter just as the words sound literally, and that Aristotle undertook to argue not only against their words but against their understanding as well. Whichever of these may be the case, it is of little concern to us, because the study of philosophy aims not at knowing what men feel, but at what is the truth of things.
229. Then at [165] he refutes these opinions:
et primo primam;
secundo tertiam, ibi: vicissim autem etc.;
tertio secundam, ibi: totaliter autem factum etc. (secunda enim opinio minus habet rationis).
First, the first one;
Secondly, the third one, at 234;
Thirdly, the second one, at 235 (for the second has less of an argument).
About the first he does two things:
primo improbat positionem;
secundo excludit quandam excusationem, ibi: auxilium autem et cetera.
First he refutes the opinion;
Secondly, he rejects an excusing of it, at 231.
With respect to the first he presents two arguments, in the first of which he says that it is impossible for the world to have been made or generated from a certain beginning of time and then afterwards to endure forever. For when we want to assume something "reasonably," i.e., probably, without a demonstration, we must posit what we observe to be true in all or in many cases, for this is the very nature of the probable. But in this case the contrary happens, because all things that are generated we see to corrupt. Therefore one should not lay down that the world is generated and indestructible.
230. He gives the second argument at [166]. And first he states a principle and says that if a thing is such that it does not have within itself a potency which is a principle of its being thus and otherwise, but it is impossible for it to have been otherwise throughout all preceding ages, then such a thing cannot be transmuted. This he proves by leading to an impossibility. For if such a thing should be transmuted, it would be when it is transmuted by some cause producing its transmutation, i.e., by its potency to transmutation. This potency, if it had existed before, would have made it possible for that thing to be other than it was, which thing, however, was assumed to be incapable of being otherwise. But if it previously lacked this potency to be otherwise, and later has it, that itself would be a transmutation of that thing. Consequently, even before it had the potency to be changed, it was able to be changed, namely, by receiving the power to be changed.
From this he argues thus to his proposition; If the world was made from certain things which, before the world was made, were otherwise constituted, then if it is true that those things from which the world was formed were never otherwise than they always were, and could never be otherwise, the world could not have been formed from them. But if the world was formed from them, then, necessarily, those things from which it was formed could be otherwise and do not remain always the same. Hence it follows that even as constituents, i.e., after being united to form the world, they can be separated again; and, when dispersed, they have been previously united, and they alternated thus infinitely, or could have. And if this is true, it follows that the world is not imperishable, nor ever will be imperishable, if the things of which the world consists were at one time otherwise, or even could have been: for in either case it follows that even now it is possible that they be otherwise.
1-23
A Platonic evasion rejected. Two remaining opinions disproved.
Ἣν δέ τινες βοήθειαν ἐπιχειροῦσι φέρειν ἑαυτοῖς τῶν λεγόντων ἄφθαρτον μὲν εἶναι γενόμενον δέ, οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής ὁμοίως γάρ φασι τοῖς τὰ διαγράμματα γράφουσι καὶ σφᾶς εἰρηκέναι περὶ τῆς γενέσεως, οὐχ ὡς γενομένου ποτέ, ἀλλὰ (280a.) διδασκαλίας χάριν ὡς μᾶλλον γνωριζόντων, ὥσπερ τὸ διάγραμμα γιγνόμενον θεασαμένους.
Τοῦτο δ' ἐστίν, ὥσπερ λέγομεν, οὐ τὸ αὐτό ἐν μὲν γὰρ τῇ ποιήσει τῶν διαγραμμάτων πάντων τεθέντων εἶναι ἅμα τὸ αὐτὸ συμβαίνει, ἐν δὲ ταῖς τούτων ἀποδείξεσιν οὐ ταὐτόν, ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον τὰ γὰρ λαμβανόμενα πρότερον καὶ ὕστερον ὑπεναντία ἐστίν ἐξ ἀτάκτων γὰρ τεταγμένα γενέσθαι φασίν, ἅμα δὲ ἄτακτον εἶναι καὶ τεταγμένον ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ' ἀνάγκη γένεσιν εἶναι τὴν χωρίζουσαν καὶ χρόνον ἐν δὲ τοῖς διαγράμμασιν οὐδὲν τῷ χρόνῳ κεχώρισται. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἀδύνατον ἅμ' ἀΐδιον αὐτὸν εἶναι καὶ γενέσθαι, φανερόν.
Τὸ δ' ἐναλλὰξ συνιστάναι καὶ διαλύειν οὐδὲν ἀλλοιότερον ποιεῖν ἐστὶν ἢ τὸ κατασκευάζειν αὐτὸν ἀΐδιον μέν, ἀλλὰ μεταβάλλοντα τὴν μορφήν, ὥσπερ εἴ τις ἐκ παιδὸς ἄνδρα γινόμενον καὶ ἐξ ἀνδρὸς παῖδα ὁτὲ μὲν φθείρεσθαι ὁτὲ δ' εἶναι οἴοιτο δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι καὶ εἰς ἄλληλα τῶν στοιχείων συνιόντων οὐχ ἡ τυχοῦσα τάξις γίγνεται καὶ σύστασις, ἀλλ' ἡ αὐτή, ἄλλως τε καὶ κατὰ τοὺς τοῦτον τὸν λόγον εἰρηκότας, οἳ τῆς διαθέσεως ἑκατέρας αἰτιῶνται τὸ ἐναντίον. Ὥστ' εἰ τὸ ὅλον σῶμα συνεχὲς ὂν ὁτὲ μὲν οὕτως ὁτὲ δ' ἐκείνως διατίθεται καὶ διακεκόσμηται, ἡ δὲ τοῦ ὅλου σύστασίς ἐστι κόσμος καὶ οὐρανός, οὐκ ἂν ὁ κόσμος γίγνοιτο καὶ φθείροιτο, ἀλλ' αἱ διαθέσεις αὐτοῦ.
Τὸ δ' ὅλως γενόμενον φθαρῆναι καὶ μὴ ἀνακάμπτειν ὄντος μὲν ἑνὸς ἀδύνατόν ἐστιν πρὶν γὰρ γενέσθαι ἀεὶ ὑπῆρχεν ἡ πρὸ αὐτοῦ σύστασις, ἣν μὴ γενομένην οὐχ οἷόν τ' εἶναί φαμεν μεταβάλλειν ἀπείρων δ' ὄντων ἐνδέχεται μᾶλλον.
Οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῦτο πότερον ἀδύνατον ἢ δυνατόν, ἔσται δῆλον ἐκ τῶν ὕστερον εἰσὶ γάρ τινες οἷς ἐνδέχεσθαι δοκεῖ καὶ ἀγένητόν τι ὂν φθαρῆναι καὶ γενόμενον ἄφθαρτον διατελεῖν, ὥσπερ ἐν τῷ Τιμαίῳ ἐκεῖ γάρ φησι τὸν οὐρανὸν γενέσθαι μέν, οὐ μὴν ἀλλ' ἔσεσθαί γε τὸν λοιπὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον. Πρὸς οὓς φυσικῶς μὲν περὶ οὐρανοῦ μόνον εἴρηται, καθόλου δὲ περὶ ἅπαντος σκεψαμένοις ἔσται καὶ περὶ τούτου δῆλον.
231. After presenting the arguments against Plato, the Philosopher here rejects a certain excusing of the aforesaid opinion, which Xenocrates and other Platonists proposed. About this he does two things:
primo proponit excusationem;
secundo excludit eam, ibi: hoc autem est, quemadmodum dicimus et cetera.
First he proposes the explanation;
Secondly, he rejects it, at 232.
He says, therefore, first [167] that there is no truth in that "help," i.e., that excusing, by which some Platonists seek to justify their assertion —that the world is imperishable, but yet made or generated — and make it appear not unreasonable. For they say that their description of the world's generation was after the manner of those who describe geometric figures by first drawing certain parts of the figure, e.g., of a triangle, and later other parts, not implying that these parts existed before the figure was formed of them, but doing this in order to demonstrate more explicitly what things are required for the figure. They say that Plato in like manner declared that the world was made from elements, not as though the world was generated at some definite time, but for the purpose of presenting his doctrine, so that, namely, his hearers would be more easily instructed about the nature of the world, if first the parts of the world were demonstrated to them and what these parts possessed of themselves, and later the composition they had from the cause of the world, which is God. Consequently they look on, i.e., consider, the world as generated in the manner of the description which geometers use in describing figures.
232. Then at [168] he disproves this explanation. And he says that the way the generation of the world is described by them is not in the same manner as the descriptions of figures made by geometers, as will be clear from what we shall now say. For in geometric descriptions the same thing happens whether all the parts are considered together as constituting the figure, or whether they are not taken together. When they are taken separately, no more is said about them than that they are lines or angles, which is also true of them when they are taken all together in the figure made out of them. But in the demonstrations presented by those who posit the generation of the world, the same thing is not taken when the parts are considered together and when they are not. Rather, it is impossible that the same be taken in both instances, just as it is impossible for opposites to be together — for the things taken first, i.e., before the establishing of the world, and those taken later, i.e., after the world is now established, are "subcontraries," i.e., have a certain conjoined and latent contrariety.
For they say that out of unordered elements, ordered things were made, God reducing the disorder among the elements to order, as Plato says in the Timaeus. But geometers do not say that a triangle is composed out of separated lines but out of lines. The situation would be similar if those in question solely said that the world results from elements, but what they say is that the orderly world came about from disordered elements. Now it is not possible for something to be at once ordered and disordered, but a process of generation is required through which one is separated from the other, so that before generation it is disordered, and after generation ordered. Consequently it is necessary to suppose some time distinguishing the two. But no such distinction of time is required in the descriptions of figures — for it is not necessary that a line and a triangle be distinguished in the order of time as ordered and disordered are.
233. Still others desire to excuse Plato on the ground that he did not teach that there was a prior disorder in the elements which subsequently, at a later time, began to be ordered, but rather disorder is always present under some aspect in the elements of the world, although under another aspect there is order, as Aristotle himself posits that matter always has a concomitant privation, although it is always in some respect under form. It is also possible to interpret Plato as stressing what the elements would be of themselves if they had not been put in order by God, not that there was ever a time in which they existed disordered.
But whatever Plato may have understood about the matter, Aristotle, as has been said, objected against what Plato's words express. He concludes, therefore, from the foregoing that it is impossible for the world to have been generated and yet able to go on forever.
234. Then at [169] he takes up the opinion of Empedocles which is the third one mentioned. And he says that those who maintain that the world alternates between being assembled and dissolved do nothing more than assert the substantial permanence of the world but its transmutability with respect to its form or its arrangement. It is as though someone seeing a boy becoming a man, if it should be posited that he sees the same person becoming from a man a boy again, should reckon this person as [alternately] at one time coming into existence and at one time ceasing to be. That the opinion of Empedocles is tantamount to positing the substance of the world as eternal, he manifests by the fact that after the elements shall have been separated by strife and later reassembled, it is not just any order and any new arrangement that will ensue but the very same one that now exists.
And this is made clear "in another way," i.e., by reason, because the very same cause, namely, friendship, will assemble the elements which previously assembled them; consequently, the same arrangement of the world will result. And this is plain also from the teachings of those who hold this position and assert that friendship and strife are contrary and the causes of a contrary disposition in the elements, so that at one time they are assembled and at another separated. Hence he concludes that if the entire body of the world, while remaining "continuous," i.e., conjoined, is now disposed and arranged in one way and later in another way, then, since it is the "combination," or substance, of all bodies that is called the world or heaven, it follows that the world is not generated and destroyed but only its arrangements are.
235. Then at [170] he takes Democritus' opinion, which was the second one mentioned.
Et primo dicit qualiter se habeat ista opinio;
secundo ostendit quid circa hanc postmodum erit manifestum, ibi: sed tamen et cetera.
First he explains this opinion;
Secondly, he shows what will later be clear about it, at 236.
He says therefore first [170] that if someone should maintain that the world was made, and entirely ceases to be without returning, in such a way, namely, that it will never be restored again, such a thing is impossible, if there is but one world. The reason is that if there is but one world, made at some time, then, since it was not made from nothing, there was, previous to its being made, a substance which existed before it. Either we hold that that substance which pre-existed before the world could have been subject to generation, or that it could not. If not, then the world could not have been made from it. And this is what he says, namely, that if it was not made, or not generated, i.e., not subject to generation, we say it to be impossible of transmutation, i.e., not able to be transmuted in order for the world to be made out of it. But if it possessed in its nature the power to be transmuted, so that the world could be made from it, then also after the destruction of the world it could be transmuted and a world made again from it.
But if someone posits infinite worlds, in the sense that from atoms arranged in one way this world comes to be, and from the same or other atoms differently arranged another world comes to be, and so on , such a position would be a better foundation for what was said, namely, that the world once destroyed is never again regenerated, because from the assumption that other worlds are possible, another world could be arranged from those atoms. However, if there could be but one world, something incompatible with the theory follows: the matter into which the world dissolved would still be in potency to have a world made from it. Hence if a different world were impossible, the very same one would have to be produced again.
236. Then at [171] he shows what remains to be said, and says that from what will follow, it will be clear whether this is possible or impossible. And if "this" refers to what was just said of the opinion about infinite worlds, the phrase "what will follow" refers, not to what follows immediately, in which nothing is said about this opinion, but to what will be said about the opinion of Democritus in III and in I. But if "this" refers to the whole preceding section, where there is treated the opinion of those who posit that the world was generated, then the phrase "what will follow" refers to what immediately follows.
And this is confirmed by what he at once adds. For there are some who conceive it possible for something which was never generated to perish at some time, and for something newly generated to remain incorruptible, as Plato says in the Timaeus that the heaven was produced in being, but will nevertheless endure for eternity. Thus he posits both statements: that disarranged matter, which never became disarranged, at some time ceases to be, and that the world began, and never ceases to be. Against those who thus posit that the world began through generation, Aristotle argued above near the beginning of this book with natural reasons solely to the effect that the heaven was proved ungenerated and indestructible, on the ground that it has no contrary. But now this will be shown by a universal consideration of all beings.
1-24
Various meanings of "generable" and "ungenerable," "corruptible" and "incorruptible"
(280b.) Πρῶτον δὲ διαιρετέον πῶς ἀγένητα καὶ γενητά φαμεν καὶ φθαρτὰ καὶ ἄφθαρτα
πολλαχῶς γὰρ λεγομένων, κἂν μηδὲν διαφέρῃ πρὸς τὸν λόγον, ἀνάγκη τὴν διάνοιαν ἀορίστως ἔχειν, ἄν τις τῷ διαιρουμένῳ πολλαχῶς ὡς ἀδιαιρέτῳ χρῆται ἄδηλον γὰρ κατὰ ποίαν φύσιν αὐτῶν συμβαίνει τὸ λεχθέν.
Λέγεται δ' ἀγένητον ἕνα μὲν τρόπον ἐὰν ᾖ τι νῦν πρότερον μὴ ὂν ἄνευ γενέσεως καὶ μεταβολῆς, καθάπερ ἔνιοι τὸ ἅπτεσθαι καὶ τὸ κινεῖσθαι λέγουσιν οὐ γὰρ εἶναι γενέσθαι φασὶν ἁπτόμενον, οὐδὲ κινούμενον. Ἕνα δ' εἴ τι ἐνδεχόμενον γίνεσθαι ἢ γενέσθαι μή ἐστιν ὁμοίως γὰρ καὶ τοῦτο ἀγένητον, ὅτι ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι. Ἕνα δ' εἴ τι ὅλως ἀδύνατον γενέσθαι, ὥσθ' ὁτὲ μὲν εἶναι ὁτὲ δὲ μή. (Τὸ δ' ἀδύνατον λέγεται διχῶς. Ἢ γὰρ τῷ μὴ ἀληθὲς εἶναι εἰπεῖν ὅτι γένοιτ' ἄν, ἢ τῷ μὴ ῥᾳδίως μηδὲ ταχὺ ἢ καλῶς.)
Τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ τὸ γενητὸν ἕνα μὲν εἰ μὴ ὂν πρότερον ὕστερον ἔστιν, εἴτε γινόμενον εἴτ' ἄνευ τοῦ γίνεσθαι, ὁτὲ μὲν μὴ ὄν, πάλιν δ' ὄν. Ἕνα δ' εἰ δυνατόν, εἴτε τῷ ἀληθεῖ διορισθέντος τοῦ δυνατοῦ εἴτε τῷ ῥᾳδίως. Ἕνα δ' ἐὰν ἡ γένεσις αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος εἰς τὸ ὄν, εἴτ' ἤδη ὄντος, διὰ τοῦ γίνεσθαι δ' ὄντος, εἴτε καὶ μήπω ὄντος, ἀλλ' ἐνδεχομένου.
Καὶ φθαρτὸν δὲ καὶ ἄφθαρτον ὡσαύτως εἴτε γὰρ πρότερόν τι ὂν ὕστερον ἢ μή ἐστιν ἢ ἐνδέχεται μὴ εἶναι, φθαρτὸν εἶναί φαμεν, εἴτε φθειρόμενόν ποτε καὶ μεταβάλλον, εἴτε μή. Ἔστι δ' ὅτε καὶ τὸ διὰ τοῦ φθείρεσθαι ἐνδεχόμενον μὴ εἶναι φθαρτὸν εἶναί φαμεν, καὶ ἔτι ἄλλως τὸ ῥᾳδίως φθειρόμενον, ὃ εἴποι ἄν τις εὔφθαρτον.
Καὶ περὶ τοῦ ἀφθάρτου ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος Ἢ γὰρ τὸ ἄνευ φθορᾶς ὁτὲ μὲν ὂν ὁτὲ δὲ μὴ ὄν, οἷον τὰς ἁφάς, ὅτι ἄνευ τοῦ φθείρεσθαι πρότερον οὖσαι ὕστερον οὐκ εἰσίν. Ἢ τὸ ὂν μέν, δυνατὸν δὲ μὴ εἶναι, ἢ καὶ οὐκ ἐσόμενόν ποτε, νῦν δ' ὄν σὺ γὰρ εἶ, καὶ ἡ ἁφὴ νῦν ἀλλ' ὅμως φθαρτόν, ὅτι ἔσται ποτὲ ὅτε οὐκ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν ὅτι εἶ, οὐδὲ ταῦτα ἅπτεσθαι. Τὸ δὲ μάλιστα κυρίως, τὸ ὂν μέν, ἀδύνατον δὲ φθαρῆναι οὕτως ὥστε νῦν ὂν ὕστερον μὴ εἶναι ἢ ἐνδέχεσθαι μὴ εἶναι. Ἢ καὶ τὸ μήπω ἐφθαρμένον, ἐνδεχόμενον δ' ὕστερον μὴ εἶναι. Λέγεται δ' (281a.) ἄφθαρτον καὶ τὸ μὴ ῥᾳδίως φθειρόμενον.
237. After discussing others' opinions about whether the world is generated and destructible [corruptible], the Philosopher here pursues this question according to his own opinion.
Et primo praemittit quaedam quae sunt necessaria ad investigationem propositi;
secundo prosequitur propositam quaestionem, ibi: determinatis autem his et cetera.
First he presents pre-notes needed in his investigation of the question;
Secondly, he pursues the question (L. 26).
About the first he does two things:
primo distinguit multiplicitatem horum nominum, quibus utitur in quaestione, scilicet geniti et ingeniti, corruptibilis et incorruptibilis;
secundo distinguit multiplicitatem quorundam nominum, quae in praedictorum definitione cadunt, scilicet possibilis et impossibilis, ibi: si itaque haec sic habent et cetera.
First he distinguishes various senses of the following words used in the question: namely, "generated" and "ungenerated," "destructible" and "indestructible";
Secondly, he distinguishes various senses of certain words used in the definitions of the foregoing: namely, "possible" and "impossible" (L. 25).
About the first he does two things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo propositum prosequitur, ibi: dicitur autem ingenitum et cetera.
First he reveals his intention;
Secondly, he carries it out, at 239.
About the first he does two things:
First he reveals his intention [172] and says that in investigating the foregoing question it is first of all necessary to distinguish the various ways in which things are said to be "generable" and "ungenerable," "destructible" and "indestructible."
238. Secondly, at [173] he reveals the reason for his intention and says that when things are said in a number of ways, it sometimes happens that this multiplicity produces no difference with regard to the argument proposed, i.e., when a particular word is restricted to one meaning in the course of the argument. But when a particular word is used with different meanings, such a multiplicity does make a difference. Even where there is no difference as to the argument, the intellect of the hearer becomes confused, if someone uses a word which can be distinguished in many ways as though it could not — for when someone uses a word of multiple meaning, it is not evident according to which signified essence the conclusion occurs.
239. Then at [174] he distinguishes the aforesaid words:
et primo ingenitum et genitum;
secundo corruptibile et incorruptibile, ibi: et corruptibile autem et cetera.
First, "ungenerated" and "generated";
Secondly, "destructible" and "indestructible," at 243.
About the first he does two things:
primo distinguit hoc nomen ingenitum;
secundo hoc nomen genitum, ibi: eodem autem modo et cetera.
First he distinguishes the word "ungenerated";
Secondly, the word "generated," at 241.
He declares first [174] that this word "ungenerated" is used in three ways. The first of these is when something is called "ungenerated" which now exists but previously did not, yet this occurs without its having been begotten or transmuted. Some give the example of being touched or moved: for they assert that contact and motion are not generated. And this was proved in V because, since generation is a kind of motion or transmutation, if motion were generated, it would follow that there would be a change of a change. Consequently, contact and motion, although they begin to be, are called "ungenerated," because they are not generated and are not apt to be generated.
In a second way something is said to be "ungenerated," if it is able to either come to be or not come to be and still it has not yet come to be. For example, a man to be born tomorrow is able, as far as the future is concerned, to come to be and not come to be, and yet he is said to be "ungenerated," because he has not yet been born. For "ungenerated," in the sense of "not generated," can be applied similarly to what is able to come to be, because it is not yet generated, and to what is not able to be generated.
In a third way something is said to be "ungenerated," when it is entirely impossible for it, through generation or any other way, to come into existence as being able either to exist or not exist. In this sense the word "ungenerated" describes things that cannot be or things that cannot not be. Now this third way is distinguished into two other ways, for there are two ways in which something is "impossible" to be or become: first, absolutely, when it is in no sense true to say that this may at some time come to be; secondly, when a thing is described as impossible to come about because it is not easy for it to come about, either because it does not come about quickly or because its coming into existence cannot be conveniently managed, as when we say that bad iron is not easy to fashion.
240. In order to understand these three ways it should be noted that generation has the common note of something's beginning to exist, and also implies a definite way of existing, namely, through transformation. Therefore the negation implied by the word "ungenerated" may either negate both, namely, both a beginning and the way of beginning, or it can negate only the way of beginning. And both can occur in two ways: in one way in the sphere of act, and in the other in the sphere of potency. Therefore, if the negation does not deny a beginning but merely the manner of beginning, we have the first meaning of the word according to which something is said to be "ungenerated," if it can begin to be but not through generation. But if it does not deny the possibility but merely the actual state, for example, because it can begin to be and can be generated, but has not yet begun to be or been generated, then it is the second sense of the word. But if it does not only deny the manner of its beginning, as in the first sense, or only the actual state of existence, as in the second sense, but both the manner of its beginning and the very beginning itself, both as to its actual state and even its possibility, then it is the third and most perfect sense, according to which something is said to be ungenerated in the strict and absolute sense. This sense, however, is still distinguished according to whether something is said to be "possible" either absolutely or in a qualified sense.
241. Then at [175] he distinguishes the meanings of the word "generated," and says that it is also in three senses that "generated" is used. The first of these occurs if something previously did not exist and later began to exist, either through generation, as man, or without generation, as contact, provided that the thing described as generated is something that one time is not and later is.
In a second way, something is described as "generated," if it is possible for it to begin to exist, where "possible" refers either to the truth, i.e., to what can exist, or to what is easy, i.e., can easily be made to exist.
In the third way, something is described as "generated," if it can be the subject of generation and proceeds thus from non-existence to existence. In this third sense it makes no difference whether the thing has already begun to be, and this by being made, i.e., through the process of generation, or whether it has not yet begun to be, but may come to be through generation.
In keeping with what has been said, the notion of these ways is apparent. Because when something is called "generated" in the first sense, its actual inception is asserted but not a definite mode of inception that the word "generation" signifies. But in the second sense the possibility of inception is asserted without asserting the definite way it began, which sense is distinguished according to the way "potency" is distinguished. However, the third way asserts not only inception but a definite kind of inception. And this third way can be further distinguished into two: for it asserts either a definite kind of inception that is actual, as when something is already generated, or one that is potential, as indicating something is naturally apt to be generated.
242. Now if anyone rightly considers the senses he has set down of the word "generated," he will see that they differ from the senses of "ungenerated" in two ways: first with respect to distinction, and, secondly, with respect to order.
With respect to distinction: In distinguishing the senses of "ungenerated," the denial of a definite kind of inception as possible was included under one sense and the denial of the same kind of inception as actual, was included under another sense — for in the first sense "ungenerated" referred to what could not begin to be through generation, but in the second it referred to what could begin to be through generation but had not yet been generated.
But in regard to the denial of inception in common, both the possibility and the actuality of inception are included under the same sense — for the third sense of "ungenerated" referred to what has both not begun to be and cannot begin to be. But conversely, in the senses of "generated" it is on the part of a beginning in common that he distinguishes the modalities according to potency and act — for the first sense refers to what actually begins to be in any way whatever, while the second sense refers to what can begin in any way, although it has not yet begun. However, with regard to a definite kind of inception, the actuality and possibility are included under one mode —for in the third sense something is described as "generated" which either has been generated or can be generated. Thus it is plain that the last three senses are not exactly parallel to the first three, because what was distinguished in the first remains undistinguished in the second, and vice versa.
With respect to order these senses are different: For in presenting the modes of "ungenerated," that which pertains to a definite kind of inception was placed before that which pertains to inception in common, whereas in presenting the modes of "generated," that which pertains to inception in common was mentioned first. And Aristotle had a subtle reason for so doing. For he wanted to list the imperfect senses first and the perfect ones last. Now denial and affirmation are related to the proper and to the common in different ways: for a denial of what is proper is imperfect, but a denial of what is common is perfect, because when the common is denied, the proper is denied. Consequently, the last sense of "ungenerated" is presented as the perfect sense, because it denies inception in general. And because the denial of a particular kind of inception is imperfect, he presents the partial modes as distinguished according to potency and act.
But the affirming of what is proper is perfect, because in affirming what is proper that which is common is also affirmed, while the affirming of what is common is imperfect. Accordingly, the last sense of "generated" is presented as the perfect one, namely, when something begins to be through generation, and he includes under this sense, as under the perfect sense, both the possibility and the actuality. However, the senses pertaining to inception in general are presented first, as the imperfect senses: for a thing is not said to be "generated" in the perfect sense just because it has begun to be. For this reason he distinguished these modes, as partial, into one referring to possibility and another referring to actuality.
243. Then at [176] he distinguishes the senses of "destructible" and "indestructible":
et primo corruptibilis;
secundo incorruptibilis, ibi: et de incorruptibili et cetera.
First, "destructible";
Secondly, "indestructible," at 245.
He says therefore first [176] that "destructible" and "indestructible" are also said in many senses, and he presents three senses of "destructible." Now it should be noted that, just as generation implies inception in a definite way, so, too, destruction implies extinction in a definite way, namely, through transmutation. Consequently, the first sense of "destruction" is that of extinction in common without any distinction between possibility and actuality. And the reason for this order is the same as that used above for the word "generated": just as a thing is not said perfectly to be "generated" just because it begins to be, so a thing is not said perfectly to be "destroyed" just because it ceases to be, nor "destructible" just because it can cease to be.
Therefore the first sense in which we describe something as "destructible" is when it previously existed but later it either is not, or is able not to be, whether this is due to perishing and transmutation, as a man is perishable, or not through perishing and transmutation, as contact and motion cease to be.
In the second sense we describe something as "destructible," if it can not be, i.e., able at some time to cease to be, on account of a specific way of ceasing to be.
In the third sense, something is said to be "destructible," because it is easily destroyed, and can be called "euphtharton," i.e., well destructible.
244. It should be observed that although the senses of "destructible" agree with those of "generated" as far as the order is concerned for just as in the latter there is placed first inception in general, so here there is placed first destruction in general, there is a difference in the way their modes are distinguished. For there the modes were distinguished according to possibility and actuality, but here they are distinguished according to absolute, and perfect, possibility, which latter is the last, as the most perfect mode — for the most perfectly destructible is what is easily destroyed. The reason for this is that "generated" is said according to act, while "destructible" according to potency. Hence "generated" can refer to both actuality and possibility, but "destructible" to possibility only.
The reason he set down "generated," which is according to act, and "corruptible," which is according to potency, is this: Since generation is from non-being to being, and corruption from being to non-being, that which is "generable" is not yet a being, but only that which has been "generated" is; on the other hand, that which is "corruptible" is a being, but that which has been "corrupted" is no longer a being. Now the intention of the Philosopher is to discuss a question, not of non-beings but of beings. And that is why he employs the words "generated" and "corruptible."
245. Then at [177] he distinguishes the senses of "indestructible." And he presents three senses. The first of these denies a definite kind of extinguishing process, insofar as that is said to be "indestructible" which can cease to be in such a way that at one time it exists and later does not, but this without corruption. Examples are contact and motion which, after first existing do not later, but this is without their corruption, since things are subject neither to generation nor corruption. Consequently, this sense corresponds to the first sense of "ungenerated."
In a second sense something is called "indestructible," when extinction in common is denied. And he says that "indestructible" in this sense refers to what is now a being and it is impossible for it later not to be a being, or not to be in the future. This kind of indestructibility does not belong to any thing that can cease to be through corruption. For you, who can cease to be through corruption, exist now, and so does contact, which can cease to be, but not by corruption — yet both of these are called "corruptible" in a certain way, since a time will come when it will not be true to say that you exist, or that this is in contact. And, therefore, that is most properly called "indestructible" which is, indeed, a being but cannot be destroyed in such a way that, while it is a being now, later it will not be, or is able not to be, and although not yet destroyed can, nevertheless, eventually become non-existent. What is not so constituted is properly called "indestructible."
In a third sense, something is called "indestructible" which is not destroyed easily. And this corresponds to the third sense of "destructible," just as the second corresponds to the second, and the first to the first.
1-25
How something is said to be "possible" and "impossible".
Εἰ δὴ ταῦθ' οὕτως ἔχει, σκεπτέον πῶς λέγομεν τὸ δυνατὸν καὶ ἀδύνατον
τό τε γὰρ κυριώτατα λεγόμενον ἄφθαρτον τῷ μὴ δύνασθαι ἂν φθαρῆναι, μηδ' ὁτὲ μὲν εἶναι ὁτὲ δὲ μή λέγεται δὲ καὶ τὸ ἀγένητον τὸ ἀδύνατον καὶ μὴ δυνάμενον γενέσθαι οὕτως ὥστε πρότερον μὲν μὴ εἶναι ὕστερον δὲ εἶναι, οἷον τὴν διάμετρον σύμμετρον.
Εἰ δή τι δύναται κινηθῆναι [στάδια ἑκατὸν] ἢ ἆραι βάρος, ἀεὶ πρὸς τὸ πλεῖστον λέγομεν, οἷον τάλαντα ἆραι ἑκατὸν ἢ στάδια βαδίσαι ἑκατόν (καίτοι καὶ τὰ μόρια δύναται τὰ ἐντός, εἴπερ καὶ τὴν ὑπεροχήν), ὡς δέον ὁρίζεσθαι πρὸς τὸ τέλος καὶ τὴν ὑπεροχὴν τὴν δύναμιν. Ἀνάγκη μὲν οὖν τὸ δυνατὸν καθ' ὑπεροχὴν τοσαδὶ καὶ τὰ ἐντὸς δύνασθαι, οἷον εἰ τάλαντα ἑκατὸν ἆραι, καὶ δύο, κἂν εἰ στάδια ἑκατόν, καὶ δύο δύνασθαι βαδίσαι.
Ἡ δὲ δύναμις τῆς ὑπεροχῆς ἐστίν κἂν εἴ τι ἀδύνατον τοσονδὶ καθ' ὑπερβολὴν εἰπόντων, καὶ τὰ πλείω ἀδύνατον, οἷον ὁ χίλια βαδίσαι στάδια μὴ δυνάμενος δῆλον ὅτι καὶ χίλια καὶ ἕν.
Μηδὲν δ' ἡμᾶς παρενοχλείτω διωρίσθω γὰρ κατὰ τῆς ὑπεροχῆς τὸ τέλος λεγόμενον τὸ κυρίως δυνατόν. Τάχα γὰρ ἐνσταίη τις ἂν ὡς οὐκ ἀνάγκη τὸ λεχθέν ὁ γὰρ ὁρῶν στάδιον οὐ καὶ τὰ ἐντὸς ὄψεται μεγέθη, ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὁ δυνάμενος ἰδεῖν στιγμὴν ἢ ἀκοῦσαι μικροῦ ψόφου καὶ τῶν μειζόνων ἕξει αἴσθησιν.
Ἀλλ' οὐδὲν διαφέρει πρὸς τὸν λόγον διωρίσθω γὰρ ἤτοι ἐπὶ τῆς δυνάμεως ἢ ἐπὶ τοῦ πράγματος ἡ ὑπερβολή. Τὸ γὰρ λεγόμενον δῆλον ἡ μὲν γὰρ ὄψις ἡ τοῦ ἐλάττονος ὑπερέχει, ἡ δὲ ταχυτὴς ἡ τοῦ πλείονος.
246. After pointing out the various senses of "generated" and "ungenerated," "destructible" and "indestructible," the Philosopher here explains the meaning of what is called "possible" and "impossible."
Et primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo exequitur propositum, ibi: si itaque aliquid potest et cetera.
First he reveals his intention;
Secondly, he executes his plan, at 248.
About the first he does two things:
First he states what his intention is concerned with [178], and says that since the situation is thus with regard to the meanings of "generated" and "ungenerated," "destructible" and "indestructible," it is necessary to consider how something is said to be "possible" and "impossible."
247. Secondly, at [179] he gives the reason for his intention, namely, that "possible" and "impossible" are included in the definition of the aforesaid. For, as has been said above, that is most appropriately called "indestructible" which not only cannot be destroyed but can in no way exist at one time and later not exist. Similarly, "ungenerated" is appropriately applied to what is impossible, namely, to be and not to be, and which cannot come to be in any way such that previously it does not exist and later does exist. Thus, for the diagonal of a square to be symmetric, i.e., commensurate, to the side, is ungenerated, because it never can begin to be.
248. Then at [180] he shows how something is described as possible and impossible. And it should be noted that, as the Philosopher says in V, possible and impossible are said in one way absolutely, namely, because in themselves they can be true or cannot be true by reason of the relationship existing between the terms; in another way a thing is said to be possible or impossible to something, namely, what it is able for with respect to its active or passive power. And it is in this sense that "possible" and "impossible" are taken here, namely, as what is, or is not, within the power of an agent or patient — for this is the meaning that is most appropriate to natural things.
Primo ergo ostendit quomodo dicatur aliquid esse possibile vel impossibile;
secundo excludit obiectionem, ibi: nihil autem nos turbet et cetera.
First, then, he shows how something is said to be "possible" or "impossible";
Secondly, he excludes an objection, at 251.
With respect to the first he does two things:
primo manifestat quomodo dicatur aliquid esse possibile;
secundo ostendit quomodo dicatur aliquid esse impossibile, ibi: et utique si quid et cetera.
First he manifests how some thing is said to be "possible";
Secondly, how something is called "impossible," at 250.
249. To explain the first [180] he says that if a thing is capable of something great, for example, if a man can walk 100 stades or can lift a great weight, we always determine or describe his power in terms of the most he can do. For example, we say that the power of this man is that he can lift a weight of 100 talents or can walk a distance of 100 stades, even though he is capable of all the partial distances included in that quantity, since he can do what exceeds. But his power is not described by these parts — we do not determine his power as being able to carry 50 talents or walk 50 stades, but by the most he can do. Consequently, the power of each thing is described with respect to the end, i.e., with respect to the ultimate, and to the maximum of which it is capable, and with respect to the strength of its excellence. Thus, too, the size of a thing is determined by what is greatest —for example, in describing the size of something that is three cubits, we do not say that it is two cubits. Similarly, we assign as the notion of man that he is rational, not that he is sensible, because what is the ultimate and greatest in a thing is what completes it and puts upon it the stamp of its species.
Consequently, it is plain that one who can do what exceeds, necessarily can do what is less. For example, if a person can carry 100 talents, he can also carry two, and if he can walk 100 stades, he can also walk two; yet it is to what is excelling that the virtue of a thing is attributed, i.e., the virtue of a thing is gauged in terms of what is most excellent of all the things that can be done.
This is what is said in another translation, "the virtue is the limit of a power," because, namely, the virtue of a thing is determined according to the ultimate it can do. And this applies also to the virtues of the soul: for a human virtue is that through which a man is capable of what is most excellent in human actions, i.e., in an action which is in accordance with reason.
250. Then at [181] he tells how something is said to be "impossible" to a thing. And he says that if some amount is impossible to someone if one takes what excels, it is plain that it will be impossible for him to carry or do more. For example, a person who cannot walk 100 stades clearly cannot walk 101. Hence, it is plain that just as the possibility is determined by the greatest that a thing can do — which determines its virtue — so what is impossible is determined by the least that it cannot do, and this determines its weakness. For example, if the most that someone can do is to go 20 stades, the least that he cannot go is 21 — and it is from this that his weakness is to be determined, and not from his inability to walk 100 or 1,000 stades.
251. Then at [182] he excludes an objection.
Et primo movet eam;
secundo solvit, ibi: sed nihil differt et cetera.
First he proposes it;
Secondly, he solves it, at 252.
He says therefore first [182] that nothing should disturb us in connection with the fact that what is properly called "possible" is determined according to the limit of excellence. Someone could, indeed, object that what has been said is not necessary in all matters — for there seems to be an objection in the case of sight and other senses. For a person who sees some large quantity, for example, something a stadium long, cannot for that reason see magnitudes of smaller size contained below that quantity. Rather it is more the opposite that occurs — for one who can see a "point," i.e., some smallest thing perceptible to sense, or hear a faint sound, can sense what is greater.
252. Then at [183] he answers this objection and says that what was stated does not affect the argument whereby it is shown that the possible is determined by excellence. For the excellence according to which the virtue of a thing is measured can be determined according to the virtue, or according to the thing. According to the thing, when there is an excellence right in it, as was said about the 100 stades or the 100 talents. According to this excellence the active virtue is determined, because whatever can act on a greater thing can act on a lesser. But with respect to virtue, there is excellence when something which is not outstanding in quantity requires an excellence of virtue. And this is seen to occur especially with passive powers — for the more a thing is passible, the more it can be moved by what is less. And since the senses are passive powers, it happens in sensible things that one who can sense what is less can sense what is greater.
What he has just said he explains as follows: a vision capable of perceiving a smaller body excels in virtue; hence the excellence in this case is an excellence in the virtue and not in the thing. But that speed is more excellent which is of a greater magnitude — for that is speedier which can traverse a greater distance in the same time — and such excellence is an excellence not only in the virtue, but also in the thing.
1-26
Everything eternal is indestructible and ungenerated
Διωρισμένων δὲ τούτων λεκτέον τὸ ἐφεξῆς. Εἰ δή ἐστιν ἔνια δυνατὰ καὶ εἶναι καὶ μή, ἀνάγκη χρόνον τινὰ ὡρίσθαι τὸν πλεῖστον καὶ τοῦ εἶναι καὶ τοῦ μή, λέγω δ' ὃν δυνατὸν τὸ πρᾶγμα εἶναι καὶ ὃν δυνατὸν μὴ εἶναι καθ' ὁποιανοῦν κατηγορίαν, οἷον ἄνθρωπον ἢ λευκὸν ἢ τρίπηχυ ἢ ἄλλ' ὁτιοῦν τῶν τοιούτων. Εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἔσται ποσός τις, ἀλλ' ἀεὶ πλείων τοῦ προτεθέντος καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν οὗ ἐλάττων, ἄπειρον (281b.) ἔσται χρόνον δυνατὸν εἶναι, καὶ μὴ εἶναι ἄλλον ἄπειρον ἀλλὰ τοῦτ' ἀδύνατον.
Ἀρχὴ δ' ἔστω ἐντεῦθεν τὸ γὰρ ἀδύνατον καὶ τὸ ψεῦδος οὐ ταὐτὸ σημαίνει. Ἔστι δὲ τὸ ἀδύνατον καὶ δυνατὸν καὶ ψεῦδος καὶ ἀληθὲς τὸ μὲν ἐξ ὑποθέσεως (λέγω δ', οἷον τὸ τρίγωνον ἀδύνατον δύο ὀρθὰς ἔχειν, εἰ τάδε, καὶ ἡ διάμετρος σύμμετρος). Ἔστι δ' ἁπλῶς καὶ δυνατὰ καὶ ἀδύνατα καὶ ψευδῆ καὶ ἀληθῆ.
Οὐ δὴ ταὐτό ἐστι ψεῦδός τέ τι εἶναι ἁπλῶς καὶ ἀδύνατον ἁπλῶς. Τὸ γάρ σε μὴ ἑστῶτα φάναι ἑστάναι ψεῦδος μέν, οὐκ ἀδύνατον δέ. Ὁμοίως δὲ τὸν κιθαρίζοντα, μὴ ᾄδοντα δέ, ᾄδειν φάναι ψεῦδος, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἀδύνατον. Τὸ δ' ἅμα ἑστάναι καὶ καθῆσθαι, καὶ τὴν διάμετρον σύμμετρον εἶναι, οὐ μόνον ψεῦδος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀδύνατον.
Οὐ δὴ ταὐτόν ἐστιν ὑποθέσθαι ψεῦδος καὶ ἀδύνατον. Συμβαίνει δ' ἀδύνατον ἐξ ἀδυνάτου.
Τοῦ μὲν οὖν καθῆσθαι καὶ ἑστάναι ἅμα ἔχει τὴν δύναμιν, ὅτι ὅτε ἔχει ἐκείνην, καὶ τὴν ἑτέραν ἀλλ' οὐχ ὥστε ἅμα καθῆσθαι καὶ ἑστάναι, ἀλλ' ἐν ἄλλῳ χρόνῳ.
Εἰ δέ τι ἄπειρον χρόνον ἔχει πλειόνων δύναμιν, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ χρόνῳ, ἀλλὰ τοῦθ' ἅμα. Ὥστ' εἴ τι ἄπειρον χρόνον ὂν φθαρτόν ἐστι, δύναμιν ἔχοι ἂν τοῦ μὴ εἶναι. Εἰ δὴ ἄπειρον χρόνον, ἔστω ὑπάρχον ὃ δύναται. Ἅμα ἄρ' ἔσται τε καὶ οὐκ ἔσται κατ' ἐνέργειαν. Ψεῦδος μὲν οὖν συμβαίνοι ἄν, ὅτι ψεῦδος ἐτέθη. Ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ ἀδύνατον ἦν, οὐκ ἂν καὶ ἀδύνατον ἦν τὸ συμβαῖνον. Ἅπαν ἄρα τὸ ἀεὶ ὂν ἁπλῶς ἄφθαρτον.
Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀγένητον εἰ γὰρ γενητόν, ἔσται δυνατὸν χρόνον τινὰ μὴ εἶναι—φθαρτὸν μὲν γάρ ἐστι τὸ πρότερον μὲν ὄν, νῦν δὲ μὴ ὂν ἢ ἐνδεχόμενόν ποτε ὕστερον μὴ εἶναι γενητὸν δὲ ὃ ἐνδέχεται πρότερον μὴ εἶναι—ἀλλ' οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ᾧ χρόνῳ δυνατὸν τὸ ἀεὶ ὂν ὥστε μὴ εἶναι, οὔτ' ἄπειρον οὔτε πεπερασμένον καὶ γὰρ τὸν πεπερασμένον χρόνον δύναται εἶναι, εἴπερ καὶ τὸν ἄπειρον. Οὐκ ἄρα ἐνδέχεται τὸ αὐτὸ καὶ ἓν ἀεί τε δύνασθαι εἶναι καὶ ἀεὶ μὴ εἶναι. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τὴν ἀπόφασιν, οἷον λέγω μὴ ἀεὶ εἶναι. Ἀδύνατον ἄρα καὶ ἀεὶ μέν τι εἶναι, φθαρτὸν (282a.) δ' εἶναι. Ὁμοίως δ' οὐδὲ γενητόν δυοῖν γὰρ ὅροιν εἰ ἀδύνατον τὸ ὕστερον ἄνευ τοῦ προτέρου ὑπάρξαι, ἐκεῖνο δ' ἀδύνατον ὑπάρχειν, καὶ τὸ ὕστερον. Ὥστ' εἰ τὸ ἀεὶ ὂν μὴ ἐνδέχεταί ποτε μὴ εἶναι, ἀδύνατον καὶ γενητὸν εἶναι.
253. After explaining the meanings of the words proposed in the question, the Philosopher here begins to argue on the question proposed, namely, whether something can be generated and indestructible, or ungenerated and destructible.
Et primo ostendit hoc esse impossibile per rationes communes;
secundo per rationem propriam scientiae naturalis, ibi: et naturaliter et cetera.
First he shows with general arguments that this is impossible;
Secondly, with arguments proper to natural science, at 286 (L. 29).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quid sequitur ex praemissis circa propositum;
secundo incipit argumentari ad propositum ostendendum, ibi: principium autem sit hinc et cetera.
First he shows what follows from the preceding with respect to the present question;
Secondly, he begins to argue to his proposition, at 255.
254. He says therefore first [184] that, the preceding having been determined as to the meanings of certain words, it is now time to state what follows in this treatment. For it has been said above that the "possible" is described in terms of something definite — for example, someone's power to run is described in terms of 100 stades. But there exist in external reality some things that can both exist and not exist. Therefore it is necessary according to the foregoing that there be determined some maximum time both affecting existence, such that it is not possible to exist for a greater time, and affecting non-existence, such that it is not possible not to exist for a greater time.
And lest this be understood as applying only to substantial existence, he adds that, when we say that it is possible or not possible for a thing to exist, or that which is able not to exist, such expressions can be understood with regard to any predication, i.e., with regard to any predicament: for example, that a man exist or not exist, which pertains to the genus of substance; or that white exist or not exist, which pertains to the genus of quality; or that "two cubits" exist or not exist, which pertains to the genus of quantity; or any other similar thing.
That when something is said to be able to be or not be, that expression must be understood in terms of some determinate time, he now proves by leading to an impossibility. For, as he says, if there is not a time of determinate quantity in which it could be or not be, but a time greater than a given time is always assumed (for example, if it can be for fifty years and then more and again still more), and no limit is reached with respect to which every time in which it can be is less, then, since it is the same thing that can be and not be, as was said, it follows that the same thing can be for an infinite time, and not be for an infinite time, because the same reasoning applies to the non-existence as applies to the existence.
This does not mean that the time in respect to which something is able not to be, and which was concluded to be infinite, is the same as the time in respect to which the thing is able to be — because then the same thing would be able to be and not be during the same time, which is impossible, as will be said below. It means rather that there is one infinite time for the thing as non-existing, and another for it as existing. Now this is impossible: for there cannot be two infinite times, because then two times would be simultaneous. But this impossibility follows from saying that the possibility to be or the possibility not to be are not reckoned with respect to some determinate time. Therefore the first thing that must be clear is that the possibility of being is said with respect to a determinate time, and similarly the possibility of not being. And this agrees with what has been already laid down about the meaning of "possible."
255. Then at [185] he begins to argue to his proposition. About this he does two things:
primo argumentatur ad propositum per communes rationes;
secundo per propriam rationem scientiae naturalis, ibi: et naturaliter et cetera.
First he argues to it with general reasons;
Secondly, with an argument proper to natural science, at 286 (L. 29).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit veritatem, scilicet quod incorruptibile et ingenitum se consequuntur, et similiter corruptibile et genitum;
secundo improbat positionem contrariam, ibi: dicere itaque nihil et cetera.
First he shows the truth, namely, that indestructible and unproduced follow one upon the other; and likewise, destructible and generated;
Secondly, he disproves the contrary of this (L. 29).
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum, ostendendo quomodo se habeat sempiternum ad ingenitum et incorruptibile, et ad genitum et corruptibile;
secundo quomodo ista se habeant ad invicem, ibi: palam autem et ex determinatione et cetera.
First he proves his proposition by showing how what is eternal is related to the ungenerated and indestructible, and to the generated and destructible;
Secondly, how they are related to one another (L. 28).
About the first he does three things:
primo ostendit quod omne sempiternum est incorruptibile et ingenitum;
secundo ostendit quod nullum sempiternum est genitum vel corruptibile, neque e converso, ibi: quoniam autem negatio etc.;
tertio concludit quod omne ingenitum et incorruptibile est sempiternum, ibi: igitur si et ingenitum et cetera.
First he shows that everything eternal is indestructible and ungenerated;
Secondly, that nothing eternal is generated or destructible, nor conversely (L. 27);
Thirdly, he concludes that everything ungenerated and indestructible is eternal, at 265 (L. 27).
About the first he does two things:
primo praemittit quaedam necessaria;
secundo argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: si itaque aliquid et cetera.
First he presents some needed pre-notes;
Secondly, he argues to his proposition, at 257.
256. He says therefore first [185] that in order to prove the proposition, it is necessary to start from the fact that "impossible" and "false" do not mean the same.
Regarding this he posits four reflections. The first is that both "possible" and "impossible," as well as "true" and "false," are used in two ways. In one way, conditionally, i.e., in the sense that a thing must be true or false, possible or impossible, if certain things are assumed; for example, a triangle must in fact have three angles equal to two right angles, but nevertheless such a property is impossible if certain things are assumed — thus, if we should suppose a triangle to be a square, it would follow that a triangle would have four right angles. In like manner, it will follow that the diagonal of a square is commensurate to the side if certain assumptions are true — for example, if we should assume that the square of the diagonal is 4 times the square of the side — for then it will always follow that the ratio of the diagonal to the side is a numerical proportion, which is a commensurable ratio. In a second way things are said to be , i.e., absolutely and in themselves, "possible" and "impossible," "false" and "true.".
The second he gives at [186], and he says that to be false , i.e. absolutely, and to be impossible absolutely, are not the same. For if I say that you are standing, whereas you are not standing but sitting, then what is said will be false but not impossible; likewise it will be false and not impossible if I say that the person playing the harp is singing, whereas he is not singing. But for someone to be standing and sitting at the same time, or for the diagonal to be commensurable with the side, is not only false, but impossible as well.
The third he gives at [187] and he concludes it from the foregoing. For since the false and the impossible are not the same, it follows that it is not the same thing to assume what is false and to assume what is impossible: from the false there does not follow the impossible, but from the impossible there follows the impossible.
He gives the fourth at [188]. And because it has been said that to stand and sit at the same time is impossible, he concludes that, although something may have at the same time the power to do the opposite things — for example, to sit and to stand — in the sense that now one power is actualized and now the other, nevertheless nothing has the power to have both simultaneously (for example, to stand and sit at the same time) but this must be at different times.
257. Then at [189] he proves the proposition, namely, that everything eternal is indestructible and ungenerated.
Et primo ostendit quod omne sempiternum sit incorruptibile;
secundo quod omne sempiternum sit ingenitum, ibi: similiter autem et ingenitum et cetera.
First he shows that everything eternal is indestructible;
Secondly, that everything eternal is ungenerated, at 259.
He says therefore first [189], as a conclusion from the foregoing (in which it was said that the "possible" is determined for some certain time), that if something is capable of several things during an infinite time, it cannot be said that one of them is possible at one time and another at another time, but whatever it is capable of is possible with respect to this time, because there is no time outside the infinite time. If therefore we should posit something existing in an infinite time to be destructible, from its destructibility it follows that it has the power not to exist at some time; and this must be understood with respect to the same infinite time in which it exists or in respect to some part of that time. Now since it exists in an infinite time and yet is supposed capable of not existing (since it is destructible), then let what is capable of not existing be such, i.e., let it be assumed not to exist, since you say that it is able not to exist. And because it had this capability (of not existing) with respect to infinite time, or some part of it, it follows that it simultaneously actually exists and does not exist —since it is assumed to be existing in infinite time, and later not to exist with respect to the same time.
It is plain that this falsity occurs on account of the false assumption that the thing existing in infinite time does not exist at some time. But if this falsehood were not something impossible, an impossibility would not follow. However an impossibility does follow, namely, that the same thing exists and does not exist at the same time. Therefore it was impossible for it not to exist. It had not been able, therefore, not to exist — and thus it was not destructible. Consequently it is plain that whatever is always an existing being cannot be destructible, and thus is absolutely indestructible.
258. But it seems that this reasoning of Aristotle does not conclude with necessity. For although nothing has the power to have two opposite things in existence at the same time, yet nothing prevents a thing from being at the same time capable of two opposites disjunctively, equally and in the same way For example, I have the power to sit or to stand tomorrow at sun-up; not that both might take place at the same time but I am equally capable either of standing without sitting, or of sitting without standing. Hence someone could object to the argument of Aristotle thus: Let us suppose something always existing, yet in such a way that its eternity is contingent and not necessary. It would have the power therefore not to exist with respect to any part of the infinite time in which it is posited as always existing — yet it will not follow because of this that something is existing and not existing at the same time. For the same notion seems to be valid in infinite time and in some finite time. For although we might say that someone is always in his house throughout the whole day, it is not impossible for him not to be in the house at any part of the day — for he is not of necessity in the house throughout the whole day, but contingently.
But it must be answered that the same notion does not apply in both cases.
For what exists always, i.e., through infinite time, has the power to exist in infinite time. But the power to exist is not undetermined to either alternative with respect to the time in which someone is able to exist — for all things seek to exist and each thing exists as long as it can. And this is particularly true in things of nature, because nature is determined to one. Consequently whatever exists always, does so not contingently but of necessity.
259. Then at [190] he proves the same on the part of the generated or ungenerated. And he says that in like manner what exists always, i.e., in an infinite time, is necessarily ungenerated. If it were generated, it would be possible that at some time it not exist, as was said of the destructible — for just as the destructible is what, although previously existing, does not now exist or is able at some future time not to exist, so the generated is what now exists but previously was not. But there is, neither in finite time nor in infinite time, any time in which what always exists is able not to exist — for what can exist in infinite time, just as what always exists, can exist in any finite time, which is included by infinite time. Accordingly, it will follow, according to the aforesaid deduction, that something simultaneously exists and does not exist, which is impossible. Therefore it does not happen that one and the same thing is able always to exist and always not to exist — since this would be the same as always to exist and always not to exist for an infinite time.
Likewise it is not possible to deny the existence of what always exists, for example, to say that what always exists is able not always to exist: for this would imply the possibility of not existing at least for a finite time.
Thus it is plain that it is impossible for something always to exist and to be destructible, or also to be generated. If there are two terms so related that the second cannot exist without the first, as man cannot be without being an animal, then, if the first cannot be, it follows that the second cannot be — just as, if it is impossible for a stone to be animal, it is impossible for a stone to be man. Now not to be at some time follows the destructible and the generated as something more common, as is plain from what was said. Therefore, if what exists always cannot at some time not exist, it follows also that it is impossible for what always exists to be generated, and likewise that it is impossible for it to be destructible. Consequently, it is plain that everything eternal is ungenerated and indestructible.
1-27
Nothing eternal generated and corrupted, and conversely.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἀπόφασις τοῦ μὲν ἀεὶ δυναμένου εἶναι τὸ μὴ ἀεὶ δυνάμενον εἶναι, τὸ δ' ἀεὶ δυνατὸν μὴ εἶναι ἐναντίον, οὗ ἀπόφασις τὸ μὴ ἀεὶ δυνάμενον μὴ εἶναι,
ἀνάγκη τὰς ἀποφάσεις ἀμφοῖν τῷ αὐτῷ ὑπάρχειν, καὶ εἶναι μέσον τοῦ ἀεὶ ὄντος καὶ τοῦ ἀεὶ μὴ ὄντος τὸ δυνάμενον εἶναι καὶ μὴ εἶναι
ἡ γὰρ ἑκατέρου ἀπόφασίς ποτε ὑπάρξει, εἰ μὴ ἀεί. Ὥστ' εἰ τὸ μὴ ἀεὶ μὴ ὂν ἔσται ποτὲ καὶ οὐκ ἔσται, καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀεὶ δυνάμενον εἶναι δηλονότι, ἀλλά ποτε ὄν, ὥστε καὶ μὴ εἶναι. Τὸ αὐτὸ ἄρ' ἔσται δυνατὸν εἶναι καὶ μή, καὶ τοῦτ' ἔστιν ἀμφοῖν μέσον.
Λόγος δὲ καθόλου ὅδε. Ἔστω γὰρ τὸ Α καὶ τὸ Β μηδενὶ τῷ αὐτῷ δυνάμενα ὑπάρχειν, ἅπαντι δὲ τὸ Α ἢ τὸ Γ καὶ τὸ Β ἢ τὸ Δ. Ἀνάγκη δὴ ᾧ μήτε τὸ Α ὑπάρχει μήτε τὸ Β, παντὶ ὑπάρχειν τὰ ΓΔ. Ἔστω δὴ τὸ Ε τὸ μεταξὺ τῶν ΑΒ ἐναντίων γὰρ τὸ μηθέτερον μέσον. Τούτῳ δὴ ἀνάγκη ἄμφω ὑπάρχειν τό τε Γ καὶ τὸ Δ. Παντὶ γὰρ ἢ τὸ Α ἢ τὸ Γ, ὥστε καὶ τῷ Ε ἐπεὶ οὖν τὸ Α ἀδύνατον, τὸ Γ ὑπάρξει. Ὁ δ' αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Δ.
Οὔτε δὴ τὸ ἀεὶ ὂν γενητὸν οὐδὲ φθαρτόν, οὔτε τὸ ἀεὶ μὴ ὄν. Δῆλον δ' ὅτι καὶ εἰ γενητὸν ἢ φθαρτόν, οὐκ ἀΐδιον. Ἅμα γὰρ ἔσται δυνάμενον ἀεὶ εἶναι καὶ δυνάμενον μὴ ἀεὶ εἶναι τοῦτο δ' ὅτι ἀδύνατον, δέδεικται πρότερον.
Α
Β
μὴ ἀεὶ ὄν
μὴ ἀεὶ μὴ ὄν
Γ
Δ
Ἆρ' οὖν εἰ καὶ ἀγένητον, ὂν δέ, τοῦτ' ἀνάγκη ἀΐδιον εἶναι, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ εἰ ἄφθαρτον, ὂν δέ; (Λέγω δὲ τὸ ἀγένητον καὶ ἄφθαρτον τὰ κυρίως λεγόμενα, ἀγένητον μὲν ὃ ἔστι νῦν, καὶ πρότερον οὐκ ἀληθὲς ἦν εἰπεῖν τὸ μὴ εἶναι, ἄφθαρτον δὲ ὃ νῦν ὂν ὕστερον μὴ ἀληθὲς ἔσται εἰπεῖν μὴ εἶναι).
Ἢ εἰ μὲν ταῦτα ἀλλήλοις ἀκολουθεῖ καὶ τό τε ἀγένητον ἄφθαρτον καὶ τὸ ἄφθαρτον ἀγένητον, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸ ἀΐδιον ἑκατέρῳ ἀκολουθεῖν, καὶ εἴτε ἀγένη (282b.) τον, ἀΐδιον, εἴτε ἄφθαρτον, ἀΐδιον.
260. After showing that everything eternal is ungenerated and indestructible, the Philosopher here compares the eternal to the destructible and the generated, and shows that they cannot be at the same time.
Et primo praemittit quaedam ex quibus procedit ratio;
secundo ex illis argumentatur ad propositum, ibi: neque itaque semper existens et cetera.
First he prefaces certain things from which the argument proceeds;
Secondly, from these he argues to his proposition, at 264.
Regarding the first he proposes three things. First, indeed, he sets out the opposition between "always to be" and "always not to be" [191]; and although he includes "possible," he does not discuss the opposition according to "possible" and "not possible," but only that between "always being" and "not always being." He says therefore first that the contradictory denial of the affirmation "possible always to be" is "possible not always to be": this negation is taken not on the part of "possible," in regard to which "possible not always to be" is affirmative, but on the part of "not always to be." But "possible always, not to be" is opposed contrarily (according to the same mode) to what is "possible always to be," the negative of which is "possible not always not to be."
The reason for this is that this adverb, always, designates universality of time, just as the sign, every, designates a universality of subjects. Hence, just as the contradictory of the statement, "Every man is," is "Not every man is," which is equivalent to "Some man is not," whereas the contrary of "Every man is," is "Every man is not," which is equivalent to "No man is," whose contradictory is "Not every man is not," which is equivalent to "Some man is"; so the contradictory of "always to be" is "not always to be," which is equivalent to "not to be at some time"; whereas the contrary of "always to be" is "always not to e," which is equivalent to "never to be," whose contradictory is "not always, o be," which is equivalent to "sometime to be."
261. Secondly, at [192] he concludes from the aforesaid manner of opposition that the same subject must possess the negations of both, i.e., of "always to be" and "always not to be," which negations are "not always to be" and "not always not to be." These negations are present in the same way in the same subject which is the medium between always being and always not being, which indeed can at one time be and at another time not be, as if we should say that between "Every man is," and "no man is," the medium is "Some man is" and "Some man is not."
262. Thirdly, he proves that this conclusion follows from the foregoing. First, by a proper argument based on the notion of the terms appearing in the question, to the effect that the negation of both, namely, both of that which is "always to be" and that which is "always not to be," will at some time exist, i.e., posits something existing at some time, if it does not always exist, i.e., if by negation something is not posited always. For example, this negation "not always to exist" does not posit an eternal state either of being or of non-being; consequently, it posits to exist at some time, and at some time not to exist. And the same applies to the negation, "not always not to exist." He concludes therefore that what is not always non-existent will at one time be and at another time not be, because thus is denied "always not to exist" without positing the thing in question always to exist. Likewise the negation, "not always able to be," since it removes eternity of existence in such a way as not to posit eternity of non-existence, does posit "existence at some time." And because it does not posit eternal existence, there is nothing to prevent its not existing. Therefore "possible to be at some time" and "not to be some time" will be the same. And this is the medium between the two contraries, "always to be" and "always not to be."
263. Secondly, at [194] he proves the same thing with a common reason which, namely, applies to any terms. Let then A and B be two terms such that they can be found in no same thing, because they are contrary, in the case of "always to be" and "always not to be." Take another term G, which is so related to A, that in every subject there must be either A or G — they being related as affirmation and negation, as, for example, "always existing" and "not always existing." Then take another term D which is related to B in the same way as "always not existing"[B] is related to "not always not existing" [D]. It is necessary, therefore, that in everything which is neither A nor B, i.e., everything which neither always exists nor always does not exist, there inhere both G and D, which are the negations of both — since to that from hich is removed "always existing" and "always not existing," there is necessarily attributed "not always existing" (i.e., "at some time not to be"), and "not always not existing (i.e., "to be some time"). Consequently that subject from which both affirmations are removed and to which both negations are applied is a medium between A and B — for what denies both extremes is a medium between two contraries, as, for example, what is neither white nor black, is intermediate between white and black. In such a medium must necessarily exist both negations, namely, G and D. For, as was said, either G or A exists in everything whatsoever; consequently, one of them exists in E. Since, then, A cannot exist in E, it follows that G exists in E. And arguing on the same lines, D must exist in E. Thus, therefore, both G and D are predicates of E, from which both A and B are removed, since, namely, that at one time exists, and at another time does not, which neither always exists nor always does not exist. And this is what he intended to prove.
264. Then at [195] from these premises he argues to his proposition. For if something always exists it is neither generated nor destructible; similarly, if something is always non-existent, it is neither generated nor destructible. Now it is manifest that also conversely, if something is generated or destructible, it is not eternal, either in respect to existing or in respect to non-existing. For if we assume the opposite as true, namely, that something is at once eternal and generated and destructible, it will follow that something is at once capable of always being and not always being, because the eternal can always exist but the generated and corruptible does not always exist. Now the impossibility of this was pointed out before: it was said that "always to exist" and "not always to exist" are opposed as contradictories. Hence what is left is that it is impossible for anything to be at once eternal and corruptible or generated.
265. Then at [196] he shows that everything ungenerated and indestructible is eternal. First he concludes this from the premises and says that it is necessary for everything ungenerated to be eternal, and likewise for everything indestructible to be eternal, provided it be being, and provided that "ungenerated" and "indestructible" are taken in their proper sense. The proper sense of "ungenerated" denotes something which now exists in such a way that it was not previously true to say that it did not exist; and "indestructible" denotes what now exists in such a way that it will not later be true to say of it that it does not exist. This is clear from what was said in distinguishing these words above.
266. Secondly, he proves the same point from what will be shown below. And he says that if "ungenerated" and "indestructible" are so related that everything ungenerated is indestructible and vice versa, then "eternal" must follow both, i.e., whatever is indestructible is eternal.
From all the foregoing the following argument can be formed: Nothing eternal is generated or destructible. Everything ungenerated and everything incorruptible is eternal. Therefore nothing ungenerated is destructible, and nothing indestructible has been generated.
1-28
Generated and corruptible, ungenerated and incorruptible, follow on each other
Δῆλον δὲ καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ὁρισμοῦ αὐτῶν καὶ γὰρ ἀνάγκη, εἰ φθαρτόν, γενητόν. Ἢ γὰρ ἀγένητον ἢ γενητόν εἰς δὲ ἀγένητον, ἄφθαρτον ὑπόκειται.
Καὶ εἰ γενητὸν δή, φθαρτὸν ἀνάγκη ἢ γὰρ φθαρτὸν ἢ ἄφθαρτον ἀλλ' εἰ ἄφθαρτον, ἀγένητον ὑπέκειτο.
Εἰ δὲ μὴ ἀκολουθοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις τὸ ἄφθαρτον καὶ τὸ ἀγένητον, οὐκ ἀνάγκη οὔτε τὸ ἀγένητον οὔτε τὸ ἄφθαρτον ἀΐδιον εἶναι.
Ὅτι δ' ἀνάγκη ἀκολουθεῖν, ἐκ τῶνδε φανερόν. Τὸ γὰρ γενητὸν καὶ τὸ φθαρτὸν ἀκολουθοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις.
Δῆλον δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ἐκ τῶν πρότερον τοῦ γὰρ ἀεὶ ὄντος καὶ τοῦ ἀεὶ μὴ ὄντος ἐστὶ μεταξὺ ᾧ μηδέτερον ἀκολουθεῖ, τοῦτο δ' ἐστὶ τὸ γενητὸν καὶ φθαρτόν. Δυνατὸν γὰρ καὶ εἶναι καὶ μὴ εἶναι ὡρισμένον χρόνον ἑκάτερον λέγω δ' ἑκάτερον καὶ εἶναι ποσόν τινα χρόνον καὶ μὴ εἶναι. Εἰ τοίνυν ἐστί τι γενητὸν ἢ φθαρτόν, ἀνάγκη τοῦτο μεταξὺ εἶναι.
Ἔστω γὰρ τὸ Α τὸ ἀεὶ ὄν, τὸ δὲ Β τὸ ἀεὶ μὴ ὄν, τὸ δὲ Γ γενητόν, τὸ δὲ Δ φθαρτόν. Ἀνάγκη δὴ τὸ Γ μεταξὺ εἶναι τοῦ Α καὶ τοῦ Β. Τῶν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι χρόνος ἐπ' οὐδέτερον τὸ πέρας ἐν ᾧ ἢ τὸ Α οὐκ ἦν ἢ τὸ Β ἦν τῷ δὲ γενητῷ ἀνάγκη ἢ ἐνεργείᾳ εἶναι ἢ δυνάμει, τοῖς δὲ ΑΒ οὐδετέρως. Ποσὸν ἄρα τινὰ καὶ ὡρισμένον χρόνον καὶ ἔσται καὶ πάλιν οὐκ ἔσται. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Δ. Γενητὸν ἄρα καὶ φθαρτὸν ἑκάτερον. Ἀκολουθοῦσιν ἄρα ἀλλήλοις τὸ γενητὸν καὶ τὸ φθαρτόν.
ἀεὶ ὄν
Α
φθαρτόν
Δ
Ἔστω δὴ τὸ ἐφ' ᾧ Ε ἀγένητον, τὸ δ' ἐφ' ᾧ Ζ γενητόν, τὸ δ' ἐφ' ᾧ Η ἄφθαρτον, τὸ δ' ἐφ' ᾧ Θ φθαρτόν. Τὰ δὴ ΖΘ δέ) δεικται ὅτι ἀκολουθεῖ ἀλλήλοις. Ὅταν δ' ᾖ οὕτω κείμενα ὡς ταῦτα, οἷον τὸ μὲν Ζ καὶ τὸ Θ ἀκολουθοῦντα, τὸ δὲ Ε καὶ τὸ Ζ μηθενὶ τῷ αὐτῷ, ἅπαντι δὲ θάτερον, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τὰ ΗΘ, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὰ ΕΗ ἀκολουθεῖν ἀλλήλοις. Ἔστω γὰρ τῷ Η τὸ Ε μὴ ἀκολουθοῦν. Τὸ ἄρα Ζ ἀκολουθήσει παντὶ γὰρ τὸ Ε ἢ τὸ Ζ. Ἀλλὰ μὴν ᾧ τὸ Ζ, καὶ τὸ Θ. Τῷ ἄρα Η τὸ Θ ἀκολουθήσει. Ἀλλ' ὑπέκειτο ἀδύνατον (283a.) εἶναι. Ὁ δ' αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ ὅτι τὸ Η τῷ Ε.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὕτως ἔχει τὸ ἀγένητον, ἐφ' ᾧ Ε, πρὸς τὸ γενητόν, ἐφ' ᾧ Ζ, καὶ τὸ ἄφθαρτον, ἐφ' ᾧ Η, πρὸς τὸ φθαρτόν, ἐφ' ᾧ Θ.
ἀγένητον
Ε
ἄφθαρτον
Η
267. After proving his proposition above on the part of what is eternal, the Philosopher now proves the same thing on the part of the generated and ungenerated, the destructible and indestructible.
Et primo probat propositum ex suppositione;
secundo ex necessitate, ibi: quod autem necesse consequi et cetera.
First he proves it from a supposition;
Secondly, with necessity, at 271.
About the first he does two things:
primo ex suppositione huius quod ingenitum et incorruptibile convertantur, probat quod genitum et corruptibile convertuntur;
secundo ostendit unde sit supponenda conversio ingeniti et incorruptibilis, ibi: si autem non consequuntur et cetera.
First, on the supposition that ungenerated and indestructible are convertible terms, he proves that generated and destructible are convertible;
Secondly, he shows whence the conversion of ungenerated and indestructible is to be supposed, at 270.
268. He says therefore first [198] that what we are pursuing can be made clear from their determination, i.e., from the way these terms are distinguished one from the other and related one to the other. First he shows that "generated" follows upon "corruptible," in such a way that if something is corruptible, then necessarily it was generated. For the corruptible must be either generated or ungenerated, because one of these two must be predicated of anything that exists. If, therefore, something is destructible which was not generated, it follows that it is ungenerated. But we are assuming that "ungenerated" and "indestructible" are convertible, i.e., that if something is ungenerated, it will be indestructible. Consequently, if there exists a destructible thing that was not generated, it follows that something destructible is indestructible.
269. Secondly, he proves in the same way that if something is generated, it is necessarily destructible. For what is generated must be either destructible or not. But we are supposing that if something is indestructible it is ungenerated, because these are convertible. It follows, therefore, that there is something generated which is ungenerated, which is impossible.
Thus is proved that whatever is destructible is generated and vice versa, on the supposition, of course, that ungenerated and indestructible are convertible terms.
270. Then at [200] he shows why this must be supposed. And he says that if "indestructible" and "ungenerated" do not follow one upon the other, then "to be eternal" will not necessarily follow upon being ungenerated and being indestructible. But it has been proved above that it does.
271. Then at [201] he proves his proposition from necessity.
Et primo ostendit quod genitum et corruptibile convertantur;
secundo ex hoc ulterius ostendit quod etiam ingenitum et incorruptibile convertantur, ibi: sit itaque in quo est e et cetera.
First he shows that "generated" and "destructible" are convertible;
Secondly, from this he further shows that "ungenerated" and "indestructible" are also convertible, at 275.
Concerning the first he does three things:
First he reveals his intention, and says that from what will be said, it will be plain that the foregoing things follow one upon the other. It will first be shown that generated and destructible follow one upon the other.
272. Secondly, at [202] he presents an argument to prove this, and says that just as the convertibility of "indestructible" and "ungenerated" is plain from what was previously said, so, too, the convertibility of "generated" and "destructible." For between "always existing" and "always not existing" there is a middle (as was said above), namely, that which follows neither, i.e., what neither always is nor always is not. Now such are the "generated" and "destructible," because both are able to be and not to be with respect to some determinate time, in such a way, namely, that for some finite time both exist and for some other finite time both do not exist. If then there is something which is generated or is destructible, such a thing must be a middle between what always exists and what is always non-existent. Consequently both terms will apply to the same thing and they are found to follow one upon the other.
273. Thirdly, at [203] he manifests the foregoing argument by using terms, and says: Let Abe something that always exists, and B something that is always non-existent, whereas G is something generated and D something destructible. Then G is necessarily intermediate between A and B, i.e., between what always exists and what always is non-existent; for in regard to A and B there is no time at either terminus, i.e., either before or after, in which A, which is always existing, does not exist, or B, which is always non-existent, exists. But in regard to the generated, there must be some time in which it does not exist, either at both termini or at one of them, and likewise some time in which it does, and this either actually or potentially; but with regard to A and B there can be no opposite time in either way, i.e., either actually or potentially. That is left, therefore, is that the generated G exists for some definite time and for some definite time does not exist; and the same goes for D. It follows, therefore, that both are generated and destructible, i.e., in such a way that the generated thing is both, and the destructible is both. Thus it is plain that "generated" and "destructible" follow one upon the other.
274. But this argument does not seem to be valid: for it is not necessary that a middle between two contraries be one and the same thing. For the middle between white and black is indeed something neither white nor black; yet this is said of many different things which do not follow one upon the other. For red and pale and any of the intermediate colors are neither white nor black, and yet they do not follow one upon the other. Consequently, someone could say that the intermediate between "always existing" and "always not existing" is something which neither always exists nor always does not exist, but that this belongs to the "destructible" in one way and to the "generable" in some other way: for the "generated" has no existence before it exists, while the "destructible" has no existence after it has existed.
But this objection is excluded by the very fact that he says that it is in some definite time that each of them exists and does not exist. Thus both of them have to have existence after non-existence, and before non-existence. And this will be made clearer in the following lecture.
275. Then at [204] he shows from the foregoing that "ungenerated" and "indestructible" are also convertible, saying: Let E be ungenerated, Z generated, I indestructible and T destructible. Since it has been shown that "generated" and "destructible" follow upon each other, it is plain that Z and T follow upon each other. Now supposing that Z and T follow upon one another, namely, "generated" and "destructible," and assuming that E and Z, i.e., the "generated" and "non-generated," are not present in the same subject, but that one of them must be present in every subject, and the same for T and I, i.e., the "destructible" and "indestructible," namely, that they are not both present in any same subject, but one of them must be present in any subject, then, such suppositions having been made, it is necessary that I and E, i.e., the "non-generated" and "indestructible," follow one upon the other.
This he proves by leading to an impossibility. For if E, which is to be non-generated, does not follow necessarily upon I, which is to be indestructible, it will follow that Z, which is generated, can co-exist with I, which is indestructible, because it has already been established that of everything is predicated either E, i.e., non-generated, or Z, i.e., generated. Moreover it has been stated that whatever is Z, i.e., generated, is also T, i.e., destructible. Consequently, it will follow that T, i.e., destructible, is found in that which is I, i.e., indestructible. But that is contrary to the assumption that T and I are never present in the same thing — for nothing is destructible and indestructible. And the same reasoning shows that I, i.e., indestructible, follows upon E, i.e., non-generated, because the non-generated, E, is related to generated, Z, in the same way as indestructible, I, is related to destructible, T. Thus it is plain from the foregoing that whatever is destructible was generated and vice versa; and that what is indestructible is non-generated and vice versa.
1-29
Refutation of corruptible ungenerated and incorruptible generated. Argument from natural science
Τὸ δὲ φάναι μηδὲν κωλύειν γινόμενόν τι ἄφθαρτον εἶναι καὶ ἀγένητον ὂν φθαρῆναι, ἅπαξ ὑπαρχούσης τῷ μὲν τῆς γενέσεως τῷ δὲ τῆς φθορᾶς, ἀναιρεῖν ἐστι τῶν δεδομένων τι. Ἢ γὰρ ἄπειρον ἢ ποσόν τινα ὡρισμένον χρόνον δύναται ἅπαντα ἢ ποιεῖν ἢ πάσχειν, ἢ εἶναι ἢ μὴ εἶναι * * καὶ τὸν ἄπειρον διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι ὥρισταί πως ὁ ἄπειρος, οὗ οὐκ ἔστι πλείων. Τὸ δὴ πῇ ἄπειρον οὔτ' ἄπειρον οὔθ' ὡρισμένον.
Ἔτι τί μᾶλλον ἐπὶ τῷδε τῷ σημείῳ ἀεὶ ὂν πρότερον ἐφθάρη ἢ μὴ ὂν ἄπειρον ἐγένετο; εἰ γὰρ μηθὲν μᾶλλον, ἄπειρα δὲ τὰ σημεῖα, δῆλον ὅτι ἄπειρον χρόνον ἦν τι γενητὸν καὶ φθαρτόν. Δύναται ἄρα μὴ εἶναι ἄπειρον χρόνον ἅμα γὰρ ἕξει δύναμιν τοῦ μὴ εἶναι καὶ εἶναι, τὸ μὲν πρότερον, εἰ φθαρτόν, τὸ δ' ὕστερον, εἰ γενητόν. Ὥστ' ἐὰν ὑπάρχειν θῶμεν ἃ δύναται, τὰ ἀντικείμενα ἅμα ὑπάρξει.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦθ' ὁμοίως ἐν ἅπαντι σημείῳ ὑπάρξει, ὥστ' ἄπειρον χρόνον τοῦ μὴ εἶναι καὶ τοῦ εἶναι ἕξει δύναμιν ἀλλὰ δέδεικται ὅτι ἀδύνατον τοῦτο.
Ἔτι εἰ πρότερον ἡ δύναμις ὑπάρχει τῆς ἐνεργείας, ἅπανθ' ὑπάρξει τὸν χρόνον, καὶ ὃν ἀγένητον ἦν καὶ μὴ ὄν [τὸν ἄπειρον χρόνον], γίγνεσθαι δὲ δυνάμενον. Ἅμα δὴ οὐκ ἦν καὶ τοῦ εἶναι δύναμιν εἶχε, καὶ τοῦ τότε εἶναι καὶ ὕστερον ἄπειρον ἄρα χρόνον.
Φανερὸν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως ὅτι ἀδύνατον φθαρτὸν ὂν μὴ φθαρῆναί ποτε. Ἀεὶ γὰρ ἔσται ἅμα καὶ φθαρτὸν καὶ ἄφθαρτον ἐντελεχείᾳ, ὥστε ἅμα ἔσται δυνατὸν ἀεί τε εἶναι καὶ μὴ ἀεί φθείρεται ἄρα ποτὲ τὸ φθαρτόν. Καὶ εἰ γενητόν, γέγονεν δυνατὸν γὰρ γεγονέναι, καὶ μὴ ἀεὶ ἄρα εἶναι.
Ἔστι δὲ καὶ ὧδε θεωρῆσαι ὅτι ἀδύνατον ἢ γενόμενόν ποτε ἄφθαρτον διατελεῖν, ἢ ἀγένητον ὂν καὶ ἀεὶ πρότερον ὂν φθαρῆναι. Οὐδὲν γὰρ ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου οὔτ' ἄφθαρτον οὔτ' ἀγένητον οἷόν τ' εἶναι. Τὸ μὲν γὰρ αὐτόματόν ἐστι καὶ τὸ ἀπὸ τύχης παρὰ τὸ ἀεὶ καὶ τὸ ὡς ἐπὶ (283b.) τὸ πολὺ ἢ ὂν ἢ γινόμενον τὸ δ' ἄπειρον χρόνον ἢ ἁπλῶς ἢ ἀπό τινος, ἢ ἀεὶ ἢ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ ὑπάρχει ὄν. Ἀνάγκη τοίνυν φύσει τὰ τοιαῦτα ὁτὲ μὲν εἶναι ὁτὲ δὲ μή. Τῶν δὲ τοιούτων ἡ αὐτὴ δύναμις τῆς ἀντιφάσεως, καὶ ἡ ὕλη αἰτία τοῦ εἶναι καὶ μή. Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη ἅμα ὑπάρχειν ἐνεργείᾳ τὰ ἀντικείμενα.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδέν γ' ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν νῦν ὅτι ἔστι πέρυσιν, οὐδὲ πέρυσιν ὅτι νῦν ἔστιν. Ἀδύνατον ἄρα μὴ ὄν ποτε ὕστερον ἀΐδιον εἶναι ἕξει γὰρ ὕστερον καὶ τὴν τοῦ μὴ εἶναι δύναμιν, πλὴν οὐ τοῦ τότε μὴ εἶναι ὅτε ἔστιν (ὑπάρχει γὰρ ἐνεργείᾳ ὄν), ἀλλὰ τοῦ πέρυσιν καὶ ἐν τῷ παρελθόντι χρόνῳ. Ἔστω δὴ οὗ ἔχει τὴν δύναμιν ὑπάρχον ἐνεργείᾳ ἔσται ἄρα ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν νῦν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι πέρυσιν. Ἀλλ' ἀδύνατον οὐδεμία γὰρ δύναμις τοῦ γεγονέναι ἐστίν, ἀλλὰ τοῦ εἶναι ἢ ἔσεσθαι. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ εἰ πρότερον ὂν ἀΐδιον ὕστερον μὴ ἔσται ἕξει γὰρ δύναμιν οὗ ἐνεργείᾳ οὐκ ἔστιν. Ὥστ' ἂν θῶμεν τὸ δυνατόν, ἀληθὲς ἔσται εἰπεῖν νῦν ὅτι τοῦτ' ἔστι πέρυσιν καὶ ὅλως ἐν τῷ παρελθόντι χρόνῳ.
Καὶ φυσικῶς δὲ καὶ μὴ καθόλου σκοποῦσιν ἀδύνατον ἢ ἀΐδιον ὂν πρότερον φθαρῆναι ὕστερον, ἢ πρότερον μὴ ὂν ὕστερον ἀΐδιον εἶναι. Τὰ γὰρ φθαρτὰ καὶ γενητὰ καὶ ἀλλοιωτὰ πάντα ἀλλοιοῦται δὲ τοῖς ἐναντίοις, καὶ ἐξ ὧν συνίσταται τὰ φύσει ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν τούτων φθείρεται.
276. After showing that "generable" and "destructible" follow one upon the other and likewise "non-generated" and "indestructible," the Philosopher here refutes the contrary opinion, on the ground that from such a contrary opinion some of the assumed principles must be destroyed.
Et primo ostendit quomodo per hanc positionem destruitur id quod suppositum est, virtutem omnem referri ad determinatum tempus;
secundo ostendit quod per hanc positionem destruitur quod suppositum est, quod non contingit simul idem esse et non esse, ibi: adhuc quid magis et cetera.
First he shows how such a position destroys the supposition that every power is referred to a determinate time;
Secondly, he shows that it destroys the supposition that the same thing cannot simultaneously be and not be, at 279.
277. He says therefore first [205] that since it has been demonstrated from certain presupposed principles that every generated thing is destructible, and every non-generated is indestructible, and vice versa, consequently, whoever declares there is nothing to prevent a thing that was made or generated from being indestructible, or something non-generated from being destroyed, in such a way, however, that one of these, namely, the generated, is generated but once, and the other, namely, the destructible, is destroyed but once, without their being alternately generated and destroyed, necessarily destroys thereby one or the other of the principles that were presupposed. For if a conclusion follows syllogistically from the premises, the conclusion which follows with necessity from the premises cannot be destroyed, unless one of the premises be destroyed.
Now he seems to state this against Plato, who posited that the world was made but is indestructible, and consequently posited that the disorder from which the world was generated was ungenerated but destructible — although some say that Plato did not understand this in the way his words sound, against which meaning Aristotle is here disputing. But so far as the exposition of this book is concerned it makes no difference whether Plato felt this way or that, provided it becomes clear how this position is being refuted by the arguments of Aristotle.
278. So he takes up again one of the given principles from the assumption of which he had argued to the proof of his proposition. And he says that all things having a certain power can do something or be acted upon, or be or not be, in accordance with their power, either for an infinite time, or for some time of definite quantity, i.e., for a period of time that is absolutely finite. And because he had previously mentioned the meaning of power only with respect to a determinate time, he adds that the reason why things having power can do or be something for an infinite time is that even infinite time is in a sense determinate, namely, by reason, in such a way that no diversity can be found in it — since the infinite is "that of which there is not more," i.e., than which something greater cannot be taken. This is notwithstanding the fact that in Physics III Aristotle refutes this definition of the infinite, saying that it is rather a definition of the whole and of the perfect, whereas the infinite is imperfect and after the manner of a part. For there Aristotle is speaking of the infinite with respect to that of it is in act, to which addition can always be made; but here he is speaking of it with respect to all that is of it in potency, and to which nothing can be added. And such is also the condition of time, about which we are now speaking — since time is not all at once but successive.
Now a time which is infinite in some respect, i.e., in a qualified sense, namely, with respect to its beginning or its end, is neither absolutely infinite, because there can be more of it, nor absolutely determinate, because it does not have some certain quantity. And therefore, according to the aforesaid supposition, it cannot be that something have the power of doing or being acted upon, or of being or not being, for a time that is finite at one end and infinite at the other. But whoever declares that something is non-generated but destructible, or generated and indestructible, is positing that something has the power to be or not be for a time that is in one respect infinite and in another respect finite. Therefore he is destroying the aforesaid supposed principle.
279. Then at [206] he shows that the above-mentioned position destroys still another principle that was assumed, namely, that it is impossible for the same thing to be and not to be. About this he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum ex parte potentiae eius quod ponitur generari vel corrumpi;
secundo ex parte causae ipsius, ibi: est autem et sic videre et cetera.
First he proves his proposition from the viewpoint of the potency existing in what is assumed to be generated or destroyed;
Secondly, from the cause of the same, at 284.
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quod ponentibus aliquod ingenitum corrumpi, vel aliquod genitum incorruptibile, sequitur quod aliquid possit simul esse et non esse;
secundo ostendit quod idem inconveniens sequitur ponentibus aliquid esse corruptibile quod non corrumpitur, ibi: manifestum autem et aliter et cetera.
First he shows that to suppose the non-generated to be destroyed, or something generated to be indestructible, implies that something can at the same time be and not be;
Secondly, he shows that the same impossibility follows from the supposition that something destructible exists which is not destroyed, at 283.
In regard to the first he presents three arguments. With respect to the first of these he says: If we posit that something ungenerated first always existed and later was destroyed at a certain sign of time, i.e., at some certain instant, no reason can be assigned why it should be destroyed in that instant rather than in any other of the infinite previous instants. Likewise if for an infinite time something was not existing and then came to be at a certain instant, no reason can be assigned why it could be or come to be more in that instant than in any of the infinite preceding ones.
If the preceding time were supposed finite, a reason could be assigned, because it could be said that the thing had the power to exist or not exist for such and such a time and no more. But due to the fact that the thing is described as having existed or not having existed for an infinite time, the above-reason ceases. And therefore it is necessary to posit that the ungenerated could have not existed in each of the instants of the preceding time, and similarly that the generated thing was able to exist in each of the instants of the preceding time. For if there is nothing more, i.e., no better reason why it was able to be or not to be in that instant rather than any of the preceding, since infinite signs, i.e., an infinitude of instants preceded, it is plain that during that infinite time something will be generable in the sense that it could have been generated at any instant of that infinite time. And similarly it must be said that in each instant of that time the thing assumed ungenerated and later destroyed was destructible. Consequently it is plain that the thing assumed as pre-existing for an infinite time also had the potency not to be in that whole infinite time. It will follow therefore that something will simultaneously, i.e., at one and the same time, have the power to be and not be, in such a way, however, that on the part of what is ungenerated and destructible the existence preceded the non-existence, whereas on the part of what is generated and indestructible, the existence is after the non-existence. Now there is nothing to prevent us from assuming what is possible. If, then, we assume with regard to the ungenerated that it did not exist during that time in which it existed and was able not to exist, it will follow that opposites co-exist, namely, that it existed and did not exist at the same time. Consequently, the aforesaid supposition destroys what had been presupposed, namely, that it is impossible for the same thing to be and not be at the same time.
280. But this reason does not seem compelling. For nothing prevents what is possible, absolutely speaking, from being impossible under certain conditions. For example, if we suppose that Socrates is at some time seated, it is possible, absolutely speaking, for him not to be seated at that time, although it is not compossible. In like manner, it can be said that what has been existing for an infinite time had the power not to exist during that time — but not, however, in the sense that its non-existence is compossible with what was posited, namely, that it could be simultaneously with its actual being.
Now it should be stated that nothing prevents what is incompossible to that which is contingent from being absolutely possible, yet what is incompossible to that which absolutely must be, is absolutely impossible. That which exists naturally through an infinite time exists necessarily — since it is necessary that each thing be to the extent that the nature of things provides for it, for nothing ceases to be except when it can no longer be, since all things long to be. Hence if something is presented as possible to be, then by that very fact it is necessary to posit it as compossible to that which must be. Therefore if we posit that what has always existed was able not to exist all during that time, it follows that it was able at once to be and not be.
281. He gives the second argument at [207] and says that what always existed, or always did not exist, is according to the foregoing presumed to have possessed a power opposite to what was in it, not at some sign or instant, but absolutely at every sign, i.e., at every instant. Consequently, it follows that for an infinite time something would have the power to be and not be, which is impossible, as was proved above.
282. He gives the third argument at [208] which is this: In that which begins to be after it had not been, or not to be after it had been, the power or potency precedes the act. Accordingly, if something that always existed was ungenerated, it follows that it always had the potency not to exist —for there is no reason why that potency of non-being should have come to it after an infinite time. Similarly, even if there be something generated which for an infinite time did not exist, it follows that during that entire time it was able to come into existence, so that at the same time that it was not existing, it had the power to be and not be this, and that it would be later for an infinite time, since we are assuming that it is indestructible.
Consequently, since for the infinite time before it existed it had the power to exist for an infinite time in the future, there was no reason why it could exist in that instant and not before, since it is not in potency to exist in a determinate time. What is left, therefore, is that it could have existed even at some time before it existed; thus it had the power to exist in that time in which it was not existing, and so it follows, according to the premises, that it was able to be and not be at the same time. And the same argument applies to what is assumed to have always been and is at a certain time destroyed.
283. Then at [209] he concludes according to the same reasoning that it is impossible for something to be destructible and not be destroyed at some time. For someone could object to the foregoing arguments and say that everything generated is destructible according to its nature, but it can happen that what is destructible may never be destroyed, because some cause is preserving its existence, as Plato assumed that the world is in itself generated and destructible, but will always remain, because God wills it. (Some say that Plato did not understand that the world is destructible, as though it had within itself the necessary cause of its destruction, but that he described it in that way because he wanted to point out that it depends for its existence on another, i.e., that the necessity of its existence is not in it of itself but from God. But whatever Plato may have understood makes no difference to the present undertaking, since Aristotle is objecting to his words.) Hence he says that it is plainly impossible for something destructible not to be at some time destroyed. Because if it will not be destroyed at some time, it has the power not to be destroyed and thus will be indestructible; and yet it is assumed to be a destructible thing existing for an infinite time. Consequently, it will be always, i.e., for an infinite time, simultaneously actually destructible and indestructible. But what is destroyed does not exist forever, whereas the indestructible does exist forever. Therefore there will be something capable at the same time of always existing and not always existing. But that is impossible, as is plain from what was said above, because what can always exist, necessarily exists always, and hence cannot be not always existing. Consequently, it is clear that everything destructible will be destroyed sometime.
Similarly, if something is of its very nature generable, it is necessary that it be made. This does not mean that everything that can be generated will be generated at some time, for there are many things possible that will never be generated. But it cannot be that something now existing have a nature that is generable, and not have been generated, but have pre-existed from eternity. For what is generable does not have the natural power of always existing but of being able to be after it was at some time made. That is why he does not say that if it is generable, it will be made, but has been made.
284. Then at [210] he proves the same from the viewpoint of the cause of what is assumed ungenerated and indestructible.
Et primo ponit rationem;
secundo excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: sed adhuc neque verum et cetera.
First he presents his argument;
Secondly, he rejects an objection, at 286.
He says therefore first that, as will be said, we may also see in the following way that it is impossible either for a thing which is at some time generated to be thenceforward indestructible, or for a thing which is ungenerated and has always hitherto existed, to be destroyed. What is indestructible or ungenerated cannot exist by chance — since the product of chance or fortune neither exists nor comes to be as that which is always or usually. Meanwhile, anything which exists in infinite time, either absolutely finite or infinite in one direction, namely, before or after, is in existence either always, as is that which exists in infinite time absolutely, or for the most part, as is that which is in infinite time as to one part. Therefore it is necessary that such things which are either generated or corrupted after an infinite time, have from nature that they will at some time be and at some time not be. But in things which at one time naturally are and at another are not, the same power is directed to contradictories, namely, to being and not being, since this characteristic of at some time being, and at some time not being, is had from matter inasmuch as it is subject to privation or form. Thus the same thing follows as before, namely, that opposites could exist in the same thing at the same time. For in what has been generated a matter in potency to non-existence remains — and so, since it is indestructible, it will at the same time be able to be and able not to be. And the same holds for the ungenerated.
285. Then at [211] he excludes a certain objection. For someone could say that that indestructible thing which is generated has the power of not existing, not indeed with respect to the future, but with respect to the past; similarly what is ungenerated but destructible possesses a potency to existence with respect to the past.
But he excludes this by saying that it is not true to assert now that it is at the present time last year, or any of the things which were in past time; nor can it be said that what exists now existed in the past year — for things are distinguished in time in such a way that the order of time cannot be reversed so as to make the past the present or attribute present things to the past. From this it is plainly impossible for something which at one time did not exist, later to have existence forever, as we have already concluded from the preceding argument. For by reason of the matter from which it was made it has the potency not to exist even after it does exist: but it cannot be said that it has the potency not to exist now, because it is already existing in act and thus opposites would co-exist, as was concluded in the previous arguments. But it follows that it has the potency to non-existence in regard to the past year or past time. But this is impossible as the following argument shows: That for which a thing has the potency or power can be made actual. If, therefore, it is possible for something with respect to past time either to be or not be, we can posit that last year was not, i.e., that what existed last year was not existing then. But this is impossible, as was set down previously, for no potency looks to what was made in the past, but to what is in the present or what will be.
And what has been said in regard to something generated but assumed incorruptible applies also if something is assumed as previously existing for sempiternal time and then assumed non-existent through having been corrupted. For it will follow that after it has been corrupted, it still possesses by reason of the matter a potency to something that cannot be reduced to act, namely, to existence in a previous time. If this is assumed possible, it will be true to say that it is now last year and that whatever existed in the past exists now, from the fact that a potency regards the present alone, as has been said.
The force of this argument consists in the fact that, since a potency looks only to the present or future, then if something is said to have a potency with respect to the past, it follows that the past is converted and made present or future.
286. Then at [212] he proves his main proposition with an argument proper to natural science. And he says that also with a natural argument, and not a "universal" one, i.e., one that is logical or l, as the preceding were, it can be considered that it is impossible for that which always existed to be later destroyed, or for that which previously did not exist to be afterwards eternal. And this he proves because all destructible and generable things are alterable. For generation and destruction are the termini of alteration, and alteration passes from contrary to contrary. Consequently, it is plain that by the very contraries from which things come to be when previously they did not exist, such things are later destroyed and reduced back to the same by corruption. Thus, for example, if something from being hot is made cold, it can again be made hot by what is hot. And so it is plain that what has been generated, can again be destroyed; and that what was destroyed, was at one time generated.
287. It should be noted that these arguments of Aristotle are directed against the position that posits a world produced by generation and indestructible either of its very nature or through the will of God. But according to the Catholic faith, we hold that it began to be, not through a process of generation as from nature, but by flowing from a first principle whose power was not bound to give it existence in infinite time but as it willed, after previous non-existence, in order to manifest the excellence of its power over the totality of being, namely, that the totality of being depends entirely on it and its power is not confined or determined to the production of some given being. Now the things produced by it so as to exist forever have the potency and power to exist forever, and in no way at some time not to exist. For as long as they did not exist, they had no such power; but when they now exist, they have no power with respect to non-existence in the past but to the existence which now prevails or will be — for potency does not look to the past, but to the present or future, as the Philosopher says.
Thus it is clear that the preceding arguments in no way impugn the judgment of the Catholic faith. And with this the doctrine of the first book is brought to an end.
2-1
The heaven is eternal and its motion endless and without labor. Contrary opinions excluded.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὔτε γέγονεν ὁ πᾶς οὐρανὸς οὔτ' ἐνδέχεται φθαρῆναι, καθάπερ τινές φασιν αὐτόν, ἀλλ' ἔστιν εἷς καὶ ἀΐδιος, ἀρχὴν μὲν καὶ τελευτὴν οὐκ ἔχων τοῦ παντὸς αἰῶνος, ἔχων δὲ καὶ περιέχων ἐν αὑτῷ τὸν ἄπειρον χρόνον, ἔκ τε τῶν εἰρημένων ἔξεστι λαμβάνειν τὴν πίστιν, καὶ διὰ τῆς δόξης τῆς παρὰ τῶν ἄλλως λεγόντων καὶ γεννώντων αὐτόν εἰ γὰρ οὕτως μὲν ἔχειν ἐνδέχεται, καθ' ὃν δὲ τρόπον ἐκεῖνοι γενέσθαι λέγουσιν οὐκ ἐνδέχεται, μεγάλην ἂν ἔχοι καὶ τοῦτο (284a.) ῥοπὴν εἰς πίστιν περὶ τῆς ἀθανασίας αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀϊδιότητος.
Διόπερ καλῶς ἔχει συμπείθειν ἑαυτὸν τοὺς ἀρχαίους καὶ μάλιστα πατρίους ἡμῶν ἀληθεῖς εἶναι λόγους, ὡς ἔστιν ἀθάνατόν τι καὶ θεῖον τῶν ἐχόντων μὲν κίνησιν, ἐχόντων δὲ τοιαύτην ὥστε μηθὲν εἶναι πέρας αὐτῆς, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ταύτην τῶν ἄλλων πέρας
τό τε γὰρ πέρας τῶν περιεχόντων ἐστί, καὶ αὕτη τέλειος οὖσα περιέχει τὰς ἀτελεῖς καὶ τὰς ἐχούσας πέρας καὶ παῦλαν, αὐτὴ μὲν οὐδεμίαν οὔτ' ἀρχὴν ἔχουσα οὔτε τελευτήν, ἀλλ' ἄπαυστος οὖσα τὸν ἄπειρον χρόνον, τῶν δ' ἄλλων τῶν μὲν αἰτία τῆς ἀρχῆς, τῶν δὲ δεχομένη τὴν παῦλαν.
Τὸν δ' οὐρανὸν καὶ τὸν ἄνω τόπον οἱ μὲν ἀρχαῖοι τοῖς θεοῖς ἀπένειμαν ὡς ὄντα μόνον ἀθάνατον
ὁ δὲ νῦν μαρτυρεῖ λόγος ὡς ἄφθαρτος καὶ ἀγένητος, ἔτι δ' ἀπαθὴς πάσης θνητῆς δυσχερείας ἐστίν,
πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἄπονος διὰ τὸ μηδεμιᾶς προσδεῖσθαι βιαίας ἀνάγκης, ἣ κατέχει κωλύουσα φέρεσθαι πεφυκότα αὐτὸν ἄλλως πᾶν γὰρ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐπίπονον, ὅσῳπερ ἂν ἀϊδιώτερον ᾖ, καὶ διαθέσεως τῆς ἀρίστης ἄμοιρον.
Διόπερ οὔτε κατὰ τὸν τῶν παλαιῶν μῦθον ὑποληπτέον ἔχειν, οἵ φασιν Ἄτλαντός τινος αὐτῷ προσδεῖσθαι τὴν σωτηρίαν ἐοίκασι γὰρ καὶ τοῦτον οἱ συστήσαντες τὸν λόγον τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχειν ὑπόληψιν τοῖς ὕστερον ὡς γὰρ περὶ βάρος ἐχόντων καὶ γεηρῶν ἁπάντων τῶν ἄνω σωμάτων ὑπέστησαν αὐτῷ μυθικῶς ἀνάγκην ἔμψυχον. Οὔτε δὴ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ὑποληπτέον,
οὔτε διὰ τὴν δίνησιν θάττονος τυγχάνοντα φορᾶς τῆς οἰκείας ῥοπῆς ἔτι σώζεσθαι τοσοῦτον χρόνον, καθάπερ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς φησιν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ὑπὸ ψυχῆς εὔλογον ἀναγκαζούσης μένειν ἀΐδιον
οὐδὲ γὰρ τῆς ψυχῆς οἷόν τ' εἶναι τὴν τοιαύτην ζωὴν ἄλυπον καὶ μακαρίαν ἀνάγκη γὰρ καὶ τὴν κίνησιν μετὰ βίας οὖσαν, εἴπερ κινεῖ φέρεσθαι πεφυκότος τοῦ πρώτου σώματος ἄλλως καὶ κινεῖ συνεχῶς, ἄσχολον εἶναι καὶ πάσης ἀπηλλαγμένην ῥαστώνης ἔμφρονος, εἴ γε μηδ' ὥσπερ τῇ ψυχῇ τῇ τῶν θνητῶν ζῴων ἐστὶν ἀνάπαυσις ἡ περὶ τὸν ὕπνον γινομένη τοῦ σώματος ἄνεσις, ἀλλ' ἀναγκαῖον Ἰξίονός τινος μοῖραν κατέχειν αὐτὴν ἀΐδιον καὶ ἄτρυτον.
Εἰ δή, καθάπερ (284b.) εἴπομεν, ἐνδέχεται τὸν εἰρημένον ἔχειν τρόπον περὶ τῆς πρώτης φορᾶς, οὐ μόνον αὐτοῦ περὶ τῆς ἀϊδιότητος οὕτως ὑπολαβεῖν ἐμμελέστερον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῇ μαντείᾳ τῇ περὶ τὸν θεὸν μόνως ἂν ἔχοιμεν οὕτως ὁμολογουμένως ἀποφαίνεσθαι συμφώνους λόγους. Ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τοιούτων λόγων ἅλις ἔστω τὸ νῦν.
288. After having determined in Book I concerning the world as a whole, in which he showed to exist some bodies that are circularly moved and some that are moved with a straight motion, the Philosopher here begins to determine about the bodies that are circularly moved.
Et primo determinat de ipsis corporibus circulariter motis;
secundo determinat de centro super quod circulariter moventur, ibi: reliquum autem de terra dicere et cetera.
First he determines the question of the bodies themselves that are circularly moved;
Secondly, he determines the question of the center about which they are circularly moved (Lecture 20).
As to the first he does two things:
primo determinat de caelo, quod est corpus circulariter motum;
secundo de stellis quae sunt in caelo, ibi: de vocatis autem astris et cetera.
First he discusses the heaven, which is the circularly moved body;
Secondly, the stars which are in the heaven (L. 10).
About the first he does two things:
primo determinat de his quae pertinent ad substantiam caeli;
secundo de his quae pertinent ad motum eius, ibi: quoniam autem est dupliciter et cetera.
First he determines what pertains to the substance of the heaven;
Secondly, what pertains to its motion (L. 7).
As to the first he does three things:
primo determinat de duratione caeli;
secundo de diversitate partium eius, ibi: quoniam autem quidam sunt etc.;
tertio determinat de figura ipsius, ibi: figuram autem sphaericam et cetera.
First he determines about the duration of the heaven;
Secondly, about the variety of its parts (L. 2);
Thirdly, about its shape (L. 5).
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo infert conclusionem in praecedentibus manifestatam;
secundo ex illa conclusione arguit ad propositum, ibi: propter quod bene se habet et cetera.
First he draws a conclusion made clear in what has gone before;
Secondly, from that conclusion he argues to his proposition, at 290.
289. He says therefore first [213] that from what has gone before [LL. 22 ff. of Book I], we can believe that the entire heaven neither was made nor is able to be corrupted as some say.
He says that the whole heaven is ungenerated and indestructible on the ground that the major part of the bodies of the world is the substance of heavenly body, which is neither generated nor destructible, in the sense explained in Book I. Or else he is saying this to differentiate it from those parts of the world that are generable and destructible with respect to their parts, although not wholly, as is plain in the elements. Or else because those bodies which are generable and destructible, for example, plants and animals and stones, are not in the strict sense parts of the world (otherwise the world would never be perfect, since it would never possess all such things at once); rather they are effects of the parts of the world. Therefore, although such things are subject to generation and corruption not only with respect to a part but also as a whole, nevertheless the whole world is neither generated nor corrupted.
It should be noted that he says "the whole heaven was not generated," and then, instead of saying, "it is not corrupted," he says, "it cannot be corrupted." He uses this way of stating it for the sake of those who said that the world is of its very nature corruptible but that on account of God's will it never will be corrupted. He therefore specifically says, "as some say".
But it has been proved above that the world is one only and eternal (which he says lest anyone suppose that the eternal be not numerically one but one in species only), in such a way as to have neither a beginning nor an end "of the whole eternal," i.e., of its whole infinite duration.
Now, lest anyone suppose that he means the corporeal world is eternal as God is eternal, Whose existence and life are totally all at once, i.e., without any succession of before and after, he adds that the world "possesses an infinitude of time," since, namely, its duration extends according to the succession of time. Yet the whole world does not possess temporal duration in the same way as some generable and destructible singular, whose duration is comprehended. by time but does not encompass time; rather time is encompassed by the whole world, both because time does not extend beyond the duration of the world and because time is produced from the motion of the first body of the world, as was explained in IV. Thus time is contained by the world as an effect by its cause. Now time is the measure of a celestial motion not through the latter's being contained by it as an effect by its cause (for the container is not measured by the content, but the other way around), but through its being a certain image of God's eternity as Boethius says, "Who dost command time to proceed from the aeon."
Therefore the foregoing statements are worthy of belief not only on account of the arguments previously cited, but also on account of the contrary opinions of those who attribute generation and corruption to the world. For if the world turns out to be as we have described it, with no paradoxes arising, and it cannot have come about in the manner described by those who claim that the world was generated, then our description will have a "great inclination," i.e., great power to persuade one to believe in the immortality of the heaven and in its eternity — where "immortality" refers to the perpetuity of life and "eternity" to the perpetuity of its existence — for they maintained that the heaven not only existed but also lived, as something animated.
From what he says here, it is plain that Aristotle presented his previous arguments in proof of the eternity of the world not with the intention of showing with necessity that the world could not have begun but as showing that it did not begin in the manner described by others.
290. Then at [214], from the preceding conclusion as to the eternity of the entire world, he concludes to his proposition, namely, to the eternity of the heavenly body. And concerning this he does three things:
primo infert conclusionem in generali;
secundo manifestat eam in speciali, ibi: caelum autem etc.;
tertio ex veritate manifestata excludit contrarias opiniones, ibi: propter quod quidem et cetera.
First he infers the conclusion in a general way;
Secondly, he explains it in detail, at 292;
Thirdly, from the truth shown he excludes certain contrary opinions, 295.
About the first he does two things:
primo infert conclusionem intentam;
secundo ponit rationem ipsius, ibi: etenim finis et cetera.
First he draws his intended conclusion;
Secondly, he presents its argument, at 291.
He says therefore first [214] that, because we are inclined to believe in the eternity of the world from what has preceded, it follows that a man shows himself easily persuasable by the dictums of the ancients — not, however, by those of any who erred but principally by those of our fathers, who, namely, schooled us in divine worship. We should be inclined to believe their words to be true, to the effect that there is something immortal and divine, not only among the number of the immobile substances, which are totally separated from matter, but also among bodies which have motion, such, however, that of the motion of the divine and immortal body there be no end, by which, namely, it might be terminated; rather its motion is the end of all other motions. Now the reason he attributed this to the ancient sayings of the ancestors is because all those who established a form of divine worship among the gentiles sought to have divine worship given to the heaven as to a divine and immortal body whose motion is endless. Accordingly they derive from theirs, which means "to run forever," their name for the deity, theos.
291. Then at [2153 he presents his argument for that part of the foregoing conclusion which stated that the motion of the heaven is the end of other motions. For everything that contains has the notion of end inasmuch as the contents end at the limits of the container. Now it is clear that the imperfect is disposed to be contained by the perfect. As was proved in Book I, circular motion is perfect and straight motions imperfect, for these do not return to their beginning as a circular motion does; rather their terminus is most remote from the beginning and contrary to it — wherefore, just as they begin to move at the start, so, they begin to rest when at the end. Consequently, circular motion must contain other motions as the perfect contains the imperfect. And for this reason circular motion is the end of other motions, in such a way, namely, that the former has neither a beginning nor an end at which to start or cease; rather, it moves without cease in infinite time. For whatever begins or ceases to be moved, does so under the influence of some previous motion, which is the cause of its motion. If the mover and moved were in the same relationship, there would be no more reason for a motion to begin later than before. Hence, if some motion begins newly, there must pre-exist some motion to cause the newness of this motion. Now if the world is eternal, motion would have to have always been. Hence it was necessary to posit some eternal motion which would contain other motions that were not eternal and be their end in such a way as to be a cause of motion in these mobiles which begin to be moved, and to receive the rest of those which cease to be moved.
He does not say "causes the state of rest" but "receives," because a universal cause aims at impressing its likeness on its effects which, however, cannot be equated to the universal cause but receive its likeness according to their condition. Thus lower things do not uniformly receive from God the eternity of the divine being so as to remain forever the same in number, but they remain the same in species through the generation and corruption of individuals. Hence God gives existence to things but receives their corruption, using it, as it were, for the generation of other things. In like manner, the lower motions receive a likeness of the eternity of the heavenly motion not in a uniform manner but according to the alternation of motion and rest. Here, whatever there is in them of motion is caused by the heavenly motion; but whatever is in them of defect of motion, i.e., of rest, is due to their defect, because it is not in their nature to be in eternal motion. So the motion of the heaven is said to accept the state of rest of these bodies as something ordained to an end. Wherefore Plato in the Timaeus has God, the establisher of the world, saying to the heavenly gods: "Make things increase by giving food and take back once more the things that suffered loss".
292. Then at [216] he explains in detail what he had said:
et primo quantum ad sempiternitatem caeli;
secundo quantum ad qualitatem motus eius, ibi: adhuc autem sine labore et cetera.
First as to the eternity of the heaven;
Secondly, as to the quality of its motion, at 294.
That the heaven is eternal he shows in two ways. First from the sayings of the ancients. He says that they assigned to the gods the heaven and the place which is above, taking the heaven as immortal and suitable as a place for immortal beings, as was also stated above in Book I. And he gives to the place above the name "heaven" in keeping with the common opinion of those so speaking and also because the place whither light things are borne, and which is properly called an upward place, is nearest to the heavenly body.
293. Secondly, [217] he explains it with a reason previously cited, which showed the heaven to be ungenerable and indestructible from the fact that it has no contrary. It was also shown there that the heaven is impassible, with the passion that produces difficulty of corruption. Heavenly bodies are, however, passible with a perfective passion, as in the case where the moon is illuminated and receives virtue from the sun. These things, too, were previously mentioned.
294. Then [218] he shows the quality of the heaven's motion, namely, that it is moved without labor. This he proves on the ground that there can be posited no violent necessity that would keep it from being moved otherwise, i.e., according to its nature. For whatever is moved with labor is being moved against the natural motion of its body — for which reason it is laborious for an animal to move upwards. Now in the case of things moved against their nature, if such a motion is to continue, it must be maintained by some violent mover imposing on them a motion of coercion — for natural necessity leads only to what is according to nature. Everything such, i.e., which is subject to a motion contrary to its nature, must be in more and more labor accordingly as the motion is more continuous and eternal, and as it is more alien to its best disposition, i.e., that which is according to its nature. But such a thing cannot happen to the heavenly body, which is the noblest of bodies. Consequently the motion of the heaven is not laborious.
295. Then at [219] he excludes contrary opinions.
Et primo excludit errores;
secundo concludit veritatem intentam, ibi: si itaque quemadmodum et cetera.
First he dismisses certain errors;
Secondly, he concludes to the truth intended, at 299.
With respect to the first he dismisses three opinions, the first of which is a fable. And he says [219] that because the motion of the heaven is neither laborious nor contrary to nature, no one should even slightly suspect that the eternity of the heaven and of its motion are as the ancient fables of Homer and other poets describe them. They said that the heaven, to be kept in its position, requires a giant they named Atlas, who stands upon two pillars and supports the world on his shoulders. Now the ones who originated that fable seem to have held the same opinion about celestial bodies as some later teachers, namely, that they were heavy and earthy, and as such had to be held up against their nature by animate power, or that of some living things, such as God or a separated substance of some kind. And if they maintain that this is necessary on the ground that the heaven has weight, the fable is wholly to be rejected. However, if they mean that the heaven has by nature such-and-such a position and motion, but that its nature was produced and is conserved by another, then the fable contains something divine.
296. Secondly, at [220] he rejects the opinion of Empedocles who posited that the heaven is kept in its position that prevents it from falling by the rapidity of its motion which overcomes its natural inclination to fall — as occurs with water, which will not spill if the vessel of water is rotated more rapidly than the motion of the water downward. Democritus and Anaxagoras are also said to have held this.
Now this could perhaps happen for a short time, but that through such a speed of motion the heaven should keep its position for so great a time, namely, an infinite and perpetual time, is most unprovable. For since that which is violent is a certain exorbitation [departure] from what is according to nature, it does not seem that what is by violence could last longer than what is according to nature — since what is according to nature occurs, as it were, always, or for the most part. These latter, like the first, seem also to base their argument on the supposition that heavenly bodies have weight but are prevented from falling downward by the rapidity of their motion.
297. Thirdly, at [221] he rejects a third opinion, that of Plato, who says in the Timaeus that in the center of the world, its soul, reaching to the extremity of the heaven and everywhere, began an imperishable and wise life for all time.
First he rejects this opinion on the part of the body. Hence he says that it is not reasonable to say that the heaven and its motion remain forever on account of the compulsion of the rational soul, because nothing forced can last forever, for, since compulsion is against nature, it would follow that what is according to nature would never exist.
298. Secondly, at [222] he shows the same on the part of the soul. And he says that the life of the soul so moving a body cannot be without sadness and happy. For since the motion of the body is caused by compulsion and the soul moves that body circularly, which is inclined to be moved otherwise, and in addition moves this body continually, then of necessity that soul is never free and is removed from all "prudent strength."
Now "prudent strength" can refer to the operation of the speculative intellect, which requires prudence and strength, as though Aristotle were saying, "If the soul of heaven can in no way find relief from the labor it undergoes in moving the heaven against its nature, it will always be kept from vehement contemplation, which its uninterrupted labor and consequent sadness prevent."
Or "prudent strength" could refer to the effort the soul applies in order to keep things moving according to prudence. For it does not seem to be in keeping with prudence to apply its strength without ceasing to some task. For if laborious work is undertaken for a short time, it will be tolerable; but the heaven is moved with a continual and eternal motion. Hence if the soul of the heaven were to move the heaven against its nature in a laborious manner, it would follow that that soul would be worse off than the souls of mortal animals, which get rest from moving the body at least during sleep. But it is necessary that fate, i.e., the decree of some superior being keep the soul of the heaven eternal and indestructible, i.e., unfailing in moving, after the manner of a certain man called Ixion, who, the fables tell us, while acting as steward at Juno's wedding, lusted after her. But she substituted for herself a cloud, from which he begot the Centaur. For this he was condemned by Jupiter to be bound to a wheel on which he continually revolves.
This Aristotle seems to say against the statement of Plato who asserted that from the center of the world unto the outermost heaven the soul everywhere complex began an unceasing and prudent life for all time. For this would appear to be no different than being bound to the heaven as Ixion to the wheel. And it seems that the life of such a soul is not prudent but foolish, as undertaking an endless labor. However, Aristotle is not here reprehending Plato for positing an animate heaven — because later on he does the same —but for seeming to suppose that this soul is moving the heaven forever contrary to its nature. But perhaps Plato did not understand this motion as contrary to the nature of the heaven but wanted to bring out that the nature according to which this motion befits it is in it from another.
299. Then at [223] he concludes from the foregoing that if our account of the first local motion, which is the heavenly motion, is correct, namely, that it is without labor, not only is to think this better from the point of view of the eternity of the heaven, but it is also more in conformity with out estimate of the gods — which he calls "divination," as though had by divine revelation. For that is the only way to keep our teaching consistent, since it does not appear congruent to say on the one hand that the heaven is being moved by God, and to say on the other that its motion is laborious. But this is enough on such matters for the present.
2-2
Diversity of parts of the heaven as to position. Opinion of Pythagoras
Ἐπειδὴ δέ τινές εἰσιν οἵ φασιν εἶναί τι δεξιὸν καὶ ἀριστερὸν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθάπερ οἱ καλούμενοι Πυθαγόρειοι (ἐκείνων γὰρ οὗτος ὁ λόγος ἐστίν), σκεπτέον πότερον τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον ὡς ἐκεῖνοι λέγουσιν, ἢ μᾶλλον ἑτέρως, εἴπερ δεῖ προσάπτειν τῷ τοῦ παντὸς σώματι ταύτας τὰς ἀρχάς. Εὐθὺς γὰρ πρῶτον, εἰ τὸ δεξιὸν ὑπάρχει καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν, ἔτι πρότερον τὰς προτέρας ὑποληπτέον ὑπάρχειν ἀρχὰς ἐν αὐτῷ.
Διώρισται μὲν οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐν τοῖς περὶ τὰς τῶν ζῴων κινήσεις διὰ τὸ τῆς φύσεως οἰκεῖα τῆς ἐκείνων εἶναι φανερῶς γὰρ ἔν γε τοῖς ζῴοις ὑπάρχοντα φαίνεται τοῖς μὲν πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα μόρια, λέγω δ' οἷον τό τε δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν, τοῖς δ' ἔνια, τοῖς δὲ φυτοῖς τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω μόνον.
Εἰ δὲ δεῖ καὶ τῷ οὐρανῷ προσάπτειν τι τῶν τοιούτων, καὶ τὸ πρῶτον, καθάπερ εἴπομεν, ἐν τοῖς ζῴοις ὑπάρχον εὔλογον ὑπάρχειν ἐν αὐτῷ τριῶν γὰρ ὄντων ἕκαστον οἷον ἀρχή τις ἐστίν. Λέγω δὲ τὰ τρία τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω, καὶ τὸ πρόσθιον καὶ τὸ ἀντικείμενον, καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν ταύτας γὰρ τὰς διαστάσεις εὔλογον ὑπάρχειν τοῖς σώμασι τοῖς τελείοις πάσας.
Ἔστι δὲ τὸ μὲν ἄνω τοῦ μήκους ἀρχή, τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν τοῦ πλάτους, τὸ δ' ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βάθους.
Ἔτι δ' ἄλλως κατὰ τὰς κινήσεις ἀρχὰς γὰρ ταύτας λέγω ὅθεν ἄρχονται πρῶτον αἱ κινήσεις τοῖς ἔχουσιν. Ἔστι δὲ ἀπὸ μὲν τοῦ ἄνω ἡ αὔξησις, ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν δεξιῶν ἡ κατὰ τόπον, ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἔμπροσθεν ἡ κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν ἔμπροσθεν γὰρ λέγω ἐφ' ὃ αἱ αἰσθήσεις.
Διὸ καὶ οὐκ ἐν ἅπαντι σώματι τὸ ἄνω καὶ κάτω καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ ἀριστερὸν καὶ τὸ ἔμπροσθεν καὶ ὄπισθεν ζητητέον, ἀλλ' ὅσα ἔχει κινήσεως ἀρχὴν ἐν αὑτοῖς ἔμψυχα ὄντα τῶν γὰρ ἀψύχων ἐν οὐθενὶ ὁρῶμεν ὅθεν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κινήσεως. Τὰ μὲν γὰρ ὅλως οὐ κινεῖται, τὰ δὲ κινεῖται μὲν ἀλλ' οὐ πανταχόθεν ὁμοίως, οἷον τὸ πῦρ (285a.) ἄνω μόνον καὶ ἡ γῆ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον.
Ἀλλ' ἐν μὲν τούτοις λέγομεν τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερὸν πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἐπαναφέροντες ἢ γὰρ κατὰ τὰ ἡμέτερα δεξιά, ὥσπερ οἱ μάντεις, ἢ καθ' ὁμοιότητα τοῖς ἡμετέροις, ὥσπερ τὰ τοῦ ἀνδριάντος, ἢ τὰ ἐναντίως ἔχοντα τῇ θέσει, δεξιὸν μὲν τὸ κατὰ τὸ ἡμέτερον ἀριστερόν, ἀριστερὸν δὲ τὸ κατὰ τὸ ἡμέτερον δεξιόν, [καὶ ὄπισθεν τὸ κατὰ τὸ ἡμέτερον ἔμπροσθεν]. Ἐν αὐτοῖς δὲ τούτοις οὐδεμίαν ὁρῶμεν διαφοράν ἐὰν γὰρ ἀνάπαλιν στραφῇ, τὰ ἐναντία ἐροῦμεν δεξιὰ καὶ ἀριστερὰ καὶ ἄνω καὶ κάτω καὶ ἔμπροσθεν καὶ ὄπισθεν.
Διὸ καὶ τῶν Πυθαγορείων ἄν τις θαυμάσειεν ὅτι δύο μόνας ταύτας ἀρχὰς ἔλεγον, τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν, τὰς δὲ τέτταρας παρέλιπον οὐθὲν ἧττον κυρίας οὔσας
οὐθὲν γὰρ ἐλάττω διαφορὰν ἔχει τὰ ἄνω πρὸς τὰ κάτω καὶ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν πρὸς τὰ ὄπισθεν ἢ τὰ δεξιὰ πρὸς τὰ ἀριστερὰ ἐν ἅπασι τοῖς ζῴοις. Τὰ μὲν γὰρ τῇ δυνάμει διαφέρει μόνον, τὰ δὲ καὶ τοῖς σχήμασι,
καὶ τὸ μὲν ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω πᾶσι τοῖς ἐμψύχοις ἐστὶν ὁμοίως ζῴοις καὶ φυτοῖς, τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερὸν οὐκ ἐνυπάρχει τοῖς φυτοῖς.
Ἔτι δ' ὡς τὸ μῆκος τοῦ πλάτους πρότερον, εἰ τὸ μὲν ἄνω τοῦ μήκους ἀρχή, τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν τοῦ πλάτους, ἡ δὲ τοῦ προτέρου ἀρχὴ προτέρα, πρότερον ἂν εἴη τὸ ἄνω τοῦ δεξιοῦ κατὰ γένεσιν, ἐπειδὴ πολλαχῶς λέγεται τὸ πρότερον.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις, εἰ τὸ μὲν ἄνω ἐστὶ τὸ ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις, τὸ δὲ δεξιὸν ἀφ' οὗ, τὸ δ' ἔμπροσθεν ἐφ' ὅ, κἂν οὕτως ἔχοι τινὰ δύναμιν ἀρχῆς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς τὰς ἄλλας ἰδέας. Διά τε δὴ τὸ παραλείπειν τὰς κυριωτέρας ἀρχὰς δίκαιον αὐτοῖς ἐπιτιμᾶν, καὶ διότι ταύτας ἐν ἅπασιν ὁμοίως ἐνόμιζον ὑπάρχειν.
300. After settling the question of the perpetuity of the heavens, the Philosopher here determines the question of the variety of its parts.
Et primo determinat de diversitate partium caeli quae accipiuntur secundum diversitatem situs in eodem caelo;
secundo de diversitate partium quae accipiuntur secundum ordinem corporum caelestium ad invicem, ibi: quoniam autem non est contrarius motus et cetera.
First he determines the question of the diversity of parts considered from the viewpoint of their respective position in the same heaven;
Secondly, as considered from the relationship of the various heavenly bodies one to the other (L. 4).
As to the first he does two things:
primo determinat de diversitate situalium partium caeli secundum opinionem aliorum;
secundo secundum opinionem propriam, ibi: nobis autem quoniam determinatum est et cetera.
First he determines concerning the diversity of the positional parts of the heaven according to the opinions of others;
Secondly, according to his own opinion (L. 3).
As to the first he does two things:
primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo manifestat propositum, ibi: determinatum est quidem igitur et cetera.
First he states his intention;
Secondly, he manifests his proposition, at 301.
He says therefore first [224] that because some assert that one part of the heaven is on the right and another on the left, namely, the Pythagoreans, who put a right and a left in all things, it seems necessary to inquire whether things are as they assert or whether one should not rather attribute such things in a way different from theirs — if indeed it be necessary to apply these principles, i.e., right and left, to the body of the entire world by virtue of their being found in the heavenly body, which encompasses the whole world.
The reason why this matter should be considered is that it immediately occurs to a man that if there is a right and a left in the heaven, then there is even a greater reason and a prior one for thinking the prior principles are in the heaven, namely, up and down, before and behind.
301. Then at [225] he manifests this proposition.
Et primo ostendit conditionem istorum principiorum secundum quod in aliis rebus inveniuntur;
secundo ostendit quod non inveniuntur in omnibus corporibus, ibi: propter quod et non in omni corpore et cetera.
First he explains the condition of these principles as found in other things;
Secondly, that they are not found in all bodies, at 305.
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quod non omnia praedicta principia insunt omnibus;
secundo ostendit quo ordine se habeant ad invicem, ibi: est autem sursum quidem et cetera.
First he shows that not all the aforesaid principles are found in all things;
Secondly, he explains in what order they are mutually related, at 303.
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quod huiusmodi principia non omnia omnibus insint, sed quibusdam quaedam et non omnia;
secundo ostendit hoc omnino esse inconveniens, ut caelo attribuantur quaedam et non omnia, ibi: si autem oportet caelo adaptare et cetera.
First he shows that all these principles are not found in everything, but in some things some only and not all;
Secondly, that it would be entirely unfitting that some, but not all, be attributed to the heaven, at 302.
He says therefore first [225] that these principles, which are called differences of position, have been dealt with in the book , since they are peculiar to such natures, namely, those of animals. For these differences of position are clearly found in animals according to definite parts. For some animals, namely, the perfect, which not only sense but move with local motion, possess all these parts, namely, right and left, before and behind, above and below; other animals, namely, the imperfect and stationary, possess some of them, namely, above and below, before and behind; while plants have only above and below.
302. Then at [226] he shows that if any of them are assigned to the heaven, then all must be. And he explains that if we must assign any to the heaven, namely, either right or left, it is reasonable to suppose that that would be found which is found first in perfect animals; or it is reasonable that the heaven should possess that which is first in animals, because if we posit what is subsequent, we must posit what is prior. Now since there are three oppositions or "dimensions," each of them, namely, above, before and right is a certain principle of its opposite or dimension.
He subsequently expounds the three he has stated to be: one of these is the opposition or dimension between up and down, in which "up" is the principle; another is between before and its opposite, which is called "behind," where what is before is the principle; yet another is between right and left, in which "right" is the principle. Now, since the perfect is that which is composed of all its parts or principles, it is reasonable that all these oppositions or dimensions should be found in "perfect bodies," i.e., in perfect animals. Hence, since the heaven is perfect above all, it is reasonable that if it be capable of any of these parts, it should have them all and not just some.
303. Then at [227] he explains in two ways the order of the aforesaid principles. First, from the viewpoint of the dimensions themselves. For "up" is the principle of length: in man who is the most perfect animal, his length, as though his greatest dimension, is said from the head, which is his "up," to the feet, which are his "down." "Right" is the principle of width, for the width of a man is reckoned according to the distance between his right and his left. "Before" is the principle of depth: for the depth or thickness of a man is reckoned according to the distance between before and behind. The same holds respectively in other animals. But length is prior to width, and width to depth, just as line is to plane, and plane to body. Therefore, "above" is prior to "right," and "right" is prior to "before."
304. Secondly, he proves the same thing [228] from the viewpoint of motions. He does this because the things we have been discussing are certain principles from which motion first begins in animals that possess such parts or principles. For the motion of growth begins from above. This is evident in man, for the head, which is the "up" of man, is also up according to the position of the universe. Now the motion of growth begins from the head, because food is taken into the opening of the mouth, which is in the head, and food is the matter of growth. In plants, however, it is the root which is "up," and this is parallel to the head in animals, as far as the taking in of food is concerned. However, the "up" of a plant is opposite as to position to what is "up" for the universe. The other animals are midway between man and plants. Now motion with respect to place begins from the right, for animals move the right part before the left, as in walking they move the right foot. But in the motion by which the senses are altered, "before" is the principle, for that is said to be the forepart of the animal where the senses exist. Therefore, since the motion of growth is prior to the motion of sensation, which in turn is prior to local motion in animals, it follows that "above" is prior to "before," and "before" prior to "right."
305. Then at [229] he shows that these principles are not present in all bodies.
First he concludes from the foregoing that, strictly speaking, these principles do not exist in non-living bodies; Secondly, he explains how we come to speak of them as being therein, 306.
He says therefore first [229] that since the foregoing are principles of certain motions, we should not look for above and below, right and left, before and behind, in all bodies, but only in animate bodies having a principle of motion in themselves. Now we do not find in any non-living body any originative source of motion.
This can be understood in two ways. First, in the sense that there is in living things an active principle of motion, namely, the soul, while in non-living bodies there is no such active principle of motion which could move, but such things are moved by an external mover, which is the generator or that which removes what prevents motion. Yet they do have a passive principle of motion within, by which they are apt to be moved, for example, heaviness or lightness, as is plain in VIII.
Or it can mean that in living bodies there is a definite part from which the motion begins, as has been said. But such a part is not found in non-living bodies. For, as he further says, some non-living bodies are not in motion at all, for example, those that already exist in their own place (or rather he says this with respect to artificial bodies which, as such, have no motion of themselves). Others are in motion, for example, the ones that are outside their own appropriate place, yet each such body is moved to its place in a similar way for each part. For example, fire is moved only upwards and earth only to the center of the world. In these cases no other difference of position is considered, either on the part of the body which is moved, so that one part would begin to be moved before another, or even on the part of the place, so that a natural thing would be moved to its own place from one position in space and not from another.
306. Then at [230] he shows how these positions are sometimes said to exist in non-living bodies. And he says that in such bodies we speak of above and below, right and left, before and behind, only in comparison to ourselves. And this can take place in three ways. In one way, as we call that the right which is opposite to our right, as diviners, e.g., augurs, refer to a bird on our right, as the right bird and one on our left as the left bird. The second way is based on a likeness to our parts, as we call the right of a statue that which is similar to the right of man and the left that which is similar to our left. The third way is by a contrary position, as when we call the left what is opposite to our right, and what is opposite to our left we call right, as is plain in the case of an image in a mirror. The same explanations apply to the other positions.
But in non-living things considered in themselves, there is no such variation of parts. And this is evident from the fact that if we turn them toward us, the designations will be the opposite of what they were previously: what was right is now called left and vice-versa, and the same goes for the other positions. But in living things, no matter how they are turned about, these parts remain always the same.
307. Then at [230] he shows that the Pythagoreans erred in attributing these differences to the heaven, and this in three ways, which can be gathered from the above reasoning. Consequently he adduces them here as conclusions. The first way is that, whereas there are six positions, one wonders why only two of them are attributed to the heaven, namely, the right and left, and the other four are ignored — although it is reasonable that all of them belong to the heaven, as was said above.
308. The second way is given at [231], namely, that if any are to be omitted and not attributed to the heaven, it is the less principal ones which ought to have been omitted. But that the ones omitted are not less principal than the two attributed he proves with four arguments.
The first argument is given at [232], namely, that in certain animals we do not observe that the difference between the part above and the part below, or between the part in front and the part to the rear, is less than the difference between the right side and the left side; rather, the difference is greater. For the right and left differ only in power but agree in figure (for the right hand is stronger than the left, although they are of the same shape; similarly, the right shoulder is stronger than the left as far as motions are concerned, although the left is stronger than the right for carrying a burden; in like manner, the right foot is better for motion, but the left is better for maintaining a fixed position). But it is plain that the front and rear of an animal, as well as the top and bottom, differ not only in power, but in shape as well. Now things that differ more appear to have a more principal distance.
309. The second argument is at [233], namely, that top and bottom are found in all living bodies, whether animal or plant; but right and left are not in plants but only in perfect animals. Consequently, up and down are prior, where "prior" implies a non-convertible dependence in existence [on the part of the non-prior].
310. The third argument is at [234], namely, that length is prior to width in the order of generation, for, according to geometers, a line in motion makes a surface. But "up" is a principle of length, and "right" a principle of width, as was explained above. Therefore, since the source of what is prior is itself prior, the consequence is that "up" is prior to "right," in the sense of something prior in the order of generation (for there are many ways in which things are said to be prior to others, as is plain in Predicaments and in V.
311. The fourth argument, at [235] says that "up" is an originative source of motion, which may be understood of the motion of growth; "right" is the source of local motion; "before" is that toward which an animal moves, as though being opposite to its senses. From this it is clear that "up" has a certain chief role among all the types of position, just as the motion of growth is more essential and more intrinsic to an animal than is local motion.
Nevertheless, everything stated here may be better referred to local motion, by stating that "pup," in an animal which moves according to local motion, is that whence motion proceeds, since it is in the head, namely, that sense functions and sense is the moving principle in animals, as stated in De Anima IT. But "right" is that whence local motion begins, since the right part moves first, as was said, while "before" is that toward which the animal is moved. But the moving principle is that which has the primacy in the motion of an animal. In keeping with this it is evident that "up" has the primacy among the other types of position.
Thus does the Philosopher by means of these four arguments conclude his second way of disproving the assertion of the Pythagoreans. And he says it is just to rebuke them, since they ignored the more important principles and did not attribute them to the heaven.
312. He presents his third way at [2353, saying that they should be rebuked also for claiming that right and left are found similarly in all things, whereas in truth they are found only in perfect animals, as was said above.
But it should be kept in mind that it was the Pythagoreans' intent to reduce all things to good and evil as to two principles. And because they believed that all number is encompassed by 10, they posited ten things on the side of good and ten on the side of evil, as is plain in Metaphysics I. By each thing they placed in that enumeration they understood all the things to be found in its genus. Thus by "right" and "left" they understood all other positions, understanding that just as "right" is referred to good, so also "up" and "before," while "left," "down," and "behind" referred to evil. The reason why they posited right and left, rather than the other positions, was that the right is according to custom more obviously referred to the good and the left to evil — for we are accustomed to call good fortune "right" and evil "left" [i.e., "sinister"]. Consequently, they attributed right and left to all things to which they attributed good and evil.
Or perhaps they mentioned only right and left, as including the others in them, because they saw that whatever possessed a right and a left possessed all the others, but not vice-versa. Likewise they perchance especially applied to the heaven a right and a left and not the others, because there is in the heaven a local motion, to which right and left belong, but no growth, or sense alteration, to which up and down, before and behind belong respectively. Or perhaps it was because up and down, before and behind, are diversified with respect to shape, whereas right and left are not — for the parts of the heaven, being circular, are uniform in shape.
2-3
How, according to the Philosopher's opinion, the differences of position befit the parts of the heaven
Ἡμῖν δ' ἐπεὶ διώρισται πρότερον ὅτι ἐν τοῖς ἔχουσιν ἀρχὴν κινήσεως αἱ τοιαῦται δυνάμεις ἐνυπάρχουσιν, ὁ δ' οὐρανὸς ἔμψυχος καὶ ἔχει κινήσεως ἀρχήν, δῆλον ὅτι ἔχει καὶ τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν.
Οὐ δεῖ γὰρ ἀπορεῖν διὰ τὸ σφαιροειδὲς εἶναι τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ παντός, ὅπως ἔσται τούτου τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν τὸ δὲ ἀριστερὸν ὁμοίων γ' ὄντων τῶν (285b.) μορίων ἁπάντων καὶ κινουμένων τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον,
ἀλλὰ νοεῖν ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις, ἐν οἷς ἔχει τὸ δεξιὸν πρὸς τὸ ἀριστερὸν διαφορὰν καὶ τοῖς σχήμασιν, εἶτα περιθείη σφαῖραν ἕξει μὲν γὰρ τὴν δύναμιν διαφέρουσαν, δόξει δ' οὔ, διὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα τοῦ σχήματος.
Τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ περὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ κινεῖσθαι καὶ γὰρ εἰ μηδέποτ' ἤρξατο, ὅμως ἔχειν ἀναγκαῖον ἀρχήν, ὅθεν ἂν ἤρξατο, εἰ ἤρχετο κινούμενον, κἂν εἰ σταίη, κινηθείη ἂν πάλιν.
Λέγω δὲ μῆκος μὲν αὐτοῦ τὸ κατὰ τοὺς πόλους διάστημα, καὶ τῶν πόλων τὸν μὲν ἄνω τὸν δὲ κάτω
διαφορὰν γὰρ ἐν τούτοις μόνοις ὁρῶμεν τῶν ἡμισφαιρίων, τῷ μὴ κινεῖσθαι τοὺς πόλους.
Ἅμα δὲ καὶ εἰώθαμεν λέγειν τὰ πλάγια ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ οὐ τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω, ἀλλὰ τὸ παρὰ τοὺς πόλους, ὡς τούτου μήκους ὄντος τὸ γὰρ εἰς τὸ πλάγιόν ἐστι τὸ παρὰ τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω.
Τῶν δὲ πόλων ὁ μὲν ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς φαινόμενος τὸ κάτω μέρος ἐστίν, ὁ δ' ἡμῖν ἄδηλος τὸ ἄνω.
Δεξιὸν γὰρ ἑκάστου λέγομεν, ὅθεν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κατὰ τόπον κινήσεως τοῦ δ' οὐρανοῦ ἀρχὴ τῆς περιφορᾶς, ὅθεν αἱ ἀνατολαὶ τῶν ἄστρων, ὥστε τοῦτ' ἂν εἴη δεξιόν, οὗ δ' αἱ δύσεις, ἀριστερόν. Εἰ οὖν ἄρχεται ἀπὸ τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ δεξιὰ περιφέρεται, ἀνάγκη τὸ ἄνω εἶναι τὸν ἀφανῆ πόλον εἰ γὰρ ἔσται ὁ φανερός, ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ ἔσται ἡ κίνησις, ὅπερ οὔ φαμεν. Δῆλον τοίνυν ὅτι ὁ ἀφανὴς πόλος ἐστὶ τὸ ἄνω.
Καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐκεῖ οἰκοῦντες ἐν τῷ ἄνω εἰσὶν ἡμισφαιρίῳ καὶ πρὸς τοῖς δεξιοῖς, ἡμεῖς δ' ἐν τῷ κάτω καὶ πρὸς τοῖς ἀριστεροῖς, ἐναντίως ἢ ὡς οἱ Πυθαγόρειοι λέγουσιν ἐκεῖνοι γὰρ ἡμᾶς ἄνω ποιοῦσι καὶ ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ μέρει, τοὺς δ' ἐκεῖ κάτω καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀριστερῷ. Συμβαίνει δὲ τοὐναντίον.
Ἀλλὰ τῆς μὲν δευτέρας περιφορᾶς, οἷον τῆς τῶν πλανήτων, ἡμεῖς μὲν ἐν τοῖς ἄνω καὶ ἐν τοῖς δεξιοῖς ἐσμεν, ἐκεῖνοι δὲ ἐν τοῖς κάτω καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἀριστεροῖς ἀνάπαλιν γὰρ τούτοις ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κινήσεώς ἐστι διὰ τὸ ἐναντίας εἶναι τὰς φοράς, ὥστε συμβαίνειν ἡμᾶς μὲν εἶναι πρὸς τῇ ἀρχῇ, ἐκείνους δὲ πρὸς τῷ τέλει.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν κατὰ τὰς δια(286a.) στάσεις τῶν μορίων καὶ τῶν κατὰ τόπον ὡρισμένων τοσαῦτα εἰρήσθω.
313. After determining the question of the positional parts of the heaven according to the opinions of others, the Philosopher here discusses them according to his own opinion. As to this he does three things:
primo ostendit quod huiusmodi differentias oportet esse in caelo;
secundo ostendit secundum quam dimensionem caeli accipiatur sursum et deorsum in ipso, ibi: dico autem longitudinem etc.;
tertio ostendit quae pars in caelo sit sursum et quae deorsum, ibi: polorum autem qui quidem super nos et cetera.
First he shows that such positional differences must be in the heaven;
Secondly, he explains which dimension determines "up" and "down" in the heaven, at 320;
Thirdly, he shows which part of the heaven is up, and which is down, 323.
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum;
secundo excludit quasdam obiectiones, ibi: non oportet enim dubitare et cetera.
First he proves his proposition;
Secondly, he excludes certain objections, at 317.
314. With respect to the first he gives the following argument [236]: It has been previously determined that in things possessing a principle of motion, namely, in living bodies which possess a moving principle within themselves, there are found "such powers," i.e., differences of position according to the respective virtues in the parts, and not merely with respect to us, as in the case of non-living bodies which do not possess within themselves an active principle of motion but a passive one only, as is said in VIII. But the heaven is animated and possesses a principle of motion.
That the heaven is animated he supposes from something proved in VIII, namely, that all mobile beings must be reduced to one first self-mover that possesses its own active principle of motion and not merely its own passive principle, as some mentioned by Simplicius would claim. For they say that Aristotle called the heaven animate not because it had a rational soul but inasmuch as it had a kind of life implanted in its body in such a way, however, that the soul in it is nothing other than the nature of such a body. But that this is false is clearly shown by the words of Aristotle in Metaphysics XII to the effect that the first mover, which is completely immobile, moves the heaven as an object of thought and desire moves something. Consequently, it follows that, according to his opinion, the heaven is according to its soul something that desires and understands. And according to this, the motion of the heaven proceeds from its nature and from its soul: from its nature, indeed, as from a secondary and passive principle, inasmuch, namely, as such a body is apt to be moved in such a way; from its soul, however, as from a primary and active principle of motion.
315. Now in regard to this way of causing motion, it makes little difference whether the heaven is moved by a conjoined spiritual substance called its soul, or by a separated spiritual substance, except that a greater dignity accrues to the heaven if it is considered moved by a conjoined spiritual substance. This last consideration led Plato and Aristotle to posit an animated heaven.
Someone could object, however, that although it is more noble for a body to have a spiritual substance conjoined to it, yet for the spiritual substance it is nobler to be separated from a body. For this reason Plato was led to say that it is for the good of the rational soul to be separated from the body at some time. Now according to this, since the mover is nobler than the moved and since motion depends more on the former, it seems better to say that the substance moving the heaven is separated from the body than to say that the heaven is animated; for this will give greater nobility to the motion of the heaven. Otherwise it would seem, following Plato's opinion, that the soul of the heaven would be in a worse condition than the human soul.
But an answer to this could be that in one sense it is nobler for the human soul to exist outside the body than in the body, namely, to the extent that it moves the body with labor against its nature. But in respect to the natural existence of the soul it is better for the soul to be in the body, because through it the soul attains the perfect existence of its species. Consequently, if there be a spiritual substance whose power is determined to the motion of the heaven, which it moves without labor, as was said above, then for that substance it is nobler to be in such a body than to be separated; because the action is more perfect which is performed through a conjoined instrument than with a separated instrument. But a separated substance whose power is not determined to this effect is absolutely nobler.
Now from the fact that the heaven is animated, he concludes, in keeping with what was said, that it possesses an "up" and "down" as well as "right" and "left."
316. But this seems inappropriate. For he said previously that up and down belong to an animated body on account of growth, but front and behind on account of sense, and right and left on account of local motion. But no one who posits an animated heaven assumes for it either a motion of growth or a motion of sensation. Therefore one should not posit an up and down in the heaven, or a front and behind.
But it must be said that in perfect animals having local motion, these differences are considered not only with respect to growth and sense but also with respect to local motion. For which reason he said previously in one of his arguments that "up" is the originative source of motion, "right" is the terminus "from which," and front is the terminus "to which." But in things that lack local motion and have no right and left, their up and down, front and behind, are based on other motions. Consequently all these dimensions ought to be attributed to the heaven solely on the ground of local motion, as to a thing which is most perfect.
317. Then at [237] he excludes two objections, the first of which is this: The heaven is spherical in shape; consequently all its parts are similar. But the aforesaid differences of position require dissimilarity of parts either in respect to power alone, as in the case of right and left, or in respect to shape as well, as in the case of up and down, front and behind, as was said above. Therefore it does not seem that these differences of position can be attributed to the heaven.
The second objection is that in animals where these various kinds of position are found, one part is moved before the other. But this cannot occur in the heaven, for its parts are always being moved, as he says in VIII. Hence it seems that such positions are not to be attributed to the heaven.
318. Then at [238] he answers these objections, and first the first. He says that this argument should not cause us to doubt our conclusion, but one should rather understand the case with the heaven as though it had a difference between right and left even according to a difference of shape in the parts, but later one should put a sphere around it, not exteriorly as a garment but as a body joined to it naturally and covering it exteriorly. Then what would be thus would in reality possess one power on the right and a different one on the left, although it would not appear to be so differentiated, on account of the similarity of shape which would outwardly appear. In like manner, from the soul of the heaven there are different powers in its several parts, although they are alike in shape. It is on account of this variety of powers that the aforesaid positions are attributed to the heaven.
319. Then at [239] he answers the second objection and says that doubt should not arise from the fact that animals, in which these differences exist, possess a principle [or starting-point] of their motion. For even though the heaven never begins to be moved, yet, because its motion is orderly, it is necessary to consider something in its motion as a starting-point whence its motion would begin if it did begin, or whence its motion would resume, if it should happen to stop.
320. Then at [240] he explains which dimensions of the heaven are considered as up and down. First he proposes what he intends, and says that the length of the heaven is the distance between its poles, namely, the arctic and antarctic, in such a way that one of these poles is up, and the other down.
321. Secondly at [241] he proves this proposition in two ways. First by reasoning. For it is plain that the length of any body is measured along its greatest dimension. Now the greatest dimension of a spherical body is diametric. But the diameter of the heaven is solely the one between the two poles, which are two immovable points of a sphere that never vary, whereas all other points taken are subject to motion. Consequently diameters drawn between any other two points are indeterminate. For this reason it is with respect to the line joining the two poles that the length of the heaven is considered, for inasmuch as these poles are not in motion, they allow us to see a definite difference of hemispheres.
322. Secondly, at [242] he proves the same thing from the way people generally speak. For when we refer to the asides" of the world, we do not mean the poles, which we call "up" and "down," but we mean something beside the poles, so that "east" is one side of the world, and "west" another, while the distance between the poles is the length of the heaven. For we call "side" what is adjoining "up" and "down" on either side, as is evident in man.
But it should be noted that for astronomers, who consider, not the dimensions of the heaven, but more the dimensions of the habitable earth, length is considered with respect to east and west, and width according to the distance from south to north — their reason being that the quantity of habitable earth from east to west is more than double that from pole to 'equator, since this is not fully inhabited.
323. Then at [243] he shows which of the poles is up and which down.
Et primo ostendit hoc quantum ad motum primum;
secundo quantum ad motum planetarum, ibi: sed secundae quidem et cetera.
First he shows this with respect to the first motion;
Secondly, with respect to the motion of the planets, at 329.
As to the first he does three things:
primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo probat quod dixerat, ibi: dextrum enim etc.;
tertio infert conclusionem ex dictis, ibi: et ibi quidem habitantes et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves what he has said, at 324; Thirdly, he draws a conclusion from this, at 328.
He says therefore first [243] that the pole which seems always to be over us is the downward part of the heaven, namely, the arctic pole; but the pole which is always hidden from us and called the antarctic is the part of the heaven referred to as up.
324. Then at [244] he proves what he has said. Now it is manifest in the case of every animal that we call the "right" that which is the originative source of its local motion (on which account the right side of an animal is warmer, in order to be more apt for motion); but the circular motion of the heaven originates from that part whence the stars rise and which is called "east"; consequently the west will be its left. If, therefore, the motion of the heaven begins at the right and circulates back to the right, as though going from the same to the same, then necessarily the pole hidden from us, namely, the antarctic, is referred to as the upper part of the heavens, for if the arctic pole, which is never hidden from us, were the upper side, it would follow that the motion of the heaven would be from left to left. But this is not the way we speak of it.
This will be easier to understand if we imagine a man with his head in the arctic and his feet in the antarctic poles of the heaven. His right hand will be in the west and his left in the east, provided his face is toward the upper hemisphere, i.e., the one visible to us on earth. Therefore, since the motion of the heaven is from east to west, it will follow that it is from the left to the right. On the other hand, if we place his head in the antarctic and his feet in the arctic pole, with his face as before, his right hand will be in the east and his left in the west. Then the motion would begin from the right, as it should. Thus it is clear that the heaven's "up" is the pole which is hidden from us.
325. But there are three objections to this. First it is objected that Aristotle fails to determine what is "front" and what is "behind" in the heaven. But it should be answered that he passed over this as clear from what he has already determined. For an animal's motion, beginning from its right, proceeds forward and not backward. Hence, since the heaven is moved from east to west toward the upper hemisphere (which is evident from the fact that the stars seem to climb after they rise), the consequence is that "front" in the heaven is the upper hemisphere and "behind" the lower hemisphere.
326. In the second place it is objected that, although it is always the same part of the animal that is its right and another same part which is always its left, this does not seem to be observed in the heaven: for the same part of the heaven that was in the east comes to be in the west; consequently, if the east is the right side and the left the west, the same part of the heaven will be the right at one time and the left at another time.
But this is answered by something that Aristotle states in VIII, namely, that the principle which moves the heaven is not moved per accidens as it is in animals. For these powers, according to which the aforesaid positions are attributed to animals, depend on the motive principle. Hence in animals that exist here the "right" power is moved per accidens when the body of the animal is moved. But in the heaven that power is understood to be immovably rigid, even though the parts of the heavenly body are moved. Therefore the "right" of the heaven is always in the east, no matter which single part of the heaven happens to be there. And the same holds for the other powers.
327. In the third place it is objected that east and west seem not to be definite parts of the heaven but to vary according to the horizon in each region. Consequently, if right and left are attributed respectively to the regions of rising and setting, right and left will not be determinate in the heavens according to themselves, as they are in the bodies of animals, but only in relation to us, as is the case with inanimate bodies.
But it should be answered that, due to the immobility of the poles, up and down are said by him to be determinate in the heaven, while right and left are sides in relation to up and down. Therefore Aristotle is here taking rising and setting not in relation to our outlook but in relation to the immobile poles of the world.
328. Then at [245] he concludes in the light of the foregoing to a difference as to the habitation of the earth. He says that since the hidden pole is up, those who live under that pole live in the upper hemisphere and on the right side of the heaven; but we who live on the other side of the earth are in the lower hemisphere and in the left side of the heaven. And this is contrary to the Pythagoreans, who held that we live in the upper direction and in the right side and the others in the downward direction and in the left side, while according to the foregoing the contrary happens.
Aristotle here seems to take "hemisphere's as that which results from dividing the heaven through the equinoxial circle [i.e., the equator] in a plane equidistant from the poles. From this it is plain that Aristotle is here saying that some men live or can live on the other side of the equator in a direction opposite to us. Now, if people are living or should live on the two quarters of earth that are distinguished from us by a circle intersecting the equator at right angles, passing through the equatorial poles, those people would be distinct from both of us, namely, who live above and below the equator, as people living on the rear of the heaven are distinct from the inhabitants of the fore part of the heaven, inasmuch as the motion of the heaven reaches them later, so that stars setting for us are rising for them and returning to the principle of motion, which is the right, when they are setting for them. But since the right and left are equally distant on the side from the up and down, it seems improper to say that we who live under the arctic pole inhabit the nether and left side, while the others inhabit the upper and right side.
To this it can be said that Aristotle spoke with respect to Greece in which he lived. Greece is indeed to the left inasmuch as it faces west and it is nether inasmuch as it is under the arctic pole. But since Aristotle seems here to speak in general for all the inhabitants in our habitat, it is better to say that he is speaking after the manner of Pythagoreans who referred right, up, and front, to the same thing, and the opposites to the same thing. According to this, Pythagoras considered that we live in the upper and right part. Or this could be according to perspective, because the arctic pole is directly above us, or better, looking to motions of the planets, as will be immediately evident..
329. Then at [246] he shows how these positions are distinguished according to the motions of the planets. And he says that with respect to the second circular motion, namely, that of the planets, we conversely, are up and to the right, while the people on the other side of the earth are down and to the left. For the principle of planetary motion is contrary (for they begin to be moved from the west). The reason for this difference is that the two motions are "contrary," i.e., diverse, since contrariety, strictly speaking, is not found in a circular motion, as was explained in Book I. According to this, then, we live where the planet's motion begins and they live where it ends. Therefore those people seem to be stronger according to permanency, which is in the first motion; but we according to diversity of generation and corruption, which depend on the second motion, as will be explained later.
Finally, at [247] he summarizes and says that we have said this much about the parts of the heaven, which are determined according to the dimensions of the heaven and according to place, but not according to the material parts of the heaven, as was said above.
2-4
The reason why there are in the heaven, several spheres moved with a circular motion
3
Ἐπεὶ δ' οὐκ ἔστιν ἐναντία κίνησις ἡ κύκλῳ τῇ κύκλῳ, σκεπτέον διὰ τί πλείους εἰσὶ φοραί,
καίπερ πόρρωθεν πειρωμένοις ποιεῖσθαι τὴν ζήτησιν, πόρρω δ' οὐχ οὕτω τῷ τόπῳ, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον τῷ τῶν συμβεβηκότων αὐτοῖς περὶ πάμπαν ὀλίγων ἔχειν αἴσθησιν. Ὅμως δὲ λέγωμεν.
Ἡ δ' αἰτία περὶ αὐτῶν ἐνθένδε ληπτέα. Ἕκαστόν ἐστιν, ὧν ἐστιν ἔργον, ἕνεκα τοῦ ἔργου. Θεοῦ δ' ἐνέργεια ἀθανασία τοῦτο δ' ἐστὶ ζωὴ ἀΐδιος. ὥστ' ἀνάγκη τῷ θεῷ κίνησιν ἀΐδιον ὑπάρχειν. Ἐπεὶ δ' ὁ οὐρανὸς τοιοῦτος (σῶμα γάρ τι θεῖον), διὰ τοῦτο ἔχει τὸ ἐγκύκλιον σῶμα, ὃ φύσει κινεῖται κύκλῳ ἀεί.
Διὰ τί οὖν οὐχ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τοιοῦτον; ὅτι ἀνάγκη μένειν τι τοῦ σώματος τοῦ φερομένου κύκλῳ, τὸ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, τούτου δ' οὐθὲν οἷόν τε μένειν μόριον, οὔθ' ὅλως οὔτ' ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου. Καὶ γὰρ ἂν ἡ κατὰ φύσιν κίνησις ἦν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον φύσει δὲ κύκλῳ κινεῖται οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἀΐδιος ἡ κίνησις οὐθὲν γὰρ παρὰ φύσιν ἀΐδιον. Ὕστερον δὲ τὸ παρὰ φύσιν τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν, καὶ ἔκστασίς τίς ἐστιν ἐν τῇ γενέσει τὸ παρὰ φύσιν τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν. Ἀνάγκη τοίνυν γῆν εἶναι τοῦτο γὰρ ἠρεμεῖ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου. Νῦν μὲν οὖν ὑποκείσθω τοῦτο, ὕστερον δὲ δειχθήσεται περὶ αὐτοῦ.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἰ γῆν, ἀνάγκη καὶ πῦρ εἶναι
τῶν γὰρ ἐναντίων εἰ θάτερον φύσει, ἀνάγκη καὶ θάτερον εἶναι φύσει, ἐάν περ ᾖ ἐναντίον, καὶ εἶναί τινα αὐτοῦ φύσιν ἡ γὰρ αὐτὴ ὕλη τῶν ἐναντίων,
καὶ τῆς στερήσεως πρότερον ἡ κατάφασις (λέγω δ' οἷον τὸ θερμὸν τοῦ ψυχροῦ), ἡ δ' ἠρεμία καὶ τὸ βαρὺ λέγεται κατὰ στέρησιν κουφότητος καὶ κινήσεως.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴπερ ἔστι πῦρ καὶ γῆ, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὰ μεταξὺ αὐτῶν εἶναι σώματα ἐναντίωσιν γὰρ ἔχει ἕκαστον τῶν στοιχείσων πρὸς ἕκαστον. Ὑποκείσθω δὲ καὶ τοῦτο νῦν, ὕστερον δὲ πειρατέον δεῖξαι.
Τούτων δ' ὑπαρχόντων φανερὸν ὅτι ἀνάγκη γένεσιν εἶναι διὰ τὸ μηδὲν οἷόν τ' αὐτῶν εἶναι ἀΐδιον πάσχει γὰρ καὶ ποιεῖ τἀναντία ὑπ' ἀλλήλων, καὶ φθαρτικὰ ἀλλήλων ἐστίν.
Ἔτι δ' οὐκ εὔλογον εἶναί τι κινητὸν ἀΐδιον, οὗ μὴ ἐνδέχεται εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν τὴν κίνησιν ἀΐδιον (286b.) τούτων δ' ἔστι κίνησις. Ὅτι μὲν τοίνυν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι γένεσιν, ἐκ τούτων δῆλον.
Εἰ δὲ γένεσιν, ἀναγκαῖον καὶ ἄλλην εἶναι φοράν, ἢ μίαν ἢ πλείους κατὰ γὰρ τὴν τοῦ ὅλου ὡσαύτως ἀναγκαῖον ἔχειν τὰ στοιχεῖα τῶν σωμάτων πρὸς ἄλληλα. Λεχθήσεται δὲ καὶ περὶ τούτου ἐν τοῖς ἑπομένοις σαφέστερον.
Νῦν δὲ τοσοῦτόν ἐστι δῆλον, διὰ τίνα αἰτίαν πλείω τὰ ἐγκύκλιά ἐστι σώματα, ὅτι ἀνάγκη γένεσιν εἶναι, γένεσιν δ', εἴπερ καὶ πῦρ, τοῦτο δὲ καὶ τἆλλα, εἴπερ καὶ γῆν ταύτην δ' ὅτι ἀνάγκη μένειν τι ἀεί, εἴπερ καὶ κινεῖσθαί τι ἀεί.
330. After discussing the diversity of positional parts of the heaven, the Philosopher here settles the question of the diversity of parts based on the order of the spheres, and explains why there is not just one circularly-moved sphere in the heaven but several of them. Concerning this he does three things:
primo ponit dubitationem;
secundo ostendit difficultatem solutionis, ibi: et quidem a longe tentantibus etc.;
tertio incipit solvere, ibi: unumquodque est quorum est opus et cetera.
First he states the problem;
Secondly, he explains why this problem is difficult to solve, at 332; Thirdly, he begins to solve it, at 333.
331. In regard to the first it should be kept in mind that if circular motions were contrary, it would not be difficult to see why there are many circular motions in the heaven and not just one. For since contraries differ specifically, inasmuch as contrariety is a difference with respect to form, as is said in X, the universe would not be perfect in its species if there were one contrary motion and not another, for example, if there were downward motion and not upward motion. Since, therefore, it has been previously proved that one circular motion is not contrary to another, we should inquire diligently as to the necessity of having many and diverse circular motions in the heaven. This question quite logically follows our previous discussion where it was said that up and down, and other such are assigned to the heaven in one way with respect to the first motion, and in another way with respect to the second.
332. Then at [249] he points out the difficulty of solving this question. For that is difficult for men to consider when the question is "from afar," i.e., concerning the heavenly bodies far removed from us, since concerning things distant from us we cannot have a certain judgment. However, heavenly bodies are not only removed "by so much," i.e., according to the quantity of local distance, but much more by the fact that few of their accidents fall on our sense observation, whereas it is connatural for us to pass from the knowledge of "accidents," i.e., sensible things, to an understanding of a thing's nature. He states this distance to be much more than the local distance. For if we should consider the local distance, there is some proportion between the distance separating us from a heavenly body and that separating us from various lower bodies, e.g., a stone or some wood, and both distances are in one genus, but the accidents of heavenly bodies have a different notion and are wholly improportionate to the accidents of lower bodies. Yet, in spite of the difficulty, let us inquire into the "why" of the variety of heavenly motions. And the cause of this variety will be derived from what we are about to say.
333. Then at [250] he assigns the cause of the aforesaid.
Et primo assignat eam per viam compositionis, procedendo a primo ad ultimum quod quaeritur;
secundo per viam resolutionis, procedendo ab ultimo quod quaeritur usque ad primum, ibi: nunc autem tantum manifestum est et cetera.
First he assigns it by the method of composition [synthesis], going from what is first to what is last in the order of inquiry;
Secondly, by that of resolution [analysis], proceeding from what is last sought to what is first, at 343.
With respect to the first [250] he gives the following argument: If the heaven is a certain divine body, its motion must be eternal and circular; if its motion is eternal and circular, earth must exist; if earth exists, fire must exist; if fire and earth exist, there must be intermediate bodies; if such bodies exist, there must be generation; if there is generation there must be several motions in the heaven. Therefore, if the heaven is a perpetual and divine body, there must be a number of motions in the heaven, and consequently a number of mobile bodies.
334. Then he explains each of these conditionals in order: and first of all the first one. With respect to this it must be remembered that the Platonists posited one supreme God Who is the very essence of goodness and unity, under Whom they put a superior order of separated intellects, which we are accustomed to call "intelligences"; under this order they placed the order of souls, and under this the order of bodies. They said, therefore, that among the separated intellects the first and superior ones are called "divine" intellects on account of their likeness and nearness to God; but the others are not 'divine, because of their distance from God. Similarly, among souls the supreme are intellective, while the lowest are not intellectual but irrational. The supreme and nobler bodies were said to be animate; the others inanimate. Furthermore, they said that the supreme souls, because they depend on the divine intelligences, were divine souls; and the supreme bodies, because united to divine souls, divine bodies.
Now, Aristotle uses this manner of speaking here. He says that anything which possesses its on operation exists for its operation, for everything seeks its perfection as its end; but operation is the ultimate perfection of a thing (or at least the product of the operation is, in the case of those things in which there is some product beyond the operation, as is said in Ethics I). For it is said in II that form is first act, and operation second act as the perfection and end of the thing acting. And this is true both in material and in spiritual things (such as habits existing in the soul), and in natural as well as artificial things. And he adds the expression, "which produce a work" to take care of things contrary to nature, such as monstrosities, which produce no work as such, but suffer a defect in their operational power, as is plain in those born lame or blind. For lameness is not an end intended by nature, for the sake of which it makes an animal to be born lame; such a thing happens outside the intent of nature, by reason of a defect in the natural principles.
He adds further that "God's operation is immortality," where "God" refers not only to the first cause of all things but to all things called "divine" according to the custom of the Platonists and other gentiles.
But immortality appears not to be an operation but rather a difference or an impassibility. To this it must be answered that immortality designates unfailing life. Now life refers not only to the existence of the living being, but to its operation as well, as understanding is a certain living and as are sensing and other such, as is plain from II and Ethics IX. This point is brought out when he says further that "phis," namely, immortality, "is eternal life" — for which reason he does not say that God's operation is indestructibility, which refers only to the eternity of His existence but he says it is "immortality," in order to include eternity of action. Hence he concludes that if any mobile being is called "God" in this sense, its motion is eternal; just as, if some immobile substance is called "God," its operation is eternal without motion. If this were not so, then such a thing, eternal in existence but lacking an eternal operation (since things exist in order to act) would exist without a purpose.
Therefore, since the heaven is such as to have been called "God" by the ancients, not indeed because it is the supreme God, but because its body is something divine by virtue of being ungenerated and indestructible, as was previously explained; consequently it possesses a circular body in order that it may be moved forever and in a circular way. For it has been shown in VIII that only circular motion can be eternal, since there is no motion over an infinite straight line, as was also proved in Book I, and motion over a finite straight line cannot be infinite except by reflexion, which involves interposing states of rest, as was proved in VIII.
It should be noted that Aristotle here proves the eternity of the motion of the heaven from the eternity of its body; but in VIII he did not use this way, because he had not yet proved the eternity of the heaven. But because the heavenly body is related to the motion of the heaven as its matter and subject, whereas the first mover, namely, God, is the agent making it actually exist, then from the side of the heaven it can be preyed able to be moved forever, but on the part of the divine will depends whether it is to be actually moved forever or not forever.
335. Then at [251] he proves the second conditional, namely, that if the heaven is moved with an eternal and circular motion, earth must exist. He says, therefore: If it is true that the heaven is a divine body which is eternally and circularly moved, why then does not the entire heaven, i.e., the entire world, have such a body, i.e., why does not each part of the world have the nature of heavenly body? To this he answers that there has to be something permanent and at rest in the middle [center] of the body which is in circular motion — for it is plain that every circular motion goes around something at rest. And this something must be a body: for the thing I am calling the middle [center] is not something subsistent, but an accident of a bodily thing, if it is the center of a body. Now such a thing cannot be a part of this, i.e., of the heavenly body, which has already been described as divine, although it must be a part of the whole world.
This he proves in two ways. First, because no part of a heavenly body generally can be at rest everywhere, since to the heavenly body belongs eternal motion, as was shown. But the center about which there is circular motion must be stationary. Secondly, because taken specifically it cannot rest in the center. For if it rested there naturally, it would be naturally moved to the center (for each thing is naturally moved to the place in which it rests naturally, as was explained in Book I). But no part of the heavenly body is naturally moved to the center, because its natural motion is for it to be moved circularly, and, as was explained in Book I, no simple body can possess two natural motions. Hence it remains that the rest of a part of the heavenly body in the center would be against its nature.
From this it follows that the motion of the heaven could not be eternal: because it cannot take place unless there is something at rest in the center, and if the state of rest of that of it which was in the center were violent, it would follow that it [the rest] could not be eternal, and consequently neither could the heaven's motion be eternal. For nothing contrary to nature is eternal — since what is contrary to nature is subsequent to what is according to nature. This is plain from the fact that in the generation of anything, whatever is outside nature is a kind of "excess," i.e., a corruption and defect of that which is according to nature (for example, monstrosities are certain corruptions and defects of a natural thing). But corruptions and defect are naturally posterior, just as privation is subsequent to possession. Now it is not possible that something naturally prior should never exist, and that what is naturally apt to be later, should always exist. Consequently, it is plain that what is violent cannot be eternal. But that which is at rest in the center, is eternally at rest, just as the heaven is eternally in motion. What is left, therefore, is that there must be something naturally at rest in the center, if the motion of the heaven is circular and eternal. But it is the earth that is naturally at rest in the center, as will be proved later. Therefore, if the heaven is moved circularly and eternally, then earth must exist. And this is what was proposed to be proved.
336. Then at [252] he proves the third conditional, namely, if there is earth, there is fire.
Et primo proponit quod intendit, dicens quod adhuc, si necesse est terram esse, necesse est et ignem esse.
Secundo ibi: contrariorum enim etc., probat hoc duabus rationibus.
First he proposes what he intends, and says that it is also true that if earth must exist, then fire must exist.
Secondly, he proves this with two arguments.
The first is this. If one contrary exists in nature, the other also must exist in nature. He proves this as follows: If there be any contrary, there must be a matter subject to it, as is plain from I; but the matter of contraries is the same, as is shown in the same place. Consequently, the matter of one contrary must be in potency to the other. Now this potency would be in vain if that other contrary could not exist in nature. But since nothing is in vain in nature, then, if one contrary exists, so must the other. Now fire and earth are contraries, for they are the maximum distance apart, so far as contrariety of position is concerned, inasmuch as one is the heaviest of all things and the other the lightest (although in respect of other qualities, fire is especially contrary to water, as the hottest to the coldest — however, we are now speaking of bodies from the viewpoint of position, from which aspect they are parts of the whole universe). Consequently, if there is earth, there must also be fire.
337. The second argument is at [254]. With respect to it, it should be considered that contraries are always related according to "worse" and "better," as is said in I, in such a way, namely, that one of them is a privation and a defect in comparison to the other, as are, for example, cold in relation to hot, and black in relation to white. Now it is evident that "affirmation," i.e., whatever is said positively as something complete, is prior to what is described in terms of privation and defect, as hot is prior to cold. But rest and heaviness, which are attributed to earth, are stated in terms of the privation of lightness and of motion, which are attributed to fire. Therefore, fire is naturally prior to earth. For if the subsequent is posited, so must be the prior. Consequently, if earth exists, fire too must exist.
One should also note that Plato in the Timaeus proved that earth and fire exist on the ground that bodies have to be visible by virtue of fire and palpable by virtue of earth.
338. Then at [255] he proves the fourth conditional, namely, that if fire and earth exist, so do the intermediate elements. For each of the elements is in some respect contrary to each of the other three, as earth is contrary to fire on the basis of heavy and light and cold and hot, and is contrary to air according to a contrariety of hot and cold as well as of wet and dry. And he says that this is to be made clear below, especially in On Generation II. Hence it remains that if two of the elements exist, the other two must also exist, it having been proved that if one contrary exists, the other must.
Plato, however, used proportional numbers to prove that if there are extreme elements there must be intermediate elements. For between two numbers that are cubes there must be two other numbers according to a continuous proportion: for example, the cube of 2 is 8 and the cube of 3 is 27 and between these cubes the numbers 18 and 12 fall as proportional means, so that all can be arranged to form a ratio of 3 to 2.
339. Then at [256] he proves the fifth conditional, namely, that if such bodies exist, there must be generation and corruption. This he proves with two arguments. The first of these is that contraries act upon one another and are acted upon by one another, and corrupt each other, as will be proved in the book . But the aforesaid bodies are contrary to one another, as has been said. Therefore they mutually corrupt one another. Consequently, generation and corruption must exist.
340. The second argument is at [257] and is as follows: It is unreasonable to assume that there exists an eternal body whose motion cannot be eternal, because motion is the operation of a mobile body and each thing is for the sake of its operation, as has been said. But the above-mentioned bodies, namely, the elements, have straight motions which cannot be eternal, as was proved in VIII. Therefore they can not be eternal but have to be generable and corruptible. Consequently, it is necessary that generation and corruption exist.
341. Then at [258] he proves the sixth conditional, namely, that, if there is generation, there has to be besides the first circular motion some other circular motion, either one or several. For since the first circular motion (which is that of the supreme sphere revolving the whole heaven from east to west) is uniform, it would not cause a diversity of dispositions in lower bodies. Consequently, the elements of bodies and other bodies would always retain the same disposition toward each other and there would be no generation and corruption. This will be explained more in detail later, namely, in II. Hence there must exist another motion, through the oblique [i.e., zodiacal] circle, to act as the proper cause of generation and corruption through the distance of the planets from us or their nearness to us, just as the first motion causes permanence and eternity in things.
342. Here Alexander asks if, supposing the motion of the heaven to cease, but the contrary elements to remain, they would corrupt one another? And, on the ground of their contrariety, he answers affirmatively; but not as though there would be reciprocal generation and corruption as now occurs when cold things are generated from hot and vice versa. That would happen would be what was posited by Heraclitus who said that at some time everything would become fire. For the present orderly mutual interplay of generation and corruption is traceable to the virtue of the heavens.
But it is better to say that if the motion of the heavens were to cease, so too would the motion of all lower bodies, as Simplicius said. For the powers of the lower bodies are as matter and instruments in relation to the heavenly powers, and hence do not move unless moved.
343. Then at [259] he summarizes the same argument in the resolutary [i.e., analytic] order. And he says that the reason why there must be several circularly moved bodies is now plain, namely, because there must be generation. But generation must exist, if fire and other bodies exist; these must exist" if earth exists; earth must exist, because there has to be something eternally at rest in the center, if something undergoing circular motion exists.
2-5
Spherical shape of the heaven shown from fact that it is the first of figures
Σχῆμα δ' ἀνάγκη σφαιροειδὲς ἔχειν τὸν οὐρανόν τοῦτο γὰρ οἰκειότατόν τε τῇ οὐσίᾳ καὶ τῇ φύσει πρῶτον.
Εἴπωμεν δὲ καθόλου περὶ τῶν σχημάτων, τὸ ποῖόν ἐστι πρῶτον, καὶ ἐν ἐπιπέδοις καὶ ἐν στερεοῖς.
Ἅπαν δὴ σχῆμα ἐπίπεδον ἢ εὐθύγραμμόν ἐστιν ἢ περιφερόγραμμον. Καὶ τὸ μὲν εὐθύγραμμον ὑπὸ πλειόνων περιέχεται γραμμῶν, τὸ δὲ περιφερόγραμμον ὑπὸ μιᾶς. Ἐπεὶ δὲ πρότερον [τῇ φύσει] ἐν ἑκάστῳ γένει τὸ ἓν τῶν πολλῶν καὶ τὸ ἁπλοῦν τῶν συνθέτων, πρῶτον ἂν εἴη τῶν ἐπιπέδων σχημάτων ὁ κύκλος.
Ἔτι δὲ εἴπερ τέλειόν ἐστιν οὗ μηδὲν ἔξω τῶν αὐτοῦ λαβεῖν δυνατόν, ὥσπερ ὥρισται πρότερον, καὶ τῇ μὲν εὐθείᾳ πρόσθεσίς ἐστιν ἀεί, τῇ δὲ τοῦ κύκλου οὐδέποτε, φανερὸν ὅτι τέλειος ἂν εἴη ἡ περιέχουσα τὸν κύκλον ὥστ' εἰ τὸ τέλειον πρότερον τοῦ ἀτελοῦς, καὶ διὰ ταῦτα πρότερον ἂν εἴη τῶν σχημάτων ὁ κύκλος.
Ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ ἡ σφαῖρα τῶν στερεῶν μόνη γὰρ περιέχεται μιᾷ ἐπιφανείᾳ, τὰ δ' εὐθύγραμμα πλείοσιν ὡς γὰρ ἔχει ὁ κύκλος ἐν τοῖς ἐπιπέδοις, οὕτως ἡ σφαῖρα ἐν τοῖς στερεοῖς.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ οἱ διαιροῦντες εἰς ἐπίπεδα καὶ ἐξ ἐπιπέδων τὰ σώματα γεννῶντες μεμαρτυρηκέναι φαίνονται τούτοις μόνην γὰρ τῶν στερεῶν οὐ διαιροῦσι τὴν σφαῖραν ὡς οὐκ ἔχουσαν πλείους ἐπιφανείας ἢ μίαν ἡ γὰρ εἰς τὰ ἐπίπεδα διαίρεσις οὐχ ὡς ἂν τέμνων τις εἰς τὰ μέρη διέλοι τὸ ὅλον, τοῦτον διαιρεῖται τὸν τρόπον, ἀλλ' ὡς εἰς ἕτερα τῷ εἴδει. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν πρῶτόν ἐστιν ἡ σφαῖρα τῶν στερεῶν σχημάτων, δῆλον.
Ἔστι δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὸν ἀριθμὸν τὴν τάξιν ἀποδιδοῦσιν οὕτω τιθεμένοις εὐλογώτατον, τὸν μὲν κύκλον κατὰ τὸ ἕν, τὸ δὲ τρίγωνον (287a.) κατὰ τὴν δυάδα, ἐπειδὴ ὀρθαὶ δύο. Ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἓν κατὰ τὸ τρίγωνον, ὁ κύκλος οὐκέτι ἔσται σχῆμα.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον σχῆμα τοῦ πρώτου σώματος, πρῶτον δὲ σῶμα τὸ ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ περιφορᾷ, σφαιροειδὲς ἂν εἴη τὸ τὴν κύκλῳ περιφερόμενον φοράν. Καὶ τὸ συνεχὲς ἄρα ἐκείνῳ τὸ γὰρ τῷ σφαιροειδεῖ συνεχὲς σφαιροειδές.
Ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὰ πρὸς τὸ μέσον τούτων τὰ γὰρ ὑπὸ τοῦ σφαιροειδοῦς περιεχόμενα καὶ ἁπτόμενα ὅλα σφαιροειδῆ ἀνάγκη εἶναι τὰ δὲ κάτω τῆς τῶν πλανήτων ἅπτεται τῆς ἐπάνω σφαίρας. Ὥστε σφαιροειδὴς ἂν εἴη πᾶσα πάντα γὰρ ἅπτεται καὶ συνεχῆ ἐστι ταῖς σφαίραις.
344. Having discussed the eternity of the heaven and the diversity of its parts, the Philosopher here determines the question of the figure of the heaven.
Et primo ostendit caelum esse sphaericae figurae;
secundo ostendit quod haec figura perfecte in ipso existit, ibi: quod quidem igitur sphaericus est et cetera.
First he shows that the heaven is spherical in shape;
Secondly, that this shape exists in it perfectly (L. 6).
Concerning the first he does two things:
primo ostendit caelum esse sphaericae figurae, rationibus sumptis ex parte ipsius caeli;
secundo ratione sumpta ex parte inferiorum corporum, ibi: sumet autem utique quis et cetera.
First he proves with arguments based on the heaven itself that it is spherical in shape;
Secondly, with an argument based on the lower bodies (L. 6).
About the first he does two things:
Primo proponit quod intendit: et dicit quod necesse est caelum habere sphaericam figuram, tum quia ista figura est maxime propria, idest conveniens, corpori caelesti; tum etiam quia est prima figurarum, et naturaliter, sicut perfectum est prius imperfecto, et substantia, idest secundum rationem, sicut unum est prius multis.
Secundo ibi: dicamus autem universaliter etc., probat propositum.
First he proposes what he intends [260] and says that the heaven has to be spherical in shape both because such a shape is most "proper," i.e., appropriate, to the heavenly body, and because it is the first of all figures not only "by nature," as the perfect is naturally prior to the imperfect, but "by substance," i.e., according to its notion, as one is prior to many.
Secondly, he proves his proposition.
Et primo ostendit caelum esse sphaericae figurae, ex hoc quod haec figura est prima figurarum;
secundo ex hoc quod est convenientissima caelo, ibi: adhuc autem quoniam videtur et cetera.
First he shows that the heaven is spherical in shape because this figure is the first of figures;
Secondly, because it is most appropriate to the heaven (L. 6).
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quod supremum caelum est sphaericae figurae;
secundo ostendit quod etiam alia caelestia corpora inferiora sunt sphaericae figurae, ibi: et continuum igitur illi et cetera.
First he shows that the supreme heaven has a spherical shape;
Secondly, that the other heavenly bodies also are spherical in shape, at 352.
345. With respect to the first he gives the following argument: The first figure should belong to the first body. But among bodily figures, the spherical is first. Therefore the heaven which is the first body is spherical in shape.
Huius autem rationis primo probat minorem;
secundo, posita maiori, infert conclusionem, ibi: quoniam autem prima quidem et cetera.
In regard to this argument he first proves the minor premis;
Secondly, the major having been laid down, he draws the conclusion, at 351.
As to the first he does two things:
primo probat figuram sphaericam esse primam corporalium figurarum, per rationes;
secundo per opiniones aliorum, ibi: adhuc autem dividentes et cetera.
First he proves with arguments that the spherical shape is the first of all bodily shapes;
Secondly, by appealing to the opinions of others, at 349.
Regarding the first he does two things: First he proposes what he intends [261] and says that we must determine universally which is the first of all figures both in the realm of plane figures, i.e., surfaces, and in the realm of solid, i.e., bodily, figures. A plane figure is the shape of a plane and a bodily figure is the shape of a body.
346. Secondly, he proves his proposition.
et primo quantum ad figuras superficiales;
secundo quantum ad corporales, ibi: similiter autem et sphaera et cetera.
First with respect to plane figures;
Secondly, with respect to bodily figures, at 348.
With respect to the first he gives two arguments, the first of which [262] is this: Every plane figure is either rectilinear, as in the case of a triangle or square, or it is curved, as in the case of a circle. But every rectilinear figure is enclosed by a plurality of lines and not by just one (for a single straight line can be extended only in one direction, whereas the nature of a plane figure is that it be entirely closed in every direction). On the other hand, a circular figure is enclosed by but one single line extended in all directions. Now, in every genus, unity is prior to multiplicity, and simplicity to composition. Hence it remains that in the realm of plane figures, the circular is first.
347. The second argument is given at [263], namely, that the perfect is by definition that outside of which there exists nothing that could befit it; for example, a man is said to be perfect, if he lacks nothing that pertains to man. And this has been settled previously both in III and in the beginning of this book. Now, we observe that, so far as the nature of a straight line is concerned, addition can always be made to it — although for some other reason it might be impossible to do so, as, for example, to add anything to the diameter of the world. And this is plain if the straight line is finite. Accordingly, every finite straight line is imperfect. But it is plain that an infinite line, too, is imperfect, for it lacks an end, which it should have. On the other hand, no addition can be made to a circular line, because its end meets its beginning. Consequently, the line encompassing a circular body is perfect.
Now the perfect is prior to the imperfect, absolutely speaking, both by nature and in point of time. But in one and the same thing, the perfect is prior by nature but the imperfect is prior in point of time — for example, a man in point of time is a boy prior to being a perfect man; yet the perfect man is prior by nature, because this is what nature intends. Absolutely speaking, even in point of time the perfect is prior to the imperfect, because a boy is generated by some man. From this it is plain that the circle, too, is the first among plane figures.
348. Then at [264] he shows which is the first shape among bodily figures. And he says that in like manner the sphere is the first among solid, i.e., bodily, figures, since the spherical figure alone is bounded by just one surface which everywhere surrounds the spherical body. Rectilinear bodily figures, on the other hand, are bounded by several planes — as a cubic body by six, and a triangular pyramid by four. Therefore, as the circle is to planes, so the sphere is to solids, i.e., bodies.
349. Then at [265] he shows his proposition by appealing to the opinions of others. And he gives two such opinions. The first is held by those who resolve bodies into surfaces, and produce bodies from surfaces. For the only body that does not resolve into a number of surfaces is the sphere, because it is bounded by just one surface, while other figures are resolved into many surfaces, as, for example, a pyramid is into four triangular surfaces. However, such a division of bodies into surfaces is not according to the manner by which a body is divided into its bodily parts; for a sphere also is thus divided into its parts. But the division under discussion is one that, so to speak, separates into things that are different in kind from the whole that is divided. He concludes, therefore, that it is clear that the sphere is the first among solid figures.
350. The second opinion is given at [266]. And he says that some have assigned the order of figures according to the species of numbers, by adapting the figures to numbers. And he says that, according to this, it is most reasonable for the circle to be adapted to unity, on the ground that it is the first and simplest of shapes; but that triangle be adapted to 2, because its angles equal two right angles. Now, if unity were aligned with triangle, it would follow that the circle, which is naturally prior to the triangle, would be outside the genus of figures, supposing triangle to be the first of shapes.
351. Then at [267], having proved the minor premis, he syllogises to his proposition. And he says that, since the first figure is due to the first body, and the first body is that which is on the outer periphery of the whole world, it follows that such a body, which is moved circularly, will in itself be spherical.
352. Then at [268] he shows that even the lower heavenly bodies are spherical. And he says that from the fact that the first body is spherical, it follows that the next body "continuous" to it, i.e., immediately joined to it, is spherical: for that body which is "continuous" to, i.e., immediately joined to, the spherical body, must itself be spherical. Now this is true if the first body is spherical not only on its convex, but also on its concave, side. Since the very same nature of first body is in both these sides, it must have the same figure on both sides.
The same argument holds for the other bodies which are in the center of these and contained by them, namely, they too have to be spherical. For those bodies that are contained and touched by the body that is spherical according to its convex side must also be spherical on their convex side, and consequently spherical according to their concave side, if they are of one nature. Since, therefore, the spheres of the lower planets touch the higher sphere, it follows that the whole of "what is carried," i.e., the whole body which is circularly moved, has a spherical shape, for all those bodies of the heavenly spheres mutually touch and are "continuous," i.e., in immediate contact one with the other. And there is no intermediate body that fills up voids between spheres, as some say — for it would follow that those bodies would be idle, since they would not have a circular motion.
2-6
The heavens must be spherical, because this shape is most fitting
Ἔτι δὲ ἐπεὶ φαίνεται καὶ ὑπόκειται κύκλῳ περιφέρεσθαι τὸ πᾶν, δέδεικται δ' ὅτι τῆς ἐσχάτης περιφορᾶς οὔτε κενόν ἐστιν ἔξωθεν οὔτε τόπος, ἀνάγκη καὶ διὰ ταῦτα σφαιροειδῆ εἶναι αὐτόν. Εἰ γὰρ ἔσται εὐθύγραμμος, συμβήσεται καὶ τόπον εἶναι ἔξω καὶ σῶμα καὶ κενόν. Κύκλῳ γὰρ στρεφόμενον τὸ εὐθέγραμμον οὐδέποτε τὴν αὐτὴν ἐφέξει χώραν, ἀλλ' ὅπου πρότερον ἦν σῶμα, νῦν οὐκ ἔσται, καὶ οὗ νῦν οὐκ ἔστι, πάλιν ἔσται, διὰ τὴν παράλλαξιν τῶν γωνιῶν. Ὁμοίως δὲ κἂν εἴ τι ἄλλο σχῆμα γένοιτο μὴ ἴσας ἔχον τὰς ἐκ τοῦ μέσου γραμμάς, οἷον φακοειδὲς ἢ ᾠοειδές ἐν ἅπασι γὰρ συμβήσεται καὶ τόπον ἔξω καὶ κενὸν εἶναι τῆς φορᾶς, διὰ τὸ μὴ τὴν αὐτὴν χώραν κατέχειν τὸ ὅλον.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ τῶν μὲν κινήσεων τὸ μέτρον ἡ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ φορὰ διὰ τὸ εἶναι μόνη συνεχὴς καὶ ὁμαλὴς καὶ ἀΐδιος, ἐν ἑκάστῳ δὲ μέτρον τὸ ἐλάχιστον, ἐλαχίστη δὲ κίνησις ἡ ταχίστη, δῆλον ὅτι ταχίστη ἂν εἴη πασῶν τῶν κινήσεων ἡ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κίνησις. Ἀλλὰ μὴν τῶν ἀφ' αὑτοῦ ἐφ' αὑτὸ ἐλαχίστη ἐστὶν ἡ τοῦ κύκλου γραμμή κατὰ δὲ τὴν ἐλαχίστην ταχίστη ἡ κίνησις ὥστ' εἰ ὁ οὐρανὸς κύκλῳ τε φέρεται καὶ τάχιστα κινεῖται, σφαιροειδῆ αὐτὸν ἀνάγκη εἶναι.
Λάβοι δ' ἄν τις καὶ ἐκ τῶν περὶ τὸ μέσον ἱδρυμένων σωμάτων ταύτην τὴν πίστιν. Εἰ γὰρ τὸ μὲν ὕδωρ ἐστὶ περὶ τὴν γῆν, ὁ δ' ἀὴρ περὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, τὸ δὲ πῦρ περὶ τὸν ἀέρα, καὶ τὰ ἄνω σώματα κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον (συνεχῆ μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν, ἅπτεται δὲ (287b.) τούτων), ἡ δὲ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐπιφάνεια σφαιροειδής ἐστιν, τὸ δὲ τῷ σφαιροειδεῖ συνεχὲς ἢ κείμενον περὶ τὸ σφαιροειδὲς καὶ αὐτὸ τοιοῦτον ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι ὥστε κἂν διὰ τοῦτο φανερὸν εἴη ὅτι σφαιροειδής ἐστιν ὁ οὐρανός.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι γε ἡ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐπιφάνεια τοιαύτη φανερόν, ὑπόθεσιν λαμβάνουσιν ὅτι πέφυκεν ἀεὶ συρρεῖν τὸ ὕδωρ εἰς τὸ κοιλότερον κοιλότερον δέ ἐστι τὸ τοῦ κέντρου ἐγγύτερον. Ἤχθωσαν οὖν ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου ἡ ΑΒ καὶ ἡ ΑΓ, καὶ ἐπεζεύχθω ἐφ' ἧς ΒΓ. Ἡ οὖν ἀχθεῖσα ἐπὶ τὴν βάσιν, ἐφ' ἧς ΑΔ, ἐλάττων ἐστὶ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου κοιλότερος ἄρα ὁ τόπος. Ὥστε περιρρεύσεται τὸ ὕδωρ, ἕως ἂν ἰσασθῇ. Ἴση δὲ ταῖς ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου ἡ ΑΕ. Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη πρὸς ταῖς ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου εἶναι τὸ ὕδωρ τότε γὰρ ἠρεμήσει. Ἡ δὲ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου ἁπτομένη περιφερής σφαιροειδὴς ἄρα ἡ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐπιφάνεια, ἐφ' ἧς ΒΕΓ.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν σφαιροειδής ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος, δῆλον ἐκ τούτων, καὶ ὅτι κατ' ἀκρίβειαν ἔντορνος οὕτως ὥστε μηθὲν μήτε χειρόκμητον ἔχειν παραπλησίως μήτ' ἄλλο μηθὲν τῶν ἡμῖν ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς φαινομένων. Ἐξ ὧν γὰρ τὴν σύστασιν εἴληφεν, οὐδὲν οὕτω δυνατὸν ὁμαλότητα δέξασθαι καὶ ἀκρίβειαν ὡς ἡ τοῦ πέριξ σώματος φύσις δῆλον γὰρ ὡς ἀνάλογον ἔχει, καθάπερ ὕδωρ πρὸς γῆν, καὶ τὰ πλεῖον ἀεὶ ἀπέχοντα τῶν συστοίχων.
353. After showing that the heaven has a spherical shape on the ground that such a shape is the first of all figures, the Philosopher shows the same thing on the ground that this shape is most suitable to the heaven.
Et primo ex eo quod est propria caelo quantum ad hoc quod est universaliter continens omnia corpora;
secundo quantum ad hoc quod motus eius est universalis mensura omnium motuum, ibi: adhuc autem si quidem et cetera.
First from the fact that it is suitable to the heaven on account of its being the universal container of all bodies;
Secondly, on account of its motion being the universal measure of all motions, at 356.
354. With respect to the first [269] he puts forward two suppositions previously made clear. The first is that the heaven is moved circularly —which is both evident to sense and is supposed from the proofs in Book I. The second supposition is taken from what was proved in Book I, in the chapter on the unity of the world, namely, that beyond the final circulation of the outermost sphere there is neither place nor void.
From these suppositions he necessarily concludes that the body of the heaven is spherical. For if it were not it would have to be either entirely rectilinear, or only partially circular without being a perfect sphere. But if the body of the heaven should be truly rectilinear — for example, a cube or a pyramid — it follows that beyond the heaven there would exist a place and a body and a void.
That this consequence follows he shows on the ground that a rectilinear body in circular motion will not remain in the same place with respect to all its parts. As a matter of fact it will follow that where one part of it first was, no part of it now is; and again where no part of it now is, a part of it will later be. This is true on account of the interchange of corners. For in any body rectilinear in shape there must be certain bodily corners which extend beyond the other parts of the body, since a line drawn from the center of such a body [to a corner] is greater than a line drawn to some point on the plane surface of the body. Accordingly as the body turns, the line ending at the corner will reach the place previously occupied by the line drawn to a point between the corners and will occupy more space, and thus there will be a body where one was not before. The subsequent line [i.e., the line to the plane surface], arriving at the place formerly occupied by the corner will not be able to occupy the whole place formerly occupied by the corner, so that where there is now no body, there previously was body. Thus, therefore, outside the place in which the heaven now is, there can be existing a body, i.e., some part of the same heaven. Consequently there is a place there, i.e., the receptacle of a body. Likewise there is a void, which is nothing more than a place not filled with the body of which it is capable.
355. But because there are certain figures that have no angles and yet are not spheres, he subsequently shows the same thing for these figures. And he says that a similar impossibility follows if we should attribute to the heaven some other shape, such that not all the lines from its center would be equal, as is proper to a sphere. And he says that there are two such figures, namely, lentil-shaped and oval-shaped. Now in an oval figure the line designating the length is greater than that designating the depth; indeed, an oval figure can be conceived as the result of two round pyramids joined at their bases.
But the shape of a lentil is as though made in the fashion of a wheel whose width is greater than its thickness. Now in all such figures, it comes about in some way that beyond the ultimate motion of the outermost sphere a place and a void will exist, because of the fact that the whole is not always retaining the same place according to all its parts. This happens if one takes the poles about which the oval-shaped body is revolved on the part of its lesser diameter; for then the greater diameters must describe a circular motion and consequently one head of the moved oval will occupy a place in which previously no part of it was. But if, however, the length of the oval should be taken in its motion as the fixed axis, the revolutions would always take place according to circular parts, so that one part would succeed another. The same thing is also to be imagined with respect to the lentil-shaped figure; and likewise for a cylindrical figure and for any other such figure.
Hence it is plain that only a spherical shape is such that, no matter how it be moved, no part will occupy some new place [not previously occupied by some other part]; rather one part of it always succeeds another part of it. Hence such a shape is most suitable to the heaven.
356. Then at [270] he proves the same with another argument, based on the measurement of motions. First he lays down the supposition that the motion of the heaven is the measure of all motions, as was maintained in IV. And he gives the reason for this, namely, that only the motion of the heaven is continuous and regular and eternal; for in no other way could the quantity of other motions be certified through the motion of the heaven — and this is to measure them. For if the motion of the heaven were not continuous, but interrupted, there would not be equality of time between the measuring motion and the measured motion. If the motion were not regular, but now faster and now slower, it would not have within itself a determined certitude by which the quantity of other motions could be certified. If it were not eternal, there could not be measured through it motions that existed before and which will exist later, following the opinion of those who hold motion to be eternal by nature.
With these suppositions in mind, he argues to his point in the following manner: It is plain that whatever is the least in each genus is the measure of that genus, as is had in X, as a tone in melody, and the ounce among weights, and unity among numbers. It is also plain that the least motion is the one which is most rapid, i.e., the one having the least time, which is the measure of motion. Therefore the swiftest of all motions is the motion of the heaven. Here the swiftest of motions means the one which goes through its course sooner as to shortness of time, although there is not supposed equality on the part of the magnitude traversed by the motion, as is supposed in IV, where it is stated that the swifter is that which in a lesser time traverse an equal, or even greater, distance. That is why he now adds here that the swiftest motion is considered with respect to the least magnitude. Now among all lines that return to their beginning the circle is the smallest — since in rectilinear figures there are angles such that lines drawn to them from the center are greater and consequently the corners of such figures jut out farther than a circular line. Accordingly, the motion of the heaven, which moves circularly, as though from the same to the same, and with the swiftest motion, traverses a circle in its motion. Therefore the heaven must be spherical.
357. Then at [271] he shows that the heaven has a spherical shape by using an argument taken from the lower bodies.
Et primo ponit rationem;
secundo probat quod supposuerat, ibi: sed et quod aquae superficies et cetera.
First he presents his argument;
Secondly, he proves what he had supposed, at 359.
He says therefore first [271] that someone can Unde ab inferiori probari potest ascendendo usque ad supremum caelum, quod caelum sit sphaericum. come to hold that the heaven is spherical by considering the lower bodies that are located about the center of the heaven. For water is about the earth, although it does not entirely cover the earth (because of the need for the generation and preservation of life, specially that of animals and plants) and air surrounds the water, and fire surrounds the air. And according to the same procedure the upper bodies surround the lower bodies up to the outermost heaven. Now such bodies are not continuous as though forming one body, for then each of them would not be spherical in shape but rather the whole (for a part of a continuous body is not shaped in act). But these bodies touch one another without any other body existing between them, and without any empty space between them as Democritus laid down. Now, the surface of one of these lower bodies being spherical, consequently the body "continuous" to it, i.e., conjoined without interpolation to the spherical containing [contained?] body, or which moves around the spherical contained body, must be spherical. Hence beginning with the lower body, it can be proved, by ascending to the outermost heaven, that the heaven is spherical.
358. But it seems that this proof lacks necessity. For if it is assumed that water has a spherical shape, it will clearly follow that air on the concave side will be spherical, but this does not necessarily seem to follow for its convex side.
To this Alexander responds that from this demonstration it is proved that the bodies of the world are spherical as to their concave side, just as from the previous argument, which proceeded from the outermost heaven proceeding downward, it was proved that these bodies are spherical on their convex side. Hence according to this, neither of these arguments is complete without the other, but from the two arguments one demonstration results.
But this seems to be contrary to Aristotle's intention, who presents each as a separate argument, as though each was complete in itself. And therefore it should be said, as Simplicius asserts, that this demonstration sufficiently proves that the bodies of the world are spherical both with respect to their concave and their convex. For since the convex surface of water is spherical, it is plain that the concave side of air is spherical. That the convex side of air is spherical is plain in the same way that it is plain for the water, namely, because all its parts equally concur to the same place. Accordingly it is also plain that the concave side of fire is also spherical. But that the convex surface of fire is spherical can be plain both from the fact that it is continuous with the sphere of the moon (for which reason it revolves together with it, as is clearly plain from the movement of a comet which moves from east to west in accordance with the motion of the heaven), as well as from the fact that the parts of fire are from all directions moved equally to their proper place.
359. Then at [272] he proves what he had supposed, namely, that the convex side of water is spherical; for later on he will prove it for earth. In order to show this, he premises two suppositions. The first of these is that, since water is naturally heavy, it always naturally flows to a place that is more concave, or lower. The other supposition is that a thing is more concave and lower according as it is nearer to the center of the world.
On these suppositions let A be the center of the world, and B and G two designated points on the surface of the water that are equidistant from the center, and let there be drawn two lines AB and AG. Join the two points B and G so as to form the line BG, which will be a straight line, if the water's surface is flat. Let there be marked a point D in the line BG, which is the base of a triangle, and draw the line AD from the center. This line must be less than either of the other two lines AB and AG drawn from the center. For if it were equal, then all three lines proceeding from the same point would be equal, and thus the line BDG, passing through their extremities, would be circular, as is plain from Euclid III. But this would be against our assumption that the line BG is a straight line. Therefore, supposing that the line AD is shorter than the others, it will follow that the point D will be less distant from the center, and consequently its place will be deeper or lower. Hence, it will follow according to the foregoing supposition that the water in point G and in point B will flow to point D until the middle place is equated with the other two extremes. Let AE be the whole line equated to the two extremes from the meeting of the waters. Therefore the water must be along all the equal lines coming from the center; for water rests only when all the lines are equal. But the line which touches three equal lines proceeding from the center is circular, as is proved in Euclid III. It follows therefore that the surface of the water, on which the line BEG is described, is a spherical surface — and this is what he intended to demonstrate.
360. Then at [237] he concludes from the foregoing that the world is manifestly spherical both on account of the first body which contains the entire world and also on account of the other bodies contained by it. But among us there are spherical bodies which nevertheless do not have a perfectly spherical shape; for example, the very body of the earth is said to be spherical, even though it has the great elevations of mountains and the depressions of valleys. Likewise, in our artificial bodies that are spherical, we find bumps and depressions, in spite of which such artifacts are said to be spherical in shape, since such additions or subtractions are reckoned as though nothing according to sense.
Therefore lest anyone believe that the same thing happens in the heavenly body, Aristotle adds that it is "turned with diligence," i.e., lacks all bumps and hollows, as do bodies carefully turned on a lathe, so much so that nothing chirocmeton, i.e., made by hand, is comparable to a heavenly body in this respect, nor any other natural body that our eyes behold. For the things from which such bodies are constituted cannot obtain, through the action of art or lower nature, that regularity, i.e., uniformity, and diligence for perfect spherical shape which a heavenly body possesses in virtue of its natural spherical shape.
This he proves through the proportion of the parts of the world to one another. For it is plain that according to the same proportion by which water exceeds earth,. the containing elements always exceed the bodies contained — or even in greater proportion. But water, which contains the earth, does not have the swellings and depressions on its surface that earth has; rather its surface is more regular than the earth's surface. Similarly, the air's surface must be more regular than water s. Hence it follows that the surface of the outermost heavenly body is supremely regular, so that in it there is not even the slightest addition or subtraction.
2-7
Why the circular motion of the heaven is in one direction rather than another
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἔστι διχῶς ἐπὶ τοῦ κύκλου κινηθῆναι, οἷον ἀπὸ τοῦ Α τὴν μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ Β τὴν δ' ἐπὶ τὸ Γ, ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐναντίαι αὗται, πρότερον εἴρηται.
Ἀλλ' εἰ μηδὲν ὡς ἔτυχε μηδ' ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου ἐνδέχεται ἐν τοῖς ἀϊδίοις εἶναι, ὁ δ' οὐρανὸς ἀΐδιος καὶ ἡ κύκλῳ φορά, διὰ τίνα ποτ' αἰτίαν ἐπὶ θάτερα φέρεται, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἐπὶ θάτερα;
ἀνάγκη γὰρ καὶ τοῦτο ἢ ἀρχὴν εἶναι ἢ εἶναι αὐτοῦ ἀρχήν.
Ἴσως μὲν οὖν τὸ περὶ ἐνίων ἀποφαίνεσθαί τι πειρᾶσθαι καὶ τὸ περὶ πάντων καὶ τὸ παριέναι μηθὲν τάχ' ἂν δόξειεν εἶναι σημεῖον ἢ πολλῆς εὐηθείας ἢ πολλῆς προθυμίας. Οὐ μὴν δίκαιόν γε πᾶσιν ὁμοίως ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἀλλ' ὁρᾶν δεῖ τὴν αἰτίαν τοῦ λέγειν τίς ἐστιν, ἔτι δὲ πῶς ἔχων τῷ πιστεύειν, πότερον ἀνθρωπίνως ἢ καρτερώτερον. Τὰς μὲν οὖν ἀκριβεστέρας ἀνάγκας, ὅταν (288a.) τις ἐπιτύχῃ, τότε χάριν ἔχειν δεῖ τοῖς εὑρίσκουσι, νῦν δὲ τὸ φαινόμενον ῥητέον.
Εἰ γὰρ ἡ φύσις ἀεὶ ποιεῖ τῶν ἐνδεχομένων τὸ βέλτιστον, ἔστι δὲ καθάπερ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς εὐθείας φορῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν ἄνω τόπον τιμιωτέρα (θειότερος γὰρ τόπος ὁ ἄνω τοῦ κάτω), τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἡ εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν τῆς εἰς τοὔπισθεν, ἔχει, εἴπερ καὶ τὸ δεξιὸν καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν, καθάπερ ἐλέχθη πρότερον, (καὶ μαρτυρεῖ δ' ἡ ῥηθεῖσα ἀπορία ὅτι ἔχει) τὸ πρότερον καὶ ὕστερον αὕτη γὰρ ἡ αἰτία λύει τὴν ἀπορίαν. Εἰ γὰρ ἔχει ὡς ἐνδέχεται βέλτιστα, αὕτη ἂν εἴη αἰτία καὶ τοῦ εἰρημένου βέλτιστον γὰρ κινεῖσθαι ἁπλῆν τε κίνησιν καὶ ἄπαυστον, καὶ ταύτην ἐπὶ τὸ τιμιώτερον.
361. After determining as to the parts of the heaven and its shape, the Philosopher here decides the question of its motion.
Et primo determinat de modo motus;
secundo determinat de uniformitate motus caelestis, ibi: de motu autem ipsius et cetera.
First he discusses the manner of its motion;
Secondly, the uniformity of its motion (L. 8).
Regarding the first he does three things:
primo ponit quaestionem;
secundo ostendit difficultatem quaestionis, ibi: forte quidem igitur etc.;
tertio proponit solutionem, ibi: nunc autem quod videtur et cetera.
First he raises the question;
Secondly, he shows the difficulty of the question, at 364;
Thirdly, he proposes a solution, at 365.
About the first he does three things:
First he mentions certain things that give rise to the question. One of these is that there are two ways in which a thing could be moved through a circle. For if we let A be a point on a circle and draw a diameter from A, and let B be a point on the upper semicircle, and G a point on the lower, there will then be two possible ways for something to move over this circle: in one way, something could go from A to B; in another, from A to G.
Another thing he mentions is that those two motions are not contrary, for it has been shown in Book I that two circular motions are not contrary. For if they were contrary, they would have to belong to the natures of contrary mobile things, so that one motion would be attributed to one mobile and the other to the contrary mobile — because, as has been said, if one of two contraries exists in nature, so must the other.
362. Secondly, at [275] he raises the question. For it is plain from the foregoing that in things that are eternal nothing happens contingently or fortuitously, because happenings due to chance do not occur always or even nearly always.. But it has been said above that the heaven is eternal and also its circular motion. Hence it is reasonable to ask why it is that the heaven is moved in one direction rather than in the other; for example, from the east in the direction of the upper hemisphere and not of the lower.
363. Thirdly, at [276] he shows how such a cause must be assigned. For in the previous accounts he assigned a cause of celestial events in two ways. First, he showed that there have to be various motions in the heaven in order that generation and corruption be possible; secondly, he showed that the figure of the heaven has to be round by assuming a prior principle, namely, that the first shape is appropriate to the first body. Thus the primacy of the body is the reason why it has the first shape. And therefore he says here that if we must assign the reason why the heaven is moved as it is and not in some other way, that reason must be assigned either on the ground that such a type of motion is the principle of some effect, or rather that this type of motion depends on some prior principle.
This can also be understood in another way. For he had said that eternal things cannot be due to chance. Yet not all eternal things have a cause, for there is an eternal thing which has no cause but is itself the first cause of other things. Since, therefore, on the grounds of the eternity of the heaven and of its motion, he had arrived at the question concerning the cause why the motion of the heaven is in one direction rather than another, lest the question appear foolish or useless, he adds that it is necessary that the manner of the heaven's movement be either the first principle of all motions (which is impossible, because all motion has a movent cause) or else there must be said to be some other principle of its motion. Consequently it is reasonable to ask why it is that the heaven is moved in this direction rather than some other.
364. Then at [277] he shows the difficulty of this question. And he says that the very desire to attentively set forth difficult and occult things and give their cause, and to inquire into all the aspects, without omitting anything, will perhaps be seen as a sign either of a deep-rooted stupidity, causing one to be unable to distinguish between what is easy and what is difficult, or else as a sign of "great promptitude," i.e., of great presumption, causing one not to know the measure of his ability with respect to the search for truth. And although some deserve rebuke on this point, it is not a just thing to condemn all investigators indiscriminately. Rather we should first have regard to two things.
First we must look for the motive which induces a man to speak of such things: Is he doing it out of love for the truth or in order to show off his wisdom? Secondly, we must consider how one is in assenting to the things he asserts: Does he have a weak certitude about them like the common run of mankind, or does he know them more firmly, i.e., above the general run? When, therefore, a person can attain to a knowledge of necessary causes with greater certitude than the general run of man, he who finds such necessary reasons deserves our thanks rather than a rebuke.
365. Then at [278] he solves the question he raised. And he says that if thanks should be rendered to those who discover more certain necessary things, as to the present question it is enough to say how the matter seems to us, even though it is not so certain. He says, therefore, that among things that come to be produced, nature always does what is best, as moved and directed by the first principle, which is the essence of goodness, Now, we observe that a local motion is more noble to the extent that it tends toward a nobler direction — for the species of a motion is determined by its terminus. Thus with regard to straight local motions, a local motion toward a higher place is more honorable and more noble than one to a nether place, since the place which is above is of more worth than one which is down.
This fact is also plain with regard to man: for the head, which is above, is nobler than the feet, which are down. Likewise, the front of a man is nobler than the back, and the right than the left, as we have said above, and as is plain also with respect to animals.
Therefore the question under discussion testifies to the fact that in the heaven there is a before and an after, i.e., a front and a back, which things he did not mention previously. Now it is this, namely, the distinction between front and back in the heaven, that solves the question at hand. For if the motion of the heaven is the best possible, as has been maintained, then the cause in the aforesaid question is this: It is best for the heaven to be moved with a "simple" motion, i.e., always toward the same direction and one "without any interruption," i.e., without the interpolation of rest (which would have to occur if the heaven were now moving in this direction and now in that direction); furthermore, it is best that it be moved toward the nobler part of the direction, and the front part is the more noble. And that is why the heaven is moved from the east toward its "front," i.e., toward the upper hemisphere and not toward the lower, which is the "back" of the heaven.
366. But this argument does not seem appropriate. For above he had explained the distinction of these parts in the heaven from the beginning of motion, namely, from the fact that the motion of the heaven seems to begin from one direction and not from another. But here he assigns the reason why the heaven is moved the way it is and not some other way, from the distinction of the parts of the heaven. Consequently, he seems to be arguing in a circle.
To this it should be answered that the distinction among the parts of the heaven is the reason why the motion of the heaven begins whence it does and not elsewhere; and not conversely. But the fact that the motion does begin whence it does and not somewhere else is a sign of the distinction of the parts of the heaven. Now the cause of the distinction of these parts is the power of the soul moving the heaven, or of some intellectual substance differently applied to the different parts of the heaven. There is nothing wrong, when asking "Whether something is," should one prove with a sign; but when one is dealing with the "reason why something is," the sign must be reduced to the cause. For example, we might prove that the heart is moved by the motion of the pulsating vein; but if we should ask what is the cause of the motion of the pulsating vein, it will be said that it is because of the heart's movement. In like manner, Aristotle, from the fact that the motion of the heaven begins at a certain part, proved, as though from a sign, that there is such-and-such a distinction of parts in the heaven. Nevertheless he reduces the beginning of the motion to the difference in the parts of the heaven, as to the cause.
Now the front and rear of the heaven are distinguished, not naturally, namely, in terms of some specific part of the heavenly body (since one and the same part of the heavenly body which is now in the upper hemisphere will later be in the lower), but in terms of position, just as was stated above concerning the difference between the right and left [sides of the heaven].
2-8
The regularity, or uniform velocity, of the heaven's motion shown a two arguments
Περὶ δὲ τῆς κινήσεως αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ὁμαλής ἐστι καὶ οὐκ ἀνώμαλος, ἐφεξῆς ἂν εἴη τῶν εἰρημένων διελθεῖν.
Λέγω δὲ τοῦτο περὶ τοῦ πρώτου οὐρανοῦ καὶ περὶ τῆς πρώτης φορᾶς ἐν γὰρ τοῖς ὑποκάτω πλείους ἤδη αἱ φοραὶ συνεληλύθασιν εἰς ἕν.
Εἰ γὰρ ἀνωμάλως κινήσεται, δῆλον ὅτι ἐπίτασις ἔσται καὶ ἀκμὴ καὶ ἄνεσις τῆς φορᾶς ἅπασα γὰρ ἡ ἀνώμαλος φορὰ καὶ ἄνεσιν ἔχει καὶ ἐπίτασιν καὶ ἀκμήν. Ἀκμὴ δ' ἐστὶν ἢ ὅθεν φέρεται ἢ οἷ ἢ ἀνὰ μέσον, οἷον ἴσως τοῖς μὲν κατὰ φύσιν οἷ φέρονται, τοῖς δὲ παρὰ φύσιν ὅθεν, τοῖς δὲ ῥιπτουμένοις ἀνὰ μέσον. Τῆς δὲ κύκλῳ φορᾶς οὐκ ἔστιν οὔτε ὅθεν οὔτε οἷ οὔτε μέσον οὔτε γὰρ ἀρχὴ οὔτε πέρας οὔτε μέσον ἐστὶν αὐτῆς ἁπλῶς τῷ τε γὰρ χρόνῳ ἀΐδιος καὶ τῷ μήκει συνηγμένη καὶ ἄκλαστος ὥστ' εἰ μή ἐστιν ἀκμὴ αὐτοῦ τῆς φορᾶς, οὐδ' ἂν ἀνωμαλία εἴη ἡ γὰρ ἀνωμαλία γίγνεται διὰ τὴν ἄνεσιν καὶ ἐπίτασιν.
Ἔτι δ' ἐπεὶ πᾶν τὸ κινούμενον ὑπό τινος κινεῖται, ἀνάγκη τὴν ἀνωμαλίαν γίγνεσθαι τῆς κινήσεως ἢ διὰ τὸ κινοῦν ἢ διὰ τὸ κινούμενον ἢ δι' ἄμφω εἴτε γὰρ τὸ κινοῦν μὴ τῇ αὐτῇ δυνάμει κινοῖ, εἴτε τὸ κινούμενον ἀλλοιοῖτο καὶ μὴ διαμένοι τὸ αὐτό, εἴτε ἄμφω μεταβάλλοι, οὐθὲν κωλύει ἀνωμάλως κινεῖσθαι τὸ κινούμενον. Οὐθὲν δὲ τούτων δυνατὸν περὶ τὸν οὐρανὸν γενέσθαι τὸ μὲν γὰρ κινούμενον δέδεικται ὅτι πρῶτον καὶ ἁπλοῦν καὶ (288b.) ἀγένητον καὶ ἄφθαρτον καὶ ὅλως ἀμετάβλητον, τὸ δὲ κινοῦν πολὺ μᾶλλον εὔλογον εἶναι τοιοῦτον τὸ γὰρ πρῶτον τοῦ πρώτου καὶ τὸ ἁπλοῦν τοῦ ἁπλοῦ καὶ τὸ ἄφθαρτον καὶ ἀγένητον τοῦ ἀφθάρτου καὶ ἀγενήτου κινητικόν. Ἐπεὶ οὖν τὸ κινούμενον οὐ μεταβάλλει σῶμα ὄν, οὐδ' ἂν τὸ κινοῦν μεταβάλλοι ἀσώματον ὄν. Ὥστε καὶ τὴν φορὰν ἀδύνατον ἀνώμαλον εἶναι.
367. After assigning the reason why the heaven is moved toward one direction rather than the other, the Philosopher here discusses the uniformity of the heaven's motion.
Et primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo probat propositum, ibi: si enim irregulariter movebitur et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he proves his proposition, at 369.
About the first he does two things:
First he proposes what he intends [279], and says that after the fore-going we must "cover," i.e., say something briefly about, the motion of the heaven and show that it is "regular," i.e., that it always has a uniform velocity, and is never irregular so as to be at one time slower and at another swifter. And this is reasonable: for this motion is the rule and measure of all other motions. Hence no irregularity or inequality should appear in it.
368. Secondly, at [280] he explains what he had said. And he says that he intends here to speak of the "first heaven," i.e., the outermost sphere and of the "first carrying," i.e., of the diurnal motion by which the whole heaven is revolved, though the motion of the first mobile, from east to west. Now he speaks of this motion in particular because there is in it no irregularity either in fact or in appearance. But "in those things below," i.e., in the motion of the planets, several motions concur to move one body, either according to different shifting and revolving spheres, as the astronomers of Aristotle's time said, as is plain in XII, or according to the motions of eccentrics and epicycles according to modern astronomers. From this variety of motions is caused the irregularity which appears as to the planets, according to which they seem at one time to be moved with a forward motion, at another with a retrograde, and at still another to be at rest — although in fact no motion of the heaven is irregular. Now, the arguments which he will here adduce apply not only to the motion of the first heaven which is simple and hence gives no appearance of irregularity, but also to the motions of the planets, in which there is apparent irregularity due to the concurrence of many motions.
369. Then at [281] he proves his proposition with four arguments. The first is taken from the very form of circular motion, and proceeds thus: If the first heaven were moved in an irregular manner there would obviously have to be "intension," i.e., an increase of velocity, and "power," i.e., a maximum velocity, and "remission," i.e., a decrease of velocity. For every irregular motion possesses all three. This is not in the sense that these three are found in each and every irregular or unequal motion, but in the sense that in any motion two of them are found. Thus "power" [a maximum] and "intension" [an increase] are found, as they are found in the natural motion of heavy and light bodies, since such motion is always increasing in velocity up to the end, when it is at its swiftest; on the other hand, when such bodies are subjected to a motion contrary to their nature, there is "power" [a maximum] and "remission" [a decrease], because in the beginning such a motion is swiftest but its velocity is continually decreased until at last the whole motion is exhausted. Thus the word "every" is taken collectively in the sense that these three things are found in all motions that are irregular but not all in each one.
370. Then he shows where the maximum speed is found in an irregular motion. And he says that the "power" of a motion, i.e.., its maximum speed, is found either "whence it is brought forth," at the terminus a am, or "whither it is borne," i.e., at the , or near the middle. Thus, in things that are being naturally moved with a straight motion the greatest velocity is toward the terminus toward which they are borne, since a natural motion is intensified at the end, as was had in Book I; while in things that are moved contrary to nature, the greatest velocity is found "whence," i.e., toward the , since a violent motion is intense in the beginning and slackens at the end, as was had in Book I. But in things projected, the maximum velocity is found near the middle.
371. Now there is a question about what the Philosopher here calls "things projected." For things that are projected are moved either according to a natural motion, as when a stone is thrown downward, in which case it is seen that the motion is increased at the end, or they are moved with compulsion, as when a stone is thrown upward, in which case its motion must be most intense at the beginning, and not in the middle.
But Simplicius says that by "things projected" the Philosopher here means the bodies of animals, whose soul does not move them directly upward or downward but, as it were, laterally, after the manner of an arrow and other projectiles, and that is why Aristotle here calls them things projected. Now it is plain [Simplicius continues], that in the case of the motions of animals, the maximum velocity is found neither in the beginning, when animals in a sense gradually depute their members to motion, or at the end, when their members are now tired, but near the middle, when they are in the very onrush of their motion.
However, this seems to be a forced explanation. For this reason, Alexander says that "middle" here should refer to the place, and not to the time. For the motion of an arrow and of other things similarly projected is neither upward nor downward, but in what is intermediate to both these, and it is in this intermediate area that the maximum velocity of these motions is reached.
But we cay say that even if we take "middle" as referring to time, such projectiles still move more swiftly near the middle. For the motion of such projectiles is caused from the impulsion of the deferent medium which more easily receives the impression of the mover than does the heavy body that is projected, as is plain in VIII. Consequently, after much air has now been set in motion, the motion of projection is swifter in the middle than at the beginning, when still only little air was being set in motion, or at the end, when the impulsion of the one projecting has already begun to fade. And a sign of this is that such projectiles do not strike with as much force an object which is entirely near or which is very remote as they do one which is at a mediate distance.
372. Thus it is plain, therefore, that the maximum velocity of any irregular motion is either at the beginning, or in the middle, or at the end. But these three are not to be found in the circular movement of the heavenly body — neither with respect to time (since it is eternal according to his opinion) nor with respect to "length," i.e., with respect to the shape of the place, which is along a circular line "drawn around," i.e., as though always returning circularly to itself, and "unbreakable," i.e., not divided in act so as to allow an actual beginning and an end to be designated in it. Therefore in the revolution of the heaven there is no "power," i.e., maximum velocity, discernible at any part, and, as a consequence, no irregularity, which is due increase and remission.
373. He gives at [282] the second argument which is taken at once on the part of the mover and mobile. For it has been shown in VII and VIII that whatever is moved is moved by some movent. Consequently, if there is irregularity in a motion, it must be due either to the movent, or to the thing moved, or to both. For if the movent does not move always and with equal power, but sometimes with more and sometimes with less, the motion will be sometimes slower, sometimes swifter. For the velocity of a motion results from the fact that the power of the movent, on account of its size, greatly dominates the mobile. And similarly, if the body being subjected to motion, by virtue of some alteration, does not maintain the same state, it will not be at all times equally subject to the power of the movent, and so there will not be an equal speed of motion. Finally, if both are modified, namely, the movent and the mobile, the motion could be irregular.
But none of these possibilities can be verified with regard to the heaven. For it has been shown above that the mobile body here involved is first and simple, since it is moved by a first and simple motion; moreover, that it is ungenerated, indestructible and utterly unchangeable {i.e., with a change causing a variance in substance or strength). Now there is all the more reason for the mover of such a body to be of such a condition. For since the mover is more powerful than the moved, if the body which is moved is a primary and simple body and subject neither to generation nor corruption, so much the more so will its mover be. It was also shown in VIII that the mover of the heaven is incorporeal and without any magnitude. If then the heaven, which is a body, is not changed in the state of its substance and strength, much less will its mover, which is incorporeal, be changed. From this it is plain that it is impossible for the motion of the heaven to be irregular.
2-9
Two other arguments, proving no irregularity in the motion of the heaven
Καὶ γὰρ εἰ γίνεται ἀνώμαλος, ἤτοι ὅλη μεταβάλλει καὶ ὁτὲ μὲν γίνεται θάττων ὁτὲ δὲ βραδυτέρα πάλιν, ἢ τὰ μέρη αὐτῆς. Τὰ μὲν οὖν μέρη ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνώμαλα, φανερόν ἤδη γὰρ ἂν ἐγεγόνει διάστασις τῶν ἄστρων ἐν τῷ ἀπείρῳ χρόνῳ, τοῦ μὲν θᾶττον κινουμένου τοῦ δὲ βραδύτερον. Οὐ φαίνεται δ' οὐθὲν ἄλλως ἔχον τοῖς διαστήμασιν. Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τὴν ὅλην ἐγχωρεῖ μεταβάλλειν ἡ γὰρ ἄνεσις ἑκάστου γίνεται δι' ἀδυναμίαν, ἡ δ' ἀδυναμία παρὰ φύσιν καὶ γὰρ αἱ ἐν τοῖς ζῴοις ἀδυναμίαι πᾶσαι παρὰ φύσιν εἰσίν, οἷον γῆρας καὶ φθίσις. Ὅλη γὰρ ἴσως ἡ σύστασις τῶν ζῴων ἐκ τοιούτων συνέστηκεν ἃ διαφέρει τοῖς οἰκείοις τόποις οὐθὲν γὰρ τῶν μερῶν ἔχει τὴν αὑτοῦ χώραν. Εἰ οὖν ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις μή ἐστι τὸ παρὰ φύσιν (ἁπλᾶ γὰρ καὶ ἄμικτα καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκείᾳ χώρᾳ, καὶ οὐθὲν αὐτοῖς ἐναντίον), οὐδ' ἂν ἀδυναμία εἴη, ὥστ' οὐδ' ἄνεσις οὐδ' ἐπίτασις εἰ γὰρ ἐπίτασις, καὶ ἄνεσις.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἄλογον ἄπειρον χρόνον ἀδύνατον εἶναι τὸ κινοῦν, καὶ πάλιν ἄλλον ἄπειρον δυνατόν οὐθὲν γὰρ φαίνεται ὂν ἄπειρον χρόνον παρὰ φύσιν (ἡ δ' ἀδυναμία παρὰ φύσιν), οὐδὲ τὸν ἴσον χρόνον παρὰ φύσιν καὶ κατὰ φύσιν, οὐδ' ὅλως δυνατὸν καὶ ἀδύνατον ἀνάγκη δ', εἰ ἀνίησιν ἡ κίνησις, ἄπειρον ἀνιέναι χρόνον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἐπιτείνειν ἀεὶ ἢ πάλιν ἀνίενται δυνατόν ἄπειρος γὰρ ἂν εἴη καὶ ἀόριστος ἡ κίνησις, ἅπασαν δέ φαμεν ἔκ τινος εἴς τι εἶναι καὶ ὡρισμένην.
Ἔτι δ' εἴ τις λάβοι εἶναί τινα χρόνον ἐλάχιστον, οὗ οὐκ ἐνδέχεται ἐν ἐλάττονι κινηθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν (ὥσπερ γὰρ οὐδὲ κιθαρίσαι οὐδὲ βαδίσαι ἐν ὁτῳοῦν χρόνῳ δυνατόν, ἀλλ' ἔστιν ἑκάστης πράξεως ὡρισμένος ὁ ἐλάχιστος χρόνος κατὰ τὸ μὴ ὑπερβάλλειν, οὕτως οὐδὲ κινηθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν (289a.) ἐν ὁτῳοῦν χρόνῳ δυνατόν) εἰ οὖν τοῦτ' ἀληθές, οὐκ ἂν εἴη ἀεὶ ἐπίτασις τῆς φορᾶς (εἰ δὲ μὴ ἐπίτασις, οὐδ' ἄνεσις ὁμοίως γὰρ ἄμφω καὶ θάτερον), εἴπερ τῷ αὐτῷ τε ἐπιτείνει τάχει ἢ μείζονι, καὶ ἄπειρον χρόνον.
Λείπεται δὴ λέγειν ἐναλλὰξ εἶναι τῇ κινήσει τὸ θᾶττον καὶ τὸ βραδύτερον τοῦτο δὲ παντελῶς ἄλογον καὶ πλάσματι ὅμοιον. Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὸ μὴ λανθάνειν ἐπὶ τούτων εὐλογώτερον εὐαισθητότερα γὰρ τὰ παρ' ἄλληλα τιθέμενα.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν εἷς τε μόνος ἐστὶν ὁ οὐρανός, καὶ οὗτος ἀγένητος καὶ ἀΐδιος, ἔτι δὲ κινούμενος ὁμαλῶς, ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον ἡμῖν εἰρήσθω.
374. Here the Philosopher gives the third argument which is taken solely from the viewpoint of the mobile [283]. And he says that if the motion of the heaven were executed irregularly this would be either in such a way that the entire change of the heaven would vary in such a way as to be now slower, now swifter, or else parts of it would vary. The phrase "entire change" refers to the motion of the whole highest sphere, while "parts" of the change refers to the motions of the parts of the heaven.
But that the parts of the supreme sphere are not moved irregularly so that one part of the heaven moves now swifter and now slower, he shows on the supposition that the sphere of the fixed stars is the supreme sphere. For in his [Aristotle's] time it had not yet been discovered that the fixed stars, in addition to the diurnal motion of the heaven, had a motion of their own [the precession of the equinox]. And therefore he attributes the first motion, namely, the diurnal motion, to the sphere of the fixed stars, as though proper to it. Later astronomers, however, assert the sphere of the fixed stars to have a certain proper motion, above which they place another sphere to which they attribute the first motion.
On the supposition, therefore, that the sphere of the fixed stars is the supreme [outermost] sphere, he proves that its parts are not moved irregularly. For if its individual parts were moved now slower, now faster, then over a long period of time the fixed stars would have come to have different distances between themselves than previously as a result of one star moving faster and another slower. But the contrary of this appears. For they are found to retain the same configuration, and to be at the same distance from one another, now as when these were established by the earliest observers. Therefore there is no irregularity in the motion of the first heaven so far as its parts are concerned.
375. But if we pass from the parts to the whole "change" of the first heaven, there is no variation in velocity to a remission of velocity either. For it is plain that the slowing down of a mobile's motion is due to lack of power, just as, when the bodies of animals become tired, their motion slows down. But all impotency and defect is against nature, as is plain in animals, in which old age and decrease and other things of the sort are against nature.
This of course is to be understood with respect to the particular nature, which preserves the individual as far as it can; hence it is against its intent that it be deficient in conserving. But it is not against universal nature, which is the cause not only of generation but also of corruption and, consequently, of the other defects that lead to corruption in the lower bodies. By universal nature is meant the active power present in a universal cause, for example, in the heavenly body.
Now the reason why defects beyond the particular nature can occur in animals is that the whole substance of an animal is a resultant of bodies that are outside their appropriate places. For the body of an animal is composed of the four elements, none of which is in its own proper place. And because those things which are "outside nature" cannot last forever, as is evident from what has been stated above, necessarily corruption and defect will occur at some time to animals. But in the first bodies, namely, the heavenly bodies, nothing "outside nature" can happen, for they are simple things and not mixtures of various elements; moreover, they are in their appropriate place and there is nothing contrary to them, as is plain from what was said in Book I. Hence no impotency can be found in them. Therefore, too, there cannot be in them any "remission," i.e., decrease of velocity, and consequently any "intension," i.e., increase of velocity, because these two follow upon each other — for just as a motion, when it is intensified, proceeds from "remiss" to "intense," so when it diminishes, it goes from "intense" to "remiss."
376. The fourth argument, at [2843 is considered from the standpoint of the mover, and proceeds from a certain division. For if there is intensity and remission in the motion of the heaven, this can take place in only three ways: In one way, it might be always growing in intensity or always becoming remiss; in another way, it could at one time be getting intense and at another time be getting remiss, and this in two ways — in one way, such that the whole intensity and the whole remission would occur at once, on which follows (supposing, according to his opinion, that the heaven is moved for infinite time), that for an infinite time its motion first becomes intense and later becomes remiss, or conversely; in another way so that it alternates between successive states of intensity and remission. But each one of these is impossible. Therefore, it is impossible for remission and intensity to occur in the motion of the heaven.
Primo ergo ostendit impossibile esse quod infinito tempore intendatur prius, et postea infinito tempore remittatur, vel e converso;
secundo ostendit impossibile esse quod semper intendatur vel semper remittatur, ibi: sed adhuc neque etc.;
tertio ostendit impossibile esse quod vicissim intendatur et remittatur, ibi: relinquitur itaque et cetera.
First, therefore he shows that it is impossible for that motion to become intense for an infinite time and later become remiss for an infinite time, or conversely;
Secondly, he shows that it is impossible for it to be always becoming intense or always becoming remiss, at 378;
Thirdly, he shows that it cannot be alternately becoming intense and remiss, at 381.
377. He says therefore first [2843 that it is unreasonable to suppose that the mover of the heaven for an infinite time is in power and moves swiftly, and then for another infinite time is weak and moves slowly (for remission of motion is due to lack of power, whereas intensity is due to power).
The same conclusion that this is unreasonable, he now proves through two middles. First, because nothing contrary to nature is seen to exist for an infinite time — for things according to nature exist always or for the most part. Now lack of power is contrary to nature, as was had. Therefore, it is impossible for anything to be deficient in power for an infinite time.
Secondly, because the time is not equal in the case of that which is according to nature and in the case of that which is not according to nature —for that which is not according to nature occurs in a few cases only, whereas what is according to nature happens for the most part or always. But the power. of a thing is according to nature, whereas defeat of strength is "outside" nature.. Therefore, it is impossible for anything for an equal period of time, namely, for an infinite time, to be in power and powerless. Consequently, it is also impossible for motion to become intense for an infinite time and then to become remiss for an infinite time. But if the motion of the heaven becomes remiss in the manner described, it must become so for an infinite time.
Now some, not understanding Aristotle's intention, take this as stated absolutely on the ground that there is no reason why it should become remiss at one time rather than another. But this is not according to his intention.
378. Then a [285] he shows that it is impossible for the motion of the heaven to become always more intense or to become always more remiss. He shows this with two arguments. The first of these is that the intensity and remission of any irregular motion cease near some terminus of the motion, just as a natural motion becomes intense up to a certain terminal point and as a violent motion becomes remiss up to a certain terminal point. If, therefore, the intensity or remission of the motion of the heaven should be never terminated but proceed ad infinitum, it would follow that the motion of the heaven would be infinite and undeterminate, Now this is plainly false, for it has been proved in VI that, since every motion proceeds from something to something, it must necessarily be determinate. For this reason even a single revolution of the heaven is determinate. It is only according to the various revolutions that succeed one another that the motion of the heaven is said to be infinite.
379. The second argument on this point he gives at [286]. And he says, that this is impossible is also evident if you grant that there is a minimum time, in less than which the heaven cannot be moved. For every motion or action involves a determinate time that it cannot ignore. Thus, although time is divisible ad infinitum, yet it is not possible to play the harp or walk in just any time whatever; rather, every action requires a minimum of time which it cannot exceed by speed, in such a way as for it to be performed in less time. For this reason it is not possible for the heaven to be moved in just any period of time, but rather it has some definite minimum time. From this it is clear that the speed of its motion is not forever being increased, because then its speed would exceed any minimum time whatever, Now if the speed of the heavenly motion cannot be always increasing, then for the same reason it cannot be always decreasing, because the same argument applies to both — for just as there is a minimum time required for an action, so too there is a maximum in which it takes place.
380. But someone could object to this argument and say that the velocity of the heavenly motion can be always increasing, without, nevertheless, some minimum given time ever being transgressed, so long as any addition of speed is not equal or greater but is always smaller and smaller. For it is said in III that if a line be divided according to the same proportion, for example, by taking 1/3 from the whole line and then 1/3 from the remainder, and again 1/3 from that remainder, the process could go on ad infinitum; and if the segments removed subsequently be added to what was removed earlier, the process of adding will continue forever without ever arriving at the quantity of the whole line, because there will always be some part left of the line which is being divided. However, if one always takes a part of equal or greater quantity, and it is added to what was taken previously, one will necessarily exceed any predetermined quantity.
And he says that we should understand this case similarly in the sense of every minimum given time's being surpassed, which is to exceed every greatness of velocity, by the addition, over an infinite time, of equal or greater speed. For if a great velocity were first added, and then a lesser one, and so on, as was said in the division and addition of a line, not every velocity or every minimum time would be transcended, since there would not be a pure intensification, but an intensification combined with remission, because the mover would not be able always to make equal additions to the velocity.
381. Then at [287] he shows that it is impossible for the motion of the heaven to be alternately intensified and remitted, and this for two reasons. First, such a thing is seen to be utterly unreasonable, and like something imaginary — since no reason for this alternation can be assigned. Secondly, such diversity in the motion of the heaven would not escape observation — for when two opposites are juxtaposed, their differences become more striking. Yet we perceive no such variations. Hence it remains that there is no irregularity in the motion of the heaven.
Finally, at [288], because he here puts an end to his consideration of the whole heaven, he states in summary that so far it has been said that there is one single heaven, and that it is ungenerated and eternal, and it is moved with a regular motion.
2-10
On the nature of the stars
Περὶ δὲ τῶν καλουμένων ἄστρων ἑπόμενον ἂν εἴη λέγειν, ἐκ τίνων τε συνεστᾶσι καὶ ἐν ποίοις σχήμασι καὶ τίνε�� αἱ κινήσεις αὐτῶν.
Εὐλογώτατον δὴ καὶ τοῖς εἰρημένοις ἑπόμενον ἡμῖν τὸ ἕκαστον τῶν ἄστρων ποιεῖν ἐκ τούτου τοῦ σώματος ἐν ᾧ τυγχάνει τὴν φορὰν ἔχον, ἐπειδὴ ἔφαμέν τι εἶναι ὃ κύκλῳ φέρεσθαι πέφυκεν
ὥσπερ γὰρ οἱ πύρινα φάσκοντες εἶναι διὰ τοῦτο λέγουσιν, ὅτι τὸ ἄνω σῶμα πῦρ εἶναί φασιν, ὡς εὔλογον ὂν ἕκαστον συνεστάναι ἐκ τούτων ἐν οἷς ἕκαστόν ἐστιν, ὁμοίως καὶ ἡμεῖς λέγομεν.
Ἡ δὲ θερμότης ἀπ' αὐτῶν καὶ τὸ φῶς γίνεται παρεκτριβομένου τοῦ ἀέρος ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκείνων φορᾶς. Πέφυκε γὰρ ἡ κίνησις ἐκπυροῦν καὶ ξύλα καὶ λίθους καὶ σίδηρον εὐλογώτερον οὖν τὸ ἐγγύτερον τοῦ πυρός, ἐγγύτερον δὲ ὁ ἀήρ οἷον καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν φερομένων βελῶν ταῦτα γὰρ αὐτὰ ἐκπυροῦται οὕτως ὥστε τήκεσθαι τὰς μολυβδίδας, καὶ ἐπείπερ αὐτὰ ἐκπυροῦται, ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸν κύκλῳ αὐτῶν ἀέρα τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πάσχειν.
Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν αὐτὰ ἐκθερμαίνεται διὰ τὸ ἐν ἀέρι φέρεσθαι, ὃς διὰ τὴν πληγὴν τῇ κινήσει γίγνεται πῦρ. Τῶν δὲ ἄνω ἕκαστον ἐν τῇ σφαίρᾳ φέρεται, ὥστ' αὐτὰ μὲν μὴ ἐκπυροῦσθαι, τοῦ δ' ἀέρος ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ κυκλικοῦ σώματος σφαῖραν ὄντος ἀνάγκη φερομένης ἐκείνης ἐκθερμαίνεσθαι,
καὶ ταύτῃ μάλιστα ᾗ ὁ ἥλιος τετύχηκεν ἐνδεδεμένος διὸ δὴ πλησιάζοντός τε αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀνίσχοντος καὶ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ὄντος γίγνεται ἡ θερμότης.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὔτε πύρινά ἐστιν οὔτ' ἐν πυρὶ φέρεται, ταῦθ' ἡμῖν εἰρήσθω περὶ αὐτῶν.
382. After settling the question of the heaven, the Philosopher now treats of the stars.
Et primo determinat veritatem;
secundo movet quasdam dubitationes et solvit, ibi: duabus autem dubitationibus et cetera.
First he determines the truth;
Secondly, he raises and settles some doubts (L. 17).
As to the first he does four things:
primo determinat de natura stellarum;
secundo de motu earum, ibi: quoniam autem videntur etc.;
tertio de ordine earum, ibi: de ordine autem ipsorum etc.;
quarto de figura earum, ibi: figuram autem uniuscuiusque et cetera.
First he determines the nature of the stars;
Secondly, their motion (L. 11);
Thirdly, their order (L. 15);
Fourthly, their shape (L. 16).
With respect to the first he does three things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo manifestat veritatem, ibi: rationabilissimum autem etc.;
tertio excludit obiectionem, ibi: calor autem ab ipsis et cetera.
First he states his intention;
Secondly, he manifests the truth at 383;
Thirdly, he excludes an objection, at 387.
He says therefore first [289] that, after having determined the question of the whole heaven, we should next consider those things called "stars" and determine "what they are made out of," i.e., of what nature they are, and what shape they have, and of what sort are their motions.
383. Then at [290] he shows of what nature the stars are. First he proposes what he intends, and says that the assumption that each star is of the nature of the spherical body in which it is moved is of itself most reasonable, since places follow upon the natures of bodies. Hence it is reasonable that the stars pertain to the nature of the sphere in which they are situated. Moreover, this follows of necessity from what we have said above. For it was said that the heaven has a nature other than the nature of the four elements, since it has a motion distinct from the motions of the [four] elements, namely, a circular motion. Hence, since the stars are moved circularly as the heavenly spheres are, the consequence is that they have a nature in common with the heavenly spheres and differ from the nature of the four elements.
384. But there seems to be a twofold doubt on this matter. The first one arises from the fact that the bodies of the stars appear to differ from the bodies of the heavenly spheres, since they shine and seem to be more compact; consequently, there seems to be contrariety in the heavenly bodies. Now contrariety is the cause of corruption. It seems, therefore, that heavenly bodies are according to their nature corruptible, which is against what has been determined in Book I.
The answer to this is that not every diversity, strictly speaking, has the notion of contrariety. Rather, in order that things be contrary, two things are required: One of these is that they be apt to exist in some way in the same subject, whether proximate, or at least remote — thus heat is contrary to cold, which latter, however, is not apt to exist in fire, but is apt to exist in the matter of fire, which is the first subject. Secondly, it is required that the diverse things that are contrary not be able to exist together, but mutually expel one another. Hence, white and black, as existing in matter, are contraries mutually expelling one another. But as existing in the intellect they have no contrariety but can exist together; as a matter of fact, one of them is known through the other.
Now the differing forms or qualities that seem to be in the heavenly bodies are in no sense apt to exist in the same subject, whether it be a proximate subject or a first subject — for the body of a star is not apt to be reduced to the disposition of the other parts of the heavenly spheres, or vice versa.
Similarly, it is also necessary to say that the contrary forms or qualities found in the lower bodies exist in some sense in heavenly bodies, not, indeed, in a univocal way, but as in universal causes, in a certain likeness to the manner in which forms that exist individually in sensible matter, exist universally in the intellect. Hence, just as in the intellect they do not exist under the notion of contrariety, so neither do they in the heavenly bodies. Hence Plato said that in the heavenly bodies are found the excellences or sublimations of the elements, the former being, as it were, their primordial active principles — for the heavenly bodies are related to elementary bodies as are active principles to passive. Therefore the opposite happens in heavenly bodies and in elementary bodies. For elementary bodies, the more compact they are made as a result of thickening, the more material, and passive, and less light-endowed they are. This is evident with respect to earth, which is the dominant factor in mixed bodies. On the other hand, in the heavenly bodies, the more compact they are as a result of thickening, the greater their luminosity and active power, as is plain in the bodies of the stars.
Consequently, it is plain that such diversity as is apparent in the heavenly bodies is not seen to possess the nature of contrariety. Therefore, it does not follow that they are susceptible to corruption. But that would follow if there were true contrariety, as Aristotle showed in Book I.
385. The second doubt is to the effect that, since diversity appears between the stars and the remaining parts of the spheres, it seems that they are not simple bodies. But the answer to this is that these bodies are called simple to the extent that they are not composed of contrary natures. Yet there is in them some diversity with respect to the nature of their species, although they agree in the nature of their genus — thus they agree in the common aspect of their motion, because all are moved circularly.
386. Secondly, at [291] he shows that this is in a way in agreement with the statements of others. For he says that, just as those who assert that the stars are fiery, concluded this because they believe the heavenly body is fire, as though it were reasonable for each of the stars to consist of the nature of those spheres in which it exists; so, too, we assert that the stars are of a nature different from the nature of the four elements, because we have previously proved the heavens to be such.
387. Then at [292] he excludes an objection; for some believed the stars to be of the nature of fire and argued in the following manner: To be hot and luminous is seen to be proper to fire. But the stars heat and give light. Therefore, it seems that they are of the nature of fire.
Regarding this he does three things:
primo solvit hanc obiectionem per quoddam exemplum;
secundo ostendit differentiam exempli ad propositum, ibi: hae quidem ipsae etc.;
tertio respondet tacitae quaestioni, ibi: et hac maxime et cetera.
First he resolves this objection with an example;
Secondly, he shows how the example differs from his proposition, at 388;
Thirdly, he replies to a tacit question, at 389.
He says therefore first [292] that heat and light are generated by the stars by a certain stroking of, or friction with, air and not because they are of a fiery nature. For we observe that motion is apt to ignite wood and stones and iron; hence it is all the more reasonable that a body which is more like fire than the bodies mentioned should be ignited by motion, because when two things are more alike, it is easier for them to change into each other. But air is more like fire than the above mentioned bodies are. Hence air can be more easily ignited by motion than those bodies. And he gives the example of arrows. Part of them being of lead, they are so heated by the violence of their motion that sometimes the lead melts. Since arrows can be ignited as a result of motion, there is all the more reason why the air surrounding the arrows should become ignited. This does not mean that the heated arrow causes the air to become heated, as Simplicius understood. Rather, it is to be understood that the heat produced in the air through motion causes the heating of the arrows, as Alexander explained it. For Aristotle wishes to prove from a lesser case that if arrows are heated, the surrounding air must be heated, it being closer to fire, as he said above. He is not taking the case [of the heated arrow] as a cause, as Simplicius understood.
388. Then at [293] he shows the difference between this example and his proposition. And he says that those arrows become hot because they are being moved through air, and the air becomes ignited by the "blow," i.e., as a result of its being struck and divided by the arrow; hence it is from contact with heated air that the arrows become hot. But this is not what happens in the stars, since each star is not being moved through air but in its own sphere insulated from air. Therefore, the stars are neither ignited nor made hot, first of all because they are far from air, which is ignited by motion, and, secondly, because they are not receptive to a transitory impression. But it is the air which exists under the sphere of the heavenly body that must become hot as a result of the motion of the heavenly sphere, since the motion of the heavenly sphere agitates not only the fire but the air as well (namely, as far as the air contained below the mountains), as is apparent from the motion of comets, as stated in I.
389. Then at [294] he responds to a tacit objection. For if the lower air is ignited by the motion of the heavenly sphere, then, since the heavenly sphere is in continuous motion, it seems that there should always be an equal amount of heat in the air at all times, i.e., in winter and in summer, during the day and during the night. But we observe that it is the contrary that happens.
To this he responds that air is mainly ignited by the motion of the particular sphere in which the sun is fixed. Therefore heat is generated on account of the sun's nearness to us. And this happens in two ways: First, insofar as by its rising, the sun ascends to our upper hemisphere; secondly, insofar as it reaches a point directly overhead — for just as there is more heat during day than during night, so too there is more at noon than at dawn.
Lastly, he concludes [295) by way of summary that so far we have said that the stars are not fiery in nature, and are not moved in a fiery body, but above the sphere of fire, in the heavenly spheres.
390. But a first doubt arises: Since Aristotle asserts that the motion of the stars generates heat and light, his proof seems insufficient, since he gives no evidence for light, but only for heat.
To this Alexander responds that he reserves his treatment of light for settling in his book, , in the second part of which he states that light is not a peculiarity of fire but something common to it and to the supreme body.
However, since Aristotle says that both are generated from the striking of the air, it is better to say that Aristotle has taken care of both right here by showing that as a result of the stars' motion the lower bodies are set afire — for in fire are found both heat and light.
391. But a doubt still remains, namely, the doubt as to that nature whence motion has the power to ignite or heat things.
To this Averroes responds in his Commentary that it is proper to the hot to be mobile; consequently, when something is being moved in act, it also becomes hot in act.
But this is not seen to be true. First of all, because to be moved is not peculiar to the hot but is common to every natural body — for things moved with a straight motion rest when they are in their appropriate places, but are moved when they are outside their places; heavenly bodies are moved circularly in their places, which are neither hot nor cold. In the second place, the subsequent is not the cause of the prior — hence, if motion were proper to what is hot, heat would be the cause of motion rather than motion the cause of heat.
Therefore, it must be said that, as is proved in VIII, local motion is the first of motions. Now in every genus, whatever is first is the cause of the things that are subsequent in that genus. Hence, local motion is the cause of alteration, which is the first motion among the other motions, and in particular the cause of the first alteration which is heating. For alteration in all the other qualities is caused by alteration in the first four qualities, among which the two active, namely, hot and cold, are prior to the passive, namely, moist and dry. But hot is prior to cold, as form is prior to privation, as is clear from what was said previously. Hence local motion is properly the cause of heat. However, every local motion possesses this from the power of the heavenly motion, which is the first of local motions.
392. Another doubt now arises: Since the sun immediately touches neither the air nor the fire, how is heat caused in the air and in fire from the motion of the sun? For the intermediate heavenly bodies, namely, the spheres of Venus, Mercury and the moon, are not heated from the motion of the sun. To this Alexander responds that there is nothing preventing a thing from being altered by an agent acting through a medium, without the medium itself being altered. For example, the fish called stupor shocks the fisherman's hand through the net, although the net does not shock. Yet the net does receive in some way the impression from the fish, but in a manner different from the way the hand does. So, too, the sun imprints something on the intermediate heavenly bodies, even though it is not heating; but the effect of the sun reaches the lower bodies after the manner of heat, in keeping with their condition.
But against this answer appears to be the fact that Aristotle asserts that heat is caused in air that has been struck or compressed by the motion of the stars. But it is not possible for this striking or compressing effect from the motion of the sun to reach the air without the intermediate heavenly bodies also being struck, which is impossible.
Therefore Averroes in his Commentary says that the entire heavenly body is moved with the diurnal motion as though it were one body, or one whole animal, whereas the particular motions of the planets are as motions of the parts of an animal. Now heat in the air is caused mainly by the motion of the whole heaven, i.e., by the diurnal motion. For this reason Aristotle says that heat is caused by the nearness of the sun when it rises and is overhead, all of which is due to the diurnal motion. Now, it is plain that when one body alters another it does not do so only according to its outermost surface where it touches the body altered, but does this according to its whole depth or mass — and a sign of this is that a thin body is not as well suited for causing alteration as a body having thickness or mass, supposing that both bodies possess the same nature. Thus the whole heaven causes heat, not only in virtue of the lowest sphere, but in virtue of the whole mass of the heaven, as though by a single alteration. Therefore alteration takes place in those lower bodies not only in virtue of the moon's orb, which is in immediate contact with the lower bodies, but also according to the virtue of the stars, in which the active power of the heavenly body is more unified and as though massed together. This is particularly true of the sun, which exceeds the other bodies in power and size. Since, therefore, the whole heaven acts as one body according to its diurnal motion, we should not suppose that one sphere acts separately upon another, but that the whole heaven, with one imprint, alters the lower air by means of the power in the sun and other stars as they draw near to us.
But, as Simplicius says, even this explanation does not seem to be sufficient. First, because if heat were produced in the air on account of its being struck or compressed by the motion of the heavenly body when the sun is present, it would follow first of all that lower places would become less heated, since they are farther from the heating motion. But just the opposite is seen, for there is more heat on the plains than on the mountains. Secondly, since the sphere of the earth is almost like a point in relation to the sphere of the sun, when the sun is over the earth it seems to be more or less equally near to every part of the earth; consequently, there should not be such a great variation of heat from the sun as there is between dawn and noon, or winter and summer. Thirdly, because there would be no reason for finding less heat in shaded places than in places where the rays of the sun strike.
The same reasons prove that the sun does not cause heat as though it were of the nature of fire.
And therefore Simplicius says that there emerge from the body of the sun rays he says to be corporeal, and that they can without hindrance penetrate those heavenly bodies below the sun that are immaterial, and air they penetrate on account of its pores. But they are reflected by solid bodies, namely, earth and water, at equal angles (because, as perspective proves, all reflection occurs at equal angles). When, therefore, a solar ray strikes the earth diametrically, it is reflected back upon itself and thus there is produced a maximum thickening, which causes maximum heat; and this happens when the sun is directly overhead. But as the sun declines from its overhead position, the distance between the reflection of its rays increases more and more, and consequently less heat is generated. This is the reason why in the winter, and at sunrise and sunset, there is less heat in the air, namely, because the solar rays strike the earth at angles which are more obtuse, with the result that the distance between the rays first striking and the reflected rays is increased. And it is for this reason that Aristotle purposely did not say unqualifiedly that as the sun gets nearer more heat is generated, but was careful to add, "as rising and when it is overhead," in order to give us to understand that the nearness is in reference to its nearness overhead and not in reference to the linear distance from the sun to us, because those distances to any part of the earth are almost equal.
Now if Simplicius means with these words that the rays are bodies which strike and thicken the air and thus produce heat, his statement is expressly false, for Aristotle in II proves that a ray is neither a body nor an emanation from a body. But if, in saying that the rays are corporeal, he means that they act after the manner of bodies, in the sense that they are directly projected and are reflected from any dense body they cannot penetrate, then he speaks the truth — for such reflections, being caused by the counter-resistance of bodies, belong not only to bodies but also to qualities, since heat, too, is reflected when it meets an obstacle, as do other things of the same sort.
393. However, if one examines them diligently, all the things said on this point are true in some sense. For Aristotle says that "heat and light are generated by the stars as a result of the air being struck by their motion." Now it seems that this is not to be understood as meaning that heat and light are generated by the striking of the air caused by the motion of the heavenly bodies: for it is not a question here of the light of fire generated from motion, as previously stated, but of the light caused by the stars themselves insofar as they are light-giving things in act. Therefore, the cause of heat generated in lower bodies by the heavenly bodies is twofold: One cause is motion, and the other is light. Why motion is the cause of heating has been explained above. But we must not suppose that a mutual stroking or rubbing of a heavenly body and of air is the cause of heat; rather it is solely the motion produced in the air by the higher motion of the heavenly body. The higher air, and likewise fire, are moved by the diurnal motion of the entire heaven according to the power of the sun and all the stars, as Averroes says.
The second cause of the heating of lower bodies by the stars and especially the sun is light. It indeed has the power to heat insofar as it is an active quality of the first thing altering, namely, the heaven. Hence, it directly causes the first quality found in inferior bodies, namely, heat. And since this quality, namely, light, abounds more in the sun, the sun is especially capable of heating. But the rest of the heavenly bodies, insofar as they partake of light (which is the universal active power of heavenly bodies), have the power to produce heat. This extends even to the light of the moon, according to what the Philosopher says in his book, On the Parts of Animals, namely, that the nights of full moon are warmer, for which reason certain fish come to the surface of the water.
As to the statement that some stars cause things to be cool or moist, Averroes says in his Commentary that they do not do this per se but only insofar as producing a heat proportionate to each body; on which account he scolds Avicenna, who says that the stars cause both cooling and heating.
But Averroes does not speak correctly in this matter. For a thing is seen to be per accidens when it is not produced by the agent per se. But the heavenly bodies are the agent causes of the things that are here. If, therefore, they did not per se cause cooling and moisture and so on, it would follow that such things would be per accidens in the universe. Moreover, since all the substantial forms of the lower bodies come to be from the power of the heavenly bodies, it follows that from their power are also the qualities consequent upon the species or forms of the elements, namely, hot, cold, wet and dry, and so on.
Accordingly, it must be said that all the heavenly bodies, in keeping with their common power of light, have the property of heating, but according to other peculiar powers attributed to specific bodies, they not only heat and cool, but also produce other corporeal effects in lower bodies. And in the matter of the influence of light and these powers, what Alexander says is true, namely, that the intermediate heavenly bodies receive an impression from the sun in a way different from the way the lower bodies do.
One should consider, therefore, that accordingly as heat is caused in lower bodies by the motion of the stars and of the whole heaven, the bodies nearer to the heaven, namely, fire and the upper region of the air, which are carried around according to the motion of the heaven, are hotter. But accordingly as heat is caused from the light of the stars, the lowest things are hotter, because in the upper regions the reflections of the rays are dispersed more. This also explains why many species of things on the earth are generated by the power of solar and stellar rays which are multiplied about the earth as a result of reflexion.
394. But Alexander raises a question here: If the heavenly bodies strike the air in their motion, it seems to follow that they can be touched and, consequently, that they are hot and cold — for those are the first tangible qualities, as is said in II.
But the answer to this is easily evident from what Aristotle says in I, namely, that things apt to act and be acted upon touch each other mutually, and that the qualities of such things are heat and cold. The heavenly bodies, however, act but are not acted upon. Hence, they touch without being touched. Hence, too, the tangible qualities in heavenly bodies are not there in the way they are in lower bodies; rather, they are present in a more eminent way, i.e., as existing in their active cause. For hot and cold, moist and dry, are not present therein, but the power that causes them is present therein. Similarly, neither do heavy and light exist there; but in place of these is an aptitude to circular motion. Finally, rare and dense are present in heavenly bodies, accordingly as the stars are thicker and more massive than their spheres; nevertheless this is not according to the difference of contrariety, but only according to increase or decrease of power proportionate to a greater or lesser aggregation of parts.
2-11
Proof that the stars move, not of themselves, but as carried by the motion of the spheres, from a comparison with their, circles
(289b.) Ἐπεὶ δὲ φαίνεται καὶ τὰ ἄστρα μεθιστάμενα καὶ ὅλος ὁ οὐρανός, ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι ἠρεμούντων ἀμφοτέρων γίγνεσθαι τὴν μεταβολήν, ἢ κινουμένων, ἢ τοῦ μὲν ἠρεμοῦντος τοῦ δὲ κινουμένου.
Ἀμφότερα μὲν τοίνυν ἠρεμεῖν ἀδύνατον ἠρεμούσης γε τῆς γῆς οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἐγίγνετο τὰ φαινόμενα. Τὴν δὲ γῆν ὑποκείσθω ἠρεμεῖν. Λείπεται δὴ ἀμφότερα κινεῖσθαι, ἢ τὸ μὲν κινεῖσθαι τὸ δ' ἠρεμεῖν.
Εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀμφότερα κινήσεται, ἄλογον τὸ ταὐτὰ τάχη τῶν ἄστρων εἶναι καὶ τῶν κύκλων ἕκαστον γὰρ δὴ ὁμοταχὲς ἔσται τῷ κύκλῳ καθ' ὃν φέρεται. Φαίνεται γὰρ ἅμα τοῖς κύκλοις καθιστάμενα πάλιν εἰς τὸ αὐτό. Συμβαίνει οὖν ἅμα τό τε ἄστρον διεληλυθέναι τὸν κύκλον καὶ τὸν κύκλον ἐνηνέχθαι τὴν αὑτοῦ φοράν, διεληλυθότα τὴν περιφέρειαν.
Οὐκ ἔστι δ' εὔλογον τὸ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον ἔχειν τὰ τάχη τῶν ἄστρων καὶ τὰ μεγέθη τῶν κύκλων. Τοὺς μὲν γὰρ κύκλους οὐθὲν ἄτοπον ἀλλ' ἀναγκαῖον ἀνάλογον ἔχειν τὰ τάχη τοῖς μεγέθεσι, τῶν δ' ἄστρων ἕκαστον τῶν ἐν τούτοις οὐθαμῶς εὔλογον εἴτε γὰρ ἐξ ἀνάγκης τὸ τὸν μείζω κύκλον φερόμενον θᾶττον ἔσται, δῆλον ὅτι κἂν μετατεθῇ τὰ ἄστρα εἰς τοὺς ἀλλήλων κύκλους, τὸ μὲν ἔσται θᾶττον τὸ δὲ βραδύτερον (οὕτω δ' οὐκ ἂν ἔχοιεν οἰκείαν κίνησιν, ἀλλὰ φέροιντ' ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν κύκλων), εἴτε ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου συνέπεσεν, οὐδ' οὕτως εὔλογον ὥστ' ἐν ἅπασιν ἅμα τόν τε κύκλον εἶναι μείζω καὶ τὴν φορὰν θάττω τοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἄστρου τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἓν ἢ δύο τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἔχειν οὐθὲν ἄτοπον, τὸ δὲ πάνθ' ὁμοίως πλάσματι ἔοικεν. Ἅμα δὲ καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τοῖς φύσει τὸ ὡς ἔτυχεν, οὐδὲ τὸ πανταχοῦ καὶ πᾶσιν ὑπάρχον τὸ ἀπὸ τύχης.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν πάλιν εἰ οἱ μὲν κύκλοι μένουσιν, αὐτὰ δὲ τὰ ἄστρα κινεῖται, τὰ αὐτὰ καὶ ὁμοίως ἔσται ἄλογα συμβήσεται γὰρ θᾶττον κινεῖσθαι τὰ ἔξω, καὶ τὰ τάχη εἶναι κατὰ τὰ μεγέθη τῶν κύκλων.
Ἐπεὶ τοίνυν οὔτ' ἀμφότερα κινεῖσθαι εὔλογον οὔτε τὸ ἕτερον μόνον, λείπεται τοὺς μὲν κύκλους κινεῖσθαι, τὰ δὲ ἄστρα ἠρεμεῖν καὶ ἐνδεδεμένα τοῖς κύκλοις φέρεσθαι μόνως γὰρ οὕτως οὐθὲν ἄλογον συμβαίνει τό τε γὰρ θᾶττον εἶναι τοῦ μείζονος κύκλου τὸ τάχος εὔλογον περὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κέντρον ἐνδεδεμένων (290a.) (ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις τὸ μεῖζον σῶμα θᾶττον φέρεται τὴν οἰκείαν φοράν, οὕτως καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἐγκυκλίοις μεῖζον γὰρ τῶν ἀφαιρουμένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ κέντρου τὸ τοῦ μείζονος κύκλου τμῆμα, ὥστ' εὐλόγως ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ ὁ μείζων περιοισθήσεται κύκλος), τό τε μὴ διασπᾶσθαι τὸν οὐρανὸν διά τε τοῦτο συμβήσεται καὶ ὅτι δέδεικται συνεχὲς ὂν τὸ ὅλον.
395. After showing what the nature of the stars is, the Philosopher here determines their motion.
Et primo ostendit qualiter stellae moveantur;
secundo ostendit utrum ex eorum motu sonus causetur, ibi: manifestum autem ex his et cetera.
First he shows how the stars are moved;
Secondly, he shows whether a sound is produced as a result of their motion (L. 14).
With respect to the first he shows, by three arguments, that the stars do not move of themselves but are carried along by the motion of their orbs. The first of these arguments rests on comparing the stars to the orbs [or spheres].
In this argument he presupposes a fact which is sensibly evident: we see the stars and the whole heaven moving. Now there are three ways in which this must happen: In one way, so that both the star and its orb are at rest; in another, so that both are in motion; in a third, so that one of them is at rest and the other in motion. Then having presented this division, he considers each one.
396. First he considers the first one [297], and says that it is impossible that both, i.e., the star and its orb, be at rest if we assume that the earth is also at rest. For the apparent motion of the stars cannot be saved if both the stars which appear to be in motion are at rest, and the men who see them. For, that motion should appear, this must be caused either by the motion of the thing seen or of the one seeing. For this reason, some, positing the stars and the whole heaven to be at rest, posited the earth on which we live to be moved from west to east around the equinoxial poles [i.e., its axis] once a day. According to this, it is due to our own motion that the stars seem to move in a contrary direction. This is said to have been the opinion of Heraclitus of Pontus and Aristarchus. However, Aristotle is supposing for the present that the earth is at rest — which fact he will later prove. Hence it remains, the first member, in which the.heaven and the stars were assumed to be at rest, having been set aside, to verify one of the two others — namely, that stating that both, i.e., the star and the orb, are in motion, or that stating one to be in motion and the other at rest.
397. Then at [298] he destroys one member, namely, that holding both the star and the orb as being in motion. And he says that if both are being moved, something unreasonable is seen to follow, namely, that there is the same velocity for the star and the circle carrying it. For if both are being moved, then we must say that the velocity of each star is equal to that of the circle in which it is being carried — for the stars appear along with their circles, returning to the same spot whence they had begun to be moved.
This is indeed very plain if we speak of the fixed stars which exist in the eighth sphere. For all such stars are seen to move together with the whole sphere with one motion, in such a way that a star in the equinoxial circle [i.e., the equator],'which is the largest circle dividing the sphere through its center, completes its whole great circle in the same time that another star, in a smaller circle located toward one of the poles, completes its small circle. Consequently, since a thing is swifter if it covers a greater distance in equal time, as is plain from VI, it follows that the larger the circle in which a star exists, the swifter its motion. Similarly, the larger the circle itself is, the swifter its motion.
This explanation can also be understood, as Alexander says, in adaptation to the circles of the planets. For to the extent that the planets are moved by the diurnal motion, they are revolved along with the supreme sphere, except insofar as the planets through their own motions retrogress somewhat in their own circles. And since the circle of the superior planet is larger, that planet will be swifter as to its diurnal motion — for in the same time it is being revolved through a larger circle.
Thus, therefore, it happens to some extent, both to the fixed stars and the planets, that the star is at once completing a complete circle while that circle itself is moved by a motion of its own as it traverses its own "periphery," i.e., circumference. This is to be understood in the sense that some designated point in the circle returns to its original place.
398. Therefore, having shown what happens from the assumption of equal velocities for the stars and for their circles, he shows that this is unreasonable, as he had supposed, at [2993.
First of all he proposes that it is not reasonable that there should be a same proportion between the velocity of the stars and the size of their circles, so that by so much is a star swifter as it is moved in a larger circle.
Secondly, he shows that it is not unreasonable to say this of the circles themselves. Indeed, it seems to be necessary that their velocities be "analogous," i.e., proportionate, to their sizes — since that is what we see in all natural bodies; namely, that so much the greater something is, so much the swifter does it move by its proper motion. Consequently, if it is not reasonable for the velocity of the stars to be proportionate to the size of their circles, it is nevertheless reasonable for the velocity of the circles to be proportionate to their own size. From this it follows that it is unreasonable for the velocity of the stars and of the circles to be equal.
That it is not reasonable for the motion of each star to be proportionate in velocity to the size of its circle he shows in the following way: Such a thing would happen either from necessity of nature or from chance. But if it should occur from natural necessity that a star be swifter on account of being moved in a larger circle, it follows that if stars were transposed into other circles, so that a star previously in a larger circle should be placed in a smaller circle, then the star that previously was slower would be faster, and vice versa. So, it will appear that the stars do not possess a motion of their own but are moved by the circles — from the fact that a star does not preserve some proper velocity in its own motion but its velocity depends on the sole size of the circle.
But if it be maintained that chance is the explanation why a star in a larger circle is moved more swiftly, he disproves this in two ways.
First of all, because, if this were due to chance, it would not be reasonable to find this in the case of all circles and stars, namely, that a greater size of the circle goes hand in hand with a greater velocity of a star's motion. For that this should happen in one or two cases would not seem impossible, but that it happen in all cases, and be a result of chance is seen to be a fiction — for things that are due to chance do not occur in the same way in all cases, or in the majority of cases, but only in a lesser number.
Secondly, he shows that this cannot be due to chance, on the ground that chance has no place in things that are due to nature; rather, things that happen fortuitously are outside the order of nature. That is why things produced by chance or fortune do not occur in the same way in all cases, as do things due to nature. Therefore, since there is nothing outside nature in the motions of the heavenly bodies, as was had above, it cannot be that the case under discussion is due to chance. Thus it is plainly not true that the circle and the star are moved together, and with equal velocity.
It is possible to offer yet another reason to disprove this assertion: for, as Alexander says, it would follow that one or other of the motions would be superfluous, which does not occur in things from nature.
399. Then at [300] he investigates the third possibility.
First he shows that it is not possible for the star to be moved and the circle to be at rest, and says that, if one should hold the circles to remain in the same position and the stars to move, the same unreasonable things as before will follow. For it will turn out that the star which is "outside" is moved more swiftly. And if this refers to the fixed stars, a star will be said to be "outside" if it is outside the poles and nearer the equinoxial circle [the equator]; if it refers to planets, a star will be said to be "outside" if it is in a containing circle (for the contained is within the container). In either case, the circle which is outside is greater. Consequently, it will follow that the velocities of the stars will be proportioned to the size of the circles — which has already been disproved.
400. Secondly, at [301], he verifies the last member of the division and says that, since it is not reasonable for both, i.e., the star and the circle, to be moved or for the star alone to be moved, what remains is that the "circles," i.e., the spheres, are moved, and the stars are at rest with respect to themselves, in the sense of not being moved per se, but with the motion of the spheres in which they are fixed. They will be moved together not as two things with different natures (as happens in the case of a nail embedded in a wooden wheel) but as two things of the same nature. It is as though the stars were the more noble part of the sphere, in which light and active power are concentrated.
Now this is a reasonable supposition, since, one it is assumed, nothing unreasonable follows.
For in the first place it is not unreasonable for the greater circle to have a greater velocity, so long as the circles in question are related to the same center.
If "center" be here taken in its proper sense, this must be referred to the various circles of the planets, which, according to Aristotle, are all about the same center, namely, the earth — for the astronomers of his time did not posit eccentrics, nor epicycles. But this could not be applied to the various circles described by the fixed stars in their motion, for not all those circles have the same center. However, if we desire to apply it to the fixed stars, then we must take the word "center" as meaning the "pole" [i.e., axis] since, just as the center is to a circle on a plane surface, so is the pole [axis] in a way to a circle on a spherical surface.
Now since various circles can be designated on the same sphere with respect to the same poles, a circle is smaller and its motion slower according to its nearness to the pole, just as, among circles set one under the other, that circle is less and slower which is nearer the center. Hence the center and the pole are indivisible and completely immovable.
The reason why he says this is reasonable is that, in other bodies also, which are moved with rectilinear motion, the greater the body, the more rapidly is it moved by its own natural motion — as a larger portion of earth is moved downward with greater speed (while the contrary happens in compulsory motion, in which the motion is slower according as the body is larger). Hence, too, in bodies that are moved with a circular motion, since their motion is natural, it is reasonable that the larger the circle, the more rapidly it be moved.
That the motion of a larger circle is swifter is plain from the fact that, if two lines be drawn from the center through all the circles to the last, the portion cut off [i.e., the arc] by those two lines will be greater in a larger circle and less in a smaller. And the same holds if two circular [longitudinal] lines be drawn from the pole through all the circles to the largest of them [at the equator]. When, therefore, one of the said circular lines shall as a whole reach the place previously occupied by the other, it is plain that in the greater circle it will traverse a greater distance in the same time, which is to be moved more rapidly, as is said in VI, namely, to traverse a greater distance in equal time. It will thus be reasonable, therefore, that a greater circle will traverse a greater distance in an equal amount of time, and that thus its motion will be swifter.
401. Secondly, there does not occur the unacceptable consequence that the heaven would be "torn apart," i.e., rent, which we would have to say if the stars are moved and their orbs are at rest — especially since it has been shown that the entire heaven is continuous, in such a way that the lower sphere is wholly in contact with the higher. If, then, the orbs should be at rest and the stars in motion, and assuming that the stars are embedded in the bodies of the spheres, it would follow that the stars by their motion would split or shatter the very substance of the spheres. But if they were moved on the surface of the higher sphere, either the lower sphere would have to be split by the motion of the star, or else there would have to be an intermediate space between the two spheres, depending on the size of the star. Now this space would have to be either empty, or full of some passible body that would be rent, after the manner of air or water, by the passage of the moving body. But both these alternatives are impossible.
All these unacceptable situations are avoided, however, if we suppose the stars not to be moved per se but only by the motion of the orbs.
This explanation which has been given fits both the fixed stars and the planets. It can, however, be applied in another way referring to the fixed stars only. Since he had proved that the motion of the larger circle is more rapid on the basis of the portions cut off by the two lines drawn from the center or from the pole, he proves this [i.e., that the stars are carried in their spheres] once more with another argument: Unless the greater circle in the sphere of fixed stars were not in more rapid motion, it would follow that the sphere of the stars would not be a continuous whole, but would be separated into parts — since a star in a smaller circle, if it had a motion equally as swift, would necessarily complete its circuit in less time, for the notion of the equally rapid is that in a lesser time it traverses a lesser distance.
2-12
That the stars do not move themselves concluded from the motions proper to the spherical shape
Ἔτι δ' ἐπεὶ σφαιροειδῆ τὰ ἄστρα, καθάπερ οἵ τ' ἄλλοι φασὶ καὶ ἡμῖν ὁμολογούμενον εἰπεῖν, ἐξ ἐκείνου γε τοῦ σώματος γεννῶσιν, τοῦ δὲ σφαιροειδοῦς δύο κινήσεις εἰσὶ καθ' αὑτό, κύλισις καὶ δίνησις, εἴπερ οὖν κινεῖται τὰ ἄστρα δι' αὑτῶν, τὴν ἑτέραν ἂν κινοῖτο τούτων ἀλλ' οὐδετέραν φαίνεται. Δινούμενα μὲν γὰρ ἂν ἔμενεν ἐν ταὐτῷ καὶ οὐ μετέβαλλε τὸν τόπον, ὅπερ φαίνεταί τε καὶ πάντες φασίν. Ἔτι δὲ πάντα μὲν εὔλογον τὴν αὐτὴν κίνησιν κινεῖσθαι, μόνος δὲ δοκεῖ τῶν ἄστρων ὁ ἥλιος τοῦτο δρᾶν ἀνατέλλων καὶ δύνων, καὶ οὗτος οὐ δι' αὑτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν ἀπόστασιν τῆς ἡμετέρας ὄψεως ἡ γὰρ ὄψις ἀποτεινομένη μακρὰν ἑλίσσεται διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν. Ὅπερ αἴτιον ἴσως καὶ τοῦ στίλβειν φαίνεσθαι τοὺς ἀστέρας τοὺς ἐνδεδεμένους, τοὺς δὲ πλάνητας μὴ στίλβειν οἱ μὲν γὰρ πλάνητες ἐγγύς εἰσιν, ὥστ' ἐγκρατὴς οὖσα πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἀφικνεῖται ἡ ὄψις πρὸς δὲ τοὺς μένοντας κραδαίνεται διὰ τὸ μῆκος, ἀποτεινομένη πόρρω λίαν. Ὁ δὲ τρόμος αὐτῆς ποιεῖ τοῦ ἄστρου δοκεῖν εἶναι τὴν κίνησιν οὐθὲν γὰρ διαφέρει κινεῖν τὴν ὄψιν ἢ τὸ ὁρώμενον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι οὐδὲ κυλίεται τὰ ἄστρα, φανερόν τὸ μὲν γὰρ κυλιόμενον στρέφεσθαι ἀνάγκη, τῆς δὲ σελήνης ἀεὶ δῆλόν ἐστι τὸ καλούμενον πρόσωπον. Ὥστ' ἐπεὶ κινούμενα μὲν δι' αὑτῶν τὰς οἰκείας κινεῖσθαι κινήσεις εὔλογον, ταύτας δ' οὐ φαίνεται κινούμενα, δῆλον ὅτι οὐκ ἂν κινοῖτο δι' αὑτῶν.
402. Having presented the first argument to show that the stars are moved by the motion of their circles, which argument was based on a comparison of the stars with their circles or orbs, the Philosopher here presents a second argument based on the shape of the stars [302]. The argument is this: The stars are spherical in shape; hence, if they were to be moved, they would have to be moved with a motion that is proper to a spherical body, which is twofold, namely, "volutation" and "circumgyration." But the stars are moved with neither of these motions. Therefore, they are not moved according to themselves but what appears of their motion is due to their being moved according to the motion of the circles.
403. First, therefore, he proposes that the stars are spherical in shape and this he manifests in two ways. In one way, because everyone else speaks thus, namely, to the effect that the stars are spherical: for which reason it should be accepted as probable. In another way, from an argument taken from what has already been determined. For it has been said that the stars are made out of the nature of the heavenly bodies. Hence we must profess that they have the same shape as the heaven. But it has been shown above that the heaven is spherical in shape. Hence the stars must be spherical in shape.
404. Then he shows the difference between the circular motions proper to spherical bodies. And he says that there are two motions that belong ear se to a spherical body, i.e., in virtue of its spherical shape, namely, "volutation" and "circumgyration." Now these two motions differ according as the axis and poles upon which the spherical body is understood to be moving are diverse — and these differences are reckoned in relation to us. For if the stellar body is reckoned to be in motion upon two poles, one of which is in the surface facing us and the other in the surface opposite, in such a way that we take the axis as a line passing through the star's depth, then the star is being moved with a motion of "circumgyration." In this motion the stars keep the same face toward us after the manner in which a millstone is moved. But if the stellar body is understood to be in motion upon two poles, both of which are taken at some point where it joins the body of its sphere, then the star in its motion will not always keep the same face toward us. In this case the motion will be "volutation." Therefore, because these are the two motions proper to a spherical body, if the stars are moved with motions of their own, they should be moved with one or the other of these.
405. Then he shows that the motion seen in the stars is due to neither of these two motions. First he shows that the motion seen in the stars is not one of circumgyration; and he proves this in two ways. First, because if the stellar bodies were being moved with the motion of circumgyration, then, even though the parts of the star exchanged places as to subject, the star as a whole would have to remain in the same place as to subject, the place being varied only according to notion, as is clear from what was proved in Vi. For that is the way things turn out for a spherical motion due to its relation to a center and to poles that are stationary. But we cannot admit such a situation in the stars, since the contrary is evident to sense — for we see stars sometimes in the east and sometimes in the west. Likewise, everyone says that the stars do not remain always in the same place but are transferred from one place to another. Therefore, the motion that appears to be in the stars is not one of circumgyration.
He shows the same thing another way, from the fact that if the motion of circumgyration should befit the stars, it would be reasonable for all to be moved with that kind of motion, since they are all of one nature, namely, the nature of heavenly body as was shown above. But such a motion is not seen in all stars but in the sun alone, and not when it is in just any part of the heaven, but only when it rises and sets. And these appearances are due not to the fact that the sun is circumgyrated but to the increased distance between the sun and our vision — for our vision, since it is so far from the sun, "wavers," i.e., quivers, on account of its feebleness, insofar as it is overwhelmed by the sun's exceeding brightness.
And this may also be why the stars seem to twinkle, namely, because of their being at the greatest distance from us, since they are in the eighth sphere. On the other hand, the planets are not seen to twinkle, because being nearer to us, our vision is powerful enough to reach them in full strength. But when looking at the "stationary," i.e., fixed, stars, our vision quivers as though from being extended to something very far off, due to the distance separating those stars from us. Now it is the quivering that occurs in our vision that makes the stars seem to be in motion, either according to twinkling, as in the case of a fixed star, or according to circumgyration in the case of the sun. For in order that something appear to be in motion, it makes no difference whether it is our vision, or the thing observed, that is in motion. This is plain in the case of those sailing along the coast, where, because they are in motion, it seems to them that the mountains and the land are in motion.
406. With respect to what is said here, one should consider that the Philosopher says here that our vision quivers as greatly extended, when looking at the fixed stars, not because seeing takes place by means of something sent out from the sight — for he disproves this theory in De Sensu et Sensato —but because in such a situation it makes no difference whether vision takes place because sight sends something out or because it receives something within it. For our vision strains to see things afar, not only if it should have to emit a visual ray to the distant body, but also if it has to receive a species travelling from the distant body, for the impression from a distant body is weaker and is, accordingly, more difficult to sense. However, Aristotle uses a manner of speaking in this instance as though sight took place by sending something out, because mathematicians so use it in their proofs, and many people speak in such terms. Now, as he himself says in II, words are to be used as most people use them.
407. It should also be noted that he calls certain stars "fixed" or "stationary," not because they are not moved at all when their sphere is moved, as are the planets, which are called "wandering," but because, unlike the planets, they always maintain the same relative position to one another and present the same configurations.
Likewise his assertion that the planets do not twinkle, must, as Simplicius says, be understood as applying to the majority of planets — for Mercury twinkles, and hence in Greek it is called Stilbon, from "twinkling." The sun, too, seems to twinkle and even circumgyrate. But the twinkling appears due to the fact that our sight cannot properly apprehend the things seen: in the case of the fixed stars this occurs on account of their distance; in the case of the sun on account of its exceeding brilliance. The circumgyration on the other hand is seen due to the fact that the seen object is able to transmute the sight in such a way that, the visual spirit having been turned about, the sun itself seems to turn about. Hence it is that the sun especially seems to rotate more when it rises and sets, for then our vision can fix itself more on it because its brilliance is not as powerful, on account of earthly vapors. But when it has risen, because of the excess of its brightness the eye cannot fix itself on it long enough to make it appear to rotate, but sees it scintillate.
But Alexander says that the reason why the sun appears to rotate at sunrise and sunset is because one senses its twofold motion, namely, the diurnal and its own proper motion, in comparison to the motionlessness of the earth. But this is not believable, namely, that the motion of the sun, especially that by which it is moved with its own proper motion, should be perceived in so short a space — when it is hardly felt even over many days. Aristotle says also, in the letter of the text, that this rotation appears, not from the sun, but from the distance of our vision.
408. One should know that Plato supposed that the stars are subject to a motion of circumgyration in addition to the motion they undergo in virtue of their orbs. Simplicius tries in various ways to show that this is so. First, because, since the stars are natural bodies, they must have some natural motion; and since they share in the nature of the heaven, they must of themselves be moved with a circular motion, which is circumgyration. Secondly, because the stars, in the opinion of many, are animated bodies and therefore must have self-movement: although they are in some sense parts of their orbs, since they have in themselves their own integrity and their own circumgyration. Thirdly, because, since a spherical figure is most suitable for circular motions and most unsuitable for other motions, it seems that stars are of themselves moved circularly with their own motion of circumgyration. In line with this, Plato proposed that the fixed stars are moved with two motions, namely, with a motion of circumgyration according to themselves, and with the motion of the orb (because they are seen to be moved from east to west). But the wandering stars are, according to him, moved with three motions: namely, with a motion of circumgyration, and with the motion of their own orb, and with the motion of the outermost orb, which is diurnal motion.
Simplicius also says that Aristotle is not here concerned with disproving this position. For he does not show that the stars are not circumgyrated at all, but rather that the motion which is manifest to sense in the stars is not one of circumgyration, since circumgyrated things remain in their entirety in the same place, whereas the stars, so far as the motion observed in them is concerned, do not remain in the same place. And because circumgyration is more clearly apparent in the sun at sunrise and sunset, he therefore shows that what is seen in it of such a motion, is not because of it, but because of a transmutation of our vision.
But since it was Aristotle's intent not to get away from sensible appearances, consequently, since such a circumgyration does not sensibly appear in the stars, he therefore did not assert this motion to exist in the stars, even though he did not directly disprove it. Likewise, he also did not do so because the movements of the heavenly bodies cause the motions of the lower bodies according as the former approach or recede from us — yet there is no effect noticed in lower bodies according to such a circumgyration of the stars, nor do the stars approach or recede from us according to this motion. For this reason, Aristotle is not concerned with attributing this motion to the stars.
409. Then he shows that the stars are not moved with a motion of "volutation." For whatever is revolved must be so turned that the same face is not always turn to the observer. But we see that in one of the stars, namely, in the moon, the same surface always appears to us, namely, that surface which is called the "face," because there appear in it certain distinguishing marks, just as there is in the face of a man a certain distinguishing according to lineament. From this it is clear that the moon is not moved with a motion of volutation. For the same reason no other stars are, because, since the same nature is in all the stars, the same reason is seen to hold for one and for the others. Thus he concludes: Since it would be reasonable for the stars, if they were moved on their own, to be moved with proper motions, namely, "regyration" and "volutation," and yet, as has been shown, they are not moved with these motions, therefore they are not moved of themselves.
410. It should be noted that the diversity which appears on the surface of the moon is variously explained by different ones. For some say that the cause of this diversity is the interposition of some body between us and the moon, thus preventing us from seeing its full brightness. Hence, in that portion where such bodies are interposed between us and the moon, it appears to be dark because we do not see the brightness of the moon in that part. However, this cannot be, for such an interposed body would not be interposed in the same way between the moon and the sight of a man in any part of the world whatever. Consequently a like disposition would not be observed in the moon from everywhere in the world, just as there is not seen a similar view of a solar eclipse from everywhere in the world, when the moon gets between the sun and the earth. But this does not occur in connection with the aforesaid diversity in the moon — for it is seen in a similar way from all parts of the earth, whether east, west, south, or north.
Others hold that this darkness appearing in the moon is a certain likeness of some body, such as the earth, or the sea, or mountains, which results in the moon after the manner in which a form results in a mirror.
But this too is voided for the same reason. Because if such forms of this sort were mirrored by a reflection of visual rays or visual forms, there would not appear a similar variation from everywhere on earth, any more than a form in a mirror appears according to a same disposition no matter from what angle one looks at it. The reason for this is that an image is reflected back at determined places according to the position of the bodies reflected. Moreover, the proposed explanation would nullify Aristotle's argument, because it could be said that the reason why the same diversity always appears to us in the moon is not because the same surface is always turned toward us, but because whatever the surface, it receives from the aforesaid causes such an appearance when it is turned toward us.
And therefore other say — and this is a better explanation — that such a diversity [on the surface of the moon] is seen in the moon because of the disposition of its substance, and not because of the interposition of some body or because of some reflection. There is a twofold opinion among them. For some say that the forms of effects are in a certain sense in their causes, in such a way, however, that, the higher the cause, the more uniformly the various forms of its effects are in it, whereas the lower the cause, the more distinctly are the forms of its effects in it. Now the heavenly bodies are the cause of the lower bodies, and among the heavenly bodies, the moon has the lowest rank. Therefore, in the moon, according to its lower surface there is contained, so to speak, the diversity of generable bodies as in an exemplar. This was Iamblichus' opinion.
But others say that, although the heavenly bodies are of another nature than the four elements, yet the properties of the elements pre-exist in the heavenly bodies as in their causes — not in the same way as in the elements however, but in a certain more excellent manner. Now among the elements the top rank is held by fire, which has the greatest light, while the lowest in rank is held by earth which has a minimum of light. Consequently, the moon, which is the lowest of the heavenly bodies, is proportionate to earth and is in some sense similar to it in nature — for which reason it cannot be totally lit up by the sun. Hence, in that portion where it is not perfectly lit up by the sun, there is seen to be a certain darkness. And this darkness always appears according to the same disposition in the moon — something that would not be if the moon were revolving, for then the look of that obscurity would gradually change.
2-13
From their shape the stars shown, not to move themselves. No sense power in the heavenly, bodies
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἄλογον τὸ μηθὲν ὄργανον αὐτοῖς ἀποδοῦναι τὴν φύσιν πρὸς τὴν κίνησιν (οὐθὲν γὰρ ὡς ἔτυχε ποιεῖ ἡ φύσις), οὐδὲ τῶν μὲν ζῴων φροντίσαι, τῶν δ' οὕτω τιμίων ὑπεριδεῖν, ἀλλ' ἔοικεν ὥσπερ ἐπίτηδες ἀφελεῖν πάντα δι' ὧν ἐνεδέχετο προϊέναι καθ' αὑτά, καὶ ὅτι πλεῖστον ἀποστῆσαι τῶν ἐχόντων ὄργανα πρὸς κίνησιν. Διὸ καὶ εὐλόγως ἂν δόξειεν ὅ τε (290b.) ὅλος οὐρανὸς σφαιροειδὴς εἶναι καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ἄστρων. Πρὸς μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ κίνησιν ἡ σφαῖρα τῶν σχημάτων χρησιμώτατον (οὕτω γὰρ ἂν καὶ τάχιστα κινοῖτο καὶ μάλιστα κατέχοι τὸν αὐτὸν τόπον), πρὸς δὲ τὴν εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν ἀχρηστότατον ἥκιστα γὰρ ὅμοιον τοῖς δι' αὑτῶν κινητικοῖς οὐδὲν γὰρ ἀπηρτημένον ἔχει οὐδὲ προέχον, ὥσπερ τὸ εὐθύγραμμον, ἀλλὰ πλεῖστον ἀφέ��τηκε τῷ σχήματι τῶν πορευτικῶν σωμάτων. Ἐπεὶ οὖν δεῖ τὸν μὲν οὐρανὸν κινεῖσθαι τὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ κίνησιν, τὰ δ' ἄλλα [ἄστρα] μὴ προϊέναι δι' αὑτῶν, εὐλόγως ἂν ἑκάτερον εἴη σφαιροειδές οὕτω γὰρ μάλιστα τὸ μὲν κινήσεται τὸ δ' ἠρεμήσει.
411. Having presented two arguments to show that the stellar bodies are not moved with a motion of their own but are carried along by the motion of their circles or spheres, the Philosopher now proves the same thing with a third argument [303], which is based on the shape of the stars.
And he says that if the stars were moved with a forward motion, as though walking through their circles, it would seem unreasonable that nature should not equip them with instruments suitable for local motion. For nature does not produce its effects haphazardly especially when it comes to its more noble products. Consequently, it is not unreasonable to suppose that nature would have care for terrestrial animals by equipping them with organs suitable for progressive motion and would neglect bodies as precious as the stars and not equip them with organs suitable for progressive motion. Rather it seems that nature deliberately did not intend the stars to be moved on their own, from the fact that it deprived them of all instruments by which they might move of themselves with progressive movement, and furthermore, because the stars are most removed from the shape of animals having instruments suitable to progressive motion. For animals of this sort, the more perfect they are, the greater variety do they exhibit in their parts — but the stars have everywhere the greatest degree of uniformity, since they are spherical in shape.
412. On this account it seems reasonable for the entire heaven, and for each star, to be spherical. For a spherical shape seems uniquely suitable to circular motion, i.e., a motion in which a spherical body is moved "in itself," i.e., not changing its place as a whole except as to notion, but only as to its parts, as is proved in VI. The fact that a body circularly moved is spherical allows it to be moved with the greatest speed, not only because a circular line is the smallest of all the figures that can contain an equal area but also because rectilinear bodies do not have a uniform motion in every part, since they are more fixed wherever they have a flat surface than where they have corners. Hence, since a sphere is nowhere flat but everywhere constitutes a point, i.e., a corner, it is plain that a spherical body moves swiftest with a circular motion. Likewise, it will most perfectly retain its own place, since no part of it ever begins to be except where another was, whereas this does not happen with rectilinear bodies, whose corners jut out further than their surfaces.
However, a spherical shape is least suited for forward motion. Sphericity has nothing in common with the bodies of animals that are capable of self-movement. For there are not depressions or eminences in a sphere as there are in a rectilinear body. But sphericity is most unlike the shape of the bodies of animals which move forward by a certain raising and lowering, for which reason the members of animals are flexible at their joints in order to be suitable for progressive movements.
Since, therefore, it was necessary for the whole heaven, i.e., the sphere thereof, to be moved with circular motion, whereas the stars were not to be moved with a forward motion, it was reasonable for each to be made spherical, namely, both the sphere and the star. For the heaven being spherical makes it suitable for circular motion, and the stars' being spherical makes them unsuited for progressive motion. Consequently, the latter are not moved within the circles, but, while remaining stationary in themselves, are carried along by the motion of the circles.
413. Now, a difficulty can arise here: namely, since the bodies of the spheres are not visible, being transparent, and it could be said that the stars are moved, as it were, in air, why did Aristotle omit to make inquiry on this point?
But it should be said that it is abundantly clear from Aristotle's teachings that in the heaven are not only distinct stellar bodies but also distinct bodily spheres.
First, from the fact that he shows the stars are not being moved on their own by the motion which appears in them.
Secondly, it is clear from an argument he previously gave, namely, that there would be no reason why a star which traverses a greater circle should be moved more swiftly, whereas there is a reason if a motion of the circles is assumed, since it is reasonable for a greater circle by its own motion to be moved more swiftly.
Thirdly, because Aristotle in the beginning of this book proved that there is a body which is moved circularly, while the movement of a star, if it were moved on its own, without its orb, would be progressive and not circular, because it would not be moved while remaining in the same place.
Fourthly, because that space in which the stars would be moved cannot be void, since it is impossible for a void to exist in nature, as was proved in IV. But if it were filled with some other body that had nothing in common with the nature of the stars, for example, fire or air, this would be clearly unacceptable for two reasons. First, because it is not fitting for one and the same place to act as a place for generable-corruptible bodies such as fire and air, and for uncorruptible bodies, namely, the stars, since diverse bodies have places that are diverse, each being suited to the natures involved. Secondly, because it is not reasonable that the lower bodies be continuous and the heavenly bodies mutually discontinuous. What remains therefore is that the entire space in which the stars are seen to be moved is filled with a heavenly body which pertains to the very substance of the spheres.
Fifthly, it is clear from the fact that the sun and moon are moved upon circles that mutually intersect. This is plain from the fact that the moon is now north and now south of the circle in which the sun is moved. But it is evident that the intersections of two circles which are called "nodes," or "head and tail," do not occur always in the same points, since they cannot happen unless the moon is in conjunction or in opposition to the sun with respect to one of these nodular points. But if this variation were due solely to the motion of the moon, it would follow that the moon would not be moved circularly but spirally, which is contrary to the nature of the heavenly bodies. Therefore, it is plain that the circle of the moon has a motion of its own. For the same reason, so do the circle of the sun and those of the other stars.
414. Now it should be kept in mind that when Aristotle states it is not reasonable that nature would be solicitous for the animals and neglect so precious bodies, he is not calling stars animals. Because, as Alexander says, it is sensitivity that makes up the animal nature; but in the heavenly bodies, if they are animate, there is not the sensitive power of the souls nor likewise the nutritive. Wherefore, it is only in an equivocal sense that they are called animals, namely, because they have an intellective soul.
However, in his commentary, Simplicius endeavors to refute this on the ground that if anything honorable is attributed to terrestrial bodies, then with more reason to heavenly bodies. But since sensitivity pertains to the excellence of a body, there seems to be much more reason for heavenly bodies to possess it than terrestrial bodies. Morover, since heavenly bodies touch one another, it seems unfitting that they should not sense one another. Therefore, he concedes the existence of three senses in heavenly bodies, namely, sight, hearing and touch, but excludes from them the other two more material senses, namely, smell and taste.
415. Let us see, therefore, how much of this is in accord with the judgment of Aristotle, who seems to feel that no part of the soul but the intellective is found in the heavenly bodies. For he says in XII that the first mover moves the heaven as an object of desire, not indeed by the desire of sense, but by the desire of intellect. And in II he says: "All corruptible things that possess reason possess all the rest" — as though this were not the case in incorruptible bodies, in which he believed intellect or reason to exist without the other powers of the soul.
But a statement of his in III raises a difficulty. He says, "A body cannot have a soul and a discerning intellect without possessing sensation, if it is not stationary," i.e., "if it is produced by generation," i.e., if it is generated and corruptible, as is evident in men and other animals of this sort. He continues: "Nor yet even if it were not produced by generation" — by which he seems to signify that, not even if a body is ungenerated and incorruptible, as are the heavenly bodies, would it have intellect without sensation. In proof of this he adds: "Why should it not have?" — i.e., not have sensation, seeing that it has intellect. "Because it were better so for the body or for the soul," which is as though saying that the lack of sensation is either for the good of the body or for the good of the soul. Then he goes on: "But clearly it would not be better for either —for the absence of sensation will not enable the one [the soul] to think better or the other [the body] to exist better [ice., more durably]." Then he concludes: "Therefore, no body which is not stationary has soul without sensation." From this he appears to feel that if heavenly bodies are animated with a rational and intellective soul, they also have sensation.
But what he immediately adds goes counter to this interpretation: "But if a body has sensation, it must be either simple or mixed. And simple it cannot be; for then it could not have touch, which is indispensable." Since, therefore, the heavenly bodies are simple, they cannot possess sensation.
416. Hence the above-quoted words of Aristotle are explained by Themistius and Averroes in their commentaries in the sense that the expression, "Not even if it were not produced by generation," means: "Not even that which is incorruptible," namely, a heavenly body, "has sensation. And why does it not have sensation?" — as though saying that this is the reason why it does not, namely, "Because it were better so either for the soul or for the body," i.e., if a heavenly body had sensation, it would possess it either for the good of the soul or for the good of the body. "But clearly it is not better for either, for the one [namely, the soul of the heavenly body], will not understand any better" [for its intellect is not the kind that receives from the senses as the human intellect does; rather such an intellect understands after the manner of a separated substance, to which it is immediately continuous in the hierarchy of things]; "nor will the other [namely, the body] exist any better. because of this," i.e., it will not be kept in existence through sensation as occurs with the bodies of earthly animals, which are preserved from corruptive things through sense, as is plain from what he had already said [in ].
Now this explanation seems to be more fitting than the other, so far as the efficacy of the argument is concerned. For in order to show that something is not without purpose [frustra], it is more necessary to show for what purpose something exists than to show for what purpose something does not exist. Hence, in order for the heaven not to possess sensation, it is enough to show that no advantage would come to it from sensation (and these are the lines according to which the second explanation proceeds). Accordingly, it is not necessary to show that it is better for it not to have sensation (which is the way the first explanation proceeds). For if no advantage would accrue to the heaven from sensation, that is reason enough for not having sensation. But the conclusion which he draws appears not to fit this understanding, but rather the previous one. For he subsequently concludes, "Therefore no body that is not stationary has soul without sensation." However, it could be said that this conclusion is connected not with what immediately preceded it, but with what he had said above about generable bodies.
Yet, because this interpretation seems somewhat extorted, it seems better to say that the phrase, "Not even what is not produced by generation," should be continued with the preceding statement, so that its meaning would be: Just as a body which is produced by generation does not have an intellective soul without sensation, so also a body that is not produced by generation. But by the phrase, "A body that is not produced by generation," is not meant here the heaven — which is evident from the fact that the heaven remains in the same place as to its entirety, whereas he is here speaking of a body that is not stationary. Therefore, Aristotle seems to be speaking here of certain animated bodies which the Platonists called "demons," and described as being animals possessed of an airy body and eternal in time, as the Platonist Apuleius says in his book, on the God of Socrates. They posited such bodies as moving with progressive motion and not stationary in the same place.
417. But anyone who considers the position of the heavenly bodies among natural bodies will see that it does not befit the former to have no sensitive potency. First, because these bodies are not passive, but active. Hence, it is not suitable for their souls, if the bodies are animate, to have sensitive potencies, which are passive.
Secondly, because such bodies, being spherical, are uniform, whereas a body possessing sensitivity must have a variety of organs. For, since sense is a power knowing individual things, a body must have diverse sensitive powers if it is to sense perfectly, by which it may know the different genera of sensible things, different organs being adapted for different senses. Hence, the uniformity of the spherical body conflicts with the disposition of the sensitive soul.
Thirdly, because the heavenly bodies are as though the universal causes of lower effects. Consequently, sensible effects pre-exist in the heavenly bodies not according to a singular, but according to a universal, notion, as being in universal causes. With much more reason, then, do the notions of sensible things exist in the souls of heavenly bodies (if they are animate), not according to a singular notion, which is proper to sense, but according to a universal notion, which belongs to intellect.
418. The heavenly bodies, therefore, if they are animated, have intellect without sense. But just as the intellect of separated substances knows not only universals but also particulars (for they have by one knowing power what we have by several, so, too, the souls of heavenly bodies with their intellect know not only universals but particulars as well. For it is thus in all things, that the perfections which are attributed to the lower through many, a higher thing possesses through one — just as imagination is one power capable of knowing all sensible things, which things sense, however, perceives through different powers.
This also excludes an objection presented by Avicenna who, in his , shows that the soul of a heavenly body must have an imagination through which it may perceive the individual positions it assumes in the heaven by its motion, just as our practical intellect does not act according to a universal apprehension without a particular, as is said in III. For, according to what has been said, the substance which moves the heaven — whether it be a separated substance or a soul — can perceive individual positions through the intellect without sense, as has been said.
419. The objection of Simplicius, that sensing pertains to the nobility of a lower body, and hence is even more appropriate for a heavenly body, is answered in two ways. First of all, because, since the soul is not for the sake of the body but vice versa, we should not, when considering the potencies of the soul, primarily consider what pertains to the nobility of the body, but what pertains to the notion of soul. Secondly, because that which lower bodies possess, namely, the ability to know sensible things, in an inferior way, that is, through sensation, is possessed by heavenly bodies in a higher way, namely, through an intellective soul united to them.
2-14
Indirect and direct proof that heavenly bodies do not produce sounds
Φανερὸν δ' ἐκ τούτων ὅτι καὶ τὸ φάναι γίνεσθαι φερομένων ἁρμονίαν, ὡς συμφώνων γινομένων τῶν ψόφων, κομψῶς μὲν εἴρηται καὶ περιττῶς ὑπὸ τῶν εἰπόντων, οὐ μὴν οὕτως ἔχει τἀληθές.
Δοκεῖ γάρ τισιν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τηλικούτων φερομένων σωμάτων γίγνεσθαι ψόφον, ἐπεὶ καὶ τῶν παρ' ἡμῖν οὔτε τοὺς ὄγκους ἐχόντων ἴσους οὔτε τοιούτῳ τάχει φερομένων ἡλίου δὲ καὶ σελήνης, ἔτι τε τοσούτων τὸ πλῆθος ἄστρων καὶ τὸ μέγεθος φερομένων τῷ τάχει τοιαύτην φορὰν ἀδύνατον μὴ γίγνεσθαι ψόφον ἀμήχανόν τινα τὸ μέγεθος.
Ὑποθέμενοι δὲ ταῦτα καὶ τὰς ταχυτῆτας ἐκ τῶν ἀποστάσεων ἔχειν τοὺς τῶν συμφωνιῶν λόγους, ἐναρμόνιον γίγνεσθαί φασι τὴν φωνὴν φερομένων κύκλῳ τῶν ἄστρων.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἄλογον δοκεῖ τὸ μὴ συνακούειν ἡμᾶς τῆς φωνῆς ταύτης,
αἴτιον τούτου φασὶν εἶναι τὸ γιγνομένων εὐθὺς ὑπάρχειν τὸν ψόφον, ὥστε μὴ διάδηλον εἶναι πρὸς τὴν ἐναντίαν σιγήν πρὸς ἄλληλα γὰρ φωνῆς καὶ σιγῆς εἶναι τὴν διάγνωσιν ὥστε καθάπερ τοῖς χαλκοτύποις διὰ συνήθειαν οὐθὲν δοκεῖ διαφέρειν, καὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ταὐτὸ συμβαίνειν.
Ταῦτα δή, καθάπερ εἴρηται πρότερον, ἐμμελῶς μὲν λέγεται καὶ μουσικῶς, ἀδύνατον δὲ τοῦτον ἔχειν τὸν τρόπον. Οὐ γὰρ μόνον τὸ μηθὲν ἀκούειν ἄτοπον, περὶ οὗ λέγειν ἐγχειροῦσι τὴν αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ μηδὲν πάσχειν χωρὶς αἰσθήσεως. Οἱ γὰρ ὑπερβάλλοντες ψόφοι διακναίουσι καὶ τῶν ἀψύχων σωμάτων τοὺς ὄγκους, οἷον ὁ τῆς βροντῆς διίστησι λίθους καὶ (291a.) τὰ καρτερώτατα τῶν σωμάτων. Τοσούτων δὲ φερομένων, καὶ τοῦ ψόφου διιόντος πρὸς τὸ φερόμενον μέγεθος, πολλαπλάσιον μέγεθος ἀναγκαῖον ἀφικνεῖσθαί τε δεῦρο καὶ τὴν ἰσχὺν ἀμήχανον εἶναι τῆς βίας.
Ἀλλ' εὐλόγως οὔτ' ἀκούομεν οὔτε πάσχοντα φαίνεται τὰ σώματα βίαιον οὐδὲν πάθος, διὰ τὸ μὴ ψοφεῖν. Ἅμα δ' ἐστὶ τό τ' αἴτιον τούτων δῆλον, καὶ μαρτύριον τῶν εἰρημένων ἡμῖν λόγων, ὥς εἰσιν ἀληθεῖς τὸ γὰρ ἀπορηθὲν καὶ ποιῆσαν τοὺς Πυθαγορείους φάναι γίγνεσθαι συμφωνίαν τῶν φερομένων ἡμῖν ἐστι τεκμήριον.
Ὅσα (9) μὲν γὰρ αὐτὰ φέρεται, ποιεῖ ψόφον καὶ πληγήν ὅσα δ' ἐν φερομένῳ ἐνδέδεται ἢ ἐνυπάρχει, καθάπερ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ τὰ μόρια, οὐχ οἷόν τε ψοφεῖν, οὐδ' αὐτὸ τὸ πλοῖον, εἰ φέροιτο ἐν ποταμῷ. Καίτοι τοὺς αὐτοὺς λόγους ἂν ἐξείη λέγειν, ὡς ἄτοπον εἰ μὴ φερόμενος ὁ ἱστὸς καὶ ἡ πρύμνα ποιεῖ ψόφον πολὺν τηλικαύτης νεώς, ἢ πάλιν αὐτὸ τὸ πλοῖον κινούμενον. Τὸ δ' ἐν μὴ φερομένῳ φερόμενον ποιεῖ ψόφον ἐν φερομένῳ δὲ συνεχὲς καὶ μὴ ποιοῦν πληγὴν ἀδύνατον ψοφεῖν. Ὥστ' ἐνταῦθα λεκτέον ὡς εἴπερ ἐφέρετο τὰ σώματα τούτων εἴτ' ἐν ἀέρος πλήθει κεχυμένῳ κατὰ τὸ πᾶν εἴτε πυρός, ὥσπερ πάντες φασίν, ἀναγκαῖον ποιεῖν ὑπερφυᾶ τῷ μεγέθει τὸν ψόφον, τούτου δὲ γινομένου καὶ δεῦρ' ἀφικνεῖσθαι καὶ διακναίειν. Ὥστ' ἐπείπερ οὐ φαίνεται τοῦτο συμβαῖνον, οὔτ' ἂν ἔμψυχον οὔτε βίαιον φέροιτο φορὰν οὐθὲν αὐτῶν,
ὥσπερ τὸ μέλλον ἔσεσθαι προνοούσης τῆς φύσεως, ὅτι μὴ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἐχούσης τῆς κινήσεως οὐθὲν ἂν ἦν τῶν περὶ τὸν δεῦρο τόπον ὁμοίως ἔχον.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν σφαιροειδῆ τὰ ἄστρα καὶ ὅτι οὐ κινεῖται δι' αὑτῶν, εἴρηται.
420. After determining the matter of the motion of the stars, the Philosopher here treats of their sound, sound being an effect of local motion, as is said in II. Concerning this he does two things:
primo excludit opinionem aliorum;
secundo determinat veritatem, ibi: sed rationabiliter neque audimus et cetera.
First he excludes the opinions of others;
Secondly, he determines the truth, at 428.
Regarding the first he does three things:
primo ponit quod intendit;
secundo inducit rationem aliter sentientium, ibi: videtur autem quibusdam etc.;
tertio ostendit quomodo dubitationi satisfacere nituntur, ibi: quoniam autem irrationabile et cetera.
First he states his intention;
Secondly, he presents the arguments of those who hold the opposite, 421;
Thirdly, he shows how they try to account for a difficulty, at 423.
He says therefore first [304] that it is clear from what has been said (namely, that the stars are not moved), that if anyone asserts that a certain "harmony," i.e., a harmonious sound, results from their motion as though the sounds of the stars harmonize with one another, such a one would be guilty both of "levity" for making assertions without sufficient reason, and of speaking "superfluously." He says this on the ground that such a sound would not be advantageous to anything, but rather most harmful, as will be clear below. Moreover, the truth is otherwise, according to what has so far been demonstrated.
421. Then at [305] he presents the argument proposed by the Pythagoreans who held the aforesaid opinion.
First he shows how they proved that the heavenly bodies produce a loud sound by their motion. For there are three things that seem to account for a loud sound made by bodies that are in motion among us, namely, such sounds are due to the size of the bodies that are in motion and to the velocity of their motion and to the number of bodies involved. Now the bodies that exist among us and cause sound have neither the size nor the speed of the sun and moon and other stars. This is evident in part from the fact that the sun and moon circle the whole world every day, and in part from what astronomy brings out about the sizes and the velocity of their motion. This is further confirmed by considering the great number of stars. Consequently there seems to be good reason why the sun and other stars should produce the greatest sounds in their course.
422. Secondly, at [306] he shows how they proved their sounds would produce a harmony. For it is evident from what is learned in music that swiftness of motion produces a sharp [high] sound, while slowness produces a grave [low] sound, Now a determinate proportion of high and low according to certain numbers is the cause of harmony in sounds — thus the ratio of 2 to 1 produces the diapason [octave]; the ratio of 3 to 2 produces the diapente [fifth] and so on for the others.
Now it has been shown in what has gone before that the larger the circle in which a star is moved the greater is its speed, Such a circle for any given star is reckoned to be larger or smaller depending on its distance from the pole of that sphere in which the fixed stars are moved; while for a planet the size of its circle is reckoned from the center [of the universe]. Hence, according to the proportion of the distances of the stars between themselves, or from the center or the poles, they understood there to be a difference of speeds in the motions of the stars, and consequently, of high or low pitch in their sounds. For they found the elongation or distances to be according to numerical proportions, which produce musical harmonies. Therefore, said the Pythagoreans, the sound of the stars moving in their circuit is harmonious; and this sound they called a "voice," since they held the heavenly bodies to be animated.
423. Then at [307] he shows how they met a certain difficulty.
First, therefore, he presents the difficulty: Since we have hearing, by which we perceive sound, it does not seem reasonable that we should not hear such a loud voice if it were to proceed from the movement of the stars.
Secondly, at [308] he shows how they met this difficulty. For they asserted that the reason why we do not hear this voice is that, as soon as we are born, that sound co-exists with us, and therefore it cannot make itself noticeable by its opposite which is silence. For these two things, namely, the voice and silence are judged and discerned the one by the other. Hence, in relation to the sound of the heavenly bodies men are in a situation similar to the people who hammer on bronze and become so accustomed to it that, as it were, they do not perceive the difference between sound and silence, so filled with this sound do their ears become.
424. Thirdly, at [309] he attacks this explanation, declaring that as we said before, these statements are put forth by the Pythagoreans in an "alluring manner," i.e., according to a certain probable argument that appeals to the ears of men, and "musically," i.e., according to musical arguments, but without getting to the truth. For it is impossible that the reality be as they state. Because if heavenly bodies should make such great sounds, not only is it inconsistent that none of them is heard, which they try to solve, but also inconsistent that lower bodies do not suffer anything from these sounds, even though they do not perceive them. For we know that excessive sounds destroy not only the hearing of animals, but even certain inanimate objects — for example, the sound of thunder rends asunder stones and even harder bodies, such as iron, and buildings and the like. Now this happens not because inanimate bodies are affected by sound in the sense of something perceptible by hearing, but inasmuch as along with the sound, there is produced a violent striking and moving of the air, as the Philosopher says in II.
Since, therefore, heavenly bodies which are in motion, are of such great size, and since their sound, if produced, must be louder than thunder or any other sound, to a degree proportionate to their size, then certainly there is every reason that their sound should reach here and that there would be an unbearable power in the violence that it would do to lower bodies.
Their explanation is also plainly insufficient on yet another score, because continued exposure to strong sounds not only takes away the discernment of those sounds, but also that of others — as hammerers of bronze cannot distinguish other very slight sounds. Hence if it is through familiarity with them that we cannot hear the sounds of heavenly bodies, then for the same reason, we should not be able to hear any other sounds.
425. But, as Simplicius says in his Commentary, it seems that the position of Pythagoras can be maintained against the statements of Aristotle. First of all, because it can be said that the sounds of the heavenly bodies are not destructive but rather preservative and vivifying, just as the motion of the heaven is as a certain life for all things existing in nature, as is said in VIII.
Then, too, our failure to hear the sounds of heavenly bodies is not due to habit, as is said here, since the Pythagoreans claimed that Pythagoras at times heard this harmony, who, nevertheless, like others, was used to hearing it. But they say this occurred because not all sensible things are proportionate to all the senses, so as to be perceived by them — just as dogs perceive many odors that men cannot detect. In like manner, it can be said that those sounds are not perceptible to human hearing unless one have a sense uplifted and purified as did Pythagoras. It could also be said that Pythagoras heard such sounds not by hearing them but by knowing the proportions from which that harmony is formed.
426. But these explanations do not seem to contain the truth.
First, because we know that although heavenly bodies are the cause of life, and especially the sun, yet its brilliance harms our sight, whose proportion it exceeds. For the same reason a sound coming from the motion of those bodies would on account of its excessive power destroy our hearing.
Secondly, because, just as the intellect can perceive all intelligibles, so sensitivity can perceive all sensibles, for example, sight all that is visible and hearing all that is audible — wherefore in III it is said that the soul is in a certain way all things according to sense and according to intellect. Hence if there were a hearing power that could not perceive any and every sound, then either the sound or the hearing would have to be called such only equivocally.
Now it can happen that some animal may take pleasure in some kind of sensible thing according to a particular sense that does not delight some other animal according to that sense. For example, man takes pleasure according to the olfactory sense in the odors of roses and lilies, but the other animals do not, for odors of this kind are found agreeable to men for themselves, whereas for other animals odors do not befit them or give them pleasure, except as referring to food; and the same is true for colors. Also it can happen that an animal is unable to distinguish according to some sense the difference of some things because its sense is weak and because the object to be sensed is small. Thus, man, whose sense of smell is weak, cannot discern the difference between certain odors, for example, the odors of animals that are passing by, but dogs do. Yet if the odors were strong, men also could distinguish them. Similarly, some animals according to the sense of sight gaze on the sun's brilliance, which the owl's eyes cannot stand, and avoid as destructive of its vision.
Hence it would be impossible for such violent sounds to proceed from the movements of the heavenly bodies without being perceived by men or without harming their hearing; unless of course they are called sounds equivocally.
427. And that seems to be the opinion of Simplicius who is seen to dispute Alexander's statement that colors and all such things, should they exist in the heavenly bodies, are present in them as accidents and extraneous additions. Against this he says that to posit accidents and extraneous additions in the stars he considers as most unacceptable, since they have substantial and specific power. For it seemed to him that, because heavenly bodies are the cause of the substantial forms in lower things, no accident could exist in them. And according to this, since sensation is aware only of accidents, it would follow that we cannot sense anything of these bodies. Wherefore he asserts that we neither perceive the stars themselves, nor their size or figures, nor their surpassing beauties, nor their motion — the cause of their sound; all we see is their luster, as it were — just as, for example, the light of the sun is seen around the earth, but the sun itself is not seen.
But this is most expressly false. First of all because Aristotle in II says: "Neither air nor water is transparent because it is air or water; they are transparent because each of them has contained in it a certain nature which is the same in both and is also found in the eternal and uppermost body." And for the same reason light, which is the actuality of the transparent, possesses the same nature in lower bodies and in heavenly bodies. If, therefore, these inferior bodies possess accidents that can be perceived by sense, then by the same token there exist in the heavenly bodies accidents perceptible to sense.
Furthermore, shape and size are mathematical things, whose notions are independent of that in which they may exist. Therefore, just as the shape and size of lower bodies are perceptible accidents, so too is this the case in heavenly bodies. Moreover, this position would destroy all certitude of the science of astronomy which proceeds from what appears to our senses about heavenly bodies.
Again, how could the motion of the heavenly bodies be their very substance, since motion is something most imperfect? This position would force us to say that, in the sun, shape, light, and motion were one and the same thing, since of one thing there is but one substance. Hence it is plain that it is wholly impossible for what he says to be.
Now there is nothing to prevent heavenly bodies from having a specific power and there being at the same time certain accidents in them — for in the lower bodies there are certain accidental entities, although they have the power to generate things akin. to them in kind.
428. Then at [310] he determines the truth.
Et primo proponit quod intendit;
secundo manifestat propositum, ibi: quaecumque quidem et cetera.
First he proposes what he intends;
Secondly, he manifests his proposition, at 429.
He says therefore first [310] that it is reasonable that we do not hear the sound of heavenly bodies and that lower bodies are seen to suffer no violent effects from them — because they make no sound. Now the very argument that will explain the reason for this, i.e., why we do not hear the sounds of the heavenly bodies and why we suffer no violence from them, will at the same time confirm the truth of the previous statements, namely, to the effect that the stars have no motion of their own. For the problem raised by the Pythagoreans' teaching that a "symphony," i.e., a musical harmony, resulted from the motion of the heavenly bodies, will serve as our argument that the stars are not moved on their own.
429. Then at [311] he manifests his proposition.
et primo ratione sumpta ex causa effectiva soni;
secundo ex causa finali, ibi: velut futurum et cetera.
First, with an argument taken from the efficient cause of sound;
Secondly, with one taken from the final cause at 430.
He says therefore first [311] that whatever bodies among lower bodies are moved according to themselves, these produce a sound to the extent that they produce a "blow," i.e., a percussion, of the air. But bodies that are not moved on their own, but are embedded, or in some way exist, in a locally moving body cannot cause sound, just as people seated in a boat do not cause a sound when the boat is moved, any more than do the parts of the boat firmly attached to the boat, unless because of the weakness of the joint, or when the ship is buffeted. Moreover, we do not perceive that any sound is made by a ship when it is carried along by the current of a river, i.e., when the ship's motion is due entirely to the flow of the water; however, if the motion of the ship is swifter than that of the water, then it will make a sound insofar as it cuts the water.
Yet according to the very arguments by which the Pythagoreans asserted the heavenly bodies to make a sound, someone could say that it is inconsistent with this that the "tree," i.e., the mast, of a ship, and the poop, while being so large, make no sound" or that the ship itself makes no sound when it is carried along by the current. We must, of course, understand that he is excluding the sound due to cutting the water, but not the sound, if any, due to the air being cut by the part of the ship above water. Such a sound is heard especially when the air resists in gusts of wind. But whatever is moved locally on its own — and not in some body which is carried along —without causing any percussion, cannot make a sound.
It must be said, therefore, that if the bodies of the stars were moved by themselves, whether in a great body of air, or whether we understand air as diffused through the whole universe, or whether in a great body of fire, as all those say who assign the highest place in bodies to fire, then the stars in their motion would have to make a sound greater than any natural sound. If that were so, it would follow that that sound would reach us here, and not only would it be heard by us, but it would corrupt the bodies which exist here. But because we do not see this happen, it follows that none of the stars is moved on its own, neither by a violent motion, nor by a motion proceeding from its soul. For the stars could not be moved on their own without dividing either the celestial spheres or some intermediate bodies. Now the spheres are moved on their own, yet they do not divide any body — hence no sound results from their movement.
It is clear that, by what he says here, the Philosopher excludes the imagining of those holding that the stars are not moved in the spheres but in certain intermediate bodies, such as air or fire or something of that sort.
430. Then at [312] he shows the same thing from the final cause. For nature has endowed the stars with no motion of their own, and consequently with no sounds, as though foreseeing that unless the stars' motion should be such that they would not move of themselves, there would follow the undesirable consequence that nothing among lower things would be "constant in itself," i.e., preserved for a certain space of time in its being.
One is given to understand by this, as Alexander notes, that Aristotle here feels that God exercises a providence over the things here below; for providence cannot be attributed to nature as it is a certain power in bodies, but only as it refers to a mind establishing nature.
In summing up he concludes [313] that we have said that the stars are spherical in shape and that they are not moved on their own.
2-15
Swiftness and slowness in the motion of the planets proportionate to their distance from the first sphere and the earth
Περὶ δὲ τῆς τάξεως αὐτῶν, ὃν μὲν τρόπον ἕκαστα κινεῖται τῷ τὰ μὲν εἶναι πρότερα τὰ δ' ὕστερα, καὶ πῶς ἔχει πρὸς ἄλληλα τοῖς ἀποστήμασιν, ἐκ τῶν περὶ ἀστρολογίαν θεωρείσθω λέγεται γὰρ ἱκανῶς.
Συμβαίνει δὲ κατὰ λόγον γίγνεσθαι τὰς ἑκάστου κινήσεις τοῖς ἀποστήμασι τῷ τὰς μὲν εἶναι θάττους τὰς δὲ βραδυτέρας ἐπεὶ γὰρ ὑπόκειται τὴν μὲν ἐσχάτην τοῦ οὐρανοῦ περιφορὰν ἁπλῆν τ' εἶναι (291b.) καὶ ταχίστην, τὰς δὲ τῶν ἄλλων βραδυτέρας τε καὶ πλείους (ἕκαστον γὰρ ἀντιφέρεται τῷ οὐρανῷ κατὰ τὸν αὑτοῦ κύκλον), εὔλογον ἤδη τὸ μὲν ἐγγυτάτω τῆς ἁπλῆς καὶ πρώτης περιφορᾶς ἐν πλείστῳ χρόνῳ διιέναι τὸν αὑτοῦ κύκλον, τὸ δὲ πορρωτάτω ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ, τῶν δ' ἄλλων τὸ ἐγγύτερον ἀεὶ ἐν πλείονι, τὸ δὲ πορρώτερον ἐν ἐλάττονι. Τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἐγγυτάτω μάλιστα κρατεῖται, τὸ δὲ πορρωτάτω πάντων ἥκιστα διὰ τὴν ἀπόστασιν τὰ δὲ μεταξὺ κατὰ λόγον ἤδη τῆς ἀποστάσεως, ὥσπερ καὶ δεικνύουσιν οἱ μαθηματικοί.
431. After deciding about the nature and motion of the stars, the Philosopher here determines their order and position, and especially with respect to the planets — for with respect to the fixed stars it is plain that all are situated in the outermost sphere. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ostendit quid circa hoc naturalis a mathematico supponere debeat;
secundo ostendit quid circa hoc proprie ad considerationem naturalis pertineat, ibi: accidit autem et cetera.
First he shows that in this matter the natural philosopher should take the mathematician's suppositions;
Secondly, he shows what pertains strictly to the natural philosopher to consider in this matter, at 432.
He says therefore [314] that in regard to the coordination of the stars, namely, as to how each is arranged, in such a way that some are "prior" and some "posterior," i.e., higher and lower, and how they are related as to "elongations," i.e., as to how far one is distant from another, must be considered from what is stated in astronomy where these particular aspects are sufficiently determined. For these matters cannot be derived from the principles of natural philosophy, but from mathematical principles, i.e., from the proportions existing between magnitudes.
Now Anaximander is said to have been the first to find out the notions of the magnitudes of the stars, and of their distances one from the other and from the earth; while it is to the first Pythagoreans that credit is given for grasping the order of position of the planets, although these matters were given more careful and more perfect consideration by Hipparchus and Ptolemy.
432. Then at [315] he shows what belongs to the natural philosopher to consider on these points, namely, the swiftness and slowness of their motions. He says, therefore, that it is reasonable for the motions of any stars to be slower and faster depending on their proportionate distance from the first sphere and from the earth.
For we suppose as sensibly evident that the outermost revolution of the heaven is "simple," i.e., not composed of several motions, because no irregularity appears in it; moreover, it is the swiftest of all, inasmuch as, in the briefest time, namely, in the course of one day it makes the circuit of the largest circle that encompasses the whole. But the circlings of the planets are both slower and plural, not only because the motions of the different planets are each different, but also because the motion of each planet is a composite of various motions. For each of the planets, as regards its peculiar motion in its own circle, has a movement contrary to the movement of the first heaven — here contrariety is taken in a wide sense, for, strictly speaking, contrariety does not exist among circular motions, as has been said in Book I — in the sense that the motion of the first heaven is from east to west, whereas the movements of the planets in their own circles are from west to east. Hence it is reasonable that the planet nearest to the simple and first revolution, against which it is moving in its own circle, should consume the most time in traversing its own circle—thus Saturn takes 30 [actually 29] years to traverse its orbit.
On the other hand, the planet most distant from the outermost sphere, namely, the moon, traverses its orbit in the least time, namely, in the space of one month or even less. Among the other planets, that nearer to the outermost sphere always traverses its circle in a greater time — Jupiter in 12 years, Mars in two, Venus, Mercury and the Sun in a year, more or less. Thus the farther they are from the outermost sphere, the less time is required for traversing their orbit, the reason being that the first sphere most greatly dominates the planet closest to it, thus making its contrary motion slower, but dominates least the planet farthest away, because of its distance —hence the contrary motion is swifter in it, i.e., in the moon.
The intermediate planets behave according to the proportion of the distance, as the mathematicians show, in such a way, namely, that the higher planets move more slowly in their proper motions. But with respect to the motion whereby they are moved with the motion of the first mobile body, the higher they are, the swifter they are, as has been shown above.
433. However, from what Aristotle says here, it seems that violence exists among the heavenly bodies, namely, if the motion of the planets nearer to the outermost sphere is slowed up by the greater influence exerted upon it by the motion of the first sphere on account of being near it. Now if there is any violence present, it follows that these motions would not last forever as Aristotle wishes — for nothing violent can be eternal, as was mentioned above.
To this Alexander responds that although the domination of the outermost sphere does indeed produce a necessary slowing down in the nearer planet, yet not in a violent manner. For those heavenly motions are controlled by intellect and will. But in motions subject to will that is not violent which is in conformity with the will, even though there be an element of necessity involved. Now the aim of the will of the one moving the highest planet is to move its mobile body in accord with the motion of the higher mobile body, to which it desires to be likened. Consequently, it does not follow that the slowness in the motion of the first planet is violent.
434. But this does not wholly solve the difficulty in such a way as to preserve the principles supposed by Aristotle to the effect that a larger body is moved more swiftly by a proper and natural motion. Hence if that motion whereby a planet is moved in its own circle, is proper and natural to it, the consequence is that the sphere of a higher planet, since it is larger, will be moved more swiftly according to its own motion.
Then, too, it seems that a strange order is being preserved if a body which is farther from the immobile earth, but nearer to the most rapid motion of the first mobile, should move slower in its own motion.
435. Hence, others said that in the heaven there is but one motion, namely, the one whereby the entire heaven is revolved from east to west by the motion of the first mobile: and with respect to this motion the higher body has the swifter motion not only according to the size of the circle but also according to the brevity of time, the result being that a higher sphere will traverse a greater circle in less time, Hence a lower star fails to return to the same point according to time, but not because it moves with a motion contrary to the first motion. This explanation saves the teaching that since the higher planet fails only by a little to match the first motion, whereas a lower planet fails more, the higher planet is swifter and the lower planet slower.
436. Indeed that is the situation if, as Ptolemy says, the motion of the planets takes place on circles equidistant from the equinoxial circle [equator] and upon the same poles. Yet the opposite is apparent, since the planets at one time decline to the north and at another time to the south. Hence, it seems that the failure to keep up with the first motion should be explained in terms of another motion of the planets, by which they are moved from west to east, rather than in terms of a sole failure to keep pace with the first motion, a failure that makes a higher planet seem to be moved more slowly.
437. But Alexander assigns another cause to this besides the one which Aristotle assigns from the dominance of the first motion. For he says that a higher planet requires more time to traverse its circle, not because its motion is slower, but because the distance is greater. For a motion that requires more time can be swifter or as swift as another, if the excess in distance traversed is greater or equal to the excess of time.
But this does not appear in the planets. For since Saturn traverses its circle in 30 years, while the moon traverses its circle in approximately one month, the ratio of the size of Saturn's sphere to that of the moon would have to be according to the ratio of the aforesaid times. But that is not observed in this case, nor in the other planets.
438. Hence it seems that a different explanation should be given, namely, that we must consider two natures in the universe: first, the nature of eternal permanence which is above all in the separated substances, and secondly, generable and corruptible nature which is present in lower bodies. Now heavenly bodies, being intermediate, share somewhat in both, according to two motions. For the first motion, which is the diurnal, is the cause of eternal duration in things; but the second motion, which is in the oblique [i.e., zodiacal] circle from west to east, is the cause of generation and corruption and of other changes, is is plain from the words of the Philosopher in II.
According to this, the first mobile, as being at once the most noble and the nearest to the separated substances in the order of nature, has only the first motion, which pertains to the nature of uniformity. But the other heavenly bodies, to the extent that they depart from the unchangeable substances and approach generable and corruptible substances, share somewhat in the other motion, which pertains to the nature of difformity, and to a lesser extent, according as the body is higher and more noble. According to this, then, the higher planet, namely, Saturn has the least portion of the second motion on account of the nobility of its nature; consequently this motion in Saturn is slower. But the moon, on account of the closeness of its nature to generable and corruptible bodies, shares the most in the second motion, which in it is most swift. The intermediate planets behave in an intermediate way: for Jupiter, which is immediately under Saturn traverses its circle with its own motion in about 12 years; Mars in about two years; the Sun, Venus and Mercury take nearly uniformly one year.
439. Nor does the proportion of speed need to be according to the proportion of the distances, because the heavenly motions are not only natural, but also voluntary and for a desired end. And therefore, insofar as these motions are natural, the general rule is that the higher planets are slower of motion; but insofar as their motions are voluntary, the proportion of their speed varies in a particular case, not according to distance, but according to what is better. Hence, because the motions of Venus and Mercury are, as it were, bound to the motion of the Sun, as serving the Sun in producing its effects, they are moved as though uniformly with the Sun.
440. Thus Aristotle's statement that the supreme sphere exercises more influence on the highest planet and less on a remote one, is not to be understood in the sense of a compulsory force, but in the sense of a natural impression insofar, namely, as the nature of a higher thing is participated in more by something closer to it than by something farther away from it.
Thus are the principles of Aristotle preserved. For although both motions are natural to a planet, namely, the diurnal motion and that in its own circle, nevertheless the former is natural to it according to what is more noble in its nature. Therefore, it is only with respect to that motion that Aristotle's principle is saved, to the effect that a larger body is moved more swiftly. Likewise in man, who has a sensitive and an intellective nature, we say that the more a man is noble, the more he has of the motion of the nobler nature, namely, the intellective, and the less of the motion of the less noble, namely, the sensitive.
2-16
By reason, and by what sensibly appears, the stars are proved to be spherical in shape
Τὸ δὲ σχῆμα τῶν ἄστρων ἑκάστου σφαιροειδὲς μάλιστ' ἄν τις εὐλόγως ὑπολάβοι. Ἐπεὶ γὰρ δέδεικται ὅτι οὐ πεφύκασι κινεῖσθαι δι' αὑτῶν, ἡ δὲ φύσις οὐδὲν ἀλόγως οὐδὲ μάτην ποιεῖ, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ σχῆμα τοιοῦτον ἀπέδωκε τοῖς ἀκινήτοις ὃ ἥκιστά ἐστι κινητικόν. Ἥκιστα δὲ κινητικὸν ἡ σφαῖρα διὰ τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν ὄργανον πρὸς τὴν κίνησιν. Ὥστε δῆλον ὅτι σφαιροειδῆ ἂν εἴη τὸν ὄγκον.
Ἔτι δ' ὁμοίως μὲν ἅπαντα καὶ ἕν, ἡ δὲ σελήνη δείκνυται διὰ τῶν περὶ τὴν ὄψιν ὅτι σφαιροειδής οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἐγίνετο αὐξανομένη καὶ φθίνουσα τὰ μὲν πλεῖστα μηνοειδὴς ἢ ἀμφίκυρτος, ἅπαξ δὲ διχότομος. Καὶ πάλιν διὰ τῶν ἀστρολογικῶν, ὅτι οὐκ ἂν ἦσαν αἱ τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις μηνοειδεῖς. Ὥστ' εἴπερ ἓν τοιοῦτον, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τἆλλα ἂν εἴη σφαιροειδῆ.
441. After determining the nature, motion, and position of the stars, the Philosopher here determines about their shape. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ostendit stellas esse figurae sphaericae, per rationem;
secundo per ea quae sensibiliter apparent, ibi: adhuc autem similiter quidem et cetera.
First he shows by reason that the stars are spherical in shape;
Secondly, by what is apparent to sense, at 445.
442. He says therefore first [316], that someone can reasonably suppose that the figure of each star is spherical not only on the ground that they are of the nature of the heaven, as he proved above, but also because it has been shown above that the stars are not apt to be moved of themselves but are moved by the movements of their circles or spheres. Now nature does not do anything irrational or to no purpose, since the whole activity of nature is coordinated by an intellect acting for an end. Hence, it is plain that to the immovable stars, i.e., to those that are not moved on their own, this intellect gave a figure that is in no way suitable for progressive motion. Such a shape is, as he said above, the spherical, for the reason that it possesses no organ to serve for progressive motion. Yet, such a figure is most suitable for that type of circular motion in which the moved thing in its wholeness does not change its place. Thus it is plain that the stars, according to the mass of their magnitude, are spherical in figure.
443. But this proof does not seem to be appropriate. For Aristotle proved above that the stars are not moved on their own, on the ground that they are spherical in shape — hence, when he now proves that they are spherical in shape on the ground that they cannot be moved on their own, he seems to be arguing in circles.
Alexander's answer to this is that nothing inappropriate follows from this —for Aristotle proved that the stars are not moved on their own, not only because they are spherical in shape but also through certain other middle terms. Likewise, he shows that the stars are spherical in shape through certain other middles and not only because they are of themselves immobile.
444. Simplicius, however, argues against this that the charge of circular demonstration is not removed by the fact that both conclusions are shown by several middles.
But it should be stated that, although the notion of a circular demonstration is not thereby removed, yet there is removed the unacceptable situation arising from circular demonstration, namely, that it shows nothing. For the only way to manifest something is to use what is better known — and of course the same thing cannot be both better known and less known. However, when both conclusions are manifested by other middles, then one can be taken as manifestive of the other, in order to show the convertibility of the conclusions.
445. Then at [317] he presents another argument for the same, based on what is sensibly apparent, and he supposes that as one star is, so all the others are. There is shown then, by one of them, namely, the moon, from the things apparent to sense, that it is spherical in shape. This he shows in two ways.
First from what is generally considered by all, namely, from the shapes the moon goes through in waxing and waning. For he says that unless the moon were spherical in shape, then, as it waxes and wanes, it would not appear most of the time as having the shape of a crescent or scimitar, or amphicurtos [gibbous], or also "dichotomous."
Some explain that the moon is said to be "dichotomous" when it is full, because it is then that it divides the month in half — for "dichotomous" refers to cutting in two. But this explanation conflicts with something that Aristotle will say later, namely, that we see the moon, when it is dichotomous, entering Mars and hiding it according to its dark part, but leaving according to its bright and shining part. From this it is clear that the moon is called "dichotomous" when its surface which is facing us is divided into two parts such that half is dark and half bright. This is also the meaning given to this word in Ptolemy's Synthesis translated from the Greek.
446. It is worthy of note that Aristotle makes no mention here of the shape which the moon has at the beginning or end of its waxing or waning, but only of the shape it has while it is waxing or waning. For, since the moon is spherical in shape, one of its hemispheres is always being illuminated by the sun and the other remains dark. When, therefore, the moon is in conjunction with the sun, its whole upper hemisphere, which is directly regarded by the sun, is illuminated by the sun, so that its lower hemisphere remains dark. It is then that the moon is seen by us as darkened and obscured. But as the moon gradually gets away from the sun, that part of its upper hemisphere which is farther from the sun ceases to be illuminated, and the lower hemisphere begins to be illuminated according to the same amount. At that time the moon appears "crescent-shaped," i.e., arc-shaped.
This goes on until it is a quadrant, i.e., a quarter circle, distant from the sun, and then its surface toward us is seen with one half dark and one half illuminated, and this makes it "dichotomous." After that, as the moon moves to opposition with the sun, more and more of its lower hemisphere begins to be illumined by the sun, and then it is called amphicurtos [gibbous] until it is in opposition with the sun. For at this time its entire lower hemisphere is illuminated by the sun and it is called "full." After that, it begins gradually to wane little by little until it is a quadrant distant, at which time it is called "dichotomous," as though half of it is bright. This brightness afterwards, when it diminishes below half, becomes crescent-shaped, until conjunction with the sun.
Thus it is plain that as it waxes it is frequently or "mostly" arc-shaped or crescent-shaped, or gibbous; it is dichotomous just once as it is waxing and once in waning, namely, when it is distant from the sun by a quarter of a circle.
447. Now all this would not happen if the moon were not spherical in shape. For it is plain that if its surface turned toward us were totally flat, it would begin to be illumined by the sun all at once, and also to get dark, instead of successively by a continuing increase and decrease. This shows that it has a spherical bulge by which its brightness or darkness comes to be increased little by little — which could not happen if it were any shape but spherical.
448. Secondly, he shows the same thing from astronomical observations, which reveal that the eclipses of the sun are "crescent-shaped," i.e., arcuate. For the sun begins to be obscured according to the figure of an arc, by the interposition of the moon between us and the sun. But this would not occur unless the moon were spherical, for spherical bodies cut each other according to arc-shaped sections, as is proved by mathematicians.
Therefore, if the situation is such with respect to one star, namely, the moon, it follows that all the other stars are also spherical in shape. This, of course, is based on all the stars' being of the same nature.
449. However, Averroes, in his Commentary, says that they are of the same specific nature, in such a way that all the stars are as individuals of the same species. Now this is plainly false. First, because if they were all of the same species, they would have the same specific operations and the same effects, as is evident in all natural things of the same species.
Secondly, because, since the movements of the heavenly bodies are natural, it would follow that all the heavenly bodies would have uniform motions; but this is not true either of the planets in relation to one another, or in relation to the fixed stars.
Thirdly, because such a thing conflicts with the perfection of heavenly bodies. For in Book I Aristotle proved that the universe is perfect on the ground that it is one — for it is one in one species. From this fact one sees that it consists of the total matter of its species. Hence this also pertains to the perfection of the heavenly bodies, namely, that there be only one in one species. For we observe in the case of the lower bodies that there are many individuals of one species, on account of some lack of power or because one individual cannot exist forever — hence the species must be preserved by means of the succession of individuals in the same species. It is also because one individual is not sufficient for the perfect operation of the species — as is especially evident among men, one of whom is aided by another in his operation. Moreover, the multiplication of species, since it is formal, pertains more to the perfection of the universe than does the multiplication of individuals, which is material.
It is plain, too, that the reason which Averroes gives is absurd. For he says that if heavenly bodies were diverse species of one genus it would follow that the heavenly bodies would be material. However, this would much more follow if we posited, as he desires, the diverse heavenly bodies to be diverse individuals of the same species, because multiplication of individuals in one species is made through the division of matter. However, matter is not to be wholly excluded from the heavenly bodies. For it does not follow, even if the heavenly bodies have matter, that they are generable and corruptible, as was had in Book I.
Consequently, it must be said that the heavenly bodies are one in nature according to genus but of diverse natures according to species. Now their spherical shape, as well as their circular motion, follows in them upon the nature of the genus.
2-17
Two difficulties proposed in connection with what has been determined about the stars
Δυοῖν δ' ἀπορίαιν οὔσαιν, περὶ ὧν εἰκότως ἂν ὁστισοῦν ἀπορήσειε, πειρατέον λέγειν τὸ φαινόμενον, αἰδοῦς ἀξίαν εἶναι νομίζοντας τὴν προθυμίαν μᾶλλον ἢ θράσους, εἴ τις διὰ τὸ φιλοσοφίας διψῆν καὶ μικρὰς εὐπορίας ἀγαπᾷ περὶ ὧν τὰς μεγίστας ἔχομεν ἀπορίας.
Ἔστι δὲ πολλῶν ὄντων τοιούτων οὐχ ἥκιστα θαυμαστόν, διὰ τίνα ποτ' αἰτίαν οὐκ ἀεὶ τὰ πλεῖον ἀπέχοντα τῆς πρώτης φορᾶς κινεῖται πλείους κινήσεις, ἀλλὰ τὰ μεταξὺ πλείστας. Εὔλογον γὰρ ἂν δόξειεν εἶναι τοῦ πρώτου σώματος μίαν κινουμένου φορὰν τὸ πλησιαίτατον ἐλαχίστας κινεῖσθαι κινήσεις, οἷον δύο, τὸ δ' ἐχόμενον τρεῖς ἤ τινα ἄλλην τοιαύτην τάξιν. Νῦν δὲ συμβαίνει τοὐναντίον ἐλάττους γὰρ ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη κινοῦνται (292a.) κινήσεις ἢ τῶν πλανωμένων ἄστρων ἔνια καίτοι πορρώτερον τοῦ μέσου καὶ πλησιαίτερον τοῦ πρώτου σώματός εἰσιν αὐτῶν.
Δῆλον δὲ τοῦτο περὶ ἐνίων καὶ τῇ ὄψει γέγονεν τὴν γὰρ σελήνην ἑωράκαμεν διχότομον μὲν οὖσαν, ὑπελθοῦσαν δὲ τῶν ἀστέρων τὸν τοῦ Ἄρεος, καὶ ἀποκρυφέντα μὲν κατὰ τὸ μέλαν αὐτῆς, ἐξελθόντα δὲ κατὰ τὸ φανὸν καὶ λαμπρόν.
Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀστέρας λέγουσιν οἱ πάλαι τετηρηκότες ἐκ πλείστων ἐτῶν Αἰγύπτιοι καὶ Βαβυλώνιοι, παρ' ὧν πολλὰς πίστεις ἔχομεν περὶ ἑκάστου τῶν ἄστρων.
Τοῦτό τε δὴ δικαίως ἀπορήσειεν ἄν τις, καὶ διὰ τίνα ποτ' αἰτίαν ἐν μὲν τῇ πρώτῃ φορᾷ τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν ἄστρων πλῆθος ὥστε τῶν ἀναριθμήτων εἶναι δοκεῖν τὴν πᾶσαν τάξιν, τῶν δ' ἄλλων ἓν χωρὶς ἕκαστον, δύο δ' ἢ πλείω οὐ φαίνεται ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ ἐνδεδεμένα φορᾷ.
Περὶ δὴ τούτων ζητεῖν μὲν καλῶς ἔχει καὶ τὴν ἐπὶ πλεῖον σύνεσιν, καίπερ μικρὰς ἔχοντας ἀφορμὰς καὶ τοσαύτην ἀπόστασιν ἀπέχοντας τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ συμβαινόντων ὅμως δ' ἐκ τῶν τοιούτων θεωροῦσιν οὐδὲν ἄλογον ἂν δόξειεν εἶναι τὸ νῦν ἀπορούμενον.
450. Having determined the question of the stars and shown their nature, motion, order and figure, the Philosopher here solves certain difficulties with respect to what has been said. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ponit quaestiones;
secundo solvit eas, ibi: sed nos ut de corporibus et cetera.
First he presents the questions;
Secondly, he resolves them (L. 18).
As to the first he does three things:
primo excusat se a praesumptione pertractandi has difficiles quaestiones;
secundo movet eas, ibi: adhuc autem etc.;
tertio ostendit quaestionum difficultatem, ibi: de his quidem et cetera.
First he excuses himself from presumption in dealing with these difficult questions;
Secondly, he states the questions, at 451;
Thirdly, he points out the difficulty of the questions, at 457.
He says therefore first [318] that since there are two doubts which anyone could reasonably raise with respect to the stars, we should try to state what we think about them. In so doing we deem it proper that a person's readiness to consider questions of this kind should be attributed rather to respect, i.e., to seemliness or modesty, than to boldness, i.e., presumption, if the one who tackles these doubts welcomes even "small sufficiencies," i.e., reasons that are only slightly sufficient, to discover the truth about these matters concerning which we have very great difficulties, and does this because of what he desires in philosophy, namely, that its principle may stand, i.e., abide firmly.
451. Then at [319] he presents the two difficulties, the second of which begins at 456.
With regard to the first he does two things:
primo movet quaestionem;
secundo probat quod supposuerat, ibi: palam autem hoc de quibusdam et cetera.
First he raises the question;
Secondly, he proves something he had presupposed, at 455.
With respect to the first [319] there are three things to be considered for the understanding of this difficulty. The first of these is that Aristotle is seen to assign to the planets an order different from that of the astronomers of our time. For the earliest astronomers took Saturn as the outermost planet and after it Jupiter; Mars they put third, the Sun fourth, Venus fifth, Mercury sixth, and the Moon seventh. But the astronomers of Plato's and Aristotle's time changed this order as to the Sun, by putting it immediately above the Moon and under Venus and Mercury, which positing Aristotle follows here. Later on, Ptolemy corrected this order of the planets by showing that what the earlier astronomers said was truer, and this is the opinion held by current astronomers.
Secondly, we must keep in mind that certain "anomalies," i.e., irregularities, appear with respect to the motions of the planets. For the planets seem to be now swifter, now slower, now stationary, now retrogressing. Now this does not seem to be appropriate to heavenly motions, as is evident from what has been said above. Therefore, Plato first proposed this problem to an astronomer of his time, named Eudoxus, who tried to reduce these irregularities to a right order by assigning diverse motions to the planets; a project also undertaken by later astronomers in various ways. Yet it is not necessary that the various suppositions which they hit upon be true — for although these suppositions save the appearances, we are nevertheless not obliged to say that these suppositions are true, because perhaps theme is some other way men have not yet grasped by which the things which appear as to the stars are saved. Aristotle nevertheless uses suppositions of this kind, in what regards the quality of the motions, as true.
The third thing that must be considered is that not as many kinds of irregularities appear with respect to the sun and moon as with the other planets: for the sun and moon never appear to be stationary or to undergo retrograde movement as do the other planets, but present only swiftness and slowness. Accordingly, Eudoxus, who at Plato's request first tried to straighten out these irregularities, assigned fewer motions to the sun and moon, which he called the lowest planets, than to the higher ones.
To each of these he assigned four movements, according to the four spheres that revolved the stellar body fixed in the lowest of them. Thus the first sphere moves the stellar body from east to west according to the diurnal motion; the second moves the stellar body in the opposite direction of west to east in the Zodiac — and this is called longitudinal motion; the third sphere moves a stellar body latitudinally, according to which a star is now in a more southerly, now a more northerly, position in the Zodiac. Now he placed the poles of this third sphere in the Zodiac; hence it followed that a major circle, equidistant from the poles, would go through the poles of the Zodiac. From this it seemed to follow that the planets in their latitudinal motion would sometimes reach the very poles of the Zodiac — a situation that never appears. Hence, he posited a fourth sphere that would move a star in an opposite direction to this movement and thus prevent it from ever reaching the poles of the Zodiac. He did not, however, attribute the motion of this fourth sphere to the sun and the moon, but tried to save their appearances by positing only three spheres, proportional to the first three of the other planets, but in such a way that the latitudinal motion of the moon would be greater than the sun's, as is explained in XII.
452. With these considerations in mind Aristotle here formulates a question. And he says that while there are many such doubtful matters about the stars, not the least to be wondered at is why the stars farther from the motion of the first sphere are not always moved with a greater number of motions, but rather the intermediate ones are moved with the most, namely, the five planets, which, according to Eudoxus' theory, are moved with four motions. For it seems to be reasonable, if the first sphere is moved with one motion alone, that the star nearest it should be moved with the fewest motions, say two, and the "had," i.e., the next, with three or in some such progression. But now it is the contrary that happens according to Eudoxus' theory, which attributes fewer motions, i.e., only three, to the sun and moon than to some of the wandering stars which he posits as having four motions, although the five planets are farther from the middle [center] of the universe, i.e., from the earth, and closer to the "first body," i.e., the outermost sphere, "than they," i.e., than the sun and moon are, according to the opinion prevalent in Plato's and Aristotle's time.
453. One should further know that, since the suppositions of Eudoxus could not save all the appearances concerning the stars, another astronomer named Callippus, at Aristotle's behest, corrected Eudoxus' suppositions. He added to Mars and Venus and Mercury one sphere and one motion apiece, and to the Sun and Moon two apiece. Thus to Saturn and Jupiter four motions were now assigned, and to each of the lower planets five. Consequently, the problem raised here by Aristotle would no longer be a problem, because the higher planets, according to this supposition, are now moved with fewer motions than the lower ones. Moreover, to each of the planets he also assigned certain other revolving spheres, as is explained in XII.
454. But even this theory could not account for all the appearances about the stars, especially as to their being near and far away from us — which is grasped from the fact that under the same disposition of the air, the planets are seen at one time larger and at another time smaller.
Also it seemed unacceptable that such a multitude of spheres should concur in order to move the planets. It seemed especially superfluous to assign to each planet a sphere to revolve it from east to west with its diurnal motion when this could be caused by the highest sphere revolving the entire heaven with this motion.
Therefore Hipparchus and Ptolemy posited for each planet a single sphere which however was not concentric with the supreme sphere but had a center other than the earth, [i.e., an "eccentric"], in such a way that when the planet is in that portion of the sphere that is farther from us, the body of the planet is seen as smaller and slower moving; but when it is in the opposite region, it is seen as larger and faster. In addition to this, they posited certain small circles which they call "epicycles," which are in motion upon these spheres in such a way that the bodies of the planets are in motion in these epicycles, not as though fixed in such circles, but as though turning through them with a progressive motion.
Thus, in addition to the diurnal motion which they attribute to the entire heaven as due to the motion of the first sphere, they attribute to four planets, namely, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars and Venus, three motions apiece: according to one, the stellar body makes the circuit of its epicycle; according to the second, the center of the epicycle circles the sphere; according to the third, the sphere itself is moved from west to east, every hundred years, the distance of one degree in relation to the motion of the fixed stars. This last motion [the precession of the equinox], is called the motion of the increase [augus], or of the apogee, i.e., of the maximum distance in the eccentric circle.
Now they add to Mercury, in addition to these motions, a fourth, according to which they say that the center of its sphere is moved in a small circle about the center of the world. They also attribute these four to the Moon with the addition of a fifth. For since the circle of the lunar sphere, along which the center of its epicycle is thought to be in motion, declines from the Zodiac to the south and to the north, it is necessary for this circle to intersect the Zodiac at two points called "nodes" or "head and tail." It is only when the moon is present at these points that eclipses of the sun and of the moon can occur; and these do not always occur at the same place on the circle.
This, therefore, caused them to posit a fifth motion in the moon according to which the aforesaid nodes are moved, and this is called the "movement of the head and tail." But they do not say the body of the sun to be moved in any epicycle, but in its own eccentric. Hence, they endowed the sun with just two motions: one, whereby the body of the sun is moved in the eccentric; the other is the motion of apogee which they assign to the sphere of the sun, just as they assign it to the spheres of the other planets.
Thus it is evident that the problem Aristotle raises, arises also from the above position. For according to this supposition, Mercury and the Moon, the lowest of the planets, have the most motions, whereas the sun, which they place as intermediate, has the fewest, with the remaining planets being in between.
455. Then at [320] he proves something he had supposed, namely, that the order of the planets is as he had described.
First he proves it in one respect by means of something he had witnessed. And he says that the order of certain of the planets is evident even to sight. For he says that he saw the moon when it was "dichotomous," i.e., with half its face illumined, move in under the star of Mars (for its motion is swifter than Mars'), and the moon according to its blackness, i.e., according to that side which was darkened, concealed Mars, and Mars came out from under the moon passing it according to the bright and shining side of the moon.
Secondly, at [321] he shows other details about the order of the planets through observations which others have made. And he says that others state themselves to have witnessed similar things concerning the order of the other planets, namely, those who from much time back have observed such things for many years, i.e., the Egyptians and Babylonians, whose study was concerned most with astronomy. From what they say we have many trustworthy statements about each of the stars, based on their observations.
456. Then at [322] he raises the second difficulty. And he says that with good reason one can wonder why it is that in the first sphere, which is moved by the first motion, there is such a great multitude of stars that their whole order appears to be of the "arithmetical," i.e., of things innumerable (for their number cannot be comprehended by us), whereas in the lower orbs we find one solitary star in each so that two or more of the wandering stars are not seen fixed in one mobile sphere.
Here one should note that in Aristotle's time no motion had yet been discovered in the fixed stars, which Ptolemy posits as moved from west to east upon the poles of the Zodiac one degree every 100 years, so that they complete one full revolution in 36,000 years. Hence the ancients posited the sphere of the fixed stars as the first mobile and as endowed with but one motion, the diurnal. But if we assume a motion of the fixed stars, then this sphere must be moved by two motions: by its own motion, which is the motion of the fixed stars, and by the diurnal motion, which is the motion of the outermost sphere, which is without stars.
457. Then at [323] he shows the difficulty of these questions. He says that it is good to investigate these doubtful matters, and adds, "for a greater understanding." This text, says Alexander, is defective, and one should understand it as meaning that whatever in these matters is too much for AU' intelligence one must simply accept, rather than make them a subject of further investigation by ourselves. But it is not Aristotle's custom, in spite of his laconic style, to employ defective language, as Simplicius says. Hence he explains it to the effect that, while it is good to investigate such things, it is not a task suited to just anyone but only those of wider understanding. However, Averroes in his Commentary explains it this way: namely, that we should understand that to investigate these matters is both good in itself, and also contributes to man's growth in understanding Therefore a person who exercises his mind by trying to understand difficult matters, can better understand others, as is said in III.
Now the matters to be investigated are difficult, because we can perceive only a little about their causes; and their accidents are further removed from our ken than the bodies themselves are lly distant from us. Yet, if what we shall say enables us to contemplate the truth of these doubtful matters, then what seemed to be doubtful at the beginning of our inquiry will be seen not to be devoid of all explanation.
2-18
The first difficulty, concerning the number of motions of the stars, is solved. The number shown to agree with modern astronomers.
Ἀλλ' ἡμεῖς ὡς περὶ σωμάτων αὐτῶν μόνον, καὶ μονάδων τάξιν μὲν ἐχόντων, ἀψύχων δὲ πάμπαν, διανοούμεθα δεῖ δ' ὡς μετεχόντων ὑπολαμβάνειν πράξεως καὶ ζωῆς οὕτω γὰρ οὐθὲν δόξει παράλογον εἶναι τὸ συμβαῖνον.
Ἔοικε γὰρ τῷ μὲν ἄριστα ἔχοντι ὑπάρχειν τὸ εὖ ἄνευ πράξεως, τῷ δ' ἐγγύτατα διὰ ὀλίγης καὶ μιᾶς, τοῖς δὲ πορρωτέρω διὰ πλειόνων,
ὥσπερ ἐπὶ σώματος τὸ μὲν οὐδὲ γυμναζόμενον εὖ ἔχει, τὸ δὲ μικρὰ περιπατῆσαν, τῷ δὲ καὶ δρόμου δεῖ καὶ πάλης καὶ κονίσεως,
πάλιν δ' ἑτέρῳ οὐδ' ὁποσαοῦν πονοῦντι τοῦτό γ' ἂν ἔτι ὑπάρξαι τἀγαθόν, ἀλλ' ἕτερόν τι.
Ἔστι δὲ τὸ κατορθοῦν χαλεπὸν ἢ τὸ πολλὰ ἢ τὸ πολλάκις,
οἷον μυρίους ἀστραγάλους Χίους βαλεῖν ἀμήχανον, ἀλλ' ἕνα ἢ δύο ῥᾷον. Καὶ πάλιν ὅταν τοδὶ μὲν δέῃ τοῦδ' ἕνεκα ποιῆσαι, τοῦτο δ' ἄλλου καὶ τοῦτο ἑτέρου, ἐν μὲν ἑνὶ ἢ δυσὶ ῥᾴδιον ἐπιτυχεῖν, ὅσῳ δ' ἂν διὰ πλειόνων, (292b.) χαλεπώτερον.
Διὸ δεῖ νομίζειν καὶ τὴν τῶν ἄστρων πρᾶξιν εἶναι τοιαύτην οἵα περ ἡ τῶν ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν. Καὶ γὰρ ἐνταῦθα αἱ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πλεῖσται πράξεις πολλῶν γὰρ τῶν εὖ δύναται τυχεῖν, ὥστε πολλὰ πράττειν, καὶ ἄλλων ἕνεκα. (Τῷ δ' ὡς ἄριστα ἔχοντι οὐθὲν δεῖ πράξεως ἔστι γὰρ αὐτὸ τὸ οὗ ἕνεκα, ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἀεί ἐστιν ἐν δυσίν, ὅταν καὶ οὗ ἕνεκα ᾖ καὶ τὸ τούτου ἕνεκα). Τῶν δ' ἄλλων ζῴων ἐλάττους, τῶν δὲ φυτῶν μικρά τις καὶ μία ἴσως ἢ γὰρ ἕν τί ἐστιν οὗ τύχοι ἄν, ὥσπερ καὶ ἄνθρωπος, ἢ καὶ τὰ πολλὰ πάντα πρὸ ὁδοῦ ἐστι πρὸς τὸ ἄριστον.
Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἔχει καὶ μετέχει τοῦ ἀρίστου, τὸ δ' ἀφικνεῖται [ἐγγὺς] δι' ὀλίγων, τὸ δὲ διὰ πολλῶν, τὸ δ' οὐδ' ἐγχειρεῖ, ἀλλ' ἱκανὸν εἰς τὸ ἐγγὺς τοῦ ἐσχάτου ἐλθεῖν οἷον εἰ ὑγίεια τέλος, τὸ μὲν δὴ ἀεὶ ὑγιαίνει, τὸ δ' ἰσχνανθέν, τὸ δὲ δραμὸν καὶ ἰσχνανθέν, τὸ δὲ καὶ ἄλλο τι πρᾶξαν τοῦ δραμεῖν ἕνεκα, ὥστε πλείους αἱ κινήσεις ἕτερον δ' ἀδυνατεῖ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιᾶναι ἐλθεῖν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὸ δραμεῖν μόνον ἢ ἰσχνανθῆναι, καὶ τούτων θάτερον τέλος αὐτοῖς. Μάλιστα μὲν γὰρ ἐκείνου τυχεῖν ἄριστον πᾶσι τοῦ τέλους εἰ δὲ μή, ἀεὶ ἄμεινόν ἐστιν ὅσῳ ἂν ἐγγύτερον ᾖ τοῦ ἀρίστου. Καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἡ μὲν γῆ ὅλως οὐ κινεῖται, τὰ δ' ἐγγὺς ὀλίγας (20) κινήσεις οὐ γὰρ ἀφικνεῖται πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον, ἀλλὰ μέχρι ὅτου δύναται τυχεῖν τῆς θειοτάτης ἀρχῆς. Ὁ δὲ πρῶτος οὐρανὸς εὐθὺς τυγχάνει διὰ μιᾶς κινήσεως. Τὰ δ' ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ πρώτου καὶ τῶν ἐσχάτων ἀφικνεῖται μέν, διὰ πλειόνων δ' ἀφικνεῖται κινήσεων.
458. Having proposed the two doubts, the Philosopher here starts to solve them.
et primo solvit primam quaestionem;
secundo secundam, ibi: de dubitatione autem et cetera
First he solves the first question;
Secondly, the second one (L. 19).
As to the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quid oporteat supponere, ad hoc ut de facili solvatur quaestio primo mota;
:.4in;margin-top:0;text-indent:-.2in">secundo ponit solutionem, ibi: videtur autem et cetera.
First he shows what ought to be assumed in order to make the first question easier to resolve;
Secondly, he gives the solution, at 459.
He says therefore first [324] that the reason why the first question is difficult is that we investigate the heavenly bodies as though they were merely an orderly system of bodies without being animated. As a consequence, it seems to us that the order of their motions should be in accord with the order of numbers and according to the position of the bodies. But if the problem at hand is to be settled, we must assume that they have not only some sort of life but also actions — this being proper to things with a rational soul, which act for an end as being masters of their act, and do not act by the sole impulse of nature as do all irrational things. If this is assumed, nothing is seen to be occurring unreasonably if the number of their motions does not proceed according to the position of the bodies. For the diversity and number of the motions is to be taken more in terms of a relation to the final good, which is the principle in all things able to be done [i.e., voluntary actions], as is plain from the words of the Philosopher in Ethics VII and II.
One should note in this regard that it makes no difference whether we suppose that the heavenly bodies are moved by intellectual substances united to them after the manner of a soul, or by these as separated. But there would be no way to solve this question if they were moved by the sole impulse of nature, as heavy and light bodies are.
459. Then at [235] he presents his solution.
Et primo ponit solutionis principia;
secundo applicat ad propositum, ibi: hoc quidem igitur habet et cetera.
First he states the principles of the solution;
Secondly, he applies them to the question at hand, at 463.
With respect to the first he does two things:
primo ponit principia, ex quibus assignatur ratio quare superiores planetae moventur pluribus motibus, primum autem mobile uno solo motu;
secundo ponit principia, ex quibus assignatur ratio quare superiores planetae moventur pluribus motibus, inferiores autem paucioribus, secundum suppositionem Eudoxi, ibi: iterum autem alteri et cetera.
First he states the principles from which we obtain the reason why the higher planets are moved with a number of motions, while the first mobile is moved with only one;
Secondly, he states the principles from which we obtain the reason why the higher planets are moved with a number of motions while the lower planets with fewer, according to the theory of Eudoxus, at 460.
About the first he does two things:
primo ponit principium;
secundo manifestat per exemplum, ibi: quemadmodum in corpore et cetera.
First he states the principle;
Secondly, he shows it with an example, at 459.
He says therefore first [325] that in things that can arrive at a perfect good, three degrees are found. The highest degree is that of a thing which is in the best state and does not need any action to acquire perfect good, which is already present to it without any action. The second degree is that of a thing which is nearest to the best in the goodness of its condition, and which, namely, acquires its perfect good by means of one slight action. The third degree belongs to things that are more removed from the best but still acquire their perfect good through several operations.
Then at [326] he manifests this by an example. And he says that among bodies, that body is seen to be in the best condition which does not require any exercise to maintain its good condition,(which is called euechia — "well-being'); in the second grade is a body which attains a good condition by walking just a bit; in the third grade is the body which in order to acquire a good condition needs many forms of exercise such as running, wrestling and boxing.
460. Then at [327] he states the principles with which to solve the second part of the question, namely, why the lower planets are moved with fewer motions than the higher planets.
Et primo ponit principia;
secundo adhibet exemplum, ibi: propter quod oportet putare et cetera.
First he states the principles;
Secondly, he gives an example, at 461.
As to the first, he does three things:
First he asserts that there is a certain grade below the three already mentioned [327], and he says that in the fourth degree is found something that, in spite of all its labors, cannot reach the state of attaining its perfect good; yet it can attain a certain other good less than the perfect good. For example, a case of this would be should a body be unable, in spite of all its exercise, perfectly to attain to a good condition, but should through certain exercises attain to a slightly better condition than it previously had.
Secondly, at [328] he shows that even in this grade there is a certain variety. And he says that it is difficult to "direct," i.e., to proceed rightly, in the case either of many things or many times, for it is more difficult to be correct in many things than in few. "Many" may be taken as referring either to a diversity of things or to a diversity of actions aimed at one objective — thus his statement, "many things," refers to the first; and his statement "many times," refers to the second, especially if the actions are not all at once. From this we understand that something which can achieve a good by means of many things is of greater power than something which cannot employ that many, and as a consequence does not attain the good in question.
Thirdly, at [329] he gives an example of what he is talking about. And first of all with reference to the phrase, "many things." And he says that it is difficult to throw a "myriad," i.e., 10,000, astragals, which are a type of missile from the island of Chios where there are great astragal-throwers (another text has Coos, another Greek island, where there are also great astragal-throwers), but it is easy to throw one or two of them.
Secondly, he gives an example of his statement, "many times." And he says that whenever it is necessary to do one thing for the sake of another, and this for the sake of another and that for the sake of still another, in such a way, namely, that it is necessary to arrive at one goal by a series of subordinated actions, it is easy to obtain this goal when it can be achieved by one or two actions: for example, if someone buys a horse in order to ride and by riding reaches a certain place. But when a number of actions are required in order to achieve the goal, then it is more difficult. For example, if he should not have ready money with which to buy the horse, but must obtain it by working at some trade, in order to exercise which he must seek the tools required by that trade. It is plain, therefore, that greater power is required, both on the part of the ordering intellect, and on the part of the faculty carrying things out, to reach an objective by many actions, rather than by one or a few.
461. Then at [331] he gives examples of this principle. And he says that, in view of the foregoing, we must reckon that the action of the stars, so far as the multitude or fewness of their actions is concerned, is akin to the action of animals and plants. For we observe among these lower things that man, possessing perfect power of soul, has many operations, because he is able to attain to many goods — for which reason, he can do many things, not only absolutely, but according to the order of one thing to another, as, for example, when he plans a long series of actions all directed to one end. This does not mean, however, that man is the best thing in the universe — for that which is best in the universe, namely, God, needs no action in order to attain His own appropriate good. For He has no end outside Himself which must be obtained by some action, but He is His own end and the end of all other things. Now action which is for the sake of an end always involves two things, since it is necessary to consider the end for the sake of which something is done and that which is directed to the end, which is done for the sake of this, i.e., of the end.
But animals other than man have fewer actions than man, both because they do not have actions of the intellectual part and because in their exterior actions they have a set pattern predetermined for them by nature — for example, a swallow always builds its nest in the same manner. But plants have perhaps one operation, namely, the nutritive and this "small," i.e., imperfect, in comparison to sentient and intellectual operation.
The explanation of this diversity is that the end which is reached is either some one perfect good, for example, the end which man reaches, namely, beatitude, which he acquires through many operations, or else the many things pre-requisite to the perfect good, to some one of which plants and animals attain through one or a few operations. For example, beatitude presupposes, first of all, the preservation of life, then knowledge of sensible things, and finally the apprehension of the universal truth, in which final beatitude lies. This last, man alone obtains, but preservation of life plants attain through the act of the nutritive part, while irrational animals, in addition to this, attain the knowledge of individual things.
462. Therefore, it is plain from all the above that there are five orders of things. For the highest among beings is that which possesses perfect good without acting; the second is that which has perfect good through one or a few actions; the third is that which acquires perfect good through many actions, as does man. The fourth grade is that which cannot attain perfect good in any way, but acquires something preliminary to it by a few actions or just one, as is true of animals and plants. There remains for that to be the lowest which can acquire none of these, and because of this does not have as a property the participation in any motion.
Thus that a thing entirely lack motion can occur in two ways: in one way, because it is most perfect; in another, because it is most imperfect. Likewise, that a thing have one or a few motions can occur in two ways: in one way, because it is near to the most perfect; in another, because it is near to the most imperfect. But that a thing have many actions or motions is due to its being in a mediate position.
463. Then at [332] he adapts the aforesaid principles to his purpose. And he says that in the order of things, that which is supreme has and participates in the best without any motion — which indeed happens with the separated substances, which are wholly immobile. Now he says "has" on account of the highest of the causes, which is the most high God, Who is the very essence of goodness; but he says "participates" on account of the lower separated substances, which receive being and goodness from another — for to "participate" is nothing other than to receive from another partially. This, therefore, is the first and supreme order of beings.
He distinguishes a second order and says that it is something which from nearby attains that best thing by a few motions — thus, the highest sphere is said to approach that best thing to the extent that it attains to being the universal cause of bodily things as well as the cause of their permanence. Then he sets down a third degree, saying that something approaches the supreme good through many motions, as do the higher planets, which are also universal causes of effects in the world, and of the permanence and stability of things. After that he sets down a fourth degree, saying that there is something which cannot participate that perfect good but it suffices if it approach it in any way at all.
464. In clarification of these, he adds an example, saying that if we suppose health as the objective of life, we find something as best in this regard, namely, what is always healthy. But in the second degree is found that which is made healthy by the sole process of "thinning," i.e., the withdrawing of what is superfluous. In the third degree is that which indeed acquires health by thinning, but which, in order to be thinned, requires running, and in order to run, must do something else in order to be fit for running — and which thus has a number of motions by which it arrives at the goal of health. In the fourth degree is that which cannot attain health but attains to something of the things that are preliminaries to health — for example, only to running, or even, beyond that, to becoming thin, neither of which is the goal, but rather they have a goal, namely, health, as has been said.
He gives the reason for this, and says that the absolute best for all things is to attain in some way to the end, namely, whether without any motion, or with a few, or with many motions. However, if the end cannot be achieved, then a thing will always be better the closer it gets to the best — for example, should it reach thinning, which is the thing nearest to health, this is better than reaching the stage of running. From this it is also plain that in each one of these orders there can be many grades.
465. And because the earth is in the order of nature the most distant from the highest order of things, it is therefore absolutely without motion, being incapable as it were of approaching the best under the aspect of being a cause of other things. But the things that are near to the earth and are in the fourth order, are moved with few motions, because they do not attain to the other extreme, which is to be universal causes of the permanence of things; but they are moved to the extent of being able to acquire something of the likeness of the first and most divine principle, under the aspect of being principles of other things. But the first heaven obtains this likeness immediately by a single movement, which pertains to the second degree. But things that are between the first heaven and the outermost bodies, which are in the third order attain to a likeness of the first principle in being able to cause things, but through a number of motions, however.
466. So far, Aristotle has expressed three things: namely, the principle which has and participates in the best — this he has explained to be the "most divine principle." Also he has identified the second order, which attains to the perfect good by a few motions, with the first heaven. He has also assigned the fifth order, which, on account of its imperfections, has no motion, to earth. Now there remains a question about the other two orders; as to what are they to be attributed. For if we attribute the third order to the higher planets on the ground that they attain the perfect and lasting good by means of a number of motions, then the fourth order will seem to be assigned to the sun and moon, which will involve saying that they do not attain the perfect good. But this appears unacceptable, especially since the sun is seen to be the noblest of the planets, and both it and the moon to exercise the greatest influence on lower bodies.
467. And therefore Averroes says in his commentary that the fourth order, which is the order of things that do not attain to perfect good but approach to it by means of a few motions, should be attributed to the three elements, namely, water, air and fire, which indeed are moved by a twofold motion, one being their proper motion according to the nature of lightness or heaviness, and the other being one that they obtain from the heavenly bodies — as fire and the upper region of air are moved circularly according to the motion of the heaven, while the sea flows back and forth according to the motion of the moon. But the third order he attributes to all the planets, which attain perfect good, that is, a universal causality over these lower things by means of a number of motions.
468. But this interpretation leaves Aristotle's doubt unsolved. And therefore, to accord with Aristotle's intention one has to say that the fourth grade should be attributed to the sun and moon which, according to him, are the lowest of the planets. And according to Aristotle's principles, their order in dignity corresponds to the order of their position, on the ground that the higher sphere contains the lower and the container is more noble and more formal than the contained, as is said in IV and as will be said later in the section treating of the earth.
According to this, then, it must be understood that the optimum in things is permanence, which, in separated substances, is realized without any motion at all, and whatever of permanence exists in lower things is derived thence. And this explains why the outermost heaven, which is nearest to the separated substances, is by its diurnal motion the cause of the sempiternity and permanence of things; on which account, it ranks highest in resembling the first principle. Further, the higher planets are more a cause of permanence and duration than the lower — for which reason stable things are attributed to Saturn. Hence it is that, according to Ptolemy in his Quadripartite, what belongs to Saturn is attributed to the universal loci [events] of times, while what belongs to Jupiter to the annual loci of times, what belongs to the Sun, Mars, Venus and Mercury, to the loci of months, the phases of the moon to daily loci. Likewise the conjunctions of the higher planets cooperate, according to the astronomers, in producing more universal and permanent effects. But the sun and moon, which are according to Aristotle lower planets, have especial influence for causing transmutations in the lower bodies — which indeed is not itself the optimum but something order to the optimum and preliminary to it; for the lower bodies, through the transmutation of generation and corruption, attain to a perpetuity in the species which they are unable to attain in the individual.
469. Simplicius, however, says in his commentary that he does not reckon the order of nobility of the heavenly bodies to be according to their position, but that each of the heavenly bodies, whether more noble or less noble, is put wherever it is best for it to be. That is why the lights of the world, namely, the sun and moon, are according to Aristotle situated nearest the lower bodies, which need their light. However, the prior interpretation seems truer in terms of agreement with natural principles.
470. According to the theories of present-day astronomers, the number of heavenly bodies seems to be disposed suitably enough, although it is not according to the notion which Aristotle here assigns. For, as has been said above and as Aristotle says in XII, there has to be among the heavenly motions something which is the cause of the perpetuity and duration of things, and something which pertains to the cause of their change; moreover, in each of these orders there must be something supreme. Therefore, just as in the order of the causality of the permanence of things, after the first motion which moves the whole, the eighth sphere obtains pre-eminence, so too in the order of the causality of change in things, the sphere of the sun holds the top place and is in a certain sense proportionate in this order to the sphere of the fixed stars. Thus, just as the sphere of the fixed stars is pre-eminent in having a multitude of stars which befits the universality of its causality, on account of the diverse kinds of its effects, so too the sphere of the sun superabounds in the magnitude of the solar body and its luminosity for the purpose of efficacy in changing lower bodies. Hence, just as two motions are assigned to the sphere of the fixed stars, namely, its own and that of the superior sphere; so also two motions are assigned to the sun, namely" one which is its own, whereby it is moved in its own circle, and the other by which its sphere is moved according to the motion of the sphere of the fixed stars. Now both spheres are, as it were, served by three inferior spheres. Thus, the sphere of the fixed stars is understood, in its role of causing permanence in things and in causing universal effects, to be served by Saturn, Jupiter and Mars, whence these have motions that are uniform in number, for, as has been said, the number of motions assigned to each of them is three. The sun, in its role of causing changes in things, is understood to be served by the three lower planets. And therefore they are differentiated by degrees in the number of their motions, so that two motions are assigned to the Sun, three to Venus, four to Mercury and five to the Moon.
471. One should likewise know that, since Aristotle here assumes that the earth does not participate in any motion, Alexander fittingly says that it is inanimate. But Simplicius in his commentary says that the earth is animate (for on this point he follows the error of the pagans, who bestowed a divine worship upon the earth). But Aristotle rejects this in III where he shows that no simple body is animate. And this is plain from an evident sign: for the parts of animals that are more from earth, e.g., bones, are incapable of sensing. If, however, a heavenly body, although simple, should be animate, this would not affect this argument, because a heavenly body is not a subject of contraries as are the simple bodies of the elements.
But Simplicius tries to prove that the earth's body is animated because it endures forever and because some of its parts are animated, forgetting that earth and the other elements are related to animate bodies as matter, whereas celestial body is related to animate bodies as efficient cause. Now efficient cause is nobler than its product and the product nobler than its matter. Hence, even though the heaven has a nobler form than do animate bodies, the elements, however, have a less noble form.
Similarly, he tries to show that animation of earth is not ruled out by the fact that it is not moved. In one way, because plants although animated are not moved with respect to place. But in this he is deceived, because although they are not moved with respect to place, nevertheless they are moved by the motion of augmentation and decrease. In another way, because, since even things that understand [intellectually] are said to live; hence there is nothing to prevent the earth from being animate and living, even though it is not moved according to place — for it may be that it understands. But this, too, is contrary to Aristotle, who says in II that among the bodies of corruptible things none has intellect without having sense. But that the earth lacks sense is evident from the fact that it is cut and broken up daily. Moreover, since there is the same nature in the whole and in the part and the same motion in each, if the whole earth had an intellective soul, then every separate part of it would have to be animate and intelligent, and furthermore, all compound bodies, in which there is a predominance of earth, would have to be such — which is laughable.
He also adds that, although the earth is stationary, nevertheless it has an operation, namely, "standing," so that, just as movement is an operation of a heavenly body, so the earth's operation is to be stationary or at rest. But in this he is deceived, because to stand or to be at rest is not an operation but a privation of operation or motion. Hence, since there must be in every living body some life operation which appears in the very body and not merely in the soul (for otherwise the soul would be united to that body without purpose), it is plain that earth, in whose body none of the operations of life appears, cannot be animated.
2-19
The second difficulty of Lecture 17 is resolved.
Περὶ δὲ τῆς ἀπορίας ὅτι κατὰ μὲν τὴν πρώτην μίαν οὖσαν φορὰν πολὺ πλῆθος συνέστηκεν ἄστρων, τῶν δ' ἄλλων χωρὶς ἕκαστον εἴληφεν ἰδίας κινήσεις, δι' ἓν μὲν ἄν τις πρῶτον εὐλόγως οἰηθείη τοῦθ' ὑπάρχειν νοῆσαι γὰρ δεῖ τῆς ζωῆς καὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἑκάστης πολλὴν ὑπεροχὴν εἶναι τῆς πρώτης πρὸς τὰς ἄλλας,
εἴη δ' ἂν ἥδε συμβαίνουσα κατὰ λόγον ἡ μὲν γὰρ πρώτη μία οὖσα πολλὰ κινεῖ τῶν σωμάτων τῶν θείων, αἱ δὲ πολλαὶ οὖσαι ἓν μόνον (293a.) ἑκάστη τῶν γὰρ πλανωμένων ἓν ὁτιοῦν πλείους φέρεται φοράς. Ταύτῃ τε οὖν ἀνισάζει ἡ φύσις καὶ ποιεῖ τινὰ τάξιν, τῇ μὲν μιᾷ φορᾷ πολλὰ ἀποδοῦσα σώματα, τῷ δ' ἑνὶ σώματι πολλὰς φοράς.
Καὶ ἔτι διὰ τόδε ἓν ἔχουσι σῶμα αἱ ἄλλαι φοραί, ὅτι πολλὰ σώματα κινοῦσιν αἱ πρὸ τῆς τελευταίας καὶ τῆς ἓν ἄστρον ἐχούσης ἐν πολλαῖς γὰρ σφαίραις ἡ τελευταία σφαῖρα ἐνδεδεμένη φέρεται, ἑκάστη δὲ σφαῖρα σῶμά τι τυγχάνει ὄν. Ἐκείνης ἂν οὖν κοινὸν εἴη τὸ ἔργον αὐτῇ μὲν γὰρ ἑκάστῃ ἡ ἴδιος φύσει φορά, αὕτη δὲ οἷον πρόσκειται, παντὸς δὲ πεπερασμένου σώματος πρὸς πεπερασμένον ἡ δύναμίς ἐστιν.
Ἀλλὰ περὶ μὲν τῶν τὴν ἐγκύκλιον φερομένων κίνησιν ἄστρων εἴρηται ποῖ' ἄττα κατά τε τὴν οὐσίαν ἐστὶ καὶ κατὰ τὸ σχῆμα, περί τε τῆς φορᾶς καὶ τῆς τάξεως αὐτῶν.
472. Having given a solution to the first problem, he [the Philosopher] here solves the second one, which asks why it is that, whereas there are innumerable stars in the sphere of the first motion, there is but one in each of the other lower spheres.
473. To this he gives three answers. The first of these is based on the excellence of the first sphere as compared to the others. And he says [333] that to the question why it is that a multitude of stars is found to be connected with the motion of the first sphere, which is one, while in the other lower spheres of the planets each star has separately its own motions (so that the motions of Saturn are distinct from those of Jupiter, and so on for all the others, whereas all the fixed stars are located according to one motion), to this the answer must be given that this is reasonable first of all for one reason, namely, because we must understand that the first sphere has a great excellence in comparison to the other spheres, both in point of life, since it has a nobler life as having a nobler soul, and in point of being a principle of each, since, namely, universal causality is truer of the first sphere than of any of the others. Now this excellence can be considered from three facts: first, it [the first sphere] is more immediately ordered to the first mover; secondly, it contains and revolves all the other spheres; and thirdly, it has the simplest and the swiftest motion. It is plain that that which is noblest and more acting in the heavenly bodies is the star, and this is proved by its luminosity. And therefore, it is fitting that the first sphere should abound with a multitude of stars as compared with the other spheres.
474. But if we suppose that the sphere of the fixed stars is not the outermost sphere but that there is another above it, in which there is no star, our proposition is not affected. For the motion of the sphere exists only for the motion of the star, as is said in XII — hence, that motion of the supreme sphere that lacks stars is ordained to the movement of the fixed stars, just as, according to the ancient astronomers, each planet has many spheres lacking a star but ordained to the motion of the star fixed in the last of them. Therefore, according to this, so far as the coordination of motion is concerned, that first sphere falls into the same order as the sphere of the fixed stars. For this reason also Aristotle significantly says that there are many stars connected with the first "carrying," but not connected with the first "sphere," since the carryings are determined with respect to the stars, for the sake of carrying which along the spheres are moved, and not with respect to the spheres. This only implies, then, that the motion of the fixed stars will not be wholly simple, as Aristotle supposes, but composed of two motions.
475. The second argument is at [334] and it is based on the proportion of the multitude of stars to the multitude of motions. And he says that that about which the problem is raised occurs according to reason. For the first carrying along, although it is one, nevertheless many of the heavenly bodies (which he here calls "divine bodies," because of their perpetuity), are moved with it, whereas in the case of the lower carryings, many of them move one body alone, because each of the "wandering" stars, i.e., the planets, is moved with several motions, as has been said above. In this way, then, nature makes a certain equality of proportion between the fixed stars and the planets, and disposes them in good order, in the sense that, to the one first motion it assigns "many bodies," i.e., many stars, but conversely, as to the planets, to "one body," i.e., to one star, it assigns many motions.
And this distribution [by nature] is reasonable. For the planets are as though certain instruments of the supreme sphere, which is as though the principal agent with respect to bodies, insofar as, through the medium of the planets, there are in a certain way transmitted and applied to these lower bodies the manifold powers of the fixed stars. Now an instrument acts insofar as it is moved, while a principal agent acts according to its own form and proper power. Consequently, it is fitting that the supreme sphere abound with a multitude of stars, in which diverse active powers are rooted, while the planets abound in a multitude of motions.
This explanation is valid even in the light of the suppositions of present-day astronomers. For even though the sphere of the fixed stars has two motions, it shares in a minimum way in the second, since it is most slow in it.
476. He gives the third explanation at [335] and it is based on the multitude of spheres moving each of the planets, according to the theory of the ancient astronomers. And he says that the reason why in each apparent motion of the planets there is found but one stellar body in motion, is that there are many spherical bodies moving the star, so arranged that those which are "first," i.e., the higher, are movers of that sphere which is at the end and which contains the star. For the star is moved as fixed in the last of many spheres ordered to moving one sphere. Or one can understand that the last of the spheres is in some way connected with the higher spheres and is moved according to their motion.
Now it is evident that each of these spheres is a certain body. Thus, therefore, the common work of all the spheres revolving a given planet belongs "to it," i.e., to the sphere which is supreme in that system and which revolves all the lower — for the motion of the lowest sphere, in which the planet exists, is the proper and natural motion of that planet, while the motions of the higher spheres are, so to speak, added to correct the irregularity that appears in the planet's motion, namely, of swiftness and slowness, retrogression, advancing and standing still. Accordingly, it is plain that, since the higher sphere moves all the lower that are ordered to the motion of the same one planet, then, if in addition to that it had to move several stars, it would be laborious for it — each body's strength being finite in comparison to another body, it having been shown in VIII that there is not infinite power in a finite magnitude.
477. It should not be thought that this difficulty would derive from there being weight in the stars or from anything that resists motion, but rather it is because there is required an excess of the mover over the mobile. But there could not be an excess of the superior sphere in power if in the lower things there was together with a multitude of spheres also a multitude of stars, because in the bodies of stars the power of the heavenly bodies most abounds.
It should also be diligently noted that he posits a finite proportion between the movent sphere and the moved bodies on the ground that the movent sphere is a body. This indicates that the separated mover, which is an incorporeal and immaterial substance, does not, according to the intention of Aristotle, finitely exceed the body which is moved by it, but infinitely, as existing outside the whole body of magnitude and not determined by matter. This reveals that Averroes is in error in his commentary when he says that the addition of the first mover over the power of the moved is not infinite except in infinite time. But how, If the power of the separated mover is infinite, it does not move with infinite speed, i.e., in an instant, and how, if the power of a body is finite, that body can endure for an infinite time, has been shown in VIII.
It should be noted that this third argument does not apply to the position of the modern astronomers, who do not assign to the planets a number of spheres, one of which moves all the others, as the ancient astronomers did; nevertheless, these latter did hold that the many fixed stars were not moved except by one sphere.
478. In summing up [336], he says we have stated of the stars, which are moved with a circular motion, what they are according to the substance of their nature and according to their shape. Moreover, we have discussed their motion and order.
2-20
Opinions of the philosophers as to the site of the earth. Pythagorean theory, of fire in the center relected
Λοιπὸν δὲ περὶ τῆς γῆς εἰπεῖν, οὗ τε τυγχάνει κειμένη, καὶ πότερον τῶν ἠρεμούντων ἐστὶν ἢ τῶν κινουμένων, καὶ περὶ τοῦ σχήματος αὐτῆς.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῆς θέσεως οὐ τὴν αὐτὴν ἅπαντες ἔχουσι δόξαν, ἀλλὰ τῶν πλείστων ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου κεῖσθαι λεγόντων, ὅσοι τὸν ὅλον οὐρανὸν πεπερασμένον εἶναί φασιν, ἐναντίως οἱ περὶ τὴν Ἰταλίαν, καλούμενοι δὲ Πυθαγόρειοι λέγουσιν ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ μέσου πῦρ εἶναί φασι, τὴν δὲ γῆν, ἓν τῶν ἄστρων οὖσαν, κύκλῳ φερομένην περὶ τὸ μέσον νύκτα τε καὶ ἡμέραν ποιεῖν. Ἔτι δ' ἐναντίαν ἄλλην ταύτῃ κατασκευάζουσι γῆν, ἣν ἀντίχθονα ὄνομα καλοῦσιν,
οὐ πρὸς τὰ φαινόμενα τοὺς λόγους καὶ τὰς αἰτίας ζητοῦντες, ἀλλὰ πρός τινας λόγους καὶ δόξας αὑτῶν τὰ φαινόμενα προσέλκοντες καὶ πειρώμενοι συγκοσμεῖν.
Πολλοῖς δ' ἂν καὶ ἑτέροις συνδόξειε μὴ δεῖν τῇ γῇ τὴν τοῦ μέσου χώραν ἀποδιδόναι, τὸ πιστὸν οὐκ ἐκ τῶν φαινομένων ἀθροῦσιν ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ἐκ τῶν λόγων.
Τῷ γὰρ τιμιωτάτῳ οἴονται προσήκειν τὴν τιμιωτάτην ὑπάρχειν χώραν, εἶναι δὲ πῦρ μὲν γῆς τιμιώτερον, τὸ δὲ πέρας τοῦ μεταξύ, τὸ δ' ἔσχατον καὶ τὸ μέσον πέρας ὥστ' ἐκ τούτων ἀναλογιζόμενοι οὐκ οἴονται ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου τῆς σφαίρας κεῖσθαι αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον (293b.) τὸ πῦρ.
Ἔτι δ' οἵ γε Πυθαγόρειοι καὶ διὰ τὸ μάλιστα προσήκειν φυλάττεσθαι τὸ κυριώτατον τοῦ παντός, τὸ δὲ μέσον εἶναι τοιοῦτον, [ὃ] Διὸς φυλακὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸ ταύτην ἔχον τὴν χώραν πῦρ
ὥσπερ τὸ μέσον ἁπλῶς λεγόμενον, καὶ τὸ τοῦ μεγέθους μέσον καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ὂν μέσον καὶ τῆς φύσεως. Καίτοι καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς ζῴοις οὐ ταὐτὸν τοῦ ζῴου καὶ τοῦ σώματος μέσον, οὕτως ὑποληπτέον μᾶλλον καὶ περὶ τὸν ὅλον οὐρανόν. Διὰ μὲν οὖν ταύτην τὴν αἰτίαν οὐθὲν αὐτοὺς δεῖ θορυβεῖσθαι περὶ τὸ πᾶν, οὐδ' εἰσάγειν φυλακὴν ἐπὶ τὸ κέντρον, ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο ζητεῖν τὸ μέσον, ποῖόν τι καὶ ποῦ πέφυκεν. Ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἀρχὴ τὸ μέσον καὶ τίμιον, τὸ δὲ τοῦ τόπου μέσον ἔοικε τελευτῇ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀρχῇ τὸ μὲν γὰρ ὁριζόμενον τὸ μέσον, τὸ δ' ὁρίζον τὸ πέρας. Τιμιώτερον δὲ τὸ περιέχον καὶ τὸ πέρας ἢ τὸ περαινόμενον τὸ μὲν γὰρ ὕλη, τὸ δ' οὐσία τῆς συστάσεώς ἐστιν.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τοῦ τόπου τῆς γῆς ταύτην ἔχουσί τινες τὴν δόξαν,
479. After determining about the heavenly body which is moved circularly, the Philosopher here determines the question of the earth, around which the heaven is moved. But he does not intend to determine here concerning the earth as one of the four elements but as it is the center of heavenly motion, as astronomers deal with it.
Primo ergo dicit de quo est intentio;
secundo prosequitur propositum, ibi: de positione quidem et cetera.
First, therefore, he states his intention;
Secondly, he pursues it, at 480.
He says, therefore, first [337] that, since the heaven has been discussed, there remains the earth to be discussed. Concerning this, he says there are for him three things to be settled:
primo de situ eius, ubi scilicet sit posita;
secundo de quiete eius, utrum scilicet sit de numero eorum quae quiescunt, vel quae moventur;
tertio de figura eius, utrum scilicet sit sphaericae figurae, vel cuiuscumque alterius.
First, its situation, namely, where is it positioned;
Secondly, its rest, namely, whether it is one of the things that rest or that are moved;
Thirdly, its shape, namely, whether it has a spherical shape or some other.
480. Then at [338] he executes his proposal:
Et primo prosequitur praedicta tria secundum opinionem aliorum;
secundo secundum veritatem, ibi: nos autem dicamus et cetera.
First he pursues the above-mentioned three things according to the opinion of others;
Secondly, according to truth (L. 26).
Concerning the first he does two things:
primo ponit falsas opiniones quorundam circa terram;
secundo assignat falsas rationes aliorum circa veram positionem de quiete terrae, ibi: haesitare (vel dubitare) quidem igitur et cetera.
First he presents the false opinions of certain ones concerning earth;
Secondly, he presents the false reasons alleged about the true theory concerning the earth's state of rest (L. 22).
As to the first he does three things:
primo ponit opiniones aliorum circa situm terrae;
secundo circa quietem et motum, ibi: similiter autem et de mansione etc.;
tertio quantum ad figuram, ibi: similiter autem et de figura et cetera.
First he presents others' opinions about the position of the earth;
Secondly, about its rest and motion (L. 21);
Thirdly, about its shape (L. 21).
About the first he does three things:
primo ponit opiniones aliorum circa situm terrae;
secundo ponit rationes eorum, ibi: non ad apparentia etc.; tertio solvit, ibi: tanquam medium et cetera.
First he presents others' opinions about the position of earth, 481;
Secondly, he gives their reasons, at 482;
Thirdly, he solves them, at 485.
481. He says therefore first [338] that not all philosophers have the same opinion about the position of the earth. For whichever ones held that the entire universe is infinite were unable to assign a definite position to the earth, since in the infinite no middle and no boundary can be determined. But a number of those who posited the whole world as finite said that earth is positioned in the middle of the world, as did Anaximander, Anaxagoras, Democritus, Empedocles and Plato. But certain philosophers called "Pythagoreans" who sojourned in the region of Italy said on the contrary that fire is positioned in the middle of the world and that the earth, after the manner of one of the stars, moved circularly around the center of the world, and by its motion makes day and night, according to its different relation to the sun. They also posited another earth — likewise in circular motion about the middle of the world — which they called antichtona on account of its contraposition to our earth. But this other earth is not visible to us because in its motion it follows the earth in which we live, in such a way that the entire body of our earth is always interposed between our sights and this other earth.
And although the Pythagoreans said these things according to the face value of their words, they nevertheless understood in their metaphor that fire was in the center since the natural heat produced from the sun and other stars reaches the middle of the world, in a certain way keeping all things in balance and preserving them. But earth they said to be a star because it causes day and night, depending on its relation to the sun. The other earth they called a moon, either because it is interposed to the sun's light as our earth is, as is plain from eclipses, or because it is the boundary facing us of the heavenly bodies, just as the earth is the boundary of the elements.
482. Then at [339] he presents their reasons. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ponit qualitatem rationis eorum; secundo ponit ipsas rationes, ibi: honorabilissimo enim et cetera.
First he describes the quality of their reason;
Secondly, he presents the reasons themselves, at 483.
About the first he does two things:
First he describes the kind of reasons the Pythagoreans used [339] and says that they did not search for reasons and causes in such a way as to apply them to what is sensibly apparent; rather, what was apparent to sense they tried to reduce to, and by a certain violence align with, certain preconceived intelligible reasons and opinions. Now such a method is suitable in things that are man-made, and whose principle is the human intellect; but in things that are the product of divine art, it is necessary, on the contrary, to consider the notions of the works from the works themselves that are seen. Thus? an artisan conforms a house he makes to preconceived plans, but whoever else might see the constructed house would consider the ideas of the work from the sight of the work.
Secondly, at [340] he shows that it is possible for many others to be moved by these same reasons of the Pythagoreans. And he says that it might seem to many others besides the Pythagoreans that one should not assign the middle region to earth, "if it is their wont to consider things, not as they appear, but according to intelligible reasons." He says this, not as though any of Aristotle's predecessors besides the Pythagoreans posited this, but because it was possible that others would be swayed by these reasons. Hence it is said that after Aristotle's time Archedemus was of this opinion.
483. Then he gives two reasons. The first of these is that they thought that the most honorable "region," i.e., place, should belong to the most honorable body, on the ground that places are proportionate to bodies according to their nature. But it is plain that fire is more honorable than earth, not only because of its brightness, but also on account of its active power and on account of its subtility. It is plain, too, that boundaries are nobler than the intermediates between them, as the terminus is nobler than the thing terminated and a container than the contained. But that which is "extreme," i.e., highest, in the world, and that which is the middle of the world, they thought of as being boundaries. For this reason, they set them down as the noblest places. And therefore, thinking in this wise, they did not place earth in the middle of the sphere of the world, but rather fire, which holds the place of nobility after the heavenly bodies, which are at the boundaries.
484. He gives their second reason at [342] and says that the Pythagoreans put fire in the middle of the world because, since it is the most principal of the elements it should be most of all preserved — as we more carefully guard precious things. Now the middle place seems to have such a disposition for preserving, as though walled up and strengthened by all the things that surround the middle. That is why the Pythagoreans, speaking metaphorically, called this region which has fire, the "guard-house" or "fortress" of Jupiter. This is the case if we understand that the fire is guarded. But if we understand that fire is the guardian, then, conversely, we must understand that the fire which has this region, i.e., which holds the middle place, is Jupiter's guardhouse in the sense that it has the power of guarding.
485. Then at [343] he refutes the aforesaid reason and says that in the aforesaid reason the Pythagoreans used the word "middle" as though one called "middle" absolutely, i.e., univocally, both the middle of a magnitude, and the middle of a thing according to nature, i.e., that through which the nature of a thing is preserved — as we see in animals that the middle by which the nature of an animal is preserved, namely, the heart, is not the same as the middle of the body's size, for that would be the umbilicus. A similar viewpoint must be taken with respect to the whole heaven, i.e., to the whole universe. Hence they should not be concerned with the whole universe as though it needs a guardhouse in such a way that such a prison or guardhouse would have to be assigned to the center, which is the middle of magnitude. It is necessary, rather, to seek that which is the middle of nature in the universe, as in the case of an animal, and ask what is its condition according to nature, and which place naturally befits it.
He explains these two things, showing first how the middle of the universe is as corresponding to the heart of an animal. And he says that it is a principle of other bodies, and most honorable among other bodies: and this is the sphere of the fixed stars.
But it is not the middle place but rather the place of the outermost container that belongs to it, for that which is the magnitudinal middle among the places of the universe is more like an ultimate than like a principle. The reason is that the middle is contained and determined by all the others, while that which is the "end," i.e., the extremity, among bodies according to the order of place, has the nature of a determinant and container. But it is manifest that the container is more honorable than the contained, and the end more honorable than the thing ended — since the contained and the terminated pertain to the notion of matter, but to be a container and that which terminates to the notion of form, which is the substance of the whole consistency of things. Consequently, containing bodies are more formal and contained bodies are more material. And therefore, in the whole universe, just as the earth which is contained by all, being in the middle, is the most material and ignoble among bodies, so the outermost sphere is most formal and most noble, while among the elements fire is above all containing and formal.
Finally, he sums up [344] and concludes that in regard to the place of earth, some have an opinion such as has been described.
2-21
Different opinions of the motion, rest, and shape of the earth
ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ περὶ μονῆς καὶ κινήσεως οὐ γὰρ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἅπαντες ὑπολαμβάνουσιν, ἀλλ' ὅσοι μὲν μηδ' ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου κεῖσθαί φασιν αὐτήν, κινεῖσθαι κύκλῳ περὶ τὸ μέσον, οὐ μόνον δὲ ταύτην, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ἀντίχθονα, καθάπερ εἴπομεν πρότερον. Ἐνίοις δὲ δοκεῖ καὶ πλείω σώματα τοιαῦτα ἐνδέχεσθαι φέρεσθαι περὶ τὸ μέσον, ἡμῖν ἄδηλα διὰ τὴν ἐπιπρόσθησιν τῆς γῆς.
Διὸ καὶ τὰς τῆς σελήνης ἐκλείψεις πλείους ἢ τὰς τοῦ ἡλίου γίγνεσθαί φασιν τῶν γὰρ φερομένων ἕκαστον ἀντιφράττειν αὐτήν, ἀλλ' οὐ μόνον τὴν γῆν.
Ἐπεὶ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ γῆ κέντρον, ἀλλ' ἀπέχει τὸ ἡμισφαίριον αὐτῆς ὅλον, οὐθὲν κωλύειν οἴονται τὰ φαινόμενα συμβαίνειν ὁμοίως μὴ κατοικοῦσιν ἡμῖν ἐπὶ τοῦ κέντρου, ὥσπερ κἂν εἰ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου ἦν ἡ γῆ οὐθὲν γὰρ οὐδὲ νῦν ποιεῖν ἐπίδηλον τὴν ἡμίσειαν ἀπεχόντων τῆς διαμέτρου.
Ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ κειμένην ἐπὶ τοῦ κέντρου φασὶν αὐτὴν ἴλλεσθαι καὶ κινεῖσθαι περὶ τὸν διὰ παντὸς τεταμένον πόλον, ὥσπερ ἐν τῷ Τιμαίῳ γέγραπται.
Παραπλησίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τοῦ σχήματος ἀμφισβητεῖται τοῖς μὲν γὰρ δοκεῖ εἶναι σφαιροειδής, τοῖς δὲ πλατεῖα καὶ τὸ σχῆμα (294a.) τυμπανοειδής
ποιοῦνται δὲ τεκμήριον ὅτι δύνων καὶ ἀνατέλλων ὁ ἥλιος εὐθεῖαν ἀλλ' οὐ περιφερῆ τὴν ἀπόκρυψιν φαίνεται ποιούμενος ὑπὸ τῆς γῆς, ὡς δέον, εἴπερ ἦν σφαιροειδής,
περιφερῆ γίνεσθαι τὴν ἀποτομήν, οὐ προσλογιζόμενοι τό τε ἀπόστημα τοῦ ἡλίου πρὸς τὴν γῆν καὶ τὸ τῆς περιφερείας μέγεθος, ὡς ἐν τοῖς φαινομένοις μικροῖς κύκλοις εὐθεῖα φαίνεται πόρρωθεν. Διὰ μὲν οὖν ταύτην τὴν φαντασίαν οὐδὲν αὐτοὺς ἀπιστεῖν δεῖ μὴ κυκλοτερῆ τὸν ὄγκον εἶναι τῆς γῆς
ἀλλ' ἔτι προστιθέασι, καὶ φασὶ διὰ τὴν ἠρεμίαν ἀναγκαῖον τὸ σχῆμα τοῦτ' ἔχειν αὐτήν. Καὶ γὰρ δὴ οἱ περὶ τῆς κινήσεως καὶ τῆς μονῆς εἰρημένοι τρόποι πολλοὶ τυγχάνουσιν.
486. After presenting opinions about the position of the earth, the Philosopher here presents opinions about its motion and rest.
He presents two opinions;
The second of these is at 490.
With respect to the first he does three things:
primo ponit positiones;
secundo inducit quandam probationem ipsorum, ibi: propter quod et lunae etc.;
tertio ostendit quomodo obviabant rationibus in contrarium inductis, ibi: quoniam enim non est terra et cetera.
First he presents the theories;
Secondly, he induces a certain proof thereof, at 488;
Thirdly, he shows how they meet arguments brought against them, at 489.
487. He says therefore first [345] that just as philosophers have spoken in various ways about the place of the earth, so also about its motion and rest. But those who say that it is not positioned in the middle of world, such as the Pythagoreans, assign to it a circular motion by which it is moved about the middle. Nor do they say that it is just this earth in which we live that is moved but also a certain other one which they called "antichtona," i.e., in counter-opposition to this earth, as has been said above. This they posited on account of the perfection of the number 10, in order that, since there are 8 heavenly bodies circularly moved, namely, the sphere of the fixed stars and the 7 planets, the number of 10 might be fulfilled by positioning two earths circularly moved.
Now there are some Pythagoreans who claim that there are not only two earths circularly moved, but also several other bodies of earth in motion about the middle. These indeed are imperceptible to us because this earth on which we live is superimposed on the others, in such a way that the others follow its motion. Consequently, the interposition of this earth between out vision and those earths hides them from us.
488. Then at [346] he presents their proof of what we have just stated. Now it is plain that just as an eclipse of the sun is due to the interposition of the moon between us and the sun, so the eclipse of the moon is due to the interposition of the earth between the sun and the moon. But the moon is eclipsed more often than the sun. This they said is due to the fact that there is but one solitary moon to eclipse the sun when interposited between us and it, but the moon is eclipsed not only by the earth on which we live but by several other earths.
But this argument of theirs is of no worth, because the moon is never found to be eclipsed except by the interposition of this earth between the moon and the sun, namely, when the moon enters the shadow of this earth. Eclipses of the moon occur more frequently than those of the sun, because a solar eclipse is very often impeded on account of the diversity of aspect.
489. Then at [347] he shows how they meet arguments leveled against them. The chief of these is that, unless the earth were in the middle of the world, the horizon which is a plane passing through our sight would not always cut the entire sphere and the greatest circles into two halves, in such a way, namely, that six signs [of the Zodiac] are always visible to us above the earth and six are under the earth.
But their answer to this was that the whole earth is not a center, because a center is indivisible and a point, whereas the earth is a body possessing size.
Hence, our circle which is on the surface of the earth is a full hemisphere's distance from the center — yet this does not prevent everything from appearing to us as though our eye were in the center. The reason for this is the smallness of the earth, which is as though nothing in size in comparison with the whole heaven. In like manner, they thought that if the earth on which we live is not in the middle, all things would appear to us as though the earth were in the middle of the universe, because even now the distance from the middle is not manifest as to appearance, although our sight is distant from the middle of the universe by half the earth.
But this could be understood if the earth were a small distance from the middle but not if it were at a great distance therefrom. There are also certain other appearances which would not be saved if the earth were not in the middle —for example, what occurs in an eclipse of the moon, when there is direct opposition of the moon to the sun. For, unless the earth were always in the middle, an eclipse of the moon would not always occur when it is in opposition in the head or tail — yet our aspect counts for nothing in an eclipse of the moon.
490. Then at [348] he presents a second opinion. And he says that some, although they say that the earth is in the center, yet say it is moved and revolved "about the never-shifting pole," i.e., about the axis of the world (for sometimes the heaven is called the "pole," sometimes the axis is, and sometime the ends of the axis, as when we speak of the arctic and antarctic pole). And this opinion, he says, is found in the Timaeus. But it should be noted that Aristotle took what is here called "revolved" or "turned," from Plato's statement in the Timaeus: in Greek, "illomenum" about the pole in every way ordered Now if illomenum is written in Greek with an iota, it means a "binding," but if written with a diphthong, it means "a hindrance." Now this word seems to be taken by Plato as it means a "binding," as is plain from what he says about the earth in the Phaedo, where he asserts it to be at rest in the middle and, as it were, held fast. Consequently, Aristotle seems to have taken the words of Plato in a way not intended by him.
Therefore, Alexander, excusing Aristotle, says that illomenum, properly signifies "preventing" or "compulsion," but because that meaning does not fit what Plato intends to say here Aristotle understood him as taking it in the extended sense of meaning, as transferred, "turning," which denotes motion. Nor does it make any difference in the present argument whether Plato has said elsewhere something that differed from what he had said, in the Phaedo, for some other reason. For Aristotle is here proposing what is written in Timaeus; whether it be introduced as an opinion accepted by Plato, or as the opinion of Timaeus, which he does not approve. That is why he does not say "as Plato says," but "as is written in the Timaeus."
But Simplicius has a barrage of objections against this. First, because Timaeus there proves the earth is located and settled in the middle. Secondly, because there the word illomenum is written with an iota, and thus signifies a "holding fast." Thirdly, because a "turning" does not always imply motion — for circular figures are said to be "turned," i.e., facing [turned] in every direction, even if they are at rest. Fourthly, because, since this word has many meanings, one should not have bent its meaning to a sense plainlySed contra hoc iterum obiicit Simplicius: quia non est probabile quod Aristoteles ignoraret aut significationem vocabuli, aut intentionem Platonis. contrary to Plato's intention.
But, against this, Simplicius again objects that it is not probable that Aristotle was ignorant either of the meaning of the word or of Plato's intention. Consequently, it can be said that, because it was possible for some to falsely interpret Plato's words, Aristotle removes the false understanding that could be obtained from these words, as he frequently does with passages from Plato.
Or it can be said that the phrase, "and to be moved," is an interpolation by another. In the Greek there is stated illesthai, which is here translated, "to be revolved." Now what is written in the Greek can signify both a "holding fast" and "motion," so that we can understand that after Aristotle presented the Pythagorean theory of the motion of the earth about the middle, he here presents Plato's theory about the earth being at rest in the middle.
We can also say more briefly that one Heraclitus of Pontus posited the earth to be in motion in the center and the heaven to be at rest, and that it is his opinion that Aristotle is here introducing. The fact that he adds, "as stands written in the Timaeus," is to be referred, not to what was said, namely, "it is revolved and moved," but to what follows, namely, "that it is upon a fixed pole."
491. Then at [349] he gives the theories about the shape of the earth. And first he presents the theories, and states that there are likewise problems about the shape of the earth, as there are about its motion and position. For some think that it is spherical, others that it is wide and having the shape of a tambourine.
492. Secondly, he presents two reasons used to support this second theory. The first of these [350] is that they make an argument of the fact that as the sun rises and sets, it is cut by the earth according to a straight, and not a circular, line — namely, when part of the sun appears above the earth, and part is hidden. Now if the earth were spherical, the line of section would seem to have to be circular, because two spherical bodies intersect with a circular intersection.
But he excludes this argument at [3513, and says that those who present this argument do not consider the sun's distance from the earth and the greatness of the rotundity of each. For we sometimes see that even small circles, seem: from afar, appear after the manner of a straight line. There is all the more reason, therefore, for portions of large circles to appear straight from a distance, because they are less curved. However, this must be principally understood when the circle is in the same surface as our vision — for the intersection of the sun and moon, which is not in the same surface with our sight, is not seen as straight but as circular, as was said above when discussing the shape of the stars.
493. He gives a second argument at [352] and says that they add a further argument for the same, namely, that if the earth is to be at rest, it has to be flat. For a spherical shape is easy to move, because so little of it is in contact with a plane; but a wide shape is totally in contact with a plane, and is consequently apt for rest.
And lest anyone believe that this explanation of the earth's rest is generally assigned by everyone, he adds that there are many different ways in which the motion and rest of the earth has been conceived, as will be plain from what will be said below.
2-22
The problem about the earth's rest
Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἀπορῆσαι πᾶσιν ἀναγκαῖον ἐπελθεῖν τάχα γὰρ ἀλυποτέρας διανοίας τὸ μὴ θαυμάζειν πῶς ποτε μικρὸν μὲν μόριον τῆς γῆς, ἂν μετεωρισθὲν ἀφεθῇ, φέρεται καὶ μένειν οὐκ ἐθέλει, καὶ τὸ πλεῖον ἀεὶ θᾶττον, πᾶσαν δὲ τὴν γῆν εἴ τις ἀφείη μετεωρίσας, οὐκ ἂν φέροιτο. Νῦν δ' ἠρεμεῖ τοσοῦτον βάρος. Ἀλλὰ μὴν κἂν εἴ τις τῶν φερομένων μορίων αὐτῆς, πρὶν πεσεῖν, ὑφαιροίη τὴν γῆν, οἰσθήσεται κάτω μηθενὸς ἀντερείσαντος. Ὥστε τὸ μὲν ἀπορεῖν εἰκότως ἐγένετο φιλοσόφημα πᾶσιν
τὸ δὲ τὰς περὶ τούτου λύσεις μὴ μᾶλλον ἀτόπους εἶναι δοκεῖν τῆς ἀπορίας, θαυμάσειεν ἄν τις.
Οἱ μὲν γὰρ διὰ ταῦτα ἄπειρον τὸ κάτω τῆς γῆς εἶναί φασιν, ἐπ' ἄπειρον αὐτὴν ἐρριζῶσθαι λέγοντες, ὥσπερ Ξενοφάνης ὁ Κολοφώνιος, ἵνα μὴ πράγματ' ἔχωσι ζητοῦντες τὴν αἰτίαν
διὸ καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς οὕτως ἐπέπληξεν, εἰπὼν ὡς εἴ περ ἀπείρονα γῆς τε βάθη καὶ δαψιλὸς αἰθήρ, ὡς διὰ πολλῶν δὴ γλώσσης ῥηθέντα ματαίως ἐκκέχυται στομάτων, ὀλίγον τοῦ παντὸς ἰδόντων.
Οἱ δ' ἐφ' ὕδατος κεῖσθαι. Τοῦτον γὰρ ἀρχαιότατον παρειλήφαμεν τὸν λόγον, ὅν φασιν εἰπεῖν Θαλῆν τὸν Μιλήσιον, ὡς διὰ τὸ πλωτὴν εἶναι μένουσαν ὥσπερ ξύλον ἤ τι τοιοῦτον ἕτερον (καὶ γὰρ τούτων ἐπ' ἀέρος μὲν οὐθὲν πέφυκε μένειν, ἀλλ' ἐφ' ὕδατος),
ὥσπερ οὐ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον ὄντα περὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ τοῦ ὕδατος τοῦ ὀχοῦντος τὴν γῆν οὐδὲ γὰρ τὸ ὕδωρ πέφυκε μένειν μετέωρον, ἀλλ' ἐπί τινός (294b.) ἐστιν.
Ἔτι δ' ὥσπερ ἀὴρ ὕδατος κουφότερον, καὶ γῆς ὕδωρ ὥστε πῶς οἷόν τε τὸ κουφότερον κατωτέρω κεῖσθαι τοῦ βαρυτέρου τὴν φύσιν;
Ἔτι δ' εἴπερ ὅλη πέφυκε μένειν ἐφ' ὕδατος, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τῶν μορίων ἕκαστον νῦν δ' οὐ φαίνεται τοῦτο γιγνόμενον, ἀλλὰ τὸ τυχὸν μόριον φέρεται εἰς βυθόν, καὶ θᾶττον τὸ μεῖζον.
Ἀλλ' ἐοίκασι μέχρι τινὸς ζητεῖν, ἀλλ' οὐ μέχρι περ οὗ δυνατὸν τῆς ἀπορίας. Πᾶσι γὰρ ἡμῖν τοῦτο σύνηθες, μὴ πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα ποιεῖσθαι τὴν ζήτησιν ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὸν τἀναντία λέγοντα καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸς ἐν αὑτῷ ζητεῖ μέχρι περ ἂν οὗ μηκέτι ἔχῃ ἀντιλέγειν αὐτὸς αὑτῷ. Διὸ δεῖ τὸν μέλλοντα καλῶς ζητήσειν ἐνστατικὸν εἶναι διὰ τῶν οἰκείων ἐνστάσεων τῷ γένει, τοῦτο δ' ἐστὶν ἐκ τοῦ πάσας τεθεωρηκέναι τὰς διαφοράς.
494. After rejecting the opinions of those who held false theories about the earth, the Philosopher here pursues the opinions of those who, while holding a true theory about the earth, namely, that it is at rest, assigned unsuitable explanations for the earth's rest.
Et primo movet dubitationem;
secundo proponit solutionum insufficientiam, quas alii assignabant, ibi: solutiones autem de hoc etc.;
tertio prosequitur singulas solutiones, ibi: hi quidem enim propter hoc et cetera.
First he poses the problem;
Secondly, he points out where the solutions which others proposed are insufficient, at 496;
Thirdly, he examines these solutions, each in turn, at 497.
495. He says therefore first [353] that it seems necessary that a certain problem about the earth should occur to everyone. For if someone did not wonder about this, he would seem to have an irrational mind, as though not being able to perceive the difficulty, namely, as to how it is that, if some small particle of earth be raised against its nature and then released, it is borne downward and "does not wish to remain," i.e., has no natural tendency to rest, and the larger the particle of earth is, so much the faster does it move downward. Yet it seems that if the whole earth could be raised by someone on high out of its place, and then let loose, it would not move down. This seems so from what presently happens in regard to the whole earth. For, while it does have great heaviness, it does not move downward but remains at rest in its place. Hence, it seems that no matter where in the world the earth might be set, it would rest there, for the same reason that it now rests in this place. This, indeed, is in keeping with the opinion of those who suppose that any place at random is suitable for just any body.
But someone could say that the particles of earth, when lifted and then released, move down no farther than the place where earth now is. Therefore, in order to augment the difficulty, he adds that if someone were to raise some particles of earth, and it should happen that, before the falling particles returned to earth, someone should remove the earth from their place, then those clods would move "downward," i.e., farther downward than the place from which they were picked up, since nothing would now be there to stop them. Now we can guess about the whole from the part — for if someone should throw a stone upward and then, before it fell, dig a ditch in the earth, that stone would fall until it encountered an obstacle; and thus it seems strange that, since the earth as a whole has no resistance from anything impeding its descent, it does not move downward.
He concludes therefore that the "stupor," i.e., the great wonder, evoked by this made it a "philosophema," i.e., a consideration of philosophy or occasion for philosophizing for all philosophers — just as in the beginning of the. it is said that it is from wonder that men began to philosophize.
496. Then at [354] he presents the inadequacy of the solutions proposed on this point by the philosophers. And he says that one can wonder, not only at the way things happen thus with regard to the earth, but also why philosophers trying to solve this problem have not seen that their solutions given to this problem are more at odds than the problem itself. For they have given forth theories more improbable than the situation which gives rise to the problem — hence those solutions only increase the problem.
Deinde cum dicit: hi quidem enim propter hoc etc., ponit quinque solutiones praedictae dubitationis.
Secunda incipit ibi: hi autem in aqua etc.;
tertia ibi: Anaximenes autem etc.;
quarta ibi: quoniam autem manet etc.;
quinta ibi: sunt autem quidam et cetera.
The second one begins at 499;
The third at Lecture 23; The fourth at Lecture 24; The fifth at Lecture 25.
With respect to the first he does two things:
First he presents the first solution [355]. And he says that some, for the sake of this, i.e., in order to evade the problem, assert that the earth's downward direction is infinite. Now this can be understood in two ways: In one way, that the air below the earth is infinite, implying that the reason why the earth is moved no farther down is because nothing is moved to an infinite goal. In the other and truer interpretation, it is taken to mean that the earth itself is infinite on its nether side, and thus the upper part is sustained by a lower part extending to infinity. This is more quickly understood and is said to have been the theory of Xenophanes of Colophon. They put this forth, not because it seemed more plausible in itself, but in order to save the trouble of laboring to find the cause of the earth's rest.
498. Secondly, he tells how Empedocles derided this solution. And he says that, since the aforesaid men did not assert this as though plausible but in order to sidestep the question, Empedocles was "stupefied," i.e., greatly astonished at their error, speaking as follows in the verses he composed oh philosophy: "Are indeed the deeps of the earth endless" (as though to say: Is the earth infinitely deep?) "and endless too the ether?" i.e., air or fire And he says that these opinions have been "vainly poured out," i.e., asserted without reason, "since they have been told by many a tongue" (as if to say: from the mouths of many men) "who understood but little of the whole," i.e., understanding but little about the nature of the universe. In these words, h= gives us to understand that it is from a lack of intelligence that some said this with their mouths alone, while, as interiorly considered, it is not plausible.
Now Aristotle contented himself with this rebuke by Empedocles, both on account of the improbability of what is said and because it has been previously shown in Book I that there cannot be infinite weight.
499. Then at [357] he takes up the second solution.
Et primo proponit eam;
secundo improbat, ibi: tanquam non eadem etc.;
tertio assignat rationem defectus huiusmodi solutionum, ibi: sed videntur et cetera.
First he proposes it;
Secondly, he refutes it, at 500;
Thirdly, he underscores the reason for the defects in solutions of this kind, at 503.
He says therefore first [357] that just as the aforesaid philosophers posited the earth to be held up by earth ad infinitum, so others declared the earth to be set on water. This indeed is the oldest theory, proposed, they say, by Thales of Miletus, who was one of the seven called "Wise Men," and the first to interest himself in natural philosophy. It was he who posited water as the principle of all things, as is said in I. Hence he posited the earth to be set upon water and to rest there in the manner of flotation, as occurs with wood and other similar substances, none of which naturally remains. in air, but they do remain in water in this wise because of floating. And the same thing happens with the earth, they claimed.
500. Then at [358] he refutes what has been said with three arguments. And he says that the previous solution was proposed as though the same account had not to be given of the water which sustains the earth as of the earth itself. For we see that just as earth, if raised up, does not remain unless it is supported by something, so neither is water, when raised, apt to remain so, but it must be in something supporting it, if it is to remain at rest. Therefore, if earth were sustained by water, the same problem would remain — by what is the water supported?
501. He gives the second argument at [359], namely, that just as air is lighter than water, so water is lighter than earth, or less heavy. Now it is the nature of something lighter to rise above that which is heavier by nature. Therefore, it is not possible for water, which is lighter, to be placed lower than earth, which is heavier, according to nature — unless someone should say that the parts of the world are not ordered according to nature, which is unacceptable.
502. The third reason at [360] is this: As was had in Book I, natural motion, and the rest as well, of the entire earth and of a clod is the same. If, therefore, the whole earth is apt to remain in water and float on it, it plainly follows that any particle of it could remain afloat on the water. But this is not what we see happening; rather, any particle of earth placed in water sinks to the bottom, the quicker the larger it is. Therefore, much more quickly would the whole earth sink, if it were set upon water.
503. Then at [361] he indicates the reason why these arguments are deficient. And he says that the reason why they give such defective solutions is that they seem to investigate a problem up to a certain point but not as far as it is possible to inquire. But anyone who desires to solve problems properly must push his solution to the point where no doubts remain. This is something they failed to do.
He assigns the reason for this, and counts himself in with the others, to avoid being boastful, and says that it seems to be the practice of all of us when resolving problems to investigate, "not in terms of the thing, but in terms of the one contradicting," i.e., not as far as the nature of the matter requires but until an adversary offers no further contradiction. A man even does this with himself — when wondering about something he interrogates himself until he can no longer find to hand anything to contradict his view. But this is not enough. When someone wants to find a true solution, he must not be content merely with answering the objections he has to hand, but must diligently seek them out. Wherefore, as he says, anyone who wishes to be a good inquirer after truth must be ready to object against himself and others, not with sophistries but with real and reasonable objections proper to, i.e., befitting the genus under investigation. This arises when a man considers all the differences of the things from whose similarities a problem is solved. For example, Thales solved the present question on the basis of wood's similarity to water, but he should have considered the difference between them as well, For wood, because it contains much air, floats on water, which is not true of earth.
2-23
The cause of the earth's rest is not supporting air
Ἀναξιμένης δὲ καὶ Ἀναξαγόρας καὶ Δημόκριτος τὸ πλάτος αἴτιον εἶναί φασι τοῦ μένειν αὐτήν. Οὐ γὰρ τέμνειν ἀλλ' ἐπιπωμάζειν τὸν ἀέρα τὸν κάτωθεν, ὅπερ φαίνεται τὰ πλάτος ἔχοντα τῶν σωμάτων ποιεῖν ταῦτα γὰρ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνέμους ἔχει δυσκινήτως διὰ τὴν ἀντέρεισιν. Ταὐτὸ δὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν τῷ πλάτει φασὶ τὴν γῆν πρὸς τὸν ὑποκείμενον ἀέρα, (τὸν δ' οὐκ ἔχοντα μεταστῆναι τόπον ἱκανὸν ἀθρόως [τῷ] κάτωθεν ἠρεμεῖν,) ὥσπερ τὸ ἐν ταῖς κλεψύδραις ὕδωρ. Ὅτι δὲ δύναται πολὺ βάρος φέρειν ἀπολαμβανόμενος καὶ μένων ὁ ἀήρ, τεκμήρια πολλὰ λέγουσιν.
Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν εἰ μὴ πλατὺ τὸ σχῆμα τῆς γῆς ἐστι, διὰ τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ ἂν ἠρεμοῖ.
Καίτοι τῆς μονῆς οὐ τὸ πλάτος αἴτιον ἐξ ὧν λέγουσιν, ἀλλὰ τὸ μέγεθος μᾶλλον διὰ γὰρ τὴν στενοχωρίαν οὐκ ἔχων τὴν πάροδον ὁ ἀὴρ μένει διὰ τὸ πλῆθος πολὺς δ' ἐστὶ διὰ τὸ ὑπὸ μεγέθους πολλοῦ ἐναπολαμβάνεσθαι τοῦ τῆς γῆς. Ὥστε τοῦτο μὲν ὑπάρξει, κἂν σφαιροειδὴς μὲν ᾖ, τηλικαύτη δὲ τὸ μέγεθος μενεῖ γὰρ κατὰ τὸν ἐκείνων λόγον.
Ὅλως δὲ πρὸς τοὺς οὕτω λέγοντας περὶ τῆς κινήσεως οὐ περὶ μορίων ἐστὶν ἡ ἀμφισβήτησις, ἀλλὰ περὶ ὅλου τινὸς καὶ παντός. Ἐξ ἀρχῆς γὰρ διοριστέον πότερόν ἐστί τις τοῖς σώμασι φύσει κίνησις ἢ οὐδεμία, καὶ πότερον φύσει μὲν οὐκ ἔστι, βίᾳ δ' ἔστιν. Ἐπεὶ δὲ (295a.) περὶ τούτων διώρισται πρότερον ὅσα κατὰ τὴν παροῦσαν δύναμιν εἴχομεν, χρηστέον ὡς ὑπάρχουσιν. Εἰ γὰρ μηδεμία φύσει κίνησίς ἐστιν αὐτῶν, οὐδὲ βίαιος ἔσται εἰ δὲ μή ἐστι μήτε φύσει μήτε βίᾳ, ὅλως οὐδὲν κινηθήσεται περὶ γὰρ τούτων ὅτι ἀναγκαῖον συμβαίνειν, διώρισται πρότερον, καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ὅτι οὐδ' ἠρεμεῖν ἐνδέχεται ὥσπερ γὰρ κίνησις ὑπάρχει ἢ βίᾳ ἢ φύσει, οὕτω καὶ ἠρεμία. Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴ γέ ἐστι κίνησίς τις κατὰ φύσιν, οὐκ ἂν ἡ βίαιος εἴη φορὰ μόνον οὐδ' ἠρέμησις ὥστ' εἰ βίᾳ νῦν ἡ γῆ μένει, καὶ συνῆλθεν ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον φερομένη διὰ τὴν δίνησιν ταύτην γὰρ τὴν αἰτίαν πάντες λέγουσιν ἐκ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ὑγροῖς καὶ περὶ τὸν ἀέρα συμβαινόντων ἐν τούτοις γὰρ ἀεὶ φέρεται τὰ μείζω καὶ βαρύτερα πρὸς τὸ μέσον τῆς δίνης. Διὸ δὴ τὴν γῆν πάντες ὅσοι τὸν οὐρανὸν γεννῶσιν, ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον συνελθεῖν φασίν
504. Having presented two solutions, the first of which derived the cause of the earth's rest from the infinitude of the nether part of the earth, while the second derived it from water being under the earth, he here gives a third solution in which the cause is ascribed to air supporting the earth.
[1314] In De caelo, lib. 2 l. 23 n. 1 Et primo ponit solutionem;
secundo improbat eam, ibi: primum quidem et cetera.
First he presents the solution;
Secondly, he refutes it, at 505.
He says therefore first that Anaximenes and Anaxagoras and Democritus gave the broadness of the earth as the cause of its state of rest. That is why it happens that the earth does not cut the air beneath it, but rides upon it.
Now this is indeed what seems to be done by bodies purposely made wide in order to resist air and wind: for such very wide bodies do not seem to be easily moved by winds because they resist them along their entire width. This, too, the earth, because of its width, seems to do with respect to the air under it, i.e., instead of cleaving it, the earth resists and compresses it. And, since the air has no place to move in order not to be under the earth, because of the earth's width, the vast amount of pressed air under the earth is sufficient to uphold it, like the water in the case of the water-clock. For if a vessel with a small opening in the top, which is stopped up, and in the side another such opening not so stopped up, be suddenly submerged in water, the air imprisoned within, having no place to escape to, will keep water from entering. Similarly, the air residing under the earth, being pressed down by it and unable to escape, prevents the earth from falling.
And they adduce many "arguments," i.e., sensible signs, to show that air imprisoned and at rest, i.e., which cannot escape in any direction, sustains a great heaviness. And this is particularly true of inflated skins, which can support a great weight.
505. Then at [363] he refutes this solution with three arguments. The first of these is that this solution assumes the earth to be broad. But as we shall see later, this is false. Hence, if the earth is not broad but spherical, it will follow that its width will not account for its state of rest, as they alleged.
506. He gives the second argument at [364]. And he says that although they assign the earth's width as the cause of its rest, yet, according to that from which _they proceed, it seems that it is the earth's size rather than its width that causes it to rest. For they say that the air, having no place to go because it is prevented by the earth, remains because there is so much of it, and because of this holds up the earth. But the reason why a vast amount of air is kept in confinement by the earth is that it is compressed by the enormous magnitude of the earth. Hence it seems that the same argument would hold if the earth were assumed to be spherical and of such a great size that it could confine the same amount of air — for then, too, the air and the earth would remain, according to the reason they give.
507. He gives the third argument at [365] and he says that against those who thus speak about the motion and rest of natural bodies there arises a doubt not "about the part," i.e., concerning any particular body, such as earth or water, but concerning the entire universe and every natural body. For the first thing that seems to have to be determined in such problems is whether bodies have some natural motion, or none, and whether, if they do not have a natural motion, they can have violent [compulsory] motion. And because this question has already been determined, namely, in Book I, we must now use as "in existence," i.e., as true, all that we have previously established on this point according to the power that was then present in our talent.
For it has been shown above that, if there is no natural motion of bodies, neither can there be any compulsory motion thereof, because the compulsory is, as it were, a departure from that which is according to nature, as has been had above. But if there is neither a natural nor a compulsory motion of bodies, it follows that nothing is in motion at all — that this is so has been previously determined. To this must be added, according to what has been previously determined, that for the same reason nothing can be at rest — for just as there is motion which is natural and compulsory, so too, rest which is natural and compulsory. But if natural motion does exist, then there will not be compulsory motion alone nor compulsory rest alone — because, into whatever place a thing is moved naturally, there it also rests naturally.
Having prefaced these points as principles, he argues to his proposition and concludes from these premises that, if the earth's rest in the middle is not natural but compulsory, it follows that its motion to the middle is not natural. but is due to compulsion exercised by the circumgyration of the heaven. For all who maintain that the earth rests in the middle through compulsion assign this cause of the motion of the earth to the middle, namely, the circumgyration of the heaven, basing themselves on the consideration of what happens in the case of liquids, and also of air, namely, that the larger and heavier masses are gathered in the middle as though more violently repelled by the violence of the gyration. Hence all who posit a world that began by generation say that the earth came to the middle for the reason stated, i.e., on account of the compulsion induced by the heaven's circumgyration. They thus take from the earth both natural rest and natural motion. But this is unacceptable, because it follows, according to what has been said, that in their entirety natural bodies are neither in motion nor at rest.
2-24
Earth's rest not from gyration of the heaven
ὅτι δὲ μένει, ζητοῦσι τὴν αἰτίαν, καὶ λέγουσιν οἱ μὲν τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, ὅτι τὸ πλάτος καὶ τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῆς αἴτιον, οἱ δ' ὥσπερ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς, τὴν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ φορὰν κύκλῳ περιθέουσαν καὶ θᾶττον φερομένην ἢ τὴν τῆς γῆς φορὰν κωλύειν, καθάπερ τὸ ἐν τοῖς κυάθοις ὕδωρ καὶ γὰρ τοῦτο κύκλῳ τοῦ κυάθου φερομένου πολλάκις κάτω τοῦ χαλκοῦ γινόμενον ὅμως οὐ φέρεται κάτω, πεφυκὸς φέρεσθαι, διὰ τὴν αὐτὴν αἰτίαν.
Καίτοι μήτε τῆς δίνης κωλυούσης μήτε τοῦ πλάτους, ἀλλ' ὑπείκοντος τοῦ ἀέρος, ποῖ ποτ' οἰσθήσεται; Πρὸς μὲν γὰρ τὸ μέσον βίᾳ, καὶ μένει βίᾳ κατὰ φύσιν δέ γε ἀναγκαῖον εἶναί τινα αὐτῆς φοράν. Αὕτη οὖν πότερον ἄνω ἢ κάτω, ἢ ποῦ ἐστιν; Εἶναι μὲν γάρ τινα ἀναγκαῖον εἰ δὲ μηδὲν μᾶλλον κάτω ἢ ἄνω, ὁ δ' ἄνω ἀὴρ μὴ κωλύει τὴν ἄνω φοράν, οὐδ' ἂν ὁ ὑπὸ τῇ γῇ κωλύοι τὴν κάτω τὰ γὰρ αὐτὰ τῶν αὐτῶν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι αἴτια τοῖς αὐτοῖς.
Ἔτι δὲ πρὸς Ἐμπεδοκλέα κἂν ἐκεῖνό τις εἴπειεν. Ὅτε γὰρ τὰ στοιχεῖα διειστήκει χωρὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ νείκους, τίς αἰτία τῇ γῇ τῆς μονῆς ἦν; Οὐ γὰρ δὴ καὶ τότε αἰτιάσεται τὴν δίνην.
Ἄτοπον δὲ καὶ τὸ μὴ συννοεῖν ὅτι πρότερον μὲν διὰ τὴν δίνησιν ἐφέρετο τὰ μόρια τῆς γῆς πρὸς τὸ μέσον νῦν δὲ διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν πάντα τὰ βάρος ἔχοντα φέρεται πρὸς αὐτήν; Οὐ γὰρ ἥ γε δίνη (295b.) πλησιάζει πρὸς ἡμᾶς.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὸ πῦρ ἄνω φέρεται διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν; Οὐ γὰρ διά γε τὴν δίνην. Εἰ δὲ τοῦτο φέρεσθαί που πέφυκεν, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τὴν γῆν οἰητέον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τῇ δίνῃ γε τὸ βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον ὥρισται, ἀλλὰ τῶν πρότερον ὑπαρχόντων βαρέων καὶ κούφων τὰ μὲν εἰς τὸ μέσον ἔρχεται, τὰ δ' ἐπιπολάζει διὰ τὴν κίνησιν. Ἦν ἄρα καὶ πρὶν γενέσθαι τὴν δίνην τὸ μὲν βαρὺ τὸ δὲ κοῦφον, ἃ τίνι διώριστο καὶ πῶς ἐπεφύκει φέρεσθαι ἢ ποῦ; ἀπείρου γὰρ ὄντος ἀδύνατον εἶναι ἄνω ἢ κάτω, διώρισται δὲ τούτοις τὸ βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον. Οἱ μὲν οὖν πλεῖστοι περὶ τὰς αἰτίας ταύτας διατρίβουσιν
508. Having presented three reasons for the earth's rest, taken on the part of the lower bodies, namely, earth,. water and air, he here presents other arguments taken on the part of the heavenly body.
Et primo ponit quartam rationem quietis terrae, quam ponebat Empedocles;
:.4in;margin-top:0;text-indent:-.2in">secundo improbat eam, ibi: quamvis neque gyratione et cetera.
First he gives the fourth reason for the earth's rest, namely, the one which Empedocles gave;
Secondly, he refutes it, at 509.
He says therefore first [366] that, since all the philosophers who assert than the world was generated, assign, as the cause of the earth's movement to the middle, the violence of the heaven's circumgyration, they also inquire into the reason why the earth rests in the middle. Some say that the cause of this is the earth's width and size, as was said above; but others, such as Empedocles, assert that the motion of the heaven around the earth is so swift that it keeps the earth from being moved. And they give the example of water contained in cyathi, i.e., certain bronze vessels. For if that vessel be given a quite rapid circular motion and there is an opening in some part of the bronze vessel, then, after the vessel is spun a number of times, the water will descend to the bottom of the bronze vessel where the opening is; yet it will not fall out of the vessel (as it normally should according to its natural inclination) for the same reason, namely, because it is prevented by the speed of the vessel's motion in such a way that the water is seized by the motion of the vessel before it can fall. With a like argument, they say that the earth. is prevented by the speed of the heaven's motion from being able to fall downwards.
509. Then at [367] he rejects this reason.
Et primo quantum ad quietem terrae;
secundo quantum ad motum, ibi: inconveniens autem et cetera.
First with respect to the earth's rest;
Secondly, with respect to its motion.
In regard to the first he does two things:
primo improbat causam quietis terrae communiter, tam quantum ad illos qui causam quietis terrae ponunt latitudinem vel magnitudinem terrae, quam etiam quantum ad Empedoclem;
secundo specialiter improbat hanc positionem quantum ad Empedoclem, qui posuit causam quietis terrae velocitatem motus caeli; et hoc ibi: adhuc autem ad Empedoclem et cetera.
First he rejects the cause of the earth's rest in general, both with respect to those who assign the width or size of the earth as the cause of its rest, and also with respect to Empedocles;
Secondly, he specifically rejects this theory as far as it pertains to Empedocles, who assigned the speed of the heaven's motion as the cause of the earth's rest, at 510.
He says therefore first [367] that, since the aforesaid philosophers declare that the cause of the earth's rest is the motion of the heaven, or the earths width which corners the lower air so that it cannot escape, then it seems necessary that, if the heaven's gyration should not. restrain the earth from moving; and if the earth's width should not restrain it by confining the air, but the air should freely come and go, the earth would be carried somewhere —since now, the causes of rest removed, it would have to move. But it does not seem, according to their theory, that it would be carried to the middle according to its nature. If, then, as they say, the earth is carried to the middle by compulsion, then it would have to rest in the middle by compulsion, which they also posit.
However, the earth has to have some natural motion after all compulsion ceases — for all bodies have some motion that is natural, as has been said above. It remains, therefore, to investigate in which direction the earth would be moved naturally, if all compulsion ceased — whether upward, or downward, or in some other direction, e.g., to the right or to the left, for it certainly must have some natural motion. Nor can a reason be found for it to be naturally moved in any other direction except down and to the middle, as is evident from the motion of particles of earth, which are naturally moved in no other direction. Consequently, in assigning compulsion as the cause of the earth's rest in the middle, they make a poor choice.
But if they say that the natural motion of the earth does not incline it downward any more than upward, it seems to follow that, just as the air which is atop the earth does not keep it from being moved upward, so too neither will the air under the earth keep it from being moved downward, whether on account of the air's being confined by the earth's width or on account of its being revolved by the motion of the heaven — because, in dealing with the same things as to the same effects, the same causes must be posited.
510. Then at [368] he specifically disproves Empedocles' solution. Here it should be kept in mind that Empedocles posited four material elements and two movers, namely, friendship and strife, which, by associating and disassociating the elements, are the cause of the generation and corruption of the world and all things in the world. Aristotle says, therefore, that someone can bring against Empedocles the following difficulty: When the elements were separated from one another by strife, earth had to be at rest — because it did not join itself to the other elements so long as strife ruled. Therefore, one should ask what caused earth to be at rest at that time. One cannot give as a cause the gyration of the heaven, because the heaven had not yet been generated. It seems, therefore, that one can in no way say that the gyration of the heaven is the cause of the earth's rest.
But there seems to be some problem about this argument. For strife seems to be the cause of the generation of the world by disassociating the elements from one another, while friendship seems to be the cause of its corruption by uniting the elements into one chaos. Hence, one seems to have at present the rule of strife, since the elements are disassociated from one another.
Accordingly, Alexander expounds these words in the following manner: "When the elements were apart," means, not "from one another," but "from strife," i.e., at the time when strife was disassociated from the elements, namely, at the time when friendship ruled.
But because this explanation seems extorted, it should be explained as Simplicius says, as follows: "When the elements were apart," i.e., "from one another," and this "from strife," i.e., on account of strife. For it must be remembered that Empedocles explained the generation of the world, not in teems of strife alone, but with an admixture of friendship as well. And, as he [Simplicius] proves from the words of Empedocles, it is from the dominance of friendship that the circumgyration of the heaven comes, since the motion of the heaven masses, as it were, all things into one. Therefore, it is suitable for Aristotle to ask: What was the cause of the earth's rest before the gyration of the world was, according to Empedocles, caused by friendship?
511. Then at [369] he rejects the reason which they assign in general for the motion of the earth. This he does with three arguments. With respect to the first of which, he says that it is unacceptable not to consider why it is that if before, when the world was being generated, the parts of earth were carried to the middle on account of the heaven's gyration, now, when such a cause can no longer be assigned, we still see all heavy things carried to the middle. For the heaven's gyration rotates at once fire and the upper region of air, but not this lower region of air — and, consequently, this gyration does not reach as far as us. Yet we observe that heavy things are carried to the middle in this air near us. Therefore, the gyration of the heaven ought not be posited as the cause of heavy things' being moved to the middle — because if the cause is taken away, so too the effect.
512. At [370] he presents the second argument. And he says that we must consider why it is that fire is borne upwards. For it cannot be said that this s due to the heaven's gyration — since the example they give does not extend this far. However, if it is on account of its natural inclination that fire is borne to some certain place, then it is plain that the same should be thought of earth, which has contrariety to fire, as has been said above — for the motions of contraries are themselves contrary, and if one of the contraries is natural, the other too must be natural, as has been said.
513. He presents the third reason at [371] and says that if anyone considers their words and examples, it does not seem that one should say that the heavy is distinguished from the light among bodies on account of the heaven's gyration, but that, if we presuppose the distinction between the heavy and the light, then some, namely, the heavy, move to the middle, while others, namely, the light, try to move upward, insofar as they are repelled from the middle place by the heavy bodies carried there. Consequently, it is only by accident that the heaven's gyration causes the upward motion of fire. But that the gyration of the heaven does not distinguish the heavy from the light, but pre-supposes their distinction, can be seen from the example they adduce — for it: the gyration of air and liquids, things that are already heavy are carried to the middle. Consequently, before there was a gyration of the heaven, there existed heavy and light. These were distinguished according to something, namely, their aptitude to be moved in some way and to some certain place —for a thing is called "heavy" or "light" on account of an inclination to some certain local motion. Consequently, gyration is not the reason why light things are moved upward or heavy things downward.
Now these could distinguish heavy and light and their places, which are above and below, because they did not posit the universe to be infinite. For it is not impossible to distinguish up and down, if they distinguish heavy and light. And because some assumed an infinite universe, namely, Anaximenes and Xenophanes, Aristotle therefore says significantly that "many" of them, but not all, were "worn out," i.e., accustomed to, and practiced in, the matter of the causes of the motion and rest of heavy and light things.
2-25
Reason for earth's rest not from same relation to every part of the heaven
εἰσὶ δέ τινες οἳ διὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητά φασιν αὐτὴν μένειν, ὥσπερ τῶν ἀρχαίων Ἀναξίμανδρος μᾶλλον μὲν γὰρ οὐθὲν ἄνω ἢ κάτω ἢ εἰς τὰ πλάγια φέρεσθαι προσήκει τὸ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου ἱδρυμένον καὶ ὁμοίως πρὸς τὰ ἔσχατα ἔχον ἅμα δ' ἀδύνατον εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον ποιεῖσθαι τὴν κίνησιν ὥστ' ἐξ ἀνάγκης μένειν.
Τοῦτο δὲ λέγεται κομψῶς μέν, οὐκ ἀληθῶς δέ κατὰ γὰρ τοῦτον τὸν λόγον ἀναγκαῖον ἅπαν ὅ τι ἂν τεθῇ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, μένειν, ὥστε καὶ τὸ πῦρ ἠρεμήσει τὸ γὰρ εἰρημένον οὐκ ἴδιόν ἐστι τῆς γῆς.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐκ ἀναγκαῖον. Οὐ γὰρ μόνον φαίνεται μένουσα ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, ἀλλὰ καὶ φερομένη πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Ὅπου γὰρ ὁτιοῦν φέρεται μόριον αὐτῆς, ἀναγκαῖον ἐνταῦθα φέρεσθαι καὶ τὴν ὅλην οὗ δὲ φέρεται κατὰ φύσιν, καὶ μένει ἐνταυθοῖ κατὰ φύσιν. Οὐκ ἄρα διὰ τὸ ὁμοίως ἔχειν πρὸς τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ πᾶσι κοινόν, τὸ δὲ φέρεσθαι πρὸς τὸ μέσον ἴδιον τῆς γῆς.
Ἄτοπον δὲ καὶ τοῦτο μὲν ζητεῖν, διὰ τί ποτε μένει ἡ γῆ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, τὸ δὲ πῦρ μὴ ζητεῖν διὰ τί ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐσχάτου. Εἰ μὲν γὰρ κἀκείνῳ φύσει τόπος ὁ ἔσχατος, δῆλον ὅτι ἀναγκαῖον εἶναί τινα καὶ τῇ γῇ φύσει τόπον εἰ δὲ μὴ ταύτῃ οὗτος ὁ τόπος, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν ἀνάγκην μένει τὴν τῆς ὁμοιότητος (ὥσπερ ὁ περὶ τῆς τριχὸς λόγος τῆς ἰσχυρῶς μὲν ὁμοίως δὲ πάντῃ τεινομένης, ὅτι οὐ διαρραγήσεται, καὶ τοῦ πεινῶντος καὶ διψῶντος σφόδρα μέν, ὁμοίως δέ, καὶ τῶν ἐδωδίμων καὶ ποτῶν ἴσον ἀπέχοντος καὶ γὰρ τοῦτον ἠρεμεῖν ἀναγκαῖον), ζητητέον αὐτοῖς περὶ τῆς τοῦ πυρὸς μονῆς ἐπὶ τῶν ἐσχάτων.
(296a.) Θαυμαστὸν δὲ καὶ τὸ περὶ μὲν τῆς μονῆς ζητεῖν, περὶ δὲ τῆς φορᾶς αὐτῶν μὴ ζητεῖν, διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν τὸ μὲν ἄνω φέρεται, τὸ δ' ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον, μηδενὸς ἐμποδίζοντος.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἀληθές ἐστι τὸ λεγόμενον. Κατὰ συμβεβηκὸς μέντοι τοῦτό γ' ἀληθές, ὡς ἀναγκαῖον μένειν ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου πᾶν ᾧ μηθὲν μᾶλλον δεῦρο ἢ δεῦρο κινεῖσθαι προσήκει. Ἀλλὰ διά γε τοῦτον τὸν λόγον οὐ μενεῖ, ἀλλὰ κινηθήσεται, οὐ μέντοι ὅλον, ἀλλὰ διεσπασμένον. Ὁ γὰρ αὐτὸς ἁρμόσει λόγος καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ πυρός ἀνάγκη γὰρ τεθὲν μένειν ὁμοίως ὥσπερ τὴν γῆν ὁμοίως γὰρ ἕξει πρὸς τῶν σημείων τῶν ἐσχάτων ὁτιοῦν ἀλλ' ὅμως οἰσθήσεται ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου, ὥσπερ καὶ φαίνεται φερόμενον, ἂν μή τι κωλύῃ, πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον πλὴν οὐχ ὅλον πρὸς ἓν σημεῖον (τοῦτο γὰρ ἀναγκαῖον μόνον συμβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ λόγου τοῦ περὶ τῆς ὁμοιότητος) ἀλλὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον μόριον πρὸς τὸ ἀνάλογον τοῦ ἐσχάτου, λέγω δ' οἷον τὸ τέταρτον μέρος πρὸς τὸ τέταρτον μέρος τοῦ περιέχοντος οὐθὲν γὰρ στιγμὴ τῶν σωμάτων ἐστίν. Ὥσπερ δὲ κἂν ἐκ μεγάλου συνέλθοι πυκνούμενον εἰς ἐλάττω τόπον, οὕτω κἂν ἐξ ἐλάττονος εἰς μείζω μανότερον γιγνόμενον ὥστε κἂν ἡ γῆ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἐκινεῖτο ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου διά γε τὸν τῆς ὁμοιότητος λόγον, εἰ μὴ φύσει τῆς γῆς οὗτος ὁ τόπος ἦν.
Ὅσα μὲν οὖν τυγχάνει περί τε τοῦ σχήματος αὐτῆς ὑπολαμβανόμενα καὶ περὶ τόπου καὶ μονῆς καὶ κινήσεως, σχεδὸν ταῦτ' ἐστίν.
514. Having presented the fourth solution according to which the explanation of the earth's rest was taken from the violence of the heaven's gyration, he [the Philosophe] here presents the fifth solution in which the explanation of the earth's rest is based on the fact of a similar relation of the heaven to the earth from all directions.
Et primo assignat hanc rationem;
secundo improbat eam, ibi: hoc autem dicitur et cetera.
First he presents this explanation;
Secondly, he disproves it, at 515.
He says therefore first that some have said that the earth rests in the middle because of "likeness,"' i.e., on account of its being similarly related to every part of the heaven. Among the ancients, Anaximander held this opinion. By this he gives us to understand that some of his contemporaries believed this. For Plato is said to have posited this; yet Aristotle does not attribute it to him because above he had attributed to him the opinion that the earth was moved in the middle about the axis of the world.
Now the reason why they said that the earth stays put on account of likeness, is that there is no reason why that which is placed in the middle should be moved upward or downward, or toward other reaches of the heaven, since it is related in the same way to the extremes in every direction. Now it is impossible for it to be moved simultaneously in contrary directions. Therefore it remains that it necessarily rests in the middle.
515. Then at... he disproves this explanation.
Et primo ex hoc quod ratio non est necessaria;
secundo ex hoc quod supponit falsum, ibi: sed adhuc neque verum quod dicitur et cetera.
First on the ground that the argument does not have necessity;
Secondly, on the ground that it supposes something false, at 519.
He says therefore first 1577 that the statements they make appear persuasive, but are not truly so. And this he proves with four arguments. The first of these is that, if the above explanation were true, then everything placed in the middle would have to rest there (and thus it would follow that fires if it were put in the middle, would remain at rest, which is patently false), because the cause of rest assigned here, namely, being in the middle, is not taken to be peculiar to earth yet the effect, namely, to be at rest in the middle, is peculiar to earth.
516. The second argument is presented at 717, and he says that it is not necessary to say that the earth rests in the middle on account of likeness, since a more suitable cause is available. For earth seems not only to rest in the middle, but to be borne toward the middle, if not according to the whole, nevertheless according to its parts. Now there is the same explanation for the motion of the whole and for that of the part. For whithersoever a part of the earth is borne, there too the whole would be necessarily borne, should it be outside its proper place. But wherever it is borne according to its nature, there it also rests according to its nature. Accordingly, it is plain that the earth rests in the middle on account of its very nature and not because it is related in a "liken way to the extremes, since to be put in the middle can be common to all things — but to be naturally borne to the middle is peculiar to earth.
517. He gives his third argument, which also shows the insufficiency of this explanation. And he says it is inappropriate to investigate why the earth rests in the middle and not investigate why fire rests in the extreme confine. For if fire rests there because the extreme place naturally suits it, then for the same reason it should be said that earth too has a natural place in which to rest. And if the middle is not the place where earth naturally rests, but it remains in the middle on account of the necessity of likeness, then they must investigate why fire remains in the extremes.
And he gives examples of the earth's rest in the middle based on certain arguments of the sophists, who seemed to prove that a "trichos," i.e., a hair, if vigorously stretched, would not break, because it would be stretched alike in every direction and there is no reason why it should break at one point rather than at another. But this argument is sophistical: first, because it is difficult for it to be stretched everywhere in the same way; secondly, because, even supposing this, it would break in the middle, because it is there that the violence exerted from both directions meets.
He gives another example, namely, of a person subject to an equal degree of hunger and thirst and having food and drink at an equal distance. The sophists conclude that such a person would remain where he is, and be moved to neither. But this does not follow: first of all, because thirst is stronger than hunger; secondly, because, if two meals or two drinks were equally desirable, he would run to whichever one he should happen to run to.
518. He presents his fourth argument, which also shows the insufficiency of the aforesaid. And he says that it was strange for them to inquire into the reason why bodies rest and not inquire into the reason for their motion, namely, as to why one body is moved upward and another downward when no obstacle detains them. For nature is the principle of motion and rest in that in which it is, as is said in II.
519. Then he disproves the aforesaid explanation on the ground that it assumes something that is false. And he says that what is said in the aforesaid explanation is not true per se and universally. For it ism' accid~ true that "everything," i.e., a whole, must remain in the middle if there is no greater reason for it to be moved here than there. But if it should have an inclination to be moved in some direction, then, because of the fact that it is in the middle, it will not rest of necessity, but it will be moved — yet not as a whole, but divided into parts, as is evident with fire.
For if what they say is true, then, if fire were put in the middle of the world, it would have to remain there, as the earth does, on the ground that it would be similarly related to every point that can be designated in the heaven; yet if fire were put in the middle, it would be moved to the extreme if nothing stopped it, as it is even now seen to be moved. But yet, not all is moved to one point — and this alone was removed in the previous argument, namely, that the whole should be moved in one direction. But each portion of the fire will be moved to a part of the heaven suitable to it — for example, a fourth part of the fire to a fourth part of the "container," i.e., the heaven; for a body is not an indivisible point. Just as parts of earth, if dispersed toward the confines of the heaven, would be condensed to come to a lesser place, namely, the middle, so also conversely, if fire were moved from the middle to the extreme, it would have, by rarefaction, to be moved from a small place to a larger place.
520. And thus ceases the objection upon which someone could gainsay the foregoing and declare that it is impossible for individual portions of fire to be borne to individual parts of the heaven on the ground that the extreme place exceeds the middle in quantity. For this is forestalled by the fact that through rarefaction the fin: would be extended to occupy a greater place. And from this he concludes that if the middle place were not natural to earth, then, on account of likeness, it would be moved in such a way from the middle to the extreme that each of its parts would be moved to individual parts of the extreme, as was said of fire.
Finally, he sums up and says that this is practically all that the ancient philosophers suspected about the shape and place of the earth and about its place and its motion or rest.
2-26
Proof of the earth's rest in the middle
Ἡμεῖς δὲ λέγωμεν πρῶτον πότερον ἔχει κίνησιν ἢ μένει καθάπερ γὰρ εἴπομεν, οἱ μὲν αὐτὴν ἓν τῶν ἄστρων εἶναι ποιοῦσιν, οἱ δ' ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου θέντες ἴλλεσθαι καὶ κινεῖσθαί φασι περὶ τὸν πόλον μέσον. Ὅτι δ' ἐστὶν ἀδύνατον, δῆλον λαβοῦσιν ἀρχὴν ὡς εἴπερ φέρεται εἴτ' ἐκτὸς οὖσα τοῦ μέσου εἴτ' ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, ἀναγκαῖον αὐτὴν βίᾳ κινεῖσθαι ταύτην τὴν κίνησιν οὐ γὰρ αὐτῆς γε τῆς γῆς ἐστιν καὶ γὰρ ἂν τῶν μορίων ἕκαστον ταύτην εἶχε τὴν φοράν νῦν δ' ἐπ' εὐθείας πάντα φέρεται πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Διόπερ οὐχ οἷόν τ' ἀΐδιον εἶναι, βίαιόν γ' οὖσαν καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἡ δέ γε τοῦ κόσμου τάξις ἀΐδιος.
Ἔτι πάντα τὰ φερόμενα τὴν φορὰν τὴν ἐγκύκλιον ὑπολειπόμενα φαίνεται καὶ κινούμενα πλείους (296b.) μιᾶς φορὰς ἔξω τῆς πρώτης, ὥστε καὶ τὴν γῆν ἀναγκαῖον, εἴτε περὶ τὸ μέσον εἴτ' ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου κειμένη φέρεται, δύο κινεῖσθαι φοράς. Τούτου δὲ συμβαίνοντος ἀναγκαῖον γίγνεσθαι πάροδον καὶ τροπὰς τῶν ἐνδεδεμένων ἄστρων. Τοῦτο δ' οὐ φαίνεται γιγνόμενον, ἀλλ' ἀεὶ ταὐτὰ κατὰ τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἀνατέλλει καὶ δύεται τόπους αὐτῆς.
Ἔτι δ' ἡ φορὰ τῶν μορίων καὶ ὅλης αὐτῆς ἡ κατὰ φύσιν ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον τοῦ παντός ἐστιν διὰ τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ τυγχάνει κειμένη νῦν ἐπὶ τοῦ κέντρου
διαπορήσειε δ' ἄν τις, ἐπεὶ ταὐτὸν ἀμφοτέρων ἐστὶ τὸ μέσον, πρὸς πότερον φέρεται τὰ βάρος ἔχοντα καὶ τὰ μόρια τῆς γῆς κατὰ φύσιν πότερον ὅτι τοῦ παντός ἐστι μέσον, ἢ διότι τῆς γῆς.
Ἀνάγκη δὴ πρὸς τὸ τοῦ παντός καὶ γὰρ τὰ κοῦφα καὶ τὸ πῦρ εἰς τοὐναντίον φερόμενα τοῖς βάρεσι πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον φέρεται τοῦ περιέχοντος τόπου τὸ μέσον. Συμβέβηκε δὲ ταὐτὸ μέσον εἶναι τῆς γῆς καὶ τοῦ παντός φέρεται γὰρ καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ τῆς γῆς μέσον, ἀλλὰ κατὰ συμβεβηκός, ᾗ τὸ μέσον ἔχει ἐν τῷ τοῦ παντὸς μέσῳ.
Ὅτι δὲ φέρεται καὶ πρὸς τὸ τῆς γῆς μέσον, σημεῖον ὅτι τὰ φερόμενα βάρη ἐπὶ ταύτην οὐ παρ' ἄλληλα φέρεται ἀλλὰ πρὸς ὁμοίας γωνίας, ὥστε πρὸς ἓν τὸ μέσον φέρεται, καὶ τὸ τῆς γῆς.
Φανερὸν τοίνυν ὅτι ἀνάγκη ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου εἶναι τὴν γῆν καὶ ἀκίνητον, διά τε τὰς εἰρημένας αἰτίας,
καὶ διότι τὰ βίᾳ ῥιπτούμενα ἄνω βάρη κατὰ στάθμην πάλιν φέρεται εἰς ταὐτό, κἂν εἰς ἄπειρον ἡ δύναμις ἐκριπτῇ.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὔτε κινεῖται οὔτ' ἐκτὸς κεῖται τοῦ μέσου, φανερὸν ἐκ τούτων
πρὸς δὲ τούτοις δῆλον ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων τὸ αἴτιον τῆς μονῆς. Εἰ γὰρ φύσει πέφυκε φέρεσθαι πάντοθεν πρὸς τὸ μέσον, ὥσπερ φαίνεται, καὶ τὸ πῦρ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου πάλιν πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον, ἀδύνατον ἐνεχθῆναι ὁτιοῦν μόριον αὐτῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου μὴ βιασθέν μία γὰρ φορὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς καὶ ἁπλῆ τοῦ ἁπλοῦ, ἀλλ' οὐχ αἱ ἐναντίαι ἡ δ' ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου τῇ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον ἐναντία. Εἰ τοίνυν ὁτιοῦν μόριον ἀδύνατον ἐνεχθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου, φανερὸν ὅτι καὶ τὴν ὅλην ἔτι ἀδυνατώτερον εἰς ὃ γὰρ τὸ μόριον πέφυκε φέρεσθαι, καὶ τὸ ὅλον ἐνταῦθα πέφυκεν ὥστ' (297a.) εἴπερ ἀδύνατον κινηθῆναι μὴ ὑπὸ κρείττονος ἰσχύος, ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη μένειν αὐτὴν ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου.
Μαρτυρεῖ δὲ τούτοις καὶ τὰ παρὰ τῶν μαθηματικῶν λεγόμενα περὶ τὴν ἀστρολογίαν τὰ γὰρ φαινόμενα συμβαίνει μεταβαλλόντων τῶν σχημάτων οἷς ὥρισται τῶν ἄστρων ἡ τάξις, ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου κειμένης τῆς γῆς.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τοῦ τόπου καὶ μονῆς καὶ κινήσεως, ὃν τρόπον ἔχει, τοσαῦτα εἰρήσθω περὶ αὐτῆς.
521. After pursuing the opinions of others concerning the earth, the Philosopher here determines about it according to the truth.
Et primo determinat de loco et quiete terrae;
secundo de figura ipsius, ibi: figuram autem habere sphaericam et cetera.
First he determines the question of the earth's place and rest;
Secondly, that of its shape (L. 27).
As to the first he does two things:
primo determinat veritatem per rationes naturales;
secundo per signa astrologica, ibi: testificantur autem his et cetera.
First he determines the truth by arguments of nature;
Secondly, by signs taken from astronomy, at 530.
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo ostendit quod impossibile est terram moveri;
secundo ex praemissis assignat veram rationem quietis terrae, ibi: adhuc autem palam et cetera.
First he shows that it is impossible for the earth to be in motion;
Secondly, from the foregoing he assigns the true reason of the earth's rest, at 529.
Regarding the first he does three things:
First he states his intention [379], namely, that we must first say whether the earth is in motion or at rest. For it is from motion that we must approach the other points to be considered about the earth. Therefore he presents this first in order to take it as a principle of what is to follow.
Secondly, at [380] he states why it is necessary to make this enquiry For, as has been said above, some, namely, the Pythagoreans, assumed that it is in motion about the middle of the world, as though it were one of the stars; but others, as is written in the Timaeus, assuming that the earth is in the middle, assert that it is revolved about the "middle of the pole," i.e., about the axis which divides the heaven through the middle.
522. Thirdly, at [381] he shows that it is impossible for the earth to be thus in motion with four arguments. In the first of these he takes as a principle the fact that, if the earth is moved circularly, whether in the middle of the world or outside the middle, such a motion, as far as the earth is concerned, would have to be a compulsory one. For it is manifest that a circular motion is not the proper and natural motion for the earth, because, if it were, then every particle of earth would have to have this motion, since the natural motion of the whole and of the part is the same, as was said above. Now observation shows that this is false, for all the parts of earth are moved with a straight motion toward the middle of the world. But if a circular motion of earth is a compulsory one and beside its nature, it cannot be eternal, because, as was held in a previous lecture, nothing compulsory is eternal. But if the earth is in circular motion, that motion has to be eternal, supposing, according to his opinion, that the world is eternal — because, according to this, the world's order must be eternal, and the motion, or rest, of the chief parts of the world pertain to its order. Thus it follows, therefore, that the earth is not being moved circularly.
523. The second argument at [382] is this: All bodies in circular motion seem to be "hesitant," i.e., they do not always retain a uniform position, since each of them is moved by several motions and not just one, except the first sphere, which is moved with one motion, and this, according to him, is the sphere of the fixed stars. If, therefore, the earth has a circular motion, whether being in the middle or outside the middle, it would have to be moved with several motions, namely, with the motion of the first sphere about the poles of the equinoctial circle and with another proper motion about the poles of the Zodiac.
But this cannot be, because, if it were, there would be changes and turnings of the fixed stars in relation to the earth, which, because of its own motion, would fail [i.e., be slowed up] and would not return to the same point simultaneously with a fixed star, either in the case of the whole earth or of some indicated part, as happens with the planets. Consequently, it would follow that the fixed stars would not always be seen to rise and set according to the same part of the earth. But this does not happen — rather they always rise and set according to the same designated places. Therefore, the earth is not circularly moved.
524. At [383] he gives a third argument which takes its start from the motion of the parts of the earth and of the whole. Hence with respect to this he does three things:
primo proponit qualis sit motus naturalis terrae et partium eius;
secundo circa hoc movet quandam dubitationem, ibi: hoc enim utique etc.;
tertio concludit quod intendit.
First he proposes the condition of the natural motion of the earth and of its parts;
Secondly, he raises a problem on this point, at 525;
Thirdly, he concludes to what he intended, at 527.
He says therefore first [383] that the motion of parts of the earth is, according to their nature, to the middle of the whole world. In like manner, if the whole earth were outside the middle of the world, it would be moved to the middle of the world according to its nature, because the natural motion of the whole and of the part is the same.
525. Then at [384] he raises a certain problem on this point. First he proposes it, and says that if it be assumed that the earth is in the middle or center of the world, in such a way that the center of the whole world and of the earth is the same, there can be a problem as to which of these middles do heavy bodies, and especially parts of the earth move according to nature, namely, whether to the middle as it is the middle of the world, or as it is the middle of the earth.
Secondly, at [385] he solves the problem, saying that it is necessary that heavy bodies be moved to the middle as it is the middle of the whole world. For the motion of heavy bodies is contrary to the motion of the light. But light bodies, and in particular, fire, are moved toward the outer boundary of the heavenly body; therefore, heavy bodies, and in particular, earth, are moved to the middle of the world. But because it happens that the middle of the earth and the middle of the world are the same, the consequence is that the parts of earth are moved to the middle of the earth, not per se, but per accidens, namely, insofar as the middle of the earth and the middle of the world are the same as to subject — thus, if I know Coriscus, I know per accidens the one who is approaching, because Coriscus is the one approaching.
526. Thirdly, at [386] he proves what he had assumed, namely, that heavy bodies and the parts of earth are moved to the middle. And he says that a sign of this is that heavy bodies are naturally borne toward the earth, "not side by side," i.e., not along equidistant lines that never meet, but "according to similar angles," i.e., right angles with respect to the surface, or a line tangent to the earth's surface. And this happens no matter from which direction a heavy body is moved toward the earth.
And a sign of this is that if a pillar anywhere on earth is not erected according to right angles, but leans, it will fall in the direction with which it makes an acute angle. Now it is proved in Book III of Euclid that, if a line is tangent to a circle, and another line is drawn down perpendicular to the tangent line at the point of contact with the circle, necessarily it will, if extended, pass through the center of the circle. Thus it is plain that all heavy bodies are moved toward the center of the earth, in such a way that, if there were no obstacle, things moved from different directions would meet in the center of the earth. The reason for this is that each of them would be moving along a straight line falling perpendicularly on a tangent at its point of contact [with the earth]. Consequently all heavy bodies must be borne toward the one middle of the world and of the earth.
527. Then at [387] he concludes his proposition. And he draws two conclusions. The first of these is that the earth is in the middle of the world. This conclusion is derived thus from the foregoing. All heavy bodies are moved per se to the middle of the world. But all are likewise moved to the middle of the earth, as has been proved. Therefore, the middle of the earth is the middle of the world. And so the earth is in the middle of the world.
The second conclusion is that the earth is immovable. This is concluded from the foregoing as follows: Nothing is moved in the place toward which it is naturally moved. But the earth is naturally moved to the middle of the world. Therefore, it is not in motion there. But it is nowhere but in the middle of the world, as has been proved, Therefore the earth is not in motion in any way
528. He gives a fourth argument at [388] For we observe that if a stone at rest on a tablet is thrown straight up into the air and then falls along the same straight line that it described in its upward flight, and the tablet is not moved, the stone will fall into the same place where it previously was. But if the tablet is moved, the stone will fall in another place [than the tablet], so much the more distant as the stone was thrown higher — since, according to this, there will be more time between the beginning of the throwing and the end of the fall. However, when heavy objects are thrown upward "according to rule," i.e., according to a straight line, they again return to the same place on earth whence they were thrown. And lest anyone should say that this happens due to the slowness of the earth's motion, which makes the difference between the two places to be imperceptible, he adds that the same thing will happen if someone throws the stone up an infinite number of times, one after the other, i.e., long enough to make perceptible the distance intervening between the places. Thus it is plain that the earth is not in motion.
Then in summing up he concludes [3891 that it is plain from the foregoing that the earth is neither in motion nor has any position outside the middle of the earth.
529. Then at [390] he assigns the cause of the earth's rest. And he says that from the foregoing it is plain what the cause of its rest is. For, as has been said, earth is naturally inclined to be borne to the middle from every direction, as our sense observations indicate — and similarly it is apparent to sense that fire is naturally moved from the middle of the world to the extreme. Hence it follows that no particle of earth, small or large, can be moved from the middle except by violence; for, as was had in Book I, one body has one natural motion, and to a simple body belongs a simple motion, so that two contrary motions cannot belong to a simple body. But a motion from the middle is contrary to one toward the middle. And so, if it is true that no portion of earth can be borne from the middle except through violence, it is plainly much more impossible that the entire earth be moved from the middle.
However, someone could object that the whole earth is not in motion to the middle. But he excludes this by saying that the whole earth is apt to be borne whither a part is apt to be borne. And so, if a part of the earth is naturally moved to the middle, then the whole earth will be naturally moved thither. And so it is impossible that it be moved from the middle; hence it is necessary that it rest in the middle.
530. Then at [391] he uses the findings of astronomers to confirm his teachings about the earth's position and state of rest. And he says that what has been said, namely, that the earth is in the middle and rests there, is attested to by the statements of the mathematicians concerning astronomy. For what sensibly appears concerning the shifting of configurations, determined by the position and order of the stars, can be saved if the earth is at rest in the middle and not otherwise.
For as Ptolemy says, if the earth were not in the middle, then it would have to be subject to one of three dispositions. One of these is that the axis of the world would be outside the earth, and yet the earth would be equidistant from each of the poles. The second is that the earth would be on the axis and would approach closer to one pole than to the other. The third is that the earth is neither on the axis nor equidistant from each of the poles.
Now if the earth were situated in the first way, namely, so that the earth would be outside the axis but equidistant from each pole, then, whether it were above or below the axis, the horizon of people living in the right sphere would have to divide the equinoctial circle and all equidistant circles into unequal parts; consequently, there would never be an equinox in the right sphere. In the oblique sphere either there never would be an equinox, or else it would not occur between two solstices — because the horizon could never divide the greatest of the equidistant circles into two halves, although perhaps one of the others. But if the earth leaned away from the axis in either an easterly or westerly direction, it would follow, first of all, that the stars would not appear equal in their rising and setting on account of the inequality of distance. Secondly, it would follow that the interval of time from sunrise to highest elevation, when it is most above our heads, would not be equal to the space of time until sunset.
But if the earth were disposed in the second way, namely, with the earth on the axis but nearer to one of the poles than to the other, two unacceptable things would follow. First of all, because it would be in the right sphere alone that the horizon would divide the heaven into two halves, whereas in the oblique sphere the smaller part of the heaven would always be related to the visible pole, and the larger part to the hidden pole. And thus it would follow that the horizon of the oblique sphere would not divide the Zodiac into two halves; the contrary of which is apparent from the fact that we see six signs over the earth. Secondly, because if the earth were not directly situated under the equinoctial circle [i.e., the equator], it would follow that the eastern shadows of erect bodies at the equinoxes would not be in a straight line with those of the west — but the contrary of this is observed.
And from this it is plain that neither is the third way possible, namely, that the earth be neither on the axis nor equidistant from each of the poles, because, on this position, all the aforesaid impossibilities would follow. Moreover, no matter which way the earth should fail to be in the middle of the world, the entire order in the increasing and decreasing of days and nights would be confused. Similarly disturbed would be the rules of eclipses; for eclipses of the moon would not always occur when sun and moon are in direct opposition, if the earth were not in the middle.
531. That the earth is not in a motion that passes from place to place is due to its always being in the middle. And again it would follow, no matter with what sort of motion it were moved, that the swiftness of its motion would conceal from us all other motions whether of clouds or of animals. For a slower moving object does not seem to be in motion when side by aide with a faster moving object.
Thus, therefore, in summary, the Philosopher concludes [392] that so much has been said above about the manner of the earth's place and its motion and rest.
2-27
Proof of the earth's spherical shape, from motion
Σχῆμα δ' ἔχειν σφαιροειδὲς ἀναγκαῖον αὐτήν ἕκαστον γὰρ τῶν μορίων βάρος ἔχει μέχρι πρὸς τὸ μέσον, καὶ τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ μείζονος ὠθούμενον οὐχ οἷόν τε κυμαίνειν, ἀλλὰ συμπιέζεσθαι μᾶλλον καὶ συγχωρεῖν ἕτερον ἑτέρῳ, ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον.
Δεῖ δὲ νοῆσαι τὸ λεγόμενον ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ γιγνομένης τὸν τρόπον ὃν καὶ τῶν φυσιολόγων λέγουσί τινες γενέσθαι. Πλὴν ἐκεῖνοι μὲν βίαν αἰτιῶνται τῆς κάτω φορᾶς βέλτιον δὲ τιθέναι τἀληθές, καὶ φάναι τοῦτο συμβαίνειν διὰ τὸ φύσιν ἔχειν φέρεσθαι τὸ βάρος ἔχον πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Ἐν δυνάμει οὖν ὄντος τοῦ μίγματος τὰ διακρινόμενα ἐφέρετο ὁμοίως πάντοθεν πρὸς τὸ μέσον.
Εἴτ' οὖν ὁμοίως ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων διῃρημένα τὰ μόρια συνήχθη πρὸς τὸ μέσον, εἴτ' ἄλλως ἔχοντα, ποιήσει ταὐτόν. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν ὁμοίως γε πανταχόθεν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων φερομένων πρὸς ἓν μέσον ἀναγκαῖον ὅμοιον γίγνεσθαι πάντῃ τὸν ὄγκον, φανερόν ἴσου γὰρ πάντῃ προστιθεμένου ἴσον ἀνάγκη ἀπέχειν τοῦ μέσου τὸ ἔσχατον τοῦτο δὲ τὸ σχῆμα σφαίρας ἐστίν. Οὐδὲν δὲ διοίσει πρὸς τὸν λόγον, οὐδ' εἰ μὴ πανταχόθεν ὁμοίως συνέθει πρὸς τὸ μέσον τὰ μόρια αὐτῆς. Τὸ γὰρ πλεῖον ἀεὶ τὸ πρὸ αὑτοῦ ἔλαττον προωθεῖν ἀναγκαῖον μέχρι τοῦ μέσου τὴν ῥοπὴν ἐχόντων ἀμφοῖν, καὶ τοῦ βαρυτέρου προωθοῦντος μέχρι τούτου τὸ ἔλαττον βάρος.
Ὃ γὰρ ἄν τις ἀπορήσειε, τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχει τούτοις λύσιν εἰ γὰρ οὔσης ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου καὶ σφαιροειδοῦς τῆς γῆς πολλαπλάσιον βάρος ἐπιγένοιτο πρὸς θάτερον ἡμισφαίριον, οὐκ ἔσται τὸ αὐτὸ μέσον τοῦ ὅλου καὶ τὸ τῆς γῆς ὥστε ἢ οὐ μενεῖ ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, ἢ εἴπερ, ἠρεμήσει γε καὶ (297b.) μὴ τὸ μέσον ἔχουσα, ᾗ πέφυκε κινεῖσθαι καὶ νῦν. Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἀπορούμενον τοῦτ' ἔστιν
ἰδεῖν δ' οὐ χαλεπὸν μικρὸν ἐπιτείναντας, καὶ διελόντας πῶς ἀξιοῦμεν ὁποσονοῦν μέγεθος φέρεσθαι πρὸς τὸ μέσον, βάρος ἔχον. Δῆλον γὰρ ὡς οὐχὶ μέχρι τοῦ ἅψασθαι τοῦ κέντρου τὸ ἔσχατον, ἀλλὰ δεῖ κρατεῖν τὸ πλέον ἕως ἂν λάβῃ τῷ αὑτοῦ μέσῳ τὸ μέσον μέχρι τούτου γὰρ ἔχει τὴν ῥοπήν. Οὐδὲν τοίνυν τοῦτο διαφέρει λέγειν ἐπὶ βώλου καὶ μορίου τοῦ τυχόντος ἢ ἐπὶ ὅλης τῆς γῆς οὐ γὰρ διὰ μικρότητα ἢ μέγεθος εἴρηται τὸ συμβαῖνον, ἀλλὰ κατὰ παντὸς τοῦ ῥοπὴν ἔχοντος ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον. Ὥστε εἴτε ὅλη ποθὲν ἐφέρετο εἴτε κατὰ μέρος, ἀναγκαῖον μέχρι τούτου φέρεσθαι ἕως ἂν πανταχόθεν ὁμοίως λάβῃ τὸ μέσον, ἀνισαζομένων τῶν ἐλαττόνων ὑπὸ τῶν μειζόνων τῇ προώσει τῆς ῥοπῆς.
Εἴτ' οὖν ἐγένετο, τοῦτον ἀναγκαῖον γενέσθαι τὸν τρόπον, ὥστε φανερὸν ὅτι σφαιροειδὴς ἡ γένεσις αὐτῆς, εἴτ' ἀγένητος ἀεὶ διατελεῖ μένουσα, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ἔχειν ὅνπερ κἂν εἰ γιγνομένη τὸ πρῶτον ἐγένετο.
532. Having determined the truth about the earth's place and about its motion or rest, the Philosopher here determines the truth about its shape.
Et primo probat terram esse sphaericam, rationibus naturalibus, quae accipiuntur ex parte motus;
secundo rationibus mathematicis et astrologicis, quae accipiuntur ex his quae apparent secundum sensum, ibi: adhuc autem et per apparentia et cetera.
First he proves that the earth is spherical with natural reasons taken on the part of motion;
Secondly, with mathematical and astronomical reasons based on sense observations (L. 28).
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit propositum, ratione sumpta ex ipsa specie naturalis motus terrae;
secundo ex figura motus ipsius, ibi: et quia omnia et cetera.
First he shows his proposition with an argument taken from the species of the natural motion of earth;
Secondly, from the figure of its motion (L. 28).
Regarding the first he does three things:
primo ponit rationem;
secundo comparat eam rationi quam antiqui assignabant, ibi: oportet autem intelligere etc.;
tertio excludit quasdam obviationes ad rationem praedictam, ibi: sive igitur similiter et cetera.
First he presents his reason;
Secondly, he compares it with the reason assigned by the ancients, 534;
Thirdly, he excludes certain objections to the aforesaid reason, at 535.
533. He says therefore first [393] that. it is necessary that the earth have a spherical shape for this reason, namely, that each of its parts "has heaviness toward the middle," i.e., is naturally moved to the middle by its heaviness, as is plain from what has been said above. But we must here consider, with respect to the motion of parts of the earth, that a larger part crowds out a smaller until the larger part reaches the middle. The reason for this is that a larger portion of earth has greater heaviness, and consequently greater power to be moved to the middle, a lesser power being always overcome by a greater. And therefore it is not possible that, as portions of earth are moved to the middle, any part should billow or rise and fall, so that one part of earth should have a position above another, as occurs in the waves of the sea, as though the earth were here not compressed and there compressed. Rather, since all parts of earth tend toward the middle, the upper parts of earth must press down on the lower, and one part, as it were, consent to another by yielding to it, until the middle is reached. And so, as a result, the parts of earth being, as it were, from all sides compressed toward the middle, the earth must have a spherical shape.
534. Then at [394] he clarifies the foregoing reason by comparing it with the reason others assigned for the shape of the earth. And he says that the foregoing reason must be understood as though one were positing that the earth was newly generated by the parts of earth coming together from all directions to the middle, as the ancient natural philosophers posited. Nevertheless, there is this difference, namely, that whereas they posit that this motion of parts of earth toward the middle is caused by the violence of the heaven's gyration, as was said above, it is better and truer to suppose that this motion of the parts of earth occurs naturally, on account of the parts of earth possessing heaviness that inclines them toward the middle. If, therefore, we posit that the earth was at first in potency, as the ancients posited, the consequence will be that its parts, at first dispersed and unconnected, will have been borne, when become heavy in act, from every direction to the middle. And from this will result an earth spherical in shape.
535. Then at [395] he excludes three objections against the foregoing reason. The first of these is that someone can say that the foregoing reason does not force the earth's shape to be spherical, unless one supposes that, during the coming-to-be of the earth, parts of earth from all sides similarly and equally moved together to the middle. But it could have happened that when the parts were still disassociated, more parts of earth were found in one region of the place above than in another; consequently, more parts of earth have been assembled at one part of it than at another — which is against the nature of a spherical shape.
536. But he says that the same results as to the shape of the earth whether the previously disassociated parts of earth come together similarly from the extremities of the earth to the middle or something other is the case. For it is manifest that, if the parts of the earth are carried in a similar fashion and in equal amounts from all directions to the middle, then of course the resulting mass of earth will be everywhere equal — since, because an equal quantity of parts is added to the middle on all sides, necessarily the periphery of the earth will be everywhere equidistant from the middle. And that makes for a sphere, because a sphere is nothing else than a body from the center of which all lines to its surface are equal.
This argument is not affected if someone should insist that the parts do not gather in the middle in a similar way and in equal amounts, since the larger portions, being heavier, always jostle the smaller portions "so far," i.e., until the middle is reached.
Now this can be interpreted in two ways. In one way, as meaning that a less heavy part would be pushed until it reached the middle, by a heavier part. But this does not fit Aristotle's intention, because, on the basis of such an interpretation, there will still remain a greater amount in one region of the earth, where more parts come together.
In another way "so far" can mean, "until the heavier body reaches the middle." And this interpretation is more fitting, because every heavy body naturally tends to this, namely, that it be in its own place, and not that something else be in its own place. Wherefore, a heavier body, in striving to get closer to the middle, violently shoves a less heavy body from the middle — as in the case of a stone thrown into water, which shoves aside the water from contact with the earth.
It is along these lines that Aristotle's reason proceeds. For if a larger quantity of earth finds itself in one section of the earth, then, in order to get closer to the middle, it violently jostles a smaller part from the middle until there is found an equal weight everywhere on the earth.
537. A second objection is excluded at [396]. First he states it because, as he says, it has the same solution as that which has gone before. The problem is this: Let us suppose that the earth does exist in the middle, that it is spherical in shape, and that much more quantity is accumulated on one hemisphere of earth than on the other (this is cited in order to exclude an objection that could be raised on account of the mountains, which are seen to rise above other parts of the earth; for the size of mountains is as nothing in comparison with the total quantity of the earth, but is rather like a hair laid on the side of a copper sphere). Now, if we suppose that enough of a heavy body were added to one place so that it would have a notable quantity with respect to the whole earth, the result would be that there would not be the same middle of the world and of the earth. Hence it would follow either that the earth would not be at rest in the middle or if it did rest, without being in the middle, then now, when it is in the middle, it is capable of being in motion. This therefore is the problem.
538. Secondly, he gives the solution at [397]. And he says that the solution is not difficult to see if someone is willing to consider only slightly and distinguish how we hold that any magnitude having heaviness is borne to the middle of the world. For it is manifest that it will be borne to the middle of the world, not just until its lower surface touches the center of the world, but, unless prevented, it must be borne, with a greater part prevailing over a lesser, to the point where the center of the moved body coincides with the center of the world, in accordance with the inclination that all heavy bodies have. Thus, if the only heavy body in the world were one stone dropped from on high, it would have to keep falling until the center of the stone touched the center of the world. This would be because a greater part of it would repel a lesser from the middle until an equal heaviness should be everywhere found, as was said above.
He concludes therefore that it makes no difference whether we apply this to a clod of earth or to the whole earth. For what has been said about the movement of the heavy to the middle is not due to largeness or smallness; rather, it is verified of everything that has an inclination to the middle by reason of its heaviness. Hence, whether the whole earth is being borne from some part of the heaven to the middle, or parts of it, the motion must continue until earth approaches the center in a similar way from all sides, and this is brought about by the smaller parts being made equal to the larger ones through the displacing of the smaller by the larger, as has been said.
539. The third objection he excludes at [398]. For someone could say that the foregoing argument proceeds on the assumption that the earth is generated. But this he rejects when he says that, whether the earth was generated, it has to have so come to exist in the middle as has been described, namely, in such a way that its middle touches the middle of the world, and so its figure will be spherical; or whether it was not generated, it must be in the same state as if it had been generated — for the terminus of generation is the nature of the thing; hence anything that is not generated must be such as it would have been had it been generated.
And it is according to this that he concludes the shape of the earth to be spherical.
2-28
Proofs, of the earth's sphericity from the angle of motion of its parts, and from astronomy
Κατὰ τοῦτόν τε δὴ τὸν λόγον ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τὸ σχῆμα σφαιροειδὲς αὐτῆς, καὶ ὅτι πάντα φέρεται τὰ βαρέα πρὸς ὁμοίας γωνίας, ἀλλ' οὐ παρ' ἄλληλα τοῦτο δὲ πέφυκε πρὸς τὸ φύσει σφαιροειδές. Ἢ οὖν ἐστι σφαιροειδής, ἢ φύσει γε σφαιροειδής. Δεῖ δ' ἕκαστον λέγειν τοιοῦτον εἶναι ὃ φύσει βούλεται εἶναι καὶ ὑπάρχειν, ἀλλὰ μὴ ὃ βίᾳ καὶ παρὰ φύσιν.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ διὰ τῶν φαινομένων κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν οὔτε γὰρ ἂν αἱ τῆς σελήνης ἐκλείψεις τοιαύτας ἂν εἶχον τὰς ἀποτομάς νῦν γὰρ ἐν μὲν τοῖς κατὰ μῆνα σχηματισμοῖς πάσας λαμβάνει τὰς διαιρέσεις (καὶ γὰρ εὐθεῖα γίνεται καὶ ἀμφίκυρτος καὶ κοίλη), περὶ δὲ τὰς ἐκλείψεις ἀεὶ κυρτὴν ἔχει τὴν ὁρίζουσαν γραμμήν, ὥστ' ἐπείπερ ἐκλείπει διὰ τὴν τῆς γῆς ἐπιπρόσθησιν, ἡ τῆς γῆς ἂν εἴη περιφέρεια τοῦ σχήματος αἰτία σφαιροειδὴς οὖσα.
Ἔτι δὲ διὰ τῆς τῶν ἄστρων φαντασίας οὐ μόνον φανερὸν ὅτι περιφερής, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ μέγεθος οὐκ οὖσα μεγάλη μικρᾶς γὰρ γιγνομένης μεταστάσεως ἡμῖν πρὸς μεσημβρίαν καὶ ἄρκτον ἐπιδήλως ἕτερος γίγνεται ὁ ὁρίζων κύκλος, ὥστε τὰ (298a.) ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς ἄστρα μεγάλην ἔχειν τὴν μεταβολήν, καὶ μὴ ταὐτὰ φαίνεσθαι πρὸς ἄρκτον τε καὶ μεσημβρίαν μεταβαίνουσιν ἔνιοι γὰρ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ μὲν ἀστέρες ὁρῶνται καὶ περὶ Κύπρον, ἐν τοῖς πρὸς ἄρκτον δὲ χωρίοις οὐχ ὁρῶνται, καὶ τὰ διὰ παντὸς ἐν τοῖς πρὸς ἄρκτον φαινόμενα τῶν ἄστρων ἐν ἐκείνοις τοῖς τόποις ποιεῖται δύσιν. Ὥστ' οὐ μόνον ἐκ τούτων δῆλον περιφερὲς ὂν τὸ σχῆμα τῆς γῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ σφαίρας οὐ μεγάλης οὐ γὰρ ἂν οὕτω ταχὺ ἐπίδηλον ἐποίει μεθισταμένοις οὕτω βραχύ. Διὸ τοὺς ὑπολαμβάνοντας συνάπτειν τὸν περὶ τὰς Ἡρακλείας στήλας τόπον τῷ περὶ τὴν Ἰνδικήν, καὶ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον εἶναι τὴν θάλατταν μίαν, μὴ λίαν ὑπολαμβάνειν ἄπιστα δοκεῖν λέγουσι δὲ τεκμαιρόμενοι καὶ τοῖς ἐλέφασιν, ὅτι περὶ ἀμφοτέρους τοὺς τόπους τοὺς ἐσχάτους ὄντας τὸ γένος αὐτῶν ἐστιν, ὡς τῶν ἐσχάτων διὰ τὸ συνάπτειν ἀλλήλοις τοῦτο πεπονθότων.
Καὶ τῶν μαθηματικῶν δὲ ὅσοι τὸ μέγεθος ἀναλογίζεσθαι πειρῶνται τῆς περιφερείας, εἰς τετταράκοντα λέγουσιν εἶναι μυριάδας. Ἐξ ὧν τεκμαιρομένοις οὐ μόνον σφαιροειδῆ τὸν ὄγκον ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι τῆς γῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ μὴ μέγαν πρὸς τὸ τῶν ἄλλων ἄστρων μέγεθος.
540. Having given an argument for the rotundity of the earth taken from the type of motion of its parts, he here adduces another argument for the same taken from the figure of the motion of the parts of earth.
And he says [399] that all heavy bodies, from whatever region of the heaven ', they are moved, are carried to the earth "at like angles," i.e., according to right angles formed by the straight line of the body's motion with a line tangent to the earth (which is evident from the fact that heavy objects do not stand firmly on the earth unless they are perpendicular to it); but heavy bodies are not carried to the earth "side by side," i.e., according to parallel lines. Now all this is ordered to the fact that the earth is naturally apt to be spherical: because heavy bodies have a like inclination to the place of earth no matter from what part of the heaven they are released. And so there is an aptitude for additions to the earth to be made in a like and equal manner on all sides, which makes it to be spherical in shape. But if the earth were naturally wide [flat] in its surface, as some claimed, the motions of heavy bodies from the heaven to earth would not be from all sides at similar angles. Therefore, the earth must either be spherical or be "spherical by nature."
He added this last phrase on account of the bulges of mountains and the depressions of valleys which seem to militate against a rotund earth. But such [deviations] arise from some accidental cause and not from what belongs or se to earth; nor does this amount to an appreciable quantity in relation to the whole earth, as has been said above. Now one must say each thing to be as it is according to its nature and not as it is by reason of some violent or preternatural cause. And therefore, although by accident the earth may not be perfectly spherical due to some chance happening, yet, because it is naturally apt to be spherical, it should, absolutely speaking, be called spherical.
541. Then at [400] he proves that the earth is spherical with astronomical arguments, based on what appears according to sense. And he brings in three proofs. The first of these is taken from the eclipse of the moon. And he says that it is further manifest by what appears according to sense, that the earth is spherical. For unless the earth were spherical, an eclipse of the moon would not always reveal circular segments; for we observe that whenever the moon is eclipsed, its dark and its shining portions are distinguished by a curved line. Now an eclipse of the moon results from its entering the earth's shadow — hence the earth's shadow appears to be round. From this it appears that the earth, which makes such a shadow, is round — for only a spherical body is apt always to cast a round shadow. For if the shining body, namely, the sun is larger than the earth, the earth must make a pyramidical shadow, whose cone is above and base on earth; if the sun should be smaller than the earth, it would likewise produce a shadow according to the figure of a round pyramid [i.e., a cone], but, conversely [the summit of] the cone of this pyramid would be on the earth and its base in the heaven; if the sun were equal to the earth, the shadow made would be cylindrical, i.e., columnar. Now, no matter which of these it should be, it would follow, on account of the earth's sphericity, that its shadow would cut the moon according to a circular line.
Now someone could say that this circular section is not due to the earth's rotundity but to the moon's. But to exclude this he adds that in the monthly waxing and waning of the moon, the section of the moon takes all differences of shape — for sometimes it is divided by a straight line, as when it is divided through the center, for example, on the 7th and the 21st days; at other times, it is amphicurtos [gibbous], having a circular or arc-like section, namely from the 7th to the 21st; at still other times it is concave [crescent], as from the 1st to the 7th, and from the 21st to its total waning. All this happens according to its position in relation to the sun, as has been said above. But during eclipses the line dividing the moon is always "gibbous," i.e., circular. Since, therefore, the moon is eclipsed by the interposition of the earth, the rotundity of the earth, since it is spherical, is the cause of such a shape with respect to the division of the moon.
542. The second proof is given at [401] and is based on the appearance of the stars. And he says that from the difference in the appearance of the stars it appears that the earth is not only round, but also small in comparison with the heavenly bodies. For if we move a slight distance to the south or north, our horizon is noticeably changed.
This change is particularly evident in two respects. First, with respect to the horizon's pole, which is the point of the heaven above our head. This point markedly varies in proportion to a short distance, as is apparent from the fixed stars — since with a slight change of location on our part different stars appear overhead.
Secondly, a difference of horizon appears from the different cutting of the heaven by the horizon. And he shows this from the fact that, as one moves to the north or to the south, the same stars are not visible. To those who live in the oblique sphere, the north pole is above their horizon, and all the stars which are not farther from the pole than the elevation of the pole above the horizon are perpetually visible, while all the stars at an equal distance from the other pole are perpetually hidden. Since, therefore, because of the difference of horizon, in northern lands the north pole is higher, and the opposite pole is lower, it happens that certain stars which are near to the ant-arctic pole are not perpetually hidden, but are sometimes seen in lands more to the south, for example in Egypt and about Cyprus, which are never seen in the more northerly region. Conversely, certain stars are always visible in the more northern regions, which in more southern regions are hidden by setting.
And from this it appears that the earth is rotund in shape especially according to its aspect at the two poles — for if it were flat, all those dwelling on the whole face of the earth to the south and north would have the same horizon and the very same stars would appear to them and be hidden from them, no impediment arising from the bulge of the earth. And with a similar argument it is proved that the earth is round toward the east and west — otherwise no star would rise any earlier for people in the east than for those in the west. For if the earth were concave, a rising star would appear first to people in the west; but if the earth were flat, it would appear to everyone at the same time. But it is evident that a rising star appears first to those in the east, if we consider a lunar eclipse. If such an eclipse appears in a more easterly region about midnight, it will appear before midnight in a more westerly region, depending on the amount of the distance. From this it is plain that the sun rises earlier and sets earlier in a more easterly region.
This also shows, as Aristotle says, that the earth's rotundity is of no great quantity. For if it were, in so small a distance there would not so soon be made a change in the appearance of the stars. And therefore, we would not consider as very absurd the view of those who wish to link, on the basis of similarity and nearness, the region situated in the far west about the pillars of Hercules (which Hercules set up as a memorial of his victory), and the region in the far east about the Indian Ocean, and who say there is one sea, the Ocean, bordering on both places. And they make a conjecture as to the similarity of both places from the elephants which arise in both places but are not found in the regions between them. This of course is a sign of the agreement of these places but not necessarily of their nearness to one another.
543. He adduces a third proof at [402], and it is based on measurements of the earth. And he says that whatever mathematicians have attempted to reason about the size of the earth's rotundity assert that its circumference reaches 40 myriads of stades, i.e., 40 times 10,000, which is 400,000 stades. Now a stadium is 1/8 of 1,000 paces. But 1/8 of the aforesaid number is 50,000. Therefore, according to this, the circumference of the earth will be 50,000 times a thousand paces.
But according to the more careful measurent of present-day astronomers, the earth's circumference is much less, i.e., 20,000 times 1,000 paces and 400, as Al Fargani says; or 180,000 stades, as Simplicius says — which is about the same, since 20,000 is 1/8 of 160,000.
Now astronomers were able to calculate this by considering how much space on earth makes for a difference of one degree in the heaven; and they found that it was 500 stadia according to Simplicius, or 56 2/3 times 1,000 paces according to Al Fargani. Hence, multiplying this number by 360, which is the number of degrees in the heaven, they found the size of the earth's circumference.
And so, from all of this, we can argue that the earth's quantity is not only spherical, but not large in comparison to the sizes of the other stars. For astronomers prove that the sun is 170 times greater than the earth, even though its distance from us makes it seem to be only a foot in diameter. He says, "of the other stars," because of Pythagoras' opinion, who held that the earth is one of the stars. — And with this is terminated the doctrine of Book II.
3-1
Γ
What has gone before and what remains to be treated
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τοῦ πρώτου οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν μερῶν, ἔτι δὲ περὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ φερομένων ἄστρων, ἐκ τίνων τε συνεστᾶσι καὶ ποῖ' ἄττα τὴν φύσιν ἐστί, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ὅτι ἀγένητα καὶ ἄφθαρτα, διεληλύθαμεν πρότερον.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τῶν φύσει λεγομένων τὰ μέν ἐστιν οὐσίαι, τὰ δ' ἔργα καὶ πάθη τούτων (λέγω δ' οὐσίας μὲν τά τε ἁπλᾶ σώματα, οἷον πῦρ καὶ γῆν καὶ τὰ σύστοιχα τούτοις, καὶ ὅσα ἐκ τούτων, οἷον τόν τε σύνολον οὐρανὸν καὶ τὰ μόρια αὐτοῦ, καὶ πάλιν τά τε ζῷα καὶ τὰ φυτὰ καὶ τὰ μόρια τούτων, πάθη δὲ καὶ ἔργα τάς τε κινήσεις τὰς τούτων ἑκάστου καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσων ἐστὶν αἴτια ταῦτα κατὰ τὴν δύναμιν τὴν ἑαυτῶν, ἔτι δὲ τὰς ἀλ(298b.) λοιώσεις καὶ τὰς εἰς ἄλληλα μεταβάσεις), φανερὸν ὅτι τὴν πλείστην συμβαίνει τῆς περὶ φύσεως ἱστορίας περὶ σωμάτων εἶναι πᾶσαι γὰρ αἱ φυσικαὶ οὐσίαι ἢ σώματα ἢ μετὰ σωμάτων γίγνονται καὶ μεγεθῶν. Τοῦτο δὲ δῆλον ἔκ τε τοῦ διωρίσθαι τὰ ποῖά ἐστι φύσει, καὶ ἐκ τῆς καθ' ἕκαστα θεωρίας.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τοῦ πρώτου τῶν στοιχείων εἴρηται, καὶ ποῖόν τι τὴν φύσιν, καὶ ὅτι ἄφθαρτον καὶ ἀγένητον λοιπὸν δὲ περὶ τοῖν δυοῖν εἰπεῖν.
Ἅμα δὲ συμβήσεται περὶ τούτων λέγουσι καὶ περὶ γενέσεως καὶ φθορᾶς διασκέψασθαι γένεσις γὰρ ἤτοι τὸ παράπαν οὐκ ἔστιν, ἢ μόνον ἐν τούτοις τοῖς στοιχείοις καὶ τοῖς ἐκ τούτων ἐστίν. Αὐτὸ δὲ τοῦτο πρῶτον ἴσως θεωρητέον, πότερον ἔστιν ἢ οὐκ ἔστιν.
544. After determining the question of bodies that are moved circularly, the Philosopher here goes on to determine that of bodies that move in a straight line.
Et primo praemittit prooemium, in quo explicat suam intentionem;
secundo prosequitur propositum, ibi: prius quidem igitur philosophantes et cetera.
First he prefaces an introduction in which he explains his intention;
Secondly, he pursues his intention (L. 2).
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo continuat se ad praecedentia, ostendens de quibus iam supra dictum sit;
secundo ostendit de quibus restat dicendum, ibi: quoniam autem eorum quae natura et cetera.
First he establishes continuity with what has gone before by showing what has already been covered;
Secondly, he states what remains to be discussed, at 546.
545. He says therefore first [403] that in what has preceded he has "gone through," i.e., treated briefly, "the first heaven and the parts," namely, of it. Now we can understand by "first heaven" the whole universe, which is first in perfection, and take as its "parts" the bodies that are moved with circular and with straight motion. In this way it would seem that he is touching also what was determined in the first book. But this interpretation seems to be belied by his next phrase, "and also the stars that are moved in it." Now, the stars are not properly said to be carried along in the whole universe, but in the heaven which is circularly moved. Hence it seems better to understand what he says of the first heaven to refer to the body which is moved circularly.
But because he does not say absolutely "heaven," but "first heaven," this can be referred to the first sphere, which is that of the fixed stars; and "parts" to the right and left and the other different positions that he showed to exist in the heaven. But according to this interpretation there would not be a sufficient recalling, either of what was treated in the entire first book, or of all those things treated in the second, in which the spheres of the planets were also discussed. Consequently, it seems better to say that by "first heaven" is here understood the entire body which is circularly moved, and that it is called "first" in comparison to the lower bodies, in relation to which it is first in the order of position, and by reason of the eternity of its duration, and the power of its causality. The added expression, "and the parts," would then refer to the various spheres which are parts of the whole celestial body.
The stars that are moved in the whole heaven have also been treated, both the fixed stars and the planets Concerning them it has been stated of what they are composed: for it was shown that they are of the nature of the heavenly body. It has also been stated how they are according to nature, namely, that they are animated and spherical. Likewise it has been said that they are not subject to generation and decay.
If the first book was a discussion of the whole universe, as we have said it was according to the opinion of Alexander, then this present review refers only to the second book. But if his [Aristotle's] intention in the first book also was to talk mainly about the heaven, as Simplicius avers, then this review extends even to the first book.
546. Then at [404] he shows what remains to be treated.
Et primo manifestat in quo consistat tota consideratio naturalis philosophiae;
secundo ex hoc concludit quid post praemissa restat dicendum, ibi: de primo quidem et cetera.
First he shows in what the entire consideration of natural philosophy consists;
Secondly, from this he concludes what remains to be said, after what has gone before, at 549.
In regard to the first [404], he uses the following argument: All natural substances are bodies; but the whole consideration of natural science is about natural substances and their accidents; therefore the whole consideration of natural science is concerned with bodies.
547. First, therefore, he presents the minor, saying that among the things said to be according to nature, some are natural substances and some are the operations and passions of natural substances. In order to manifest this, he first explains which are the natural substances. Among these he first numbers simple bodies. And among these he gives as the first examples, fire and earth, and those others that are the elements of bodies together with these, as are air and water. And to the nature of these pertain the mixed [compound] bodies composed of them, such as stones and metals. Then he mentions another body beyond the elements, namely, the whole heaven and its parts. Lastly, he mentions animated composites, such as animals and plants and their parts.
After this he manifests what the operations of these substances are. And he says that first, indeed, are the local motions of each of these bodies and also of the bodies of which these bodies are the cause, either the material cause, as are the elements, or the efficient, as is the heaven (and yet motion suits caused bodies according to the power of the simple bodies out of which they are caused). Then he says that the activities and passions of the aforesaid substances are their alterations and transmutations into one another according to generation and corruption.
Secondly, he infers the conclusion and says that from the foregoing it is plain that most of "natural history" (i.e., the relating of the contents) deals with bodies. In saying "most," he means "all," but he uses this mode of expression on account of his philosophic temperament. Or he says "most" on account of the fact that in natural science something is also said about the first mover and the intellective soul.
548. Thirdly, he presents the major, namely, that all natural substances are either bodies, or are generated with bodies and magnitudes, as are the natural forms, which are called "substances." And he says that this is evident in two ways: First, from what has just been decided as being according to nature —all of which are either bodies or with bodies; and in II it was determined that those things are according to nature which have within themselves their own principle of motion and rest; such things are bodies and only bodies, because only bodies are moved. Secondly, he says that this is manifest by induction, if we consider one by one the things treated in natural science — for we find that all are bodies or with bodies. And it should be noted that he mentioned all this as a preface to Book I.
549. Then at [405] he states what remains to be discussed. First with regard to substances, saying that the heaven has been discussed, i.e., the first body among the elements, which he calls an "element" because it is a part of the world, according to Alexander; but according to Simplicius because it is a simple body. Concerning the heaven, its condition according to nature has been stated, namely, that it is animated and spherical, and also that it is indestructible and ungenerated. Hence the task which remains is to speak of the other two bodies. For it was shown in the first book that there are three bodies: one, namely, which is in motion around the center — which has already been treated; another, which is moved away from the center; and a third which is moved toward the center. These [last] two still remain to be treated —for the earth was discussed not with respect to its nature, but in its relation to the heaven.
550. Secondly, at [406] he shows what remains to be said as to activities and passions [properties]. And he says that along with these two it remains to investigate generation and corruption, because either generation is nothing and has no connection with the nature of the entire universe, or it is found only in those elements that are moved with a straight motion and in bodies composed of them. But there was no place for this consideration so long as indestructible bodies were being considered. But this consideration must be taken up first, because it contributes a great deal to the consideration of the nature of bodies.
3-2
Opinions of the ancients on the generation of things
Οἱ μὲν οὖν πρότερον φιλοσοφήσαντες περὶ τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ πρὸς οὓς νῦν λέγομεν ἡμεῖς λόγους καὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους διηνέχθησαν.
Οἱ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν ὅλως ἀνεῖλον γένεσιν καὶ φθοράν οὐθὲν γὰρ οὔτε γίγνεσθαί φασιν οὔτε φθείρεσθαι τῶν ὄντων, ἀλλὰ μόνον δοκεῖν ἡμῖν, οἷον οἱ περὶ Μέλισσόν τε καὶ Παρμενίδην, οὕς, εἰ καὶ τἆλλα λέγουσι καλῶς, ἀλλ' οὐ φυσικῶς γε δεῖ νομίσαι λέγειν τὸ γὰρ εἶναι ἄττα τῶν ὄντων ἀγένητα καὶ ὅλως ἀκίνητα μᾶλλόν ἐστιν ἑτέρας καὶ προτέρας ἢ τῆς φυσικῆς σκέψεως. Ἐκεῖνοι δὲ διὰ τὸ μηθὲν μὲν ἄλλο παρὰ τὴν τῶν αἰσθητῶν οὐσίαν ὑπολαμβάνειν εἶναι, τοιαύτας δέ τινας νοῆσαι πρῶτοι φύσεις, εἴπερ ἔσται τις γνῶσις ἢ φρόνησις, οὕτω μετήνεγκαν ἐπὶ ταῦτα τοὺς ἐκεῖθεν λόγους.
Ἕτεροι δέ τινες ὥσπερ ἐπίτηδες τὴν ἐναντίαν τούτοις ἔσχον δόξαν. Εἰσὶ γάρ τινες οἵ φασιν οὐθὲν ἀγένητον εἶναι τῶν πραγμάτων, ἀλλὰ πάντα γίγνεσθαι, γενόμενα δὲ τὰ μὲν ἄφθαρτα διαμένειν, τὰ δὲ πάλιν φθείρεσθαι, μάλιστα μὲν οἱ περὶ Ἡσίοδον, εἶτα καὶ τῶν ἄλλων οἱ πρῶτοι φυσιολογήσαντες.
Οἱ δὲ τὰ μὲν ἄλλα πάντα γίνεσθαί φασι καὶ ῥεῖν, εἶναι δὲ παγίως οὐθέν, ἓν δέ τι μόνον ὑπομένειν, ἐξ οὗ ταῦτα πάντα μετασχηματίζεσθαι πέφυκεν ὅπερ ἐοίκασι βούλεσθαι λέγειν ἄλλοι τε πολλοὶ καὶ Ἡράκλειτος ὁ Ἐφέσιος.
Εἰσὶ δέ τινες καὶ οἳ πᾶν σῶμα γενητὸν ποιοῦσι, συντιθέντες καὶ διαλύοντες εἰς (299a.) ἐπίπεδα καὶ ἐξ ἐπιπέδων.
551. Having presented an introduction in which he showed what remains to be considered in natural science, he now undertakes to pursue what has been said.
Et primo inquirendo de opinionibus philosophorum circa praedicta;
secundo determinando veritatem, in quarto libro, ibi: de gravi autem et levi et cetera.
First by inquiring into the opinions of philosophers on this matter; Secondly, by determining the truth, in Book IV.
About the first he does two things:
primo inquirit de generatione et motu corporum naturalium, an sit;
secundo quorum et propter quid sit, ibi: quod autem neque omnium est generatio et cetera.
First he inquires into the generation and motion of natural bodies, as to whether it exists;
Secondly, as to which things are generated and moved, and why (L. 8).
Concerning the first he does two things:.
primo inquirit, secundum opiniones antiquorum philosophorum, an sit generatio;
secundo inquirit an motus localis sit naturalis corporibus naturalibus, ibi: quod autem necessarium existere motum et cetera.
First he inquires according to the opinions of early philosophers whether generation is a fact;
Secondly, whether local motion is natural to natural bodies (L. 5).
As to the first he does two things:
primo enumerat opiniones antiquorum circa generationem;
secundo inquirit de veritate earum, ibi: de aliis quidem igitur alter sit sermo et cetera.
First he cites the opinions of the ancients about generation;
Secondly, he investigates the truth of these opinions (L. 3).
Regarding the first he does three things:
primo ponit diversitatem philosophorum circa generationem;
secundo ponit opiniones negantium generationem, ibi: hi quidem enim ipsorum etc.;
tertio ponit opiniones attribuentium generationem corporibus, ibi: alteri autem quidam et cetera.
First he shows the difference among philosophers as to generation;
Secondly, he presents the opinions that deny generation, at 552;
Thirdly, those that attribute generation to bodies, at 554.
He says therefore first [407] that those who previously philosophized about the truth, namely, speculative truth (which he says to distinguish them from those who philosophized on morals and on politics), are in their opinions both at variance with one another and with what will now be said about generation.
552. Then at [408] he presents the opinions of those who remove generation. And he says that certain of the ancient philosophers totally removed generation and decay from things — for they said that nothing in beings comes to be or is destroyed, but something only seems to us to be generated or destroyed. This was the opinion of the followers of Melissus and Parmenides, whom Aristotle in one respect praises and in another condemns. He praises them for being the first to recognize that there have to be natures that are ungenerated and indestructible and immobile. This they were moved to assert for the reason that there cannot be sure knowledge or science about things that are subject to generation and decay. If, then, there is any certain knowledge or science, there must be certain natures which are ungenerated and indestructible. For even if there be some science of the things subject to generation and decay, it is only insofar as there is in them something ungenerated and indestructible, according to a participation in those natures that of themselves are ungenerated and indestructible. For they are known according to their forms, and form is something divine in things, insofar as it is a participation of the first act.
But Aristotle reprehends them because, since they supposed that nothing beyond what can be sensed exists, and yet understood that there have to be certain ungenerated and indestructible substances, they transferred what belongs to the notion of the substances above nature to these sensible things, stating these sensible things to be in truth ungenerated and indestructible, but to be generated and destroyed according to opinion. But it is manifest that if there are certain ungenerated and indestructible and utterly immobile beings, their study does not pertain to natural philosophy, which is wholly concerned with changeable things, but pertains more to another prior philosophy, which is . And therefore Parmenides and Melissus, although they spoke well in one respect, by positing the need for something ungenerated and immobile to exist, nevertheless did not speak well in treating of natural things in a non-natural way, attributing the qualities of immobile substances to natural substances, which are sensible substances.
553. But Simplicius in his commentary says that Aristotle in his customary way reprehends Parmenides and Melissus for what externally appeared from their words lest anyone, understanding them superficially, should be deceived, but that in fact the intention of these philosophers was that being of itself, i.e., being that exists by its very essence, is ungenerated and indestructible and completely unchangeable. As to their statement that generation and decay are in things only according to opinion and not in reality, this they said because they believed that sensible things, in which generation and decay are found, are not truly beings but only according to opinion.
554. Then at [409] he presents the opinion of those who attribute generation to bodies, and he gives three opinions. He says that certain others held an opinion contrary to the foregoing,, as though purposely intending to contradict them. For some maintain that nothing is ungenerated but that all things are generated, and that among these some remain indestructible and others are destroyed. Such was the doctrine especially of the followers of Hesiod, one of the Theologizing Poets, who treated divine matters under the guise of fables. Hence Hesiod is said to have posited even chaos, from which all things are generated, to have been generated. But whatever is generated is generated by some generator. Hence they gave it out that over all those things there is a certain first cause, namely, an intellect and a divinity, from which all things proceeded. Such a procession of all things from the first principle they called "generation."
555. The second opinion is given at [410]. And he says that after the afore-said poets, among others who first treated of nature, were those who maintained that all other things are generated and remain in a state of continuous flux, so that nothing is fixed and permanent in things except one, namely, the material principle which underlies all things that come to be and decay. This same thing was maintained by many other philosophers — such as Thales, who proposed that water is this first principle; and Anaxagoras, air; but Anaximander, an intermediate between the two, namely, vapor. Heraclitus of Ephesus proposed fire (and is specially mentioned because he more than others asserted all things to be in continual flux).
556. The third opinion he gives at [411]. And he says that there are some who maintained every body is generable because they posit that all bodies are composed of surfaces and are reducible to surfaces. This was Plato's opinion.
3-3
Bodies not generated from surfaces — proved mathematically and naturally
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν ἄλλων ἕτερος ἔστω λόγος τοῖς δὲ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον λέγουσι καὶ πάντα τὰ σώματα συνιστᾶσιν ἐξ ἐπιπέδων ὅσα μὲν ἄλλα συμβαίνει λέγειν ὑπεναντία τοῖς μαθήμασιν, ἐπιπολῆς ἰδεῖν καίτοι δίκαιον ἢ μὴ κινεῖν ἢ πιστοτέροις αὐτὰ λόγοις κινεῖν τῶν ὑποθέσεων.
Ἔπειτα δῆλον ὅτι τοῦ αὐτοῦ λόγου ἐστὶ στερεὰ μὲν ἐξ ἐπιπέδων συγκεῖσθαι, ἐπίπεδα δ' ἐκ γραμμῶν, ταύτας δ' ἐκ στιγμῶν οὕτω δ' ἐχόντων οὐκ ἀνάγκη τὸ τῆς γραμμῆς μέρος γραμμὴν εἶναι περὶ δὲ τούτων ἐπέσκεπται πρότερον ἐν τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως λόγοις, ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἀδιαίρετα μήκη.
Ὅσα δὲ περὶ τῶν φυσικῶν σωμάτων ἀδύνατα συμβαίνει λέγειν τοῖς ποιοῦσι τὰς ἀτόμους γραμμάς, ἐπὶ μικρὸν θεωρήσωμεν καὶ νῦν τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἐπ' ἐκείνων ἀδύνατα συμβαίνοντα καὶ τοῖς φυσικοῖς ἀκολουθήσει, τὰ δὲ τούτοις ἐπ' ἐκείνων οὐχ ἅπαντα διὰ τὸ τὰ μὲν ἐξ ἀφαιρέσεως λέγεσθαι, τὰ μαθηματικά, τὰ δὲ φυσικὰ ἐκ προσθέσεως.
Πολλὰ δ' ἐστὶν ἃ τοῖς ἀδιαιρέτοις οὐχ οἷόν τε ὑπάρχειν, τοῖς δὲ φυσικοῖς ἀναγκαῖον. [Οἷον εἴ τί ἐστιν ἀδιαίρετον] ἐν ἀδιαιρέτῳ γὰρ διαιρετὸν ἀδύνατον ὑπάρχειν, τὰ δὲ πάθη διαιρετὰ πάντα διχῶς ἢ γὰρ κατ' εἶδος ἢ κατὰ συμβεβηκός, κατ' εἶδος μὲν οἷον χρώματος τὸ λευκὸν ἢ τὸ μέλαν, κατὰ συμβεβηκὸς δέ, ἂν ᾧ ὑπάρχει ᾖ διαιρετόν, ὥστε ὅσα ἁπλᾶ τῶν παθημάτων, πάντ' ἐστὶ διαιρετὰ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον. Διὸ τὸ ἀδύνατον ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις ἐπισκεπτέον.
Εἰ δὴ τῶν ἀδυνάτων ἐστὶν ἑκατέρου μέρους μηδὲν ἔχοντος βάρος τὰ ἄμφω ἔχειν βάρος, τὰ δ' αἰσθητὰ σώματα ἢ πάντα ἢ ἔνια βάρος ἔχει, οἷον ἡ γῆ καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, ὡς κἂν αὐτοὶ φαῖεν, εἰ ἡ στιγμὴ μηδὲν ἔχει βάρος, δῆλον ὅτι οὐδ' αἱ γραμμαί, εἰ δὲ μὴ αὗται, οὐδὲ τὰ ἐπίπεδα ὥστ' οὐδὲ τῶν σωμάτων οὐθέν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι τὴν στιγμὴν οὐχ οἷόν τε βάρος ἔχειν, φανερόν. Τὸ μὲν γὰρ βαρὺ ἅπαν καὶ βαρύτερον καὶ τὸ κοῦφον καὶ κουφότερον ἐνδέχε(299b.) ταί τινος εἶναι. Τὸ δὲ βαρύτερον ἢ κουφότερον ἴσως οὐκ ἀνάγκη βαρὺ ἢ κοῦφον εἶναι, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ μὲν μέγα μεῖζον, τὸ δὲ μεῖζον οὐ πᾶν μέγα πολλὰ γάρ ἐστιν ἃ μικρὰ ὄντα ἁπλῶς ὅμως μείζω ἑτέρων ἐστίν. Εἰ δὴ ὃ ἂν βαρὺ ὂν βαρύτερον ᾖ, ἀνάγκη βάρει μεῖζον εἶναι, τὸ βαρὺ ἅπαν διαιρετὸν ἂν εἴη. Ἡ δὲ στιγμὴ ἀδιαίρετον ὑπόκειται.
Ἔτι εἰ τὸ μὲν βαρὺ πυκνόν τι, τὸ δὲ κοῦφον μανόν, ἔστι δὲ πυκνὸν μανοῦ διαφέρον τῷ ἐν ἴσῳ ὄγκῳ πλεῖον ἐνυπάρχειν εἰ οὖν ἐστι στιγμὴ βαρεῖα καὶ κούφη, ἔστι καὶ πυκνὴ καὶ μανή. Ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν πυκνὸν διαιρετόν, ἡ δὲ στιγμὴ ἀδιαίρετος.
Εἰ δὲ πᾶν τὸ βαρὺ ἢ μαλακὸν ἢ σκληρὸν ἀνάγκη εἶναι, ῥᾴδιον ἐκ τούτων ἀδύνατόν τι συναγαγεῖν. Μαλακὸν μὲν γὰρ τὸ εἰς ἑαυτὸ ὑπεῖκον, σκληρὸν δὲ τὸ μὴ ὑπεῖκον τὸ δὲ ὑπεῖκον διαιρετόν.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἐκ μὴ ἐχόντων βάρος ἔσται βάρος. Καὶ γὰρ ἐπὶ πόσων συμβήσεται τοῦτο καὶ ἐπὶ ποίων; Ἢ πῶς διοριοῦσι μὴ βουλόμενοι πλάττειν;
καὶ εἰ πᾶν μεῖζον βάρος βάρους βάρει, συμβήσεται καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ἀβαρῶν βάρος ἔχειν εἰ γὰρ αἱ τέτταρες στιγμαὶ βάρος ἔχουσι, τὸ δ' ἐκ πλειόνων ἢ τοδὶ βαρέος ὄντος βαρύτερον, τὸ δὲ βαρέος βαρύτερον ἀνάγκη βάρει εἶναι, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ λευκοῦ λευκότερον λευκῷ, ἔσται τὸ μεῖζον μιᾷ στιγμῇ βαρύτερον, ὥστε, ἀφαιρεθέντος τοῦ ἴσου, [ὥστε] καὶ ἡ μία στιγμὴ βάρος ἕξει.
557. Having presented the opinions on the generation of things, he now inquires into the truth of the aforesaid opinions. And passing by the other opinions, which he discussed in other places, he makes inquiry especially about the last one, which is Plato's, both because it was more famous, and because in the order of inquiry it was prior. For the other opinions posited or removed generation of special bodies; but this opinion seemed to teach the generation of body insofar as it is body, since it posits body to be generated from surfaces.
In regard to this he does two things:
primo improbat hanc opinionem;
secundo ostendit eisdem rationibus improbari posse opinionem Pythagoricorum, ponentium corpora generari ex numeris, ibi: idem autem accidit et cetera.
First he disproves this opinion;
Secondly, he shows that the same arguments can disprove the opinion of the Pythagoreans, who posit that bodies are generated from numbers, at 574.
As to the first he does two things:
primo improbat praedictam opinionem rationibus mathematicis;
secundo rationibus naturalibus, ibi: quaecumque autem de naturalibus et cetera.
First he disproves the aforesaid opinion with mathematical arguments;
Secondly, with natural arguments, at 560.
558. As to the first he gives two arguments. With respect to the first of these he says [412] that a discussion of the other opinions should be held elsewhere: partly, indeed in I, partly in the book On Generation,, and partly in a later section of the present book, But as to those who posit that all bodies are constituted of surfaces, it is possible at once to see that they are found to hold many things contrary to the "disciplines," i.e., the mathematical sciences. These suppose that a point is indivisible, and that, consequently, a line, which is divisible, is not made of points. Mathematics supposes too, that a line is a length without breadth; consequently, a surface does not come to be from lines, because it has length and width without depth. Thus, too, neither does a body come from surfaces, since a body has length and width and depth. But it is not correct for anyone to reject these suppositions of the mathematicians, unless he can present arguments more probable than the suppositions. Consequently, the opinion of Plato seems to deserve to be disapproved, on the ground that he removes mathematical suppositions without a strong enough reason.
559. The second argument is at [4133. And he says the reason is the same for solids, i.e., bodies, to be composed of surfaces, and surfaces composed of lines, and lines of points, because, just as the point is the terminal and divider of the line, so the line is of the surface and the surface of the body. But if what Plato says is true, namely, that bodies are composed of surfaces, it will follow that a surface is composed of lines and lines of points. Consequently, it will not be necessary that a part of a line be a line. This matter, he says, was previously considered in "the discussions on motion," i.e., in VI, where it was proved that lines are not indivisible, and are not composed of indivisibles. There is also found a certain other short book in which it is proved that lines are not indivisible, said by some to be by Theophrastus.
560. Then at [414] he disproves the aforesaid opinion with natural arguments.
Et primo assignat rationem quare necesse sit huiusmodi rationes inducere, non solum mathematicas, sed etiam naturales;
secundo exequitur propositum, ibi: multa autem sunt et cetera.
First he states why it is necessary to present such arguments, i.e., not only mathematical, but also natural;
Secondly, he pursues his plan, at 561.
He says therefore first [414] that, because we have said that an impossibility in mathematics follows upon the assumption by some of indivisible lines, from which surfaces are composed, and consequently bodies, it is also necessary to consider now briefly the impossibilities affecting natural bodies that will follow from this assumption. The reason this is necessary is that whatever impossibilities affect mathematical bodies must, as a consequence, extend to natural bodies. And this is so because mathematical things are obtained by abstraction from natural things, but natural things are by apposition to mathematical things — for they add to mathematical objects a sensible nature and motion, from which mathematics abstracts. Thus it is clear that mathematical properties are saved in natural things, but not conversely. Therefore, whatever impossibilities are against mathematical things are also against natural things, but not vice versa.
561. Then at [415] he shows what impossibilities affecting natural bodies flow from the aforesaid position.
Et primo ponit quandam rationem generalem;
secundo explicat eam per partes, ibi: si itaque impossibilium et cetera.
First he presents a certain general argument;
Secondly, he explains it part by part, at 562.
He says therefore first [415] that there are many things which must exist in natural bodies but cannot exist in indivisibles. We could take "indivisibles" here as "mathematical things" on the ground that they are said by abstraction; thus what is said here will be adduced to show what was just said, namely, that natural things are by apposition to mathematical, since many things must be present in natural things that cannot be present in mathematical things, such as all the passions [properties] that are divisible. But it is better to take "indivisibles" as surfaces with respect to bodies, and lines with respect to surfaces, and points to lines — which latter are indivisible absolutely.
He says therefore that many things must be present in natural bodies that cannot be present in indivisible things: "For example, if something is indivisible," such as a point or line or surface; or, "for example, if something is divisible" — because what is divisible is of necessity in a natural body, but not in things that are indivisible. For something divisible cannot exist at all in an indivisible thing — since what is in something is in a certain way comprehended by it: but the divisible cannot be comprehended by the indivisible according to quantity. All passions are divided in two ways: either according to species, or according to accident. This of course does not mean that each and every passion is divided in both ways, but that each is divided in one way or the other.
He then explains both ways of division. And he says that a passion is divided "according to species" in the way that the species of color are white and black. This can be understood in two senses. In one way, in the sense that this common thing which is color is divided into black and white, as though by its species; but this contributes nothing to our argument, because there is nothing to prevent something common to many from being predicated of some indivisible. Consequently, we must understand a passion divisible according to species in the sense of an intermediate color, which is a composite of two species of color, namely, black and white. Now it does not seem that such a passion can exist in a thing that is entirely simple: because, since the proper passions are caused by the subject, the principles of a composite passion must be diverse, and diversity is repugnant to the simplicity of a subject.
Then he explains what is divisible "according to accident." And he says that a passion is said to be divisible according to accident, if the subject of which it is an accident is divisible, as white is divided by dividing its subject. Hence all passions that are simple according to species are divisible in this way, i.e., according to subject, insofar, namely, as they exist in a natural subject.
And therefore, regarding such passions which are divisible in one way or the other, it is to be understood that an impossibility follows upon those saying lines to be indivisible or surfaces, from which natural bodies are composed, namely, out of such things which cannot be the subject of the passions of natural bodies.
562. Then at [416] he gives special arguments which disprove the aforesaid position. In regard to the first argument he does two things:
primo proponit rationem;
secundo probat ea quae supposuerat, ibi: sed et quod punctum et cetera.
First he presents the argument;
Secondly, he proves what he had supposed, at 563.
He says therefore first [416] that it is impossible, if neither of the things out of which something is composed has heaviness, that the composite of both have heaviness. But sensible bodies have heaviness: either all of them, as Democritus says, or some, namely, earth and water, as the Platonists said. Therefore, a sensible body cannot be composed of things not having heaviness. But a point has no heaviness; therefore, a thing with heaviness cannot be composed of points. Yet according to the aforesaid opinion, a line is composed of points. Therefore, a line also cannot have heaviness. Consequently, neither can a surface, which is composed of lines; furthermore, neither can a body, which is composed of surfaces — which is against the aforesaid.
It should be noted that this argument holds for quantitative parts which are of the same nature and notion both in relation to one another and to the whole; but it does not hold in essential parts, which have a different notion with respect to one another and with respect to the whole. Hence it does not follow, if matter is not heavy and form is not heavy, that the composite is not heavy — because matter is heavy in potency, but through form something is made actually heavy.
563. Then at [417] he proves what he had assumed in the preceding argument.
Et primo probat quod punctum non sit grave;
secundo quod ex non gravibus non potest componi aliquid grave, ibi: sed adhuc neque ex non habentibus et cetera.
First he proves that a point is not heavy;
Secondly, that something heavy cannot be from non—heavy things, at 566.
The first he proves with three arguments, the first of which is this: Every heavy thing can be heavier than some other, and every light thing can be lighter than something else; but yet it is not necessary that everything heavier or lighter be heavy or light.
But it seems that what is said here is false, for the comparative presupposes the positive — everything whiter is white.
Some therefore say that the comparative, if taken in its proper sense, does suppose and imply the positive; but that sometimes the comparison is "abusive." This occurs, for example, when a thing is said comparatively with respect to an opposite, as when a swan is said to be "whiter" than a raven, or even when a thing is described in the comparative degree because it possesses less of the opposite, as when an Ethiopian is said to be "whiter" than a raven because he is less black, or when it is said that some lesser evil is "more worthy of choice" than a greater evil — whereas evil is not worthy of choice, and an Ethiopian is not white. And it is in this way that the Philosopher here says that not everything heavier is heavy, nor everything lighter light. Hence, to designate an "abusive" comparison, he added, "perchance."
But since it is not Aristotle's custom to argue from "abusive" terms, it therefore should be stated that there are some things which are described only absolutely, as in the case of white or sweet; and in such cases the comparative presupposes the positive, and implies it. But there are other things which are sometimes said absolutely and sometimes relatively — as in the case of heavy and light: for, as will be said in Book IV, fire is said to be absolutely light and earth absolutely heavy; but air is heavy to fire, while light to water and earth. So too, water is light to earth but to air and fire heavy. Now it is evident that what is absolutely heavy, is also heavy when compared to other things; and that which is absolutely light, is light compared to other things. In this sense, everything heavy is heavier and everything light is lighter. But it does not follow that everything heavier is heavy, and everything lighter is light — since it does not follow that, if something is light in relation to other things, that it is light absolutely; and the same goes for the heavy.
That this is the explanation of the statement is plain from the example he gives. For "large," taken commonly, is relative, as is evident in the Predicaments, but as applied to some thing, that is called "large" absolutely which attains to the quantity due it — as a man is called "large" absolutely, who attains to the perfect quantity of a man. Thus it is plain that "large" is said absolutely and relatively. Hence everything "large" absolutely is said to be large in relation to something, and this is to be "larger"; but not everything described as "larger" is large absolutely, for there are many things which, absolutely considered, are small, and yet are larger than other things.
Therefore, if everything heavy is heavier than something else, then necessarily everything heavy must be greater in heaviness than something else. And so it follows that it is divisible: for everything that is greater is divided into what is equal and something more. But a point is indivisible, as is supposed from its definition. Therefore a point is not heavy.
564. The second argument is given at [418], as follows: Heavy and light follow upon rare and dense — for we see that according to rarity and density, elements differ in heaviness and lightness. But the dense differs from what is rare in that, "in an equal mass," i.e., under the same dimensions, it contains more, because it has more matter, as is had in IV. But since some bodies are heavy and some light, then if a point is posited as heavy, it is with equal reason posited as light; and if it is posited as dense, it is with equal reason posited as rare. But what is posited as dense must be divisible, insofar as it contains more under a smaller mass; similarly, what is rare must be divisible, insofar as it contains an equal amount under greater dimensions. But a point is indivisible. Therefore, it is neither thick nor rare and, consequently, neither heavy nor light.
565. The third argument is given at [419], as follows: Whatever is heavy is either soft or hard: the season being that heaviness follows on two elements, namely, earth and water, one of which, namely, water, yields to the touch and is, accordingly, a principle of softness, while the other, namely, earth, does not yield and is a principle of hardness. Now it is obvious that everything soft is divisible, because it yields within itself to what touches it. But this could not happen unless it had a number of parts, one of which is able in some way to move into the place of another. For the same reason, what is hard must be divisible, for it could not be said to be "unyielding," unless it had whence it could yield. Consequently, since a point is indivisible, it will be neither hard nor soft, and, therefore, not heavy.
566. Then at [420] he shows that nothing heavy can be composed of two or more things, none of which is heavy. But this must be understood of the composition by which something is composed of quantitative parts — for something heavy is composed of essential parts, for example, of matter and form, neither of which is heavy.
To prove this he presents two arguments. The first of these proceeds in accordance with the opinion of some who said that from certain things not heavy, when they were multiplied, something heavy was composed, but that when they were in a lesser number, nothing heavy was made of them. But those who present this opinion must determine how many such things are required to form heaviness; otherwise what is said without a sure reason is seen as fictitious.
567. The second argument is presented at [421], as follows: Every heaviness greater than another heaviness exceeds the lesser by a certain heaviness, because something is made greater by the addition of like things. From this it follows, according to the aforesaid position, that every indivisible has heaviness. For let us suppose a body constituted of four points, having heaviness; let us take another body made of more points, say five. Thus it will be heavier — and in such a way that that by which it is heavier, must be heavy. And although not everything heavier is heavy, as was said above, yet whatever is heavier than something heavy must be heavy, just as everything which is whiter than something white must be white. And therefore, since what is greater by one point is heavier than a body which is equal to it if that point be removed, it will follow that one point is heavy. But that is impossible, as is clear from what has gone before. Therefore, it remains that it is impossible for something heavy to be made from things that are not heavy.
3-4
Other natural arguments against Plato's opinion. Pythagorean opinion refuted
Ἔτι εἰ μὲν τὰ ἐπίπεδα μόνον κατὰ γραμμὴν ἐνδέχεται συντίθεσθαι, ἄτοπον ὥσπερ γὰρ γραμμὴ πρὸς γραμμὴν ἀμφοτέρως συντίθεται, καὶ κατὰ μῆκος καὶ κατὰ πλάτος, δεῖ καὶ ἐπίπεδον ἐπιπέδῳ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον. Γραμμὴ δὲ δύναται γραμμῇ συντίθεσθαι κατὰ γραμμὴν ἐπιτιθεμένη ἀλλ' οὐ προστιθεμένη. Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴ γε καὶ κατὰ πλάτος ἐνδέχεται συντίθεσθαι, ἔσται τι σῶμα ὃ οὔτε στοιχεῖον οὔτε ἐκ στοιχείων, συντιθέμενον ἐκ τῶν οὕτω συντιθεμένων ἐπιπέδων.
Ἔτι εἰ μὲν πλήθει βαρύτερα τὰ σώματα τῶν ἐπιπέδων, ὥσπερ ἐν τῷ (300a.) Τιμαίῳ διώρισται, δῆλον ὡς ἕξει καὶ ἡ γραμμὴ καὶ ἡ στιγμὴ βάρος ἀνάλογον γὰρ πρὸς ἄλληλα ἔχουσιν, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον εἰρήκαμεν. Εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτον διαφέρει τὸν τρόπον ἀλλὰ τῷ τὴν μὲν γῆν εἶναι βαρὺ τὸ δὲ πῦρ κοῦφον, ἔσται καὶ τῶν ἐπιπέδων τὸ μὲν κοῦφον τὸ δὲ βαρύ. Καὶ τῶν γραμμῶν δὴ καὶ τῶν στιγμῶν ὡσαύτως τὸ γὰρ τῆς γῆς ἐπίπεδον ἔσται βαρύτερον ἢ τὸ τοῦ πυρός.
Ὅλως δὲ συμβαίνει ἢ μηδέν ποτ' εἶναι μέγεθος, ἢ δύνασθαί γε ἀναιρεθῆναι, εἴπερ ὁμοίως ἔχει στιγμὴ μὲν πρὸς γραμμήν, γραμμὴ δὲ πρὸς ἐπίπεδον, τοῦτο δὲ πρὸς σῶμα πάντα γὰρ εἰς ἄλληλα ἀναλυόμενα εἰς τὰ πρῶτα ἀναλυθήσεται ὥστ' ἐνδέχοιτ' ἂν στιγμὰς μόνον εἶναι, σῶμα δὲ μηθέν.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις καὶ εἰ ὁ χρόνος ὁμοίως ἔχει, ἀναιροῖτ' ἄν ποτε ἢ ἐνδέχοιτ' ἂν ἀναιρεθῆναι τὸ γὰρ νῦν τὸ ἄτομον οἷον στιγμὴ γραμμῆς ἐστιν.
Τὸ δ' αὐτὸ συμβαίνει καὶ τοῖς ἐξ ἀριθμῶν συντιθεῖσι τὸν οὐρανόν ἔνιοι γὰρ τὴν φύσιν ἐξ ἀριθμῶν συνιστᾶσιν, ὥσπερ τῶν Πυθαγορείων τινές τὰ μὲν γὰρ φυσικὰ σώματα φαίνεται βάρος ἔχοντα καὶ κουφότητα, τὰς δὲ μονάδας οὔτε σώματα ποιεῖν οἷόν τε συντιθεμένας οὔτε βάρος ἔχειν.
[not in Greek] Quod quidem igitur neque omnium generatio est neque simpliciter nullius, palam ex dictis.
568. Having given a first argument against Plato's opinion that bodies are generated from surfaces, Aristotle here presents a second argument.
To understand this argument it should be known that Plato, because he did not distinguish between the "one" which is the principle of number, and the "one" which is convertible with being, which signifies the substance of the thing, posited as a consequence that the "one" which is the principle of number is the substance of a thing, and consequently, that all things are numbers. Accordingly, he posited the dimensions of continuous quantity to be certain numbers "having position." According to him, therefore, a point is unity having position, and so for all the others. And because he attributed duality to matter and unity to form, he estimated that the forms of all bodies should be taken according to the notion of the figures according to which the bodies are terminated. Now the ultimate terminations of dimensions are points, which are "positioned unities," as has been said. Therefore he attributed the various bodily figures to the various bodies: such as that of the pyramid to fire, that of eight bases [faces, in this case, the octohedron] to air, a figure of 20 bases [the icosahedron] to water, the cube to earth, a 12-based figure [the dodecahedron] to the aether, i.e., to the heaven. Now it is clear that bodily figures are constituted of surfaces, insofar as they are conjoined according to contact along lines — thus constituting corporeal angles. And therefore, assigning the formal composition to bodies, Plato said that bodies are composed of surfaces joined along a line.
569. Against this, therefore, Aristotle objects [422], and says that an impossibility follows, if it is assumed that surfaces are composed or joined to form a body by mere linear contact.
This he manifests with the example of a line. For a line can be joined to another line in two ways: One way is according to length, and which is according to contact by point, insofar, namely, as the length of one line is joined to the length of another at a point, whether it makes an angle with it or not. The other way is according to width, which consists in adding one whole line to another whole line in the direction of width. Similarly, surface must be joined to surface in two ways: namely, according to depth — for example, if one whole surface should be placed under another; and according to linear contact, whether they form a corporeal angle or not. To explain further what he says, he adds that line can be joined to line by being placed under it, and not only as being added to it according to linear contact [at a point].
570. Therefore, because there are two ways in which surfaces can be joined and because it is according to one way, namely, according to linear contact, that joined surfaces form all the elements, it will follow that, if they should be joined "in the direction of width," i.e., by placing one surface under another, the resultant of surfaces so composed will be a body that is neither an element nor composed from elements. That it is not an element is plain, since all the elements are constituted according to the other mode of conjunction of surfaces. That it is not made from elements is plain, since this combination of surfaces, resulting from superposition, seems to cause a body's depth, which is its substance, while the other combination of surfaces establishes the body with respect to figure, which is a form added to bodily substance. Hence the combination according to sub-position will be prior, and what results from this composition seems to be compared to what results from the other kind of composition, as matter is compared to form. But according to the opinion of Plato, a body's nature is to be composed of surfaces [in linear contact]. It follows, therefore, that what precedes all the elements, as though it were their matter receiving all their figures, or forms, is a body. And Plato regarded this as something unacceptable — for he did not state the first matter to he a body, as certain of the early natural philosophers did.
571. Then at [423] he presents a third argument, as follows: Since bodies are constituted out of surfaces, some of which bodies are heavier than others, this can come about in two ways. One way is that a body would be made heavier from the fact that it is composed of more surfaces, as is said in the Timaeus. And from this it will follow that surfaces are heavy — because an excess in heaviness cannot be produced except by something that is itself heavy, as was said above. And from this it will further follow that lines and points have heaviness — for these are proportionately related, that is, as surfaces are to bodies, so lines are to surfaces and points to lines. But that points should have heaviness has been disproved above.
The other way is that heavy bodies do not differ from light in this way, i.e., by the multiplication of surfaces, but on account of earth's being composed of heavy [surfaces] and fire of light. And thus it will follow that some surfaces are light and some heavy, and the same for lines and points — because a surface of earth will be heavier than one of fire. And so the same impossibility will arise as before.
572. Then at [424] he presents a fourth argument, saying that according to the position of Plato it follows that no magnitude exists, or that every magnitude can be "taken away" i.e., cease to exist. For point is to line as line is to surface and surface to body. Consequently, if a body is composed of surfaces, it will be able to be reduced to surface, and, by the same token, all magnitudes will be reduced to the "first things," i.e., to points. Thus it would follow that there would be no body but points only. Nor is it similar if one should wish to argue that it can occur that there be no mixed [composite] bodies, since they can be resolved into the elements out of which they are composed — since such bodies are subject to the heavenly bodies, which produce a mixture in them. But points are not subject to any higher principles which would induce in them the necessity of composition.
573. Then at [425] he presents a fifth argument, saying that if time is such as to be composed of instants, in the same way as a body is of surfaces, or a line of points (all of which involve the same notion, as is proved in VI), it follows that time too can be entirely destroyed by being reduced to its indivisibles — for the "now" is the indivisible of time, just as the point is the indivisible of line.
574. Then at [426] he assimilates the foregoing position to that of the Pythagoreans. And he says that the same irreconcilable factors follow for those who claim that the heaven is constituted from numbers. For some Pythagoreans posited that all nature is constituted from numbers for the aforesaid reason, and Plato followed them. But now the Philosopher disproves this: For natural bodies have heaviness and lightness. But units joined one to another cannot form a body that is continuous; rather they form something discrete. Nor do they possess heaviness, because they abstract from position, and, consequently, from place.
Finally, in summary he concludes [427] that there is neither generation of all things nor of none. That it is not of none is evident to sense. But that it is not of all things is plain from the fact that it is impossible for there to be generation of every body — which would indeed be the case if a body were generated from surfaces.
3-5
Natural motion in natural bodies. Leucippus and Democritus
Ὅτι δ' ἀναγκαῖον ὑπάρχειν κίνησιν τοῖς ἁπλοῖς σώμασι φύσει τινὰ πᾶσιν, ἐκ τῶνδε δῆλον.
Ἐπεὶ γὰρ κινούμενα φαίνεται, κινεῖσθαί γε ἀναγκαῖον βίᾳ, εἰ μὴ οἰκείαν ἔχει κίνησιν τὸ δὲ βίᾳ καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ταὐτόν. Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἰ παρὰ φύσιν ἐστί τις κίνησις, ἀνάγκη εἶναι καὶ κατὰ φύσιν, παρ' ἣν αὕτη καὶ εἰ πολλαὶ αἱ παρὰ φύσιν, τὴν κατὰ φύσιν μίαν κατὰ φύσιν μὲν γὰρ ἁπλῶς, παρὰ φύσιν δ' ἔχει πολλὰς ἕκαστον.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῆς ἠρεμίας δῆλον καὶ γὰρ ἠρεμεῖν ἀναγκαῖον ἢ βίᾳ ἢ κατὰ φύσιν βίᾳ δὲ μένει οὗ καὶ φέρεται βίᾳ, καὶ κατὰ φύσιν οὗ κατὰ φύσιν. Ἐπεὶ οὖν φαίνεταί τι μένον ἐπὶ τοῦ μέσου, εἰ μὲν κατὰ φύσιν, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ ἡ φορὰ ἡ ἐνταῦθα κατὰ φύσιν αὐτῷ εἰ δὲ βίᾳ, τί τὸ φέρεσθαι κωλῦον; Εἰ μὲν ἠρεμοῦν, τὸν αὐτὸν κυκλήσομεν λόγον ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἢ κατὰ φύσιν εἶναι τὸ (300b.) πρῶτον ἠρεμοῦν ἢ εἰς ἄπειρον ἰέναι, ὅπερ ἀδύνατον εἰ δὲ κινούμενον τὸ κωλῦον φέρεσθαι, καθάπερ φησὶν Ἐμπεδοκλῆς τὴν γῆν ὑπὸ τῆς δίνης ἠρεμεῖν, ποῦ ἂν ἐφέρετο, ἐπειδὴ εἰς ἄπειρον ἀδύνατον; Οὐθὲν γὰρ γίγνεται ἀδύνατον, τὸ δ' ἄπειρον διελθεῖν ἀδύνατον. Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη στῆναί που τὸ φερόμενον, κἀκεῖ μὴ βίᾳ μένειν ἀλλὰ κατὰ φύσιν. Εἰ δ' ἐστὶν ἠρεμία κατὰ φύσιν, ἔστι καὶ κίνησις κατὰ φύσιν, ἡ εἰς τοῦτον τὸν τόπον φορά.
Διὸ καὶ Λευκίππῳ καὶ Δημοκρίτῳ, τοῖς λέγουσιν ἀεὶ κινεῖσθαι τὰ πρῶτα σώματα ἐν τῷ κενῷ καὶ τῷ ἀπείρῳ, λεκτέον τίνα κίνησιν καὶ τίς ἡ κατὰ φύσιν αὐτῶν κίνησις.
Εἰ γὰρ ἄλλο ὑπ' ἄλλου κινεῖται βίᾳ τῶν στοιχείων, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ φύσιν ἀνάγκη τινὰ εἶναι κίνησιν ἑκάστου, παρ' ἣν ἡ βίαιός ἐστιν καὶ δεῖ τὴν πρώτην κινοῦσαν μὴ βίᾳ κινεῖν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ φύσιν εἰς ἄπειρον γὰρ εἶσιν, εἰ μή τι ἔσται κατὰ φύσιν κινοῦν πρῶτον, ἀλλ' ἀεὶ τὸ πρότερον βίᾳ κινούμενον κινήσει.
575. After disproving the position of those who posit that all bodies are generated from surfaces, the Philosopher here begins to inquire whether natural bodies have natural motions. Concerning this he does two things:
primo ostendit quod corpora naturalia habent motus naturales; secundo ostendit quod habent gravitatem et levitatem, quibus inclinantur ad suos motus naturales, ibi: quod autem quaedam habere et cetera.
First he shows that natural bodies have natural motions;
Secondly, how compulsory motions of bodies take place in ways other than those of natural motions, at 590 (L. 7).
Regarding the first he does two things:
primo probat quod corpora naturalia habent motus naturales;
secundo improbat quorundam philosophorum opiniones, circa hoc errantium, ibi: propter quod et Leucippo et cetera.
First he proves that natural bodies have natural motions;
Secondly, he refutes the opinions of certain philosophers, in error on this matter, at 578.
In regard to the first he does two things:
First he proposes what he intends [428] and says that because it was said above that the operations and passions of bodies are their generations and motions, and we have already inquired about the generation of bodies, it remains to discuss their motions. And he says it is manifest from what will be said that there must be some natural motion in all simple bodies, whereas mixed bodies follow the motion of the simple body that is predominant in it. Therefore, some natural motion is in every natural body.
576. Secondly, at [429] he proves his proposition with two arguments, the first of which is based on motion. For we see by the senses that simple bodies are moved; if, therefore, they do not have a proper motion natural to them, then they must be being moved by violence. But to be moved by violence is the same as to be moved beside nature — for what is according to nature is not violent, because the violent is that in which what undergoes the force contributes nothing, as is said in Ethics III.
Now from the fact that there are motions beside nature, it follows that there is motion according to nature in respect to which a violent motion is called "beside nature" [praeter naturam]; for sickness would not be a disposition beside nature, unless health were a disposition according to nature, because every privation presupposes something positive. And although from the fact that there is a motion beside nature, it follows that there is a motion according to nature, yet, while there are many motions beside nature, the motion according to nature is one, i.e., for one body, because the nature of one thing is determined to one, from which many deviations are possible, just as health is one but sicknesses many. The reason for this is that each thing is "absolutely" according to its nature, i.e., in one way, because the nature of one thing is one; but each thing has not only many motions, but also many dispositions, beside nature.
But against this seems to be the statement made in the beginning of this book, namely, that to a motion according to nature there is contrary to it one beside nature, and that one thing is contrary to one.
To this it can be said that the Philosopher is speaking there of simple motions: for one body cannot be moved beside nature with several simple motions, although it can be moved beside its nature by several composite motions. Or it can be said that even though one thing is contrary to one, yet the contrary which is as privation can occur in many ways, just as health is something absolutely, but sickness can occur in many ways. Similarly, motion according to nature occurs in one way, but beside nature in many ways.
577. The second argument is presented at [430] and is based on rest. It presupposes two things. First of all, that whatever is at rest must be resting either according to violence or according to nature. Secondly, a thing rests through violence in a place whither it is moved through violence; but wherever it is moved according to nature, it rests according to nature.
From these suppositions he argues thus: It is evident to our senses that some body, for example, earth or a stone, is at rest in the middle. Therefore, according to what has been premised, it is resting either through violence or according to nature. If according to nature, then, according to the suppositions, it follows that the motion of such a body to this place is natural. But if it is resting through violence, then something must be present exerting violence upon it and preventing it from being moved. But what is so preventing it from being moved is itself either in motion or at rest.
If it is at rest, as a pillar at rest prevents a stone upon it from being moved, the same question returns about this impediment: Is it at rest naturally or violently? If naturally, it will be concluded that it is also moved naturally; but if violently, it will in turn need something preventing it. Consequently, it is necessary either to arrive at some first thing at rest according to nature, which will consequently be moved according to nature, or to go on infinitely in bodies — which is impossible, as was shown in Book I.
But if it be said that a thing at rest by violence in the middle is prevented from being moved by something in motion (as Empedocles said that the earth is at rest, being prevented by violence from moving by the gyration of the heaven) then, if that obstacle were removed, the consequence would be that the previously impeded body would be carried to some definite place — it being impossible for it to be carried ad infinitum, since it is impossible for the infinite to be traversed, and nothing can be in the process of becoming which cannot come to be. If then it is being moved to some definite place, then, when it shall have arrived there, it will stop or rest there not violently but naturally. And so, according to the premises, if it rests naturally in this place, it follows that it is moved naturally to this place. Consequently, there will exist some natural motion.
578. Then at [431] he disproves the opinions of certain philosophers on this matter.
Et primo opinionem Democriti;
secundo opinionem Platonis, ibi: idem autem hoc accidere et cetera.
First the opinion of Democritus;
Secondly, the opinion of Plato (L. 6).
In regard to the first he does two things. First, from the premises he concludes to the inadequacy of Democritus' sayings. For he posited that the indivisible bodies which he said to be principles are always being moved in an infinite and empty space. But it has been shown that simple bodies have some natural motion. Therefore they should decide by what kind of motion such bodies are being moved and what their natural motion is. However, since they have not determined this, their doctrine is incomplete.
579. Secondly, at [432] he presents a certain excuse, because they said that one of those indivisible bodies which they posited as elements is moved violently by another.
But he rejects this on two grounds. First, because if violent motion is posited, then natural motion must be posited, beside which the violent motion is, as was said above. Secondly, because at least the first mover must not cause motion through violence but according to nature. For whatever causes motion through violence has the principle of its motion without, and thus does not move except as moved. If then a first thing causing motion by nature is not posited, but always one that is acting through violence being previously moved by something else, there will be an infinite process in movers — which is impossible, as was proved in VIII. Therefore they are not excused from the need for positing natural motion.
3-6
Refutation of Plato's opinion of disordered motion before the world
Τὸ αὐτὸ δὲ τοῦτο συμβαίνειν ἀναγκαῖον κἂν εἰ καθάπερ ἐν τῷ Τιμαίῳ γέγραπται, πρὶν γενέσθαι τὸν κόσμον ἐκινεῖτο τὰ στοιχεῖα ἀτάκτως. Ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἢ βίαιον εἶναι τὴν κίνησιν ἢ κατὰ φύσιν. Εἰ δὲ κατὰ φύσιν ἐκινεῖτο, ἀνάγκη κόσμον εἶναι, ἐάν τις βούληται θεωρεῖν ἐπιστήσας τό τε γὰρ πρῶτον κινοῦν ἀνάγκη κινεῖν ἑαυτὸ κινούμενον κατὰ φύσιν, καὶ τὰ κινούμενα μὴ βίᾳ, ἐν τοῖς οἰκείοις ἠρεμοῦντα τόποις, ποιεῖν ἥνπερ ἔχουσι νῦν τάξιν, τὰ μὲν βάρος ἔχοντα ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον, τὰ δὲ κουφότητα ἔχοντα ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου ταύτην δ' ὁ κόσμος ἔχει τὴν διάταξιν.
Ἔτι δὲ τοσοῦτον ἐπανέροιτ' ἄν τις, πότερον οὐχ οἷόν τ' ἦν κινούμενα ἀτάκτως καὶ μίγνυσθαι τοιαύτας μίξεις ἔνια, ἐξ ὧν συνίσταται τὰ κατὰ φύσιν συνιστάμενα σώματα, λέγω δ' οἷον ὀστᾶ καὶ σάρκας, καθάπερ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς φησὶ γίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῆς φιλότητος λέγει γὰρ ὡς πολλαὶ μὲν κόρσαι ἀναύχενες ἐβλάστησαν.
Τοῖς δ' ἄπειρα ἐν ἀπείρῳ τὰ κινούμενα ποιοῦσιν, εἰ μὲν ἓν τὸ κινοῦν, ἀνάγκη μίαν φέρεσθαι φοράν, ὥστ' οὐκ ἀτάκτως κινηθήσεται, εἰ δ' ἄπειρα τὰ (301a.) κινοῦντα, καὶ τὰς φορὰς ἀναγκαῖον ἀπείρους εἶναι εἰ γὰρ πεπερασμέναι, τάξις τις ἔσται οὐ γὰρ τῷ μὴ φέρεσθαι εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ ἡ ἀταξία συμβαίνει οὐδὲ γὰρ νῦν εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ φέρεται πάντα, ἀλλὰ τὰ συγγενῆ μόνον.
Ἔτι τὸ ἀτάκτως οὐθέν ἐστιν ἕτερον ἢ τὸ παρὰ φύσιν ἡ γὰρ τάξις ἡ οἰκεία τῶν αἰσθητῶν φύσις ἐστίν. Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τοῦτο ἄτοπον καὶ ἀδύνατον, τὸ ἄπειρον ἄτακτον ἔχειν κίνησιν ἔστι γὰρ φύσις ἐκείνη τῶν πραγμάτων οἵαν ἔχει τὰ πλείω καὶ τὸν πλείω χρόνον συμβαίνει οὖν αὐτοῖς τοὐναντίον τὴν μὲν ἀταξίαν εἶναι κατὰ φύσιν, τὴν δὲ τάξιν καὶ τὸν κόσμον παρὰ φύσιν καίτοι οὐδὲν ὡς ἔτυχε γίγνεται τῶν κατὰ φύσιν.
Ἔοικε δὲ τοῦτό γε αὐτὸ καλῶς Ἀναξαγόρας λαβεῖν ἐξ ἀκινήτων γὰρ ἄρχεται κοσμοποιεῖν. Πειρῶνται δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι συγκρίνοντές πως πάλιν κινεῖν καὶ διακρίνειν. Ἐκ διεστώτων δὲ καὶ κινουμένων οὐκ εὔλογον ποιεῖν τὴν γένεσιν. Διὸ καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς παραλείπει τὴν ἐπὶ τῆς φιλότητος οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἠδύνατο συστῆσαι τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐκ κεχωρισμένων μὲν κατασκευάζων, σύγκρισιν δὲ ποιῶν διὰ τὴν φιλότητα ἐκ διακεκριμένων γὰρ συνέστηκεν ὁ κόσμος τῶν στοιχείων ὥστ' ἀναγκαῖον γίνεσθαι ἐξ ἑνὸς καὶ συγκεκριμένου.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἐστι φυσική τις κίνησις ἑκάστου τῶν σωμάτων, ἣν οὐ βίᾳ κινοῦνται οὐδὲ παρὰ φύσιν, φανερὸν ἐκ τούτων.
580. After disproving the opinion of Democritus and Leucippus on the motions of natural bodies, the Philosopher here disproves Plato's opinion on the same matter.
Et primo per rationes;
secundo per dicta aliorum philosophorum, qui circa hoc melius sensisse videntur, ibi: videtur autem hoc ipsum et cetera.
First with arguments;
Secondly, with the saying of other philosophers, who are seen to have had better perception on this matter, at 585.
581. Regarding the first he presents four arguments, with respect to the first of which he says [433] that the same impossibility that happens to Democritus and Leucippus must recur, if anyone posits that before the world was made the elements out of which it is formed were being moved with a disorderly motion, as Plato writes in the Timaeus, recounting that, before the world was made by God, matter fluctuated without order.
That the same impossibility recurs when this is posited he proves by adding that the disorderly motion by which the elements were being moved was either violent or according to nature, If violent, we are led back to the first position: hence the same impossibility recurs. But if the motion were according to nature, then we are contradicting our assumption. For it is assumed that the world was not yet existing, whereas, if the elements were being moved according to nature, then it is necessary to say the world was already existing, if one wishes to consider attentively. For since every motion, even according to Plato, is reduced to a first mover as to its cause, then, if the elements were in some way moved, it must be said that the first mover was moving himself according to nature.
By first mover is here understood, not the absolutely first mover, which is utterly immobile, as. is proved in VIII and in XII, but the first mover in the genus of natural movers, i.e., one that moves itself and is composed of mover and moved, as was proved in VIII. But if we follow another reading, namely, "the first mover must move the (first) moved according to nature," then it refers to the first mover moving absolutely, which is wholly immobile, which moves the first mobile.
But no matter how "first mover" is understood, it must move according to nature, for it is not possible that what is beside nature precede what is according to nature, as is clear from the premises. Now if the first mover moves naturally, necessarily the bodies which follow the motion of the first mover are not being moved by violence nor rest by violence in their appropriate places, but maintain the same order as now prevails, i.e., such that heavy bodies fall to the middle and rest there, but light bodies are borne from the middle and remain above. But this is the situation of the world as it now is; it follows, therefore, that the world would have been before it came into existence. It is not sound, therefore, to posit that the elements, before the world came to be, were being moved according to nature, but according to violence. And thus there follows the same impossibility as for Democritus and Leucippus.
582. The second argument he presents at [434] and in one sense it leads to the same thing as the first, namely, that the world would exist before it came to be. But the first argument came to this conclusion by considering simple bodies; the present argument concludes to it by considering mixed bodies (for the disposition of both arises in the make-up of the world.
He says therefore: If the elements, before the world was made, were being moved haphazardly, someone can ask whether the elements so moved were able to be mixed in such mixtures that natural bodies such as flesh and bones and so on, would result. If anyone should declare this not possible, it follows that the elements were not in utterly disorderly motion, since, namely, they could not be moved by any and all motions. For Empedocles, in positing that the elements are moved by friendship, said that such bodies were formed by the motion produced by friendship, in such a way, namely, that by the sole motion of the elements by friendship, for one there was generated flesh, for another, bone, for another a head, for another, hands. He further said that as a result of such a combination of elements through friendship, many heads were produced without a neck. If, therefore, it is maintained that it was impossible for these things to be produced, then the elements were not moved wholly without order. But if it were possible for these to be produced, then the disposition of the world was already completed, not only regarding simple bodies, but mixed bodies as well. — It should be noted that the generation of heads without necks is, according to Empedocles, caused by friendship not in terms of a final product of its activity, but as part of the process whereby it gradually reduces the many to one, constituting mixed bodies from the elements.
583. The third argument he sets down at [435]. It is not directed absolutely against Plato but in combination with the opinions of Democritus and Leucippus, who held that infinite indivisible bodies are being moved in infinite space.
He says, therefore, that if those who posit infinite bodies being moved in infinite space accept Plato's position that before the world the elements were in haphazard motion, an impossibility would follow. For either all those infinite bodies would be being moved by one mover (i.e., according to species, e.g., by heaviness or lightness), or by an infinitude of movers. If by one, then they would have to be moved by one kind of local motion, for example, by upward motion or downward. Consequently they would not be in haphazard motion, since there is already a certain order in the fact that all things are being moved to the same place. But if there were an infinitude of principles, all specifically different, it would follow that the species of motion would also be infinite. But this is impossible, according to things previously set down, in which it was shown that the species of motion are not infinite and indeterminate.
Likewise the same must be said if the principles of the motions are finite and the motions themselves finite — for, if there were finite species of motion, caused by finite principles, there would already be implied in them a certain order. For the disorder of motions does not arise from the fact that not all bodies are being moved to the same place, which is for there to be several species of motion, since even now, when, with the world existing, there is an ordered motion of bodies, not all bodies are being moved to one and the same place, but only those that are of the same genus, as all heavy bodies downward,
He adds therefore by this argument that it is necessary to posit infinite motions if before the world was made bodies were being moved haphazardly.
584. He sets down the fourth argument at [436], and shows that the position in question contradicts itself. For to exist in disorder is nothing other than to exist beside nature. In sensible things it appears that order is their proper nature, since, namely, through its proper nature each of them is inclined to something definite. But this inclination is the order discerned in sensible things — for things are said to act or to move in a disorderly fashion when this happens contrary to the inclination of a thing's proper nature.
From this it also appears that it is unfitting and impossible for a sensible thing to have a disorderly motion that is "infinite," i.e., enduring for an infinite time, because, as has been said, a disordered motion is one contrary to nature. Now it appears that it belongs to the nature of each thing that it be found in many members of the same genus and most of the time. For what is found in just a few men is not said to be natural to man — for example, to be ambidextrous; nor what is true of some for just a short time — for example, to have a fever. But the natural is that which is found in the greater number and more frequently.
Consequently, the Platonists come to assume two contraries at the same time, namely, that disorderly motion is according to nature, since it existed for an infinite time before the world, and that ordered motion, as well as the world constituted after the ordering of motion, are contrary to nature, since they have existed for a shorter time, even though nothing according to nature is "as it happens," i.e., without a definite order.
It should be noted that the arguments of Aristotle go directly against the position of Plato, if the latter's words mean that there was a disorderly motion of the elements prior to the time that the world was made. But Plato's adherents say that this was not what he understood, but that all order in the motion of sensible things comes from the first principle, so that other things, considered in themselves, outside the influence of the first principle, are disordered. And according to this, Aristotle is not here objecting against Plato's sense, but against the words of the Platonists, lest they lead anyone into error.
585. Then at [437] he uses the saying of other philosophers to disprove the position in question, because they are seen to have had a better understanding of the matter. Concerning this, it should be noted that Democritus and Leucippus, as well as Plato, seem to have maintained two things in regard to bodies existing before the world: that they are in motion, and that they are segregated.
As to the first, therefore, he says that, with regard to the constitution of the world, Anaxagoras seems to have surmised well. For he posited that the world began from bodies not previously moved. And this is more reasonable than to say that the world was made from bodies previously moved, because motion is a certain act of a thing existing in potency, and, consequently, is intermediate between first potency and first act. But in things that are being brought about, the beginning is taken from what is entirely in potency. Therefore it is more reasonable to fashion the beginning of the world from things wholly not in motion than from things moved.
As to the second he says that even those other philosophers who, in positing the beginning of the world, "gathered together to some extent," (i.e., by saying that before the world came to be, all things were to some extent assembled into one) attempted to explain how things would then be set in motion and separated, in the founding of the world, as did Anaxagoras and also Empedocles. For it is not reasonable to produce the generation of the world out of things previously distant and in motion. For just as motion is a certain act, so also the distinction, or distance, between things results from their proper forms, according to which things are in act (for insofar as things are in potency they are not distinguished); and since generation strictly comes to be from what is in potency, it is therefore not reasonable to generate the world out of distinct and moved things.
For this reason Empedocles, in explaining the first generation of the world, made no mention of friendship whose function is to assemble the scattered. For Empedocles could not explain the constitution of the "heaven," i.e., of the world, by friendship, in such a way as to constitute it out of things previously separated, by making a gathering together of the previously scattered. For then it would follow that the world was constituted of things previously scattered, which is against the foregoing. Hence, because he used only strife in constituting the world, and strife's role is to scatter the assembled, the consequence is that the world, according to him, came from something one and gathered together out of many things.
Finally, in summary, he concludes [438) that it is plain from the foregoing that there is for each body a certain natural motion by which it is moved neither by violence nor beside its nature.
3-7
Every body moving naturally in a straight line has either gravity or lightness, Natural and violent motions
Ὅτι δ' ἔχειν ἔνια ἀναγκαῖον ῥοπὴν βάρους καὶ κουφότητος, ἐκ τῶνδε δῆλον.
Κινεῖσθαι μὲν γάρ φαμεν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι εἰ δὲ μὴ ἕξει φύσει ῥοπὴν τὸ κινούμενον, ἀδύνατον κινεῖσθαι ἢ πρὸς τὸ μέσον ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου.
Ἔστω γὰρ τὸ μὲν ἐφ' οὗ Α ἀβαρές, τὸ δ' ἐφ' οὗ Β βάρος ἔχον, ἐνηνέχθω δὲ τὸ ἀβαρὲς τὴν ΓΔ, τὸ δὲ Β ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ τὴν ΓΕ μείζω γὰρ οἰσθήσεται τὸ βάρος ἔχον. Ἐὰν δὴ διαιρεθῇ τὸ σῶμα τὸ ἔχον βάρος ὡς ἡ ΓΕ πρὸς τὴν ΓΔ (δυνατὸν γὰρ οὕτως ἔχειν πρός τι τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ μορίων), εἰ τὸ ὅλον φέρεται τὴν ὅλην τὴν ΓΕ, τὸ μόριον ἀνάγκη ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ τὴν ΓΔ φέρεσθαι, ὥστε ἴσον οἰσθήσεται τὸ ἀβαρὲς καὶ τὸ βάρος ἔχον ὅπερ ἀδύνα(301b.) τον. Ὁ δ' αὐτὸς λόγος καὶ ἐπὶ κουφότητος.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ ἔσται τι σῶμα κινούμενον μήτε κουφότητα μήτε βάρος ἔχον, ἀνάγκη τοῦτο βίᾳ κινεῖσθαι, βίᾳ δὲ κινούμενον ἄπειρον ποιεῖ τὴν κίνησιν. Ἐπεὶ γὰρ δύναμίς τις ἡ κινοῦσα, τὸ δ' ἔλαττον καὶ τὸ κουφότερον ὑπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς δυνάμεως πλεῖον κινηθήσεται, κεκινήσθω τὸ μὲν ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Α, τὸ ἀβαρές, τὴν ΓΕ, τὸ δ' ἐφ' ᾧ τὸ Β, τὸ βάρος ἔχον, ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ τὴν ΓΔ. Διαιρεθέντος δὴ τοῦ βάρος ἔχοντος σώματος ὡς ἡ ΓΕ πρὸς τὴν ΓΔ, συμβήσεται τὸ ἀφαιρούμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ βάρος ἔχοντος σώματος τὴν ΓΕ φέρεσθαι ἐν τῷ ἴσῳ χρόνῳ, ἐπείπερ τὸ ὅλον ἐφέρετο τὴν ΓΔ. Τὸ γὰρ τάχος ἕξει τὸ τοῦ ἐλάττονος πρὸς τὸ τοῦ μείζονος ὡς τὸ μεῖζον σῶμα πρὸς τὸ ἔλαττον. Ἴσον ἄρα τὸ ἀβαρὲς οἰσθήσεται σῶμα καὶ τὸ βάρος ἔχον ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ. Τοῦτο δ' ἀδύνατον.
Ὥστ' ἐπεὶ παντὸς τοῦ προτεθέντος μεῖζον κινηθήσεται διάστημα τὸ ἀβαρές, ἄπειρον ἂν φέροιτο. Φανερὸν οὖν ὅτι ἀνάγκη σῶμα πᾶν βάρος ἔχειν ἢ κουφότητα διωρισμένον.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ φύσις μέν ἐστιν ἡ ἐν αὐτῷ ὑπάρχουσα κινήσεως ἀρχή, δύναμις δ' ἡ ἐν ἄλλῳ ἢ ᾗ ἄλλο, κίνησις δὲ ἡ μὲν κατὰ φύσιν ἡ δὲ βίᾳ πᾶσα,
τὴν μὲν κατὰ φύσιν, οἷον τῷ λίθῳ τὴν κάτω, θάττω ποιήσει τὸ κατὰ δύναμιν, τὴν δὲ παρὰ φύσιν ὅλως αὐτή.
Πρὸς ἀμφότερα δὲ ὥσπερ ὀργάνῳ χρῆται τῷ ἀέρι (πέφυκε γὰρ οὗτος καὶ κοῦφος εἶναι καὶ βαρύς) τὴν μὲν οὖν ἄνω ποιήσει φορὰν ᾗ κοῦφος, ὅταν ὠσθῇ καὶ λάβῃ τὴν ἀρχὴν ἀπὸ τῆς δυνάμεως, τὴν δὲ κάτω πάλιν ᾗ βαρύς ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐναφάψασα παραδίδωσιν ἑκατέρῳ. Διὸ καὶ οὐ παρακολουθοῦντος τοῦ κινήσαντος φέρεται τὸ βίᾳ κινηθέν. Εἰ γὰρ μὴ τοιοῦτόν τι σῶμα ὑπῆρχεν, οὐκ ἂν ἦν βίᾳ κίνησις.
Καὶ τὴν κατὰ φύσιν δ' ἑκάστου κίνησιν συνεπουρίζει τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἅπαν ἢ κοῦφον ἢ βαρύ, καὶ πῶς αἱ παρὰ φύσιν κινήσεις ἔχουσι ἐν τούτοις, φανερόν.
586. After showing that natural bodies have natural motions, and disproving the positions of philosophers who erred on this matter, the Philosopher here shows that bodies naturally moved with a straight motion have heaviness and lightness; for the principles of natural motion in such bodies are reckoned with respect to heaviness and lightness.
Therefore, first, he proposes what he intends [439] and says that it will be plain from what follows that certain bodies, namely, those naturally moved with a straight motion must have heaviness and lightness by which they are inclined to their appropriate places. He says "certain" bodies, in order to distinguish them from those that are circularly moved.
587. Secondly, at [440] he presents a proof of his proposition, saying: Here we say in a general way that it is necessary for natural bodies to be moved, for they are called "natural" from having within themselves the principle of motion, as is plain from II. But if what is moved does not have a natural inclination by which it tends to some determinate place, it cannot be moved either to the center, which comes about through the inclination of heaviness, or from the center, which is due to the inclination of lightness. Therefore it is necessary that bodies which are moved in a straight motion have heaviness and lightness.
588. Thirdly at [441] he proves what he had presupposed, namely, that if the bodies in question did not have heaviness and lightness, they would not be moved.
Et primo ostendit quod non moverentur naturaliter;
secundo ostendit quod non moverentur per violentiam, ibi: adhuc autem si erit aliquod corpus et cetera.
First he shows that they would not be moved naturally;
Secondly, that they would not be moved by violence, at 589.
He says therefore first [441] that if any of the lower bodies does not possess heaviness or lightness, let there be two bodies, and let A be the body lacking heaviness and B the body having heaviness. Now let A, which is the non-heavy body, be moved for a certain period of time, say for the space of one hour, over a magnitude GD, with a motion directed to the center. Then B, which has heaviness, will, during the same time be moved with the same type of motion over a larger magnitude GE; for a body having heaviness must in an equal time traverse a greater distance than a body not having heaviness, just as a heavier body is carried downward more swiftly than a less heavy. Now let B which has heaviness be divided in the ratio of GE to GD so that the whole of B is related to a part, say C, as the whole GE is to GD; for there is nothing to prevent such a division of body B, since every finite body can be divided according to any given ratio. Therefore, let us go on thus. As GE is to GD, so B is to its part C; therefore, by commutative proportion, B is to GE as C (which is part of B) is to GD. If, therefore, the whole B traverses in a given time the entire magnitude GE, then the part of B must traverse the magnitude GD in the same time. But body A (the one having no heaviness) traversed the same magnitude in the same amount of time. Therefore, it will follow that a body having heaviness, and one not having heaviness, will traverse the same magnitude in equal time. And the same argument is valid if the other body is assumed to have lightness. Consequently, it is plain that something irreconcilable follows, if any of the lower bodies is assumed to have neither heaviness nor lightness.
589. Then at [442] he shows that if any of the lower bodies lacks heaviness or lightness, it cannot be moved by violence. And he says: From the fact that it was shown by the foregoing argument that a body lacking heaviness or lightness cannot be moved naturally with a straight motion, then, if it is moved at all, it must be through violence, for every motion of such bodies is either natural or compulsory. But it cannot be moved by violence either, because, if it were moved by violence, its motion would have to be "infinite," i.e., of infinite speed, which is impossible. And that this would follow he proves by using the principle that if any "power," i.e., violence, moves a body, a lesser and lighter will be moved by the same "power," i.e., by the same violence, "more," i.e., more swiftly, in motion, namely, upward — for a larger and heavier body offers more resistance to violence.
Therefore let A be a body not having heaviness and let it be moved upward violently through the magnitude GE; but let B be a body having heaviness which by the same force in an equal time is moved through the magnitude GD, which is of course less than GE. Just as the heavier is moved less by the same force, so the heavy is moved less than the non-heavy. Let then the body B, having heaviness, be divided in the ratio which is that of the ratio of magnitude GE to GD. It will follow, therefore, just as it did before, that what is taken away through division from body B which has heaviness, will be moved through magnitude GE in a time equal to that in which body A, which lacks heaviness, was moved through it, because the whole body B in the same time was moved through magnitude GE which is less. For the ratio of the speed of the lesser magnitude to the greater must be as the ratio of the greater body to the lesser, so that, in the same time, the greater body is moved a smaller distance, and the lesser body a greater distance, because a lesser body is moved more swiftly by an equal power. It will follow, therefore, that in the same period of time a non-heavy body and one having heaviness are moved an equal distance — which is impossible. But no matter what heavy body is taken and no matter how swiftly it is moved, a non-heavy body will be moved a greater distance in the same time. Accordingly, it will follow that a body lacking heaviness would be moved with an infinite speed through violence — which is impossible. And the same argument holds for a non-light body.
Therefore, in summary, he concludes [443] that plainly every body which is "determinate," i.e., which is moved with a straight motion has heaviness or lightness. He calls the body which is moved with a straight motion "determinate," either because he is here speaking determinately of it, or because such bodies are moved with a straight motion insofar as they are segregated and divided and not insofar as they are taken all together.
590. Then at [444], because he had mentioned both natural and violent motion, he now shows how both types are produced. Regarding this he does two things:
primo ostendit differentiam motus naturalis et violenti;
secundo ostendit quomodo uterque motus invenitur in aere, ibi: ad ambo autem et cetera.
First he shows the difference between natural and violent motion; Secondly, how both are found in air, at 591.
About the first he does two things:
primo ostendit differentiam motus naturalis et violenti;
secundo ostendit quomodo violenta admiscentur etiam motui naturali, ibi: eum quidem et cetera.
First he shows the difference between natural and violent motion;
Secondly, how violence enters in even to natural motion, at 590.
Now, natural and violent motions differ with respect to their principles, and therefore he first defines the principles of each of these motions [444]. And he says that nature is a principle of a motion existing in that which is moved, as is plain in IIe "force", however, i.e., a power that causes motion violently, is a principle existing in another, as it is other. He says this because it could accidentally happen that a principle of violent motion exist in one and the same thing, but not insofar as it is one and the same, but insofar as it is other, as when a doctor heals himself not as doctor but as sick. And from this it is plain that there is a motion that is natural and a motion that is violent. For a motion is according to nature whose principle is in what is moved, not only as active principle, but also as passive, which, indeed, is the potency by which something is naturally capable of undergoing motion from another. Consequently, when lower bodies are moved by the higher bodies, the motion is not violent but natural, because in the lower bodies there is a natural aptitude to follow the motions of the higher bodies. But a motion is violent when no principle of the motion is from within but only from without, as when a man throws a heavy body upward, in which body there is no natural aptitude for such motion.
Then at [445] he shows as a consequence how violence enters into natural motion. For in the case of a motion which is natural to some body, as for a stone to be moved downward naturally, a force that acts violently sometimes quickens that motion. Consequently, such a motion is in a certain sense mixed, since the kind of motion it is is due to nature, but the addition in speed is due to the violent mover.
But in the case of a violent motion, it is violence that entirely produces it and makes it the type of motion it is, and accounts for the amount of its speed — for to the extent that something from nature should happen to be present in it, to that extent it would not be beside nature.
591. Then at [446] he explains the role that air plays in both these motions.
Et primo quomodo deservit motui violento;
secundo quomodo deservit motui naturali, ibi: et eum autem qui secundum naturam et cetera.
First, the part it plays in violent motion;
Secondly, how it serves natural motion, at 592.
He says therefore first [446] that the force of a violent mover uses the air as an instrument "for both," i.e., for upward and downward motion. For air is apt by nature to be light and heavy: for, as was said above, and as will be explained at greater length in Book IV, fire is absolutely light and earth absolutely heavy, but air and water are intermediate between these two, since air is heavy compared to fire, but light compared to water and earth; but water is light compared to earth, while compared to fire and air it is heavy. Accordingly, air, insofar as it is light, will perfect a violent motion that is upward (but only insofar as it is moved and insofar as the principle of such a motion is the power of the violent mover); and insofar as it is heavy, it will perfect a motion that is downward.. For the force of the violent mover, by a kind of impression, imparts a motion "to both," i.e., either to the air moved upwards and moved downwards, or to the air and to the heavy body, such as a stone.
This does not mean that the force of the violent mover impresses upon the stone which is moved by violence some force by which it might be moved, in the way that the power of the generator impresses on the thing generated a form upon which natural motion follows — for then the violent motion would proceed from an intrinsic principle, and that is contrary to the notion of a violent motion. It would also follow that a stone, by the very fact that it is in local motion through violence, would be altered — and this is contrary to what we sense. Therefore, the violent mover impresses motion alone upon the stone, and this it does while it touches it. But because air is more susceptible to such an impression (both because it is more subtle and because it is in a sense light), it is moved more swiftly through the impression of the violent mover than the stone. Consequently, when the violent mover desists, the air moved by it continues to propel the stone and also the adjoining air, which likewise moves the stone farther, and this continues so long as the impression of the first violent mover endures, as is said in VIII. Hence it is that the violent mover, even though it does not follow the mobile that is being carried along through violence, e.g., a stone, so as to move it by being present to it, yet it moves it through the impression of the air —if there were no body such as is the air, there would not be violent motion.
From this it is plain that air is a necessary instrument of violent motion and not simply an improving one.
592. Then at [447] he shows what role air plays in natural motion. And he says that air promotes the natural motion of each body in the same way as its violent motion, namely, insofar as by its lightness it helps an upward motion, and by its heaviness a downward motion.
593. But the question can be raised whether the air serves the natural motion of heavy bodies and light bodies so as to be necessary or merely helpful.
Averroes says that it also serves natural motion of necessity, and for two reasons. First, because, as he says in his commentary on this passage, the mover of heavy and of light things is their generator which, in giving the form, gives as a consequence the natural motion, just as it gives all the natural accidents which follow the form. Consequently, the generator causes natural motion through the form. Now a natural motion should follow from its mover immediately. Hence, since the natural motion does not follow immediately from the generator but from the form, it seems that the form is the proper mover in natural motion. Accordingly, it seems that heavy and light bodies in a sense move themselves. But not by themselves, because a thing that moves itself is distinguished into mover and moved, as was proved in VIII — a distinction not found in heavy and light bodies, which are divided only into form and matter, the latter of which is not apt to be moved, as is proved in , V. Hence it remains that a heavy or light body moves itself ear accidens, in the way that a sailor moves a ship through whose movement he himself is moved. Similarly, the light and the heavy body through their form move the air, upon whose motion the heavy and the light body are moved. And thus he concludes that air is necessary for natural motion. Secondly, because, as he says in his commentary on IV, there must be some resistance between mover and mobile. But the matter of a heavy or a light body does not resist its form, which is the principle of motion. Therefore it is necessary that there be some resistance from the medium, which is air or water. Thus air is necessary for natural motion.
594. But both of these arguments proceed from the source of error. For he believed the form of a heavy and of a light body to be an active principle of motion after the manner of a mover, in such a way that resistance would be required to the form's inclination, and also that motion does not proceed immediately from the generator which gives the form. But this is completely false. For the form of a heavy and of a light body is not a principle of motion as though it were an agent itself moved, but as that by which the mover causes motion, just as color is a principle of seeing, by which something is seen. That is why Aristotle in III, after discussing the motion of the heavy and light, says: "It is plain that neither of these moves itself but that they have a principle of motion, not indeed of moving something or making something, but of being acted upon."
Consequently, the motion of the heavy and the light does not come from the generator through the medium of some moving principle; nor is it necessary to look for any other resistance in this motion than that which prevails between the generator and the thing generated. Consequently it remains that air is not required for natural motion of necessity as it is in violent motion. For what is moved naturally has been endowed with a power which is a principle of motion. Hence it does not need to be moved by something else impelling it, as in the case of a thing violently moved, since the latter has no inherent power, upon which such a motion follows.
The very words of Aristotle point up this difference: For when speaking of violent motion he says, "Unless there were such a body, there would not be motion by constraint"; but in speaking of natural motion he says, "Air helps that motion of each thing which is according to nature.
Finally, in summary, he concludes [448] that it is plain from the aforesaid that all bodies are either light or heavy, and how unnatural movement takes place.
3-8
Everything not generated. Elements and their existence
Ὅτι δ' οὔτε πάντων ἐστὶ γένεσις οὔθ' ἁπλῶς οὐθενός, δῆλον ἐκ τῶν προειρημένων
ἀδύνατον γὰρ παντὸς σώματος εἶναι γένεσιν, (302a.) εἰ μὴ καὶ κενὸν εἶναί τι δυνατὸν κεχωρισμένον ἐν ᾧ γὰρ ἔσται τόπῳ τὸ νῦν γιγνόμενον εἰ ἐγίγνετο, ἐν τούτῳ πρότερον τὸ κενὸν ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι σώματος μηθενὸς ὄντος.
Ἄλλο μὲν γὰρ ἐξ ἄλλου σῶμα γίγνεσθαι δυνατόν, οἷον ἐξ ἀέρος πῦρ, ὅλως δ' ἐκ μηδενὸς ἄλλου προϋπάρχοντος μεγέθους ἀδύνατον μάλιστα γὰρ ἂν ἐκ δυνάμει τινὸς ὄντος σώματος ἐνεργείᾳ γένοιτ' ἂν σῶμα. Ἀλλ' εἰ τὸ δυνάμει ὂν σῶμα μηθέν ἐστιν ἄλλο σῶμα ἐνεργείᾳ πρότερον, κενὸν ἔσται κεχωρισμένον.
Λοιπὸν δ' εἰπεῖν τίνων τέ ἐστι γένεσις [σωμάτων], καὶ διὰ τί ἐστιν. Ἐπεὶ οὖν ἐν ἅπασιν ἡ γνῶσις διὰ τῶν πρώτων, πρῶτα δὲ τῶν ἐνυπαρχόντων τὰ στοιχεῖα, σκεπτέον ποῖα τῶν τοιούτων σωμάτων ἐστὶ στοιχεῖα, καὶ διὰ τί ἐστιν, ἔπειτα μετὰ ταῦτα πόσα καὶ ποῖ' ἄττα. Τοῦτο δ' ἔσται φανερὸν ὑποθεμένοις τίς ἐστιν ἡ τοῦ στοιχείου φύσις.
Ἔστω δὴ στοιχεῖον τῶν σωμάτων, εἰς ὃ τἆλλα σώματα διαιρεῖται, ἐνυπάρχον δυνάμει ἢ ἐνεργείᾳ (τοῦτο γὰρ ποτέρως, ἔτι ἀμφισβητήσιμον), αὐτὸ δ' ἐστὶν ἀδιαίρετον εἰς ἕτερα τῷ εἴδει
τοιοῦτον γάρ τι τὸ στοιχεῖον ἅπαντες καὶ ἐν ἅπασι βούλονται λέγειν.
Εἰ δὴ τὸ εἰρημένον ἐστὶ στοιχεῖον, ἀνάγκη εἶναι ἄττα τοιαῦτα τῶν σωμάτων. Ἐν μὲν γὰρ σαρκὶ καὶ ξύλῳ καὶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν τοιούτων ἔνεστι δυνάμει πῦρ καὶ γῆ φανερὰ γὰρ ταῦτα ἐξ ἐκείνων ἐκκρινόμενα. Ἐν δὲ πυρὶ σὰρξ ἢ ξύλον οὐκ ἐνυπάρχουσιν, οὔτε κατὰ δύναμιν οὔτε κατ' ἐνέργειαν ἐξεκρίνετο γὰρ ἄν. Ὁμοίως δ' οὐδ' εἰ ἕν τι μόνον εἴη τοιοῦτον, οὐδ' ἐν ἐκείνῳ οὐ γὰρ εἰ ἔσται σὰρξ ἢ ὀστοῦν ἢ τῶν ἄλλων ὁτιοῦν, οὔπω φατέον ἐνυπάρχειν δυνάμει, ἀλλὰ προσθεωρητέον τίς ὁ τρόπος τῆς γενέσεως.
Ἀναξαγόρας δ' ἐναντίως Ἐμπεδοκλεῖ λέγει περὶ τῶν στοιχείων. Ὁ μὲν γὰρ πῦρ καὶ γῆν καὶ τὰ σύστοιχα τούτοις στοιχεῖά φησιν εἶναι τῶν σωμάτων καὶ συγκεῖσθαι πάντ' ἐκ τούτων, Ἀναξαγόρας δὲ τοὐναντίον τὰ γὰρ ὁμοιομερῆ στοιχεῖα (λέγω δ' οἷον σάρκα καὶ ὀστοῦν καὶ τῶν τοι(302b.) ούτων ἕκαστον), ἀέρα δὲ καὶ πῦρ μίγματα τούτων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων σπερμάτων πάντων εἶναι γὰρ ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν ἐξ ἀοράτων τῶν ὁμοιομερῶν πάντων ἠθροισμένον. Διὸ καὶ γίγνεσθαι πάντ' ἐκ τούτων τὸ γὰρ πῦρ καὶ τὸν αἰθέρα προσαγορεύει ταὐτό.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἐστὶ παντὸς φυσικοῦ σώματος κίνησις οἰκεία, τῶν δὲ κινήσεων αἱ μὲν ἁπλαῖ αἱ δὲ μικταί, καὶ αἱ μὲν μικταὶ τῶν μικτῶν, αἱ δὲ ἁπλαῖ τῶν ἁπλῶν εἰσι, φανερὸν ὅτι ἔσται ἄττα σώματα ἁπλᾶ. Εἰσὶ γὰρ καὶ κινήσεις ἁπλαῖ.
Ὥστε δῆλον καὶ ὅτι ἐστὶ στοιχεῖα καὶ διὰ τί ἐστιν.
595. After inquiring whether generation and motion are present in natural bodies, and supposing from the previous discussion that they are, the Philosopher here begins to inquire how this is. In regard to this he does two things:
primo resumit quoddam improbandum, quod supra improbaverat, sed imperfecte;
secundo prosequitur propositum, ibi: reliquum autem dicere et cetera.
First he takes up again, in order to disprove it, something he had previously disproved incompletely;
Secondly, he pursues his proposition, at 599.
About the first he does three things:
primo proponit id quod supra probatum est;
secundo perficit probationem, ibi: impossibile enim etc.;
tertio excludit quandam obviationem, ibi: aliud quidem enim et cetera.
First he states what was proved above;
Secondly, he completes the proof, at 596;
Thirdly, he excludes an objection, at 597.
596. He says therefore first [449] that it is plain, from what was stated above, that there is neither generation of all things, as those claimed who posited that all things are composed from surfaces, nor no generation at all, as Parmenides and Melissus supposed.
Then at [450] he completes the refutation of those who posited that there is generation of all things. For he had disproved this previously by showing that bodies are not composed of surfaces. But someone could say that there is generation of all bodies in many other ways. Consequently, the Philosopher presents this more universal proof. And he says that we can get confirmation of the fact that there is not generation of all things from this, namely, because it is impossible for there to be generation of every body, unless a void separated from bodies be posited — which he says because certain philosophers, as Democritus and Leucippus, posited a void inherent in bodies. Now by a separated void is meant a place that is not filled with any body, but which can be filled, as was had in IV. The reason why a separated void follows if every body is generated is that, in the place in which a newly generated body exists, if that place existed prior to that body, there would have to be a void there, because no body existed there. But no body would have existed there previously, if every body is generated. Hence the assumption that every body is generated requires the existence of a separated void.
597. Then at [451] he excludes an objection, for someone could say that we see each body being generated, even though no void exists. But to this he answers that when a certain particular body comes to be, it is generated from some other body, for example, fire from air — and thus., before the generation of the fire, air was in the same place, and so it is not void. But if every body should be generated, we cannot posit another body that previously filled the place, because there is no other body outside of every body. Hence, the body would have to be made from non-body. But it is impossible that a body be made entirely from no pre-existing bodily magnitude. For there would be produced a body in act, above all from that which is body in potency. And if that which is that body in potency is so in such a way as to be actually another body, nothing impossible follows, for that is the way we explain fire as coming to be from matter that is potentially fire, but actually air. But if it were a body in potency in such a way as not to be in act some other body, as those who posit that every body is generated would be forced to assume, it would follow that, before the generation of every body, there would be a separated void.
598. It should be noted that Aristotle intends to prove here that there is not generation of every body, in the sense of the whole universality of bodies being generated simultaneously. But it is not his intention to prove that some particular body is not generated from non-body. For then there would arise against Aristotle's proof the objection mentioned by Simplicius in his commentary, namely, that a void would not be necessary, either on account of rarefaction and condensation, or because, when this body is generated, another is corrupted. Whence, too, this would not be, as he thought, a sufficient proof that there is not generation of things in common, but of particulars (for there is not generation of man absolutely, but of this man), for the whole universality of body is as one complete body existing in one species, as was had previously. But there is nothing to prevent an individual alone in its species from being generated and corrupted, as they say of the Phoenix. Hence there would not be excluded by this the generation of every body, which the Philosopher intends to reject.
Nor is the Philosopher's proof against the doctrine of our faith which teaches that the sum total of bodies at some time began to exist, because we do not posit a pre-existent place, as the Philosopher here supposes; nor do we posit that bodies were generated from what is in potency, but through creation.
599. Then at [452] he explains how there is generation and motion of bodies. And about this he does two things:
primo dicit de quo est intentio, et quo ordine id sit agendum;
secundo exequitur propositum, ibi: sit itaque elementum et cetera.
First he states his intention and the order to be followed;
Secondly, he executes his plan, at 600.
He says therefore first [452] that, since neither is it true that all bodies can be generated, nor that none can, as was said, we are left with the task of showing which bodies are involved in generation, and "because of what this is," i.e., what is the cause of generation. This consideration begins in this book but is completed in the book On Generation. But because all knowledge is through certain first things, from which definitions and demonstrations proceed, and it is plain that the elements of any things are first among what is present in the things (although certain extrinsic principles could be prior, e.g., the agent and end), the consequence is that, if we are to understand the generation of bodies, we must first know what are the elements of bodies that can be generated and destroyed, and why they are elements, and how many elements there are, and how many kinds of bodies there are.
Now in order to elucidate all this, it is necessary to take as a supposition and principle what the nature of an element is. And this is revealed by its definition.
600. Then at [453] he carries out his plan according to the aforesaid order.
Primo enim ostendit quae sit elementi natura, quam significat definitio;
secundo quae et qualia sint corporum elementa, ibi: si itaque quod dictum est etc.;
tertio inquirit quomodo sit corporum generatio, ibi: quoniam autem neque infinita et cetera.
First he shows what is the nature of an element, as signified by its definition;
Secondly, what are the elements of bodies and their condition, at 601.
As to the first he does two things:
primo ponit partes definitionis elementi;
secundo probat hanc elementi definitionem, ibi: tale enim et cetera.
First he sets down the parts of the definition of element;
Secondly, he proves this definition of element, at 600.
In regard to the first he presents three parts of the definition of element. The first of these is that the element is of other bodies, that into which other bodies are divided or resolved. Not every cause can be called an "element," but only one that enters into the composition of the thing. Hence the universal elements are matter and form, as is plain in I. But these are not bodies, whereas the Philosopher is here treating of the elements that are bodies.
The second particle is that an element exists in that of which it is an element, and does so either potentially or actually. (The question of how elements are present in the products of elements, i.e., whether they are present actually or potentially, is for the moment left open). For if the generation and corruption of bodies takes place through assembling and dispersing, as Empedocles and Anaxagoras supposed, then the elements are actually in the compound. But if generation and corruption of bodies are the results of alteration, it is necessary to say that the elements are in potency in the compound.
The third particle is that an element is not divided into other things, namely, things diverse in species. For every body has to be divisible: but some bodies are divided into things that are specifically diverse, as the hand into flesh and bones, out of which it is compacted by a certain composition, or as flesh is resolved into air, fire, water and earth, by a certain alteration. But fire and air, water and earth, are in neither way resolved into things specifically diverse. This particle completes the notion of element; just as letters are called the "elements" of a word, not being divided into things specifically diverse.
Then at [454] he proves the aforesaid definition by appealing to the way people generally speak — for words are to be used as they are generally accepted, as is said in II. And this is what he says, namely, that every one intends to mean by "element" something such as has been described, no matter what the field, for example, in corporal speech, and in demonstrations, in which the principles are called "elements" that are not resolved into other principles.
601. Then at [455] he shows which things are elements and how many there are. In regard to this he does three things:
primo ostendit quod necesse est quaedam esse elementa corporum;
secundo inquirit utrum sint finita vel infinita, ibi: utrum autem finita vel infinita etc.;
tertio inquirit utrum sit unum tantum, ibi: quoniam autem necesse finita et cetera.
First he shows that it is necessary for there to be elements of bodies;
Secondly, he inquires into whether they are finite or infinite (Chap. IV);
Thirdly, whether there is but one element (Chapter V).
Concerning the first he does two things:
primo concludit ex praemissa definitione elementi, quod necesse est ponere quaedam elementa corporum;
secundo ostendit quomodo haec diversimode ponebant Anaxagoras et Empedocles, ibi: Anaxagoras autem et cetera.
First he concludes from the foregoing definition that it is necessary to posit certain elements of bodies;
Secondly, he shows how these were diversely posited by Anaxagoras and Empedocles, at 602.
He says therefore first [455] that, if the foregoing is the definition of element, it is necessary to say that there are certain elements of bodies, for there exist certain bodies in which the foregoing conditions are verified. For in flesh and wood and all such bodies, i.e., compounds, fire and earth are present in potency, since it is from fire and earth and the like that, by a certain alteration, the above-mentioned bodies are composed. And this is evident by the segregation by which mixed [compound] bodies are resolved into such simple bodies, as is evident when an animal body is resolved, which breaks down into dust and a certain moistness and certain vapors — and similar things happen to other mixed bodies.
That such bodies into which other bodies are resolved are themselves not resolved into others, which also belongs to the definition of element, he shows when he adds that in fire neither flesh nor wood is present, either potentially or actually. A sign of this he takes to be the fact that if flesh and wood existed in fire, fire would be resolved into them, and that never is seen to happen. For flesh or wood are generated from fire, not by resolution, but by the addition of other simple bodies altered at the same time for the composite. But because some philosophers posited but one element, as Thales of Miletus water, he adds that whether one element is posited or many, it is still true that in one element there will not exist other bodies. For although other bodies besides the element may be found, for example, flesh or bone or something of this kind, it must not be said that any of them is present either actually or potentially in the body taken as an element.
Since it is true that there are certain elements of bodies, one must consider what the manner of generation is, by which either other bodies are generated from elements, namely, by compounding, or elements from other bodies, namely, by resolution. And he will settle this as to truth in the book .
602. Then at [456] he shows how Anaxagoras differed from Empedocles on the question of bodily elements.
Et primo ponit opinionem utriusque;
:.4in;margin-top:0;text-indent:-.2in">secundo ostendit quae earum sit praeferenda, ibi: quoniam autem est omnis et cetera.
First he presents the opinions of each;
Secondly, he shows which opinion is to be preferred, at 603.
He says therefore first [456] that Anaxagoras and Empedocles held contrary opinions on elements. For Empedocles posited that fire and earth, and other intermediates, which are elements with these, are the elemental bodies of bodies, from which all other bodies are composed. But Anaxagoras says the contrary, namely, that other "homoemeric" bodies, i.e., of similar parts, for example, flesh and bone and the like, are the elements of bodies, while air and fire and earth and water he said to be compounded out of the foregoing, i.e., out of flesh and bone and all the other seeds of natural bodies. For Anaxagoras posited that infinite and indivisible parts of similar bodies were the seeds of all things that appear in nature, in the sense that, by their extraction from some compound, all natural sensible bodies are generated. Therefore, because all other bodies seem to be generated from fire and earth and the like, he estimated that fire and earth and other intermediate things resulted from all the indivisible similar parts assembled together. And according to this, he posited the consimilar parts to be the elements of these four bodies, from which he nevertheless said all things come to be on account of the seeds existing therein. And since he did not mention fire, therefore, lest any doubt arise concerning this, he adds that he [Anaxagoras] called fire "aether."
603. Then at [457] he shows that the opinion of Empedocles is to be preferred. For as is plain from the discussion in Book I, every natural body possesses some proper motion, and since some motions are simple and some mixed, it is clear that mixed motions belong to mixed bodies, and simple motions to simple bodies. And from this it is evident that there are certain simple bodies, since [458] there are certain simple motions. And since the simple motions, which are from the middle and to the middle, belong more to the elements posited by Empedocles, it is plain that his opinion should be preferred.
However, this could be called a second argument in support of the principal conclusion which he draws as a summary, saying that it is plain that elements exist and for what purpose they exist.
Here ends Thomas Aquinas' Commentary
The following is the remainder of Aristotle's text:
4
Πότερον δὲ πεπερασμένα ἢ ἄπειρα, καὶ εἰ πεπερασμένα, πόσα τὸν ἀριθμόν, ἑπόμενον ἂν εἴη σκοπεῖν.
Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἄπειρα, καθάπερ οἴονταί τινες, θεωρητέον, καὶ πρῶτον τοὺς πάντα τὰ ὁμοιομερῆ στοιχεῖα ποιοῦντας, καθάπερ καὶ Ἀναξαγόρας. Οὐθεὶς γὰρ τῶν οὕτως ἀξιούντων ὀρθῶς λαμβάνει τὸ στοιχεῖον ὁρῶμεν γὰρ πολλὰ καὶ τῶν μικτῶν σωμάτων εἰς ὁμοιομερῆ διαιρούμενα, λέγω δ' οἷον σάρκα καὶ ὀστοῦν καὶ ξύλον καὶ λίθον. Ὥστ' εἴπερ τὸ σύνθετον οὐκ ἔστι στοιχεῖον, οὐχ ἅπαν ἔσται τὸ ὁμοιομερὲς στοιχεῖον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἀδιαίρετον εἰς ἕτερα τῷ εἴδει, καθάπερ εἴρηται πρότερον.
Ἔτι δ' οὐδ' οὕτως λαμβάνοντας τὸ στοιχεῖον ἀνάγκη ποιεῖν ἄπειρα πάντα γὰρ ταὐτὰ ἀποδοθήσεται καὶ πεπερασμένων ὄντων, ἐάν τις λάβῃ τὸ αὐτὸ γὰρ ποιήσει, κἂν δύο ἢ τρία μόνον ᾖ τοιαῦτα, καθάπερ ἐγχειρεῖ καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς. Ἐπεὶ γὰρ καὶ ὣς αὐτοῖς συμβαίνει μὴ πάντα ποιεῖν ἐξ ὁμοιομερῶν (πρόσωπον γὰρ οὐκ ἐκ προσώπων ποιοῦσιν, οὐδ' ἄλλο τῶν κατὰ φύσιν ἐσχηματισμένων οὐθέν), φανερὸν ὅτι πολλῷ βέλτιον πεπερασμένας ποιεῖν τὰς ἀρχάς, καὶ ταύτας ὡς ἐλαχίστας πάντων γε τῶν αὐτῶν μελλόντων δείκνυσθαι, καθάπερ ἀξιοῦσι καὶ οἱ ἐν τοῖς μαθήμασιν ἀεὶ γὰρ πεπερασμένας λαμβάνουσιν ἀρχὰς ἢ τῷ εἴδει ἢ τῷ ποσῷ.
Ἔτι εἰ σῶμα σώματος ἕτερον λέγεται κατὰ τὰς οἰκείας διαφοράς, αἱ δὲ τῶν σωμάτων διαφοραὶ πεπερασμέναι (δια(303a.) φέρουσι γὰρ τοῖς αἰσθητοῖς, ταῦτα δὲ πεπέρανται δεῖ δὲ τοῦτο δειχθῆναι), φανερὸν ὅτι καὶ τὰ στοιχεῖα ἀνάγκη πεπερασμένα εἶναι.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ὡς ἕτεροί τινες λέγουσιν, οἷον Λεύκιππός τε καὶ Δημόκριτος ὁ Ἀβδηρίτης, εὔλογα τὰ συμβαίνοντα φασὶ γὰρ εἶναι τὰ π��ῶτα μεγέθη πλήθει μὲν ἄπειρα, μεγέθει δὲ ἀδιαίρετα, καὶ οὔτ' ἐξ ἑνὸς πολλὰ γίγνεσθαι οὔτε ἐκ πολλῶν ἕν, ἀλλὰ τῇ τούτων συμπλοκῇ καὶ περιπαλάξει πάντα γεννᾶσθαι. Τρόπον γάρ τινα καὶ οὗτοι πάντα τὰ ὄντα ποιοῦσιν ἀριθμοὺς καὶ ἐξ ἀριθμῶν καὶ γὰρ εἰ μὴ σαφῶς δηλοῦσιν, ὅμως τοῦτο βούλονται λέγειν.
Καὶ πρὸς τούτοις, ἐπεὶ διαφέρει τὰ σώματα σχήμασιν, ἄπειρα δὲ τὰ σχήματα, ἄπειρα καὶ τὰ ἁπλᾶ σώματά φασιν εἶναι. Ποῖον δὲ καὶ τί ἑκάστου τὸ σχῆμα τῶν στοιχείων, οὐθὲν ἐπιδιώρισαν, ἀλλὰ μόνον τῷ πυρὶ τὴν σφαῖραν ἀπέδωκαν ἀέρα δὲ καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ τἆλλα μεγέθει καὶ μικρότητι διεῖλον, ὡς οὖσαν αὐτῶν τὴν φύσιν οἷον πανσπερμίαν πάντων τῶν στοιχείων.
Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν ταὐτὸν καὶ τούτοις ἁμάρτημα τὸ μὴ πεπερασμένας λαβεῖν τὰς ἀρχάς, ἐξὸν ἅπαντα ταὐτὰ λέγειν.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ μὴ ἄπειροι τῶν σχημάτων αἱ διαφοραί, δῆλον ὅτι οὐκ ἔσται τὰ στοιχεῖα ἄπειρα.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἀνάγκη μάχεσθαι ταῖς μαθηματικαῖς ἐπιστήμαις ἄτομα σώματα λέγοντας, καὶ πολλὰ τῶν ἐνδόξων καὶ τῶν φαινομένων κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν ἀναιρεῖν, περὶ ὧν εἴρηται πρότερον ἐν τοῖς περὶ χρόνου καὶ κινήσεως.
Ἅμα δὲ καὶ ἐναντία λέγειν αὐτοὺς αὑτοῖς ἀνάγκη ἀδύνατον γὰρ ἀτόμων ὄντων τῶν στοιχείων μεγέθει καὶ μικρότητι διαφέρειν ἀέρα καὶ γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ οὐ γὰρ οἷόν τ' ἐξ ἀλλήλων γίγνεσθαι ὑπολείψει γὰρ ἀεὶ τὰ μέγιστα σώματα ἐκκρινόμενα, φασὶ δ' οὕτω γίγνεσθαι ὕδωρ καὶ ἀέρα καὶ γῆν ἐξ ἀλλήλων.
Ἔτι οὐδὲ κατὰ τὴν τούτων ὑπόληψιν δόξειεν ἂν ἄπειρα γίγνεσθαι τὰ στοιχεῖα, εἴπερ τὰ μὲν σώματα διαφέρει σχήμασι, τὰ δὲ σχήματα πάντα σύγκειται ἐκ πυραμίδων, τὰ μὲν εὐθύγραμμα ἐξ εὐθυ(303b.) γράμμων, ἡ δὲ σφαῖρα ἐξ ὀκτὼ μορίων. Ἀνάγκη γὰρ εἶναί τινας ἀρχὰς τῶν σχημάτων. Ὥστε εἴτε μία εἴτε δύο εἴτε πλείους, καὶ τὰ ἁπλᾶ σώματα τοσαῦτα ἔσται τὸ πλῆθος.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ ἑκάστῳ μὲν τῶν στοιχείων ἐστί τις οἰκεία κίνησις, καὶ ἡ τοῦ ἁπλοῦ σώματος ἁπλῆ, μή εἰσι δ' αἱ ἁπλαῖ κινήσεις ἄπειροι διὰ τὸ μήτε τὰς ἁπλᾶς φορὰς πλείους εἶναι δυοῖν μήτε τοὺς τόπους ἀπείρους, οὐκ ἂν εἴη οὐδ' οὕτως ἄπειρα τὰ στοιχεῖα.
5
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἀνάγκη πεπεράνθαι τὰ στοιχεῖα, λοιπὸν σκέψασθαι πότερον πλείω ἔσται ἢ ἕν. Ἔνιοι γὰρ ἓν μόνον ὑποτίθενται, καὶ τοῦτο οἱ μὲν ὕδωρ, οἱ δ' ἀέρα, οἱ δὲ πῦρ, οἱ δ' ὕδατος μὲν λεπτότερον, ἀέρος δὲ πυκνότερον, ὃ περιέχειν φασὶ πάντας τοὺς οὐρανοὺς ἄπειρον ὄν.
Ὅσοι μὲν οὖν τὸ ἓν τοῦτο ποιοῦσιν ὕδωρ ἢ ἀέρα ἢ ὕδατος μὲν λεπτότερον, ἀέρος δὲ πυκνότερον, εἶτ' ἐκ τούτου μανότητι καὶ πυκνότητι τἆλλα γεννῶσιν, οὗτοι λανθάνουσιν αὐτοὶ αὑτοὺς ἄλλο τι πρότερον τοῦ στοιχείου ποιοῦντες ἔστι γὰρ ἡ μὲν ἐκ τῶν στοιχείων γένεσις σύνθεσις, ὥς φασιν, ἡ δ' εἰς τὰ στοιχεῖα διάλυσις, ὥστ' ἀνάγκη πρότερον εἶναι τῇ φύσει τὸ λεπτομερέστερον. Ἐπεὶ οὖν φασὶ πάντων τῶν σωμάτων τὸ πῦρ λεπτότατον εἶναι, πρῶτον ἂν εἴη τῇ φύσει τὸ πῦρ διαφέρει δ' οὐθέν, ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἕν τι τῶν ἄλλων εἶναι πρῶτον, καὶ μὴ τὸ μέσον.
Ἔτι δὲ τὸ μὲν πυκνότητι καὶ μανότητι τἆλλα γεννᾶν οὐθὲν διαφέρει ἢ λεπτότητι καὶ παχύτητι τὸ μὲν γὰρ λεπτὸν μανόν, τὸ δὲ παχὺ βούλονται εἶναι πυκνόν. Πάλιν δὲ τὸ λεπτότητι καὶ παχύτητι ταὐτὸν καὶ τὸ μεγέθει καὶ μικρότητι λεπτὸν μὲν γὰρ τὸ μικρομερές, παχὺ δὲ τὸ μεγαλομερές τὸ γὰρ ἐπεκτεινόμενον ἐπὶ πολὺ λεπτόν, τοιοῦτον δὲ τὸ ἐκ μικρῶν μερῶν συνεστός, ὥστ' αὐτοῖς συμβαίνει μεγέθει καὶ μικρότητι διαιρεῖν τὴν τῶν ἄλλων οὐσίαν. Οὕτω δὲ διοριζομένοις ἅπαντα συμβήσεται λέγειν πρός τι, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ἁπλῶς τὸ μὲν πῦρ τὸ δ' ὕδωρ τὸ δ' ἀήρ, ἀλλὰ τὸ αὐτὸ πρὸς μὲν τόδε (304a.) πῦρ, πρὸς δέ τι ἄλλο ἀήρ, ὅπερ συμβαίνει καὶ τοῖς πλείω μὲν τὰ στοιχεῖα λέγουσι, μεγέθει δὲ καὶ μικρότητι διαφέρειν φάσκουσιν ἐπεὶ γὰρ τῷ ποσῷ διώρισται ἕκαστον, ἔσται τις λόγος πρὸς ἄλληλα τῶν μεγεθῶν, ὥστε τὰ τοῦτον ἔχοντα τὸν λόγον πρὸς ἄλληλα ἀνάγκη τὸ μὲν ἀέρα εἶναι τὸ δὲ πῦρ τὸ δὲ γῆν τὸ δ' ὕδωρ, διὰ τὸ ἐνυπάρχειν ἐν τοῖς μείζοσι τοὺς τῶν ἐλαττόνων λόγους.
Ὅσοι δὲ πῦρ ὑποτίθενται τὸ στοιχεῖον, τοῦτο μὲν διαφεύγουσιν, ἄλλα δ' αὐτοῖς ἀναγκαῖον ἄλογα συμβαίνειν.
Οἱ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν σχῆμα περιάπτουσι τῷ πυρί, καθάπερ οἱ τὴν πυραμίδα ποιοῦντες, καὶ τούτων οἱ μὲν ἁπλουστέρως λέγοντες ὅτι τῶν μὲν σχημάτων τμητικώτατον ἡ πυραμίς, τῶν δὲ σωμάτων τὸ πῦρ, οἱ δὲ κομψοτέρως τῷ λόγῳ προσάγοντες ὅτι τὰ μὲν σώματα πάντα σύγκειται ἐκ τοῦ λεπτομερεστάτου, τὰ δὲ σχήματα τὰ στερεὰ ἐκ πυραμίδων, ὥστ' ἐπεὶ τῶν μὲν σωμάτων τὸ πῦρ λεπτότατον, τῶν δὲ σχημάτων ἡ πυραμὶς μικρομερέστατον καὶ πρῶτον, τὸ δὲ πρῶτον σχῆμα τοῦ πρώτου σώματος, πυραμὶς ἂν εἴη τὸ πῦρ.
Οἱ δὲ περὶ μὲν σχήματος οὐδὲν ἀποφαίνονται, λεπτομερέστατον δὲ μόνον ποιοῦσιν, ἔπειτ' ἐκ τούτου συντιθεμένου φασὶ γίγνεσθαι τἆλλα καθάπερ ἂν εἰ συμφυσωμένου ψήγματος.
Ἀμφοτέροις δὲ ταὐτὰ συμβαίνει δυσχερῆ εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἄτομον τὸ πρῶτον σῶμα ποιοῦσι, πάλιν ἥξουσιν οἱ πρότερον εἰρημένοι λόγοι πρὸς ταύτην τὴν ὑπόθεσιν.
Ἔτι οὐκ ἐνδέχεται τοῦτο λέγειν φυσικῶς βουλομένοις θεωρεῖν. Εἰ γὰρ ἅπαν σῶμα σώματι συμβλητὸν κατὰ τὸ ποσόν, ἔχει δ' ἀνάλογον τὰ μεγέθη τά τε τῶν ὁμοιομερῶν πρὸς ἄλληλα καὶ τὰ τῶν στοιχείων (οἷον τὰ τοῦ παντὸς ὕδατος πρὸς τὸν ἅπαντα ἀέρα καὶ τοῦ στοιχείου πρὸς τὸ στοιχεῖον, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων), ὁ δ' ἀὴρ πλείων τοῦ ὕδατος καὶ ὅλως τὸ λεπτομερέστερον τοῦ παχυμερεστέρου, φανερὸν ὅτι καὶ τὸ στοιχεῖον ἔλαττον ἔσται τὸ τοῦ ὕδατος ἢ τὸ τοῦ ἀέρος. Εἰ οὖν τὸ ἔλαττον μέγεθος ἐνυπάρχει τῷ μείζονι, διαιρετὸν ἂν εἴη τὸ τοῦ ἀέρος (304b.) στοιχεῖον. Ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ τὸ τοῦ πυρὸς καὶ ὅλως τῶν λεπτομερεστέρων.
Εἰ δὲ διαιρετόν, τοῖς μὲν σχηματίζουσι τὸ πῦρ συμβήσεται μὴ εἶναι τὸ τοῦ πυρὸς μέρος πῦρ διὰ τὸ μὴ συγκεῖσθαι τὴν πυραμίδα ἐκ πυραμίδων, ἔτι δὲ μὴ πᾶν σῶμα εἶναι ἢ στοιχεῖον ἢ ἐκ στοιχείων (τὸ γὰρ μέρος τοῦ πυρὸς οὔτε πῦρ οὔθ' ἕτερον στοιχεῖον οὐδέν) τοῖς δὲ τῷ μεγέθει διορίζουσι πρότερόν τι τοῦ στοιχείου στοιχεῖον εἶναι, καὶ τοῦτ' εἰς ἄπειρον βαδίζειν, εἴπερ ἅπαν σῶμα διαιρετὸν καὶ τὸ μικρομερέστατον στοιχεῖον.
Ἔτι δὲ καὶ τούτοις συμβαίνει λέγειν ὡς ταὐτὸν πρὸς μὲν τόδε πῦρ ἐστι, πρὸς ἄλλο δ' ἀήρ, καὶ πάλιν ὕδωρ καὶ γῆ.
Κοινὸν δὲ πᾶσιν ἁμάρτημα τοῖς ἓν τὸ στοιχεῖον ὑποτιθεμένοις τὸ μίαν μόνην κίνησιν ποιεῖν φυσικήν, καὶ πάντων τὴν αὐτήν. Ὁρῶμεν γὰρ πᾶν τὸ φυσικὸν σῶμα κινήσεως ἔχον ἀρχήν. Εἰ οὖν ἅπαντα τὰ σώματα ἕν τί ἐστι, πάντων ἂν εἴη μία κίνησις καὶ ταύτην ἀναγκαῖον ὥσῳπερ ἂν πλείω γίγνηται, κινεῖσθαι μᾶλλον, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ πῦρ ὅσῳ ἂν πλεῖον γίγνηται, φέρεται θᾶττον ἄνω τὴν αὑτοῦ φοράν. Συμβαίνει δὲ πολλὰ κάτω φέρεσθαι θᾶττον.
Ὥστε διά τε ταῦτα καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ἐπεὶ διώρισται πρότερον ὅτι πλείους αἱ φυσικαὶ κινήσεις, δῆλον ὅτι ἀδύνατον ἓν εἶναι τὸ στοιχεῖον. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ οὔτε ἄπειρα οὔτε ἕν, ἀνάγκη πλείω εἶναι καὶ πεπερασμένα.
6
Ἐπισκεπτέον δὲ πρῶτον πότερον ἀΐδιά ἐστιν ἢ γινόμενα φθείρεται τούτου γὰρ δειχθέντος φανερὸν ἔσται καὶ πόσ' ἄττα καὶ ποῖά ἐστιν. Ἀΐδια μὲν οὖν εἶναι ἀδύνατον ὁρῶμεν γὰρ καὶ πῦρ καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ἁπλῶν σωμάτων διαλυόμενον. Ἀνάγκη δὲ ἢ ἄπειρον εἶναι ἢ ἵστασθαι τὴν διάλυσιν. Εἰ μὲν οὖν ἄπειρος, ἔσται καὶ ὁ χρόνος ὁ τῆς διαλύσεως ἄπειρος, καὶ πάλιν ὁ τῆς συνθέσεως ἕκαστον γὰρ ἐν ἄλλῳ χρόνῳ διαλύεται καὶ συντίθεται τῶν μορίων.
Ὥστε συμβήσεται ἔξω τοῦ ἀπείρου χρόνου ἄλλον εἶναι ἄπειρον, ὅταν ὅ τε τῆς συνθέσεως ἄπειρος ᾖ καὶ ἔτι πρότερος τούτου ὁ τῆς διαλύσεως. Ὥστε τοῦ ἀπείρου ἔξω γίγνεται ἄπειρον (305a.) ὅπερ ἀδύνατον.
Εἰ δὲ στήσεταί που ἡ διάλυσις, ἤτοι ἄτομον ἔσται τὸ σῶμα ἐν ᾧ ἵσταται, ἢ διαιρετὸν μὲν οὐ μέντοι διαιρεθησόμενον οὐδέποτε, καθάπερ ἔοικεν Ἐμπεδοκλῆς βούλεσθαι λέγειν.
Ἄτομον μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἔσται διὰ τοὺς πρότερον εἰρημένους λόγους ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ διαιρετὸν μὲν οὐδέποτε δὲ διαλυθησόμενον. Τὸ γὰρ ἔλαττον σῶμα τοῦ μείζονος εὐφθαρτότερόν ἐστιν. Εἴπερ οὖν καὶ τὸ πολὺ φθείρεται κατὰ ταύτην τὴν φθοράν, ὥστε διαλύεσθαι εἰς ἐλάττω, ἔτι μᾶλλον τοῦτο πάσχειν εὔλογον τὸ ἔλαττον. Δύο δὲ τρόπους ὁρῶμεν φθειρόμενον τὸ πῦρ ὑπό τε γὰρ τοῦ ἐναντίου φθείρεται σβεννύμενον, καὶ αὐτὸ ὑφ' αὑτοῦ μαραινόμενον. Τοῦτο δὲ πάσχει τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ πλείονος, καὶ θᾶττον, ὅσῳ ἂν ᾖ ἔλαττον. Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη φθαρτὰ καὶ γενητὰ εἶναι τὰ στοιχεῖα τῶν σωμάτων.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἐστὶ γενητά, ἤτοι ἐξ ἀσωμάτου ἢ ἐκ σώματος ἔσται ἡ γένεσις, καὶ εἰ ἐκ σώματος, ἤτοι ἐξ ἄλλου ἢ ἐξ ἀλλήλων.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν ἐξ ἀσωμάτου γεννῶν λόγος ποιεῖ κεχωρισμένον κενόν. Πᾶν γὰρ τὸ γινόμενον <�ἔν τινι γίγνεται καὶ> ἤτοι ἀσώματον ἔσται ἐν ᾧ ἡ γένεσις, ἢ ἕξει σῶμα καὶ εἰ μὲν ἕξει σῶμα, δύο ἅμα ἔσται σώματα ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ, τό τε γιγνόμενον καὶ τὸ προϋπάρχον εἰ δ' ἀσώματον, ἀνάγκη κενὸν εἶναι ἀφωρισμένον τοῦτο δ' ὅτι ἀδύνατον, δέδεικται πρότερον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἐκ σώματός τινος ἐγχωρεῖ γίνεσθαι τὰ στοιχεῖα συμβήσεται γὰρ ἄλλο σῶμα πρότερον εἶναι τῶν στοιχείων. Τοῦτο δ' εἰ μὲν ἕξει βάρος ἢ κουφότητα, τῶν στοιχείων ἔσται τι, μηδεμίαν δ' ἔχον ῥοπὴν ἀκίνητον ἔσται καὶ μαθηματικόν τοιοῦτον δὲ ὂν οὐκ ἔσται ἐν τόπῳ. Ἐν ᾧ γὰρ ἠρεμεῖ, ἐν τούτῳ καὶ κινεῖσθαι δυνατόν. Καὶ εἰ μὲν βίᾳ, παρὰ φύσιν, εἰ δὲ μὴ βίᾳ, κατὰ φύσιν. Εἰ μὲν οὖν ἔσται ἐν τόπῳ καί που, ἔσται τι τῶν στοιχείων εἰ δὲ μὴ ἐν τόπῳ, οὐδὲν ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔσται τὸ γὰρ γινόμενον, καὶ ἐξ οὗ γίγνεται, ἀνάγκη ἅμα εἶναι.
Ἐπεὶ δ' οὔτε ἐξ ἀσωμάτου γίγνεσθαι δυνατὸν οὔτ' ἐξ ἄλλου σώματος, λείπεται ἐξ ἀλλήλων γίγνεσθαι.
7
Πάλιν οὖν ἐπισκεπτέον τίς ὁ τρόπος τῆς ἐξ ἀλλήλων γενέσεως, πότερον ὡς Ἐμπεδοκλῆς λέγει καὶ Δημόκριτος, ἢ ὡς οἱ εἰς τὰ ἐπίπεδα διαλύοντες, ἢ ἔστιν ἄλλος τις τρόπος (305b.) παρὰ τούτους.
Οἱ μὲν οὖν περὶ Ἐμπεδοκλέα καὶ Δημόκριτον λανθάνουσιν αὐτοὶ αὑτοὺς οὐ γένεσιν ἐξ ἀλλήλων ποιοῦντες, ἀλλὰ φαινομένην γένεσιν ἐνυπάρχον γὰρ ἕκαστον ἐκκρίνεσθαί φασιν, ὥσπερ ἐξ ἀγγείου τῆς γενέσεως οὔσης, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἔκ τινος ὕλης, οὐδὲ γίγνεσθαι μεταβάλλοντος.
Ἔπειτα κἂν οὕτως οὐδὲν ἧττον ἄλογα τὰ συμβαίνοντα. Τὸ γὰρ αὐτὸ μέγεθος οὐ δοκεῖ συμπιληθὲν γίνεσθαι βαρύτερον. Ἀνάγκη δὲ τοῦτο λέγειν τοῖς φάσκουσιν ἐκκρίνεσθαι τὸ ὕδωρ ἐκ τοῦ ἀέρος ἐνυπάρχον ὅταν γὰρ ὕδωρ ἐξ ἀέρος γένηται, βαρύτερόν ἐστιν.
Ἔτι δὲ τῶν μεμιγμένων σωμάτων οὐκ ἀνάγκη χωρισθὲν θάτερον ἀεὶ πλείω τόπον ἐπέχειν ὅταν δ' ἐξ ὕδατος ἀὴρ γένηται, πλείω καταλαμβάνει τόπον τὸ γὰρ λεπτομερέστερον ἐν πλείονι τόπῳ γίγνεται. Φανερὸν δὲ τοῦτό γε καὶ ἐν τῇ μεταβάσει διατμιζομένου γὰρ καὶ πνευματουμένου τοῦ ὑγροῦ ῥήγνυται τὰ περιέχοντα τοὺς ὄγκους ἀγγεῖα διὰ τὴν στενοχωρίαν. Ὥστ' εἰ μὲν ὅλως μή ἐστι κενὸν μηδ' ἐπεκτείνεται τὰ σώματα, καθάπερ φασὶν οἱ ταῦτα λέγοντες, φανερὸν τὸ ἀδύνατον εἰ δ' ἔστι κενὸν καὶ ἐπέκτασις, ἄλογον τὸ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἀεὶ πλείω τόπον ἐπιλαμβάνειν τὸ χωριζόμενον.
Ἀνάγκη δὲ καὶ ὑπολείπειν τὴν ἐξ ἀλλήλων γένεσιν, εἴπερ ἐν τῷ πεπερασμένῳ μεγέθει μὴ ἐνυπάρχει ἄπειρα πεπερασμένα. Ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ γῆς ὕδωρ γένηται, ἀφῄρηταί τι τῆς γῆς, εἴπερ ἐκκρίσει ἡ γένεσις καὶ πάλιν ὅταν ἐκ τῆς ὑπολειπομένης, ὡσαύτως. Εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀεὶ τοῦτ' ἔσται, συμβήσεται ἐν τῷ πεπερασμένῳ ἄπειρα ἐνυπάρχειν ἐπεὶ δὲ τοῦτ' ἀδύνατον, οὐκ ἂν ἀεὶ γίγνοιτο ἐξ ἀλλήλων. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἔστι τῇ ἐκκρίσει ἡ εἰς ἄλληλα μετάβασις, εἴρηται.
Λείπεται δ' εἰς ἄλληλα μεταβάλλοντα γίγνεσθαι. Τοῦτο δὲ διχῶς ἢ γὰρ τῇ μετασχηματίσει, καθάπερ ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ κηροῦ γίγνοιτ' ἂν σφαῖρα καὶ κύβος, ἢ τῇ διαλύσει τῇ εἰς τὰ ἐπίπεδα, ὥσπερ ἔνιοί φασιν.
Εἰ μὲν οὖν τῇ μετασχηματίσει γίνεται, συμβαίνει ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἄτομα λέγειν τὰ σώματα διαιρετῶν γὰρ ὄντων οὐκ ἔσται τὸ τοῦ πυρὸς μέρος πῦρ, οὐδὲ τὸ τῆς γῆς γῆ, διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι μήτε τὸ τῆς πυραμίδος μέρος πάντως πυραμίδα μήτε τὸ τοῦ κύβου (306a.) κύβον.
Εἰ δὲ τῇ τῶν ἐπιπέδων διαλύσει, πρῶτον μὲν ἄτοπον τὸ μὴ πάντα γεννᾶν ἐξ ἀλλήλων, ὅπερ ἀνάγκη λέγειν αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγουσιν. Οὔτε γὰρ εὔλογον ἓν μόνον ἄμοιρον γενέσθαι τῆς μεταβάσεως, οὔτε φαίνεται κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν, ἀλλ' ὁμοίως πάντα μεταβάλλειν εἰς ἄλληλα. Συμβαίνει δὲ περὶ τῶν φαινομένων λέγουσι μὴ ὁμολογούμενα λέγειν τοῖς φαινομένοις. Τούτου δ' αἴτιον τὸ μὴ καλῶς λαβεῖν τὰς πρώτας ἀρχάς, ἀλλὰ πάντα βούλεσθαι πρός τινας δόξας ὡρισμένας ἀνάγειν. Δεῖ γὰρ ἴσως τῶν μὲν αἰσθητῶν αἰσθητάς, τῶν δὲ ἀϊδίων ἀϊδίους, τῶν δὲ φθαρτῶν φθαρτὰς εἶναι τὰς ἀρχάς, ὅλως δ' ὁμογενεῖς τοῖς ὑποκειμένοις. Οἱ δὲ διὰ τὴν τούτων φιλίαν ταὐτὸ ποιεῖν ἐοίκασι τοῖς τὰς θέσεις ἐν τοῖς λόγοις διαφυλάττουσιν ἅπαν γὰρ ὑπομένουσι τὸ συμβαῖνον ὡς ἀληθεῖς ἔχοντες ἀρχάς, ὥσπερ οὐκ ἐνίας δέον κρίνειν ἐκ τῶν ἀποβαινόντων, καὶ μάλιστα ἐκ τοῦ τέλους.
Τέλος δὲ τῆς μὲν ποιητικῆς ἐπιστήμης τὸ ἔργον, τῆς δὲ φυσικῆς τὸ φαινόμενον ἀεὶ κυρίως κατὰ τὴν αἴσθησιν. Συμβαίνει δ' αὐτοῖς μάλιστα τὴν γῆν εἶναι στοιχεῖον, καὶ μόνην ἄφθαρτον, εἴπερ τὸ ἀδιάλυτον ἄφθαρτόν τ' ἐστὶ καὶ στοιχεῖον ἡ γὰρ γῆ μόνη ἀδιάλυτος εἰς ἄλλο σῶμα.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδ' ἐν τοῖς διαλυομένοις ἡ τῶν τριγώνων παραιώρησις εὔλογος. Συμβαίνει δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ἐν τῇ εἰς ἄλληλα μεταβάσει διὰ τὸ ἐξ ἀνίσων τῷ πλήθει συνεστάναι τριγώνων.
Ἔτι δ' ἀνάγκη τοῖς ταῦτα λέγουσιν οὐκ ἐκ σώματος ποιεῖν γένεσιν ὅταν γὰρ ἐξ ἐπιπέδων γένηται, οὐκ ἐκ σώματος ἔσται γεγονός.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις ἀνάγκη μὴ πᾶν σῶμα λέγειν διαιρετόν, ἀλλὰ μάχεσθαι ταῖς ἀκριβεστάταις ἐπιστήμαις αἱ μὲν γὰρ καὶ τὸ νοητὸν λαμβάνουσι διαιρετόν, αἱ μαθηματικαί, οἱ δὲ οὐδὲ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἅπαν συγχωροῦσι διὰ τὸ βούλεσθαι σῴζειν τὴν ὑπόθεσιν. Ἀνάγκη γὰρ ὅσοι σχῆμα ποιοῦσιν ἑκάστου τῶν στοιχείων καὶ τούτῳ διορίζουσι τὰς οὐσίας αὐτῶν, ἀδιαίρετα ποιεῖν αὐτά τῆς γὰρ πυραμίδος ἢ τῆς σφαίρας διαιρεθείσης πως οὐκ ἔσται τὸ λειπόμενον σφαῖρα ἢ πυραμίς.
Ὥστε ἢ τὸ τοῦ πυρὸς μέρος οὐ πῦρ, ἀλλ' ἔσται τι πρότερον τοῦ (306b.) στοιχείου, διὰ τὸ πᾶν εἶναι ἢ στοιχεῖον ἢ ἐκστοιχείων ἢ οὐχ ἅπαν σῶμα διαιρετόν.
8
Ὅλως δὲ τὸ πειρᾶσθαι τὰ ἁπλᾶ σώματα σχηματίζειν ἄλογόν ἐστι, πρῶτον μὲν ὅτι συμβήσεται μὴ ἀναπληροῦσθαι τὸ ὅλον ἐν μὲν γὰρ τοῖς ἐπιπέδοις τρία σχήματα δοκεῖ συμπληροῦν τὸν τόπον, τρίγωνον καὶ τετράγωνον καὶ ἑξάγωνον, ἐν δὲ τοῖς στερεοῖς δύο μόνον, πυραμὶς καὶ κύβος ἀνάγκη δὲ πλείω τούτων λαμβάνειν διὰ τὸ πλείω τὰ στοιχεῖα ποιεῖν.
Ἔπειτα φαίνεται πάντα μὲν τὰ ἁπλᾶ σώματα σχηματιζόμενα τῷ περιέχοντι τόπῳ, μάλιστα δὲ τὸ ὕδωρ καὶ ὁ ἀήρ. Διαμένειν μὲν οὖν τὸ τοῦ στοιχείου σχῆμα ἀδύνατον οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἥπτετο πανταχῇ τοῦ περιέχοντος τὸ ὅλον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἰ μεταρρυθμισθήσεται, οὐκέτι ἔσται ὕδωρ, εἴπερ τῷ σχήματι διέφερεν. Ὥστε φανερὸν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ὡρισμένα τὰ σχήματα αὐτῶν.
Ἀλλ' ἔοικεν ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ τοῦτο σημαίνειν ἡμῖν, ὃ καὶ κατὰ λόγον ἐστίν ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀειδὲς καὶ ἄμορφον δεῖ τὸ ὑποκείμενον εἶναι (μάλιστα γὰρ ἂν οὕτω δύναιτο ῥυθμίζεσθαι, καθάπερ ἐν τῷ Τιμαίῳ γέγραπται, τὸ πανδεχές), οὕτω καὶ τὰ στοιχεῖα δεῖ νομίζειν ὥσπερ ὕλην εἶναι τοῖς συνθέτοις διὸ καὶ δύναται μεταβάλλειν εἰς ἄλληλα χωριζομένων τῶν κατὰ τὰ πάθη διαφορῶν.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις πῶς ἐνδέχεται γίγνεσθαι σάρκα καὶ ὀστοῦν ἢ ὁτιοῦν τῶν συνεχῶν σωμάτων; οὔτε γὰρ ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν στοιχείων ἐγχωρεῖ διὰ τὸ μὴ γίγνεσθαι συνεχὲς ἐκ τῆς συνθέσεως, οὔτ' ἐκ τῶν ἐπιπέδων συντιθεμένων τὰ γὰρ στοιχεῖα γεννᾶται τῇ συνθέσει καὶ οὐ τὰ ἐκ τῶν στοιχείων. Ὥστ' ἐάν τις ἀκριβολογεῖσθαι βούληται καὶ μὴ ἐκ παρόδου τοὺς λόγους ἀποδέχεσθαι τοὺς τοιούτους, ἀναιροῦντας ὄψεται τὴν γένεσιν ἐκ τῶν ὄντων.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ πρὸς τὰ πάθη τε καὶ τὰς δυνάμεις καὶ τὰς κινήσεις ἀσύμφωνα τὰ σχήματα τοῖς σώμασιν, εἰς ἃ μάλιστα βλέψαντες οὕτω διένειμαν. Οἷον ἐπεὶ τὸ πῦρ εὐκίνητόν ἐστι καὶ θερμαντικὸν καὶ καυστικόν, οἱ μὲν ἐποίησαν αὐτὸ σφαῖραν, οἱ δὲ πυραμίδα ταῦτα γὰρ εὐκινητότατα μὲν διὰ τὸ ἐλαχίστων ἅπτεσθαι καὶ ἥκι(307a.) στα βεβηκέναι, θερμαντικώτατα δὲ καὶ καυστικώτατα, διότι τὸ μὲν ὅλον ἐστὶ γωνία, τὸ δὲ ὀξυγωνιώτατον, καίει δὲ καὶ θερμαίνει ταῖς γωνίαις, ὥς φασιν.
Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν κατὰ τὴν κίνησιν ἀμφότεροι διημαρτήκασιν εἰ γὰρ καὶ ἔστιν εὐκινητότατα ταῦτα τῶν σχημάτων, ἀλλ' οὐ τὴν τοῦ πυρὸς κίνησιν εὐκίνητα ἡ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ πυρὸς ἄνω καὶ κατ' εὐθεῖαν, ταῦτα δ' εὐκίνητα κύκλῳ, τὴν καλουμένην κύλισιν. Ἔπειτ' εἰ ἔστιν ἡ γῆ κύβος διὰ τὸ βεβηκέναι καὶ μένειν, μένει δ' οὐχ οὗ ἔτυχεν ἀλλ' ἐν τῷ αὑτῆς τόπῳ, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ἀλλοτρίου φέρεται μὴ κωλυομένη, καὶ τὸ πῦρ δὲ καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ὡσαύτως, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ τὸ πῦρ καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν στοιχείων ἐν μὲν τῷ ἀλλοτρίῳ τόπῳ σφαῖρα ἔσται ἢ πυραμίς, ἐν δὲ τῷ οἰκείῳ κύβος.
Ἔτι δ' εἰ θερμαίνει καὶ καίει τὸ πῦρ διὰ τὰς γωνίας, ἅπαντα ἔσται τὰ στοιχεῖα θερμαντικά, μᾶλλον δ' ἴσως ἕτερον ἑτέρου πάντα γὰρ ἔχει γωνίας, οἷον τό τε ὀκτάεδρον καὶ τὸ δωδεκάεδρον. (Δημοκρίτῳ δὲ καὶ ἡ σφαῖρα, ὡς γωνία τις οὖσα, τέμνει ὡς εὐκίνητον).
Ὥστε διοίσει τῷ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον. Τοῦτο δ' ὅτι ψεῦδος, φανερόν. Ἅμα δὲ συμβήσεται καὶ τὰ μαθηματικὰ σώματα καίειν καὶ θερμαίνειν ἔχει γὰρ κἀκεῖνα γωνίας, καὶ ἔνεισιν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἄτομοι καὶ σφαῖραι καὶ πυραμίδες, ἄλλως τε καὶ εἰ ἔστιν ἄτομα μεγέθη, καθάπερ φασίν. Εἰ γὰρ τὰ μὲν τὰ δὲ μή, λεκτέον τὴν διαφοράν, ἀλλ' οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὕτω λεκτέον ὡς λέγουσιν.
Ἔτι εἰ τὸ καιόμενον πυροῦται, τὸ δὲ πῦρ ἐστι σφαῖρα ἢ πυραμίς, ἀνάγκη τὸ καιόμενον γίγνεσθαι σφαίρας ἢ πυραμίδας. Τὸ μὲν οὖν τέμνειν καὶ διαιρεῖν ἔστω κατὰ λόγον συμβαῖνον τῷ σχήματι τὸ δ' ἐξ ἀνάγκης τὴν πυραμίδα ποιεῖν πυραμίδας ἢ τὴν σφαῖραν σφαίρας παντελῶς ἄλογον, καὶ ὅμοιον ὥσπερ εἴ τις ἀξιοίη τὴν μάχαιραν εἰς μαχαίρας διαιρεῖν ἢ τὸν πρίονα εἰς πρίονας.
Ἔτι δὲ γελοῖον πρὸς τὸ διαιρεῖν μόνον ἀποδοῦναι τὸ σχῆμα τῷ πυρί δοκεῖ γὰρ μᾶλλον συγκρίνειν καὶ συνορίζειν ἢ διακρίνειν. Διακρίνει μὲν γὰρ τὰ μὴ (307b.) ὁμόφυλα, συγκρίνει δὲ τὰ ὁμόφυλα καὶ ἡ μὲν σύγκρισις καθ' αὑτό ἐστι (τὸ γὰρ συνορίζειν καὶ ἑνοῦν τοῦ πυρός), ἡ δὲ διάκρισις κατὰ συμβεβηκός (συγκρῖνον γὰρ τὸ ὁμόφυλον ἐξαιρεῖ τὸ ἀλλότριον). Ὥστ' ἢ πρὸς ἄμφω ἐχρῆν ἀποδοῦναι ἢ μᾶλλον ἐπὶ τὸ συγκρίνειν.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις, ἐπεὶ τὸ θερμὸν καὶ τὸ ψυχρὸν ἐναντία τῇ δυνάμει, ἀδύνατον ἀποδοῦναι τῷ ψυχρῷ σχῆμά τι δεῖ γὰρ ἐναντίον εἶναι τὸ ἀποδιδόμενον, οὐθὲν δ' ἐναντίον ἐστὶ σχῆμα σχήματι. Διὸ καὶ πάντες ἀπολελοίπασι τοῦτο καίτοι προσῆκεν ἢ πάντα ἀφορίσαι σχήμασιν ἢ μηδέν. Ἔνιοι δὲ περὶ τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ πειραθέντες εἰπεῖν ἐναντία λέγουσιν αὐτοὶ αὑτοῖς.
Φασὶ γὰρ εἶναι ψυχρὸν τὸ μεγαλομερὲς διὰ τὸ συνθλίβειν καὶ μὴ διιέναι διὰ τῶν πόρων. Δῆλον τοίνυν ὅτι καὶ τὸ θερμὸν ἂν εἴη τὸ διιόν τοιοῦτον δ' ἀεὶ τὸ λεπτομερές. Ὥστε συμβαίνει μικρότητι καὶ μεγέθει διαφέρειν τὸ θερμὸν καὶ τὸ ψυχρόν, ἀλλ' οὐ τοῖς σχήμασιν. Ἔτι δ' εἰ ἄνισοι αἱ πυραμίδες, αἱ μεγάλαι ἂν εἶεν οὐ πῦρ οὐδ' αἴτιον τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ καίειν, ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον.
Ὅτι μὲν οὖν οὐ τοῖς σχήμασι διαφέρει τὰ στοιχεῖα, φανερὸν ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων ἐπεὶ δὲ κυριώταται διαφοραὶ τῶν σωμάτων αἵ τε κατὰ τὰ πάθη καὶ τὰ ἔργα καὶ τὰς δυνάμεις (ἑκάστου γὰρ εἶναί φαμεν τῶν φύσει καὶ ἔργα καὶ πάθη καὶ δυνάμεις), πρῶτον ἂν εἴη περὶ τούτων λεκτέον, ὅπως θεωρήσαντες ταῦτα λάβωμεν τὰς ἑκάστου πρὸς ἕκαστον διαφοράς.
BOOK 4
1
Περὶ δὲ βαρέος καὶ κούφου, τί τ' ἐστὶν ἑκάτερον καὶ τίς ἡ φύσις αὐτῶν, σκεπτέον, καὶ διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν ἔχουσι τὰς δυνάμεις ταύτας. Ἔστι γὰρ ἡ περὶ αὐτῶν θεωρία τοῖς περὶ κινήσεως λόγοις οἰκεία βαρὺ γὰρ καὶ κοῦφον τῷ δύνασθαι κινεῖσθαι φυσικῶς πως λέγομεν. (Ταῖς δὲ ἐνεργείαις ὀνόματ' αὐτῶν οὐ κεῖται, πλὴν εἴ τις οἴοιτο τὴν ῥοπὴν εἶναι τοιοῦτον.) (308a.) Διὰ δὲ τὸ τὴν φυσικὴν μὲν εἶναι πραγματείαν περὶ κίνησιν, ταῦτα δ' ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς οἷον ζώπυρ' ἄττα κινήσεως, πάντες μὲν χρῶνται ταῖς δυνάμεσιν αὐτῶν, οὐ μὴν διωρίκασί γε, πλὴν ὀλίγων.
Ἰδόντες οὖν πρῶτον τὰ παρὰ τῶν ἄλλων εἰρημένα, καὶ διαπορήσαντες ὅσα πρὸς τὴν σκέψιν ταύτην διελεῖν ἀναγκαῖον, οὕτω καὶ τὸ φαινόμενον ἡμῖν εἴπωμεν περὶ αὐτῶν.
Λέγεται δὴ τὸ μὲν ἁπλῶς βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον, τὸ δὲ πρὸς ἕτερον τῶν γὰρ ἐχόντων βάρος φαμὲν τὸ μὲν εἶναι κουφότερον, τὸ δὲ βαρύτερον, οἷον ξύλου χαλκόν. Περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν ἁπλῶς λεγομένων οὐδὲν εἴρηται παρὰ τῶν πρότερον, περὶ δὲ τῶν πρὸς ἕτερον οὐ γὰρ λέγουσι τί ἐστι τὸ βαρὺ καὶ τί τὸ κοῦφον, ἀλλὰ τί τὸ βαρύτερον καὶ κουφότερον ἐν τοῖς ἔχουσι βάρος. Μᾶλλον δ' ἔσται δῆλον ὃ λέγομεν ὧδε. Τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἀεὶ πέφυκεν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου φέρεσθαι, τὰ δ' ἀεὶ πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Τούτων δὲ τὸ μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ μέσου φερόμενον ἄνω λέγω φέρεσθαι, κάτω δὲ τὸ πρὸς τὸ μέσον.
Ἄτοπον γὰρ τὸ μὴ νομίζειν εἶναί τι ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ τὸ μὲν ἄνω τὸ δὲ κάτω, καθάπερ τινὲς ἀξιοῦσιν οὐ γὰρ εἶναι τὸ μὲν ἄνω τὸ δὲ κάτω φασίν, εἴπερ πάντῃ ὅμοιός ἐστι, καὶ πανταχόθεν ἀντίπους ἔσται πορευόμενος ἕκαστος αὐτὸς αὑτῷ. Ἡμεῖς δὲ τὸ τοῦ παντὸς ἔσχατον ἄνω λέγομεν, ὃ καὶ κατὰ τὴν θέσιν ἐστὶν ἄνω καὶ τῇ φύσει πρῶτον ἐπεὶ δ' ἐστί τι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔσχατον καὶ μέσον, δῆλον ὅτι ἔσται καὶ ἄνω καὶ κάτω, ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ πολλοὶ λέγουσι, πλὴν οὐχ ἱκανῶς.
Τούτου δ' αἴτιον ὅτι νομίζουσιν οὐχ ὅμοιον εἶναι πάντῃ τὸν οὐρανόν, ἀλλ' ἓν εἶναι μόνον τὸ ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς ἡμισφαίριον, ἐπεὶ προσυπολαβόντες καὶ κύκλῳ τοιοῦτον, καὶ τὸ μέσον ὁμοίως ἔχειν πρὸς ἅπαν, τὸ μὲν ἄνω φήσουσιν εἶναι, τὸ δὲ μέσον κάτω.
Ἁπλῶς μὲν οὖν κοῦφον λέγομεν τὸ ἄνω φερόμενον καὶ πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον, βαρὺ δὲ ἁπλῶς τὸ κάτω καὶ πρὸς τὸ μέσον πρὸς ἄλλο δὲ κοῦφον καὶ κουφότερον, ὅτε, δυοῖν ἐχόντων βάρος καὶ τὸν ὄγκον ἴσον, κάτω φέρεται θάτερον φύσει θᾶττον.
2
Τῶν δὴ πρότερον ἐλθόντων ἐπὶ τὴν περὶ τούτων σκέψιν σχεδὸν οἱ πλεῖστοι περὶ τῶν οὕτω βαρέων καὶ κούφων εἰρήκασι μόνον, ὅσων ἀμφοτέρων ἐχόντων βάρος θάτερόν ἐστι (308b.) κουφότερον οὕτω δὲ διελθόντες οἴονται διωρίσθαι καὶ περὶ τοῦ ἁπλῶς κούφου καὶ βαρέος ὁ δὲ λόγος αὐτοῖς οὐκ ἐφαρμόττει. Δῆλον δ' ἔσται τοῦτο μᾶλλον προελθοῦσιν.
Λέγουσι γὰρ τὸ κουφότερον καὶ βαρύτερον οἱ μὲν ὥσπερ ἐν τῷ Τιμαίῳ τυγχάνει γεγραμμένον, βαρύτερον μὲν τὸ ἐκ πλειόνων τῶν αὐτῶν συνεστός, κουφότερον δὲ τὸ ἐξ ἐλαττόνων, ὥσπερ μολίβδου μόλιβδος ὁ πλείων βαρύτερος καὶ χαλκοῦ χαλκός. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τῶν ὁμοειδῶν ἕκαστον ἐν ὑπεροχῇ γὰρ τῶν ἴσων μορίων βαρύτερον ἕκαστόν ἐστιν. Τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ ξύλου μόλιβδόν φασιν ἔκ τινων γὰρ τῶν αὐτῶν εἶναι πάντα τὰ σώματα καὶ μιᾶς ὕλης, ἀλλ' οὐ δοκεῖν.
Οὕτω δὴ διωρισμένων οὐκ εἴρηται περὶ τοῦ ἁπλῶς κούφου καὶ βαρέος νῦν γὰρ τὸ μὲν πῦρ ἀεὶ κοῦφον καὶ ἄνω φέρεται, ἡ δὲ γῆ καὶ τὰ γεηρὰ πάντα κάτω καὶ πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Ὥστ' οὐ δι' ὀλιγότητα τῶν τριγώνων, ἐξ ὧν συνεστάναι φασὶν ἕκαστον αὐτῶν, τὸ πῦρ ἄνω φέρεσθαι πέφυκεν τό τε γὰρ πλεῖον ἧττον ἂν ἐφέρετο καὶ βαρύτερον ἦν ἐκ πλειόνων ὂν τριγώνων. Νῦν δὲ φαίνεται τοὐναντίον ὅσῳ γὰρ ἂν ᾖ πλεῖον, κουφότερόν ἐστι καὶ ἄνω φέρεται θᾶττον. Καὶ ἄνωθεν δὲ κάτω τὸ ὀλίγον οἰσθήσεται θᾶττον πῦρ, τὸ δὲ πολὺ βραδύτερον.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις, ἐπεὶ τὸ μὲν ἐλάσσω ἔχον τὰ ὁμογενῆ κουφότερον εἶναί φασι, τὸ δὲ πλείω βαρύτερον, ἀέρα δὲ καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ πῦρ ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν εἶναι τριγώνων, ἀλλὰ διαφέρειν ὀλιγότητι καὶ πλήθει, διὸ τὸ μὲν αὐτῶν εἶναι κουφότερον τὸ δὲ βαρύτερον, ἔσται τι πλῆθος ἀέρος ὃ βαρύτερον ὕδατος ἔσται. Συμβαίνει δὲ πᾶν τοὐναντίον ἀεί τε γὰρ ὁ πλείων ἀὴρ ἄνω φέρεται μᾶλλον, καὶ ὅλως ὁτιοῦν μέρος ἀέρος ἄνω φέρεται ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος.
Οἱ μὲν οὖν τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον περὶ κούφου καὶ βαρέος διώρισαν τοῖς δ' οὐχ ἱκανὸν ἔδοξεν οὕτω διελεῖν, ἀλλὰ καίπερ ὄντες ἀρχαιότεροι ταῖς ἡλικίαις καινοτέρως ἐνόησαν περὶ τῶν νῦν λεχθέντων. Φαίνεται γὰρ ἔνια τὸν ὄγκον μὲν ἐλάττω τῶν σωμάτων, ὄντα δὲ βαρύτερα. Δῆλον οὖν ὡς οὐχ ἱκανὸν τὸ φάσκειν ἐξ ἴσων συγκεῖσθαι τῶν πρώτων τὰ ἰσοβαρῆ ἴσα γὰρ ἂν ἦν τὸν ὄγκον. Τὰ δὲ πρῶτα καὶ ἄτομα τοῖς μὲν ἐπίπεδα λέγουσιν ἐξ ὧν συνέστηκε τὰ βάρος ἔχοντα (309a.) τῶν σωμάτων, ἄτοπον τὸ φάναι τοῖς δὲ στερεὰ μᾶλλον ἐνδέχεται λέγειν τὸ μεῖζον εἶναι βαρύτερον αὐτῶν. Τῶν δὲ συνθέτων, ἐπειδήπερ οὐ φαίνεται τοῦτον ἕκαστον ἔχειν τὸν τρόπον, ἀλλὰ πολλὰ βαρύτερα ὁρῶμεν ἐλάττω τὸν ὄγκον ὄντα, καθάπερ ἐρίου χαλκόν, ἕτερον τὸ αἴτιον οἴονταί τε καὶ λέγουσιν ἔνιοι τὸ γὰρ κενὸν ἐμπεριλαμβανόμενον κουφίζειν τὰ σώματά φασι καὶ ποιεῖν ἔστιν ὅτε τὰ μείζω κουφότερα πλεῖον γὰρ ἔχειν κενόν. Διὰ τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ τὸν ὄγκον εἶναι μείζω συγκείμενα πολλάκις ἐξ ἴσων στερεῶν ἢ καὶ ἐλαττόνων. Ὅλως δὲ καὶ παντὸς αἴτιον εἶναι τοῦ κουφοτέρου τὸ πλεῖον ἐνυπάρχειν κενόν.
Λέγουσι μὲν οὖν τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, ἀνάγκη δὲ προσθεῖναι τοῖς οὕτω διορίζουσι μὴ μόνον τὸ κενὸν ἔχειν πλεῖον, ἂν ᾖ κουφότερον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ στερεὸν ἔλαττον εἰ γὰρ ὑπερέξει τῆς τοιαύτης ἀναλογίας, οὐκ ἔσται κουφότερον. Διὰ γὰρ τοῦτο καὶ τὸ πῦρ εἶναί φασι κουφότατον, ὅτι πλεῖστον ἔχει κενόν. Συμβήσεται οὖν μικροῦ πυρὸς πολὺν χρυσὸν πλεῖον ἔχοντα τὸ κενὸν εἶναι κουφότερον, εἰ μὴ καὶ στερεὸν ἕξει πολλαπλάσιον ὥστε τοῦτο λεκτέον.
Ἔνιοι μὲν οὖν τῶν μὴ φασκόντων εἶναι κενὸν οὐδὲν διώρισαν περὶ κούφου καὶ βαρέος, οἷον Ἀναξαγόρας καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς οἱ δὲ διορίσαντες μέν, οὐ φάσκοντες δὲ εἶναι κενόν, οὐδὲν εἶπον διὰ τί τὰ μὲν ἁπλῶς κοῦφα τὰ δὲ βαρέα τῶν σωμάτων, καὶ φέρεται τὰ μὲν ἀεὶ ἄνω τὰ δὲ κάτω, οὐδὲ περὶ τοῦ ἔνια μείζω τὸν ὄγκον ὄντα κουφότερα τῶν ἐλαττόνων εἶναι σωμάτων οὐδὲν ἐπεμνήσθησαν, οὐδὲ δῆλον πῶς ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων ὁμολογούμενα τοῖς φαινομένοις συμβήσεται λέγειν αὐτοῖς.
Ἀναγκαῖον δὲ καὶ τοῖς περὶ τῆς τοῦ πυρὸς κουφότητος αἰτιωμένοις τὸ πολὺ κενὸν ἔχειν σχεδὸν ἐν ταῖς αὐταῖς ἐνέχεσθαι δυσχερείαις. Ἔλαττον μὲν γὰρ ἕξει στερεὸν τῶν ἄλλων σωμάτων, καὶ τὸ κενὸν πλεῖον ἀλλ' ὅμως ἔσται τι πυρὸς πλῆθος ἐν ᾧ τὸ στερεὸν καὶ τὸ πλῆρες ὑπερβάλλει τῶν περιεχομένων στερεῶν ἔν τινι μικρῷ πλήθει γῆς. Ἐὰν δὲ φῶσι καὶ τὸ κενόν, πῶς διοριοῦσι τὸ ἁπλῶς βαρύ; Ἢ γὰρ τῷ πλεῖον στερεὸν ἔχειν ἢ τῷ ἔλαττον κενόν. Εἰ μὲν οὖν τοῦτο (309b.) φήσουσιν, ἔσται τι πλῆθος γῆς οὕτως ὀλίγον ἐν ᾧ στερεὸν ἔσται ἔλαττον ἢ ἐν πολλῷ πλήθει πυρός. Ὁμοίως δὲ κἂν τῷ κενῷ διορίσωσιν, ἔσται τι κουφότερον τοῦ ἁπλῶς κούφου καὶ φερομένου ἀεὶ ἄνω αὐτὸ φερόμενον ἀεὶ κάτω. Τοῦτο δὲ ἀδύνατον τὸ γὰρ ἁπλῶς κοῦφον ἀεὶ κουφότερον τῶν ἐχόντων βάρος καὶ κάτω φερομένων, τὸ δὲ κουφότερον οὐκ ἀεὶ κοῦφον διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἔχουσι βάρος ἕτερον ἑτέρου κουφότερον, οἷον γῆς ὕδωρ.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν οὐδὲ τῷ τὸ κενὸν ἀνάλογον ἔχειν πρὸς τὸ πλῆρες ἱκανὸν λῦσαι τὴν λεγομένην νῦν ἀπορίαν. Συμβήσεται γὰρ καὶ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον λέγουσιν ὡσαύτως τὸ ἀδύνατον. Ἐν γὰρ τῷ πλείονι πυρὶ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἐλάττονι τὸν αὐτὸν ἕξει λόγον τὸ στερεὸν πρὸς τὸ κενόν. Φέρεται δέ γε θᾶττον τὸ πλεῖον ἄνω πῦρ τοῦ ἐλάττονος, καὶ κάτω δὲ πάλιν ὡσαύτως ὁ πλείων χρυσὸς καὶ ὁ μόλιβδος ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἕκαστον τῶν ἐχόντων βάρος. Οὐκ ἔδει δὲ τοῦτο συμβαίνειν, εἴπερ τούτῳ διώρισται τὸ βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον.
Ἄτοπον δὲ καὶ εἰ διὰ τὸ κενὸν μὲν ἄνω φέρονται, τὸ δὲ κενὸν αὐτὸ μή. Ἀλλὰ μὴν εἴ γε τὸ μὲν κενὸν ἄνω πέφυκε φέρεσθαι, κάτω δὲ τὸ πλῆρες, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τοῖς ἄλλοις αἴτια τῆς φορᾶς ἑκατέρας, οὐθὲν περὶ τῶν συνθέτων ἔδει σκοπεῖν διὰ τί τὰ μὲν κοῦφα τὰ δὲ βαρέα τῶν σωμάτων, ἀλλὰ περὶ τούτων αὐτῶν εἰπεῖν διὰ τί τὸ μὲν κοῦφον, τὸ δ' ἔχει βάρος, ἔτι δὲ τί τὸ αἴτιον τοῦ μὴ διεστάναι τὸ πλῆρες καὶ τὸ κενόν.
Ἄλογον δὲ καὶ τὸ χώραν τῷ κενῷ ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ οὐκ αὐτὸ χώραν τινὰ οὖσαν ἀναγκαῖον δ', εἴπερ κινεῖται τὸ ��ενόν, εἶναι αὐτοῦ τινα τόπον, ἐξ οὗ μεταβάλλει καὶ εἰς ὅν.
Πρὸς δὲ τούτοις τί τῆς κινήσεως αἴτιον; Οὐ γὰρ δὴ τό γε κενόν οὐ γὰρ αὐτὸ κινεῖται μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ στερεόν.
Ὡσαύτως δὲ συμβαίνει κἄν τις ἄλλως διορίζῃ, μεγέθει καὶ σμικρότητι ποιῶν βαρύτερα καὶ κουφότερα ρων, κἂν ἄλλον ὁντινοῦν τρόπον κατασκευάζων, μόνον δὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὕλην ἅπασιν ἀποδιδούς, ἢ πλείους μὲν ὑπεναντίας δὲ μόνον.
Μιᾶς μὲν γὰρ οὔσης οὐκ ἔσται τὸ ἁπλῶς βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον, ὥσπερ τοῖς ἐκ τῶν τριγώνων συνιστᾶσιν ἐναντίας δέ, (310a.) καθάπερ οἱ τὸ κενὸν καὶ πλῆρες, οὐκ ἔσται τὰ μεταξὺ τῶν ἁπλῶς βαρέων καὶ κούφων διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν βαρύτερα καὶ κουφότερα ἀλλήλων καὶ τῶν ἁπλῶν ἐστιν.
Τὸ δὲ μεγέθει καὶ μικρότητι διορίζειν πεπλασμένῳ μὲν ἔοικε μᾶλλον τῶν πρότερον, ὅτι δ' ἐνδέχεται καθ' ἕκαστον ποιεῖν διαφορὰς τῶν τεττάρων στοιχείων, ἀσφαλεστέρως ἔχει πρὸς τὰς ἔμπροσθεν ἀπορίας.
Τῷ δὲ μίαν ποιεῖν φύσιν τῶν τῷ μεγέθει διαφερόντων ἀναγκαῖον ταὐτὸν συμβαίνειν τοῖς μίαν ποιοῦσιν ὕλην, καὶ μήθ' ἁπλῶς εἶναι μηθὲν κοῦφον μήτε φερόμενον ἄνω, ἀλλ' ἢ ὑστερίζον ἢ ἐκθλιβόμενον, καὶ πολλὰ μικρὰ ὀλίγων μεγάλων βαρύτερα εἶναι. Εἰ δὲ τοῦτο ἔσται, συμβήσεται πολὺν ἀέρα καὶ πολὺ πῦρ ὕδατος εἶναι βαρύτερα καὶ γῆς ὀλίγης. Τοῦτο δ' ἐστὶν ἀδύνατον.
3
Τὰ μὲν οὖν παρὰ τῶν ἄλλων εἰρημένα ταῦτα, καὶ τοῦτον λέγεται τὸν τρόπον.
Ἡμεῖς δὲ λέγωμεν πρῶτον διορίσαντες περὶ οὗ μάλιστα ἀποροῦσί τινες, διὰ τί τὰ μὲν ἄνω φέρεται τὰ δὲ κάτω τῶν σωμάτων ἀεὶ κατὰ φύσιν, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἄνω καὶ κάτω, μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα περὶ βαρέος καὶ κούφου καὶ τῶν συμβαινόντων περὶ αὐτὰ παθημάτων, διὰ τίν' αἰτίαν ἕκαστον γίνεται.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν τοῦ φέρεσθαι εἰς τὸν αὑτοῦ τόπον ἕκαστον ὁμοίως ὑποτῶν ἑτέληπτέον ὥσπερ καὶ περὶ τὰς ἄλλας γενέσεις καὶ μεταβολάς. Ἐπεὶ γάρ εἰσι τρεῖς αἱ κινήσεις (ἡ μὲν κατὰ μέγεθος, ἡ δὲ κατ' εἶδος, ἡ δὲ κατὰ τόπον), ἐν ἑκάστῃ τούτων τὴν μεταβολὴν ὁρῶμεν γινομένην ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων εἰς τὰ ἐναντία καὶ τὰ μεταξύ, καὶ οὐκ εἰς τὸ τυχὸν τῷ τυχόντι μεταβολὴν οὖσαν ὁμοίως δὲ οὐδὲ κινητικὸν τὸ τυχὸν τοῦ τυχόντος ἀλλ' ὥσπερ τὸ ἀλλοιωτὸν καὶ τὸ αὐξητὸν ἕτερον, οὕτω καὶ τὸ ἀλλοιωτικὸν καὶ τὸ αὐξητικόν. Τὸν αὐτὸν δὴ τρόπον ὑποληπτέον καὶ τὸ κατὰ τόπον κινητικὸν καὶ κινητὸν οὐ τὸ τυχὸν εἶναι τοῦ τυχόντος.
Εἰ οὖν εἰς τὸ ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω κινητικὸν μὲν τὸ βαρυντικὸν καὶ τὸ κουφιστικόν, κινητὸν δὲ τὸ δυνάμει βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον, τὸ δ' εἰς τὸν αὑτοῦ τόπον φέρεσθαι ἕκαστον τὸ εἰς τὸ αὑτοῦ εἶδός ἐστι φέρε(310b.) σθαι (καὶ ταύτῃ μᾶλλον ἄν τις ὑπολάβοι ὃ ἔλεγον οἱ ἀρχαῖοι, ὅτι τὸ ὅμοιον φέροιτο πρὸς τὸ ὅμοιον. Τοῦτο γὰρ οὐ συμβαίνει πάντως οὐ γὰρ ἐάν τις μεταθῇ τὴν γῆν οὗ νῦν ἡ σελήνη, οἰσθήσεται τῶν μορίων ἕκαστον πρὸς αὐτήν, ἀλλ' ὅπου περ καὶ νῦν. Ὅλως μὲν οὖν τοῖς ὁμοίοις καὶ ἀδιαφόροις ὑπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κινήσεως ἀνάγκη τοῦτο συμβαίνειν, ὥσθ' ὅπου πέφυκεν ἕν τι φέρεσθαι μόριον, καὶ τὸ πᾶν. Ἐπεὶ δ' ὁ τόπος ἐστὶ τὸ τοῦ περιέχοντος πέρας, περιέχει δὲ πάντα τὰ κινούμενα ἄνω καὶ κάτω τό τε ἔσχατον καὶ τὸ μέσον, τοῦτο δὲ τρόπον τινὰ γίγνεται τὸ εἶδος τοῦ περιεχομένου, τὸ εἰς τὸν αὑτοῦ τόπον φέρεσθαι πρὸς τὸ ὅμοιόν ἐστι φέρεσθαι τὰ γὰρ ἐφεξῆς ὅμοιά ἐστιν ἀλλήλοις, οἷον ὕδωρ ἀέρι καὶ ἀὴρ πυρί. Ἀνάπαλιν δὲ λέγειν τοῖς μέσοις ἔστι, τοῖς δ' ἄκροις οὔ, οἷον ἀέρα μὲν ὕδατι, ὕδωρ δὲ γῇ ἀεὶ γὰρ τὸ ἀνώτερον πρὸς τὸ ὑφ' αὑτὸ, ὡς εἶδος πρὸς ὕλην, οὕτως ἔχει πρὸς ἄλληλα), τὸ δὲ ζητεῖν διὰ τί φέρεται τὸ πῦρ ἄνω καὶ ἡ γῆ κάτω, τὸ αὐτό ἐστι καὶ διὰ τί τὸ ὑγιαστὸν ἂν κινῆται καὶ μεταβάλλῃ ᾗ ὑγιαστόν, εἰς ὑγίειαν ἔρχεται ἀλλ' οὐκ εἰς λευκότητα. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τἆλλα πάντα τὰ ἀλλοιωτά. Ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τὸ αὐξητὸν ὅταν μεταβάλλῃ ᾗ αὐξητόν, οὐκ εἰς ὑγίειαν ἔρχεται ἀλλ' εἰς μεγέθους ὑπεροχήν. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τούτων ἕκαστον τὸ μὲν ἐν τῷ ποιῷ, τὸ δ' ἐν τῷ ποσῷ μεταβάλλει, καὶ ἐν τόπῳ τὰ μὲν κοῦφα ἄνω, τὰ δὲ βαρέα κάτω.
Πλὴν ὅτι τὰ μὲν ἐν αὑτοῖς δοκεῖ ἔχειν ἀρχὴν τῆς μεταβολῆς (λέγω δὲ τὸ βαρὺ καὶ τὸ κοῦφον), τὰ δ' οὔ, ἀλλ' ἔξωθεν, οἷον τὸ ὑγιαστὸν καὶ τὸ αὐξητόν. Καίτοι ἐνίοτε καὶ ταῦτα ἐξ αὑτῶν μεταβάλλει, καὶ μικρᾶς γενομένης ἐν τοῖς ἔξω κινήσεως τὸ μὲν εἰς ὑγίειαν ἔρχεται, τὸ δ' εἰς αὔξην καὶ ἐπεὶ ταὐτὸν τὸ ὑγιαστὸν καὶ τὸ νόσου δεκτικόν, ἐὰν μὲν κινηθῇ ᾗ ὑγιαστόν, εἰς ὑγίειαν φέρεται, ἐὰν δ' ᾗ νοσερόν, εἰς νόσον.
Μᾶλλον δὲ τὸ βαρὺ καὶ τὸ κοῦφον τούτων ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἔχειν φαίνεται τὴν ἀρχὴν διὰ τὸ ἐγγύτατα τῆς οὐσίας εἶναι τὴν τούτων ὕλην σημεῖον δ' ὅτι ἡ φορὰ ἀπολελυμένων ἐστί, καὶ γενέσει ὑστάτη τῶν κινήσεων, ὥστε πρώτη (311a.) ἂν εἴη κατὰ τὴν οὐσίαν αὕτη ἡ κίνησις. Ὅταν μὲν οὖν γίγνηται ἐξ ὕδατος ἀὴρ καὶ ἐκ βαρέος κοῦφον, ἔρχεται εἰς τὸ ἄνω.
Ἅμα δ' ἐστὶ κοῦφον, καὶ οὐκέτι γίνεται, ἀλλ' ἐκεῖ ἐστιν. Φανερὸν δὴ ὅτι δυνάμει ὄν, εἰς ἐντελέχειαν ἰὸν ἔρχεται ἐκεῖ καὶ εἰς τὸ τοσοῦτον καὶ τὸ τοιοῦτον, οὗ ἡ ἐντελέχεια καὶ ὅσου καὶ οἵου [καὶ ὅπου]. Τὸ δ' αὐτὸ αἴτιον καὶ τοῦ ἤδη ὑπάρχοντα καὶ ὄντα γῆν καὶ πῦρ κινεῖσθαι εἰς τοὺς αὑτῶν τόπους μηδενὸς ἐμποδίζοντος. Καὶ γὰρ ἡ τροφή, ὅταν τὸ κωλῦον, καὶ τὸ ὑγιαστόν, ὅταν τὸ ἐπίσχον μὴ ᾖ, φέρεται εὐθύς. Κινεῖ δὲ τό τε ἐξ ἀρχῆς ποιῆσαν καὶ τὸ ὑποσπάσαν ἢ ὅθεν ἀπεπήδησεν, καθάπερ εἴρηται ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις λόγοις, ἐν οἷς διωρίζομεν ὅτι οὐθὲν τούτων αὐτὸ ἑαυτὸ κινεῖ.
Διὰ τίνα μὲν οὖν αἰτίαν φέρεται τῶν φερομένων ἕκαστον, καὶ τὸ φέρεσθαι εἰς τὸν αὑτοῦ τόπον τί ἐστιν, εἴρηται.
4
Τὰς δὲ διαφορὰς καὶ τὰ συμβαίνοντα περὶ αὐτὰ νῦν λέγωμεν. Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν διωρίσθω, καθάπερ φαίνεται πᾶσι, βαρὺ μὲν ἁπλῶς τὸ πᾶσιν ὑφιστάμενον, κοῦφον δὲ τὸ πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζον. Ἁπλῶς δὲ λέγω εἴς τε τὸ γένος βλέπων, καὶ ὅσοις μὴ ἀμφότερα ὑπάρχει οἷον φαίνεται πυρὸς μὲν τὸ τυχὸν μέγεθος ἄνω φερόμενον, ἐὰν μή τι τύχῃ κωλῦον ἕτερον, γῆς δὲ κάτω τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον καὶ θᾶττον τὸ πλεῖον.
Ἄλλως δὲ βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον, οἷς ἀμφότερα ὑπάρχει καὶ γὰρ ἐπιπολάζουσί τισι καὶ ὑφίστανται, καθάπερ ἀὴρ καὶ ὕδωρ ἁπλῶς μὲν γὰρ οὐδέτερον τούτων κοῦφον ἢ βαρύ γῆς μὲν γὰρ ἄμφω κουφότερα (ἐπιπολάζει γὰρ αὐτῇ τὸ τυχὸν αὐτῶν μόριον), πυρὸς δὲ βαρύτερα (ὑφίσταται γὰρ αὐτῶν ὁπόσον ἂν ᾖ μόριον), πρὸς ἑαυτὰ δὲ ἁπλῶς τὸ μὲν βαρὺ τὸ δὲ κοῦφον ἀὴρ μὲν γὰρ ὁπόσος ἂν ᾖ, ἐπιπολάζει ὕδατι, ὕδωρ δὲ ὁπόσον ἂν ᾖ, ἀέρι ὑφίσταται.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὰ μὲν ἔχει βάρος τὰ δὲ κουφότητα, δῆλον ὅτι τούτων μὲν αἰτία πάντων ἡ ἐν τοῖς ἀσυνθέτοις διαφορά κατὰ γὰρ τὸ ἐκείνων τετυχηκέναι τοῦ μὲν πλεῖον τοῦ δ' ἔλαττον, ἔσται τὰ μὲν κοῦφα τὰ δὲ βαρέα τῶν σωμάτων. Ὥστε περὶ ἐκείνων λεκτέον τἆλλα γὰρ ἀκολουθεῖ τοῖς πρώτοις, ὅπερ ἔφαμεν χρῆναι ποιεῖν καὶ τοὺς διὰ τὸ πλῆρες τὸ βαρὺ λέγοντας (311b.) καὶ διὰ τὸ κενὸν τὸ κοῦφον.
Συμβαίνει δὴ μὴ πανταχοῦ ταὐτὰ βαρέα δοκεῖν εἶναι καὶ κοῦφα διὰ τὴν τῶν πρώτων διαφοράν λέγω δ' οἷον ἐν μὲν ἀέρι βαρύτερον ἔσται ταλαντιαῖον ξύλον μολίβδου μναϊαίου, ἐν δὲ ὕδατι κουφότερον αἴτιον δ' ὅτι πάντα βάρος ἔχει πλὴν πυρὸς καὶ κουφότητα πλὴν γῆς.
Γῆν μὲν οὖν καὶ ὅσα γῆς ἔχει πλεῖστον, πανταχοῦ βάρος ἔχειν ἀναγκαῖον, ὕδωρ δὲ πανταχοῦ πλὴν ἐν γῇ, ἀέρα δὲ πλὴν ἐν ὕδατι καὶ γῇ ἐν τῇ αὑτοῦ γὰρ χώρᾳ πάντα βάρος ἔχει πλὴν πυρός, καὶ ὁ ἀήρ. Σημεῖον δ' ὅτι ἕλκει πλεῖον ὁ πεφυσημένος ἀσκὸς τοῦ κενοῦ. Ὥστ' εἴ τι ἀέρος ἔχει πλεῖον ἢ γῆς καὶ ὕδατος, ἐν μὲν ὕδατι ἐνδέχεται κουφότερον εἶναί τινος, ἐν δὲ ἀέρι βαρύτερον ἀέρι μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἐπιπολάζει, τῷ δὲ ὕδατι ἐπιπολάζει.
Ὅτι δ' ἐστί τι ἁπλῶς κοῦφον καὶ ἁπλῶς βαρύ, ἐκ τῶνδ' ἐστὶ φανερόν. Λέγω δ' ἁπλῶς κοῦφον ὃ ἀεὶ ἄνω καὶ βαρὺ ὃ ἀεὶ κάτω πέφυκε φέρεσθαι μὴ κωλυόμενον τοιαῦτα γάρ ἐστί τινα, καὶ οὐχ ὥσπερ οἴονταί τινες πάντ' ἔχειν βάρος βαρὺ μὲν γὰρ δοκεῖ τισιν εἶναι καὶ ἑτέροις, καὶ ἀεὶ φέρεσθαι πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Ἔστι δ' ὁμοίως καὶ τὸ κοῦφον. Ὁρῶμεν γάρ, καθάπερ εἴρηται πρότερον, ὅτι τὰ γεηρὰ πᾶσιν ὑφίσταται καὶ φέρεται πρὸς τὸ μέσον. Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὥρισται τὸ μέσον. Εἰ τοίνυν ἐστί τι ὃ πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζει, καθάπερ φαίνεται τὸ πῦρ καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ ἀέρι ἄνω φερόμενον, ὁ δ' ἀὴρ ἡσυχάζων, δῆλον ὅτι τοῦτο φέρεται πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον. Ὥστε βάρος οὐδὲν οἷόν τ' ἔχειν αὐτό ὑφίστατο γὰρ ἂν ἄλλῳ εἰ δὲ τοῦτο, εἴη ἄν τι ἄλλο, ὃ φέρεται ἐπὶ τὸ ἔσχατον, ὃ πᾶσι τοῖς φερομένοις ἐπιπολάζει. Νῦν δ' οὐδὲν φαίνεται. Τὸ ἄρα πῦρ οὐδὲν ἔχει βάρος, οὐδὲ ἡ γῆ κουφότητα οὐδεμίαν, εἴπερ ὑφίσταται πᾶσι καὶ τὸ ὑφιστάμενον φέρεται ἐπὶ τὸ μέσον.
Ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι γ' ἐστὶ μέσον πρὸς ὃ ἡ φορὰ τοῖς ἔχουσι βάρος καὶ ἀφ' οὗ τοῖς κούφοις, δῆλον πολλαχόθεν.
Πρῶτον μὲν τῷ εἰς ἄπειρον μὴ ἐνδέχεσθαι φέρεσθαι μηθέν. Ὥσπερ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν οὐθὲν ἀδύνατον, οὕτως οὐδὲ γίγνεται ἡ δὲ φορὰ γένεσίς ποθέν ποι.
Ἔπειτα πρὸς ὁμοίας φαίνεται γωνίας τὸ μὲν πῦρ ἄνω φερόμενον, ἡ δὲ γῆ κάτω καὶ πᾶν τὸ βάρος ἔχον. Ὥστ' ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι (312a.) πρὸς τὸ μέσον. (Τοῦτο δὲ πότερον συμβαίνει πρὸς τὸ τῆς γῆς μέσον ἢ πρὸς τὸ τοῦ παντός, ἐπεὶ ταὐτὸν αὐτῶν ἐστιν, ἄλλος λόγος.) Ἐπεὶ δὲ τὸ πᾶσιν ὑφιστάμενον φέρεται πρὸς τὸ μέσον, ἀνάγκη τὸ πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζον φέρεσθαι πρὸς τὸ ἔσχατον τῆς χώρας, ἐν ᾗ ποιοῦνται ��ὴν κίνησιν ἐναντίον γὰρ τὸ μὲν μέσον τῷ ἐσχάτῳ, τὸ δὲ ὑφιστάμενον ἀεὶ τῷ ἐπιπολάζοντι.
Διὸ καὶ εὐλόγως τὸ βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον δύο ἐστίν καὶ γὰρ οἱ τόποι δύο, τὸ μέσον καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον.
Ἔστι δὲ δή τι καὶ μεταξὺ τούτων, ὃ πρὸς ἑκάτερον αὐτῶν λέγεται θάτερον ἔστι γὰρ ὡς ἔσχατον καὶ μέσον ἀμφοτέρων ἐστὶ τὸ μεταξύ διὰ τοῦτό ἐστί τι καὶ ἄλλο βαρὺ καὶ κοῦφον, οἷον ὕδωρ καὶ ἀήρ.
Φαμὲν δὲ τὸ μὲν περιέχον τοῦ εἴδους εἶναι, τὸ δὲ περιεχόμενον τῆς ὕλης. Ἔστι δ' ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς γένεσιν αὕτη ἡ διάστασις καὶ γὰρ ἐν τῷ ποιῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ ποσῷ ἐστι τὸ μὲν ὡς εἶδος μᾶλλον, τὸ δ' ὡς ὕλη. Καὶ ἐν τοῖς κατὰ τόπον ὡσαύτως τὸ μὲν ἄνω τοῦ ὡρισμένου, τὸ δὲ κάτω τῆς ὕλης.
Ὥστε καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὕλῃ τῇ τοῦ βαρέος καὶ κούφου, ᾗ μὲν τοιοῦτον δυνάμει, βαρέος ὕλη, ᾗ δὲ τοιοῦτον, κούφου καὶ ἔστι μὲν ἡ αὐτή, τὸ δ' εἶναι οὐ ταὐτόν, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ νοσερὸν καὶ τὸ ὑγιαστόν. Τὸ γὰρ εἶναι οὐ ταὐτόν διόπερ οὐδὲ τὸ νοσώδει εἶναι ἢ ὑγιεινῷ.
5
Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἔχον τοιαύτην ὕλην κοῦφον καὶ ἀεὶ ἄνω, τὸ δὲ τὴν ἐναντίαν βαρὺ καὶ ἀεὶ κάτω τὸ δ' ἑτέρας μὲν τούτων, ἐχούσας δ' οὕτω πρὸς ἀλλήλας ὡς αὗται ἁπλῶς, καὶ ἄνω καὶ κάτω [φερομένας] διὸ ἀὴρ καὶ ὕδωρ ἔχουσι καὶ κουφότητα καὶ βάρος ἑκάτερον, καὶ ὕδωρ μὲν πλὴν γῆς πᾶσιν ὑφίσταται, ἀὴρ δὲ πλὴν πυρὸς πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζει.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἐστὶν ἓν μόνον ὃ πᾶσιν ἐπιπολάζει καὶ ἓν ὃ πᾶσιν ὑφίσταται, ἀνάγκη δύο ἄλλα εἶναι ἃ καὶ ὑφίσταταί τινι καὶ ἐπιπολάζει τινί.
Ὥστε ἀνάγκη καὶ τὰς ὕλας τοσαύτας εἶναι ὅσαπερ ταῦτα, τέτταρας, οὕτω δὲ τέτταρας ὡς μίαν μὲν ἁπάντων τὴν κοινήν, ἄλλως τε καὶ εἰ γίγνονται ἐξ ἀλλήλων, ἀλλὰ τὸ εἶναι ἕτερον. Οὐδὲν γὰρ κωλύει τῶν (312b.) ἐναντίων εἶναι μεταξὺ καὶ ἓν καὶ πλείω, ὥσπερ ἐν χρώμασιν πολλαχῶς γὰρ λέγεται τὸ μεταξὺ καὶ τὸ μέσον.
Ἐν μὲν οὖν τῇ αὑτοῦ χώρᾳ τῶν ἐχόντων καὶ βάρος καὶ κουφότητα ἕκαστον ἔχει βάρος (ἡ δὲ γῆ ἐν ἅπασιν) κουφότητα δ' οὐκ ἔχει, ἀλλ' ἢ ἐν οἷς ἐπιπολάζει.
Διὸ καὶ ὑποσπωμένων μὲν φέρεται εἰς τὰ ἐφεξῆς κάτω, ἀὴρ μὲν εἰς τὴν τοῦ ὕδατος χώραν, ὕδωρ δὲ εἰς τὴν τῆς γῆς. Ἄνω δ' εἰς τὴν τοῦ πυρός, ἀναιρουμένου τοῦ πυρός, οὐκ οἰσθήσεται ὁ ἀήρ, εἰ μὴ βίᾳ, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ σπᾶται, ὅταν γένηται τὸ ἐπίπεδον ἓν καὶ θᾶττον σπάσῃ τις ἄνω τῆς φορᾶς, ἣν φέρεται τὸ ὕδωρ κάτω. Οὐδὲ τὸ ὕδωρ εἰς τὴν τοῦ ἀέρος, ἀλλ' ἢ ὡς νῦν εἴρηται. Ἡ γῆ δὲ τοῦτο οὐ πάσχει, ὅτι οὐχ ἓν τὸ ἐπίπεδον. Διὸ τὸ μὲν ὕδωρ εἰς τὸ ἀγγεῖον πυρωθὲν σπᾶται, γῆ δ' οὔ. Ὥσπερ δὲ οὐδ' ἡ γῆ ἄνω, οὐδὲ τὸ πῦρ κάτω εἶσιν ὑφαιρουμένου τοῦ ἀέρος οὐδὲν γὰρ ἔχει βάρος οὐδ' ἐν τῇ αὑτοῦ χώρᾳ, ὥσπερ οὐδ' ἡ γῆ κουφότητα. Φέρεται δὲ κάτω τὰ δύο ὑποσπωμένων, ὅτι τὸ μὲν ἁπλῶς βαρύ ἐστιν ὃ πᾶσιν ὑφίσταται, τὸ δὲ πρός τι βαρὺ ὂν εἰς τὴν αὑτοῦ χώραν ἢ οἷς ἐπιπολάζει, δι' ὁμοιότητα τῆς ὕλης.
Ὅτι δ' ἀναγκαῖον ποιεῖν ἴσας τὰς διαφορὰς αὐτοῖς, δῆλον. Εἰ μὲν γὰρ μία ὕλη πάντων, οἷον ἢ τὸ κενὸν ἢ τὸ πλῆρες ἢ τὸ μέγεθος ἢ τὰ τρίγωνα, ἢ πάντα ἄνω ἢ πάντα κάτω οἰσθήσεται, ἡ δὲ ἑτέρα φορὰ οὐκέτι ἔσται ὥστ' ἢ κοῦφον οὐδὲν ἔσται ἁπλῶς, εἰ πάντα ῥέπει μᾶλλον τῷ ἐκ μειζόνων εἶναι σωμάτων ἢ ἐκ πλειόνων ἢ ὅτι πλήρη (τοῦτο δὲ ὁρῶμέν τε, καὶ δέδεικται ὅτι ὁμοίως κάτω τε ἀεὶ καὶ πανταχοῦ φέρεται καὶ ἄνω) ἐὰν δὲ τὸ κενὸν ἤ τι τοιοῦτον ὃ ἀεὶ ἄνω, οὐκ ἔσται ὃ ἀεὶ κάτω. Καὶ τῶν μεταξὺ δὴ ἔνια ἔσται κάτω θᾶττον γῆς ἐν γὰρ τῷ πολλῷ ἀέρι τρίγωνα πλείω ἢ τὰ στερεὰ ἢ τὰ μικρὰ ἔσται. Οὐ φαίνεται δ' οὐδὲ ἓν μόριον ἀέρος κάτω φερόμενον. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ κούφου, ἐὰν ἐκεῖνο ποιῇ τις ὑπερέχειν τῇ ὕλῃ.
Ἐὰν δὲ δύο, τὰ μεταξὺ πῶς ἔσται ποιοῦντα ἃ ποιεῖ ἀήρ τε καὶ ὕδωρ; (Οἷον εἴ τις (313a.) φαίη εἶναι τὸ κενὸν καὶ πλῆρες τὸ μὲν οὖν πῦρ κενόν, διὸ ἄνω, τὴν δὲ γῆν πλῆρες, διὸ κάτω ἀέρα δὲ πλεῖον πυρὸς ἔχειν, ὕδωρ δὲ γῆς). Ἔσται γάρ τι ὕδωρ ὃ πλεῖον ἕξει πῦρ ὀλίγου ἀέρος, καὶ ἀὴρ πολὺς ὀλίγου ὕδατος γῆν πλείω, ὥστε δεήσει ἀέρος τι πλῆθος θᾶττον φέρεσθαι κάτω ὕδατος ὀλίγου. Τοῦτο δ' οὐ φαίνεται οὐδαμοῦ οὐδέποτε.
Ἀνάγκη τοίνυν, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ πῦρ ἄνω, ὅτι τοδὶ ἔχει, οἷον τὸ κενόν, τὰ δ' ἄλλα οὔ, καὶ τὴν γῆν κάτω, ὅτι τὸ πλῆρες ἔχει, καὶ τὸν ἀέρα εἰς τὴν αὑτοῦ καὶ ἀνώτερον τοῦ ὕδατος, ὅτι τοδί τι ἔχει, καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ κάτω, ὅτι τοιόνδε τι.
Εἰ δὲ ἦν ἕν τι ἄμφω ἢ δύο, ἄμφω δ' ὑπάρξει ταῦτα ἑκατέρῳ, ἔσται τι πλῆθος ἑκατέρου ὃ ὑπερέξει ὕδωρ τε ἀέρος ὀλίγου τῷ ἄνω καὶ ἀὴρ ὕδατος τῷ κάτω, καθάπερ εἴρηται πολλάκις.
6
Τὰ δὲ σχήματα οὐκ αἴτια τοῦ φέρεσθαι ἁπλῶς ἢ κάτω ἢ ἄνω, ἀλλὰ τοῦ θᾶττον ἢ βραδύτερον. Δι' ἃς δ' αἰτίας, οὐ χαλεπὸν ἰδεῖν ἀπορεῖται γὰρ νῦν διὰ τί τὰ πλατέα σιδήρια καὶ μόλιβδος ἐπιπλεῖ ἐπὶ τοῦ ὕδατος, ἄλλα δὲ ἐλάττω καὶ ἧττον βαρέα, ἂν ᾖ στρογγύλα ἢ μακρά, οἷον βελόνη, κάτω φέρεται, καὶ ὅτι ἔνια διὰ μικρότητα ἐπιπλεῖ, οἷον τὸ ψῆγμα καὶ ἄλλα γεώδη καὶ κονιορτώδη ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀέρος.
Περὶ δὴ τούτων ἁπάντων τὸ μὲν νομίζειν αἴτιον εἶναι ὥσπερ Δημόκριτος οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἔχει. Ἐκεῖνος γάρ φησι τὰ ἀναφερόμενα θερμὰ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος ἀνακωχεύειν (313b.) τὰ πλατέα τῶν ἐχόντων βάρος, τὰ δὲ στενὰ διαπίπτειν ὀλίγα γὰρ εἶναι τὰ ἀντικρούοντα αὐτοῖς.
Ἔδει δ' ἐν τῷ ἀέρι ἔτι μᾶλλον τοῦτο ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ ἐνίσταται κἀκεῖνος αὐτός.
Ἀλλ' ἐνστὰς λύει μαλακῶς φησὶ γὰρ οὐκ εἰς ἓν ὁρμᾶν τὸν σοῦν, λέγων τὸν σοῦν τὴν κίνησιν τῶν ἄνω φερομένων σωμάτων.
Ἐπεὶ δ' ἐστὶ τὰ μὲν εὐδιαίρετα τῶν συνεχῶν τὰ δ' ἧττον, καὶ διαιρετικὰ δὴ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον τὰ μὲν μᾶλλον τὰ δ' ἧττον, ταύτας εἶναι νομιστέον αἰτίας. Εὐδιαίρετον μὲν οὖν τὸ εὐόριστον, καὶ μᾶλλον τὸ μᾶλλον ἀὴρ δὲ μᾶλλον ὕδατος τοιοῦτον, ὕδωρ δὲ γῆς. Καὶ τὸ ἔλαττον δὴ ἐν ἑκάστῳ γένει εὐδιαιρετώτερον καὶ διασπᾶται ῥᾷον. Τὰ μὲν οὖν ἔχοντα πλάτος διὰ τὸ πολὺ περιλαμβάνειν ἐπιμένει, διὰ τὸ μὴ διασπᾶσθαι τὸ πλεῖον ῥᾳδίως τὰ δ' ἐναντίως ἔχοντα τοῖς σχήμασι διὰ τὸ ὀλίγον περιλαμβάνειν φέρεται κάτω, διὰ τὸ διαιρεῖν ῥᾳδίως. Καὶ ἐν ἀέρι πολὺ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ εὐδιαιρετώτερος ὕδατός ἐστιν.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ τό τε βάρος ἔχει τινὰ ἰσχὺν καθ' ἣν φέρεται κάτω, καὶ τὰ συνεχῆ πρὸς τὸ μὴ διασπᾶσθαι, ταῦτα δεῖ πρὸς ἄλληλα συμβάλλειν ἐὰν γὰρ ὑπερβάλλῃ ἡ ἰσχὺς ἡ τοῦ βάρους τῆς ἐν τῷ συνεχεῖ πρὸς τὴν διάσπασιν καὶ διαίρεσιν, βιάσεται κάτω θᾶττον, ἐὰν δὲ ἀσθενεστέρα ᾖ, ἐπιπολάσει.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν βαρέος καὶ κούφου καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτὰ συμβεβηκότων διωρίσθω τοῦτον ἡμῖν τὸν τρόπον.
�